OSN 8800 6800A 3800A V100R006C03 Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
V100R006C03
Installing, Operating and Maintaining

Your Network(For Field Engineer)
Issue 03
Date 2013-06-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network(For
Field Engineer) About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C03
OptiX OSN 6800A V100R006C03
OptiX OSN 3800A V100R006C03
iManager U2000 V100R006C00
iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R006C00
Intended Audience
This document provides guides to get the information about how to installing, perform initial
commissioning the products. This document also provides guides for routine operation on site.
This document is intended for:
l Field Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Symbol Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2013-6-30) Based on Product Version

V100R006C03
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
V100R006C03SPC500. Compared with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this
issue for OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A V100R006C03SPC500 provides the following
updates.
Update Description
3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 l OptiX OSN 8800 T32: Changed the maximum subrack power
Subrack and Power consumptiona from 3500 W to 4800 W.
Requirement l OptiX OSN 8800 T16: Changed the maximum subrack power
consumptiona from 1600 W to 2400 W.
8 Parts Replacement Added the step for enabling the board removal indication function
to the procedure for replacing a board supporting maintenance
blinking.
Updates for TL1 commands:

l None

V100R006C03
The update of contents is described as follows:
Update Description
9 Network l 9.1.2 Expanding NEs of Version V100R005 or Later When

Reconstruction the New Shelf Software Version Is Unknown: Modified the
capacity expansion flow.
l 9.2 Deleting Wavelengths: Added a description limiting the
number of wavelengths that can be deleted at a time.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Update Description
8 Parts Replacement l Revised the navigation structure by moving 8 Parts

Replacement from 7 Routine Operation On-site as a heading
1 title.
l 8.1.2 Impact on the System: Simplified the descriptions of the
impact on the system caused by board replacement.
l 8.1.5 Substitution Relationships: Simplified the descriptions of
the board replacement relationship.
l Added 8.2 Replacing an SCC Board with One of the Same
TNxx Version.
l Added 8.3 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different
TNxx Version.
Whole manual Added information about the TN15LSXL board.

l V100R006C03SPC500: None

V100R006C03
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Update Description
3 Quick View of l 3.1 Product Appearance and Highlights:

Product – Added the product appearance and highlights of OptiX OSN
8800 T16.
– Added the 100 Gbit/s system support for OptiX OSN
8800/6800A in the specifications.
l 3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement:
– 3.2.1.4 Cross-Connect Capacities: Added descriptions of
OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
– 3.2.2.4 Cross-Connect Capacities: Added descriptions of
OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
– Added descriptions of 3.2.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Subrack.
l 3.3 OptiX OSN 6800A Subrack and Power Requirement:
3.3.4 Cross-Connect Capacities: Added descriptions of OptiX
OSN 6800A.
l 3.6 Overview of Boards:
Added descriptions of 3.6.7 Introduction to Working Modes
of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards.
l 3.9 Housekeeping Alarms:
Added descriptions of OptiX OSN 8800 T16.
l 3.10.2 Management Interfaces and Connections of OptiX
OSN 8800/6800A: Added descriptions about OptiX OSN 8800
T16.
4 Node 4.5 PID: Added PID site configurations.

Configurations
6 Performing Initial l Modified configuring operations on the Web LCT according to

Web LCT the V100R006C00 version of the Web LCT.
Commissioning l 6.6 Configuring the TN52TOM Board On-site: Updated port
working modes for each scenario based on NMS GUI changes.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Update Description
7 Routine Operation l 7.1.3 Board Indicators: Added maintenance blinking mode for
On-site the STAT indicator.
l 8 Parts Replacement:
– Added the step for enabling the board removal indication
function to the procedure for replacing a board supporting
maintenance blinking.
– 8.1.5 Substitution Relationships: Added LOA, LSC, LSQ,
LTX, TN54TEM28, TN54TOA, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2,
TN53NS2, TN55NS3, TN53TDX, TN53TQX, TN55TQX,
TN54TSXL TN12M40, TN12M40V, TN12D40, TN14FIU,
WSMD9, TN11DAS1, TN13OAU1 boards.
– 8.2 Replacing an SCC Board with One of the Same TNxx
Version: Changed the indicator that is used to observe
database clearing status from the PROG indicator to the
STAT indicator. Added the methods of replacing the
TN16SCC board.
– 8.3 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different
TNxx Version: Changed the indicator that is used to observe
database clearing status from the PROG indicator to the
STAT indicator. Added the methods of replacing the
TN16SCC board.
– 8.4.1 Substitution Relationships: Added TNK4SXH and
TNK4XCT boards.
– Added 8.5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board.
– Added 8.6 Replacing the PID Board.
– 8.8.1 Substitution Relationship: Added TN16AUX board.
– 8.15 Replacing the Subrack: Added the methods of
replacing the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.
9 Network l Added 9.1 Expanding NEs by Adding Shelves.

Reconstruction l Added 9.2 Deleting Wavelengths.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Update Description
12 Technical l Added 12.3.5 LOA Specifications.

Specifications l Added 12.3.12 LSC Specifications.
l Added 12.3.13 LSQ Specifications.
l Added 12.3.18 LTX Specifications.
l 12.4.1 ND2 Specifications: Added descriptions of TN53ND2.
l 12.4.2 NQ2 Specifications: Added descriptions of TN53NQ2.
l 12.4.3 NS2 Specifications: Added descriptions of TN53NS2.
l 12.4.4 NS3 Specifications: Added descriptions of TN55NS3.
l 12.4.6 TDX Specifications: Added descriptions of TN53TDX.
l Added 12.4.7 TEM28 Specifications.
l Added 12.4.8 TOA Specifications.
l 12.4.12 TQX Specifications: Added descriptions of TN53TQX/
TN55TQX.
l 12.4.13 TSXL Specifications: Added descriptions of
TN53TSXL.
l Added 12.5 PID Unit Specifications.
l Added 12.6.2 SXH Specifications.
l 12.6.3 XCT Specifications: Added descriptions of TNK4XCT.
l Added 12.6.5 TN16XCH Specifications.
l 12.6.7 SCC Specifications: Added descriptions of TN16SCC.
l 12.6.8 AUX Specifications: Added descriptions of TN16AUX.
l 12.7.1 D40 Specifications: Added descriptions of TN12D40.
l 12.7.4 FIU Specifications: Added descriptions of TN14FIU.
l 12.7.6 M40 Specifications: Added descriptions of TN12M40.
l 12.7.7 M40V Specifications: Added descriptions of
TN12M40V.
l 12.10.4 OAU1 Specifications: Added descriptions of
TN13OAU1.
l 12.10.5 OBU1 Specifications: Added descriptions of
TN12OBU1P1.
l Added 12.10.7 RAU1 Specifications.
Whole manual l Added descriptions of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks.
l Added descriptions of the enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32
subracks.

l V100R006C03SPC300
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
Mode Command Description Impact
New ED-CFP New interfaces for New interfaces for

querying and setting querying and setting the
RTRV-CFP the attributes of a CFP attributes of a CFP object
object are provided. are available.
ED-40GETH New interfaces for New interfaces for

RTRV-40GETH the attributes of a attributes of a 40GETH
40GETH object are object are available.
provided.
ED-<ODU4TCMN> New interfaces for New interfaces for

RTRV- the attributes of an attributes of an
<ODU4TCMN> ODU4TCMN object ODU4TCMN object are
are provided. available.
CONN- New interfaces for 100GETH and 40GETH

TST-100GETH starting or stopping objects support Ethernet
Ethernet data frame data frame tests.
DISC- tests, querying
TST-100GETH Ethernet data frame
RTRV- test configurations and
TST-100GETH test results are
provided for
RTRV- 100GETH and
RSLT-100GETH 40GETH objects.
CONN-
TST-40GETH
DISC-TST-40GETH
RTRV-
TST-40GETH
RTRV-
RSLT-40GETH
OPR-LPBK-CFP New interfaces for Client-side optical ports of

performing loopback- 12LSC and 54TSXL
RLS-LPBK-CFP related operations at a boards support the
RTRV-LPBK-CFP multiplexing optical loopback function.
port are added. The
operations are: starting
a loopback, releasing a
loopback, and
querying loopback
settings.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
RTRV- Retrieves the alarm The input optical power

ALMTHRNG-CFP threshold range about alarm threshold range can
the input optical be retrieved.
power.
RTRV-PWR This command is used N/A

to retrieve optical
power.
RTRV-FECER- This command is used N/A

<OTU1/OTU2/ to retrieve the pre-FEC
OTU3/OTU5G/ and post-FEC BERs.
OTU4>
ED-ALMTH-CFP Retrieves the alarm The alarm threshold set for

threshold set for the the 12LSC and 54TSXL
RTRV-ALMTH- 12LSC and 54TSXL boards can be retrieved.
CFP boards.
RMV-CFP The interfaces enable CFP and 40GETH objects

CFP and 40GETH can enter or exit the
RMV-40GETH objects to enter or exit maintenance state.
RST-CFP the maintenance state.
RST-40GETH
RTRV-FFP-CFP Client 1+1 protection Client 1+1 protection can

can be used to protect be used to protect CFP
ENT-FFP-CFP CFP objects. objects.
DLT-FFP-CFP
ED-FFP-CFP
OPR-PROTNSW-
CFP
RLS-PROTNSW-
CFP
RMV-EC Electrical ports Electrical ports support

support the loopback the loopback function.
RST-EC function.
OPR-LPBK-EC
RLS-LPBK-EC
RTRV-LPBK-EC
ED-<HDSDIRBR/ The HDSDIRBR, The HDSDIRBR,

3GSDIRBR> 3GSDIRBR, and 3GSDIRBR, and
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
RTRV- CBR10G services are CBR10G services are

<HDSDIRBR/ added. added.
3GSDIRBR>
RTRV-COND-
<HDSDIRBR/
3GSDIRBR/
CBR10G>
RTRV-ALM-
<HDSDIRBR/
3GSDIRBR/
CBR10G>
RTRV-ATTR-
<HDSDIRBR/
3GSDIRBR/
CBR10G>
SET-ATTR-
<HDSDIRBR/
3GSDIRBR/
CBR10G>
Modifie ED-WDM New interfaces for New interfaces for

d querying and setting querying and setting the
RTRV-WDM the workmode and attributes of a
outpower of the WORKMODE and
amplifier board. New OUTPWR object are
interfaces for querying available. The amplifier
the actual maximum board support querying
threshold of the gain. the actual max threshold
of the gain.
ED- New interfaces for New interfaces for

{ODU0,ODU1,ODU querying and setting querying and setting the
2,ODU5G,ODU3,O whether the OTN rate attributes of an
DU4,ODUFLEX}: is adjustable. SPEEDCHG object are
available.
RTRV-
{ODU0,ODU1,ODU
2,ODU5G,ODU3,O
DU4,ODUFLEX}:
RTRV-OSPF-ALL The IMPORTDEFRT Default routes can be

parameter is added to imported.
ED-OSPF-SYS the command.
ED- The coefficient of the N/A

{OTU1,OTU2,OTU BEFECSDBER
3,OTU5G,OTU4} parameter value was
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
RTRV- an integer, but now it

{OTU1,OTU2,OTU can be a floating point
3,OTU5G,OTU4} number.
ED- The presentation of N/A

{ODU1,ODU2,ODU EXPPT, INCPT,
3,ODU5G,ODU4,O EXPVCPT, and
DUFLEX} INCVCPT is modified
and their values are
RTRV- hexadecimal numbers.
{ODU1,ODU2,ODU
3,ODU5G,ODU4,O
DUFLEX}
RTRV-HDR The user permission is The command levels are

changed from DEBUG changed to facilitate fault
to RTRV. location and fault
information collection.
ABT-COPY-END The user permission is
changed from DEBUG
to MAINT.
CHECK-DBMS- The user permission is

CFDB changed from DEBUG
to MAINT.
RTRV-ACL The user permission is

changed from MAINT
to RTRV.
RTRV- The user permission is

AUTOSYNC- changed from MAINT
ENABLE to RTRV.
RTRV-BACKUP- The user permission is

INFO changed from MAINT
to RTRV.
RTRV-BDVER- The user permission is

INFO changed from MAINT
to RTRV.
RTRV-CPUUSAGE The user permission is

changed from DEBUG
to SUPER.
RTRV-DIR-INFO The user permission is

changed from MAINT
to RTRV.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
RTRV-DX-EQPT The user permission is

changed from MAINT
to RTRV.
RTRV-ERRLOG The user permission is

changed from MAINT
to RTRV.

FREESPACE changed from MAINT
to RTRV.

QUELENALM- changed from DEBUG
STATE to RTRV.

SOFTAREANUM changed from DEBUG
to MAINT.
RTRV-SWDX- The user permission is

FRCD changed from MAINT
to RTRV.
RTRV-SWDX- The user permission is

LOCKOUT changed from MAINT
to RTRV.
RTRV-TEST-VER The user permission is

changed from DEBUG
to MAINT.
SET-CPUTESTSTA The user permission is

changed from DEBUG
to SUPER.
STA-NESOFT The user permission is

changed from DEBUG
to MAINT.
ED-LICENSE The user permission is

changed from SUPER
to PROV.
OPR-IPA The user permission is

changed from MAINT
to PROV.
OPR-OA-TST The user permission is

changed from MAINT
to PROV.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
DLT-SNMP- The user permission is

ACCESSIP changed from PROV
to SUPER.
DLT-SNMP- The user permission is

TRAPINFO changed from PROV
to SUPER.
ED-COM-SERVICE The user permission is

changed from MAINT
to SUPER.
ED-SNMP- The user permission is

to SUPER.

COMMUNITY changed from PROV
to SUPER.

TRAPINFO changed from PROV
to SUPER.
ENT-SNMP- The user permission is

to SUPER.
RTRV-COM- The user permission is

SERVICE changed from RTRV
to MAINT.
RTRV-NTP- The user permission is

AUTHPARA changed from RTRV
to MAINT.
RTRV-SNMP- The user permission is

ACCESSIP changed from RTRV
to SUPER.

COMMUNITY changed from RTRV
to SUPER.

TRAPINFO changed from RTRV
to SUPER.
RTRV-LOG- The user permission is

BYLEVEL changed from RTRV
to SUPER.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation

BYMOD changed from RTRV
to SUPER.

BYTIME changed from RTRV
to SUPER.
l V100R006C01SPC300
None
l V100R006C01SPC200
Modifi
cation
New RTRV-IPA-WDM This command is used None

to query the IPA
parameters of PID
boards, including IPA
on/off switch, IPA
restart mode, and laser
shutdown duration.
ED-IPA-WDM This command is used Users can run this

to set the IPA command to enable or
parameters for PID disable the IPA function,
boards, including IPA and specify the IPA restart
on/off switch, IPA mode and laser shutdown
restart mode, and laser duration for PID boards.
shutdown duration.
OPR-IPA-WDM This command is used This command can start

to manually start the the IPA function of PID
IPA function for PID boards only when the IPA
boards when the IPA restart mode is set to
restart mode is set to Manual. After users run
Manual. this command on a PID
board, the board software
will start the IPA function
to check whether the fiber
has been restored.
ACT-CFG-TEMP This command is used Users can quickly set the

to set service service package mode.
packages.
l V100R006C01SPC100
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
New RTRV-LEDSTATE These two commands Board-requiring-

are used to query and maintenance mode of the
ED-LEDSTATE set the board- STAT indicator can be
requiring- enabled or disabled.
maintenance mode.
When users enable the
board-requiring-
maintenance mode, the
STAT indicator blinks
green and the MIN
indicator in the
subrack housing the
board that is in need of
maintenance blinks
yellow. In addition, an
EQPT-MT alarm is
reported to the NMS.
OPR-LPBK- The ODUflex object is The ODUflex object is

ODUFLEX added to the command. added to the command.
RLS-LPBK-
ODUFLEX
RTRV-LPBK-
ODUFLEX
RMV-ODUFLEX
RST-ODUFLEX
SET-TH-ODUFLEX
RTRV-TH-
ODUFLEX
SET-TH- Six values are added to New values are added to

<TCMMOD2> the TCMMOD2 the TCMMOD2
parameter: parameter to specify the
RTRV-TH- ODU0TCM1 to TCM overheads for
<TCMMOD2> ODU0TCM6. The ODU0 services.
new values specify the
TCM overheads for
ODU0 services.
ENT-PXC-OCH The CONSTR Users can use the

parameter is added to CONSTR parameter to
the command. specify an optical port that
an optical cross-
connection must traverse.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
Modifie ENT-CRS-<MOD2> The TS parameter is The TS parameter is valid

d added to specify or only for ODUflex
RTRV-CRS- query the bandwidth services.
<MOD2> for ODUflex services.
The PLDRATE
parameter is added to
specify or query the
ODUflex service rate.
The PLDTYPE
ODUflex service type.
ED-OC The TSMODE The TSMODE parameter

ED-OCH parameter is added so determines the timeslot
users can choose the allocation mode.
RTRV-OC setting for the timeslot
RTRV-OCH allocation mode (fixed
mode or flexible
mode).
ED- The DEGINTERVAL The value of the

{OTU1,OTU2,OTU parameter is added to DEGINTERVAL
3,OTU5G,OTU4,OD specify or query the parameter determines the
U1,ODU2,ODU3,O intervals for detecting intervals at which DEG
DU5G,ODU4,ODU- DEG events. events are detected.
FLEX}
RTRV-
{OTU1,OTU2,OTU
3,OTU5G,OTU4,
ODU1,ODU2,ODU3
,ODU5G,ODU4,OD
UFLEX }
ED-CLNT The PLDTYPE The SD-HD-SDI service

parameter uses mode is supported.
3GHDSDI as a new
value to specify the
client service mode as
SD-HD-SDI.
ED-<TCMMOD2> The DEGINTERVAL The DEGINTERVAL

parameter is added to parameter determines the
specify or query the time for detecting DEG
intervals for detecting events.
DEG events. The default value is 1000
Six values are added to ms. New values are added
the TCMMOD2 to the TCMMOD2
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
RTRV- parameter: parameter to specify the

<TCMMOD2> ODUTCM1 to TCM overheads for
ODUOTCM6. The ODU0 services.
new values specify the
TCM overheads for
ODU0 services.
ENT-VLANSNCP- The SOURCEIP The SOURCEIP

PG parameter is added to parameter determines the
specify the IP address IP address for the source
for the source port in a port in a VLAN SNCP
VLAN SNCP protection group.
protection group.
RTRV- The TRAFFICMOD2 The SD-HD-SDI service

<TRAFFICMOD2> parameter uses mode is supported.
3GHDSDI as a new
value to specify the
client service mode as
SD-HD-SDI.
ED-WDM The The RLSTARTUPUPTH,

RLSTARTUPUPTH RLSTARTUPDOWNTH,
parameter is added to RLALMUPTH, and
specify or query the RLALMDOWNTH
upper threshold of parameters all indicate the
return loss for laser return loss settings.
startup. During the startup of a
The laser, if the detected return
RLSTARTUPDOWN loss exceeds the upper
TH parameter is added threshold, the laser will be
to specify or query the shut down to protect users.
lower threshold of If the detected return loss
return loss for laser is below the lower
startup. threshold, a return loss
low alarm is reported for
The RLALMUPTH notification purposes.
The RLENABLE
parameter determines
upper threshold of
whether to enable return
return loss alarms on
loss detection for a laser. If
lasers.
return loss detection is
The disabled, the system will
RLALMDOWNTH neither automatically shut
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
RTRV-WDM parameter is added to down the laser nor report

specify or query the any alarms related to
lower threshold of return loss.
return loss alarms on
lasers.
The RLENABLE
specify or query
whether return loss
detection is enabled for
lasers.
ED-EQPT The PWRTH The PWRTH parameter

parameter is added to specifies the power
RTRV-EQPT specify or query the consumption threshold for
power consumption a subrack. If the sum of the
threshold for subracks. standard power
consumption of all boards
in the subrack exceeds the
specified threshold, the
system will report a power
high alarm. If this occurs,
users are not allowed to
add more logical boards to
the subrack.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
ENT-ETHLINK The LPTENABLE -

specify or query
whether the link from
the source to the sink
of a service is in pass-
through state.
The BANDWIDTH
parameter is added.
ENT-FLOW The LABEL parameter -

is added to specify
labels for MPLS
services.
ENT-LAG The –
LAGSHAREMODE
ED-LAG parameter is added to
specify the type of
algorithm for
calculating LAG load-
sharing bandwidth.
The LAGHOTIME
specify the hold-off
time for LAG
protection switching.
l V100R006C00SPC300
None
l V100R006C00SPC100
Modifi
cation
New ED-OTU4 New interfaces for New interfaces for

RTRV-OTU4 the attributes of an attributes of an OTU4
OTU4 object are object are available.
provided.
ED-ODU4 New interfaces for New interfaces for

RTRV-ODU4 the attributes of an attributes of an ODU4
ODU4 object are object are available.
provided.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xx

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Modifi
cation
CONN-TST-OTU4 New interfaces for OTU4 objects support

starting or stopping PRBS tests.
DISC-TST-OTU4 PRBS tests, and for
RTRV-TST-OTU4 querying PRBS test
configurations and test
RTRV-RSLT-OTU4 results are provided for
OTU4 objects.
ED-IBQDR New interfaces for The interfaces for

ED-CBR10G the attributes of attributes of IBQDR,
ED-CPRI1 IBQDR, CBR10G, CBR10G, CPRI1, CPRI2,
CPRI1, CPRI2, and and CPRI3 service objects
ED-CPRI2 CPRI3 service objects are available.
are provided.
ED-CPRI3
RTRV-IBQDR
RTRV-CBR10G
RTRV-CPRI1
RTRV-CPRI2
RTRV-CPRI3
OPR-LPBK-WDM New interfaces for Client-side optical ports

performing loopback- on 100G service boards
RLS-LPBK-WDM related operations at a support the loopback
RTRV-LPBK-WDM multiplexing optical function.
port are added. The
operations are: starting
a loopback, releasing a
loopback, and
querying loopback
settings.
RMV-WDM The interfaces enable WDM, OTU4, and ODU4

WDM, OTU4, and objects can enter or exit
RMV-OTU4 ODU4 objects to enter the maintenance state.
RMV-ODU4 or exit the maintenance
state.
RST-WDM
RST-OTU4
RST-ODU4
Modifie ED-WDM The ALS function is Client-side optical ports

d new at a multiplex on 100G service boards
RTRV-WDM port. have the ALS function.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

V100R005C00
Update Description
A TL1 l A.7.4 ENT-WMU-CONN, A.7.5 DLT-WMU-CONN and A.7.6

Command RTRV-WMU-CONN: Changed the command description from
Reference "Creates/Retrieves/Deletes logical connections between the WMU
and OTU" to "Creates/Retrieves/Deletes the monitoring mapping for
the wavelengths between the WMU and OTU".
l A.15.3.7 OPR-ALC-NODE: Changed the command description
from "Retrieves the information of an ALC node" to "Samples the
ALC reference value".
l A.20.7 RTRV-ALMTHRNG-<MOD2>: Changed the command
description from "Queries the ranges of the threshold-crossing alarms
(TCA)" to "Queries the alarm threshold range for input optical
power".

V100R005C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A V100R005C00.
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Obtaining Latest Technical Documentation ...........................................................................1
2 Compliance and Safety.................................................................................................................2
2.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................................4
2.2 Alarm and Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................................6
2.3 Electrical Safety..............................................................................................................................................................6
2.4 Inflammable Environment..............................................................................................................................................9
2.5 Battery............................................................................................................................................................................9
2.5.1 Storage Battery............................................................................................................................................................9
2.5.2 Lithium Battery..........................................................................................................................................................11
2.6 Laser.............................................................................................................................................................................12
2.7 Short Circuit.................................................................................................................................................................15
2.8 ESD...............................................................................................................................................................................15
2.9 Working at Heights.......................................................................................................................................................16
2.9.1 Lifting Heavy Objects...............................................................................................................................................17
2.9.2 Using Ladders............................................................................................................................................................18
2.10 Equipment Safety.......................................................................................................................................................19
2.11 Working on Equipment with Power Applied.............................................................................................................20
2.12 Miscellaneous.............................................................................................................................................................21
3 Quick View of Product...............................................................................................................24

3.1 Product Appearance and Highlights.............................................................................................................................25
3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement....................................................................................................29
3.2.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack..................................................................................................................................29
3.2.1.1 Structure..................................................................................................................................................................29
3.2.1.2 Slot Description......................................................................................................................................................32
3.2.1.3 Management Interfaces...........................................................................................................................................33
3.2.1.4 Cross-Connect Capacities.......................................................................................................................................34
3.2.1.5 Fan and Heat Baffle................................................................................................................................................35
3.2.1.6 Power Consumption...............................................................................................................................................39
3.2.1.7 Power Requirement................................................................................................................................................41
3.2.2.1 Structure..................................................................................................................................................................44
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

3.2.3.1 Structure..................................................................................................................................................................61
3.3 OptiX OSN 6800A Subrack and Power Requirement..................................................................................................76
3.3.1 Structure.....................................................................................................................................................................76
3.3.2 Slot Description.........................................................................................................................................................78
3.3.3 Management Interfaces..............................................................................................................................................78
3.3.4 Cross-Connect Capacities..........................................................................................................................................80
3.3.5 Fan and Heat Baffle...................................................................................................................................................81
3.3.6 Power Consumption..................................................................................................................................................86
3.3.7 Power Requirement...................................................................................................................................................88
3.4 OptiX OSN 3800A Chassis and Power Requirement..................................................................................................91
3.4.1 Chassis Structure.......................................................................................................................................................91
3.4.2 Slot Description.........................................................................................................................................................94
3.4.3 Management Interfaces..............................................................................................................................................95
3.4.4 Fan.............................................................................................................................................................................96
3.4.5 AC Power Consumption............................................................................................................................................99
3.4.6 AC Power Requirement...........................................................................................................................................100
3.4.7 DC Power Consumption..........................................................................................................................................103
3.4.8 DC Power Requirement...........................................................................................................................................104
3.5 Frame..........................................................................................................................................................................106
3.5.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module...............................................................................................................................107
3.5.2 CRPC Frame............................................................................................................................................................110
3.6 Overview of Boards....................................................................................................................................................111
3.6.1 Appearance and Dimensions...................................................................................................................................111
3.6.2 Symbols on Boards..................................................................................................................................................113
3.6.3 Bar Code Overview.................................................................................................................................................114
3.6.4 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category...........................................................................................................................117
3.6.5 OptiX OSN 6800A Board Category........................................................................................................................124
3.6.6 OptiX OSN 3800A Board Category........................................................................................................................128
3.6.7 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards......................................................131
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.6.7.1 Convergence and Non-convergence Applications of Tributary Boards...............................................................131

3.6.7.2 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode.................................................................................................................132
3.6.8 Types of Pluggable Module.....................................................................................................................................141
3.6.9 Fixed Optical Attenuator ........................................................................................................................................143
3.7 Quick Reference Table of the Units...........................................................................................................................144
3.7.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards .........................................................................................144
3.7.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side.............................................................................144
3.7.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side.....................................................................................171
3.7.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification....................................................................................................................184
3.7.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards..................................................................................................................186
3.7.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio..........................................................................................................................189
3.7.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ...............................................................................190
3.7.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..........................................................................194
3.7.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ..............................................................................197
3.7.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..............................................................199
3.8 Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards.....................................................................................................202
3.9 Housekeeping Alarms.................................................................................................................................................265
3.9.1 OptiX OSN 8800 Housekeeping Alarm and Control Interfaces.............................................................................265
3.9.2 OptiX OSN 6800A Housekeeping Alarm and Control Interfaces...........................................................................272
3.9.3 OptiX OSN 3800A Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces..............................................................................................274
3.10 Network Management..............................................................................................................................................276
3.10.1 Network Cable and Serial Cable...........................................................................................................................277
3.10.2 Management Interfaces and Connections of OptiX OSN 8800/6800A.................................................................281
3.10.2.1 Interfaces............................................................................................................................................................281
3.10.2.2 Connections........................................................................................................................................................289
3.10.3 Management Interfaces and Connections of OptiX OSN 3800A..........................................................................291
3.10.3.1 Interfaces............................................................................................................................................................292
3.10.3.2 Connections........................................................................................................................................................294
3.10.4 Management Connections among OSN8800&6800A&3800A............................................................................296
4 Node Configurations................................................................................................................298
4.1 80 Wavelength Configuration....................................................................................................................................299
4.1.1 OTM........................................................................................................................................................................299
4.1.1.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................299
4.1.1.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................299
4.1.1.3 Subrack Connections............................................................................................................................................301
4.1.2 Back to Back OTM..................................................................................................................................................303
4.1.2.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................303
4.1.2.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................304
4.1.3 1 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................308
4.1.3.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................308
4.1.3.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................309
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

4.1.4 2 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................312
4.1.4.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................312
4.1.4.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................314
4.1.5 3 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................317
4.1.5.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................317
4.1.5.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................320
4.1.6 4 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................323
4.1.6.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................323
4.1.6.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................326
4.1.7 Electrical Regenerator.............................................................................................................................................329
4.1.7.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................329
4.1.7.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................330
4.2 40 Wavelength Configuration....................................................................................................................................334
4.2.1 OTM........................................................................................................................................................................334
4.2.1.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................334
4.2.1.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................334
4.2.2 Back to Back OTM..................................................................................................................................................337
4.2.2.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................337
4.2.2.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................337
4.2.3 1 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................341
4.2.3.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................341
4.2.3.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................342
4.2.4 2 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................344
4.2.4.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................345
4.2.4.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................346
4.2.5 3 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................349
4.2.5.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................350
4.2.5.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................352
4.2.6 4 Degree ROADM...................................................................................................................................................355
4.2.6.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................356
4.2.6.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................358
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.2.7 Electrical Regenerator.............................................................................................................................................361

4.2.7.1 Signal Flow...........................................................................................................................................................362
4.2.7.2 Subrack Layout.....................................................................................................................................................363
4.3 OLA............................................................................................................................................................................366
4.3.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................366
4.3.2 Subrack Layout........................................................................................................................................................366
4.3.3 Subrack Connections...............................................................................................................................................367
4.4 Less Than 40-Wavelength FOADM Configuration...................................................................................................368
4.4.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................368
4.4.2 Subrack Layout........................................................................................................................................................369
4.5 PID..............................................................................................................................................................................372
4.5.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................372
4.5.2 Subrack Layout........................................................................................................................................................373
4.6 8-Wavelength CWDM Configuration........................................................................................................................377
4.6.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................................................377
4.6.2 Subrack Layout........................................................................................................................................................378
5 Quick Installation Guide.........................................................................................................380

6 Performing Initial Web LCT Commissioning.....................................................................381
6.1 Initial Commissioning Flow.......................................................................................................................................383
6.2 Connecting NEs to the Web LCT...............................................................................................................................384
6.2.1 Installing the Web LCT...........................................................................................................................................384
6.2.2 Connecting to NEs...................................................................................................................................................386
6.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT....................................................................................................................................386
6.3 Configuring NE Attributes.........................................................................................................................................387
6.3.1 Searching and Adding NEs......................................................................................................................................387
6.3.2 Logging In to an NE................................................................................................................................................389
6.3.3 Setting NE TIDs......................................................................................................................................................389
6.3.4 Setting NE IP Addresses..........................................................................................................................................389
6.3.5 Configuring Master-Slave Subracks........................................................................................................................390
6.4 Checking Board Slots.................................................................................................................................................391
6.5 Configuring the TN11TOM Board On-site................................................................................................................393
6.5.1 Working Mode and Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................393
6.5.2 Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading).......................................................................................................393
6.5.3 Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)................................................................................................396
6.5.4 Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading)................................................................................................401
6.5.5 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).........................................................................................404
6.5.6 Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board)..................................................................407
6.6 Configuring the TN52TOM Board On-site................................................................................................................412
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxvii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
6.6.1 Working Mode and Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................412

6.6.4 Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).........................................................................................421
6.6.5 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (non-cascading)...............................................................................................................425
6.6.6 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading)...............................................428
6.6.7 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (non-cascading).........................432
6.6.8 Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading).......................................................................................437
6.6.9 Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (non-cascading)................................................................................................443
6.6.10 Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (non-cascading)........................................................446
6.7 Configuring the OA Boards........................................................................................................................................450
6.8 Checking NE Communication Status.........................................................................................................................450
6.9 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board........................................................................................................451
6.10 Exiting the Web LCT...............................................................................................................................................452
7 Routine Operation On-site......................................................................................................453

7.1 Getting to Know Indicators........................................................................................................................................454
7.1.1 Subrack Indicator.....................................................................................................................................................454
7.1.2 Chassis Indicators....................................................................................................................................................454
7.1.3 Board Indicators......................................................................................................................................................455
7.1.4 Fan Indicator............................................................................................................................................................459
7.1.5 PIU Indicator...........................................................................................................................................................460
7.2 Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter.........................................................................................460
7.3 Checking Fiber Jumpers by Using an Optical Power Meter......................................................................................461
7.4 Inserting and Removing Fiber Jumpers......................................................................................................................463
7.4.1 Inserting the LC/PC Fiber Connector......................................................................................................................464
7.4.2 Removing the LC/PC Fiber Connector...................................................................................................................465
7.4.3 Inserting the LSH/APC Fiber Connector.................................................................................................................467
7.4.4 Removing the LSH/APC Fiber Connector..............................................................................................................468
7.4.5 Inserting the FC/PC Fiber Connector......................................................................................................................470
7.4.6 Removing the FC/PC Fiber Connector....................................................................................................................471
7.4.7 Inserting the SC/PC Fiber Connector......................................................................................................................472
7.4.8 Removing the SC/PC Fiber Connector....................................................................................................................473
7.5 Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors..............................................................................................474
7.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................475
7.5.2 Protection of Optical Connectors............................................................................................................................476
7.5.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials.............................................................................................................................477
7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors.................................................................................................................................479
7.5.5 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners................................................................................482
7.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue...........................................................................................485
7.5.7 Cleaning Optical Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks.....................................................................................487
7.6 Performing Hardware Loopback................................................................................................................................489
7.7 Reset a Board..............................................................................................................................................................489
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxviii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7.7.1 Performing a Warm Reset on the Board..................................................................................................................490

7.7.2 Performing a Cold Reset on the Board....................................................................................................................491
8 Parts Replacement.....................................................................................................................493
8.1 General Guide for Replacing a Board........................................................................................................................495
8.1.1 Prerequisite..............................................................................................................................................................495
8.1.2 Impact on the System..............................................................................................................................................495
8.1.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials.............................................................................................................................497
8.1.4 Precautions...............................................................................................................................................................497
8.1.5 Substitution Relationships.......................................................................................................................................500
8.1.5.1 Optical Transponder Boards.................................................................................................................................500
8.1.5.2 Tributary and Line Boards....................................................................................................................................502
8.1.5.3 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Boards...................................................................................................505
8.1.5.4 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Boards........................................................................................................507
8.1.5.5 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Boards...............................................................................507
8.1.5.6 Optical Amplifier Boards.....................................................................................................................................507
8.1.5.7 Optical Supervisory Channel Boards...................................................................................................................508
8.1.5.8 Optical Protection Boards.....................................................................................................................................508
8.1.5.9 Spectrum Analyzer Boards...................................................................................................................................508
8.1.5.10 Variable Optical Attenuator Boards...................................................................................................................508
8.1.5.11 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Boards.............................................................................................508
8.1.5.12 Clock Board........................................................................................................................................................508
8.1.6 Procedure for Replacing a Board.............................................................................................................................508
8.2 Replacing an SCC Board with One of the Same TNxx Version................................................................................514
8.2.1 Setting the Jumper and DIP Switch on the SCC Board...........................................................................................515
8.2.2 Replacing the Protected SCC in a Master Subrack.................................................................................................519
8.2.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC in a Master Subrack.............................................................................................523
8.2.3.1 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from the NMS (NE Is Unreachable)....................................524
8.2.3.2 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from a CF Card (NE Is Unreachable)..................................531
8.2.3.3 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to the NMS (NE Is Reachable)............................................538
8.2.3.4 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to a CF Card (NE Is Reachable)..........................................546
8.2.3.5 Replacing the SCC After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection................................................................................554
8.2.4 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack.........................................................................................................558
8.3 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different TNxx Version............................................................................561
8.3.2 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack.......................................................................................561
8.3.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack..................................................................................566
8.3.3.1 Replacing the SCC with the Database Backed Up to the NMS...........................................................................566
8.3.3.2 Replacing the SCC with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card.........................................................................574
8.3.3.3 Replacing the Board After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection..............................................................................583
8.3.4 Replacing the SCC in a Slave Subrack....................................................................................................................586
8.4 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board...........................................................................................................................589
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
8.4.2 Under Board 1+1 Protection....................................................................................................................................590

8.4.3 Under No Protection................................................................................................................................................592
8.5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board.................................................................................................................................593
8.5.1 Setting the Jumper and DIP Switch on the TN16XCH Board................................................................................594
8.5.2 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Master Subrack............................................................................................595
8.5.3 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Slave Subrack...............................................................................................597
8.6 Replacing the PID Board............................................................................................................................................600
8.6.1 Replacing the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E Board............................................................................................................600
8.6.1.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection............................................................................................................................600
8.6.1.2 Under No Protection.............................................................................................................................................603
8.6.2 Replacing the PQ2 Sub-board.................................................................................................................................605
8.6.2.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection............................................................................................................................605
8.6.2.2 Under No Protection.............................................................................................................................................607
8.7 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board......................................................................................................................609
8.8 Replacing the AUX Board..........................................................................................................................................611
8.8.1 Substitution Relationship.........................................................................................................................................611
8.8.2 Under AUX 1+1 Protection.....................................................................................................................................611
8.8.3 Under No Protection................................................................................................................................................613
8.9 Replacing the DCM....................................................................................................................................................614
8.10 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module.................................................................................................................615
8.11 Replacing the EFI Board..........................................................................................................................................617
8.12 Replacing the PIU Board..........................................................................................................................................618
8.13 Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly............................................................................................................................621
8.14 Replacing the Air Filter............................................................................................................................................622
8.15 Replacing the Subrack..............................................................................................................................................624
9 Network Reconstruction..........................................................................................................633
9.1 Expanding NEs by Adding Shelves............................................................................................................................634
9.1.1 Expanding NEs of Version V100R005 or Later When the New Shelf Software Version Is V100R005 or Later
..........................................................................................................................................................................................634
9.1.1.1 Expansion Flow....................................................................................................................................................634
9.1.1.2 Connecting the Master and Slave Shelves with Network Cables.........................................................................635
9.1.1.3 Powering On the Slave Shelf................................................................................................................................635
9.1.1.4 Checking the New Shelf ID..................................................................................................................................636
9.1.1.5 Uploading NE Data to the U2000.........................................................................................................................637
9.1.1.6 Removing an Unneeded Logical Slave Shelf on the U2000................................................................................638
9.1.1.7 Validation.............................................................................................................................................................639
9.1.2 Expanding NEs of Version V100R005 or Later When the New Shelf Software Version Is Unknown..................639
9.1.2.1 Expansion Flow....................................................................................................................................................639
9.1.2.2 Upgrading the TN51SCC Software of the New Shelf to V100R005C00 or Later...............................................640
9.1.2.3 Connecting the Master and Slave Shelves with Network Cables.........................................................................642
9.1.2.4 Powering On the New Shelf and Clearing the SCC Software and Database.......................................................642
9.1.2.5 Powering On the Slave Shelf................................................................................................................................643
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxx

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
9.1.2.6 Checking the New Shelf ID..................................................................................................................................643

9.1.2.7 Uploading NE Data to the U2000.........................................................................................................................645
9.1.2.8 Removing an Unneeded Logical Slave Shelf on the U2000................................................................................645
9.1.2.9 Validation.............................................................................................................................................................645
9.2 Deleting Wavelengths.................................................................................................................................................645
9.2.1 Operation Flow........................................................................................................................................................645
9.2.2 Searching for Associated Trails...............................................................................................................................646
9.2.3 Checking the Optical Power on Associated Trails..................................................................................................648
9.2.3.1 Disabling the OTU Line-Side Lasers at Both Ends of the Wavelength to Be Deleted........................................648
9.2.3.2 Checking the Optical Power on Associated Trails...............................................................................................650
9.2.3.3 Optimization (Optional).......................................................................................................................................652
9.2.4 Deleting Logical Trails............................................................................................................................................654
9.2.4.1 Deleting Logical Trails for the Wavelengths........................................................................................................654
9.2.4.2 Disabling MCA/OPM8 Monitoring on the Deleted Wavelength.........................................................................655
9.2.4.3 Checking Whether the APE Unbalance Event Is Reported..................................................................................656
9.2.4.4 Starting APE Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................657
9.2.4.5 Querying Performance Events to Check Whether the APE Adjustment Is Successful........................................657
10 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of DWDM System ................................659

11 Nominal Central Wavelengths of CWDM System...........................................................661
12 Technical Specifications.........................................................................................................662
12.1 General Specifications..............................................................................................................................................664
12.1.1 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack Specifications.............................................................................................................664
12.1.2 OptiX OSN 6800A Subrack Specifications...........................................................................................................668
12.1.3 OptiX OSN 3800A Chassis Specification.............................................................................................................672
12.1.4 DCM Frame Specifications...................................................................................................................................674
12.1.5 CRPC Frame Specification....................................................................................................................................674
12.1.6 Fan-Tray Assembly Specifications........................................................................................................................675
12.2 Laser Class................................................................................................................................................................677
12.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications.................................................................................................................678
12.3.1 L4G Specifications................................................................................................................................................679
12.3.2 LDX Specifications...............................................................................................................................................683
12.3.3 LEM24 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................688
12.3.4 LEX4 Specifications..............................................................................................................................................695
12.3.5 LOA Specifications...............................................................................................................................................700
12.3.6 LOG Specifications...............................................................................................................................................714
12.3.7 LOM Specifications...............................................................................................................................................726
12.3.8 LQG Specifications...............................................................................................................................................739
12.3.9 LQM Specifications...............................................................................................................................................745
12.3.10 LQMD Specifications..........................................................................................................................................754
12.3.11 LQMS Specifications..........................................................................................................................................761
12.3.12 LSC Specifications..............................................................................................................................................769
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.3.13 LSQ Specifications..............................................................................................................................................775

12.3.14 LSX Specifications..............................................................................................................................................778
12.3.15 LSXL Specifications............................................................................................................................................787
12.3.16 LSXLR Specifications.........................................................................................................................................791
12.3.17 LSXR Specifications...........................................................................................................................................793
12.3.18 LTX Specifications..............................................................................................................................................796
12.3.19 LWXS Specifications..........................................................................................................................................800
12.3.20 TMX Specifications.............................................................................................................................................807
12.3.21 Jitter Transfer Characteristics..............................................................................................................................818
12.3.22 Input Jitter Tolerance...........................................................................................................................................819
12.3.23 Output Jitter.........................................................................................................................................................820
12.4 Tributary Unit and Line Unit Specifications............................................................................................................821
12.4.1 ND2 Specifications................................................................................................................................................821
12.4.2 NQ2 Specifications................................................................................................................................................828
12.4.3 NS2 Specifications................................................................................................................................................832
12.4.4 NS3 Specifications................................................................................................................................................840
12.4.5 TBE Specifications................................................................................................................................................846
12.4.6 TDX Specifications...............................................................................................................................................851
12.4.7 TEM28 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................855
12.4.8 TOA Specifications...............................................................................................................................................858
12.4.9 TOG Specifications...............................................................................................................................................867
12.4.10 TOM Specifications.............................................................................................................................................870
12.4.11 TQM Specifications.............................................................................................................................................883
12.4.12 TQX Specifications.............................................................................................................................................889
12.4.13 TSXL Specifications............................................................................................................................................893
12.5 PID Unit Specifications............................................................................................................................................896
12.5.1 ENQ2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................897
12.5.2 NPO2 Specifications..............................................................................................................................................897
12.5.3 NPO2E Specifications...........................................................................................................................................899
12.6 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board Specifications........................................................901
12.6.1 SXM Specifications...............................................................................................................................................901
12.6.2 SXH Specifications................................................................................................................................................902
12.6.3 XCT Specifications................................................................................................................................................903
12.6.4 TN52XCH Specifications......................................................................................................................................903
12.6.5 TN16XCH Specifications......................................................................................................................................904
12.6.6 XCS Specifications................................................................................................................................................904
12.6.7 SCC Specifications................................................................................................................................................905
12.6.8 AUX Specifications...............................................................................................................................................906
12.7 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit Specifications............................................................................906
12.7.1 D40 Specifications.................................................................................................................................................906
12.7.2 D40V Specifications..............................................................................................................................................908
12.7.3 DFIU Specifications..............................................................................................................................................909
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.7.4 FIU Specifications.................................................................................................................................................910

12.7.5 ITL Specifications.................................................................................................................................................911
12.7.6 M40 Specifications................................................................................................................................................912
12.7.7 M40V Specifications.............................................................................................................................................913
12.8 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit Specifications.................................................................................915
12.8.1 CMR1 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................915
12.8.4 DMR1 Specifications............................................................................................................................................919
12.8.5 MR2 Specifications...............................................................................................................................................920
12.8.8 MR8V Specifications............................................................................................................................................928
12.8.9 SBM2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................931
12.9 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Specifications...............................................................932
12.9.1 RDU9 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................932
12.9.2 RMU9 Specifications............................................................................................................................................933
12.9.3 ROAM Specifications............................................................................................................................................934
12.9.4 WSD9 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................935
12.9.5 WSM9 Specifications............................................................................................................................................937
12.9.6 WSMD2 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................938
12.10 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications....................................................................................................................942
12.10.1 CRPC Specifications...........................................................................................................................................942
12.10.2 DAS1 Specifications............................................................................................................................................943
12.10.3 HBA Specifications.............................................................................................................................................945
12.10.4 OAU1 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................946
12.10.5 OBU1 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................955
12.10.6 OBU2 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................957
12.10.7 RAU1 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................959
12.11 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications..................................................................................................962
12.11.1 HSC1 Specifications............................................................................................................................................962
12.11.2 SC1 Specifications...............................................................................................................................................963
12.11.3 SC2 Specifications...............................................................................................................................................964
12.11.4 ST2 Specifications...............................................................................................................................................965
12.12 Clock Unit Specifications.......................................................................................................................................966
12.12.1 STG Specifications..............................................................................................................................................966
12.13 Optical Protection Unit Specifications...................................................................................................................966
12.13.1 DCP Specifications..............................................................................................................................................966
12.13.2 OLP Specifications..............................................................................................................................................967
12.13.3 SCS Specifications..............................................................................................................................................968
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.14 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications.................................................................................................................969

12.14.1 MCA4 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................969
12.14.2 MCA8 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................970
12.14.3 OPM8 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................971
12.14.4 WMU Specifications...........................................................................................................................................972
12.15 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications....................................................................................................973
12.15.1 VA1 Specifications..............................................................................................................................................973
12.15.2 VA4 Specifications..............................................................................................................................................973
12.16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board Specifications.................................................................974
12.16.1 GFU Specifications..............................................................................................................................................974
12.16.2 DCU Specifications.............................................................................................................................................975
12.16.3 TDC Specifications..............................................................................................................................................976
12.17 DCM Specifications ..............................................................................................................................................977
A TL1 Command Reference........................................................................................................981

A.1 TL1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................984
A.1.1 Input Command Messages......................................................................................................................................984
A.1.2 Acknowledgments..................................................................................................................................................985
A.1.3 Output Response Messages....................................................................................................................................986
A.1.4 Autonomous Messages...........................................................................................................................................989
A.2 Configuring NE.........................................................................................................................................................991
A.2.1 ED-DAT.................................................................................................................................................................991
A.2.2 RTRV-DAT............................................................................................................................................................992
A.2.3 ED-DST..................................................................................................................................................................994
A.2.4 RTRV-DST.............................................................................................................................................................996
A.2.5 ED-SYS..................................................................................................................................................................997
A.2.6 RTRV-SYS...........................................................................................................................................................1000
A.2.7 RTRV-HDR..........................................................................................................................................................1003
A.2.8 RTRV-HEALTH-STATE.....................................................................................................................................1004
A.2.9 RTRV-LOCALIZATION.....................................................................................................................................1005
A.2.10 RTRV-NETYPE.................................................................................................................................................1006
A.2.11 RTRV-TOD........................................................................................................................................................1008
A.2.12 SET-SID.............................................................................................................................................................1009
A.3 Configuring DCC.....................................................................................................................................................1010
A.3.1 ED-<GCC/DCC>..................................................................................................................................................1010
A.3.2 RTRV-<GCC/DCC>............................................................................................................................................1013
A.3.3 RTRV-DETAIL-<GCC/DCC>.............................................................................................................................1016
A.3.4 RTRV-DCC-CHANERR......................................................................................................................................1019
A.3.5 RTRV-DCC-CHANINFO....................................................................................................................................1021
A.3.6 DLT-CRS-OHBYTE............................................................................................................................................1023
A.3.7 ENT-CRS-OHBYTE............................................................................................................................................1024
A.3.8 RTRV-CRS-OHBYTE.........................................................................................................................................1025
A.3.9 ED-VACANTSLOT.............................................................................................................................................1026
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxiv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.3.10 RTRV-VACANTSLOT......................................................................................................................................1027
A.4 Communication Management..................................................................................................................................1028
A.4.1 Configuring VLAN...............................................................................................................................................1028
A.4.1.1 ED-LAN............................................................................................................................................................1029
A.4.1.2 DLT-ACL..........................................................................................................................................................1031
A.4.1.3 ED-ACL.............................................................................................................................................................1032
A.4.1.4 ENT-ACL..........................................................................................................................................................1033
A.4.1.5 RTRV-ACL.......................................................................................................................................................1034
A.4.1.6 RTRV-LAN.......................................................................................................................................................1035
A.4.1.7 ED-COM-SERVICE..........................................................................................................................................1037
A.4.1.8 RTRV-COM-SERVICE....................................................................................................................................1038
A.4.1.9 ACT-SSL-CAFILE............................................................................................................................................1039
A.4.1.10 ED-SSL-MODE...............................................................................................................................................1040
A.4.1.11 RTRV-SSL-MODE.........................................................................................................................................1041
A.4.1.12 ED-SSL-ENCRYPTION.................................................................................................................................1042
A.4.1.13 RTRV-SSL-ENCRYPTION............................................................................................................................1043
A.4.1.14 ED-ADVANCED-ACL...................................................................................................................................1044
A.4.1.15 ENT-ADVANCED-ACL................................................................................................................................1045
A.4.1.16 RTRV-ADVANCED-ACL..............................................................................................................................1047
A.4.1.17 DLT-ADVANCED-ACL................................................................................................................................1049
A.4.2 Enquire PPP/IP Interface Information..................................................................................................................1050
A.4.2.1 RTRV-IPIF-INFO..............................................................................................................................................1050
A.4.2.2 RTRV-PPPIF-COUNT......................................................................................................................................1051
A.4.2.3 RTRV-PPPIF-STATE.......................................................................................................................................1052
A.4.2.4 RTRV-ROUTE-INFO.......................................................................................................................................1054
A.4.3 Configuring FTP...................................................................................................................................................1055
A.4.3.1 ED-FTP..............................................................................................................................................................1055
A.4.3.2 RTRV-FTP........................................................................................................................................................1057
A.4.4 Configuring Serial................................................................................................................................................1058
A.4.4.1 ED-SERIAL.......................................................................................................................................................1058
A.4.4.2 RTRV-SERIAL.................................................................................................................................................1059
A.4.5 Configuring IP......................................................................................................................................................1061
A.4.5.1 DLT-TIDIPMAP...............................................................................................................................................1061
A.4.5.2 ENT-TIDIPMAP...............................................................................................................................................1062
A.4.5.3 RTRV-TIDIPMAP............................................................................................................................................1063
A.4.5.4 DLT-IPROUTE-STATIC..................................................................................................................................1064
A.4.5.5 ENT-IPROUTE-STATIC..................................................................................................................................1065
A.4.5.6 RTRV-IPROUTE-STATIC...............................................................................................................................1066
A.4.5.7 RTRV-IPROUTE..............................................................................................................................................1068
A.4.5.8 RTRV-STAT-TCP.............................................................................................................................................1069
A.4.5.9 RTRV-TCPIP-INFO..........................................................................................................................................1071
A.4.5.10 IP-PING...........................................................................................................................................................1072
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.5.11 IP-TRACERT..................................................................................................................................................1073
A.4.6 Configure OSI.......................................................................................................................................................1075
A.4.6.1 RTRV-OSI-ADJS..............................................................................................................................................1075
A.4.6.2 ED-OSI-DCC.....................................................................................................................................................1076
A.4.6.3 ENT-OSI-DLTUNNEL.....................................................................................................................................1077
A.4.6.4 DLT-OSI-DLTUNNEL.....................................................................................................................................1078
A.4.7 Configuring OSPF................................................................................................................................................1079
A.4.7.1 ED-OSPF-DCC..................................................................................................................................................1079
A.4.7.2 ED-OSPF-LAN..................................................................................................................................................1081
A.4.7.3 ED-OSPF-SYS..................................................................................................................................................1082
A.4.7.4 RTRV-OSPF-ALL.............................................................................................................................................1084
A.4.8 Configuring NTP..................................................................................................................................................1086
A.4.8.1 DLT-NTP-ACCTL............................................................................................................................................1086
A.4.8.2 ENT-NTP-ACCTL............................................................................................................................................1087
A.4.8.3 RTRV-NTP-ACCTL.........................................................................................................................................1088
A.4.8.4 DLT-NTP-AUTHPARA....................................................................................................................................1090
A.4.8.5 ED-NTP-AUTHPARA......................................................................................................................................1091
A.4.8.6 ENT-NTP-AUTHPARA....................................................................................................................................1092
A.4.8.7 RTRV-NTP-AUTHPARA.................................................................................................................................1093
A.4.8.8 DLT-NTP-SERVER..........................................................................................................................................1095
A.4.8.9 ENT-NTP-SERVER..........................................................................................................................................1096
A.4.8.10 RTRV-NTP-SERVER.....................................................................................................................................1097
A.4.8.11 ED-NTP-SYS..................................................................................................................................................1099
A.4.8.12 RTRV-NTP-SYS.............................................................................................................................................1100
A.4.8.13 RTRV-NTP-STATUSINFO............................................................................................................................1101
A.4.9 Configuring SNMP...............................................................................................................................................1102
A.4.9.1 DLT-SNMP-ACCESSIP...................................................................................................................................1102
A.4.9.2 ED-SNMP-ACCESSIP......................................................................................................................................1103
A.4.9.3 ENT-SNMP-ACCESSIP...................................................................................................................................1105
A.4.9.4 RTRV-SNMP-ACCESSIP................................................................................................................................1106
A.4.9.5 DLT-SNMP-TRAPINFO..................................................................................................................................1107
A.4.9.6 ED-SNMP-TRAPINFO.....................................................................................................................................1108
A.4.9.7 ENT-SNMP-TRAPINFO..................................................................................................................................1110
A.4.9.8 RTRV-SNMP-TRAPINFO................................................................................................................................1111
A.4.9.9 ED-SNMP-COMMUNITY...............................................................................................................................1113
A.4.9.10 RTRV-SNMP-COMMUNITY........................................................................................................................1114
A.5 Equipment Management..........................................................................................................................................1115
A.5.1 ENT-EQPT...........................................................................................................................................................1115
A.5.2 ED-EQPT..............................................................................................................................................................1118
A.5.3 DLT-EQPT...........................................................................................................................................................1124
A.5.4 RTRV-EQPT........................................................................................................................................................1126
A.5.5 RTRV-ETH-EQPT...............................................................................................................................................1131
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.6 Facility Management...............................................................................................................................................1132

A.6.1 ED-<FCMOD2>...................................................................................................................................................1132
A.6.2 RTRV-<FCMOD2>..............................................................................................................................................1134
A.6.3 ED-<OCN/STMN>...............................................................................................................................................1135
A.6.4 RTRV-<OCN/STMN>.........................................................................................................................................1138
A.6.5 RTRV-FECER-<OTUN>.....................................................................................................................................1141
A.6.6 ED-<TRAFFICMOD2>.......................................................................................................................................1142
A.6.7 RTRV-<TRAFFICMOD2>..................................................................................................................................1144
A.6.8 ED-CLNT.............................................................................................................................................................1145
A.6.9 RTRV-CLNT........................................................................................................................................................1152
A.6.10 ED-LEDSTATE.................................................................................................................................................1158
A.6.11 RTRV-LEDSTATE............................................................................................................................................1159
A.6.12 ED-EC.................................................................................................................................................................1160
A.6.13 RTRV-EC...........................................................................................................................................................1162
A.6.14 ED-CFP...............................................................................................................................................................1164
A.6.15 RTRV-CFP.........................................................................................................................................................1166
A.6.16 ED-OC................................................................................................................................................................1168
A.6.17 RTRV-OC...........................................................................................................................................................1172
A.6.18 ED-OCH.............................................................................................................................................................1176
A.6.19 RTRV-OCH........................................................................................................................................................1181
A.6.20 ED-OMS.............................................................................................................................................................1187
A.6.21 RTRV-OMS........................................................................................................................................................1188
A.6.22 ED-OSC..............................................................................................................................................................1189
A.6.23 RTRV-OSC.........................................................................................................................................................1191
A.6.24 ED-OTS..............................................................................................................................................................1193
A.6.25 RTRV-OTS.........................................................................................................................................................1195
A.6.26 ED-WDM...........................................................................................................................................................1198
A.6.27 RTRV-WDM......................................................................................................................................................1202
A.6.28 RMV-<MOD2>..................................................................................................................................................1207
A.6.29 RST-<MOD2>....................................................................................................................................................1208
A.6.30 ED-PL.................................................................................................................................................................1210
A.6.31 RTRV-PL............................................................................................................................................................1211
A.6.32 ED-VCG.............................................................................................................................................................1212
A.6.33 RTRV-VCG........................................................................................................................................................1213
A.6.34 ACT-CFG-TEMP...............................................................................................................................................1215
A.6.35 RTRV-PWR........................................................................................................................................................1216
A.6.36 RTRV-OPMOD..................................................................................................................................................1218
A.7 Configuring Fiber....................................................................................................................................................1219
A.7.1 ENT-FIBER..........................................................................................................................................................1219
A.7.2 DLT-FIBER..........................................................................................................................................................1220
A.7.3 RTRV-FIBER.......................................................................................................................................................1222
A.7.4 ENT-WMU-CONN..............................................................................................................................................1223
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxvii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.7.5 DLT-WMU-CONN..............................................................................................................................................1225
A.7.6 RTRV-WMU-CONN...........................................................................................................................................1226
A.8 Configuring Cross-Connections..............................................................................................................................1228
A.8.1 Configuring OXC.................................................................................................................................................1228
A.8.1.1 ENT-PXC-OCH.................................................................................................................................................1228
A.8.1.2 ED-PXC-OCH...................................................................................................................................................1230
A.8.1.3 DLT-PXC-OCH.................................................................................................................................................1232
A.8.1.4 RTRV-PXC-OCH..............................................................................................................................................1233
A.8.1.5 RTRV-PXCINFO-OCH....................................................................................................................................1236
A.8.1.6 RTRV-PXC-WASTAGE...................................................................................................................................1238
A.8.1.7 DLT-PXC-WASTAGE......................................................................................................................................1240
A.8.1.8 ED-PXC-WASTAGE........................................................................................................................................1241
A.8.1.9 ED-OXC-NEPORT...........................................................................................................................................1242
A.8.1.10 RTRV-OXC-NEPORT....................................................................................................................................1244
A.8.1.11 RTRV-OCCUP-WAVE...................................................................................................................................1245
A.8.2 Configuring EXC..................................................................................................................................................1247
A.8.2.1 ENT-CRS-<MOD2>..........................................................................................................................................1247
A.8.2.2 ED-CRS-<MOD2>............................................................................................................................................1250
A.8.2.3 DLT-CRS-<MOD2>..........................................................................................................................................1253
A.8.2.4 RTRV-CRS-<MOD2>.......................................................................................................................................1255
A.9 Configuring Transparently Transmitted FE Singal.................................................................................................1259
A.9.1 ENT-CRS-OHFE..................................................................................................................................................1259
A.9.2 RTRV-CRS-OHBYTE.........................................................................................................................................1260
A.9.3 DLT-CRS-OHFE..................................................................................................................................................1261
A.10 Configuring Service Protection.............................................................................................................................1262
A.10.1 Configuring Equipment Level Protection...........................................................................................................1262
A.10.1.1 ENT-EQPT-PG................................................................................................................................................1262
A.10.1.2 ED-EQPT-PG..................................................................................................................................................1264
A.10.1.3 DLT-EQPT-PG................................................................................................................................................1265
A.10.1.4 RTRV-EQPT-PG.............................................................................................................................................1266
A.10.1.5 OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT..................................................................................................................................1268
A.10.1.6 RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT..................................................................................................................................1269
A.10.2 Configuring FFP Protection................................................................................................................................1270
A.10.2.1 ENT-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>.................................................................................................................1270
A.10.2.2 ED-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>....................................................................................................................1273
A.10.2.3 DLT-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>.................................................................................................................1274
A.10.2.4 RTRV-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>..............................................................................................................1276
A.10.2.5 RTRV-FFP-LOG.............................................................................................................................................1279
A.10.2.6 INIT-FFP-LOG................................................................................................................................................1280
A.10.2.7 OPR-PROTNSW-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>.....................................................................................................1281
A.10.2.8 RLS-PROTNSW-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>.....................................................................................................1283
A.10.3 Configuring SNCP Protection............................................................................................................................1285
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxviii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.10.3.1 RLS-PROTNSW-<MOD2>............................................................................................................................1285
A.10.3.2 OPR-PROTNSW-<MOD2>............................................................................................................................1286
A.11 Configuring SCC Protection..................................................................................................................................1288
A.11.1 ED-AUTOSYNC-ENABLE...............................................................................................................................1288
A.11.2 REPT^SW...........................................................................................................................................................1289
A.11.3 RTRV-BACKUP-INFO.....................................................................................................................................1290
A.11.4 ALW-SWDX-EQPT...........................................................................................................................................1291
A.11.5 INH-SWDX-EQPT.............................................................................................................................................1292
A.11.6 RTRV-BATCHBAK-CAUSEHIS.....................................................................................................................1294
A.11.7 RTRV-MSCOM-INTRPHIS..............................................................................................................................1295
A.11.8 RTRV-AUTOSYNC-ENABLE.........................................................................................................................1296
A.11.9 RTRV-SWITCH-HIS.........................................................................................................................................1297
A.11.10 RTRV-BAD-INFO...........................................................................................................................................1299
A.11.11 RTRV-BACKUPMOD-INFO..........................................................................................................................1300
A.11.12 RTRV-BATCH-PROCESS..............................................................................................................................1302
A.11.13 RTRV-SYNC-ENABLE...................................................................................................................................1304
A.11.14 RTRV-DX-MODE...........................................................................................................................................1305
A.11.15 RTRV-DX-WORK...........................................................................................................................................1306
A.11.16 RTRV-DX-EQPT.............................................................................................................................................1307
A.11.17 RTRV-HD-STA................................................................................................................................................1308
A.11.18 RTRV-AS-ENABLE........................................................................................................................................1309
A.11.19 RTRV-FORCELOCK-SUPPORT....................................................................................................................1310
A.11.20 RTRV-MANU-ENABLE.................................................................................................................................1311
A.11.21 SW-DX-EQPT..................................................................................................................................................1313
A.12 Configuring Ethernet Related Protection...............................................................................................................1314
A.12.1 Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection................................................................................................................1314
A.12.1.1 ENT-ERPS.......................................................................................................................................................1314
A.12.1.2 ED-ERPS.........................................................................................................................................................1317
A.12.1.3 RTRV-ERPS....................................................................................................................................................1318
A.12.1.4 DLT-ERPS.......................................................................................................................................................1322
A.12.1.5 REPTÊVTÊRPS..........................................................................................................................................1323
A.12.2 Configuring LAG................................................................................................................................................1324
A.12.2.1 ENT-LAG........................................................................................................................................................1324
A.12.2.2 ED-LAG..........................................................................................................................................................1326
A.12.2.3 DLT-LAG........................................................................................................................................................1328
A.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG.....................................................................................................................................................1329
A.12.2.5 ED-LAGSYS...................................................................................................................................................1332
A.12.2.6 RTRV-LAGSYS..............................................................................................................................................1333
A.12.2.7 ED-LAGPORT................................................................................................................................................1335
A.12.2.8 RTRV-LAGPORT...........................................................................................................................................1336
A.12.2.9 INIT-LAGPORT..............................................................................................................................................1338
A.12.2.10 ENT-DLAG...................................................................................................................................................1340
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxxix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.12.2.11 ED-DLAG......................................................................................................................................................1342
A.12.2.12 DLT-DLAG...................................................................................................................................................1343
A.12.2.13 RTRV-DLAG................................................................................................................................................1344
A.12.2.14 DLT-MCLAG................................................................................................................................................1348
A.12.2.15 ED-MCLAG..................................................................................................................................................1349
A.12.2.16 ENT-MCLAG................................................................................................................................................1351
A.12.2.17 RTRV-MCLAG.............................................................................................................................................1353
A.12.2.18 DLT-MCSP....................................................................................................................................................1355
A.12.2.19 ED-MCSP......................................................................................................................................................1356
A.12.2.20 ENT-MCSP....................................................................................................................................................1357
A.12.2.21 RTRV-MCSP.................................................................................................................................................1359
A.12.2.22 INIT-LACP-PKT...........................................................................................................................................1360
A.12.2.23 RTRV-LACP-PKT........................................................................................................................................1362
A.12.2.24 INIT-LAGSTAST-<FETH/GETH>..............................................................................................................1364
A.12.2.25 RTRV-LAGSTAT-<FETH/GETH>..............................................................................................................1365
A.12.2.26 RTRV-STATE-LAGPORT...........................................................................................................................1366
A.12.3 Configuring STP.................................................................................................................................................1368
A.12.3.1 ED-STP-VB.....................................................................................................................................................1368
A.12.3.2 RTRV-STP-VB................................................................................................................................................1370
A.12.3.3 INIT-STP-VB..................................................................................................................................................1372
A.12.3.4 ED-STP-VBLP................................................................................................................................................1374
A.12.3.5 RTRV-STP-VBLP...........................................................................................................................................1375
A.12.3.6 SW-STP-VBLP................................................................................................................................................1377
A.12.3.7 REPTÊVT^VBLP..........................................................................................................................................1379
A.12.4 Configuring VLAN SNCP .................................................................................................................................1380
A.12.4.1 ENT-VLANSNCP-PG.....................................................................................................................................1380
A.12.4.2 ED-VLANSNCP-PG.......................................................................................................................................1382
A.12.4.3 RTRV-VLANSNCP-PG..................................................................................................................................1384
A.12.4.4 DLT-VLANSNCP-PG.....................................................................................................................................1386
A.12.4.5 OPR-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP.......................................................................................................................1388
A.12.4.6 RLS-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP.......................................................................................................................1389
A.13 Configuring Ethernet Feature................................................................................................................................1390
A.13.1 Configuring Ethernet Interface ..........................................................................................................................1391
A.13.1.1 ED-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>........................................................................................1391
A.13.1.2 RMV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>......................................................................................................................1398
A.13.1.3 RTRV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>...................................................................................1399
A.13.1.4 RST-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>........................................................................................................................1404
A.13.1.5 OPR-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>............................................................................................................1405
A.13.1.6 RLS-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>............................................................................................................1407
A.13.1.7 RTRV-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>.........................................................................................................1408
A.13.1.8 ED-ETH-VCG.................................................................................................................................................1409
A.13.1.9 RTRV-ETH-VCG............................................................................................................................................1411
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xl

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.1.10 ED-PORT-TRAFFIC.....................................................................................................................................1412
A.13.1.11 RTRV-PORT-TRAFFIC...............................................................................................................................1414
A.13.1.12 RTRV-PORT-TRFFLUX..............................................................................................................................1416
A.13.2 Configuring Flow................................................................................................................................................1419
A.13.2.1 ENT-FLOW.....................................................................................................................................................1419
A.13.2.2 ED-FLOW.......................................................................................................................................................1421
A.13.2.3 DLT-FLOW.....................................................................................................................................................1422
A.13.2.4 RTRV-FLOW..................................................................................................................................................1424
A.13.3 Configuring Ethernet Link..................................................................................................................................1426
A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK...............................................................................................................................................1426
A.13.3.2 ED-ETHLINK.................................................................................................................................................1430
A.13.3.3 DLT-ETHLINK...............................................................................................................................................1432
A.13.3.4 RTRV-ETHLINK............................................................................................................................................1434
A.13.3.5 ENT-PW..........................................................................................................................................................1437
A.13.3.6 ED-PW.............................................................................................................................................................1439
A.13.3.7 RTRV-PW.......................................................................................................................................................1440
A.13.3.8 DLT-PW..........................................................................................................................................................1442
A.13.3.9 ENT-TUNNEL................................................................................................................................................1443
A.13.3.10 DLT-TUNNEL..............................................................................................................................................1445
A.13.3.11 RTRV-TUNNEL...........................................................................................................................................1446
A.13.3.12 ED-TUNNEL.................................................................................................................................................1447
A.13.4 Configuring Virtual Bridge.................................................................................................................................1449
A.13.4.1 ENT-VB...........................................................................................................................................................1449
A.13.4.2 ED-VB.............................................................................................................................................................1451
A.13.4.3 DLT-VB...........................................................................................................................................................1454
A.13.4.4 RTRV-VB........................................................................................................................................................1455
A.13.4.5 ENT-VLANENTRY-VB.................................................................................................................................1457
A.13.4.6 ED-VLANENTRY-VB...................................................................................................................................1458
A.13.4.7 DLT-VLANENTRY-VB.................................................................................................................................1460
A.13.4.8 RTRV-VLANENTRY-VB..............................................................................................................................1461
A.13.4.9 ED-VBLP........................................................................................................................................................1463
A.13.4.10 RTRV-VBLP.................................................................................................................................................1464
A.13.4.11 INIT-MACENTRY........................................................................................................................................1466
A.13.5 Configuring VLAN Group.................................................................................................................................1467
A.13.5.1 ENT-PORT-VLANGROUP............................................................................................................................1467
A.13.5.2 ED-PORT-VLANGROUP..............................................................................................................................1469
A.13.5.3 DLT-PORT-VLANGROUP............................................................................................................................1471
A.13.5.4 RTRV-PORT-VLANGROUP.........................................................................................................................1472
A.13.6 Configuring MAC Filter.....................................................................................................................................1474
A.13.6.1 ENT-MACENTRY-VB...................................................................................................................................1474
A.13.6.2 DLT-MACENTRY-VB...................................................................................................................................1476
A.13.6.3 RTRV-MACENTRY-VB................................................................................................................................1478
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xli

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.6.4 RTRV-FWDTABPHY-VB..............................................................................................................................1480
A.13.6.5 RTRV-MACSTAT..........................................................................................................................................1482
A.13.7 Configuring IGMP..............................................................................................................................................1483
A.13.7.1 ED-IGMP-VB..................................................................................................................................................1484
A.13.7.2 RTRV-IGMP-VB............................................................................................................................................1485
A.13.7.3 ENT-IGMPTABLE-VB..................................................................................................................................1486
A.13.7.4 ED-IGMPTABLE-VB..................................................................................................................................... 1488
A.13.7.5 DLT-IGMPTABLE-VB..................................................................................................................................1489
A.13.7.6 RTRV-IGMPTABLE-VB................................................................................................................................1491
A.13.7.7 RTRV-MCGROUP-VB...................................................................................................................................1493
A.13.7.8 ED-IGMP-QKLV............................................................................................................................................1494
A.13.7.9 RTRV-IGMP-QKLV....................................................................................................................................... 1496
A.13.7.10 REPTÊVTÎGMPMEMFULL.....................................................................................................................1497
A.13.8 Configuring QoS.................................................................................................................................................1498
A.13.8.1 ENT-CAR........................................................................................................................................................1498
A.13.8.2 ED-CAR..........................................................................................................................................................1500
A.13.8.3 DLT-CAR........................................................................................................................................................1502
A.13.8.4 RTRV-CAR.....................................................................................................................................................1503
A.13.8.5 ENT-COS........................................................................................................................................................1504
A.13.8.6 ED-COS........................................................................................................................................................... 1506
A.13.8.7 DLT-COS........................................................................................................................................................1507
A.13.8.8 RTRV-COS......................................................................................................................................................1508
A.13.8.9 ED-QUEUE.....................................................................................................................................................1510
A.13.8.10 RTRV-QUEUE..............................................................................................................................................1512
A.13.8.11 ED-PORT-SHAPING....................................................................................................................................1513
A.13.8.12 RTRV-PORT-SHAPING..............................................................................................................................1515
A.13.8.13 RTRV-FLUX-FLOW....................................................................................................................................1516
A.13.9 Configuring Ethernet Interface Mirror...............................................................................................................1518
A.13.9.1 ENT-MIRROR................................................................................................................................................1518
A.13.9.2 ED-MIRROR................................................................................................................................................... 1520
A.13.9.3 RTRV-MIRROR..............................................................................................................................................1521
A.13.9.4 DLT-MIRROR................................................................................................................................................1523
A.13.9.5 DLT-SRVMIRROR-ETHLINK......................................................................................................................1524
A.13.9.6 ENT-SRVMIRROR-ETHLINK......................................................................................................................1526
A.13.9.7 RTRV-SRVMIRROR-ETHLINK...................................................................................................................1527
A.13.9.8 DLT-SRVMIRROR-PW.................................................................................................................................1529
A.13.9.9 ENT-SRVMIRROR-PW.................................................................................................................................1531
A.13.9.10 RTRV-SRVMIRROR-PW............................................................................................................................1532
A.13.9.11 DLT-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL.....................................................................................................................1533
A.13.9.12 ENT-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL.....................................................................................................................1534
A.13.9.13 RTRV-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL..................................................................................................................1536
A.13.10 Configuring OAM............................................................................................................................................1537
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xlii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.10.1 OPR-OAM-LB..............................................................................................................................................1537
A.13.10.2 OPR-OAM-LT...............................................................................................................................................1539
A.13.10.3 ENT-MD........................................................................................................................................................1541
A.13.10.4 DLT-MD........................................................................................................................................................1542
A.13.10.5 RTRV-MD.....................................................................................................................................................1544
A.13.10.6 ENT-MA........................................................................................................................................................1545
A.13.10.7 DLT-MA........................................................................................................................................................1546
A.13.10.8 RTRV-MA.....................................................................................................................................................1547
A.13.10.9 ENT-MP........................................................................................................................................................1549
A.13.10.10 ED-MP.........................................................................................................................................................1554
A.13.10.11 DLT-MP......................................................................................................................................................1557
A.13.10.12 RTRV-MP....................................................................................................................................................1558
A.13.10.13 REPTÊVTÔAMSERVICELOOP...........................................................................................................1562
A.13.10.14 STA-OAM-PING........................................................................................................................................1563
A.13.10.15 STP-OAM-PING.........................................................................................................................................1564
A.13.10.16 STA-OAM-PERDECT................................................................................................................................1565
A.13.10.17 STP-OAM-PERDECT.................................................................................................................................1567
A.13.10.18 ED-P2POAM-ADMIN................................................................................................................................1568
A.13.10.19 RTRV-P2POAM-ADMIN...........................................................................................................................1571
A.13.11 Other Maintenace commands...........................................................................................................................1574
A.13.11.1 STA-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>...........................................................................................................1574
A.13.11.2 STP-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>............................................................................................................1576
A.13.11.3 RTRV-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>........................................................................................................1577
A.13.11.4 INIT-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>..........................................................................................................1579
A.13.11.5 REPTÊVT^PING.........................................................................................................................................1580
A.13.11.6 STA-CAPT....................................................................................................................................................1582
A.13.11.7 STP-CAPT.....................................................................................................................................................1584
A.13.11.8 RTRV-CAPT.................................................................................................................................................1585
A.13.11.9 INIT-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>...............................................................................................................1586
A.13.11.10 RTRV-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>...........................................................................................................1588
A.13.11.11 STA-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>..............................................................................................................1589
A.13.11.12 STP-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>..............................................................................................................1591
A.14 Configuring OTN Overhead..................................................................................................................................1592
A.14.1 ED-<ODUN>......................................................................................................................................................1592
A.14.2 RTRV-<ODUN>................................................................................................................................................1599
A.14.3 ED-<OTUN>......................................................................................................................................................1606
A.14.4 RTRV-<OTUN>.................................................................................................................................................1610
A.14.5 ED-<TCMMOD2>.............................................................................................................................................1613
A.14.6 RTRV-<TCMMOD2>........................................................................................................................................1617
A.15 Automatic Optical Power Management.................................................................................................................1621
A.15.1 Configuring Intelligent Power Adjustment (IPA)..............................................................................................1621
A.15.1.1 ENT-IPA..........................................................................................................................................................1621
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xliii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.15.1.2 ED-IPA............................................................................................................................................................1623
A.15.1.3 DLT-IPA..........................................................................................................................................................1626
A.15.1.4 RTRV-IPA.......................................................................................................................................................1627
A.15.1.5 ED-IPA-WDM.................................................................................................................................................1631
A.15.1.6 OPR-IPA-WDM..............................................................................................................................................1632
A.15.1.7 RTRV-IPA-WDM...........................................................................................................................................1633
A.15.1.8 OPR-IPA..........................................................................................................................................................1635
A.15.1.9 ENT-IPA-ASTDECT......................................................................................................................................1636
A.15.1.10 DLT-IPA-ASTDECT....................................................................................................................................1637
A.15.1.11 RTRV-IPA-ASTDECT..................................................................................................................................1639
A.15.1.12 REPTÊVTÎPA............................................................................................................................................1640
A.15.2 Configuring Automatic Power Equilibrium (APE)............................................................................................1642
A.15.2.1 ENT-APE.........................................................................................................................................................1642
A.15.2.2 ED-APE...........................................................................................................................................................1644
A.15.2.3 DLT-APE.........................................................................................................................................................1645
A.15.2.4 OPR-APE.........................................................................................................................................................1646
A.15.2.5 RTRV-APE......................................................................................................................................................1647
A.15.2.6 ED-APE-WCH................................................................................................................................................1649
A.15.2.7 RTRV-APE-WCH...........................................................................................................................................1651
A.15.2.8 REPTÊVTÂPE.............................................................................................................................................1652
A.15.3 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)....................................................................................................1655
A.15.3.1 ENT-ALC-NODE............................................................................................................................................1655
A.15.3.2 ED-ALC-NODE..............................................................................................................................................1657
A.15.3.3 DLT-ALC-NODE............................................................................................................................................1659
A.15.3.4 RTRV-ALC-NODE.........................................................................................................................................1660
A.15.3.5 OPR-ALC-CHAIN..........................................................................................................................................1664
A.15.3.6 RTRV-ALC-CHAIN.......................................................................................................................................1665
A.15.3.7 OPR-ALC-NODE............................................................................................................................................1668
A.15.3.8 INIT-ALC-LOG..............................................................................................................................................1669
A.15.3.9 RTRV-ALC-LOG............................................................................................................................................1670
A.15.3.10 REPTÊVTÂLC..........................................................................................................................................1672
A.16 Configuring MCA..................................................................................................................................................1677
A.16.1 ED-MCACHN....................................................................................................................................................1677
A.16.2 RTRV-MCACHN...............................................................................................................................................1679
A.16.3 RTRV-MCADATA............................................................................................................................................1680
A.17 Configuring Tunable Dispersion Compensator ....................................................................................................1682
A.17.1 ED-TDC..............................................................................................................................................................1682
A.17.2 OPR-TDC...........................................................................................................................................................1683
A.17.3 RTRV-TDC........................................................................................................................................................1684
A.17.4 REPT-EVT-TDCSCAN.....................................................................................................................................1686
A.18 System Monitor.....................................................................................................................................................1687
A.18.1 ED-DST-V2........................................................................................................................................................1687
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xliv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.18.2 RTRV-DST-V2...................................................................................................................................................1690
A.18.3 RTRV-CHECK-PERIOD...................................................................................................................................1692
A.18.4 RTRV-CPU-PEAKINFO...................................................................................................................................1693
A.18.5 RTRV-CPUUSAGE...........................................................................................................................................1699
A.18.6 RTRV-LIST........................................................................................................................................................1701
A.18.7 RTRV-SCCID.....................................................................................................................................................1711
A.18.8 RTRV-MEMPEAK-INFO..................................................................................................................................1713
A.18.9 RTRV-MEMUSAGE-INFO...............................................................................................................................1714
A.18.10 RTRV-MEMUTIL-INFO.................................................................................................................................1715
A.18.11 RTRV-MODULE-DUMPINFO.......................................................................................................................1716
A.18.12 RTRV-MODULE-LISTINFO..........................................................................................................................1718
A.18.13 RTRV-QUELENALM-STATE........................................................................................................................1719
A.18.14 RTRV-REBOOT-LOG.....................................................................................................................................1720
A.18.15 RTRV-RESERVEMEM...................................................................................................................................1722
A.18.16 RTRV-SWTTHRINFO.....................................................................................................................................1724
A.18.17 RTRV-SYMADDR..........................................................................................................................................1725
A.18.18 RTRV-TASKSTACK.......................................................................................................................................1726
A.18.19 RTRV-TASKONMSGQUE.............................................................................................................................1728
A.18.20 RTRV-TASKONSEM......................................................................................................................................1729
A.18.21 RTRV-VFS-PEAKINFO..................................................................................................................................1731
A.18.22 RTRV-BDINFO-EQPT....................................................................................................................................1732
A.18.23 SET-CPUTESTSTA.........................................................................................................................................1734
A.18.24 WRT-BB...........................................................................................................................................................1735
A.19 Performance Management.....................................................................................................................................1736
A.19.1 ED-PMALMCTRL-<MOD2>............................................................................................................................1736
A.19.2 RTRV-PMALMCTRL-<MOD2>......................................................................................................................1739
A.19.3 ED-PMHISTCTRL.............................................................................................................................................1742
A.19.4 RTRV-PMHISTCTRL.......................................................................................................................................1743
A.19.5 INIT-REG-<MOD2>..........................................................................................................................................1745
A.19.6 RTRV-PM-<MOD2>.........................................................................................................................................1747
A.19.7 REPT^PM^<MOD2>.........................................................................................................................................1749
A.19.8 RTRV-PMDAY..................................................................................................................................................1751
A.19.9 SET-PMDAY.....................................................................................................................................................1752
A.19.10 RTRV-TH-<MOD2>........................................................................................................................................1753
A.19.11 SET-TH-<MOD2>...........................................................................................................................................1756
A.19.12 RTRV-ATTRTCA-<MOD2>...........................................................................................................................1758
A.19.13 SET-ATTRTCA-<MOD2>..............................................................................................................................1761
A.19.14 INIT-PMSTAT-<MOD2>................................................................................................................................1763
A.19.15 RTRV-PMSTAT-<MOD2>.............................................................................................................................1765
A.19.16 INIT-PMHIST-<MOD2>.................................................................................................................................1767
A.19.17 RTRV-PMHIST-<MOD2>...............................................................................................................................1769
A.19.18 REPT^PM^FALLING......................................................................................................................................1771
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xlv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.19.19 REPT^PM^RISING..........................................................................................................................................1772
A.20 Alarm and Event Management..............................................................................................................................1774
A.20.1 ALW-AUD-ALL................................................................................................................................................1774
A.20.2 INH-AUD-ALL..................................................................................................................................................1775
A.20.3 ALW-VSL-ALL.................................................................................................................................................1776
A.20.4 INH-VSL-ALL...................................................................................................................................................1777
A.20.5 ED-ALMTH-<MOD2>......................................................................................................................................1778
A.20.6 RTRV-ALMTH-<MOD2>.................................................................................................................................1780
A.20.7 RTRV-ALMTHRNG-<MOD2>.........................................................................................................................1782
A.20.8 REPTÂLM^<MOD2>......................................................................................................................................1784
A.20.9 REPTÊVT^<MOD2>.......................................................................................................................................1786
A.20.10 RLS-EXT-CONT..............................................................................................................................................1788
A.20.11 RTRV-EXT-CONT..........................................................................................................................................1789
A.20.12 OPR-EXT-CONT.............................................................................................................................................1791
A.20.13 RTRV-ALM-<MOD2>....................................................................................................................................1792
A.20.14 RTRV-ALM-CONTIME..................................................................................................................................1796
A.20.15 SET-ALM-CONTIME.....................................................................................................................................1797
A.20.16 RTRV-ALM-ENV............................................................................................................................................1798
A.20.17 REPTÂLMÊNV............................................................................................................................................1800
A.20.18 RTRV-ATTR-<MOD2>...................................................................................................................................1801
A.20.19 SET-ATTR-<MOD2>......................................................................................................................................1803
A.20.20 RTRV-ATTR-ENV..........................................................................................................................................1805
A.20.21 SET-ATTR-ENV..............................................................................................................................................1807
A.20.22 RTRV-ATTR-CONT........................................................................................................................................1809
A.20.23 SET-ATTR-CONT...........................................................................................................................................1810
A.20.24 RTRV-ATTR-CONTTM..................................................................................................................................1812
A.20.25 SET-ATTR-CONTTM.....................................................................................................................................1813
A.20.26 RTRV-COND-<MOD2>..................................................................................................................................1814
A.20.27 OPR-ACO-ALL................................................................................................................................................1817
A.20.28 OPR-ALM-CONFIRM.....................................................................................................................................1818
A.20.29 RTRV-ALM-CONFIRM..................................................................................................................................1819
A.20.30 ED-ALM-CONFIRM.......................................................................................................................................1820
A.21 Configuring LPT....................................................................................................................................................1821
A.21.1 ED-LPT...............................................................................................................................................................1821
A.21.2 RTRV-LPT.........................................................................................................................................................1822
A.22 Configuring Loopback...........................................................................................................................................1823
A.22.1 OPR-LPBK-<MOD2>........................................................................................................................................1824
A.22.2 RLS-LPBK-<MOD2>........................................................................................................................................1825
A.22.3 RTRV-LPBK-<MOD2>.....................................................................................................................................1826
A.22.4 ED-BDXCLOOP................................................................................................................................................1828
A.22.5 RTRV-BDXCLOOP...........................................................................................................................................1829
A.23 Connection Test.....................................................................................................................................................1830
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xlvi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.23.1 CONN-TST-<OTUN/ODUN/OCN/STMN>.....................................................................................................1830
A.23.2 CONN-TST-<40GETH/100GETH>..................................................................................................................1832
A.23.3 DISC-TST-<OTUN/ODUN/OCN/STMN/40GETH/100GETH>......................................................................1834
A.23.4 RTRV-RSLT-<OTUN/ODUN/OCN/STMN>...................................................................................................1835
A.23.5 RTRV-RSLT-<40GETH/100GETH>................................................................................................................1836
A.23.6 RTRV-TST-<OTUN/ODUN/OCN/STMN>......................................................................................................1838
A.23.7 RTRV-TST-<40GETH/100GETH>...................................................................................................................1839
A.23.8 REPTÊVT^PRBS.............................................................................................................................................1841
A.24 System Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................1843
A.24.1 ABT-ERRPICK..................................................................................................................................................1843
A.24.2 ACK-ERRPICK..................................................................................................................................................1844
A.24.3 OPR-ERRPICK..................................................................................................................................................1845
A.24.4 REPTÊVTÊRRPICKEND..............................................................................................................................1846
A.24.5 REPTÊVTÊRRPICKPROGRESS..................................................................................................................1848
A.24.6 REPTÊVTÊRRPICKUPLOAD......................................................................................................................1849
A.24.7 RTRV-ERRPICK-STATE..................................................................................................................................1850
A.24.8 RTRV-ERRPICK-TYPE....................................................................................................................................1851
A.24.9 ALW-MSG-ALL................................................................................................................................................1852
A.24.10 INH-MSG-ALL................................................................................................................................................1854
A.24.11 RTRV-MSG-ALL.............................................................................................................................................1855
A.24.12 ALW-PMREPT-ALL.......................................................................................................................................1856
A.24.13 INH-PMREPT-ALL.........................................................................................................................................1857
A.24.14 RTRV-PMREPT-ALL......................................................................................................................................1858
A.24.15 ALW-MSG-DBCHG........................................................................................................................................1860
A.24.16 INH-MSG-DBCHG..........................................................................................................................................1861
A.24.17 RTRV-MSG-DBCHG......................................................................................................................................1862
A.24.18 COPY-FILE......................................................................................................................................................1863
A.24.19 INIT-SYS..........................................................................................................................................................1864
A.24.20 REPT^DBCHG.................................................................................................................................................1867
A.24.21 RTRV-CMDNODE-INFO...............................................................................................................................1869
A.24.22 RTRV-ELABEL...............................................................................................................................................1870
A.24.23 RTRV-LIST......................................................................................................................................................1871
A.24.24 RTRV-SCCID...................................................................................................................................................1882
A.24.25 RTRV-TEST-VER...........................................................................................................................................1883
A.24.26 RTRV-VRCBVER...........................................................................................................................................1885
A.24.27 RTRV-PATCH-LIST.......................................................................................................................................1886
A.24.28 ED-DUMP-CLEARCODE...............................................................................................................................1887
A.24.29 ED-DUMP-SETCON.......................................................................................................................................1888
A.24.30 ED-DUMP-SETCODE.....................................................................................................................................1890
A.24.31 REPT GSPDUMP.............................................................................................................................................1891
A.24.32 RTRV-GSP-TEST............................................................................................................................................1892
A.24.33 WRT-BB...........................................................................................................................................................1893
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xlvii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.24.34 PTP...................................................................................................................................................................1894
A.25 Security Management............................................................................................................................................1896
A.25.1 ACT-USER.........................................................................................................................................................1896
A.25.2 ALW-USER-SECU............................................................................................................................................1897
A.25.3 DLT-USER-SECU.............................................................................................................................................1898
A.25.4 ED-USER-SECU................................................................................................................................................1899
A.25.5 ENT-USER-SECU.............................................................................................................................................1901
A.25.6 INH-USER-SECU..............................................................................................................................................1903
A.25.7 RTRV-USER-SECU...........................................................................................................................................1904
A.25.8 CANC-USER......................................................................................................................................................1906
A.25.9 RTRV-CHECKINFO-SECU..............................................................................................................................1907
A.25.10 ED-PID.............................................................................................................................................................1908
A.25.11 ED-WARNSCR................................................................................................................................................1909
A.25.12 RTRV-WARNSCR...........................................................................................................................................1910
A.25.13 ED-WARNSCRSTATE...................................................................................................................................1912
A.25.14 RTRV-WARNSCRSTATE..............................................................................................................................1913
A.25.15 REPT^LOGOFF...............................................................................................................................................1914
A.25.16 REPTÊVT^SECU...........................................................................................................................................1915
A.25.17 REPTÂCCESS^WARNING..........................................................................................................................1916
A.25.18 REPTÂCCOUNTEXPIRED^WARNING.....................................................................................................1917
A.25.19 REPTÊVTÔPLOGNEEDUPLOAD.............................................................................................................1919
A.25.20 REPTÊVTÔPLOGCIRCLE..........................................................................................................................1920
A.25.21 REPT^MODIFYPASSWORD^NOTIFY.........................................................................................................1921
A.25.22 DLT-SSH-HOSTKEY......................................................................................................................................1922
A.25.23 ED-SSH-PASSPHRASE..................................................................................................................................1923
A.25.24 DLT-SSH-PEERPUBKEY...............................................................................................................................1924
A.25.25 ED-SSH-PEERPUBKEY.................................................................................................................................1925
A.25.26 ENT-SSH-PEERPUBKEY...............................................................................................................................1927
A.25.27 ENT-SSH-HOSTKEY......................................................................................................................................1928
A.25.28 RTRV-SSH-HOSTKEY...................................................................................................................................1929
A.25.29 RTRV-SSH-HOSTKEYLIST...........................................................................................................................1931
A.25.30 ED-USER-SSHPEERPUBKEY.......................................................................................................................1932
A.25.31 ED-USER-SSHAUTHTYPE............................................................................................................................1933
A.25.32 RTRV-USER-SSH...........................................................................................................................................1935
A.25.33 RTRV-SSH-PEERPUBKEYINFO...................................................................................................................1936
A.25.34 RTRV-SSH-PEERPUBKEYLIST...................................................................................................................1937
A.25.35 RTRV-SSH-SRVINFO.....................................................................................................................................1939
A.26 Backup and Recover..............................................................................................................................................1940
A.26.1 ED-PE-DBPERIOD............................................................................................................................................1940
A.26.2 RTRV-PE-DBPERIOD......................................................................................................................................1941
A.26.3 ED-PE-DATA.....................................................................................................................................................1942
A.26.4 RECOVER-PE-DATA.......................................................................................................................................1943
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xlviii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.26.5 RTRV-DBBKUP................................................................................................................................................1945
A.26.6 RTRV-FREESPACE..........................................................................................................................................1947
A.26.7 SCHED-DBBKUP..............................................................................................................................................1949
A.26.8 REPTÊVT^DBBKUP.......................................................................................................................................1952
A.26.9 RTRV-PE-AUTOBACKUP...............................................................................................................................1953
A.26.10 SET-PE-AUTOBACKUP.................................................................................................................................1954
A.26.11 REPTÊVT^PEBACKUPFAIL.......................................................................................................................1955
A.26.12 RTRV-VERMATCH........................................................................................................................................1957
A.26.13 REPTÊVT^DBFDLACTIVATED.................................................................................................................1958
A.27 System Update.......................................................................................................................................................1959
A.27.1 ABT-CMD..........................................................................................................................................................1960
A.27.2 ACT-SWDLGROUP..........................................................................................................................................1961
A.27.3 DLT-SWDLGROUP..........................................................................................................................................1962
A.27.4 ED-SWDLGROUP.............................................................................................................................................1963
A.27.5 ED-SWDL-CUSTOM........................................................................................................................................1965
A.27.6 AUD-SWDLGROUP.........................................................................................................................................1966
A.27.7 RTRV-SWDLGROUP.......................................................................................................................................1967
A.27.8 ED-LOADSOFT.................................................................................................................................................1968
A.27.9 RTRV-LOADSOFT...........................................................................................................................................1969
A.27.10 RTRV-LOADSUPPORTINFO........................................................................................................................1970
A.27.11 ED-GROUPMODE..........................................................................................................................................1972
A.27.12 RTRV-GROUPSTATUS..................................................................................................................................1973
A.27.13 REPT^GROUPÂCTIVITED..........................................................................................................................1974
A.27.14 COMMIT-SW...................................................................................................................................................1976
A.27.15 COPY-RFILE...................................................................................................................................................1977
A.27.16 COPY-OLDVERFILE......................................................................................................................................1979
A.27.17 CPY-MEM........................................................................................................................................................1980
A.27.18 DLT-FILE.........................................................................................................................................................1981
A.27.19 ENT-SWDU-DUINFO.....................................................................................................................................1982
A.27.20 RESET-ACTGROUP.......................................................................................................................................1984
A.27.21 RTRV-FILE......................................................................................................................................................1984
A.27.22 RTRV-FPATROL-STATE...............................................................................................................................1986
A.27.23 RTRV-FREESPACE........................................................................................................................................1987
A.27.24 RTRV-SOFT-VER...........................................................................................................................................1988
A.27.25 RTRV-SWDU-DUINFO..................................................................................................................................1990
A.27.26 RTRV-SWDU-DUSTATE...............................................................................................................................1991
A.27.27 RTRV-UPGRADE-BDLIST............................................................................................................................1992
A.27.28 RTRV-PKGTYPE............................................................................................................................................1993
A.27.29 RTRV-PKGVER..............................................................................................................................................1995
A.27.30 RTRV-PKTSTAT.............................................................................................................................................1996
A.27.31 RTRV-STATE..................................................................................................................................................1997
A.27.32 REPT^BKPKG^START...................................................................................................................................2002
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xlix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.27.33 REPT^BKPKGÊND.......................................................................................................................................2003
A.27.34 REPTÊVTÂCTIVATED..............................................................................................................................2004
A.27.35 REPTÊVTÂUTOSWDL...............................................................................................................................2005
A.27.36 REPTÊVTÂUTOSYNC...............................................................................................................................2006
A.27.37 REPTÊVT^BDMATCHFAILED...................................................................................................................2008
A.27.38 REPTÊVT^BDSWDL....................................................................................................................................2009
A.27.39 REPTÊVT^COMMITEND............................................................................................................................2010
A.27.40 REPTÊVT^COMMITFAILED......................................................................................................................2011
A.27.41 REPTÊVT^COMMITRSLT...........................................................................................................................2012
A.27.42 REPTÊVT^CPYMEM....................................................................................................................................2013
A.27.43 REPTÊVT^FXFR...........................................................................................................................................2015
A.27.44 REPTÊVT^FXFRHALT................................................................................................................................2016
A.27.45 REPTÊVT^CPYMEMEND............................................................................................................................2017
A.27.46 REPTÊVTÎNIT.............................................................................................................................................2018
A.27.47 REPTÊVT^NOSWINPKG.............................................................................................................................2020
A.27.48 REPTÊVTÔFFLINEINPROCESS...............................................................................................................2021
A.27.49 REPTÊVT^PKGNOTSAME..........................................................................................................................2022
A.27.50 REPTÊVT^PROGRESS.................................................................................................................................2023
A.27.51 REPTÊVT^ROLLBACKSTART...................................................................................................................2024
A.27.52 REPTÊVT^ROLLBACKEND.......................................................................................................................2025
A.27.53 REPTÊVT^ROLLBACKRSLT......................................................................................................................2026
A.27.54 REPTÊVT^SLVMATCHFAILED.................................................................................................................2027
A.27.55 REPTÊVT^SWDL..........................................................................................................................................2028
A.27.56 ABT-COPY-END.............................................................................................................................................2031
A.27.57 RTRV-SWDL-ONLINEBDLIST.....................................................................................................................2032
A.27.58 RTRV-SWDL-DISTRIBUTEINFO.................................................................................................................2033
A.27.59 RTRV-SWDL-SUBGROUPSTATUS.............................................................................................................2034
A.27.60 RTRV-SWDL-SUBGROUP............................................................................................................................2036
A.27.61 RTRV-SWDL-BDLIST....................................................................................................................................2038
A.27.62 RTRV-SWDL-CUSTOM.................................................................................................................................2039
A.27.63 RTRV-SWDU-DUMODE................................................................................................................................2040
A.27.64 SET-FPATROL-STATE..................................................................................................................................2041
A.27.65 STA-NESOFT..................................................................................................................................................2042
A.28 Patch Management.................................................................................................................................................2043
A.28.1 ACT-PATCH......................................................................................................................................................2043
A.28.2 DEACT-PATCH.................................................................................................................................................2044
A.28.3 DLT-PATCH......................................................................................................................................................2046
A.28.4 LOAD-PATCH...................................................................................................................................................2047
A.28.5 RTRV-PATCH...................................................................................................................................................2048
A.28.6 RUN-PATCH.....................................................................................................................................................2049
A.28.7 SYNC-PATCH...................................................................................................................................................2051
A.28.8 LOAD-PATCHPKG...........................................................................................................................................2052
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential l

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.28.9 LOAD-PATCHPKGMEM.................................................................................................................................2053
A.28.10 ACT-PATCHPKG............................................................................................................................................2054
A.28.11 DEACT-PATCHPKG.......................................................................................................................................2055
A.28.12 RUN-PATCHPKG...........................................................................................................................................2057
A.28.13 DLT-PATCHPKG............................................................................................................................................2058
A.28.14 INST-PATCHPKG...........................................................................................................................................2059
A.28.15 ROLLBACK-PATCHPKG..............................................................................................................................2061
A.28.16 RTRV-PATCHPKG-INFO...............................................................................................................................2062
A.28.17 RTRV-PATCHPKG-STATE...........................................................................................................................2064
A.28.18 CHK-PATCHPKG...........................................................................................................................................2066
A.28.19 REPT^PATCHPKG..........................................................................................................................................2067
A.28.20 RTRV-PATCH-RESULT.................................................................................................................................2069
A.29 Database Management...........................................................................................................................................2070
A.29.1 CHECK-DBMS-CFDB......................................................................................................................................2070
A.29.2 COPY-DBMS-ALL............................................................................................................................................2071
A.29.3 RTRV-DBMS-AUTOBACKUP........................................................................................................................2073
A.29.4 SET-DBMS-AUTOBACKUP............................................................................................................................2074
A.29.5 RTRV-DBMS-BACKUPTIME..........................................................................................................................2075
A.29.6 ED-DBMS-CYCLEBACKUP............................................................................................................................2076
A.29.7 RTRV-DBMS-CYCLEBACKUP......................................................................................................................2077
A.29.8 RTRV-DBMS-DBF............................................................................................................................................2078
A.29.9 RTRV-DBMS-LIST...........................................................................................................................................2079
A.29.10 RTRV-DBMS-MODE......................................................................................................................................2081
A.29.11 RTRV-DBMS-NDBF.......................................................................................................................................2082
A.29.12 RTRV-DBMS-PMMODE................................................................................................................................2083
A.29.13 RTRV-DBMS-PERIOD...................................................................................................................................2084
A.29.14 RTRV-DBMS-RECNO....................................................................................................................................2085
A.30 Log Management...................................................................................................................................................2086
A.30.1 INIT-LOG...........................................................................................................................................................2086
A.30.2 RTRV-LOG........................................................................................................................................................2088
A.30.3 RTRV-AO...........................................................................................................................................................2089
A.30.4 RTRV-DBCHGSEQ...........................................................................................................................................2091
A.30.5 RTRV-ERRLOG................................................................................................................................................2092
A.30.6 RTRV-LOG-BYMOD........................................................................................................................................2093
A.30.7 RTRV-LOG-BYLEVEL.....................................................................................................................................2095
A.30.8 RTRV-LOG-BYTIME.......................................................................................................................................2097
A.30.9 TEST-DMM.......................................................................................................................................................2098
A.31 License Management.............................................................................................................................................2100
A.31.1 RTRV-LCS-INFO..............................................................................................................................................2100
A.31.2 RTRV-LCS-ESN................................................................................................................................................2102
A.31.3 RTRV-LCS-CTRLITEM....................................................................................................................................2103
A.31.4 VERIFY-LCSFILE.............................................................................................................................................2104
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential li

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.31.5 ACT-LCS............................................................................................................................................................2106
A.31.6 CANC-LCS.........................................................................................................................................................2107
A.31.7 ABT-LCS............................................................................................................................................................2108
A.31.8 ED-LICENSE.....................................................................................................................................................2109
A.31.9 RTRV-LICENSE................................................................................................................................................2111
A.32 TL1 Parameters......................................................................................................................................................2112
A.32.1 Port Numbering..................................................................................................................................................2112
A.32.1.1 Rule for Port Numbering.................................................................................................................................2112
A.32.1.2 Port Numbering on Transponder Cards...........................................................................................................2113
A.32.1.3 Port Numbering on Line Cards........................................................................................................................2119
A.32.1.4 Port Numbering on Tributary Cards................................................................................................................2120
A.32.1.5 Port Numbering on Other Cards......................................................................................................................2123
A.32.2 Access Identifier (AID)......................................................................................................................................2136
A.32.2.1 ALC.................................................................................................................................................................2136
A.32.2.2 APE..................................................................................................................................................................2140
A.32.2.3 CFP..................................................................................................................................................................2144
A.32.2.4 CLNT...............................................................................................................................................................2145
A.32.2.5 CRS-OHBYTE................................................................................................................................................2153
A.32.2.6 EC....................................................................................................................................................................2154
A.32.2.7 EQPT...............................................................................................................................................................2157
A.32.2.8 EQPT-PG.........................................................................................................................................................2174
A.32.2.9 FCMOD2.........................................................................................................................................................2174
A.32.2.10 FIBER............................................................................................................................................................2178
A.32.2.11 FFP.................................................................................................................................................................2196
A.32.2.12 GCC/DCC......................................................................................................................................................2224
A.32.2.13 IPA.................................................................................................................................................................2235
A.32.2.14 LPT................................................................................................................................................................2247
A.32.2.15 MCA..............................................................................................................................................................2252
A.32.2.16 OC..................................................................................................................................................................2253
A.32.2.17 OCH...............................................................................................................................................................2261
A.32.2.18 OCN/STMN...................................................................................................................................................2276
A.32.2.19 OMS...............................................................................................................................................................2281
A.32.2.20 OSC................................................................................................................................................................2285
A.32.2.21 OTS................................................................................................................................................................2287
A.32.2.22 OTUN............................................................................................................................................................2288
A.32.2.23 ODUN............................................................................................................................................................2298
A.32.2.24 OXC-NEPORT..............................................................................................................................................2321
A.32.2.25 PORT.............................................................................................................................................................2336
A.32.2.26 PROTNSW-EQPT.........................................................................................................................................2351
A.32.2.27 TDC...............................................................................................................................................................2352
A.32.2.28 TRAFFICMOD2............................................................................................................................................2355
A.32.2.29 TST................................................................................................................................................................2360
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential lii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.32.2.30 WDM.............................................................................................................................................................2371
A.32.3 Parameter Description........................................................................................................................................2382
A.32.3.1 ALARMTYPE.................................................................................................................................................2382
A.32.3.2 CONDTYPE....................................................................................................................................................2383
A.32.3.3 CONTTYPE....................................................................................................................................................2400
A.32.3.4 DEVICETYPE.................................................................................................................................................2401
A.32.3.5 DIRN................................................................................................................................................................2401
A.32.3.6 EVENTID........................................................................................................................................................2401
A.32.3.7 LPBKTYPE.....................................................................................................................................................2402
A.32.3.8 LTCACTEN....................................................................................................................................................2402
A.32.3.9 MOD2..............................................................................................................................................................2402
A.32.3.10 MONTYPE....................................................................................................................................................2403
A.32.3.11 OPRT.............................................................................................................................................................2412
A.32.3.12 PLDTYPE......................................................................................................................................................2413
A.32.3.13 PST_STATE..................................................................................................................................................2415
A.32.3.14 RVRTV..........................................................................................................................................................2415
A.32.3.15 SAFE..............................................................................................................................................................2415
A.32.3.16 SC..................................................................................................................................................................2415
A.32.3.17 SST_STATE..................................................................................................................................................2416
A.32.3.18 STATE...........................................................................................................................................................2418
A.32.3.19 STATELEVEL..............................................................................................................................................2419
A.32.3.20 SWITCHSTATE............................................................................................................................................2419
A.32.3.21 TYPE.............................................................................................................................................................2419
A.32.3.22 WORKMODE of Ethernet port.....................................................................................................................2420
A.32.3.23 WORKMODE of WDM equipment..............................................................................................................2421
A.33 Parameters Related to State Model........................................................................................................................2421
B Glossary....................................................................................................................................2425
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential liii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 1 Obtaining Latest Technical Documentation
1 Obtaining Latest Technical Documentation
This section explains how to obtain the latest technical documentations.

You can directly obtain the latest technical documentation from Huawei's technical support
website to help analyze and locate faults.
Website: http://support.huawei.com
Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 2 Compliance and Safety
2 Compliance and Safety
About This Chapter
2.1 Overview
When installing, operating, or maintaining Huawei equipment, follow the safety instructions
and take the essential safety precautions attached to the equipment or described in the product
documentation to prevent personal injuries.
2.2 Alarm and Safety Symbols
During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the alarm
and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage.
2.3 Electrical Safety
This section describes safety precautions regarding high voltage, thunderstorms, high leakage
current, power cables, fuses, and electrostatic discharge.
2.4 Inflammable Environment
This section describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
2.5 Battery
This section describes safety precautions you must take when performing operations on storage
batteries and lithium batteries.
2.6 Laser
When installing and maintaining equipment, observe the laser safety precautions to prevent
personal injury or equipment damage. Note that Huawei equipment complies with IEC 60825-1
and IEC 60825-2.
2.7 Short Circuit
Exercise caution where you place metallic tools so that you do not cause a short circuit in any
equipment.
2.8 ESD
During installation and maintenance, follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage:
2.9 Working at Heights
This section describes safety precautions you must take when working at heights.
2.10 Equipment Safety

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
This section describes safety precautions you must take when drilling holes, handling sharp
objects, performing operations on fans, or carrying heavy objects.
2.11 Working on Equipment with Power Applied
When you perform operations on the equipment when power is applied, ensure that you take the
safety precautions to prevent personal injury or equipment damage.
2.12 Miscellaneous
This section describes the safety precautions you must take when removing and reinstalling
boards, fibers and pluggable optical modules, bundling signal cables, and routing cables at a low
temperature.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2.1 Overview
When installing, operating, or maintaining Huawei equipment, follow the safety instructions
and take the essential safety precautions attached to the equipment or described in the product
documentation to prevent personal injuries.
DANGER
Before performing any operation, read the instructions and precautions carefully to prevent the
possibility of accidents. The Caution, Warning and Danger signs in other documents do not
cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. The most important safety precautions
are provided.
When operating equipment, adhere to the local laws and regulations. The precautions listed in
this chapter are in compliance with the local safety regulations.
When operating Huawei equipment, follow all the precautions and the special safety instructions
of Huawei.
General Installation Requirements

The personnel in charge of installation and maintenance must understand the basics of the safety
operations. Only trained and qualified personnel can install, operate, or maintain the equipment.
l Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to install, operate, and maintain Huawei
equipment.
l Only the qualified personnel are permitted to dismantle safety appliances and repair Huawei
devices.
l Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or swap
Huawei devices or parts of Huawei devices (including software).
l The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety
problems to the person in charge.
Grounding Requirements
The ground connections of Huawei equipment must comply with ETS 300 253 and GR 1089
CORE. The following requirements only apply to equipment that must be grounded:
l When installing a device, first connect the ground cable to the device. When uninstalling
the device, disconnect the ground cable lastly.
l Ensure that the ground conductor is intact.
l Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed ground conductor.
l Ensure that the device is permanently connected to the protection ground before operation.
Before operating the device, check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that
the device is properly grounded.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Human Safety
l Do not operate the device or cables during thunderstorm weather.
l To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits.
l Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, eyes may be hurt by laser
beams.
l Before operating a device, wear an ESD coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist strap. In
addition, get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches, to prevent electric
shock and burn.
l In case of fire, leave the building or site where the device is located and press the fire alarm
button or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the building on fire again
in any situation.
Equipment Safety
l Before performing any operation, install the equipment firmly on the ground or other rigid
objects, such as on a wall or in a rack.
l When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is unblocked.
l When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly.
l After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.
Safety Symbols
Safety symbols indicate the safety instructions that must be followed during the installation or
maintenance.
The safety symbols are divided into three levels: danger, warning, and caution.
l Danger: Indicates the possibility of a major accident if the safety instructions are ignored.
l Warning: Indicates the possibility of a major or severe injury, or equipment damage, if the
safety instructions are ignored.
l Caution: Indicates an injury might occur, or the equipment might be damaged, if the safety
instructions are ignored.
Table 2-1 Symbol description
Symbol Description Meaning
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if

not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,

could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance
degradation, or unexpected results.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2.2 Alarm and Safety Symbols

During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the alarm
and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage.
Table 2-2 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment.
Table 2-2 Symbols on the WDM equipment
Symbol Describes
ESD protection symbol.

You must wear an ESD wrist strap or glove to avoid
damage caused by electrostatic discharge to boards.
Laser level symbol.

Indicates the laser level and warns that laser beams
CAUTION can cause injuries to eyes.
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
Grounding symbol.
Indicates the position of the grounding point.
Fan warning symbol.

Warns you not to touch the fan blade until the fan
stops moving.
2.3 Electrical Safety

This section describes safety precautions regarding high voltage, thunderstorms, high leakage
current, power cables, fuses, and electrostatic discharge.
High Voltage
DANGER
The high voltage power supply provides power for the device operation. Direct or indirect contact
(through damp objects) with high voltage and AC mains supply may result in fatal danger.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l When installing the AC power supply facility, comply with the local safety regulations.
The personnel who install the AC facility must be qualified for performing high voltage
and AC operations.
l Do not wear articles that conduct electricity, such as watches, chains, bracelets and rings
when performing high voltage operations.
l Switch off the power supply immediately, if you find water in the rack or if the rack is
damp.
l Make sure that the device is kept away from water when being operated in a damp
environment.
CAUTION
Non-standard and improper high voltage operations may result in fire and electric shock.
Therefore, you must abide by the local rules and regulations when bridging and wiring AC cables
through a certain area. The personnel who perform high voltage operations must be qualified
for performing high voltage and AC operations.
Thunderstorm
DANGER
Do not perform any operation, including high voltage and AC operations, on a steel tower or
mast during a thunderstorm.
When there is a thunderstorm, the electromagnetic field generated in the thunderstorm area may
cause damage to electronic components. To prevent the device from being damaged by lightning,
use proper grounding.
High Electrical Leakage
WARNING
Ground the device before powering it on. Otherwise, personal injury or device damage may be
caused by high leakage current.
If a "high electrical leakage" tag is present on the power terminal of the device, you must ground
the device before powering it on.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Cable
DANGER
Do not install or remove power cables when the device is on. Transient contact between the core
of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arcs or sparks, which may cause fire
or hurt human eyes.
l Before bringing the power cable into the power distribution frame (PDF), bind the bare
parts of the power cable with insulating tapes.
l Before installing or removing the power cable, turn off the power switch.
l Before connecting a power cable, check that the label on the power cable is correct.
Fuse
WARNING
If a fuse is to be replaced, the new fuse must be the same type and have the same specifications
to ensure that equipment is running safely.
Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTION
The static electricity generated by human bodies may damage the electrostatic-sensitive
components on boards, for example, the large-scale integrated (LSI) circuits.
l Human body movement, friction between human bodies and clothes, friction between shoes
and floors, or handling of plastic articles causes static electromagnetic fields on human
bodies. These static electromagnetic fields cannot be eliminated until the static is
discharged.
l To prevent electrostatic-sensitive components from being damaged by the static on human
bodies, you must wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap when touching the device or
handling boards or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).
Figure 2-1shows how to wear an ESD wrist strap.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 2-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
2.4 Inflammable Environment

This section describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
DANGER
Do not place the device in an environment that has inflammable and explosive air or gas. Do
not perform any operation in this environment.
Operating the electrical device in an inflammable environment can be fatal.
2.5 Battery
batteries and lithium batteries.
2.5.1 Storage Battery

batteries.
DANGER
Before operating storage batteries, carefully read the safety precautions for battery handling and
connection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
CAUTION
Improper handling of storage batteries causes hazards.
l When operating storage batteries, avoid short circuit and overflow or leakage of the
electrolyte.
l Electrolyte overflow may damage the device. It will corrode metal parts and circuit boards,
and ultimately damage the device and cause short circuit of circuit boards.
l A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations on a storage battery may
cause a short-circuit, or even personal injuries.
Basic Precautions
Before installing and maintaining the battery, note the following:
l Use special insulation tools.
l Take care to protect your eyes when operating the device.
l Wear rubber gloves and a protective coat in case of electrolyte overflow.
l When handling a storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or reversing
the storage battery is prohibited.
l Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is
disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.
Short Circuit
DANGER
Battery short circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of ordinary batteries is
low, the instantaneous high current caused by the short circuit releases a great deal of energy.
CAUTION
Keep away metal objects, which may cause battery short circuit, from batteries. If metal objects
must be used, first disconnect the batteries in use before performing any other operations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Hazardous Gas
CAUTION
l Do not use unsealed lead acid storage batteries. Lead acid storage batteries must be placed
horizontally and stably to prevent the batteries from releasing flammable gas, which may
cause fire or erode the device.
l Lead acid storage batteries in use emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing
measures must be taken at the sites where lead acid storage batteries are used.
Battery Temperature
CAUTION
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may
overflow.
When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60ºC, check the battery for electrolyte
overflow. If the electrolyte overflows, absorb and counteract the electrolyte immediately.
Battery Leakage
CAUTION
When the electrolyte overflows, absorb and counteract the electrolyte immediately.
When moving or handling a battery whose electrolyte leaks, note that the leaking electrolyte
may hurt human bodies. When you find the electrolyte leaks, use the following substances to
counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte:
l Sodium bicarbonate (baking soda): NaHCO3

l Sodium carbonate (soda): Na2CO3
Select a substance to counteract and absorb the leaking electrolyte according to the instructions
of the battery manufacturer.
If any part of your body comes into contact with the battery acid, immediately rinse your skin
thoroughly with water. Seek medical help immediately in the event of a severe injury.
2.5.2 Lithium Battery

This section describes safety precautions that you must take when performing operations on
lithium batteries.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
WARNING
l There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Therefore, replace the
battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
l Exhausted lithium ion batteries must be disposed of according to the instructions.
l Do not throw lithium ion batteries into fire.
2.6 Laser
When installing and maintaining equipment, observe the laser safety precautions to prevent
personal injury or equipment damage. Note that Huawei equipment complies with IEC 60825-1
and IEC 60825-2.
Hazard levels
According to the laser output values, the laser hazard levels of Huawei equipment includes two
hazard levels: HAZARD LEVEL 1 and HAZARD LEVEL 1M. Table 2-3 shows the laser hazard
levels of the equipment.
Table 2-3 Hazard levels

Hazard Level Label Reference Power Precautions
Range
HAZARD LEVEL 1 – <10.00 dBm (<10.00 Lasers of hazard

mW) level 1 are safe under
reasonably
foreseeable
conditions of
operation.
HAZARD LEVEL 10.00 dBm - 21.3 Lasers of hazard

1M dBm (10.00 mW - level 1M are safe
CAUTION 136 mW) under reasonably
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION foreseeable
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
INSTRUMENTS
conditions of
operation but may be
hazardous if
observed using
optical aids.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Personal Injury
WARNING
The laser beam emitted from the optical interface is invisible infrared light, which may cause
permanent eye injury. During maintenance, do not stare at the optical interface.
DANGER
Laser beams from the optical ports on boards or from the fiber connectors cause eye damage.
Do not look directly at the optical ports or fiber connectors during the installation and
maintenance of boards or fibers. Do not shine laser beams into the eyes of other workers.
DANGER
The Raman amplifier board is very high. Shut down the pump laser before you insert or remove
fiber connectors on the Raman amplifier board to help prevent personal injury that is caused by
high optical power.
To prevent eye damage in the case of an optical port that is in use, use protective caps to cover
the optical interface and the fiber connector after you remove the fiber from the optical interface.
Laser transceivers are used in optical transmission systems and associated test tools. A bare
optical fiber can produce a laser beam, which has high power density but is invisible. Eyes will
be injured when a beam of light enters eyes.
Generally, looking at an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye
protection at a distance of greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. However, eyes may
be hurt if an optical aid such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to look at
an un-terminated optical fiber even though the distance is greater than 150 mm.
Equipment Damage
To prevent equipment damage when you handle the equipment, take the following precautions:
l Use protective caps to cover optical interfaces and optical connectors that are not in use.
l After you remove a fiber jumper from an optical interface, use protective caps to cover the
optical interface and the fiber jumper connector.
l Use an attenuator to prevent high optical power from damaging the optical receiver while
using a fiber jumper for the hardware loopback on an optical interface.
l Before using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR), remove the fiber jumper
between the opposite site and the optical interface . Such a measure also prevents high
optical power from damaging the optical receiver.
l Do not insert or remove a that is connected with a fiber.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
CAUTION
The optical power of the Raman amplifier board is very high. Observe the following precautions
when using the Raman amplifier board to prevent damage to the equipment.
l Do not use fiber connectors within 0–20 km. The fibers at every joint point must be spliced.
l The single-point additional loss within 0–10 km must be smaller than 0.1 dB (G.652) or 0.2
dB (G.655) and the single-point return loss must not be smaller than 40 dB.
l The single-point additional loss within 10–20 km must be smaller than 0.2 dB (G.652) or 0.4
dB (G.655) and the single-point return loss must not be smaller than 40 dB.
l Fiber connections must be complete before you enable the lasers on the Raman amplifier
board. Make sure that the fiber connectors are clean. Otherwise, the fiber connectors might
be damaged when you insert or remove the fiber connectors.
l The optical power of the LINE interface on the Raman amplifier board is very high. The
LSH/APC optical connectors must be used in the fiber that is connected to the LINE interface.
l For the Raman amplifier board with backward pump, the strong pump light enters the fiber
through the input end (LINE) instead of the output end (SYS). Do not add boards or non-
fiber devices, such as attenuators or fiber jumpers, at the input end.
l The bent radius of the fiber that is connected to the LINE interface on the Raman amplifier
board must be larger than 30 mm to prevent the fiber from being burned.
Safety Guidelines
Follow the following guidelines to avoid laser radiation:
l Only qualified personnel are allowed to perform laser-related operations.

l Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.
l Make sure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors.
l Do not look at the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure
whether the optical source is switched off or not.
l Use an optical power meter to check that the optical source is switched off and verify that
it is off by measuring the optical power.
l Before opening the front door of an optical transmission system, make sure that you are
not exposed to laser radiation.
l Do not use an optical aid such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to view
the optical connector or fiber.
Handling Fibers
Read the instructions before handling fibers:
l Only trained and qualified personnel can cut or splice fibers, check and clean fiber
connectors.
l Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical
source. After disconnecting the fiber, use protecting caps to protect all the optical
connectors.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2.7 Short Circuit

Exercise caution where you place metallic tools so that you do not cause a short circuit in any
equipment.
CAUTION
Do not place tools, such as screwdrivers, on the air baffle.
CAUTION
Ensure that screws do not fall off into the subrack or chassis.
2.8 ESD
During installation and maintenance, follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage:
l Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.
l Check that the equipment is securely grounded.
CAUTION
Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards. Make sure
that the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector into the ESD socket of the
equipment.
For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap, see Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the equipment port. For details, see the Quick Installation Guide.
When you are following antistatic procedures, take the following precautions:
l Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value must be between
0.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. If the wrist strap validity period (usually two years) has
expired, or if the resistance value fails to meet requirements, replace it with a wrist strap
that provides the required resistance value.
l Do not touch a board with your clothing. Clothing generates static electricity that is not
protected by the wrist strap.
l Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you replace boards or
chips. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Do not touch chips, circuits,
or pins with your bare hands.
l Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags. Place the
removed boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material. Do not use non-antistatic
materials such as white foams, common plastic bags, or paper bags to pack boards, and do
not let these materials touch the boards.
l Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESD-
sensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you connect
them to the ports.
l Keep packing materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the equipment room
for packing boards in the future.
ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000, EN 55022, EN 55024, IEC 61000 and GR-1089-
CORE.
2.9 Working at Heights

This section describes safety precautions you must take when working at heights.
WARNING
When working at heights, take proper measures to prevent objects from falling down.
The requirements for working at heights are as follows:
l The personnel who work at heights must have received corresponding training.
l Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling
down.
l Take safety measures. For example, wear a helmet and a safety belt.
l Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.
l Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are
intact.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2.9.1 Lifting Heavy Objects

This section describes safety precautions you must take when lifting heavy objects during
installation, operation, or maintenance.
WARNING
Do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects when heavy objects are being hoisted.
l Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.

l Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good
condition.
l Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or
wall with good weight capacity.
l Issue orders with short and explicit words to avoid misoperations.
l Ensure that the angle formed by two cables is not larger than 90 degrees. SeeFigure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Lifting heavy objects

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2.9.2 Using Ladders

This section describes safety precautions you must take when you have to operate with a ladder.
Checking a Ladder
l Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. Only the ladder in good
condition can be used.
l Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid
overweighing the ladder.
Placing a Ladder
The recommended gradient of a ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the gradient of the ladder
with an angle square or your arms. See Figure 2-4. When using a ladder, ensure that the wider
feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection measures for the ladder feet to prevent the
ladder from sliding. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.
Figure 2-4 Recommended gradient of a ladder
Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, observe the following points:
l Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two
long sides.
l To minimize the risk of falling, hold your balance on the ladder before any operation.
l Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).
If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the
roof. See Figure 2-5 .

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 2-5 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof
2.10 Equipment Safety

This section describes safety precautions you must take when drilling holes, handling sharp
objects, performing operations on fans, or carrying heavy objects.
Drilling Holes
WARNING
Do not drill the cabinet at will. Drilling holes without complying with the requirements affects
the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and damages the cables inside the
cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the cabinet, the printed circuit boards
(PCBs) may be short circuited.
l Before you drill a hole in the cabinet, wear insulated gloves and remove the internal cables
from the cabinet.
l Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent your eyes from being injured
by the splashing metal scraps.
l Wear protective gloves when drilling holes.
l Ensure that the scraps caused by drilling do not enter the cabinet. After drilling, clean the
metal scraps immediately.
Sharp Objects
WARNING
Before you hold or carry a device, wear protective gloves to avoid getting injured by sharp edges
of the device.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Handling Fans
l When replacing a component, place the component, screws, and tools in a safe place.
Otherwise, if any of them fall into the operating fans, the fans may be damaged.
l When replacing a component near fans, do not insert your fingers or boards into the
operating fans until the fans are switched off and stops running.
Lifting Heavy Objects
WARNING
l When carrying a heavy object, wear protective gloves to prevent hands from being hurt.
l Before carrying a heavy object, prevent yourself from being strained or pressed by the heavy
object.
l When pulling a chassis out of the cabinet, be cautious to the unstable or heavy objects on the
cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which may
hurt you.
l When carrying a heavy object such as a cabinet, use a tool such as a pallet truck.
l Two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is not allowed for only one person to carry a
heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, stretch your backs and move stably to avoid being
strained.
l When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold
the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules,
and boards.
2.11 Working on Equipment with Power Applied

When you perform operations on the equipment when power is applied, ensure that you take the
safety precautions to prevent personal injury or equipment damage.
DANGER
Do not install or disassemble equipment when power is applied.
DANGER
Do not install or disassemble power cables on equipment when power is applied.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2.12 Miscellaneous
This section describes the safety precautions you must take when removing and reinstalling
boards, fibers and pluggable optical modules, bundling signal cables, and routing cables at a low
temperature.
Installing and Removing a Board
CAUTION
When installing a board, use proper force to prevent the pins on the backplane from being leaned.
When installing or removing a board, note the following:

l Insert the board along the guide rails.
l Prevent the surface of a board from contacting the surface of another board. This is to
prevent the boards from being short-circuited or scratched.
l To prevent electrostatic-sensitive devices from being damaged by the ESD, do not touch
the circuits, components, connectors, or connection slots on boards.
Installing and Removing Fibers
WARNING
When a loopback test is performed at an optical port using a fiber jumper, the optical attenuation
must be increased to avoid damage to the equipment due to the extremely high optical power of
the laser. For a board which caters for an attenuator to be added, the attenuator must be added
to the receive optical port.
DANGER
Laser is dangerous. The light is not visible to the eyes with or without laser protective glasses.
Do not look into optical connectors or ports. Failure to follow this warning can cause damage
to the eyes, or even blindness.
DANGER
Raman amplifier emits strong light. Do not insert or remove the fiber connector when the laser
is working, to avoid damage to human body.
l The end face of the fiber must be clean.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l When connecting a fiber, insert the fiber gently into the optical port. When the optical power
is extremely high, an attenuator must be used to avoid damage to the optical port.
CAUTION
Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch any equipment or board. Make sure
that the wrist strap fully touches your skin. Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the ESD
socket in the subrack.
Installing and Removing a Pluggable Optical Module
DANGER
Cover a fiber with a protection cap immediately after you remove it.
CAUTION
Before you connect a fiber to a pluggable optical module, test the input optical power of the
module and confirm that the tested input optical power is within the normal range. Otherwise,
the input optical power might cross the overload point and the receiver optical module is burnt
and damaged.
The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm, which must be taken
with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged.
When installing or removing a board, note the following:

l Before removing an optical module, ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the ports
of the optical module are removed.
l Before inserting an optical module, ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the ports of
the optical module.
Binding Signal Cables
CAUTION
When binding signal cables, ensure that they are not mixed with high-current or high-voltage
cables. The space between two adjacent ties must be at least 30 mm.
Laying Cables
When the temperature is very low, violent strike or vibration may damage the cable sheathing.
To ensure safety, comply with the following requirements:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Cables can be laid or installed only when the temperature is higher than 0ºC.
l Before laying cables which have been stored in a temperature lower than 0ºC, move the
cables to an environment of the ambient temperature and store them at the ambient
temperature for at least 24 hours.
l Handle cables with caution, especially at a low temperature. Do not drop the cables directly
from the vehicle.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 3 Quick View of Product
3 Quick View of Product
About This Chapter
3.1 Product Appearance and Highlights

Each product in the OptiX OTN product series has their own highlights, addressing diverse
network requirements.
3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement
3.3 OptiX OSN 6800A Subrack and Power Requirement
3.4 OptiX OSN 3800A Chassis and Power Requirement
3.5 Frame
3.6 Overview of Boards
3.7 Quick Reference Table of the Units
Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical
amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.
3.8 Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards
This chapter describes the power consumption, weight and valid slots of the boards used in the
OptiX OSN 8800 system.
3.9 Housekeeping Alarms
Users can configure the severities for the eight alarm inputs to remotely monitor the alarms of
an external system. The alarms can be sent to a centralized alarm management system for
management. In addition, two housekeeping control interfaces are available for remotely
controlling external equipment such as air conditioners, fans, and electric generators.
3.10 Network Management
This chapter describes the network management system, as well as inter- and intra-NE
communication management.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.1 Product Appearance and Highlights

Each product in the OptiX OTN product series has their own highlights, addressing diverse
network requirements.
Table 3-1 Product appearance and highlights

OptiX OSN 8800 T64 The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 is mainly applicable to the backbone
layer or large-capacity aggregation layer.
l 2.56T ODUk (k=0,1,2,2e,3,flex) cross-connection capacity
l Max. wavelengths: 80 x 2.5G/10G/40G/100G (DWDM), 8 x
2.5G (CWDM)
l DWDM Max. distance without electrical regeneration:
– 10Gbit/s system: 32 span x 22 dB/span
l DWDM ultra long-haul single span:
– 10Gbit/s system: 1 span x 81 dB/span (with ROPA), 1 span
x 69 dB/span (without ROPA)
l Full service access over flexible shared 2.5G, 10G, 40G,
100G channels
l Non-block 2/4/9degree ROADM
l O&E hybrid switch facilitates the end-to-end free connection
with services pass-through, adding and dropping
l Service and equipment protections for high reliability
l "5A" automatic optical power management: ALC, AGC, APE,
IPA and OPA
l Simple E2E service provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is mainly applicable to the large-
capacity aggregation layer.
l 1.28T ODUk (k=0,1,2,2e,3,flex) cross-connection capacity
2.5G (CWDM)
100G channels
IPA and OPA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is mainly applicable to the large-
capacity aggregation layer.
l 640G ODUk (k=0,1,2,2e,3,flex) cross-connection capacity
2.5G (CWDM)
100G channels
IPA and OPA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
OptiX OSN 6800A The OptiX OSN 6800A is mainly applicable to the aggregation
layer or the backbone layer with average capacity.
l 360G ODUk (k=1,2,2e) cross-connection capacity.
l 180G GE or 360 10GE cross-connection capacity.
l Max. wavelengths: 80 x 2.5G/10G/40G/100G(DWDM), 8 x 5G
(CWDM)
l Full service access over flexible shared 2.5G, 10G,40G, 100G
channels
IPA and OPA
OptiX OSN 3800A The OptiX OSN 3800A is mainly applicable to the access layer.
l 4 x ODU1 or 4 x GE or 4 x Any cross-connection capacity.
l Max. wavelengths: 4 x 10G or 8 x 2.5G (DWDM), 8 x 5G
(CWDM)
l DWDM max. distance without electrical regeneration:10Gbit/s
system, 32 span x 22 dB/span
l DWDM ultra long-haul single span: 10Gbit/s system, 1 span x
69 dB/span
l Full service access over flexible shared 2.5G or 10G channels
l Service end-to-end configuration is available.
l "3A" automatic optical power management: ALC, AGC and
IPA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack and Power Requirement

3.2.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 Subrack
3.2.1.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Each subrack has independent
power supply.
Figure 3-2 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Table 3-2 describes the mechanical specifications of the 8800 T64 subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack structure (subrack door included)
Door

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-2 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack structure (subrack door excluded)
OSN 8800 T64
or
OSN 8800 T64
5 2
3
4
1. Board area 2. Fiber cabling area 3. Fan tray assembly

4. Air filter 5. Fiber spool 6. Mounting ear
l Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available.
l Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack.
l Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray
assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack.
The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and
related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 3.2.1.5 Fan and Heat Baffle.
l Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning. Air
filter features include:
– Dust arrest rating of of 85%.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
– Fire rating of UL94V-0.

– Preventing any air bypass.
l Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in
the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack.
l Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
Table 3-2 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Item Specification
Dimensions 498 mm (W) × 580 mm (D) × 900 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) × 22.8 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka) 65 kg (143 lb.)
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly
or air filter is installed.
3.2.1.2 Slot Description

The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provide 93 slots.
Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack are shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack

Front Back
IU91 IU93
A A
U SCC STG U SCC STG
IU EF
PIU PIU EFI2 X IU PIU PIU PIU PIU STI X IU ATE PIU PIU
73 I1
IU69 IU70 IU71 IU74 IU75 77 IU78 IU79 IU80 IU81 IU82 84 IU85 IU86 IU87 IU88 IU89
IU IU IU
72 76 83
IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
IU IU IU IU
9 10 43 44
IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
IU90 IU92
l : houses service boards and supports service cross-connections.

l IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the cross-connect board (XCT).
l IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the cross-connect board (SXM/SXH).
l IU73, IU77 and IU84 are reserved for future use.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l The following table provides the slots for housing active and standby boards of the subrack.
Board Slots for Active and Standby Boards
PIU IU69 & IU78, IU70 & IU79, IU80 & IU88, and IU81 &IU89
SCC IU74 & IU85
STG IU75 & IU86
SXM/SXH IU10 & IU44
XCT IU9 & IU43
3.2.1.3 Management Interfaces
The subrack provides various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management
and maintenance purposes, as shown in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Description of interfaces in the interface area

Boar Front Panel Power Interfaces Note
d Consumption
TN51 EFI1 Typical Power Network For detailed information, refer

EFI1 Consumption at management to 3.10.2 Management
25°C (77°F): 5 Winterface: Interfaces and Connections
NM_ETH2
Maximum Power NM_ETH2 of OptiX OSN 8800/6800A.

Consumption at Management serial
55°C (131°F): 7 interface: SERIAL
W
SERIAL
TN51 EFI2 Typical Power Alarm cascading For detailed information, refer
EFI2 Consumption at interfaces: LAMP1, to 3.10.2 Management
25°C (77°F): 13 LAMP2 Interfaces and Connections
W Network of OptiX OSN 8800/6800A.
LAMP1
ETH1
Maximum Power management

Consumption at interface:
LAMP2
ETH2
55°C (131°F): 15 NM_ETH1/ETH1/

W ETH2/ETH3
NM_ETH1
ETH3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

d Consumption
TNK ATE Typical Power Alarm input For detailed information, refer
2AT Consumption at interface to 3.9.1 OptiX OSN 8800
E A B C D 25°C (77°F): 5 W Housekeeping Alarm and
Maximum Power Control Interfaces.
1
2 Consumption at
3
4
55°C (131°F): 7
5 W
6
7
8
TNK STI Typical Power Alarm output For detailed information, refer
2STI Consumption at interface to 3.9.1 OptiX OSN 8800
A B C D 25°C (77°F): 1 WClock signal Housekeeping Alarm and
Maximum Power interface Control Interfaces.
1
2 Consumption at
3
4
55°C (131°F): 1
5 W
6
7
8
WARNING
The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection to
intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the equipment
or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or
its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type
4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 5) and require isolation from the exposed OSP
cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these
interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
3.2.1.4 Cross-Connect Capacities

Slots in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provide the same cross-connect capacity.
An OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack can cross-connect ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODU3,
and ODUflex granularities at the same time with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 2.56
Tbit/s. Slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, and IU45-IU68 provide the same cross-connect capacity and
each of the slots can cross-connect a maximum of 40 Gbit/s services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.2.1.5 Fan and Heat Baffle

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three
independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper
fan tray assembly does not. The user can withdraw, and replace each air filter.
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.
Functions and Features

Table 3-4 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Table 3-4 Functions

Function Description
Basic function Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that
the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature
range.
Commissioning control l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed

regulation, depending on the subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan
speed.
Section-dependent heat Each subrack is divided into six sections to provide efficient heat
dissipation dissipation. The fan speed in each section is independently
regulated.
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.
Alarming Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information.
Status checking Checks and reports on the fan status.
Working Principle
A fan tray assembly inside a subrack ventilates the subrack to ensure that the subrack works
effectively at an appropriate temperature. The fan tray assembly is located in the lower portion
of a subrack. It draws in air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other
boards in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air
duct. This design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Heat baffles allows for air to be drawn in
from the bottom of the subrack and direct the exhausted air to the top of the subrack. Figure
3-4 shows how ventilation is performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
Figure 3-4 shows how ventilation is performed in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-4 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Heat Baffle
Air outlet
Fan tray assembly
Board
Area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 3-5. The section-
dependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode
is recommended.
Table 3-5 FAN speed mode

FAN Speed Description
Mode
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for.
l Lower than 25°C (77°F): the fans run at low speed.
l Higher than 45°C (113°F): the fans run at high speed.
l 25°C to 45°C (77°F to 113° F): The fans automatically adjust their
rotation speeds. This mode can reduce noise and is power-saving.
Fan speed in each section is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal.
If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at
full speed.
When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed
among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section
rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the
query result.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Mode
Adjustable Speed Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed,
Mode Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode,
the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the
same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a
specific section.
Set the fan speed mode to STOP before removing or replacing an air
filter to prevent dust from entering the fan tray assembly.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has two sides. Each side has six sections. See Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 Section-dependent heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
IU91
IU93
Front Back
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN7 FAN8 FAN9
IU74 IU75 IU83 IU84 IU85 IU86

IU69 IU70 IU71 IU72 IU73 IU76 IU77 IU78 IU79 IU80 IU81 IU82 IU87 IU88 IU89
IU19 IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27 IU28 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU53 IU54 IU55 IU56 IU57 IU58 IU59 IU60 IU61 IU62 IU63 IU64 IU65 IU66 IU67 IU68
IU9 IU10 IU43 IU44
IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18 IU35 IU36 IU37 IU38 IU39 IU40 IU41 IU42 IU45 IU46 IU47 IU48 IU49 IU50 IU51 IU52
IU50 IU50
FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 FAN10 FAN11 FAN12
IU90
Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition 3 Partition 4 Partition 5 Partition 6 IU92
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).
Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same section (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run at
the same speed.
The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control unit. Figure 3-6 shows the functional
blocks of the fan tray assembly.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-6 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Speed adjusting Speed adjusting

signal signal
SCC Fan control unit

Status signal Status signal
FAN
External power External power

supply 1 supply 2
l FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
l Fan control board:
– Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals.
– Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case,
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed.
– Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan
tray assembly.
– Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the
fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 3-7 shows a fan tray assembly.
Figure 3-7 Fan tray assembly
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90 IU91,
IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly

Table 3-6 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the
same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 3-6 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly
Item Specification
Dimensions (H x W x D) 64.0 mm (2.5 in.) x 493.7 mm (19.4 in.) x 280.5 mm (11.0 in.)
Weight 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
Power Consumptiona l Low Speed: 70 W

l Medium-Low Speed: 95 W
l Medium Speed: 150 W
l Medium-High Speed: 225W
l High Speed: 270W
a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured,
rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully
configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high
ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 270 W.
3.2.1.6 Power Consumption

This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications.
Table 3-7 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
NOTE
For transport equipment, the heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered
the same. Heat consumption is expressed in BTU/h and power consumption is expressed in W. The
conversion between the two units is as follows: 1 BTU/h = 0.2931 W.
Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with
the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the room temperature. Maximum power consumption
indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in an environment with
extreme conditions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-7 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Item Value
Maximum subrack power consumptiona 6500 W
Typical configuration power consumption 3700 W
a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption
obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the
subrack.
Table 3-8 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX
OSN 8800 T64.
Table 3-8 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Unit Name Typical Maximum Remarks
Power Power
Consumptio Consumptio
n at 25°C (77° n at 55°C
F) (W)a (131°F) (W)a
OTU subrack 1 1804.6 2827.9 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x

AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
and 4 x fan tray assembly
OTU subrack 2 1686.7 2278.9 4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x

OTU electrical 2172.7 2822.9 2 x XCT, 2 x SXH, 8 x NS3, 2 x

cross-connect SCC, 2 x STG, 8 x PIU, 5 x TQX,
subrack 1 5 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x
EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray
assembly
OTU electrical 1839.1 2776.7 2 x XCT, 2 x SXM, 20 x NQ2, 1 x

cross-connect SCC, 8 x PIU, 5 x TOA, 5 x TQX,
subrack 2 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
ATE, and 4 x fan tray assembly
OTM subrack 1 963.78 1860.3 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1 x

OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 1 x
SC2, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1,
1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray
assembly

OBU1, 4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU,
2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Power Power
n at 25°C (77° n at 55°C
F) (W)a (131°F) (W)a
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and open rack is the value in a certain
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and
open rack is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
3.2.1.7 Power Requirement

This section describes the requirements on power supply, power cables, and ground cables.
Requirements on Voltage and Current

Table 3-9 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Table 3-9 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T64
Item Requirement
Rated working current 200 A (Independent power supplies to four

sections of each subrack, with 50A for each
section)
Nominal working voltage -48V DC
Working voltage range -40V DC to -57V DC
Maximum working current 240 A (Independent power supplies to four

section)
PIU
The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 8800/6800A,
the PIU board must be TN41PIU.
l Function
Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -57 V. Provides lightning protection and
power filtering functions.
l Front Panel
Appearance of the Front Panel

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-8 Front panel of the PIU board
PIU
PWR
RTN(+) REG(-)
Indicators: Power indicator (PWR) - green

l Valid Slots
Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, IU88, and IU89
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 IU20 and IU23
OptiX OSN 6800A IU21 and IU25
l Specifications
– Performance Specifications
Table 3-10 Performance specifications of the PIU board
Item Unit Value
Number of DC input power supplies - 1
Input DC power voltage range V DC -40 to -57
Input DC power current A ≤60
– Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight: 0.7 kg (1.54 lb.)
– Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Maximum Power

Consumption at 25°C Consumption at 55°C
(77°F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN41PIU 45 45

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Cables
l Power cables
The power cable uses a two-hole OT terminal to connect to the PIU board of each OptiX
OSN 8800/6800A subrack, as shown in Figure 3-9.
NOTE
Select the OT terminals and determine the power cable diameters and colors based on the network
configuration. Ensure that the diameters of the OT terminals match the power cable diameters.
Figure 3-9 Two-hole OT terminals on the OptiX OSN 8800/6800A power cable
NOTE
Two-hole OT terminals are installed on PIU terminal sockets. A PIU terminal socket is 0.49 inch wide and so
two-hole OT terminal's width cannot exceed 0.49 inch.
l Ground cables
The ground cable of each OptiX OSN 8800/6800A uses a two-hole OT terminal, as shown
in Figure 3-10. The subrack, DCM frame, and heat baffle each has a ground point. For
details on how to connect ground cables, see Quick Installation Guide.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-10 OT terminal on the ground cable of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800A
M6 screw
0.25 inch
Subrack
0.75 inch
0.75
inch
Two-hole OT terminal
M6(0.25 inch)

In this document, "OptiX OSN 8800 T32" refers to both enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and
general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks unless otherwise specified. Table 3-11 shows you how
to distinguish between the "Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32" and "General OptiX OSN 8800
T32" subracks.
Table 3-11 Classification of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks

Subrack Type Subrack Label Display on the NMS
Enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 "OSN8800 T32 Enhanced"

OSN 8800 T32
T32
General OptiX OSN 8800 "OSN8800 T32 Standard"

OSN 8800 T32
T32
3.2.2.1 Structure
power supply.
Figure 3-12 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-11 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack structure diagram (subrack door included)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-12 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack structure diagram (subrack door excluded)
1
6
3
4

NOTE
A subrack identified by "Enhanced" is an enhanced OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack. If the subrack is not identified
by "Enhanced", it is a general OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
l Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate subrack status.
NOTE
– Dust arrest rating of of 85%.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Item Specification

(19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka) 35 kg (77.1 lb.)


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
IU51
AUX STG STG

EFI2 EFI1 PIU PIU PIU PIU STI ATE
IU37 IU38 IU39 IU40 IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44 IU45 IU46 IU47 IU48
SCC
IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU35 IU36
Cross-connect board
Cross-connect board
IU28
SCC or service board
IU9 IU10
IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18 IU19
IU11
IU50

l IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the cross-connect board (XCH).
l IU43 is reserved for future use.
PIU IU39 & IU45 and IU40 & IU46
SCC IU28 & IU11
STG IU42 & IU44
XCH IU9 & IU10

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

d Consumption
TN51 EFI1 Typical Power Network For detailed information, refer

EFI1 Consumption at management to 3.10.2 Management
25°C (77°F): 5 Winterface: Interfaces and Connections
NM_ETH2
Maximum Power NM_ETH2 of OptiX OSN 8800/6800A.

Consumption at Management serial
55°C (131°F): 7 interface: SERIAL
W
SERIAL
TN51 EFI2 Typical Power Alarm cascading For detailed information, refer
EFI2 Consumption at interfaces: LAMP1, to 3.10.2 Management
25°C (77°F): 13 LAMP2 Interfaces and Connections
W Network of OptiX OSN 8800/6800A.
LAMP1
ETH1
Maximum Power management

Consumption at interface:
LAMP2
ETH2
55°C (131°F): 15 NM_ETH1/ETH1/

W ETH2/ETH3
NM_ETH1
ETH3
TNK ATE Typical Power Alarm input For detailed information, refer
2AT Consumption at interface to 3.9.1 OptiX OSN 8800
E A B C D 25°C (77°F): 5 W Housekeeping Alarm and
Maximum Power Control Interfaces.
1
2 Consumption at
3
4
55°C (131°F): 7
5 W
6
7
8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

d Consumption
TNK STI Typical Power Alarm output For detailed information, refer
2STI Consumption at interface to 3.9.1 OptiX OSN 8800
A B C D 25°C (77°F): 1 WClock signal Housekeeping Alarm and
Maximum Power interface Control Interfaces.
1
2 Consumption at
3
4
55°C (131°F): 1
5 W
6
7
8
WARNING

and ODUflex granularities at the same time with the maximum cross-connect capacity of 1.28
Tbit/s. Slots IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 provide the same cross-connect capacity and
each of the slots can cross-connect a maximum of 40 Gbit/s services. In later versions, a single
slot will support a maximum of 100 Gbit/s cross-connect capacities and a single subrack will be
able to provide a maximum of 3.2 Tbit/s cross-connect capacities.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan tray assemblies, each of which includes three
independent fans. In each subrack, the lower fan tray assembly has an air filter, but the upper
fan tray assembly does not have an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and replaced.
Version Description


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-14 Functions
range.

speed.
Partitioned heat Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide
dissipation efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is
independently regulated.
Working Principle
A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack
works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part
of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards
in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This
design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Heat baffles will cause air to be drawn from the bottom
of the subrack and direct hot fan exhaust to the top of the subrack.Figure 3-14 shows the heat
dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Heat Baffle
Air outlet
Fan tray assembly
Board
Area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 3-15. The section-
dependent speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. The Auto Speed Mode
is recommended.

Mode
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each section is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the section that the fans are targeted for.
Fan speed in each section is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signal is abnormal.
If one of the fans in one section fails, the other fans in this section run at
full speed.
When the user queries the fan speed using the NMS, the highest fan speed
among all sections is displayed. In other words, if the fans in one section
rotate at high speed, the NMS displays the fan speed as high speed in the
query result.
Adjustable Speed Six fan speeds are supported: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low Speed,
Mode Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. In this mode,
the user manually sets the fan speed and fans in all sections run at the
same speed. The user cannot independently set the fan speed for a
specific section.
Set the fan speed mode to STOP before removing or replacing an air
filter to prevent dust from entering the fan tray assembly.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See
Figure 3-15.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-15 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 IU51
IU37 IU38 IU39 IU40 IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44 IU45 IU46 IU47 IU48
IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27 IU28 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU35 IU36
IU9 IU10
IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18 IU19
IU50
FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 IU50
Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition 3
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
l One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run
at the same speed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

signal signal

FAN

supply 1 supply 2
fan tray assembly.
tray assembly.
Appearance
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the lower fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and
IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

NOTE
Item Specification

l High Speed: 270W

Table 3-17 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
NOTE
extreme conditions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Item Value
Recommended typical configuration power 2000 W

consumption
subrack.
Table 3-18 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an OptiX
OSN 8800 T32.
Unit Name Typical Power Maximum Power Remarks
Consumption at Consumption at
25°C (77°F) (W)a 55°C (131°F) (W)a
OTU subrack 1 1633.4 2254.6 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x

PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1
x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x
fan tray assembly
OTU subrack 2 1351.8 1701.3 4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU,

1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x
EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x fan
tray assembly
OTU electrical 1641.6 2166.5 2 x XCH, 20 x NQ2, 1 x

cross-connect SCC, 4 x PIU, 5 x TQX, 5
subrack 1 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x
EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
OTU electrical 2039.8 2466.5 2 x XCH, 8 x NS3, 2 x

subrack 2 x TOA, ,2 x STG, 1 x
AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2,
1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray
assembly
OTM subrack 1 792.5 1287.1 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x

OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 23 x
10G OTU (LSX), 1 x
SCC, 4 x PIUs, 1 x AUX,
1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
ATE, and 2 x fan tray
assembly

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

25°C (77°F) (W)a 55°C (131°F) (W)a

OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 4 x
LSC, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1
x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x
tray assembl in an OTM
subrack.
OLA subrack 290.3 706 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x

SC2, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1
tray assembly
OADM 974 1497.2 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 16

subrack x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x
tray assembly
378.2 811 2 x M40V, 2 x D40, 2 x

FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x RMU9,
2 x WSM9, 2 x OAU1, 2
x OBU1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU,
tray assembly
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack is the value in a certain configuration.
The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the subrack is a calculation
based on the power consumption of each module.


Table 3-19 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Item Requirement
Rated working current 100 A (Independent power supplies to two

section)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Requirement
Maximum working current 120 A (Independent power supplies to two

section)
PIU
l Function
l Front Panel
PIU
PWR
RTN(+) REG(-)

l Valid Slots
Product Valid Slots
l Specifications

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Item Unit Value
in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))
(77°F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN41PIU 45 45
Cables
l Power cables
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
l Ground cables
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
M6 screw
0.25 inch
Subrack
0.75 inch
0.75
inch
M6(0.25 inch)
3.2.3.1 Structure
power supply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-21 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack structure (subrack door included)
Door

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-22 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack structure (subrack door excluded)
1
6
2
5
3
4

l Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate fan status and related information.
NOTE
– Dust arrest rating of 85%.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Item Specification

(19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 17.7 in. (H))

IU19 IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24

EFI PIU AUX AUX PIU ATE
IU9 IU10
IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
IU25 FAN

l IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the TN16XCH or for the other service boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions
as a slave subrack.
If slots IU9 and IU10 are used to house service boards, install a special filler panel in each slot first
PIU IU20 & IU23
TN16XCH IU9 & IU10
AUX IU21 & IU22

Boa Front Panel Power Interfaces Note
rd Consumption
TN1 Typical Power Network For detailed

6EFI EFI
Consumption at management information,
25°C (77°F): 2 W interface: refer to 3.10.2
NM_ETH1/ Management
LAMP1
Maximum Power
ETH1
SERIAL
Consumption at NM_ETH2/ Interfaces

55°C (131°F): 2.5 ETH1/ETH2/ and
LAMP2
ETH2
W ETH3 Connections
Management of OptiX
OSN
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
serial interface:
ETH3
SERIAL 8800/6800A.
Alarm cascading
interfaces:
LAMP1,
LAMP2
TN4 Typical Power Alarm input For detailed

ATE
1AT Consumption at interface information,
E A B C D E F G H 25°C (77°F): 0.3 Alarm output refer to 3.9.1
W interface OptiX OSN
1
2 Maximum Power 8800
3 Clock signal Housekeepin
4
Consumption at interface
55°C (131°F): 0.3 g Alarm and
5
6 W Control
7 Interfaces.
8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
WARNING

and ODUflex granularities at the same time with a maximum cross-connect capacity of 640 Gbit/
s. Slots IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU18 provide the same cross-connect capacity and each of the slots
supports a maximum of 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent
fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and replaced.
Version Description

Table 3-23 Functions
range.

speed.
Partitioned heat Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Working Principle
A fan tray assembly inside a subrack dissipates heat for the subrack to ensure that the subrack
works effectively at a specified temperature. The fan tray assembly is located on the lower part
of a subrack. It blows air into the subrack, forming an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards
in the subrack are installed vertically. In other words, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This
design ensures reliable heat dissipation. Heat baffles will cause air to be drawn from the bottom
of the subrack and direct hot fan exhaust to the top of the subrack. Figure 3-24 shows the heat
dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

Air deflector
Air o utlet
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Airinlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 3-24. The
partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that
you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Mode
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed.
Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.
If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed.
Adjustable Speed Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low
Mode Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You
can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in
all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned
manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure
3-25.
Figure 3-25 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
IU19 IU20 IU21 IU23 IU24

IU22
EFI PIU AUX PIU ATE
IU9 IU10
IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Fan tray
A B C D E
assembly
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two
fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive
hours in an environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).
Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.

signal signal

FAN

supply 1 supply 2
fan tray assembly.
tray assembly.
Appearance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (ten in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

NOTE

Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W)
x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))
Power Consumptiona l Low Speed: 42.7 W

l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W
l Medium Speed: 106.8 W
l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W
l High Speed: 215 W

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Table 3-26 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN8800 T16 subrack.
NOTE
extreme conditions.

Item Specification
subrack.
Table 3-27 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an 8800
T16.
Unit Typical Maximum Remarks
Name Power Power
Consumpt Consumpt
ion at 25°C ion at 55°C
(77°F) (W)a (131°F)
(W)a
OTU 509.2 615.6 8 x 10G OTU (LDX), 1 x XCH,

subrack 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
1 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly
OTU 1107.8 1432.7 4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 2 x PIU,

subrack 2 x AUX, 1×EFI, 1 x ATE,
2 and 1 x fan tray assembly

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Unit Typical Maximum Remarks

Name Power Power
Consumpt Consumpt
ion at 25°C ion at 55°C
(77°F) (W)a (131°F)
(W)a
OTU 501 808 5 x NQ2, 2 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x TQX,

electrica 2 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
l cross- 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly
connect
subrack
1
OTU 862.8 1180.7 2 x XCH, 4 x 55NS3, 2 x PIU,

electrica 1 x TQX, 2 x TOA, 2 x AUX,
l cross- 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly
connect
subrack
2
OTM 468.7 569.7 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1,

subrack 1 x OBU1, 6 x LDX, 1 x XCH,
1 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray assembly
OTM 675.8 967.7 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1,

subrack 1 x OBU1, 2 x LSC, 2 x SCC,
2 2 x PIU, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
OLA 228.1 294.3 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2,

subrack 2 x FIU, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU,
1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,
OADM 449.5 561.5 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 2 x FIU,

subrack 8 x LSX, 1 x SC2, 1 x XCH,
2 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
221 269.2 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x WSMD9,

1 x DAS1, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU,
1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain
cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


Table 3-28 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack.
Item Requirement
Rated working current 37.5 A
Maximum working current 45A
PIU
l Function
l Front Panel
PIU
PWR
RTN(+) REG(-)

l Valid Slots

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Product Valid Slots
l Specifications

Item Unit Value
in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))
(77°F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN41PIU 45 45
Cables
l Power cables
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
l Ground cables
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
M6 screw
0.25 inch
Subrack
0.75 inch
0.75
inch
M6(0.25 inch)
3.3 OptiX OSN 6800A Subrack and Power Requirement

3.3.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800A. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800A has an independent power supply.
Figure 3-31 OptiX OSN 6800A subrack structure (subrack door included)
Door

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-32 OptiX OSN 6800A subrack structure (subrack door excluded)
1. Indicator 2. Board area 3. Air filter

4. Fiber cabling area 5. Fan tray 6. Fiber spool
7. Mounting ear
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel
before you connect cables.
l Indicator: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.
l Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 20 slots are available.
l Air filter: The air filter protects the subrack from dust in the air. Air filter features include
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on the side of the open rack.
l Fan tray assembly: The fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and
heat dissipation for the subrack.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 3.3.5 Fan and Heat Baffle.
l Mounting ear: The mounting ears attach the subrack to the open rack.
l Interface area: The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management
interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface,
alarm input and output interface. It is located behind the subrack indicator panel.
Table 3-30 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800A subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-30 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800A

Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 444 mm (H)

(19.44 in. (W) × 11.61 in. (D) × 17.48 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka) 15 kg (33.07 lb)
3.3.2 Slot Description

The board area and interface area of the OptiX OSN 6800A subrack provides 25 slots.
Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 Slots of the subrack

PIU EFI2 EFI1 ATE PIU

IU19
XCS XCS SCC

AUX
IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16
IU20
IU9 IU10 IU17 IU18
AUX
Fan
Paired slots Mutual backup

l Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the
buses on the backplanes. OptiX OSN 6800 supports seven pair slots. The pair slots support
distributed grooming.
3.3.3 Management Interfaces

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Boa Front Panel Power Interfaces Note
rd Consumption
TN5 EFI1 Typical Power Network For detailed

1EFI Consumption at management information,
1 25°C (77°F): 5 W interface: refer to 3.10.2
NM_ETH2
Maximum Power NM_ETH2 Management

Consumption at Management Interfaces
55°C (131°F): 7 serial interface: and
W SERIAL Connections
SERIAL
of OptiX OSN
8800/6800A.
TN5 EFI2 Typical Power Alarm cascading For detailed

1EFI Consumption at interfaces: information,
2 25°C (77°F): 13 LAMP1, refer to 3.10.2
W LAMP2 Management
LAMP1
ETH1
Maximum Power Network Interfaces

Consumption at management and
LAMP2
ETH2
55°C (131°F): 15 interface: Connections

W NM_ETH1/ of OptiX OSN
ETH1/ETH2 8800/6800A.
NM_ETH1
ETH3
TN4 Typical Power Alarm input For detailed

ATE
1AT Consumption at interface information,
E A B C D E F G H 25°C (77°F): 0.3 Alarm output refer to 3.9.2
W interface OptiX OSN
1
2 Maximum Power 6800A
3 Clock signal Housekeepin
4
Consumption at interface
55°C (131°F): 0.3 g Alarm and
5
6 W Control
7 Interfaces.
8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
WARNING
3.3.4 Cross-Connect Capacities

The slots in an OptiX OSN 6800A subrack vary in cross-connect capacities.
Integrated Grooming
When using the XCS board, an OptiX OSN 6800A subrack can cross-connect ODU1,
ODU2,ODU2e, 10GE, and GE services between any two slots among slots IU1-IU8 and slots
IU11-IU16. Figure 3-34 provides the cross-connect capacity for each slot.
Figure 3-34 Cross-connect capacities of slots

PIU EFI2 EFI1 ATE PIU

IU19
XCS XCS SCC

AUX
IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16
IU20
IU9 IU10 IU17 IU18
AUX
Fan
Table 3-32 describes the cross-connect capacities of an OptiX OSN 6800A subrack when
TN12XCS boards are configured in the subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-32 Cross-connect capacity of OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
Slot Maximum Cross-Connect Capacity of Maximum Cross-Connect

Each Slot Capacity of Subrack
ODU1/ODU2/ GE
ODU2e/10GE
40Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 280 Gbit/s GE

360 Gbit/s ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/
20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s
10GE
0Gbit/s 0Gbit/s Supports hybrid transmission of the
above-mentioned services with the
maximum cross-connect capacity of
360 Gbit/s.
Distributed Grooming
An OptiX OSN 6800A subrack provides seven pairs of slots: IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5
and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. GE/Any/ODU1/OTU1
services can be cross-connected between paired slots. No XCS board is required when paired
slots are used to cross-connect electrical services.
3.3.5 Fan and Heat Baffle

Each OptiX OSN 6800A subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent
fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and replaced.
Version Description

Table 3-33 Functions of a fan tray assembly
Basic function Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate
normally within the designated temperature range.

speed.
Partitioned heat Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.
Working Principle
Air flow from the subrack is bottom intake top exhaust. Heat baffles will cause air to be drawn
from the bottom of the subrack and direct hot fan exhaust to the top of the subrack. Figure
3-35 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 6800A.
Figure 3-35 Subrack with heat baffles

Air deflector
Air o utlet
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Airinlet
The OptiX OSN 6800A supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 3-34. The partitioned
speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the
speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Mode
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed.
Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.
If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed.
Adjustable Speed Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium
Mode Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In
Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed
and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
Set the fan speed mode to Stop before you replace an air filter to prevent
dust from entering the fan.
Each OptiX OSN 6800A subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The
subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure
3-36.
Figure 3-36 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800A subrack
IU19
IU1 IU2 IU3 IU4 IU5 IU6 IU7 IU8 IU9 IU10 IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18
IU20
A B C D E IU26

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate
heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
l If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
l Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if:
Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 3-37 shows the
functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.

signal signal

FAN

supply 1 supply 2
fan tray assembly.
– Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals.
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at
full speed.
– Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of
the fan tray assembly.
Appearance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (ten in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly is IU26.

Table 3-35 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800A fan tray assembly.
NOTE
Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm

(H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in.
(H))
Weight 3.6 kg (7.9 lb)

l High Speed: 120 W

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.3.6 Power Consumption

Table 3-36 describes the power consumption of an 6800A subrack.
NOTE
same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
extreme conditions.
Table 3-36 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800A

Item Value
Maximum subrack power consumption 1600 W
Table 3-37 lists the power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 6800A.
Table 3-37 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 6800A
Power Power
Consumpti Consumpti
on at 25°C on at 55°C
(77°F)a (131°F)a
Su OTU subrack 597.8 739.9 The power consumed after you

bra install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one
ck SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one
fan tray assembly in an OTU
subrack.
OT Subrack 597.8 739.9 The power consumed after you

M 1 install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one
subr SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one
ack fan tray assembly in an OTM
subrack.
Subrack 200.5 299.3 The power consumed after you

2 install one M40V, one D40, one
OAU101, one OBU103, one FIU,
one SC1, one SCC, two PIUs, one
AUX, and one fan tray assembly
in an OTM subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Power Power
Consumpti Consumpti
(77°F)a (131°F)a
OLA subrack 176.7 271.6 The power consumed after you

install two OAU101s, two FIUs,
in an OLA subrack.
FOADM 324.1 436 The power consumed after you

subrack install two OAU101s, two VA4s,
two OBU103s, two MR4s, four
10G OTUs (LSXes), two FIUs,
in an FOADM subrack.
RO Subrack 260.2 363.7 The power consumed after you

AD 1 install one M40V, one D40, two
M WSMD2s, two OBU103s, two
subr OAU101s, one SC2, two FIUs,
ack one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and
(two one fan tray assembly in an
dime ROADM subrack.
nsio
ns) Subrack 597.8 739.9 The power consumed after you
2 install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one
SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one
fan tray assembly in an ROADM
subrack.

AD 1 install one WSMD4, one DAS1,
M one M40, one D40, one SCC, two
subr PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray
ack assembly in an ROADM subrack.
(four
dime Subrack 186.8 281.5 The power consumed after you
nsio 2 install one WSMD4, one DAS1,
ns)b one M40, one D40, one SCC, two
PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray
assembly in an ROADM subrack.

3 install one WSMD4, one DAS1,
one M40, one D40, one SCC, two

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Power Power
Consumpti Consumpti
(77°F)a (131°F)a

OTN Optical 200.5 299.3 The power consumed after you

subr subrack install one M40V, one D40, one
ack OBU103, one OAU101, one SC1,
one FIU, one SCC, two PIUs, one
in an OTN subrack.
Electrica 588.8 741.5 The power consumed after you

l subrack install ten ND2s, two TQXes, two
TOMs, two XCSes, one SCC, two
assembly in an OTN subrack.
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis
and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
b: Subrack 1 and subrack 2 are used as subracks in the line dimensions at a four-dimension
RADOM station; subrack 3 and subrack 4 are used as subracks for adding/dropping local
services. Service boards can be configured in another subrack.
3.3.7 Power Requirement


Table 3-38 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 6800A subrack.
Table 3-38 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 6800A

Item Requirement
Rated working current 33 A
Nominal working voltage -48 V DC
Working voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC
Maximum working current 40 A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
PIU
l Function
l Front Panel
PIU
PWR
RTN(+) REG(-)

l Valid Slots
Product Valid Slots
l Specifications
Item Unit Value

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))
(77°F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN41PIU 45 45
Cables
l Power cables
NOTE
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Ground cables
NOTE
M6 screw
0.25 inch
Subrack
0.75 inch
0.75
inch
M6(0.25 inch)
3.4 OptiX OSN 3800A Chassis and Power Requirement
3.4.1 Chassis Structure

The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800A compact
intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800A for short).
The chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800A can operate with an independent DC or AC power supply
and can be installed in a 19 and 23-inch open rack.
Figure 3-42 and Figure 3-43 show appearance of the OptiX OSN 3800A chassis .
Table 3-40 describes the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800A chassis.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-42 Appearance of an OptiX OSN 3800A chassis (chassis door included)
Door

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-43 Appearance of an OptiX OSN 3800A chassis (chassis door excluded)
6
2
7
1
1. Fiber frame 2. Mounting ear 3. Board area 4. Fan indicator
5. Air filter 6. Airduct frame 7. Rotary fiber routing rack
NOTE
When an OptiX OSN 3800A chassis is installed in a 19-inch open rack, an airduct frame cannot be installed in
the chassis; when the OptiX OSN 3800A chassis is installed in a 23-inch open rack, an airduct frame is optional.
l Fiber frame: Fiber jumpers in the service board area are routed through the fiber frame.
l Mounting ears: Mounting ears attach the chassis in the open rack.
l Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. In total, 11 slots are available.
l Fan indicator: The fan indicator indicates the status of the fans.
l Air filter: The air filter prevents dust from entering the chassis.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Item Specification
Dimensions 436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134

mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in.
(D) x 5.28 in. (H)
Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane) 6 kg (13.23 lb.)
3.4.2 Slot Description

The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right.
Slots of the chassis are shown in Figure 3-44 and Figure 3-45.
Figure 3-44 Slots of the chassis (DC power)
IU1 IU11 IU6/PIU

IU2 IU7/PIU
FAN IU3 IU8/SCC
IU4 IU9/SCC
IU5 IU10/AUX
Paired slots Mesh group Mutual backup
Figure 3-45 Slots of the chassis (AC power)
IU1 IU11
IU6/APIU
IU2
FAN IU3 IU7/APIU
IU4 IU9/SCC
IU5 IU10/AUX
Paired slots Mesh group Mutual backup

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
l : service boards.
l Slots IU1 and IU11 can be used as two independent slots, each for housing an FOADM board with a height
of 118.9 mm (4.7 in.). They can be also used as one slot for housing a service board with a height of 264.6
mm (10.4 in.). When the two slots are used as one slot, the slot ID is represented as IU11.
l Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses on the
backplanes.
l A mesh group refers to a group of slots housing the boards whose overhead can be processed by the buses
on the backplane.
3.4.3 Management Interfaces

The chassis provides various communication and maintenance interfaces for the management

d Consumpti
on
TN22 Typical Network For detailed information,

AUX STAT
Power management refer to 3.10.2 Management
/ PROG
Consumptio interface: Interfaces and Connections
TN61 n at 25°C NM_ETH2/ of OptiX OSN 8800/6800A.
AUX (77°F): 15 W NM_ETH2
NM_ETH1
Maximum Management
Power serial
NM_ETH2
Consumptio interface:
n at 55°C SERIAL
(131°F): 17 Alarm input
W interface:
ALMI1/
ALMI2
EXT
NOTE
EXT
interfaces
include
AUX ETH,
SERIAL,
ALMI1, and
ALMI2. The
ETH
interface is
reserved for
future use.
Therefore,
do not
connect a
cable to the
ETH
interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
WARNING
3.4.4 Fan
Each OptiX OSN 3800A chassis has one fan tray assembly, which includes six independent fans
and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and replaced.
Version Description

Table 3-42 shows the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Table 3-42 Functions of a fan tray assembly

Basic function Dissipates heat generated by the equipment

so that the equipment can operate normally
within the designated temperature range.
Commissioning control l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic

fan speed regulation, depending on the
subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can
manually adjust the fan speed.
NOTE
Only when the chassis accesses DC power, Fan
speed control is available..
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping function for the

fan tray assembly.
Alarming Reports alarms of the fans and reports the in-

service information.
Status checking Checks the fan status.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Working Principle
Air flow from the subrack is left intake right exhaust. Heat baffles will cause air to be drawn
from the bottom of the subrack and direct hot fan exhaust to the top of the subrack. Figure
3-46 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 3800A.
Figure 3-46 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system
The OptiX OSN 3800A supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 3-43. It is
recommended that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.

Mode
Auto Speed Mode The fan speed depends on the temperature.

l 45°C (113°F) to 65°C (149°F): the fans run at medium speed.
Adjustable Speed Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium
Mode Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In
Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed
and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
NOTE
l If any one of the six fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
l Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if:
Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly.
The fan tray assembly consists of six fans and one fan control unit. Figure 3-47 shows the
functional block of the fan tray assembly.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Status signal
Speed adjusting signal

Fan control unit
Status signal
Speed adjusting signal FAN

supply 1 supply 2
l FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the chassis. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
– Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals.
– Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm.
– Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of
Appearance
Figure 3-48 Appearance of a fan tray assembly
1. Fans (6 in total) 2. Operating status indicator

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU12.

Table 3-44 list the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly for the OptiX OSN
3800A system.
NOTE

Item Specification
Dimensions 41.0 mm (W) x 262.6 mm (D) x 126.5 mm (H) (1.61 in. (W) x
10.34 in. (D) x 4.98 in. (H))

l High Speed: 32.7 W
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.
3.4.5 AC Power Consumption

This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX
OSN 3800A when the equipment runs on AC power.
Table 3-45 describes the AC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800A chassis.
NOTE
extreme conditions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-45 AC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800A
Item Value
Maximum power consumption 384 W
Table 3-46 AC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN
3800A

Power Power
Consump Consumpti
tion at 25° on at 55°C
C (77°F) (131°F)
OADM Chassis 1 162.2 207.5 2 x TN21MR2, 4 x 2.5 Gbit/s

chassis OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x
(Using the AUX, and 1 x fan tray assembly.
APIU)
Chassis 2 117.7 154.5 1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OAU101,
1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and
1 x fan tray assembly.
OLA chassis (Using the 119.7 156.7 1 x DFIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x OBU103,

APIU) 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration.
The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated
3.4.6 AC Power Requirement

This section describes the requirements on power supply and power cables when the equipment
runs on AC power.
Requirements on AC Voltage and Current

Table 3-47 provides the requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800A
chassis.
Table 3-47 Requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800A
Item Requirement
Nominal working voltage 110 V AC

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Requirement
Working voltage range 90 V AC to 285 V AC
Maximum working current 4.3 A
APIU
The APIU board receives and provides AC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 3800A, the
APIU board must be TN21APIU.
l Function:
Accesses AC power in a range from 90 V to 285 V. Provides lightning protection and power
filtering functions.
l Front Panel:
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the APIU board
APIU
RUN
OFF
ON
~100-240V
S1 S11 APIU
S5 AUX
S4 SCC
S3 APIU
S2
Indicator: Running status indicator (RUN) - green

l Valid Slots:
IU6, IU7 and IU8 together house two APIU boards. That is, each APIU requires 1.5 slots.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Specifications:
Table 3-48 Performance specifications of the APIU
Item Unit Value
Input power voltage range V 90 to 285

(AC)
Input frequency Hz 50
Input power current A ≤4

(AC)
Output rated voltage V -48

(DC)
Output rated current A 6.3

(DC)
Output power W 300
Dimensions of front panel: 37.5 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) or 1.5 in. (H) x
3.9 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D)
Weight: 0.8 kg (1.8lb.)

(77°F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN21APIU 50 55
Cables
Figure 3-50 shows an AC power cable for OptiX OSN 3800A.
NOTE
Determine the power cable diameters and colors based on the network configuration
Figure 3-50 AC power cable

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.4.7 DC Power Consumption

This section provides the maximum and typical power consumption specifications of OptiX
OSN 3800A when the equipment runs on DC power.
Table 3-49 describes the DC power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800A chassis.
NOTE
same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
extreme conditions.
Table 3-49 DC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800A
Item Value
Table 3-50 DC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN
3800A

Power Power
Consump Consumpti
C (77°F) (131°F)

chassis OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x
PIU)
1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and

PIU) 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.4.8 DC Power Requirement

This section describes the requirements on power supply, power cables, and ground cables when
the equipment runs on DC power.
Requirements on DC Voltage and Current

Table 3-51 provides the requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800A
chassis.
Table 3-51 Requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800A

Item Requirement
Rated working current 8A
PIU
The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN 3800A, the PIU
board must be TN61PIU.
l Function:
l Front Panel:

RTN
PWR
-48 V
10 A
S1 S11
S6
S5
S4
S2
SCC
SCC
AUX
PIU
PIU
Do not hot
plug this unit！
PIU

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Indicator: Running status indicator (PWR) - green

l Valid Slots:
IU6 and IU7
l Specifications:
Table 3-52 Performance specifications of the PIU

Item Unit Value
Input DC power voltage range V -40 to -57
Input DC power current A ≤ 12
Dimensions of front panel: 218.50 mm (H) x 107.76 in. (W) or 8.6 in. (H) x 4.2 in. (W)
(77°F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN61PIU 19 21
Cables
l Power cables
The power cable uses a one-hole OT terminal to connect to the PIU board of each OptiX
OSN 3800A chassis, as shown in Figure 3-52.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-52 One-hole OT terminal on the OptiX OSN 3800A power cable
0.164 inch
One-hole OT terminal
M4(Stude Size #8,0.164)
M4 screw Power cable PIU
NOTE
One-hole OT terminals are installed on PIU terminal sockets. A PIU terminal socket is 0.51 inch wide and so
l Ground cables
The ground cable of each OptiX OSN 3800A chassis uses a one-hole OT terminal, as shown
in Figure 3-53. The chassis, DCM frame, and heat baffle each has a ground point.
NOTE
Figure 3-53 OT terminal on the ground cable of the OptiX OSN 3800A chassis
M4 screw
0.164 inch
Chassis
0.625 inch
0.625
inch
M4(Stud size #8, 0.164)
3.5 Frame

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.5.1 DCM Frame and DCM Module

The DCM frame is used to hold DCM modules. DCM modules compensate for the positive
dispersion of transmitting fiber, to help maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is expanded
because of the accumulation of the positive dispersion. An expanded pulse has a negative impact
on system transmission performance. A dispersion compensation module (DCM) is a passive
device that compensates for dispersion. DCMs use the inherent negative dispersion of a
dispersion compensation fiber to offset the positive dispersion of a transmission fiber to prevent
pulse expansion.
The system provides two types of DCMs: those using dispersion compensation fibers (DCFs)
and those that use fiber Bragg grating (FBG) technology.
The DCMs are available in different compensation distance specifications: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10
km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km
(62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1 mi.).
Each DCM frame holds two DCM modules. The DCM frame is installed on the columns of an
open rack with mounting airs and screws, as shown in Figure 3-54 and Figure 3-55.
Figure 3-54 DCM frame for 23–inch open rack
1 2
1. DCM frame 2. DCMs
Figure 3-55 DCM frame for 19–inch open rack
1 2
1. DCM frame 2. DCM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-53 Performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation optical fibers (G.
652 fibers)
DCM Distance Max. DSC PMD PD Max. Operatin

Module (mi./km) Inserti R (ps) L Allowed g
on Loss (dB Powera Wavelen
(dB) ) (dBm) gth (nm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2.3 90% 0.3 0.1 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(T) 6.2/10 2.8 110% 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 8 0.7 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 9 0.8 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 9.8 0.8 0.1 20
FBG-DCM 49.7/80 4 1.0 0.2 23

(80)
FBG-DCM 62.1/100 4 1.0 0.2 23

(100)
FBG-DCM 74.5/120 4 1.0 0.2 23

(120)
FBG-DCM 99.4/160 8 1.6 0.4 23

(160)
FBG-DCM 124.2/200 8 1.6 0.4 23

(200)
FBG-DCM 149.1/240 8 1.6 0.4 23

(240)
a: The Max. Allowed Power refers to the maximum input optical power that the optical module
can receive without being damaged.
655 LEAF fibers)

DCM(A) 12.4/20 4 90% 0.4 0.3 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(B) 24.8/40 5 110% 0.5 0.3 20

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

DCM(C) 37.3/60 5.9 0.7 0.3 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 6.9 0.8 0.3 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 7.8 0.9 0.3 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 8.8 1.0 0.3 20
FBG-DCM 74.5/120 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(120)
FBG-DCM 99.4/160 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(160)
FBG-DCM 124.2/200 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(200)
FBG-DCM 149.1/240 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(240)
653 fibers)
DCM Distance Max. DSC PMD PDL Max. Opera
Module (mi./km) Insert R (ps) (dB) Allowe ting
ion d Wavel
Loss Powera ength
(dB) (dBm) (nm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2 90% 0.2 0.1 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(T) 6.2/10 3 110% 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 5 0.5 0.1 20

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-56 Performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation optical fibers (TW-
RS fibers)
DCM Module Distance Max. DSC PMD PDL Max. Opera
(mi./km) Insert R (ps) (dB) Allowe ting
ion d Wavel
Loss Powera ength
(dB) (dBm) (nm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 2.3 90% 0.3 0.1 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(B) 24.8/40 2.8 110% 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 3.8 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 4.2 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
Table 3-57 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame

Item Specification
Dimensions l DCM frame for 23–inch open rack: 50.0 mm (H) x 536.0 mm (W)
x 375.0 mm (D) (2.0 in. (H) x 21.1 in. (W) x 14.8 in. (D))
l DCM frame for 19–inch open rack: 48.0 mm (H) x 436.0 mm (W)
x 280.0 mm (D) 1.9 in. (H) x 17.2 in. (W) x 11 in. (D)
Weight l DCM frame for 23–inch open rack: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
l DCM frame for 19–inch open rack: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)
H = Height, W = Width, D = Depth
3.5.2 CRPC Frame

The CRPC frame is used to hold the CRPC board, fan tray assembly, and power distribution
box. The frame is installed into the open rack.
Figure 3-56 shows the appearance of a CRPC frame. In the middle of the frame, the one with
the front panel is the CRPC board. The fan tray assembly is at the left of the board. At the right
are two power supplies as mutual backup.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-56 CRPC frame
1: Fan tray assembly 2: CRPC board 3: Power distribution box
Table 3-58 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame
Item Value
Mechanical specifications 535 mm (W) x 257 mm (D) x 86 mm (H) or 21.1 in.

(W) x 10.1 in. (D) x 3.4 in. (H)
Weight 3 kg (6.6 lb)
3.6 Overview of Boards
3.6.1 Appearance and Dimensions

This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.
CAUTION
Always wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap when holding a board to prevent static from
damaging the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-59 shows the appearance and dimensions of the different board types.
Table 3-59 Board appearance and dimensions

Board Appearance Board Name Numbe Heig Wi Dep
r of ht dt th
Slots (mm h (m
Per /in.) (m m/
Board m/ in.)
in.
)
Width TN11L4G 1 264.6 25. 220.

/10.4 4/1 0/8.
.0 7
Height
Depth
TN11OAU1 2 264.6 50. 220.

Width
/10.4 8 0/8.
7
Height
Depth
Width TN11M40 3 264.6 76. 220.

/10.4 2 0/8.
7
Height
Depth

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Board Appearance Board Name Numbe Heig Wi Dep

r of ht dt th
Slots (mm h (m
Per /in.) (m m/
Board m/ in.)
in.
)
Width TN21MR4 1 118.9 25. 220.

/4.7 4/1 0/8.
.0 7
Height
Depth
3.6.2 Symbols on Boards

This section describes the symbols on boards.
Table 3-60 Symbols on Boards

Label Type Description
Laser safety class label Indicates that the laser

safety class of boards is
HAZARD LEVEL 1M
CAUTION and there may be laser
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE radiation. It warns
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH users not to directly
INSTRUMENTS
look into fiber
connectors without
taking any protection
measures; instead an
optical instrument that
can attenuate optical
power must be used.
Fiber type label Applies to TN11LTX,

G.657A2 FIBER ONLY TN12LSC, and
只能使用G.657A2 光纤
TN55NS3 boards. It
specifies the fiber type
for the boards.
NOTE
To prevent the cabinet
door from squeezing
fibers, the board can
only use G.657A2
fibers.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Label Type Description
Warning label Applies to CRPC

警告: 开启电源前，务必连好光纤
boards. It provides
! WARNING : FIBERS MUST
BE CONNECTED SEFORE precautions for the
boards.
POWER UP
Heat hazard label Indicates that the board

surface temperature is
high and it may cause
body injury.
3.6.3 Bar Code Overview

There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code.
The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure 3-57 and Figure 3-58 show the bar codes of boards installed with optical modules.
Figure 3-59 and Figure 3-60 show the bar codes of boards not installed with optical modules.
Figure 3-57 Description of the bar code (example 1)

Delivery Board version Board model
information (TN12) number
2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG

Serial number
Manufacture month
Vendor
Manufacture year
BOM Environmental Board Characteristic

friendliness flag name code
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Delivery Board version Board model
information (TN12) number
2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT
Serial number
Manufacture month
Vendor
Manufacture year
BOM Environmental Board Tunable Characteristic
friendliness flag name code
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Delivery Board version Board

information (TN12) name
2103070768107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01

Serial number
Manufacture month
Vendor
Manufacture year
BOM Environmental Board model

friendliness flag number
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Third and fourth Delivery Board version Board

numbers of the BOM information (TN12) name
030HFY 108A000199 Y TN12 LSX T01
Serial number
Manufacture month
Vendor
Manufacture year
The complete BOM Environmental Board model
should be 0303OHFY. friendliness flag number
"03" are taken out in the (Y: Environmentally
BOM above. friendly)
The first four numbers in the board BOM indicate whether the board is installed with an optical
module. Table 3-61 provides the meanings of the first four numbers in the board BOM.
Table 3-61 Meanings of the first four numbers in the BOMs for boards
Board First Four Description First Four Numbers
Configuration Numbers in in the BOM of the
the board Required Optical
BOM Module
Board not installed 0303 The board is installed 3406 or 0303 (client
with optical modules with a wavelength side)
tunable optical module
on its WDM side.
Client-side optical
modules need to be
selected as required for
the board.
0303 The board is not 3406 or 0303 (client side

installed with any and WDM side)
optical module. WDM-
and client-side optical
modules need to be
selected for the board as
required.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Board First Four Description First Four Numbers

Configuration Numbers in in the BOM of the
the board Required Optical
BOM Module
0307 The board is installed 3406 or 0303 (client

with a fixed optical side)
module on its WDM
side. Client-side optical
modules need to be
required.
0302 The board is not 3406 or 0303 (client side

installed with any and WDM side)
optical module. WDM-
and client-side optical
modules need to be
required.
Board installed with 0231 Optical modules are N/A

optical modules installed on the client
and WDM sides of the
board.
Table 3-62 provides the description of the delivery information.
Table 3-62 Description of the delivery information of a board

Item Description
Vendor Indicates the vendor of a board. "10" indicates Huawei.
Manufacture Year Indicates the last digit of the year when a board is manufactured.
For example, "4" indicates 2004. From 2010 onwards, a letter is
used to indicate the manufacture year. For example, the letter A
indicates 2010, the letter B indicates 2011, and so on.
Manufacture Month Indicates the month when a board is manufactured. The value is
expressed in hexadecimal format. For example, the letter B
indicates November.
Serial Number Indicates the production serial number of a board. The value ranges
from 000001 to 999999.
3.6.4 OptiX OSN 8800 Board Category

The following types of boards are available for the system.
Table 3-63 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-63 Boards for the OptiX OSN 8800

Board Board Board Description OptiX OptiX OptiX
Category Name OSN OSN OSN
8800 8800 T32 8800 T16
T64
Optical TN12LDX 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit Y Y Y

transponder
unit TN11LEM 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Y Y Y
24 switch board
TN11LEX 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet switch board Y Y Y

4
TN11LOA 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Y Y Y

Conversion Board
TN11LOG 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit Y Y N
TN12LOG Y Y Y
TN11LO 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical Y Y N

M wavelength conversion board
TN12LO Y Y Y
M
TN13LQ 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) Y Y N

M wavelength conversion unit

MD wavelength conversion unit, dual fed and
selective receiving

MS wavelength conversion unit, single fed and
single receiving
TN12LSC 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board Y Y Y
TN11LSQ 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board Y Y Y
TN12LSX 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit Y Y N
TN13LSX Y Y Y
TN12LSX 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board Y Y N

L
TN15LSX Y Y N
L
TN12LSX 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit Y Y N

LR
TN11LSX 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit Y Y N

R

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

8800 8800 T32 8800 T16
T64
TN11LTX 10-Port 10Gbit/s Service Multiplexing & Y Y Y

Optical Wavelength Conversion Board
TN12LW arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength Y Y Y

XS conversion board (single transmit)
TN11TM 4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 Y Y N

X asynchronism mux OTU-2 wavelength
conversion board
TN12TM Y Y Y
X
Tributary TN52TDX 2 x 10G tributary service processing board Y Y Y

unit
TN53TDX Y Y Y
TN54TEM 24xGE+4x10GE Ethernet tributary unit Y Y Y

28
TN54TOA 8 Any-rate Ports Service Processing Board Y Y Y
TN52TOG 8 x GE tributary service processing board Y Y Y
TN52TO 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board Y Y Y

M
TN52TQX 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board Y Y Y
TN53TQX Y Y Y
TN55TQX Y Y Y
TN53TSX 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board Y Y Y

L
TN54TSX Y Y Y
L
Line unit TN52ND2 2 x 10G line service processing board Y Y Y
TN53ND2 Y Y Y
TN52NQ2 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board Y Y N
TN53NQ2 Y Y Y
TN54NQ2 Y Y Y
TN52NS2 10G Line Service Processing Board Y Y N
TN53NS2 Y Y Y
TN52NS3 40G line service processing board Y Y N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

8800 8800 T32 8800 T16
T64
TN54NS3 Y Y Y
TN55NS3 Y Y Y
PID unit TN54ENQ 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board Y Y Y

2
TN55NPO 12 x OTU2 PID Board Y Y Y

2
TN55NPO 10G PID line service processing board, 20– Y Y Y

2E channel extended
Cross- TN16XCH OptiX OSN 8800 T16 centralized cross N N Y

connect connect board
unit and
system and TNK2SX OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross Y N N
communica M connect board
tion unit TN52XCH OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross N Y N
connect board
TNK2XC OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross Y N N

T connect board
TNK4XC Y N N
T
TN16SCC system control and communication unit N N Y
TN51SCC N Y N
d
TN52SCC N Y N
TNK2SCC Y N N
TN16AUX system auxiliary interface unit N N Y
TN51AUX Y Y N
TNK4SX OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross Y N N

H connect board
Optical TN11M40 40-channel multiplexing unit Y Y Y

multiplexer
and TN12M40 Y Y Y
demultiple TN11D40 40-channel demultiplexing unit Y Y Y
xer unit
TN12D40 Y Y Y
TN11M40 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA Y Y Y

V

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

8800 8800 T32 8800 T16
T64
TN12M40 Y Y Y
V
TN11D40 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA Y Y N

V
TN13FIU fiber interface unit Y Y Y
TN14FIU Y Y Y
TN11ITL interleaver board Y Y Y
Fixed TN11CM CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop Y Y Y

optical add R2 multiplexing unit
and drop
multiplexin TN11CM CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop Y Y Y
g unit R4 multiplexing unit
TN11DM CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/ Y Y N

R1 drop multiplexing board
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit Y Y Y
TN11MR8 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit Y Y N

V with VOA
TN11SBM 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional Y Y N

2 add/drop board
Reconfigur TN11RDU 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board Y Y Y

able optical 9
add and
drop TN11RM 9-port ROADM multiplexing board Y Y Y
multiplexin U9a
g unit
TN11ROA reconfigurable optical adding board Y Y N
M
TN12WS 9-port wavelength selective switching Y Y Y

D9 demultiplexing board
TN13WS Y Y Y
D9
TN12WS 9-port wavelength selective switching Y Y Y

M9 multiplexing board
TN13WS Y Y Y
M9

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

8800 8800 T32 8800 T16
T64
TN11WS 2-port wavelength selective switching Y Y N

MD2 multiplexer and demultiplexer board
TN11WS 4-port wavelength selective switching Y Y N

MD4 multiplexer and demultiplexer board
TN12WS Y Y Y
MD4
TN11WS 9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and Y Y Y

MD9 demultiplexing board
Optical TN11CRP case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C- Y Y Y

amplifier C band
unit
TN11DAS optical amplifier unit Y Y Y
1
TN11HBA high-power booster amplifier board Y Y Y
TN11OAU optical amplifier unit Y Y N

1
TN12OAU Y Y Y
1
TN13OAU Y Y Y
1
TN11OBU optical booster unit Y Y N

1
TN12OBU Y Y Y
1
TN11OBU Y Y N
2
TN12OBU Y Y Y
2
TN11RAU backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid Y Y Y

1 optical amplifier unit
Optical TN11HSC high power unidirectional optical supervisory Y Y Y

supervisory 1 channel board
channel
unit TN12SC1 unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit Y Y Y
TN12SC2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit Y Y Y
TN11ST2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel and Y Y Y

timing transmission unit

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

8800 8800 T32 8800 T16
T64
Optical TN12DCP 2-channel optical path protection unit Y Y Y

protection
unit TN12OLP optical line protection unit Y Y Y
TN11SCS sync optical channel separator unit Y Y Y
Spectrum TN11MC 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit Y Y Y

analyzer A4
unit
TN11MC 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit Y Y Y
A8
TN11OPM 8-channel optical power monitoring board Y Y Y

8
TN11WM wavelength monitoring unit Y Y Y

U
Variable TN12VA1 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit Y Y Y

optical
attenuator TN12VA4 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit Y Y Y
unit
Optical TN11DCU dispersion compensation board Y Y Y

power and
dispersion TN11TDC single-wavelength tunable-dispersion Y Y Y
equalizing compensation board
unit
Clock unit TN52STG centralized clock board N Y N
TNK2STG Y N N
ROPA TN11GFU gain flatness unit Y Y Y

subsystem
unitb TN11RGU ROPA gain unit Y Y Y
TN11ROP ROPA pumping unit Y Y Y
Interface TNK2ATE interface board of alarm & timing & expanding Y Y N

area unitc
TN41ATE interface board of alarm & timing & expanding N N Y
TN16EFI EMI filter interface board N N Y
TN51EFI1 Y Y N
TN51EFI2 Y Y N
TNK2STI interface board of alarm & timing & expanding Y Y N
TN41PIU power interface unit Y Y Y

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

8800 8800 T32 8800 T16
T64
a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902.
b: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA System.
c: For details of the interface area unit refer to Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces.
d:TN51SCC only supports General OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
3.6.5 OptiX OSN 6800A Board Category

Table 3-64 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 6800A.
Table 3-64 Boards for the OptiX OSN 6800A
Board Board Name Board Description

Category
Optical TN11L4G Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit

transponder Ethernet line capacity
unit
TN12LDX 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN11LEM24 22×GE + 2×10GE and 2×OTU2 ethernet switch board
TN11LEX4 4×10GE and 2×OTU2 ethernet switch board
TN11LOA 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board
TN11LOG 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
TN12LOG
TN11LOM 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength

conversion board
TN12LOM
TN11LQG 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
TN13LQM 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion unit
TN12LQMD 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LQMS 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion unit, single fed and single receiving
TN12LSC 100Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
TN11LSQ 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Category
TN12LSX 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN13LSX
TN12LSXL 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
TN12LSXLR 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
TN11LSXR 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
TN11LTX 10-Port 10Gbit/s service multiplexing & optical

wavelength conversion board
TN12LWXS arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion board (single transmit)
TN11TMX 4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux

OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
TN12TMX
Tributary unit TN11TBE 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board
TN12TDX 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
TN52TDX
TN53TDX
TN52TOG 8 x GE tributary service processing board
TN11TOM 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
TN52TOM
TN12TQM 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
TN11TQX 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
TN52TQX
TN55TQX
TN11TSXL 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
Line unit TN11ND2 2 x 10G line service processing board
TN12ND2
TN52ND2
TN53ND2
TN51NQ2 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
TN52NQ2
TN53NQ2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Category
TN12NS2 10G Line Service Processing Board
TN52NS2
TN53NS2
TN11NS3 40G line service processing board
TN52NS3
TN54NS3
TN55NS3
Cross-connect TN12XCS centralized cross connect board

unit and
system and TN51SCC system control and communication unit
communicatio TN52SCC
n unit
TN41AUX system auxiliary interface unit
Optical TN11M40 40-channel multiplexing unit

multiplexer
and TN12M40
demultiplexer TN11D40 40-channel demultiplexing unit
unit
TN12D40
TN11M40V 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
TN12M40V
TN11D40V 40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA
TN13FIU fiber interface unit
TN14FIU
TN11ITL interleaver board
Optical add TN11CMR2 CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

and drop
multiplexing TN11CMR4 CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
unit TN11DMR1 CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop
multiplexing board
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
TN11MR8V 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Category
TN11SBM2 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop

board
Reconfigurabl TN11RDU9 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board

e optical add
and drop TN11RMU9 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
multiplexing TN11ROAM reconfigurable optical adding board
unit
TN12WSD9 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing
board
TN13WSD9
TN12WSM9 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
TN13WSM9
TN11WSMD2 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and

demultiplexer board
TN11WSMD4 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and

demultiplexer board
TN12WSMD4
TN11WSMD9 9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and

demultiplexing board
Optical TN11CRPC case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band

amplifier unit
TN11DAS1 optical amplifier unit
TN11HBA high-power booster amplifier board
TN11OAU1 optical amplifier unit
TN12OAU1
TN13OAU1
TN11OBU1 optical booster unit
TN12OBU1
TN12OBU2
TN11RAU1 backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical

amplifier unit
Optical TN11HSC1 high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel

supervisory board
channel unit
TN12SC1 unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Category
TN11ST2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing

transmission unit
Optical TN12DCP 2-channel optical path protection unit

protection unit
TN12OLP optical line protection unit
TN11SCS sync optical channel separator unit
Spectrum TN11MCA4 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

analyzer unit
TN11MCA8 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit
TN11OPM8 8-channel optical power monitoring board
TN11WMU wavelength monitoring unit
Variable TN12VA1 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

optical
attenuator unit TN12VA4 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Optical power TN11DCU dispersion compensation board

and dispersion
equalizing unit TN11TDC single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation
board
ROPA TN11GFU gain flatness unit

subsystem
unita TN11RGU ROPA gain unit
TN11ROP ROPA pumping unit
Interface area TN41ATE interface board of alarm & timing & expanding
unitb
TN51EFI1 EMI filter interface board
TN51EFI2 EMI filter interface board
TN41PIU power interface unit
a: For the details of the ROPA subsystem unit, refer to ROPA System.
b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 3.3 OptiX OSN 6800A Subrack and
Power Requirement.
3.6.6 OptiX OSN 3800A Board Category

Table 3-65 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 3800A.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-65 Boards for the OptiX OSN 3800A

Category
Optical TN11L4G Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit

transponder Ethernet line capacity
unit
TN12LDX 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN11LOA 8 x Any-rate MUX OTU2 Wavelength Conversion Board
TN11LOG 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
TN12LOG
TN11LOM 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength

conversion board
TN12LOM
TN11LQG 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
TN13LQM 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion unit
TN12LQMD 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LQMS 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion unit, single fed and single receiving
TN12LSX 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN13LSX
TN11LSXR 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
TN12LWXS arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion board (single transmit)
TN11TMX 4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux

OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
TN12TMX
Tributary unit TN11TBE 10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board
TN52TOG 8 x GE tributary service processing board
TN11TOM 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
TN52TOM
TN12TQM 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
Line unit TN12NS2 10G Line Service Processing Board
TN52NS2
TN53NS2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Category
Optical TN21DFIU bidirectional fiber interface board

multiplexer
and TN13FIUa fiber interface unit
demultiplexer
TN14FIU
unit
TN21FIU
Optical add TN21CMR1 CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

and drop
multiplexing TN11CMR2 CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
unit TN21CMR2
TN11CMR4 CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
TN21CMR4
TN11DMR1 CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop

multiplexing board
TN21DMR1
TN21MR2
TN21MR4
TN11SBM2 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop

board
Optical TN11DAS1 optical amplifier unit

amplifier unit
TN11OAU1 optical amplifier unit
TN12OAU1
TN13OAU1
TN12OBU1
TN12OBU2
TN11RAU1 backward raman and erbium doped fiber hybrid optical

amplifier unit
Cross-connect TN22SCC system control and communication unit

unit and
system and TN22AUX system auxiliary interface unit
communicatio TN61AUX
n unit

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Category
Optical TN11HSC1 high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel

supervisory board
channel unit
TN12SC1 unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN11ST2 bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing

transmission unit
Optical TN12DCP 2-channel optical path protection unit

protection unit
TN12OLP optical line protection unit
TN11SCS sync optical channel separator unit
Spectrum TN11MCA4 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

analyzer unit
TN11MCA8 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit
TN11OPM8 8-channel optical power monitoring board
Variable TN12VA1 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

optical
attenuator unit TN12VA4 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
Optical power TN11DCU dispersion compensation board

and dispersion
equalizing unit
Interface area TN61PIU power interface unit

unitb
TN21APIU AC Power Interface Unit
a: For TN13FIU: OptiX OSN 3800A only supports the TN13FIU01.

b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 3.4 OptiX OSN 3800A Chassis and Power
Requirement.
3.6.7 Introduction to Working Modes of OTUs, Tributary Boards

and Line Boards
3.6.7.1 Convergence and Non-convergence Applications of Tributary Boards

This section introduces the concepts of convergence and non-convergence applications of
tributary boards.
Convergence Application
Convergence application means multiple client services are aggregated into one ODUk signal
to improve the bandwidth utilization.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-61 uses the TOM board as an example to illustrate the convergence application.
Figure 3-61 Convergence application

Client-side WDM-side
TOM board
ESCON ESCON
GE GE OTUk
ODU1 Line
FC100 FC100 board
STM-1 STM-1 ODU1

Aggregation
Non-convergence Application
Non-convergence application means that each client service is directly mapped into an ODUk
signal that matches the client service. In this application, flexible service grooming is achieved.
Figure 3-62 uses the TQX board as an example to illustrate the non-convergence application.
Figure 3-62 Non-convergence application

WDM-side
Client-side
TQX board
FC800 FC800 ODU2 Line board OTUk
STM-64 STM-64 ODU2
10GE-WAN 10GE-WAN ODU2
10GE-LAN 10GE-LAN ODU2 Line board

OTUk
Directly-Mapped
10Gbit/s Service
The TOA, and TOM boards support both convergence mode and non-convergence applications.
The TQM board only supports the convergence application.
l In the convergence application, the TOA, TQM, and TOM boards aggregate multiple low-
rate client services into one ODU1 or ODU0 signal.
l In the non-convergence application, the TOA, and TOM boards map one client service into
one ODUk signal.
Other tributary boards only support the non-convergence application and therefore can only map
one client service into one ODUk signal.
3.6.7.2 Standard Mode and Compatible Mode

Starting from V100R006C01, some boards support new board models. To distinguish new
models from existing models, the new board models are marked as standard mode and the
existing board models are marked as compatible mode. For boards in standard mode, only
channels or physical ports are presented in the models and NMS, with service mapping paths
displayed for the channels or physical ports. All ODU layers are allocated to the physical ports.
When configuring cross-connections, users do not need to know the internal ports on the boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Compared with the compatible mode, the standard mode makes operations easier and has fewer
end-to-end trail layers, reducing maintenance costs.
Boards Supporting Standard Mode

Table 3-66 lists the boards that support standard mode, the names of the boards on the NMS.
Table 3-66 Names displayed on the NMS

Name in Standard Mode Name in Compatible Name (NE Panel)
(Standard Mode, adding Mode (Compatible
logical board) Mode, adding logical
board)
TN54TSXL - 54TSXL
TN53ND2 TN53ND2(COMP) 53ND2
TN53NQ2 TN53NQ2(COMP) 53NQ2
TN53NS2 TN53NS2(COMP) 53NS2
TN55NS3 - 55NS3
TN54ENQ2(STND) - 54ENQ2
TN55NPO2(STND) - 55NPO2
TN55NPO2E - 55NPO2E
NOTE
TN54TSXL/TN55NO2/TN55NS3/TN54NS4//TN55NPO2/TN54ENQ2/TN55NPO2E support only the
standard mode.
The following uses the TN53NS2 board as an example to introduces the standard and compatible
modes of a line board.
Standard mode
Figure 3-63 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-63 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in standard mode
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODUflex:(1~2)
ODUflex:1
ODU2:1 OCh:1
2XODUflex ODUflex:2
IN/OUT-OCh:1
OCh :1
1 xODU2/
1xODU 2e
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)
Other tributary/line/PID board
ODU1:1
ODU2:1 OCh : 1
4 xODU1
ODU1:4 IN/OUT
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU1:(1~4)-ODU0:(1~2)
ODU0:1
ODU1:1
ODU0:2
ODU2:1 OCh :1
8 xODU0 ODU 0:1
ODU 1:4
ODU 0:2
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1-ODU0:(1~8)
ODU0:1
ODU2:1 OCh :1
8 xODU0
ODU0: 8
Backplane
Cross-connect module ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing module ODU2 mapping path
Service processing module ODUflex mapping path
ODU0 mapping path (ODU0–>ODU1– Cross-connection that must be configured on

>ODU2) the NMS to receive ODUk signals from
other boards
ODU0 mapping path (ODU0–>ODU2)
Table 3-67 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board
Port Name Meaning
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1- Mapping path for ODU0 signals received from the

ODU1:(1-4)-ODU0:(1-2) backplane (ODU0->ODU1->ODU2)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Port Name Meaning

ODU0:(1-8) backplane (ODU0->ODU2)

ODU1:(1-4) backplane
IN/OUT-OCh:1 Mapping path for ODU2/ODU2e signals received from

the backplane
IN/OUT-OCh:1-ODU2:1- Mapping path for ODUflex signals received from the

ODUflex:(1-2) backplane
IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports
Compatible mode
Figure 3-64 shows the board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode.
Figure 3-64 Board model of the TN53NS2 board in compatible mode

Other tributary/ Other tributary/ Other tributary/
line/PID board line/PID board line/PID board
8 x ODU0 4 x ODU1 1 x ODU2/ODU2e Backplane
161
51
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
164
ODU2
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1 51
164 ODU1 (ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Cross-connect module ODU1 mapping path
Multiplexing module ODU2 mapping path

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Service processing module Automatic cross-connection, which does not

need to be configured on the NMS. For
example, if ODU0 signals are required, users
only need to configure cross-connections from
other boards to the ODU0LP port on the board
using the NMS. The board's internal structure
enables transmission of the multiplexed signal
to the ODU2LP port. Users do not need to
configure a cross-connection for transmitting
the multiplexed signal.
ODU0 mapping path Cross-connection that must be configured on
the NMS to receive ODUk signals from other
boards
Table 3-68 Meaning of ports of the TN53NS2 board
Port Name Description Automatic Cross-Connection
ODU0LP1- Internal logical ports of the board. Automatic cross-connections are

ODU0LP4 Each of the ports provides optical established between these ports and
channels 1 and 2. the ODU1LP port.
ODU1LP1 Internal logical ports. Each of the Automatic cross-connections are

port provides optical channels 1, 2, established between these ports and
3, and 4. the ODU2LP port
ODU2LP1 Internal logical ports of the board. Automatic cross-connections are

Each of the ports provides optical established between these ports and
channel 1. the IN/OUT port
IN/OUT WDM-side optical ports. -
Logical ports are internal points used to adapt, terminate, and multiplex internal signals of the
board. They also can be used as sources or sinks of cross-connections.
Comparison of NMS GUIs for Different Modes

Service creation operations on the NMS vary according to board models. Table 3-69 uses the
TN53NS2 board as an example to illustrate the differences in the board operation GUIs.
Table 3-69 GUIs on the NMS
GUI on the Navigation Path Compatible Standard Mode

NMS Mode
Path View In the NE panel, select a See Figure 3-65. See Figure 3-66.
board, double-click the board
icon or right-click and choose
Path View from the shortcut
menu.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
GUI on the Navigation Path Compatible Standard Mode

NMS Mode
WDM In the NE Explorer, select the See Figure 3-67. See Figure 3-68.
Interface required board and choose
Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function
Tree.Click the Advanced
Attributes tab.
Create Cross- In the NE Explorer, select the See Figure 3-69. See Figure 3-70.
Connection required NE and choose
Service Configuration > WDM
Service Management from
the Function Tree.
Figure 3-65 Path View (compatible mode)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-66 Path View (standard mode)
Figure 3-67 WDM Interface (compatible mode)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-68 WDM Interface (standard mode)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-69 Create Cross-Connection Service (compatible mode)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-70 Create Cross-Connection Service (standard mode)
3.6.8 Types of Pluggable Module
The eSFP/SFP+/XFP/CFP is a hot-swappable, protocol-independent optical transceiver used in

optical communications for both telecommunication and data communications applications.
Figure 3-71 shows the appearance of the eSFP/SFP+ optical module. Figure 3-72 shows the
appearance of the XFP optical module.Figure 3-73 and Figure 3-74 show the appearance of the
CFP optical module.
Figure 3-71 eSFP/SFP+ optical module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-72 XFP optical module
Figure 3-73 CFP optical module (40 Gbit/s)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-74 CFP optical module (100 Gbit/s)
3.6.9 Fixed Optical Attenuator

A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The
common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB.
Figure 3-75 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator.
Figure 3-75 Fixed optical attenuator

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.7 Quick Reference Table of the Units

Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical
amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.
3.7.1 Specification of OTUs, Tributary Boards, Line Boards

The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards, and line boards
include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
3.7.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side

The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access
service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
Table 3-70 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTUs and tributary boards
Board Access Service Optical Module Note

Name Type
Optical Mean Launched Receiver Minim
Interface Optical Power Sensitivi um
Type ty (dBm) Overlo
Supported Maximu Minim ad
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
TN11L4G GE 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -11.5 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 0 -4.5 -20 -3

LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -22 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

Multirate CWDM
(CWDM)-40
km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

Multirate
(CWDM)-80
km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
TN12LDX OC-192/ 10 Gbit/s -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

STM-64/ 10GE Multirate-10 (multirate) (STM64
LAN/ 10GE km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
WAN/ OTU2/ (10GE (10GE
OTU2e LAN) LAN)
10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

Multirate-40 (multirate)
km-XFP /-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24.0 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP
800 ps/nm-C 2 -3 –16 0 XFP

Band (Odd & DWDM
Even
Wavelengths)-
Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
10GE LAN 10 Gbit/s Single -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1 XFP

Rate -0.3 km-
XFP
TN11LEM FE/GE 1000 BASE- -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

24 SX-0.5 km-
eSFP (I-850-
LC)
1000 BASE- -3 -9.5 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP (I-1310-
LC)
10GE WAN/ 10G BASE- -1 -7.3 -11.1 -1 SFP+

10GE LAN SR-0.3 km-SFP
+
10G BASE- 0.5 -8.2 -12.6 0.5

LR-10 km-SFP
+

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
TN11LEX 10GE WAN/ 10G BASE- -1 -7.3 -11.1 -1 SFP+

4 10GE LAN SR-0.3 km-SFP
+
10G BASE- 0.5 -8.2 -12.6 0.5

LR-10 km-SFP
+
TN11LOA FC200/GE/ 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

FC100/FDDI/ Multirate-0.5
FICON/FICON km-eSFP
Express/FE
FC400/ 4.25 Gbit/s -1.1 -9 -15 0

FICON4G Multirate-0.3
km-eSFP
4.25 Gbit/s -1 -8.4 -18 0

Multirate-10
km-eSFP
GE/FC100/ 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

STM-4/OC-12/ LX-10 km-
ESCON/STM-1/ eSFP
OC-3/FDDI/
FICON/FE/ 1000 BASE- 0 -5 -23 -3
DVB-ASI LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/STM-16/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3

OC-48/FC200/ OC-48-2 km-
FC100/FDDI/ eSFP
FICON/FICON
Express/GE/ L-16.1/LR-1 3 -2 -27 -9
STM-4/OC-12/ OC-48-40 km-
ESCON/STM-1/ eSFP
OC-3/DVB-ASI L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
OC-48-80 km-
eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
OTU1/STM-16/ S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0

OC-48/FC200/ OC-48-15 km-
FC100/FDDI/ eSFP
FICON/FICON
Express/GE/
STM-4/OC-12/
ESCON/STM-1/
OC-3/DVB-ASI/
FE
DVB-ASI/SDI/ 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 0 -7 -22 0

HD-SDI/HD- Gbit/s
SDIRBR/3G- multirate-10
SDI/3G- km-Video eSFP
SDIRBR
GE/FC100/ 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

STM-4/OC-12/ Multirate CWDM
ESCON/STM-1/ (CWDM)-40
OC-3/FDDI/ km-eSFP
FICON/FE/
DVB-ASI
OTU1/STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

OC-48/FC200/ Multirate
FC100/FDDI/ (CWDM)-80
FICON/FICON km-eSFP
Express/GE/
STM-4/OC-12/
ESCON/STM-1/
OC-3/DVB-ASI/
FE
OTU1/STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 4 0 -28 -9 eSFP

OC-48/FC200/ Multirate DWDM
FC100/FDDI/ (DWDM)-120
FICON/FICON km-eSFP
Express/GE/
STM-4/OC-12/
ESCON/STM-1/
OC-3/DVB-ASI/
FE
FC800/ 800-M5E-SA- -1 -7.3 -11.1 -1 SFP+

FICON8G I-0.3 km-SFP+

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
800-SM-LC- -0.5 -8.2 -12.6 0.5

L-10 km-SFP+
GE 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3 eSFP

BX10-U-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3

BX10-D-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-U-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-D-eSFP
TN11LOG GE 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -11.5 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 0 -5 -23 -3

LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

Multirate CWDM
(CWDM)-40
km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

Multirate
(CWDM)-80
km-eSFP
TN12LOG GE 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
1000 BASE- -3 -11.5 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 0 -4.5 -23 -3

LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

Multirate CWDM
(CWDM)-40
km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

Multirate
(CWDM)-80
km-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3 eSFP

BX10-U-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3

BX10-D-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-U-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-D-eSFP
TN11LOM GE 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 0 -5 -23 -3

LX-40 km-
eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
FC 100/ FC 200/ FC400/ -1 -9 -14 0

FC 400/ FICON/ FICON4G
FICON Express Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)-
eSFP
FC400/ -2 -8 -18 0
FICON4G
Module-10 km
(Single mode) -
eSFP
FC100/FC200/ -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

FICON/FICON
Express
Module-0.5 km
(Multimode)-
eSFP
FC100/FC200/ -3 -10 -18 0

FICON/FICON
Express
Module-2 km
(Single mode)-
eSFP
GE/ FC 100/ FC 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

200 Multirate CWDM
(CWDM)-40
km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

Multirate
(CWDM)-80
km-eSFP
TN12LOM GE 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 0 -5 -23 -3

LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
FC 100/ FC 200/ FC400/ -1 -9 -14 0

FC 400/ FICON/ FICON4G
FICON Express Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)-
eSFP
FC400/ -2 -8 -18 0
FICON4G
Module-10 km
(Single mode)-
eSFP
FC100/FC200/ -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

FICON/FICON
Express
Module-0.5 km
(Multimode)-
eSFP
FC100/FC200/ -3 -10 -18 0

FICON/FICON
Express
Module-2 km
(Single mode)-
eSFP
GE/ FC 100/ FC 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

200 Multirate CWDM
(CWDM)-40
km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

Multirate
(CWDM)-80
km-eSFP
GE 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3 eSFP

BX10-U-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3

BX10-D-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-U-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-D-eSFP
TN11LQG GE 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 0 -5 -23 -3

LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

Multirate CWDM
(CWDM)-40
km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

Multirate
(CWDM)-80
km-eSFP
TN13LQM FC200/GE/ 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

FC100/ FE Multirate-0.5
km

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
GE/ FC100/ 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

STM-4/ OC-12/ LX-10 km
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ FE/ DVB- 1000 BASE- 0 -5 -23 -3
ASI LX-40 km
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km
OTU1/ STM-16/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3

OC-48/ FC200/ OC-48-2 km-
FC100/ GE/ eSFP
STM-4/ OC-12/
ESCON/ STM-1/ L-16.1/LR-1 3 -2 -27 -9
OC-3/ DVB-ASI OC-48-40 km-
eSFP
L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
OC-48-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0

OC-48/ FC200/ OC-48-15 km-
FC100/ GE/ eSFP
STM-4/ OC-12/
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/ 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

STM-4/ OC-12/ Multirate CWDM
ESCON/ STM-1/ (CWDM)-40
OC-3/ FE/ DVB- km-eSFP
ASI
OTU1/ STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

OC-48/ FC200/ Multirate
FC100/ GE/ (CWDM)-80
STM-4/ OC-12/ km-eSFP
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
OTU1/ STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 4 0 -28 -9 eSFP

OC-48/ FC200/ Multirate DWDM
FC100/ GE/ (DWDM)-120
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE

D FC100/ FE Multirate-0.5
km
GE/ FC100/ 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

STM-4/ OC-12/ LX-10 km-
ESCON/ STM-1/ eSFP
OC-3/ FE/ DVB-
ASI 1000 BASE- 0 -5 -23 -3
LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3

OC-48/ FC200/ OC-48-2 km-
FC100/ GE/ eSFP
STM-4/ OC-12/
ESCON/ STM-1/ L-16.1/LR-1 3 -2 -27 -9
eSFP
L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
OC-48-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0

OC-48/ FC200/ OC-48-15 km-
FC100/ GE/ eSFP
STM-4/ OC-12/
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
GE/ FC100/ 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

ASI
OTU1/ STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE

OC-48/ FC200/ Multirate (eSFP DWDM
FC100/ GE/ DWDM)-120
STM-4/ OC-12/ km
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE

S FC100/ FE Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP
GE/ FC100/ 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

STM-4/ OC-12/ LX-10 km-
ESCON/ STM-1/ eSFP
OC-3/ FE/ DVB-
ASI 1000 BASE- 0 -5 -23 -3
LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3

OC-48/ FC200/ OC-48-2 km-
FC100/ GE/ eSFP
STM-4/ OC-12/
ESCON/ STM-1/ L-16.1/LR-1 3 -2 -27 -9
eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
OC-48-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0

OC-48/ FC200/ OC-48-15 km
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ OC-12/
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/ 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

ASI
OTU1/ STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE

FC100/ GE/ (DWDM)-120
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
TN11LSQ STM-256/ 40 Gbit/s 3 0 -6 3 -

OC-768/ OTU3 Multirate-2 km
TN12LSX OC-192/ 10 Gbit/s -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

LAN/ 10GE km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
FC1200 LAN) LAN)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

km-XFP /-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24.0 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP
10GE LAN/ 10 Gbit/s Single -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1

FC1200 Rate -0.3 km-
XFP
TN13LSX OC-192/ 10 Gbit/s -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

LAN/ 10GE km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
OTU2e/ FC1200 LAN) LAN)
10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

km-XFP /-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24.0 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP
800 ps/nm-C 2 -3 –16 0 XFP

Band (Odd & DWDM
Even
Wavelengths)-
Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
10GE LAN/ 10 Gbit/s Single -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1 XFP

XFP
TN12LSX STM-256/ 40 Gbit/s 3 0 -6 3 -

L/ OC-768/ OTU3 Multirate-2 km
TN15LSX
L

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
TN11LTX 10GE LAN/ 10 Gbit/s -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

10GE WAN/ Multirate-10 (multirate) (STM64
STM-64/ km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
OC-192 (10GE (10GE
LAN) LAN)
10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

km-XFP /-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s Single -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1

Rate -0.3 km-
XFP
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24.0 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP
TN12LWX FC200/GE/ 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

S FC100/ FE Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP
ETR/ CLO/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3

STM-16/ FC200/ OC-48-2 km-
FC100/GE/ eSFP
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB- L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
ASI OC-48-80 km-
eSFP
ETR/ CLO/ S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0

STM-16/ FC200/ OC-48-15 km-
FC100/GE/ eSFP
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
ETR/ CLO/ GE/ 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

FC100/ STM-4/ Multirate CWDM
ESCON/ STM-1/ (eCWDM)-40
FE/ DVB-ASI km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
ETR/ CLO/ 2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

STM-16/ FC200/ Multirate
FC100/GE/ (CWDM)-80
STM-4/ ESCON/ km-eSFP
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
ETR/ CLO/ 2.67 Gbit/s 4 0 -28 -9 eSFP

STM-16/ FC200/ Multirate DWDM
FC100/GE/ (DWDM)-120
STM-4/ ESCON/ km-eSFP
STM-1/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
TN11TMX STM-16/ OC-48/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3 eSFP

TN12TMX OTU1 (without OC-48-2 km-
FEC) eSFP
S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0
OC-48-15 km-
eSFP
L-16.1/LR-1 3 -2 -27 -9
OC-48-40 km-
eSFP
L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
OC-48-80 km-
eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9 eSFP

Multirate CWDM
(CWDM)-80
km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 4 0 -28 -9 eSFP

Multirate DWDM
(DWDM)-120
km-eSFP
TN11TBE FE 100 BASE- -3 -11.5 -19 -3 eSFP

FX-10 km-eSFP
100 BASE- 5 -2 -22 -3

FX-80 km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
GE/ 10GE LAN/ 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

10GE WAN Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -11.5 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 0 -4.5 -20 -3

LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -22 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
10 Gbit/s -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

Multirate-10 (multirate) (STM64
km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
(10GE (10GE
LAN) LAN)
10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

km-XFP /-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s Single -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1

Rate -0.3 km-
XFP
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP
FE/ GE/ 10GE 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

LAN/ 10GE Multirate CWDM
WAN (CWDM)-40
km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

Multirate
(CWDM)-80
km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
TN12TDX 10GE LAN/ 10 Gbit/s -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

STM-64/ km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
OC-192 (10GE (10GE
LAN) LAN)
10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

km-XFP /-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24.0 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP
10GE LAN 10 Gbit/s Single -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1

Rate -0.3 km-
XFP

STM-64/ km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
OC-192/ OTU2/ (10GE (10GE
OTU2e LAN) LAN)
10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

km-XFP /-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24.0 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP

Rate -0.3 km-
XFP

10GE WAN/ Multirate-10 (multirate) (Multirat
STM-64/ km-XFP /-14.4 e)/0.5
OC-192/ OTU2 / (10GE (10GE
OTU2e/FC1200 LAN) LAN)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
10GE LAN/ 10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

10GE WAN/ Multirate-40 (multirate)
STM-64/ km-XFP /-15.8
OC-192/ OTU2 / (10GE
OTU2e/ FC1200 LAN)
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP

Rate -0.3 km-
XFP
FC800 800-SM-LC- -1 -6 -14.4 0.5

L-0.3 km-XFP
TN54TEM 10GE LAN 10 Gbit/s -1 -7.3 -11.1 -1 SFP+

28 BASE-SR-0.3
km-SFP+
10 Gbit/s 0.5 -8.2 -12.6 0.5

BASE-LR-10
km-SFP+
GE 1000 BASE- -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 SFP+

SX-0.5 km-
eSFP (I-850-
LC)
1000 BASE- -3 -9.5 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP (I-1310-
LC)
TN54TOA FC400/ 4.25 Gbit/s -1.1 -9 -15 0 eSFP

FICON4G Multirate-0.3
km-eSFP
4.25 Gbit/s -1 -8.4 -18 0

Multirate-10
km-eSFP
OTU1/STM-16/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3

OC-48/FC200/ OC-48-2 km-
FC100/GE/ eSFP
STM-4/OC-12/

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
ESCON/STM-1/ L-16.1/LR-1 3 -2 -27 -9

OC-3/DVB-ASI OC-48-40 km-
eSFP
L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
OC-48-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/STM-16/ S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0

OC-48/FC200/ OC-48-15 km-
FC100/GE/ eSFP
STM-4/OC-12/
ESCON/STM-1/
OC-3/DVB-ASI/
FE
FC200/FC100/ 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0

FE/GE Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP
GE/FC100/ 1000 BASE- -3 -11.5 -20 -3

STM-4/ESCON/ LX-10 km-
STM-1/FE/ eSFP
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE- 0 -4.5 -23 -3
LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
GE/FC100/ 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

STM-4/ESCON/ Multirate CWDM
STM-1/FE/ (CWDM)-40
DVB-ASI km-eSFP
OTU1/STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

FC200/FC100/ Multirate
GE/STM-4/ (CWDM)-80
ESCON/STM-1/ km-eSFP
DVB-ASI/FE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
OTU1/STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 4 0 -28 -9 eSFP

FC200/FC100/ Multirate DWDM
GE/STM-4/ (DWDM)-120
ESCON/STM-1/ km-eSFP
DVB-ASI/FE
DVB-ASI/SDI/ 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 0 -7 -22 0 Video

HD-SDI/HD- Gbit/s Multirate eSFP
SDIRBR/3G- 10 km-Video
SDI/3G- eSFP
SDIRBR
GE 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3 eSFP

BX10-U-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3

BX10-D-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-U-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-D-eSFP
TN11TOM FC200/GE/ 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

km-eSFP
GE/ FC100/ 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

STM-4/ ESCON/ LX-10 km-
STM-1/ FE/ eSFP
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE- 0 -5 -20 -3
LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3

FC200/ FC100/ OC-48-2 km-
GE/ STM-4/ eSFP
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI L-16.1/LR-1 3 -2 -27 -9
OC-48-40 km-
eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
OC-48-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0

FC200/ FC100/ OC-48-15 km-
GE/ STM-4/ eSFP
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/ 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

STM-4/ ESCON/ Multirate CWDM
STM-1/ FE/ (CWDM)-40
DVB-ASI km-eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

FC200/ FC100/ Multirate
GE/ STM-4/ (CWDM)-80
ESCON/ STM-1/ km-eSFP
DVB-ASI/ FE

FC200/ FC100/ Multirate DWDM
GE/ STM-4/ (DWDM)-120
DVB-ASI/ FE
DVB-ASI/SDI/ 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 0 -7 -22 0 eSFP

HD-SDI Gbit/s Multirate
10 km-Video
eSFP
TN52TOM FC200/GE/ 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

km-eSFP
GE/ FC100/ 1000 BASE- -3 -11.5 -20 -3

STM-4/ ESCON/ LX-10 km-
STM-1/ FE/ eSFP
DVB-ASI
1000 BASE- 0 -4.5 -23 -3
LX-40 km-
eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -22 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3

FC200/ FC100/ OC-48-2 km-
GE/ STM-4/ eSFP
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI L-16.1/LR-1 3 -2 -27 -9
OC-48-40 km-
eSFP
L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
OC-48-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0

FC200/ FC100/ OC-48-15 km-
GE/ STM-4/ eSFP
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/ 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

STM-4/ ESCON/ Multirate CWDM
STM-1/ FE/ (CWDM)-40
DVB-ASI km-eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

FC200/ FC100/ Multirate
GE/ STM-4/ (CWDM)-80
DVB-ASI/ FE

FC200/ FC100/ Multirate DWDM
GE/ STM-4/ (DWDM)-120
DVB-ASI/ FE
DVB-ASI/SDI/ 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 0 -7 -22 0 eSFP

HD-SDI Gbit/s Multirate
10 km-Video
eSFP
GE 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3

BX10-U-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3

BX10-D-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-U-eSFP
1000 BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3

BX-D-eSFP
TN52TOG GE 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

Multirate-0.5
km-eSFP
1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 0 -5 -23 -3

LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

Multirate CWDM
(CWDM)-40
km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

Multirate
(CWDM)-80
km-eSFP
TN12TQM FC200/GE/ 2.125 Gbit/s -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 eSFP

km-eSFP
GE/ FC100/ 1000 BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

STM-4/ OC-12/ LX-10 km-
ESCON/ STM-1/ eSFP
OC-3/ FE/ DVB-
ASI 1000 BASE- 0 -5 -20 -3
LX-40 km-
eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
1000 BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3

ZX-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ I-16/SR-1 -3 -10 -18 -3

OC-48/ FC200/ OC-48-2 km-
FC100/ GE/ eSFP
STM-4/ OC-12/
ESCON/ STM-1/ L-16.1/LR-1 3 -2 -27 -9
eSFP
L-16.2/LR-2 3 -2 -28 -9
OC-48-80 km-
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/ S-16.1/IR-1 0 -5 -18 0

OC-48/ FC200/ OC-48-15 km-
FC100/ GE/ eSFP
STM-4/ OC-12/
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE
GE/ FC100/ 1.25 Gbit/s 5 0 -19 -3 eSFP

ASI
OTU1/ STM-16/ 2.67 Gbit/s 5 0 -28 -9

ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE

FC100/ GE/ (DWDM)-120
ESCON/ STM-1/
OC-3/ DVB-
ASI/ FE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
TN11TQX 10GE LAN/ 10 Gbit/s -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

STM-64/ km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
OC-192 (10GE (10GE
LAN) LAN)
10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

km-XFP /-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24.0 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP

Rate -0.3 km-
XFP

STM-64/ km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
OC-192/ OTU2/ (10GE (10GE
OTU2e LAN) LAN)
10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

km-XFP /-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24.0 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP

Rate -0.3 km-
XFP

TN55TQX 10GE WAN/ Multirate-10 (multirate) (STM64
STM-64/ km-XFP /-14.4 )/0.5
OC-192/OTU2/ (10GE (10GE
OTU2e/FC800/ LAN) LAN)
FC1200

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Type
m (dBm) um Point
(dBm) (dBm)
10GE LAN/ 10 Gbit/s 2 -4.7 -14 -1

10GE WAN/ Multirate-40 (multirate)
STM-64/ km-XFP /-15.8
OC-192/OTU2/ (10GE
OTU2e/FC1200 LAN)
10 Gbit/s 4 0 -24 -7
Multirate-80
km-XFP
10GE LAN/ 10 Gbit/s Single -1.3 -7.3 -7.5 -1

XFP
FC800 800-SM-LC- -1 -6 -14.4 0.5

L-0.3 km-XFP
TN11TSX STM-256/ 40 Gbit/s 3 0 -6 3 -

L OC-768 Multirate-2 km
TN53TSX STM-256/ 40 Gbit/s 3 0 -6 3 -

L OC-768/ OTU3 Multirate-2 km

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-71 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of TN12LSC/TN54TSXL
Board Name Access Optical Module Opt

Service ical
Type Optical Tra Tra Rev Min Ave Ave Ave Ave Tot Mo
Interfac nsm ns eive imu rag rag rag rag al dul
e Type it mit r m e e e e Ave e
Suppor OM OM Sen recei Lau Lau Rev Rev rag Typ
ted A A siti ver nch nch eive eive e e
per per vity over Po Po r r Lau
Lan Lan (O load wer wer Po Po nch
e e MA (OM per per wer wer Po
(Mi (Ma ) A) Lan Lan per per wer
n) x) per per e e Lan Lan
Lan Lan (Mi (Ma e e
e e n) x) (Mi (Ma
n) x)
TN12LSC 100GE 100 G -1.3 4.5 -8.6 4.5 -4.3 4.5 -10. 4.5 10.5 CFP
BASE- 6
LR4-10
km-CFP
100 G -2.8 3.5 -8.8 3.5 -5.8 3.5 -10. 3.5 13.5
BASE-1 8
0×10
G-10
km-CFP
TN54TSXL 40GE 40GBA -4 3.5 -11. 3.5 -7 2.3 -13. 2.3 8.3
SE- 5 7
LR4-10
km-CFP
3.7.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side

The main WDM-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards,
and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module
type.
Table 3-72 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards
Board Access Optical Module

Name Service
Type Optical Interface Type Mean Launched Receiver Minimu Note
Supported Optical Power Sensitivi m
ty (dBm) Receiver
Maximu Minimu Overload
m (dBm) m (dBm) (dBm)
TN11L4 OTU 5G 3400 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -2 -25 -9 -

G Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver
3400 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -25 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
TN12LD OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

X OTU2e & Even Wavelengths)- DW
Fixed Wavelength-NRZ- DM
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

Tunable Wavelength- DW
NRZ-PIN-XFP DM
TN11LE OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

M24 & Even Wavelengths)- DW
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

NRZ-PIN-XFP DM
TN11LE OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

X4 & Even Wavelengths)- DW
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

NRZ-PIN-XFP DM
TN11LO OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

A & Even Wavelengths)- DW
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

NRZ-PIN-XFP DM
TN11LO OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & 2 -3 -16 0 -

G even wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed 2 -3 -16 0 -

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
TN12LO OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

G Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

& Even Wavelengths)- DW
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

NRZ-PIN-XFP DM
TN11LO OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & 2 -3 -16 0 -

M even wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver
4800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
TN12LO OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

M Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN

PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

NRZ-PIN-XFP DM
TN11LQ FEC 5G/ 3400 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -2 -25 -9 -

G OTU5G Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
3400 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -25 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
TN13LQ OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate 3 0 -28 -9 eSFP

M (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP DW
DM
TN12LQ OTU1 12800 ps/nm-C Band- -4 -8 -28 -9 -

MD Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -28 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver
6400 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -28 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
TN12LQ OTU1 12800 ps/nm-C Band- -1 -5 -28 -9 -

MS Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band- 3 -2 -28 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band- 3 -2 -28 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
TN12LS OTU4 40000ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

C Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
TN11LS OTU3 800 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

Q Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
TN12LS OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & 2 -3 -16 0 -

X OTU2e even wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN

X Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN

PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

NRZ-PIN-XFP DM

XL Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN

XL Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
TN12LS OTU3/ 500 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

XLR OTU3e Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
TN11LS OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & 2 -3 -16 0 -

XR OTU2e even wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
TN11LT OTU4 40000ps/nm-C Band- 0 -15 -16 0 -

X Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK
TN12L STM-16/ 12800 ps/nm-C Band- -1 -5 -18 0 -

WXS FC200/ Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
FC100/ PINa
GE/
STM-4/ 12800 ps/nm-C Band- -1 -5 -28 -9 -
ESCON/ Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
STM-1/ APDa
DVB-
ASI/ FE 6500 ps/nm-C Band- 3 -2 -18 0 -
Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
3200 ps/nm-C Band- 3 -2 -26 -10 -

APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band- 3 -2 -28 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band- 3 -2 -28 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
TN11T OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & 2 -3 -16 0 -

MX even wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
TN12T OTU2 800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

MX Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN

PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

NRZ-PIN-XFP DM
TN11N OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd 2 -3 -16 0 -

D2 OTU2e & Even Wavelength)-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver
TN12N OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

D2 OTU2e Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN

PIN-XFP
TN52N OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

D2 OTU2e Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
TN53N OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

D2 OTU2e & Even Wavelengths)- DW
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

NRZ-PIN-XFP DM
TN51N OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

Q2/ OTU2e & Even Wavelengths)- DW
TN52N Fixed Wavelength-NRZ- DM
Q2/ PIN-XFP
TN53N
Q2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP
TN54N Tunable Wavelength- DW
Q2 NRZ-PIN-XFP DM
TN12NS OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & 2 -3 -16 0 -

2 OTU2e even wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver
1200 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -26 -9 -

Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN

PIN-XFP
TN52NS OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

2 OTU2e Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
TN53NS OTU2/ 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

2 OTU2e & Even Wavelengths)- DW
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 2 -3 -16 0 XFP

NRZ-PIN-XFP DM

ODB-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Receiver

ODB-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN

ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
TN55NS OTU3/ 60000ps/nm-C Band- 0 -5 -16 0 -

ePDM-BPSK
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
Table 3-73 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards
Name Service
Type Optical Interface Type Mean Launched Receiver Minimu Not
Supported Optical Power Sensitivi m e
ty (dBm) Overload
Maximu Minimu Point
TN13L OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate 5 0 -28 -9 eSFP

QM (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP CW
DM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
Type Optical Interface Type Mean Launched Receiver Minimu Not
Supported Optical Power Sensitivi m e
ty (dBm) Overload
Maximu Minimu Point
TN12L STM-16/ 1600 ps/nm-CWDM 5 2.5 -28 -9 -

WXS FC200/ Band-Fixed Wavelength-
FC100/ NRZ-APD
GE/
STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/
DVB-
ASI/ SDI/
FE/
FICON/
FICON
Express
TN11L FEC 5G/ 5 Gbit/s Multirate 5 2 -18 0 eSFP

QG OTU5G (CWDM)-50 km-eSFP CW
DM
5 Gbit/s Multirate 5 2 -28 -9 eSFP

(CWDM)-70 km-eSFP CW
DM
Table 3-74 Quick reference table for specifications of WDM-side gray optical modules on OTU boards
Name Service
ty (dBm) Overload
Maximu Minimu Point
TN11LE OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

M24 km-XFP
OTU2/ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 2 -1 -14 -1 XFP

OTU2e km-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 4 0 -24 -7 XFP

km-XFP
TN11LE OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

X4 km-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Overload
Maximu Minimu Point

OTU2e km-XFP

km-XFP
TN11L OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

OA km-XFP

OTU2e km-XFP
TN12L OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

OG km-XFP

OTU2e km-XFP

km-XFP
TN12T OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

MX km-XFP

OTU2e km-XFP

km-XFP
TN12N OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

D2 km-XFP

OTU2e km-XFP

km-XFP

D2 km-XFP

OTU2e km-XFP

Q2 km-XFP

OTU2e km-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name Service
ty (dBm) Overload
Maximu Minimu Point

km-XFP

Q2/ km-XFP
TN53N
Q2/ OTU2/ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 2 -1 -14 -1 XFP
TN54N OTU2e km-XFP
Q2
TN53NS OTU2 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 -1 -6 -11 -1 XFP

2 km-XFP

OTU2e km-XFP
TN54NS OTU3/ 40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km 3 0 -6 3 -

3 OTU3e
3.7.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification

The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range,
channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output
power of a single wavelength.
Table 3-75 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit
Board Channel Nomin Input Power Range per Channel Nominal single-
Name Gain (dB) al (dBm) wavelength input optical
Chann power (dBm)
el Gain
(dB) 40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels
OAU100 16 to 25.5 16 -32 to -14 -32 to -17 -14 -17
22 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
25.5 -32 to -23.5 -32 to -27.5 -23.5 -26.5
DAS1/ 20 to 31 20 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19

OAU101
26 -32 to -22 -32 to -25 -22 -25
31 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30
OAU102 20 to 31 20 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Board Channel Nomin Input Power Range per Channel Nominal single-
Name Gain (dB) al (dBm) wavelength input optical
Chann power (dBm)
el Gain
(dB) 40 channels 80 channels 40 channels 80 channels
26 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28
31 -32 to -30 -32 -30 -32
OAU103 24 to 36 24 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
29 -32 to -25 -32 to -28 -25 -28
36 -32 -32 -32 -32
OAU105 23 to 34 23 -32 to -16 -32 to -19 -16 -19
30 -32 to -23 -32 to -26 -23 -26
34 -32 to -27 -32 to -30 -27 -30
OAU106 16 to 23 16 -24 to -12 -24 to -15 -12 -15
19 -24 to -15 -24 to -18 -15 -18
23 -24 to -19 -24 to -22 -19 -22
OBU101 20±1.5 20 -32 to -20 -32 to -23 -20 -23
OBU103 23±1.5 23 -32 to -19 -32 to -22 -19 -22
OBU104 17±1.5 17 -32 to -17 -32 to -20 -17 -20
OBU205 23±1.5 23 -24 to -16 -24 to -19 -16 -19
Table 3-76 Quick reference table for TN12OBU1P1

Board Name Total input power range at the Maximum total output optical
VI optical port(dBm) power(dBm)
TN12OBU1P1 -30 to 7 9
Table 3-77 Quick reference table for CRPC

Board Name Channel Gain (dB) Maximum Pump Power
(dBm)
G.652 fiber LEAF fiber
CRPC01 ≥10 ≥12 29
CRPC03 >10 N/A 29.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-78 Quick reference table for HBA

Board Channel Typical Input Power of a Single Nominal Channel Allocation
Name Gain (dB) Wavelength (dBm) Input (nm)
Power
80 40 10 Range
channels channels channels (dBm)
HBA 29±1 -22 -19 -13 -25 to -3 1529 to 1561
Table 3-79 Quick reference table for RAU1

Board Name Gain range (dB) Max. OUT port optical
power (dBm)
G.652 fiber LEAF/G.653/TWRS/TW-C fiber
RAU1 19 to 33 19 to 35 20
3.7.3 Insertion Loss Specifications of Boards

This section provides the insertion loss specifications of boards.
Table 3-80 Quick reference table for board insertion loss specifications
Board Name Insertion Loss (dB)
TN11MR2/TN21MR2 IN-MO ≤1.0

MI-OUT
Add/drop channel ≤1.5
TN11MR4/TN21MR4 IN-MO ≤1.5

MI-OUT
TN11MR8 IN-MO ≤3.5

MI-OUT
Add/drop channel ≤4
TN11MR8V IN-MO ≤ 3.5

MI-OUT
Drop channel ≤4
Add channel ≤6
TN21CMR1 IN-MO ≤0.8

MI-OUT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2 IN-MO ≤1.0

MI-OUT
TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4 IN-MO ≤1.5

MI-OUT
TN11DMR1/ EIN-EMO ≤0.8

TN21DMR1 EMI-EOUT
WIN-WMO
WMI-WOUT
TN11SBM2 Add/drop channel ≤3
TN21DFIU EIN-ETM ≤1.5

ERM-EOUT
WIN-WTM
WRM-WOUT
EIN-ETC ≤1
ERC-EOUT
WIN-WTC
WRC-WOUT
TN11D40/TN12D40 ≤6.5
TN11D40V ≤8a
TN13FIU/TN14FIU/ IN-TM ≤1.5

TN21FIU RM-OUT
IN-TC ≤1
RC-OUT
TN11ITL01 RE-OUT <4.5

RO-OUT
IN-TE <2.5
IN-TO
TN11ITL04 RE-OUT <3

RO-OUT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
IN-TE <3
IN-TO
TN11M40/TN12M40 ≤6.5
TN11M40V/TN12M40V ≤8a
TN12DCP Transmit-end insertion Single mode ≤4

loss
Receive-end insertion loss Single mode ≤1.5
TN12OLP Transmit-end insertion Single mode ≤4

loss
Receive-end insertion loss Single mode ≤1.5
TN11SCS Wavelength dropping Single mode ≤4

insertion loss
Multimode ≤4.5
Wavelength adding Single mode ≤4

insertion loss
Multimode ≤4.5
TN11RDU9 IN-Drop(DM1-DM8) ≤12.5
ROA-Drop(DM1-DM8) ≤11.5
IN-EXPO ≤12.5
IN-TOA ≤1
TN11RMU9 EXPI-OUT ≤8.5
AMxb-TOA ≤12.5a
ROA-OUT ≤1.5
TN11ROAM Mxc-OUT ≤9a
IN-DM ≤7
EXPI-OUT ≤14a
IN-EXPO ≤3
TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9 IN-DMxd ≤8a

IN-EXPO
TN12WSM9/ AMxb-OUT ≤8a

TN13WSM9
EXPI-OUT
TN11WSMD2 AMxb-OUT ≤8a
IN-DMxd ≤4.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TN11WSMD4/ AMxb-OUT ≤8a

TN12WSMD4
IN-DMxd
TN11WSD9 AMxb/EXPI-OUT ≤8a
IN-DMxd/EXPO ≤12
a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB.

b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8.
c: Mx denotes M1-M40.
d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8.
3.7.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio

Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory
signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service
performance monitoring of the optical signals.
Table 3-81 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals
of each type of board.
Table 3-81 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board
Board Name Ratio of MON Interface to Received Ratio of MON Interface to
Signal in Main Path Transmitting Signal in Main Path
CRPC - "MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20 dB)
D40 "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB) -
D40V "MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB) -
DAS1 "MONR"/"SOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB) "MONT"/"LOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
FIU - l TN13FIU01/TN14FIU/TN21FIU:
"MONT"/"LOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
l TN13FIU02: "MONT"/"LOUT" =
0.1/99.9 (30 dB)
HBA - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30 dB)
ITL - "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
M40 - "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
M40V - "MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
OAU1 - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
OBU1 - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Board Name Ratio of MON Interface to Received Ratio of MON Interface to

Signal in Main Path Transmitting Signal in Main Path
OBU2 - "MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
RMU9 "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSD9 "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSM9 "MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSMD2 "MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB) "MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
RAU1 - "MONO"/"OUT"=1/99(20dB)
"MONS"/"SYS"=1/99(20dB)
3.7.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards are
wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 3-82.
Table 3-82 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board Tun ESC ALS OT FEC Encoding WDM Opti PRB PRB
Name able Fun Fun N Specificati cal S on S on
Wa ctio ctio Fun on Mod the the
vele n n ctio ule Clie WD
ngt n FEC AFE AFE HFE DW CW nt M
h C C-2 C DM DM Side Side
Fun
ctio
n
TN11L4 Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N eSFP N N
G
TN12LD Y Y Y Y Y N Y N Y N XFP Y Y
X
TN11LE Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N XFP/ N Y
M24 SFP
+
TN11LE Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N XFP/ N Y
X4 SFP
+

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Fun
ctio
n
TN11LO Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y XFP/ Y Y
A eSFP
/SFP
+
TN11LO Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N eSFP N Y
G
TN12LO Y Y Y Y Y N Y N Y N eSFP N Y
G
TN11LO Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N eSFP N Y
M
TN12LO Y Y Y Y Y N Y N Y N eSFP N Y
M
TN11LQ Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N eSFP N Y
G
TN13LQ N Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y eSFP Y Y
M
TN12LQ Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N eSFP Y Y
MD
TN12LQ Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N eSFP Y Y
MS
TN12LS Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y N CFP N Y
C
TN11LS Y Y Y Y Y N Y N Y N N Y N
Q
TN12LS Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N XFP Y Y
X
TN13LS Y Y Y Y Y N Y N Y N XFP Y Y
X
TN12LS Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N N Y N
XL
TN15LS Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y N N Y Y
XL

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Fun
ctio
n
TN12LS Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N N N N
XLR
TN11LS Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N XFP N N
XR
TN11LT Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y N XFP Y Y
X
TN12L Y Y Y N N N N N Y Y eSFP N N
WXS
TN11T Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N eSFP Y Y
MX
TN12T Y Y Y Y Y N Y N Y N eSFP Y Y
MX
TN11N Y Y N Y Y Y N N Y N N – Y
D2
TN12N Y Y N Y Y Y Y N Y N N – Y
D2
TN52N Y Y N Y Y Y Y N Y N N – Y
D2
TN51N N Y N Y Y N N N Y N XFP – Y
Q2
TN53N Y Y N Y Y N Y N Y N XFP - Y
D2
TN52N N Y N Y Y N Y N Y N XFP – Y
Q2
Q2
Q2
TN12NS Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N N – Y
2
TN52NS Y Y Y Y Y N Y N Y N N – Y
2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Fun
ctio
n
TN11NS Y Y N Y Y Y N N Y N N – Y
3
TN52NS
3
TN53NS Y Y N Y Y N Y N Y N XFP - Y
2
TN54NS Y Y N Y Y N Y N Y N N – Y
3
TN55NS Y Y N Y N N N Y Y N N - Y
3
TN12TD N N Y N N N N N N N eSFP Y –
X
TN52TD N Y Y N N N N N N N eSFP Y –
X
TN53TD N Y Y Y N N N N N N XFP Y –
X
TN54TE N N Y Y N N N N N N eSFP N N
M28 /SFP
+
TN54TO N N Y Y Y N N N N N eSFP Y –
A
TN11TO N Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y eSFP Y Y
M
TN52TO
M
TN11TQ N N Y Y N N N N N N XFP Y –
X
TN53TQ
X
TN55TQ N Y Y Y N N N N N N XFP Y –
X
TN11TS N N Y Y N N N N N N N N –
XL

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Fun
ctio
n
TN53TS N N Y Y N N N N N N N Y –
XL
TN54TS N N Y Y N N N N N N N N -
XL
TN52TO N N Y Y N N N N N N eSFP N –
G
NOTE
l "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function
l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information
about the modules can be obtained through a query on the U2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface.
l The boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other.
3.7.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line

Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support different types of loopback.
Table 3-83 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board Name Client-Side Client-Side WDM-Side WDM-Side Path

TERMINAL FACILITY TERMINAL FACILITY Loopback
Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback
LDX Y Y Y Y N
LOA Y Y N Y Y
LOG Y Y Y Y N
LOM Y Y Y Y N
LQG Y Y Y Y N
LQM Y Y Y Y N
LQMD Y Y Y Y N
LQMS Y Y Y Y N
LSC Y Y Y Y N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Board Name Client-Side Client-Side WDM-Side WDM-Side Path

TERMINAL FACILITY TERMINAL FACILITY Loopback
Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback
LSQ Y Y Y Y N
LSX Y Y Y Y N
LSXL Y Y Y Y N
LSXLR N N N N N
LSXR N N N N N
LTX Y Y Y Y N
LWXS Y Y Y Y N
TMX Y Y Y Y N
ND2 N N Y Y Y
NQ2 N N Y Y Y
NS2 N N Y Y Y
NS3 N N Y Y Y
TDX Y Y N N N
TEM28 Y Y N N N
TOA Y Y N N Y
TN11TOM Y Y Y Y N
TN52TOM Y Y Y Y Y
TQM Y Y N N N
TQX Y Y N N N
TSXL Y Y N N N
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Table 3-84 Loop function of the Ethernet boards

Board Name Interface Loop Mode
L4G Client side MAC TERMINAL loopback
PHY FACILITY loopback
WDM side TERMINAL Loopback
FACILITY Loopback

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TBE 10GE optical interface MAC TERMINAL loopback
MAC FACILITY loopback
PHY TERMINAL loopback
GE optical interface MAC TERMINAL loopback
GE electric interface MAC TERMINAL loopback
FE optical interface MAC TERMINAL loopback
FE electric interface MAC TERMINAL loopback
TEM28 10GE optical interface MAC TERMINAL loopback
MAC FACILITY loopback
GE optical interface MAC TERMINAL loopback
GE electric interface PHY TERMINAL loopback
MAC TERMINAL Loopback
FE electric interface PHY TERMINAL loopback
MAC TERMINAL Loopback
LEM24 10GE optical interface MAC TERMINAL Loopback
MAC FACILITY Loopback
PHY TERMINAL Loopback
PHY FACILITY Loopback

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
GE optical interface MAC TERMINAL Loopback
GE electric interface MAC TERMINAL Loopback
FE optical interface MAC TERMINAL Loopback
FE electric interface MAC TERMINAL Loopback
FACILITY Loopback
LEX4 10GE optical interface MAC TERMINAL Loopback
MAC FACILITY Loopback
FACILITY Loopback
3.7.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards

The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support protection function.
For detailed protection mode, refer to Table 3-85.
Table 3-85 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board Protection Mode

Name
SW VLAN ODUk Client- Intra- Board DLAG Tributary
SNCP SNCP SNCP Side 1+1 Board 1+1 -Level SNCP
Protecti Protectio Protec
on n tion
L4G Y Y N Y Y N N N
LDX N N N Y Y N N N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name
on n tion
LEM24 N Y N Y Y N N N
LEX4 N Y N Y Y N N N
LOA N N N Y Y N N N
LOG Y N N Y Y N N N
LOM N N N Y Y N N N
LQG Y N N Y Y N N N
LQM Y N N Y Y N N N
LQMD Y N N Y Y N N N
LQMS Y N Y Y N N N Y
LSC N N N Y Y N N N
LSQ N N N Y Y N N N
LSX N N N Y Y N N N
LSXL N N N Y Y N N N
LSXLR N N N N N N N N
LSXR N N N N N N N N
LTX N N N Y Y N N N
LWXS N N N Y N N N N
TMX N N N Y Y N N N
ND2 N N Y N Y N N Y
NQ2 N N Y N Y N N Y
NS2 N N Y N Y N N Y
NS3 N N Y N Y N N Y
TBE Y Y N Y N Y Y N
TDX N N Y Y N N N Y
TEM28 N N Y N N N N N
TOA N N Y Y N N N Y
TOM Y N Y Y Y N N Y

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Name
on n tion
TQM Y N Y Y N N N Y
TQX N N Y Y N N N Y
TSXL N N Y Y N N N Y
TOG N N Y Y N N N N
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
3.7.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and

Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards, and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table 3-86, Table 3-87 and Table
3-88.
Table 3-86 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 8800
Board Name Electrical Cross-Connection
LDX N
LOG N
LEM24 N
LEX4 N
LOA N
LOM N
LQM N
LQMD N
LQMS N
LSC N
LSQ N
LSX N
LSXL N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
LSXLR N
LSXR N
LTX N
LWXS N
TMX N
ND2 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/4 x ODUflex/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e
NQ2 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/8 x ODUflex/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e

NOTE
Only the TN53NQ2 supports ODUflex.
NS2 8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1/2 x ODUflex/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e

NOTE
Only the TN53NS2 supports ODUflex.
NS3 32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/1 x ODU3

NOTE
Only the TN54NS3/TN55NS3 supports ODU3.
TDX 2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e/2 x ODUflex

NOTE
Only the TN53TDX supports ODUflex.
TEM28 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/5 x ODUflex
TOA 16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1
TOM 8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1
TQX 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/4 x ODUflex

NOTE
Only the TN55TQX supports ODUflex.
TOG 8 x ODU0
TSXL 1 x ODU3
NOTE
Only the TN53TSXL/TN54TSXL supports ODU3
"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Table 3-87 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 6800A
Integrated Cross-Connection Distributed Cross-Connection
L4G 4 x GE 4 x GE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
LDX N N
LEM24 2 x 10GE N
LEX4 2 x 10GE N
LOA N N
LOG 8 x GE 8 x GE
LOM N N
LQG 4 x GE 4 x GE
LQM 4 x GE 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LQMD 4 x GE 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LQMS 4 x GE/1 x ODU1 4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LSC N N
LSQ N N
LSX N N
LSXL N N
LSXLR N N
LSXR N N
LTX N N
LWXS N N
TMX N N
ND2 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e N
NQ2 16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e N
NS2 4 x ODU1/1 x ODU2/1 x ODU2e N
NS3 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e N
TBE 16 x GE N
TDX 8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e 8 x ODU1
TOG 4 x ODU1 4 x ODU1
TOM 8 x GE/4 x ODU1 8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1
TQM 4 x GE/1 x ODU1 4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1
TQX 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e N

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TSXL 4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e N

NOTE
Only the TN11TSXL supports ODU2/ ODU2e
Table 3-88 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 3800A
L4G 4 x GE
LDX N
LOA N
LOG 8 x GE
LOM N
LQG 4 x GE
LQM 4 x Any/4 x GE
LQMD 4 x Any/4 x GE
LQMS 4 x Any/4 x GE
LSX N
LSXR N
LWXS N
TMX N
NS2 4 x ODU1
TBE 16 x GE
TOG 4 x ODU1
TOM 8 x GE/8 x Any/4 x ODU1
TQM 4 x Any/1 x ODU1
3.8 Power Consumption, Weight and Slots of Boards

This chapter describes the power consumption, weight and valid slots of the boards used in the
OptiX OSN 8800 system.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The power consumption, weight and valid slots of the boards are shown in Table 3-89. The
values listed in the following table indicate the power consumption of the boards when they
normally work at 25°C and 55°C.
Table 3-89 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the boards
Board Modul Power Weigh Numb Valid Slots
e Type Consumption t (kg/ er of
(W) lb.) Occup
ied
Typica Maxi Slots 8800 8800 8800 6800A 3800A
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN16A - 16.5 19.2 0.6/1.3 1 N/A N/A IU21 N/A N/A

UX 2
TN22A - 15.0 17.0 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU10

UX
TN41A - 12.8 14.0 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A N/A IU19, IU19-

UX IU20 IU20
TN51A - 17.5 19.0 0.4/0.8 1 IU72, IU41 N/A N/A N/A

UX 8 IU83
TN61A - 15.0 17.0 0.6/1.3 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU10

UX 2
TN41A - 0.3 0.3 1.0/2.2 3 N/A N/A IU24 IU24 N/A

TE
TNK2 - 5.0 7.0 0.2/0.4 1 IU87 IU48 N/A N/A N/A

ATE 4
TN21C - 0.2 0.3 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU1,

MR1 IU8,
IU11
TN11C - 0.2 0.3 0.8/1.8 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

MR2 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5
IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN21C - 0.2 0.3 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU1,

MR2 IU8,
IU11

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11C - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN21C - 0.2 0.3 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU1,

MR4 IU11,
IU8
TN11C - 110.0 121.0 4.0/8.8 - Installe Installe Installe Installe N/A

RPC01 d d d d
outside outside outside outside
TN11C - 70.0 77.0 4.2/9.2 - Installe Installe Installe Installe N/A

RPC03 d d d d
outside outside outside outside
TN11D - 10.0 13.0 2.2/4.8 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

40 IU6, IU6, IU6, IU15
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU16, IU17, IU16
IU19- IU20-
IU24, IU25,
IU27- IU29-
IU32, IU34
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12D - 10.0 13.0 2.0/4.4 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

40 IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11D - 38.5 42.3 2.3/5.1 3 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- N/A

40V IU6, IU6, IU15
IU11- IU11-
IU16, IU17,
IU19- IU20-
IU24, IU25,
IU27- IU29-
IU32, IU34
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN11D - 22 28.6 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

AS1 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12D - 6.8 7.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IIU1- IU11,

CP IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU2-
IU11- IU11- IU5
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN11D - 0.2 0.3 1.5/3.3 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

CU IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU11- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN11D - 0.2 0.3 0.7/1.5 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- IU2-

MR1 IU8, IU8, IU17 IU5
IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN21D - 0.2 0.3 0.7/1.5 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU1,

MR1 IU11,
IU8
TN16E 2 2.5 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A IU19 N/A N/A

FI
TN51E - 5.0 7.0 0.2/0.4 1 IU76 IU38 N/A IU23 N/A

FI1 4
TN51E - 13.0 15.0 0.3/0.6 1 IU71 IU37 N/A IU22 N/A

FI2 6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN54E - 40 44 0.9/2.0 1 IU1, IU1, IU1, N/A N/A

NQ2 IU5, IU5, IU5,
IU11, IU12, IU11,
IU15, IU16, IU15
IU19, IU20,
IU23, IU24,
IU27, IU29,
IU31, IU33
IU35,
IU39,
IU45,
IU49,
IU53,
IU57,
IU61,
IU65
TN21D - 0.2 0.3 0.8/1.8 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU1,

FIU IU11,
IU8
TN13F - 0.2 0.3 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

IU IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU12- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN14F - 0.2 0.3 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

IU IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU12- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN21F - 0.2 0.3 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU1,

IU IU11,
IU8
TN11G - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

FU IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17
IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11H - 47.0 75.0 3.0/6.6 3 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2- N/A

BA IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
IU12- IU12- IU12-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU20- IU21-
IU25, IU26,
IU28- IU30-
IU33, IU35
IU36-
IU41,
IU46-
IU51,
IU54-
IU59,
IU62-
IU67
TN11H - 8 8.8 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

SC1 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5
IU11- IU12- and
IU42, IU27, IU11
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN11I - 0.2 0.3 1.2/2.7 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

TL IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17
IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN11L 3400 50.0 55.0 1.4/3.1 1 N/A N/A N/A IU1- IU2-
4G ps/nm- IU8, IU5
C IU11-
Band- IU16
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
3400 53.0 58.0

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
TN12L 800 ps/ 44.5 51.2 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-
DX nm-C IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
Band IU11- IU12- IU11
(Odd & IU42, IU27,
Even IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 45.5 52.2

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11L - 81.0 83.0 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

EM24 IU7, IU7, IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17 IU15
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11L - 64.0 67.0 0.7/1.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

EX4 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11L 800 ps/ 31.8 36 1.19/2. 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-
OA nm-C 64 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
Band IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
(Odd & IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
Even IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te -
10km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te -
40km-
XFP
800 ps/ 32.8 37

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11L 800 ps/ 40.0 45.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- IU2-
OG nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
Band IU11- IU12- IU11-
(odd & IU42, IU27, IU16
even IU45- IU29-
wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 43.0 48.0

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200
ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
800 ps/ 43.5 48.5

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
4800 55.0 60.5

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
ODB-
APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
OG nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
(Odd & IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
Even IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-10km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-40km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-80km-
XFP
800 ps/ 38.0 42.44

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
800 ps/ 41.61 46.6

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 43.04 48.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
OM nm-C IU7, IU7, IU16 IU5
Band IU11- IU12-
(odd & IU17, IU18,
even IU19- IU20-
wavele IU25, IU26,
ngths)- IU27- IU29-
Fixed IU33, IU35
Wavele IU35-
ngth- IU41,
NRZ- IU45-
PIN IU51,
800 ps/ IU53-
nm-C IU59,
Band- IU61-
Fixed IU67
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
1200 92.9 101.9

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200
ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
800 ps/ 93.4 102.7

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
4800 98.2 108.0

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
ODB-
APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
OMa nm-C 2 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
(Odd & IU42, IU27,
Even IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 62.8 70.2

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 64.8 72.6

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 66.7 75.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11L 3400 28.4 32.0 1.3/2.9 1 N/A N/A N/A IU1- IU2-
QG ps/nm- IU8, IU5
C IU11-
Band- IU16
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
3400 31.0 34.4

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
5 Gbit/s 23.18 26.0

Multira
te
(CWD
M)-50
km-
eSFP
5 Gbit/s
Multira
te
(CWD
M)-70
km-
eSFP
TN13L - 32.6 35.9 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- IU2-

QM IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12L - 31.1 34.3 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- IU2-

QMD IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN12L - 29.0 32.3 1.3/2.9 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- IU2-

QMS IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN12L - 240 265 5/11 4 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

SC IU5, IU5, IU5, IU14
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU15, IU16, IU15
IU19- IU20-
IU23, IU24,
IU27- IU29-
IU31, IU33
IU35-
IU39,
IU45-
IU49,
IU53-
IU57,
IU61-
IU65
TN11L 800 ps/ 75 82 2.5/5.5 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2- N/A

SQ nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8, IU17
Band- IU12- IU12- IU12-
Tunabl IU18, IU19, IU18
e IU20- IU21-
Wavele IU26, IU27,
ngth- IU28- IU30-
ODB- IU34, IU36
PIN IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
800 ps/ 82 89 IU62-

nm-C IU68
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
DQPS
K-PIN
SX nm-C IU8, IU8, IU17 IU5,
(odd & IU42, IU27,
even IU45- IU29-
wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
1200 30.7 36.8

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200
ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
800 ps/ 32.5 39

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
4800 35.5 42.6

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
ODB-
APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
SX nm-C IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
Band- IU11- IU12- IU11
Tunabl IU42, IU27,
e IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 29.5 33.9

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 27 30.4

nm-C
Band
(Odd &
Even
Wavele
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 28 31.4

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12L 500 ps/ 74.0 81.0 3.75/8. 3 IU3- IU3- N/A IU3- N/A
SXL nm-C 27 IU8, IU8, IU17
Band- IU13- IU13-
Tunabl IU18, IU19,
e IU21- IU22-
Wavele IU26, IU27,
ngth- IU29- IU31-
ODB- IU34, IU36
PIN IU37-
IU42,
500 ps/ 84.0 94.0 IU47-
nm-C IU52,
Band- IU55-
Tunabl IU60,
e IU63-
Wavele IU68
ngth-
DQPS
K-PIN
TN15L 60000 140 155 3.8/8.4 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2- N/A
SXL ps/nm- IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
C IU12- IU13- IU12-
Band- IU17, IU18, IU17
Tunabl IU20- IU21-
e IU25, IU26,
Wavele IU28- IU30-
ngth- IU33, IU35
ePDM- IU36-
BPSK- IU41,
PIN IU46-
IU51,
IU54-
IU59,
IU62-
IU67

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12L 500 ps/ 75 79 2.5/5.5 2 IU2- IU2- N/A IU2- N/A

SXLR nm-C IU8, IU8, IU17
Band- IU12- IU13-
Tunabl IU18, IU19,
e IU20- IU21-
Wavele IU26, IU27,
ngth- IU28- IU30-
DQPS IU34, IU36
K-PIN IU36-
IU42,
500 ps/ 67.0 70.0 IU46-
nm-C IU52,
Band- IU54-
Tunabl IU60,
e IU62-
Wavele IU68
ngth-
ODB-
PIN
SXR nm-C IU8, IU8, IU17 IU5,
(odd & IU42, IU27,
even IU45- IU29-
wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
1200 35.0 38.0

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200
ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
800 ps/ 36.8 39.8

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
4800 39.8 42.8

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
ODB-
APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11L - 248 273 5.8/12. 4 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2- N/A

TX 8 IU6, IU6, IU6, IU15
(OTU IU12- IU13- IU12-
mode) IU16, IU17, IU16
IU20- IU21-
TN11L - 235 247 IU24, IU25,
TX IU28- IU30-
(regene IU32, IU34
ration IU36-
mode) IU40,
IU46-
IU50,
IU54-
IU58,
IU62-
IU66
TN12L - 33.9 37.3 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

WXS IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU12- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN11 - 10.0 13.0 2.2/4.8 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

M40 IU6, IU6, IU6, IU15
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU16, IU17, IU16
IU19- IU20-
IU24, IU25,
IU27- IU29-
IU32, IU34
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12 - 10.0 13.0 2.2/4.4 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

M40 IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11 - 20.0 25.0 2.3/5.1 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

M40V IU6, IU6, IU6, IU15
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU16, IU17, IU16
IU19- IU20-
IU24, IU25,
IU27- IU29-
IU32, IU34
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11 - 16 26 2.3/5.1 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

M40V IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11 - 8.0 8.5 1.9/4.2 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

MCA4 IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16 IU5
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11 - 12.0 13.0 1.9/4.2 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

MCA8 IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16 IU5
IU11- IU11- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- and
IU33, IU29-
IU35- IU35
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11 - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN21 - 0.2 0.3 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU1,

MR2 IU11,
IU8
TN11 - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN21 - 0.2 0.3 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU1,

MR4 IU11,
IU8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11 - 0.2 0.3 1.0/2.2 2 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- N/A

MR8 IU7, IU7, IU16
IU11- IU11-
IU17, IU18,
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11 - 7.7 8.6 1.0/2.2 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

MR8V IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11N 800 ps/ 61.1 68.4 1.6/3.5 1 N/A N/A N/A IU1- N/A
D2 nm-C IU8,
Band IU11-
(Odd & IU16
Even
Wavele
ngth)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 62.7 70.2

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 68.4 76.6

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
D2 nm-C IU8,
Band- IU11-
Tunabl IU16
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
800 ps/ 62.0 69.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 46.0 52.0

nm-C
Band
(Odd &
Even
Wavele
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te -
10km
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-40km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-80km-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN52N 800 ps/ 67.8 74.6 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A
D2 nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
Band- IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
Tunabl IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
e IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 70.5 77.5

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN53N 800 ps/ 25 28 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

D2 nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
(Odd & IU18 IU27, IU18 IU16
Even IU29-
Wavele IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-10km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-40km-
XFP
800 ps/ 27 30
nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN55N - 143 157.3 1.7/3.6 2 IU3, IU3, IU3, N/A N/A

PO2 IU7, IU7, IU7,
IU13, IU14, IU13,
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU21, IU22,
IU25, IU26,
IU29, IU31,
IU33, IU35
IU37,
IU41,
IU47,
IU51,
IU55,
IU59,
IU63,
IU67
TN55N - 143 157.3 1.7/3.6 2 IU3, IU3, IU3, N/A N/A

PO2E IU7, IU7, IU7,
IU13, IU14, IU13,
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU21, IU22,
IU25, IU26,
IU29, IU31,
IU33, IU35
IU37,
IU41,
IU47,
IU51,
IU55,
IU59,
IU63,
IU67

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
Q2 nm-C IU8,
Band IU11-
(Odd & IU16
Even
Wavele
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-10km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-40km-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
Q2 nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
(Odd & IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
Even IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-10km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-40km-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN53N 800 ps/ 45 50 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

Q2 nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
(Odd & IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
Even IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-10km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-40km-
XFP
800 ps/ 49 54
nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN54N 800 ps/ 53 58.3 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A N/A
Q2 nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8,
Band IU11- IU12- IU11-
(Odd & IU42, IU27, IU18
Even IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-10km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-40km-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12N 800 ps/ 38.8 43.4 1.2/2.6 1 N/A N/A N/A IU1- IU2-
S2 nm-C 4 IU8, IU5
Band IU11-
(Odd & IU16
Even
Wavele
ngth)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 39.4 44.1

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200
ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD
800 ps/ 39.7 44.46

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
4800 42.5 47.6

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
ODB-
APD
800 ps/ 30.32 34

nm-C
Band
(Odd &
Even
Wavele
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/ 25.35 28.39

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
TN52N 800 ps/ 51.3 56.4 1.3/2.8 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- IU2-
S2 nm-C 6 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
e IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
800 ps/ 49.1 54.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
TN53N 800 ps/ 20 24 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

S2 nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
(Odd & IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
Even IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-10km-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te
-40km-
XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
800 ps/ 21 25
nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
TN11N 500 ps/ 92 101.22. 2.2/4.9 2 N/A N/A N/A IU2- N/A
S3 nm-C 2/4.9 IU8,
Band- IU12-
Tunabl IU16
e
Wavele
ngth-
DQPS
K-PIN
500 ps/ 67.0 75.0

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
ODB-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN52N 500 ps/ 118 130 2.4/5.2 2 IU2- IU2- N/A IU2- N/A
S3 nm-C IU8, IU8, IU8,
e IU20- IU21-
Wavele IU26, IU27,
ngth- IU28- IU30-
DQPS IU34, IU36
K-PIN IU36-
800 ps/ IU42,
nm-C IU46-
Band- IU52,
Tunabl IU54-
e IU60,
Wavele IU62-
ngth- IU68
DQPS
K-PIN
500 ps/ 110 118

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
ODB-
PIN
S3 nm-C 6 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
Band- IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
Tunabl IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
e IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngth-
DQPS
K-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
800 ps/ 60.0 65

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
ODB-
PIN
40 62 69
Gbit/s
Multira
te-2 km
TN55N - 135 150 2.6/5.7 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2- N/A

S3 3 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU12- IU13- IU12- IU12-
IU18, IU19, IU18 IU16
IU20- IU21-
IU26, IU27,
IU28- IU30-
IU34, IU36
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN11O - 18.0 24.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU2- IU2- N/A IU2- IU2-

AU101 IU8, IU8, IU17 IU4,
IU12- IU12- IU11
TN11O - 14.0 18.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU18, IU19,
AU102 IU20- IU21-
TN11O - 18.0 24.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU26, IU27,
AU103 IU28- IU30-
IU34, IU36
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11O - 22.0 29.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU60,

AU105 IU62-
IU68
TN12O - 11.0 14.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

AU100 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU17 IU4,
IU12- IU12- IU12- IU11
TN12O - 12.0 15.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU18, IU19, IU18
AU101 IU20- IU21-
TN12O - 10.0 13.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU26, IU27,
AU102 IU28- IU30-
IU34, IU36
TN12O - 12.0 15.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU36-
AU103 IU42,
IU46-
TN12O - 15.0 21.0 1.8/4.0 2 IU52,
AU105 IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN13O - 12.0 15.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU11,

AU101 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU2-
IU11- IU11- IU5
TN13O - 12.0 15.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU42, IU27,
AU103 IU45- IU29-
TN13O - 15.0 21.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU68 IU36
AU105
TN13O - 12.0 15.0 1.6/3.5 1

AU106
TN11O - 11.0 13.0 1.3/2.9 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- IU2-

BU101 IU8, IU8, IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU11- IU11
TN11O - 13.0 15.0 1.3/2.9 1 IU42, IU27,
BU103 IU45- IU29-
TN11O - 12.0 14.0 1.3/2.9 1 IU68 IU36
BU104

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12O - 10.0 11.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

BU101 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU11- IU11
TN12O - 10.0 11.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU42, IU27,
BU1P1 IU45- IU29-
TN12O - 11.0 12.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU68 IU36
BU103
TN12O - 10.0 12.0 1.1/2.4 1

BU104
TN11O - 17.0 24.0 1.9/4.2 2 IU2- IU2- N/A IU2- IU2-

BU205 IU8, IU8, IU17 IU4,
IU12- IU12- IU11
IU18, IU19,
IU20- IU21-
IU26, IU27,
IU28- IU30-
IU34, IU36
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN12O - 14.0 19.0 1.6/3.7 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2-

BU205 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU17 IU4,
IU12- IU12- IU12- IU11
IU18, IU19, IU18
IU20- IU21-
IU26, IU27,
IU28- IU30-
IU34, IU36
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12O - 4.0 4.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU11,

LP IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU2-
IU11- IU12- IU5
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN11O - 12.0 15.0 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

PM8 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU11- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN41P - 45.0 45.0 0.7/1.5 1 IU69, IU39, IU20, IU21 N/A

IU 4 IU70, IU40, IU23 and
IU78, IU45, IU25
IU79, and
IU80, IU46
IU81,
IU88,
and
IU89
TN61P - 19.0 21.0 0.5/1.0 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU6,

IU IU7
TN21A - 50.0 55.0 0.8/1.8 1.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU6-
PIU IU8

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11R - 55 70 2.5/5.5 2 IU2- IU2- IU2- IU2- IU11,

AU1 1 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU17 IU2-
IU12- IU12- IU12- IU4
IU18, IU19, IU18
IU20- IU21-
IU26, IU27,
IU28- IU30-
IU34, IU36
IU36-
IU42,
IU46-
IU52,
IU54-
IU60,
IU62-
IU68
TN11R - 6 6.6 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

DU9 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17
IU11- IU12-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN11R - 7.7 8.6 1.1/2.4 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- N/A

MU901 IU8, IU8, IU17
IU11- IU11-
TN11R - 8.2 9.0 IU42, IU27, IU1-
MU902 IU45- IU29- IU18
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11R - 66.0 72.6 3.2/7.0 3 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- N/A

OAM IU6, IU6, IU15
IU11- IU11-
IU16, IU17,
IU19- IU20-
IU24, IU25,
IU27- IU29-
IU32, IU34
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66
TN11S - 0.2 0.3 0.8/1.8 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- IU2-

BM2 IU8, IU8, IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU11- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN12S - 11.0 14.9 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

C1 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU12- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN12S - 13.5 14.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

C2 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU12- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN11S - 17.5 19.5 0.95/2. 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

T2 09 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN16S - 32 35 1.3/2.8 1 N/A N/A IU9, N/A N/A

CC IU10
TN22S - 10.0 13.0 0.5/1.1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A IU8,

CC IU9
TN51S - 18.0 20.0 1.2/2.7 1 N/A IU11, N/A IU17, N/A

CC IU28 IU18
TN52S - 23.0 25.1 1.0/2.2 1 N/A IU11, N/A IU17, N/A

CC IU28 IU18
TNK2S - 26.7 29.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU74, N/A N/A N/A N/A

CC IU85
TN11S - 0.2 0.3 0.8/1.8 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IIU1- IU11,

CS IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU2-
IU11- IU11- IU5
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN52S - 13.0 14.1 0.5/1.1 1 N/A IU42, N/A N/A N/A

TG IU44
TNK2S - 14.0 16.0 0.5/1.1 1 IU75, N/A N/A N/A N/A

TG IU86
TNK2S - 1.0 1.0 0.3/0.6 1 IU82 IU47 N/A N/A N/A

TI 6
TN11T - 40.7 44.8 1.4/3.1 1 N/A N/A N/A IU1- IU2-

BE IU8, IU5
IU11-
IU16
TN11T - 13.0 15.0 1.14/2. 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

DC 51 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17
IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11T 800 ps/ 40.3 44.3 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- IU2-
MX nm-C IU8, IU8, IU17 IU5,
(odd & IU42, IU27,
even IU45- IU29-
wavele IU68 IU36
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200 42.1 46.4

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN
1200
ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
800 ps/ 44.5 51.2

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
4800 48.4 55.7

ps/nm-
C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
ODB-
APD
TN12T 800 ps/ 41.0 45.5 1.2/2.6 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-
MX nm-C IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
Band- IU11- IU12- IU11
Tunabl IU42, IU27,
e IU45- IU29-
Wavele IU68 IU36
ngth-
(D)RZ-
PIN
800 ps/ 39.0 43.7

nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
800 ps/ 31.4 36.1

nm-C
Band
(Odd &
Even
Wavele
ngths)-
Fixed
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
800 ps/
nm-C
Band-
Tunabl
e
Wavele
ngth-
NRZ-
PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te -
10km
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te -
40km
10Gbit/
s
Multira
te -
80km
TN12T - 37.4 40.7 1.4/3.1 1 N/A N/A N/A IU1- N/A

DX IU8,
IU11-
IU16

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN52T - 57.3 63.0 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

DX IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN53T - 25 35 1.5/3.3 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

DX IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN54T - 110 120 2.5/5.2 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A N/A

EM28 IU7, IU7, IU7,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN54T - 23 25 0.7/1.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A N/A

OA IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN52T - 41.8 46.0 0.85/1. 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

OG 87 IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11T - 55.0 60.0 1.4/3.1 1 N/A N/A N/A IU1- IU2-

OM IU8, IU5
IU11-
IU16
TN52T - 81.0 89.1 1.5/3.3 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

OM IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8, IU5
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN12T - 25.0 27.5 1.1/2.4 1 N/A N/A N/A IU1- IU2-

QM IU8 IU5
and
IU11-
IU16.
TN11T - 65.0 71.2 1.5/3.3 1 N/A N/A N/A IU1- N/A

QX IU8,
IU11-
IU16
TN52T - 91.5 100.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

QX IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN53T - 45 50 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A N/A

QX IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN55T - 45 50 1.6/3.5 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

QX IU8, IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18 IU16
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11T - 90.2 96 2.5/5.5 2 N/A N/A N/A IU2- N/A

SXL IU8,
IU12-
IU16
TN53T - 75 83 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A N/A

SXL IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN54T - 58 64 1.4/3.1 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A N/A

SXL IU8, IU8, IU8,
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU42, IU27, IU18
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN12V - 6.5 7.2 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

A1 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU12- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN12V - 8.5 9.4 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- IU2-

A4 IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17 IU5,
IU11- IU12- IU11
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36
TN11 - 12.0 15.0 1.0/2.2 1 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

WMU IU8, IU8, IU18 IU17
IU11- IU11-
IU42, IU27,
IU45- IU29-
IU68 IU36

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12 - 25.4 28.5 2.7/5.9 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

WSD9 4 IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN13 - 25.4 28.5 2.9/6.3 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

WSD9 8 IU6, IU6, IU6, IU15
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU16, IU17, IU16
IU19- IU20-
IU24, IU25,
IU27- IU29-
IU32, IU34
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN12 - 25.4 28.5 2.7/5.9 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

WSM9 4 IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU35-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN13 - 25.4 28.5 2.9/6.3 3 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

WSM9 8 IU6, IU6, IU6, IU15
IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU16, IU17, IU16
IU19- IU20-
IU24, IU25,
IU27- IU29-
IU32, IU34
IU35-
IU40,
IU45-
IU50,
IU53-
IU58,
IU61-
IU66

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11 - 17.0 18.7 3.2/7.1 2 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- N/A

WSMD IU7, IU7, IU16
4 IU11- IU12-
IU17, IU18,
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- and
IU33, IU29-
IU35- IU35
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN12 - 12.0 15.0 2.6/5.7 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

WSMD IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
4 IU11- IU12- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- and
IU33, IU29-
IU35- IU35
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(W) lb.) Occup
ied
l 25°C mum T64 T32 T16
(77°F) 55°C
(131°F)
TN11 - 17.0 18.7 3.2/7.0 2 IU1- IU1- N/A IU1- N/A

WSMD IU7, IU7, IU16
2 IU11- IU12-
IU17, IU18,
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- and
IU33, IU29-
IU35- IU35
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN11 - 25 30 3.1/6.8 2 IU1- IU1- IU1- IU1- N/A

WSMD IU7, IU7, IU7, IU16
9 IU11- IU121- IU11-
IU17, IU18, IU17
IU19- IU20-
IU25, IU26,
IU27- IU29-
IU33, IU35
IU36-
IU41,
IU45-
IU51,
IU53-
IU59,
IU61-
IU67
TN12X - 25.0 27.5 1.2/2.6 1 N/A N/A N/A IU9, N/A

CS 5 IU10
a: When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases
by another 2 W.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-90 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 cross-connect
boards
Board Power Consumption (W) Weig Num Valid Slots
ht ber of
Typic Maxi War War (kg/ Occu 8800 8800 8800
al 25° mum m m lb.) pied T64 T32 T16
C (77° 55°C Back Back Slots
F) (131° up up
F) (25°C, (55°C,
77°F) 131°
F)
TNK2 530- 583- 190 209 3.74 1+1 TNK2 N/A N/A
SXM 3.6 x 3.6 x (8.2) SXM :
+TNK (64- n) (64- n) +3.6 IU10,
2XCT (7.9) IU44
TNK2
XCT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK2 378- 416- 173 190 3.74 1+1 TNK2 N/A N/A
SXM 2.5 x 2.5 x (8.1) SXM :
+TNK (64- n) (64- n) +2.9 IU10,
4XCT (6.3) IU44
TNK4
XCT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK2 630– 693– 169 186 3.7 1+1 Enhan N/A N/A
USXH 7.4 x 8.1 x (8.1) ced:
+TNK (64–n) (64–n) +3.8 TNK2
2UXC (8.4) USXH
T (IU10,
IU44)
/
TNK2
UXCT
(IU9,
IU43)
Gener
al: N/
A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ht ber of
F) (131° up up
F) (25°C, (55°C,
77°F) 131°
F)
TNK4 324- 356- 114 125 3.0 1+1 TNK4 N/A N/A
SXM 2.5 x 2.5 x (6.6) SXM :
+TNK (64- n) (64- n) +3.6 IU10,
2XCT (7.9) IU44
TNK2
XCT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK4 321- 353- 112 123 2.68 1+1 TNK4 N/A N/A
SXH 2.5 x 2.5 x (5.9) SXH :
+TNK (64-n) (64-n) +3.6 IU10,
2XCT (7.9) IU44
TNK2
XCT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK4 188- 207- 97 107 3.0 1+1 TNK4 N/A N/A

SXM 1.2 x 1.32 x (6.6) SXM :
+TNK (64- n) (64- n) +2.9 IU10,
4XCT (6.3) IU44
TNK4
XCT :
IU9,
IU43
TNK4 169- 186- 95 105 2.68 1+1 TNK4 N/A N/A

SXH 1.2 x 1.32 x (5.9) SXH :
+TNK (64- n) (64- n) +2.9 IU10,
4XCT (6.3) IU44
TNK4
XCT :
IU9,
IU43

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ht ber of
F) (131° up up
F) (25°C, (55°C,
77°F) 131°
F)
TN52 340 - 374 - 87 96 3.9/8. 1 N/A Enhan N/A

UXC 7.4 x 8.1 x 6 ced:
H (32 - (32 - TN52
n) n) UXC
H
(IU9,
IU10)
Gener
al: N/
A
TN52 243 - 267.3 - 65 72 3.4/7. 1 N/A IU9, N/A

XCH0 3.6 x 3.6 x 5 IU10
1 (32 - (32 -
n) n)
TN52 101 - 111 - 43 47.3 3.4/7. 1 N/A IU9, N/A

XCH0 1.12 x 1.12 x 5 IU10
2 (32 - (32 -
n) n)
TN16 178– 195– 84–1.7 92– 4.0/8. 1 N/A Enhan N/A

UXC 7.2 x 7.9 x x (16– 1.8 x 8 ced:
M (16–n) (16–n) n)–2 (16– TN16
n)–2.2 UXC
M
(IU9,
IU10)
Gener
al: N/
A
TN16 73– 88.8– 40 48 1.8/4. 1 N/A N/A IU9,

XCH 1.4 x 1.4 x 0 IU10
(16–n) (16–n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the XCT
must be configured with SXM.
"n" is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.9 Housekeeping Alarms

Users can configure the severities for the eight alarm inputs to remotely monitor the alarms of
an external system. The alarms can be sent to a centralized alarm management system for
management. In addition, two housekeeping control interfaces are available for remotely
controlling external equipment such as air conditioners, fans, and electric generators.
3.9.1 OptiX OSN 8800 Housekeeping Alarm and Control Interfaces

OptiX OSN 8800 provides alarm input and output interfaces. The alarm input interfaces are
designed for remotely monitoring alarms of external systems, such as an environmental
monitoring system. The alarm output interfaces are designed to output alarms to a centralized
management system for management. OptiX OSN 8800 also provides two housekeeping control
interfaces for remotely controlling external equipment, such as air conditioners, fans, and electric
generators.
OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output and
Control Interfaces
OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Housekeeping Alarm Input Interfaces
The TNK2ATE board provides 16 alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals from
the external systems, such as the environmental monitoring system. Users can configure the
names and severity of the 16 alarm inputs so that the equipment works with external systems to
remotely monitor the external alarms. The alarm signals are forwarded to the EFI1 board after
the TNK2ATE board processes them.
Table 3-91 describes the alarm input interfaces.
Table 3-91 OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32 housekeeping alarm input interfaces
Pin Diagram PIN Definition Function

No.
ATE A1 ENV-1 This interface receives the

first channel of
A B C D B1 housekeeping alarm
1
2 signals from the external
3 systems
4
5
6 A2 ENV-2 This interface receives the
7
8
second channel of
B2 housekeeping alarm
Alarm Input signals from the external
Interfaces systems
A3 ENV-3 This interface receives the

third channel of
signals from the external
systems

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

No.

fourth channel of
systems

fifth channel of
systems

sixth channel of
systems

seventh channel of
systems

eighth channel of
systems
C1 ENV-9 This interface receives the

ninth channel of
D1 housekeeping alarm
systems

tenth channel of
systems

eleventh channel of
systems

twelfth channel of
housekeeping alarm

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

No.
D4 signals from the external

systems

thirteenth channel of
systems

fourteenth channel of
systems

fifteenth channel of
systems

sixteenth channel of
systems
OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32 Housekeeping Alarm Output and Control
Interfaces
The TNK2STI board provides six alarm output interfaces that are used to send alarms to a
centralized alarm management system. The TNK2STI board also provides two housekeeping
control interfaces for remotely controlling external equipment.
Table 3-92 describes the alarm output and control interfaces.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-92 OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32 housekeeping alarm output and control
interfaces
No.
Alarm output A1 CR-V When the system generates
Interfaces
a critical visual alarm, this
STI B1 interface sends the alarm
Clock signals
A B C D signal to the centralized
1 alarm management system.
2
3
4 A2 MJ-V When the system generates
5
6
a major visual alarm, this
7
B2 interface sends the alarm
8
signal to the centralized
alarm management system.
Reserved
Control Interfaces
Interfaces A3 MN-V When the system generates
a minor visual alarm, this
A4 CR-A When the system generates

a critical audible alarm,
B4 this interface sends the
alarm signal to the
centralized alarm
management system.
A5 MJ-A When the system generates

a major audible alarm, this
A6 MN-A When the system generates

a minor audible alarm, this
A7 CONT-7 This interface is a

housekeeping control
B7 interface. By opening or
closing the relay contact,
this interface outputs
housekeeping alarm
signals to remotely control
external equipment, such
as air conditioners, fans,
and electric regenerators.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

No.
A8 CONT-8 This interface is a

housekeeping control
B8 interface. By opening or
closing the relay contact,
this interface outputs
housekeeping alarm
signals to remotely control
external equipment, such
as air conditioners, fans,
and electric regenerators.
C8 – Reserved
D8 Reserved
NOTE
The C1- C7 and D1- D7 interfaces provide inputs and outputs of clock signals.
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Interfaces and Control
Interfaces
The TN41ATE board provides 16 alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals from or
to external systems, such as the environmental monitoring system. Users can configure the names
and severities of the 16 alarm inputs so that the equipment works with external systems to
the ATE processing is complete. The TN41ATE board also provides six alarm output interfaces,
sending alarms to a centralized alarm management system. Further, the TN41ATE board
provides two housekeeping control interfaces to remotely control external equipment.
Table 3-93 describes the alarm input/output and control interfaces.
Table 3-93 Housekeeping alarm input/output and control interfaces

Pin Diagram PIN Defini Function
No. tion
Alarm output A1 CR-V When the system generates a critical visual
Interfaces
alarm, this interface sends the alarm signal
ATE B1 to the centralized alarm management
Alarm Input
A B C D E F G H
Interfaces system.
1
2 A2 MJ-V When the system generates a major visual
3
4
Clock signals alarm, this interface sends the alarm signal
5
Interfaces B2 to the centralized alarm management
6
7 system.
8
A3 MN-V When the system generates a minor visual
Control Reserved
Interfaces Interfaces

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

No. tion
B3 to the centralized alarm management

system.
A4 CR-A When the system generates a critical

audible alarm, this interface sends the
B4 alarm signal to the centralized alarm
management system.
A5 MJ-A When the system generates a major audible

system.
A6 MN-A When the system generates a minor audible

system.
A7 CONT- This interface is a housekeeping control

7 interface. By opening or closing the relay
B7 contact, this interface outputs
housekeeping alarm signals to remotely
control external equipment, such as air
conditioners, fans, and electric
regenerators.
A8 CONT- This interface is a housekeeping control

8 interface. By opening or closing the relay
regenerators.
C1 ENV-1 This interface receives the first channel of

housekeeping alarm signals from the
D1 external systems
C2 ENV-2 This interface receives the second channel

of housekeeping alarm signals from the
D2 external systems
C3 ENV-3 This interface receives the third channel of

D3 external systems
C4 ENV-4 This interface receives the fourth channel

D4 external systems

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

No. tion
C5 ENV-5 This interface receives the fifth channel of

D5 external systems
C6 ENV-6 This interface receives the sixth channel of

D6 external systems
C7 ENV-7 This interface receives the seventh channel

D7 external systems
C8 ENV-8 This interface receives the eighth channel

D8 external systems
E1 ENV-9 This interface receives the ninth channel of

F1 external systems
E2 ENV-1 This interface receives the tenth channel of

0 housekeeping alarm signals from the
F2 external systems
E3 ENV-1 This interface receives the eleventh

1 channel of housekeeping alarm signals
F3 from the external systems
E4 ENV-1 This interface receives the twelfth channel

2 of housekeeping alarm signals from the
F4 external systems
E5 ENV-1 This interface receives the thirteenth

E6 ENV-1 This interface receives the fourteenth

E7 ENV-1 This interface receives the fifteenth

E8 ENV-1 This interface receives the sixteenth

G8 - Reserved
H8 Reserved

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
The G1-G7 and H1-H7 interfaces provide clock inputs and outputs.
3.9.2 OptiX OSN 6800A Housekeeping Alarm and Control

Interfaces
OptiX OSN 6800A provides alarm input/output and control output interfaces. The alarm input
interfaces are designed for remote monitoring of external system alarms, such as an
environmental monitoring system. The alarm output interfaces are designed to output alarms to
a centralized management system for alarm management. OptiX OSN 6800A also provides two
housekeeping control interfaces for remotely controlling external equipment, such as air
conditioners, fans, and electric generators.
Alarm Input/Output and Control Interfaces

The TN41ATE board provides 16 alarm inputs and remote monitoring of alarm signals from or
to the external systems, such as the environmental monitoring system. Users can configure the
names and severity of the 16 alarm inputs so that the equipment works with external systems to
the ATE processing is complete. The TN41ATE board also provides six alarm output interfaces,
sending alarms to a centralized alarm management system. Further, the TN41ATE board
provides two housekeeping control interfaces to remotely control external equipment.
Table 3-94 describes the alarm input/output and control interfaces.
Table 3-94 Alarm input/output and control interfaces
Pin Diagram PIN Definit Function

No. ion
Alarm output A1 CR-V When the system generates a critical visual
Interfaces
ATE B1 to the centralized alarm management
Alarm Input
A B C D E F G H
Interfaces system.
1
2 A2 MJ-V When the system generates a major visual
3
4
Clock signals alarm, this interface sends the alarm signal
5
Interfaces B2 to the centralized alarm management
6
7 system.
8
A3 MN-V When the system generates a minor visual
Control Reserved B3 to the centralized alarm management
Interfaces Interfaces
system.
A4 CR-A When the system generates a critical

audible alarm, this interface sends the alarm
B4 signal to the centralized alarm management
system.
A5 MJ-A When the system generates a major audible

system.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

No. ion
A6 MN-A When the system generates a minor audible

system.
A7 CONT-7 This interface is a housekeeping control

interface. By opening or closing the relay
regenerators.
A8 CONT-8 This interface is a housekeeping control

interface. By opening or closing the relay
regenerators.
C1 ENV-1 This interface receives the first channel of

D1 external systems
C2 ENV-2 This interface receives the second channel

D2 external systems
C3 ENV-3 This interface receives the third channel of

D3 external systems
C4 ENV-4 This interface receives the fourth channel

D4 external systems
C5 ENV-5 This interface receives the fifth channel of

D5 external systems
C6 ENV-6 This interface receives the sixth channel of

D6 external systems
C7 ENV-7 This interface receives the seventh channel

D7 external systems
C8 ENV-8 This interface receives the eighth channel

D8 external systems

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

No. ion
E1 ENV-9 This interface receives the ninth channel of

F1 external systems
E2 ENV-10 This interface receives the tenth channel of

F2 external systems
E3 ENV-11 This interface receives the eleventh channel

F3 external systems
E4 ENV-12 This interface receives the twelfth channel

F4 external systems
E5 ENV-13 This interface receives the thirteenth

channel of housekeeping alarm signals
E6 ENV-14 This interface receives the fourteenth

E7 ENV-15 This interface receives the fifteenth channel

F7 external systems
E8 ENV-16 This interface receives the sixteenth

G8 - Reserved
H8 Reserved
NOTE
The G1-G7 and H1-H7 interfaces provide inputs and outputs of clock signals.
3.9.3 OptiX OSN 3800A Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces

OptiX OSN 3800A provides alarm input interfaces. These interfaces are designed for remotely
monitoring alarms of external systems, such as an environmental monitoring system.
Alarm Input Interfaces

OptiX OSN 3800A receives alarm inputs through the X3 and X4 connectors of the AUX signal
cable. Users can configure the names and severity of the six alarm inputs so that the equipment
works with external systems to remotely monitor the external alarms. The X1 connector of the
AUX signal cable connects to the EXT interface on the AUX port, as shown in Figure 3-76.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-76 AUX signal cable

View A
64
1
A X2
X1 ALMI2 View B
1
X3 B
ALMI1 8
View C
X4 C 1
350 mm (13.8 in.) 8

X5
640 mm (25.2 in.)
800 mm (31.5 in.)
Table 3-95 lists the relationships between connectors and interface types.
Table 3-95 Relationship between connectors and interface types
Connector Interface Type
X4 ALMI1
X3 ALMI2
NOTE
Connector X2 is an ETH interface. The ETH interface is reserved for future use. Therefore, do not connect a
cable to the ETH interface. Connector X5 is a serial interface.
Table 3-96 describes pin assignment of the ALIM1.
Table 3-96 Pin assignment of the ALIM1
Connector X1 Pin Connector X4 Pin Relationship Pin Function

No. No.
9 1 Pair These pins receive

the first channel of
11 2 housekeeping alarm
signals from the
external systems.

the second channel of
housekeeping alarm

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Connector X1 Pin Connector X4 Pin Relationship Pin Function

No. No.
15 6 signals from the

external systems.

the third channel of
signals from the
external systems.

the fourth channel of
signals from the
external systems.
Table 3-97 describes pin assignment of the ALIM2.
Table 3-97 Pin assignment of the ALIM2

Connector X1 Pin Connector X3 Pin Relationship Function
No. No.

the fifth channel of
signals from the
external systems.

the sixth channel of
signals from the
external systems.
3.10 Network Management

This chapter describes the network management system, as well as inter- and intra-NE
communication management.
Figure 3-77 shows a sample network management structure with Huawei equipment deployed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-77 Network management structure
Network management involves the following aspects:

l Network management system: U2000 and U2000 Web local craft terminal (LCT)
l Inter-NE communication management:
– The NEs at sites C and E are used as gateway NEs (GNEs) and are connected to the
external data communication network (DCN) through a switch or router,
communicating with the network management system (NMS). All the other NEs are
used as subtending NEs (SNEs), communicating with the NMS through the GNEs.
– The NEs between sites A and G are interconnected with fibers and exchange information
over data communications channels (DCCs) or general communication channels
(GCCs) using the IP over DCC protocol.
– Some NEs between sites A and G (for example, NEs at site A) are interconnected with
network cables (generally where optical and electrical NEs are separate), and exchange
information over Ethernet channels (at NM_ETH ports on the related boards) using the
IP protocol.
l Intra-NE communication management: For each NE at sites A-G, the master and slave
subracks implement intra-NE communication. In the figure above, one NE at site A has
three subracks (one master connects to two slaves).
3.10.1 Network Cable and Serial Cable

Network cables are classified into two types: crossover cables and straight-through cables. The
intra-NE connections (excluding the connections between subracks and CRPC/ROP boards) and
inter-NE connections (including the connections between the NEs and NMS) can be established
using either straight-through or crossover cables. However, the connections between subracks
and CRPC/ROP boards must be established using crossover cables. Serial cables can connect
to the serial interfaces of subracks for the purpose of managing the subracks.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Network Cable
This section describes the network cable connections and the pin assignments of the straight-
through and crossover cables.
l Figure 3-78 shows the connections of straight-through cables and crossover cables.
Figure 3-78 Network cable connection
Pin8 Pin8
Pin1 Pin1
X1 X2
Straight-through cable
Pin8 Pin8
Pin1 Pin1
X1 X2
Crossover cable
l Table 3-98 lists the pin assignment of the straight-through cable.
Table 3-98 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable
Connector Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1
X1.pin1 X2.pin1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.pin2 X2.pin2 Orange
X1.pin3 X2.pin3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.pin6 X2.pin6 Green
X1.pin4 X2.pin4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.pin5 X2.pin5 White/Blue
X1.pin7 X2.pin7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.pin8 X2.pin8 Brown

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-99 lists the pin assignment of the crossover cable.
Table 3-99 Pin assignment of the crossover cable
Connector Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1
X1.pin1 X2.pin3 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.pin2 X2.pin6 Orange
X1.pin3 X2.pin1 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.pin6 X2.pin2 Green
X1.pin4 X2.pin7 Blue Twisted pair
X1.pin5 X2.pin8 White/Blue
X1.pin7 X2.pin4 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.pin8 X2.pin5 Brown
Serial Cable
This section describes the appearance and pin assignment of a serial cable.
l Figure 3-79 shows the appearance of a serial cable for the OptiX OSN 8800/6800A.
Figure 3-79 Appearance of a serial cable for the OptiX OSN 8800/6800A
Pos.1 1
View A
Pos.9
A
1
2
2 View B
W1 1
B
X1 8
X2
600 mm (23.6 in.)
Figure 3-80 shows the appearance of a serial cable for the OptiX OSN 3800A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-80 Appearance of a serial cable for the OptiX OSN 3800A
View A
Pos.64
1
2
Pos.1 2 View B
A B 1
1
X2 8
W5
W4
X3
X1
W3
X4
W2 View C
350 mm (13.8 in.) 3
3 Pos.9
C
X5
560 mm (22.0 in.) Pos.1
640 mm (25.2 in.)
800 mm (31.5 in.)
Table 3-100 lists the relationships between connectors and interface types.
Table 3-100 Relationship between connectors and interface types
Connector Interface Type
X2 ETH
X3 ALMI2
X4 ALMI1
X5 Serial
NOTE
The ETH interface is reserved for future use. Therefore, do not connect a cable to the ETH interface.
The ALMI1/ALMI2 interface is used for receiving alarms.
l Table 3-101 lists the pin assignment of the serial cable for the OptiX OSN 8800/6800A.
Table 3-101 Pin assignment of the serial cable for the OptiX OSN 8800/6800A
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.1 X2.1 Not used
X1.2 X2.3 Pair
X1.3 X2.2
X1.4 X2.4 Not used
X1.5 X2.5 Straight-through

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
X1.6 X2.6 Not used
X1.7 X2.7 Not used
X1.8 X2.8 Not used
X1.9 - Not used
X1.SHELL X2.SHELL Straight-through
Table 3-102 lists the pin assignment of the serial cable for the OptiX OSN 3800A.
Table 3-102 Pin assignment of the serial cable for the OptiX OSN 3800A
X1.9 X4.1 Pair
X1.11 X4.2
X1.13 X4.3 Pair
X1.15 X4.6
X1.17 X4.4 Pair
X1.19 X4.5
X1.10 X4.7 Pair
X1.12 X4.8
3.10.2 Management Interfaces and Connections of OptiX OSN

8800/6800A
3.10.2.1 Interfaces
Interfaces
For OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800A, the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces on the
TN51ETH1/TN51ETH2/TN16EFI boards are used for achieving inter-NE communication. The
ETH1, ETH2, and ETH3 interfaces on the TN51ETH2/TN16EFI boards are used to achieve
intra-NE communication. Table 3-103 provides the correct connections of these network
interfaces.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-103 Network cable interfaces

Subra Board Front Panel Interf Ty Function
ck Name ace pe
Type
OpitX TN51 EFI1 NM_E RJ4 l Connects the network interface on the
OSN EFI1 TH2 5 equipment through a network cable to that
8800 on an NM server so that the NM can
T64/8 manage the equipment.
NM_ETH2
800 l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2

T32/6 network interface on one NE through a
800A network cable to that on another NE to
achieve communication between NEs.
SERIAL
SERIA DB Functions as a serial network interface and

L 9 supports the X.25 protocol and TL1
management. The default rate of this serial
interface is 38400.
TN51 EFI2 LAMP RJ4 Controls the power and alarm indicators of
EFI2 1/ 5 the cabinet that holds the subrack with the
LAMP TN51EFI2 board.
LAMP1
ETH1
2 CAUTION
The LAMP interfaces on the TN51EFI2 board
LAMP2
ETH2
provide 5 V power, and it is only used for the

indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an
RJ45 cable intended for an NM_ETH or ETH
NM_ETH1
ETH3
interface; otherwise, the TN51EFI2 board, the

connected test instrument, or the equipment will
be damaged.
NM_E RJ4 l Connects the network interface on the

TH1 5 equipment through a network cable to that
on an NM server so that the NM can
manage the equipment.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2
network interface on one NE through a
network cable to that on another NE to
NOTE
NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same
function.
ETH1/ RJ4 l Connects a network cable from the

ETH2/ 5 interfaces on one subrack to
ETH3 corresponding interfaces on the other
subracks to achieve the communication
between the master subrack and slave
subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or
ROP board to achieve communication
with the CRPC or ROP board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Subra Board Front Panel Interf Ty Function

ck Name ace pe
Type
OpitX TN16 LAMP RJ4 Controls the PWR indicators and alarm
OSN EFI EFI
1- 5 indicators of the cabinet that holds the
8800 LAMP subrack.
LAMP1
ETH1
SERIAL
T16 2 CAUTION
LAMP2
ETH2
The LAMP interfaces on the TN16EFI board

provide 5 V power, and it is only used for the
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
ETH3
indicators on a cabinet. It cannot connect to an

RJ45 cable intended for an NM_ETH or ETH
interface; otherwise, the TN16EFI board, the
connected test instrument, or the equipment will
be damaged.
ETH1- RJ4 l Connects a network cable from the

ETH3 5 interfaces on one subrack to
corresponding interfaces on the other
subracks to achieve the communication
between the master subrack and slave
subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or
ROP board to achieve communication
with the CRPC or ROP board.
NM_E RJ4 l Connects the network interface on the

TH1- 5 equipment through a network cable to that
NM_E on an NM server so that the NM can
TH2 manage the equipment.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2
network interface on one NE through a
network cable to that on another NE to
NOTE
NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same
function.
SERIA DB Functions as a serial network interface and

L 9 supports the X.25 protocol and TL1
management. The default rate of this serial
interface is 38400.
Pin Assignment
Figure 3-81 shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-81 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Figure 3-82 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.
Figure 3-82 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
Table 3-104 describes the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface.
Table 3-104 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface
Pin Signal Function
1 NM_ETNTXP Positive pole for transmitting

the data when
communicating with the
NMS
2 NM_ETNTXN Negative pole for

transmitting the data when
NMS
3 NM_ETNRXP Positive pole for receiving

the data when
NMS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Pin Signal Function
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 NM_ETNRXN Negative pole for receiving

the data when
NMS
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
Table 3-105 describes the pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface.
Table 3-105 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH2 interface

Pin Signal Function
1 NMJL_ETNTXP Positive pole for transmitting

the concatenated data when
NMS
2 NMJL_ETNTXN Negative pole for

transmitting the concatenated
data when communicating
with the NMS
3 NMJL_ETNRXP Positive pole for receiving

NMS
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 NMJL_ETNRXN Negative pole for receiving

NMS
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected
Table 3-106 describes the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-106 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface

Pin Signal Function
1 ETH1_TXP Positive pole for transmitting

the data for normal inter-
subrack communication
2 ETH1_TXN Negative pole for

transmitting the data for
normal inter-subrack
communication
3 ETH1_RXP Positive pole for receiving

4 ETH1_CRIT_TXP Positive pole for transmitting

the data for emergent inter-
5 ETH1_CRIT_TXN Negative pole for

emergent inter-subrack
communication
6 ETH1_RXN Negative pole for receiving

7 ETH1_CRIT_RXP Positive pole for receiving

8 ETH1_CRIT_RXN Negative pole for receiving

Table 3-107 describes the pin assignment of the ETH2 interface.
Table 3-107 Pin assignment of the ETH2 interface

Pin Signal Function
1 ETH2_TXP Positive pole for transmitting

2 ETH2_TXN Negative pole for

normal inter-subrack
communication

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Pin Signal Function
3 ETH2_RXP Positive pole for receiving

4 ETH2_CRIT_TXP Positive pole for transmitting

5 ETH2_CRIT_TXN Negative pole for

emergent inter-subrack
communication
6 ETH2_RXN Negative pole for receiving

7 ETH2_CRIT_RXP Positive pole for receiving

8 ETH2_CRIT_RXN Negative pole for receiving

Table 3-108 describes the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces.
Table 3-108 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and LAMP2 interfaces

Pin Signal Function
1 CRIT_ALMP Positive pole for critical

alarm signals
2 CRIT_ALMN Negative pole for critical

alarm signals
3 MAJ_ALMP Positive pole for major alarm

signals
4 RUNP Positive pole for power

indicating signals
5 RUNN Negative pole for power

indicating signals
6 MAJ_ALMN Negative pole for major

alarm signals
7 MIN_ALMP Positive pole for minor alarm

signals

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Pin Signal Function
8 MIN_ALMN Negative pole for minor

alarm signals
Table 3-109 describes the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface.
Table 3-109 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface
Pin Signal Function
1 N.C Not defined
2 RXD Receive end
3 TXD Transmit end
4 DTR Data terminal equipment

ready
5 GND Ground
6 - Reserved
7 - Reserved
8 GND Ground
9 N.C Not defined
DIP switches
Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the SW1 of TN51EFI1/TN16EFI board
is the same as that shown in Figure 3-83 and Figure 3-84. There is no need to set DIP switches
on the TN51EFI2 board.
Figure 3-83 Position of the DIP switches on the TN51EFI1 board
NM_ETH2
CPLD ON ON
ON ON
SERIAL ON ON
ON ON
SW1 SW2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-84 Position of the DIP switches on the TN16EFI board
U8
SERIAL
T1
NM_ETH2
SW1
SW2
3.10.2.2 Connections
On a network where only OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800A NEs are used, intra-NE and
inter-NE communication are achieved through fiber connections and network cable connections.
NE Connections
Figure 3-85 and Figure 3-86 show the NE connection scheme. The figure presents connections
between two NEs: NE1 and NE2. Each NE consists of three subracks, one of which is the master
subrack and the other two are slave subracks. The master and slave subracks are connected using
fibers and network cables.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-85 NE connection scheme (OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64/6800A)

NMS
NE1 NE2
Master Subrack (1) EFI2 EFI2
EFI1 Master Subrack (1)
NM_ETH2
LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
SCC SCC
ETH1 ETH2
EFI1/EFI2
ETH1 ETH2
EFI2
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
SERIAL
ETH3
ETH3
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
EFI2
Slave Subrack (2) EFI2 Slave Subrack (2)
LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
ETH1 ETH2
SCC SCC
ETH1 ETH2
Other
EFI2
EFI2
Other
NE NE
FIU SC2 SC2 FIU
ETH3
ETH3
OADM/OA/O Other OADM/OA/O
FIU
FIU
M/OD M/OD
NE
EFI2
Slave Subrack (3) EFI2 Slave Subrack (3)
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

LAMP1LAMP2NM_ETH1
SCC SCC
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
Other Other
EFI2
EFI2
NE NE
FIU SC2 SC2 FIU
ETH3
ETH3

FIU
FIU
M/OD NE M/OD
Fiber Network Cable

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-86 NE connection scheme (OptiX OSN 8800 T16)

NMS
NE1 NE2
Master Subrack (1) EFI EFI Master Subrack (1)
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
XCH XCH
SERIAL
SERIAL
EFI
EFI
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH2
ETH3
ETH3
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Slave Subrack (2) EFI EFI Slave Subrack (2)
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
AUX AUX
SERIAL
SERIAL
Other Other
EFI
EFI
NE NE
FIU SC2 SC2 FIU
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH2
ETH3
ETH3

FIU
FIU
M/OD M/OD
NE
Slave Subrack (3) EFI EFI Slave Subrack (3)
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1

LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
AUX AUX
SERIAL
SERIAL
Other Other
EFI
EFI
NE NE
FIU SC2 SC2 FIU
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH2
ETH3
ETH3

FIU
FIU
M/OD NE M/OD
Fiber Network Cable
Inter-NE communication:
l As shown in the figure above, NE1 connects to the NMS through the NM_ETH1 interface
on the EFI2/EFI board in the master subrack using a network cable, enabling the NMS to
manage the two NEs.
l Inside each NE, OTU, OADM/OA/OM/OD, OSC, and FIU boards are properly connected
through fibers. The FIU boards are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels are
used to achieve inter-NE communication.
l The NM_ETH2 interface on the EFI1/EFI board in the master subrack of one NE is
connected to the NM_ETH1 interface on the EFI2/EFI board inside the master subrack of
the other NE using a network cable, achieving inter-NE communication over Ethernet
channels.
Intra-NE communication:
For each NE, the ETH2 and ETH3 interfaces on the EFI2/EFI board inside the master subrack
are connected to the ETH1 interfaces on the EFI2/EFI boards in the slave subracks to achieve
communication between the subracks.
3.10.3 Management Interfaces and Connections of OptiX OSN

3800A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3.10.3.1 Interfaces
Interfaces
For OptiX OSN 3800A, the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 interfaces of TN22AUX and TN61AUX
boards are used for achieving inter-NE communication. Table 3-110 provides the correct
connections of these network interfaces.
Table 3-110 Network cable interfaces

Boar Front Panel Interf T Function
d ace yp
Na e
me
TN2 NM_E RJ l Connects the OptiX OSN 3800A housing the TN22AUX or
2AU STAT
TH1/ 45 TN61AUX board to the U2000 server through a network cable
X/ PROG
NM_E so that the U2000 can manage the OptiX OSN 3800A.
TN6 TH2 l Connects the TN22AUX or TN61AUX board inside one NE to
1AU the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface on the TN22AUX or
NM_ETH1
X TN61AUX board inside another NE for communication

between the NEs.
NM_ETH2
EXT D Provides the alarm input/output interface, cascading interface,

B6 commissioning network interface and management serial interface.
4 NOTE
EXT interfaces include ETH, SERIAL, ALMI1, and ALMI2.
EXT
AUX
Pin Assignment
Figure 3-87 shows the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-87 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 3-111 shows the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 interfaces.
Table 3-111 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 interfaces

Pin Signal Function
1 ETNTX12P Positive pole for transmitting

the data when
NMS
2 ETNTX12N Negative pole for

transmitting the data when
NMS
3 ETNRX12P Positive pole for receiving

the data when
NMS
4 NC Not defined
5 NC Not defined
6 ETNRX12N Negative pole for receiving

the data when
NMS
7 NC Not defined
8 NC Not defined
For details about the pin assignment of the serial cable, see 3.10.1 Network Cable and Serial
Cable.
For details about the pin assignment of the ALMI1 and ALMI2 interfaces, see 3.9.3 OptiX OSN
3800A Housekeeping Alarm Interfaces.
Jumper
Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the J4 jumper of TN22AUX board is the
same as that shown in Figure 3-88. Do not cap other jumpers. There is no need to set jumpers
on the TN61AUX board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-88 Position of the jumper on the TN22AUX
Jumper
Jumper cap
8 (J4)
3.10.3.2 Connections
On a network that uses only OptiX OSN 3800A NEs, communication between the NEs is
achieved through fiber connections and network cable connections.
NE Connections
Figure 3-89 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure presents how two NEs, namely NE1
and NE2, are connected using fibers and network cables.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 3-89 NE connection scheme

NMS
NE1
STAT
PROG
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2
SCC
AUX
OTU
EXT
OTU
AUX
NE2
STAT
PROG
SCC
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2
AUX
Other
NE
FIU SC2
OADM/OA FIU
EXT
AUX
Other Other
NE NE
Fiber Network Cable
l As shown in the figure above, the NEs are connected to the NMS through the NM_ETH1
and NM_ETH2 interfaces on the AUX boards using network cables, enabling the NMS to
manage the two NEs.
l The OTU, OADM/OA, OSC, and FIU boards of the NEs are properly connected through
fibers and the FIU boards are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels are used
to achieve inter-NE communication.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l The NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 interfaces on the AUX boards of the two NEs are connected
using network cables, achieving inter-NE communication over Ethernet channels.
3.10.4 Management Connections among OSN8800&6800A&3800A
On a hybrid network where OptiX OSN 8800, 6800A, and 3800A NEs are used, the inter-NE
communication and intra-NE communication are achieved through fiber connections and
network cable connections.
Connections
Figure 3-90 shows the NE connection scheme. The figure illustrates how three NEs (namely
NE1, NE2, and NE3) of different types are connected. As shown in the figure, NE1 consists of
a master subrack (OptiX OSN 8800) and two slave subracks (OptiX OSN 8800 T16/6800A);
NE2 and NE3 are two OptiX OSN 3800A NEs.
Figure 3-90 NE connection scheme

NMS
NE1 NE2
8800 T32/T64 STAT
Master Subrack (1) EFI2 EFI1

PROG
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2
3800A
NM_ETH2
SCC SCC
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
EFI1/EFI2
ETH1 ETH2
AUX
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
SERIAL
ETH3
OTU OTU
EXT
OTU OTU
8800 T16 AUX
Slave Subrack (2)

EFI
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
ETH1 ETH2
SCC NE3 3800A

SERIAL
Other
EFI
STAT
PROG
NE
FIU SC2
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2
SCC
NM_ETH2
AUX
Other
ETH3
OADM/OA/ Other NE
SC2 FIU
FIU
OM/OD NE
6800A FIU OADM/OA

EXT
EFI2
Slave Subrack (3)
LAMP1 LAMP2 NM_ETH1
SCC
ETH1 ETH2
Other AUX
EFI2
NE
FIU SC2
Other NE
ETH3
OADM/OA/ Other
FIU
OM/OD NE
Fiber Network Cable
l As shown in the figure above, NE1 connects to the NMS through the NM_ETH1 interface
on the EFI2 board in the master subrack using a network cable, enabling the NMS to manage
all the NEs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l The OTU, OADM/OA/OM/OD, OSC, and FIU boards inside NE1 are connected through
fibers. The FIU boards are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC channels are used to
achieve inter-NE communication.
l NE2 and NE3 are connected through their OTU, OADM/OA, OSC, and FIU boards using
fibers. The FIU boards of the two NEs are also connected to other NEs. ESC or OSC
channels are used to achieve inter-NE communication.
l The NM_ETH2 interface on the EFI1 board of the master subrack inside NE1 connects to
the NM_ETH1 interface on the AUX board inside NE2 through a network cable. The
NM_ETH2 interface on the AUX board inside NE2 also uses a network cable to connect
to the NM_ETH1 interface on the AUX board inside NE3. In this manner, all the NEs
communicate with each other using Ethernet channels.
Intra-NE communication:
For NE1, the ETH2 and ETH3 interfaces on the EFI2 board inside the master subrack are
connected to the ETH1 interfaces on the EFI2/EFI boards in the slave subracks to achieve
communication between the subracks.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 4 Node Configurations
4 Node Configurations
About This Chapter
4.1 80 Wavelength Configuration

4.3 OLA
4.4 Less Than 40-Wavelength FOADM Configuration
4.5 PID
4.6 8-Wavelength CWDM Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.1.1 OTM
4.1.1.1 Signal Flow

The DWDM OTM node is used at the terminal station.
In the receive direction:
l The optical supervisory signal and the main path optical signals are separated by the FIU.
Then, the optical supervisory signal is sent to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit
for processing.
l After amplification, the optical signals in the main channel are demultiplexed into two
channels of multiplexed signals (odd-numbered wavelengths and even-numbered
wavelengths) with the frequency spacing of 100 GHz by the ITL. Then, each channel of
multiplexed signals is demultiplexed into a single channel of optical signals, and finally
sent to the corresponding client equipment after being transformed or divided by the OTUs.
The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse process of the receive direction.
Figure 4-1 shows the signal flow of an 80-wavelength OTM node.
Figure 4-1 Signal flow of an 80-wavelength OTM node
4.1.1.2 Subrack Layout

This section describes the principles for configuring an 80-wavelength OTM node and the typical
configurations of the equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Configuration Principle
Configuration principle for an optical multiplexer unit and demultiplexer unit:
l For an 80-wavelength OTM node, ITL boards must be configured if the M40V/M40/D40
boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.
Configuration principle for an optical amplifier unit:
l Optical amplifier boards must be configured according to the power budget for actual
situations.
Configuration principle for a spectrum analyzer unit:
l When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, configure
WMU boards prior to MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards.
l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, configure MCA4
boards prior to MCA8/OPM8 boards.
l It is recommended that you connect an MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board to the MON port on
an optical amplifier board or the MON port on an FIU board.
Configuration principle for an optical supervisory channel unit:
l For an 80-wavelength OTM node, one SC1 board can be configured.
Typical Configuration
This section uses the OptiX OSN 6800A as an example to illustrate a typical configuration.
Figure 4-2 shows the typical configuration for the optical layer of an 80-wavelength OTM node.
As shown in the figures, this configuration requires two subracks in total.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-2 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an 80-wavelength OTM node
20
A
O O
U
A A M
F S I S S X
U U C
I C T C C
1 1 A
U 1 L C C
0 0 4
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4.1.1.3 Subrack Connections

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 80-wavelength OTM
node.
Figure 4-3 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of an 80-wavelength OTM
node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-3 Subrack fiber connections for an 80-wavelength OTM node
Shelf1-IU1 Shelf1-IU2 Shelf1-IU3 Shelf1-IU5 Shelf1-IU7 Shelf1-IU15

FIU SC1 OAU101 OAU103 ITL MCA4
OUT MON MON MON IN1
IN IN2
TC TM OUT OUT OUT

IN3
RC IN IN IN
RM IN4
TM VO VO TO
RM VI VI RO
TE
RE
Shelf2-IU1 Shelf2-IU4 Shelf2-IU12 Shelf2-IU15

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40
Receive Transmit Optical Optical

direction direction supervisory monitoring
signal signal signal signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.1.2 Back to Back OTM
4.1.2.1 Signal Flow

This FOADM node type consists of two back-to-back OTMs. In most cases, it is applied to
central sites.

l The optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals are separated from the
line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical
supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent into the OADM
demultiplexer after amplification.
l Certain wavelengths are dropped and enter the OTU before being sent to the local client
equipment. The other wavelengths are not demultiplexed locally. They pass through the
OADM demultiplexer.
Figure 4-4 shows the signal flow of an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node.
Figure 4-4 Signal flow of an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

This section describes the principles for configuring an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node
and the typical configurations of the equipment.
l For an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node, ITL boards must be configured if the
M40V/M40/D40 boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.
situations.
l It is preferred to connect an MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board to the MON port on an optical
amplifier board or the MON port on an FIU board.
l For an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node, two SC1 or one SC2 can be configured.
Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-6 show the typical configuration for the optical layer of a back-to-back
OTM node. As shown in the figures, this configuration requires four subracks in total.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-5 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a back-to-back OTM node (westbound)
20
A
O O
U
A A M
F S I S S X
U U C
I C T C C
1 1 A
U 2 L C C
0 0 4
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Figure 4-6 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a back-to-back OTM node (eastbound)
20
A
O O
U
A A
F I S X
U U
I T C
1 1
U L C
0 0
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 80-wavelength back-to-
back OTM node.
Figure 4-7 uses a westbound 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node as an example to illustrate
how fibers are connected for the optical subracks of the node. The fiber connections for optical
subracks of an eastbound 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-7 Subrack fiber connections for an 80-wavelength back-to-back OTM node

OUT MON MON MON IN1
IN IN2
TC TM1 OUT OUT OUT IN3

RC IN IN IN IN4
RM1
TM VO VO TO
TM2
RM VI VI RO
RM2
TE
RE

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.1.3 1 Degree ROADM

This section uses the WSMD4 board as an example to illustrate how to configure a 1-degree 80-
wavelength ROADM node.
4.1.3.1 Signal Flow

A 1-degree ROADM node provides only one optical direction and can be upgraded to multi-
degree ROADM nodes without interrupting services to provide multiple optical directions.
The 1-degree ROADM node consists of one WSMD4.
supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the WSMD4
board after being amplified.
l The main-path optical signal from the west WSMD4 board is sent to the ITL board and is
then split into two multiplexed wavelength signals (odd wavelength and even wavelength)
in the C-band with frequency spacing of 100 GHz. Then the two optical signals are locally
dropped through two demultiplexer boards.
Figure 4-8 shows the signal flow of 1-degree ROADM.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-8 Signal flow of a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node

This section describes the principles for configuring a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node
Configuration principles for a reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit:
l One WSMD2 board, or WSMD4 board, or one combination of WSD9+WSM9 board, or
one combination of RDU9+WSM9 board, or one WSMD9 board must be used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to a 2-, 3-, or 4-degree node, the WSMD4 boards are
recommended.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to more than four degrees, the combinations of RDU9
+WSM9 boards or combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards or the WSMD9 boards are
recommended.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l For an 80-wavelength ROADM node, ITL boards must be configured if the M40V/M40/
D40 boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.
Configuration principles for an optical amplifier unit:
situations.
l When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that optical amplifier boards
be configured in wavelength-dropping directions.
l If optical amplifier boards need to be used in wavelength-adding directions, low-power
optical amplifiers are recommended.
Configuration principles for a spectrum analyzer unit:
l For a 1-degree ROADM node:
– When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, configure
WMU boards before you configure MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards.
– When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an ROADM node, configure
MCA4 boards before you configure MCA8/OPM8 boards.
– It is recommended that you connect an MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board to the MON port
on an optical amplifier board or the MON port on an FIU board.
l Automatic deployment:
– MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards must be configured for automatic deployment. If OSNR
detection for 10 Gbit/s rates is not required, configure OPM8 boards before you
configure MCA4/MCA8 boards.
– An MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board must be configured for remote power commissioning
and must be connected to the MON port on the OA board that is connected to an FIU
board.
– When there are five or more fiber spans between two power equalization sites, an
MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board must be configured in the middle of the spans (spans/2
±0.5), in both the transmit and receive directions.
– When there are four or fewer fiber spans between two power equalization sites, an
MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 board must be configured at the transmit end.
l The optical supervisory unit is required in each direction of an ROADM node. For a 1-
degree ROADM node, one SC1 board can be configured.
Figure 4-9 shows the typical configuration for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-wavelength
ROADM node that uses one WSMD4 boards. As shown in the figures, this configuration requires
two subracks in total.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-9 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM
node
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S I S S X
U U U U C
I C M T C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 1 D L C C
0 0 0 0 4
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a 1-degree 80-wavelength
ROADM node.
Figure 4-10 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of a 1-degree 80-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-10 Subrack fiber connections for a 1-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node
Shelf1-IU1 Shelf1-IU2 Shelf1-IU3 Shelf1-IU5 Shelf1-IU7 Shelf1-IU9 Shelf1-IU10 Shelf1-IU11 Shelf1-IU15

FIU SC1 OAU101 OAU103 WSMD4 OBU101 OBU104 ITL MCA4
OUT MON MON MONO MON MON MON IN1
IN MONI IN2
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
TC TM IN3
IN IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM IN4
DM1
TM VO VO VO VO TO
AM1
RM VI VI DM2 VI VI RO
AM2 TE
DM3 RE
AM3
DM4
AM4

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40


4.1.4.1 Signal Flow

A 2-degree ROADM node provides two optical directions. It can be upgraded to multi-degree
ROADM nodes without interrupting services to provide multiple optical directions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The 2-degree ROADM node consists of two WSMD4s. The signal grooming of the west
WSMD4 is used for the following example. The signal grooming of the east WSMD4 is the
same as that of the west WSMD4.

l The optical supervisory signals and the main-path optical signals are separated from the
l The WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into two equal optical signals.
– One optical signal is sent to the ITL board and split into two multiplexed wavelength
signals (odd wavelength and even wavelength) with frequency spacing of 100 GHz.
Then the two optical signals are locally dropped through two demultiplexer boards.
– The other optical signal passes through the east WSMD4 board.
Figure 4-11 Signal flow of 2-degree ROADM in 80-Wavelength system

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

This section describes the principles for configuring a 2-degree 80-channel ROADM node and
the typical configurations of the equipment.
l Two WSMD2 board, or two WSMD4 board, or two combinations of WSD9+WSM9
boards, or two combinations of RDU9+WSM9 boards, or two WSMD9 boards must be
used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to a 3- or 4-degree node, the WSMD4 boards are
recommended.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to more than four degrees, combinations of RDU9+WSM9
boards or combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards or the WSMD9 boards are recommended.


situations.
l When WSDM4/WSMD9 boards are used, it is recommended that you configure optical
amplifier boards in wavelength-dropping directions.

l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an ROADM node, configure
MCA4 boards before you configure MCA8/OPM8 boards.
detection for 10 Gbit/s rates is not required, configure OPM8 boards prior to MCA4/
MCA8 boards.
board.
– When there are five or more fiber spans between two power equalization site, an MCA4/
MCA8/OPM8 board must be configured in the middle of the spans (spans/2±0.5), in
both the transmit and receive directions.
– When there are four or fewer fiber spans between two power equalization site, an

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
degree ROADM node, configure two SC1 or one SC2 boards.
Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13 show the typical configurations for the optical layer of a 2-degree
80-wavelength ROADM node that uses two WSMD4 boards. As shown in the figures, this
configuration requires four subracks in total.
node (westbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S I S S X
U U U U C
I C M T C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 2 D L C C
0 0 0 0 4
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
node (eastbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S I S S X
U U U U C
I C M T C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 1 D L C C
0 0 0 0 8
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ROADM node.
Figure 4-14 uses a westbound 2-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node as an example to illustrate
subracks of an eastbound 2-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

IN MONI IN2
TC TM1 IN3
IN IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM1 IN4
DM1
TM VO VO VO VO TO
TM2 AM1
RM VI VI DM2 VI VI RO
RM2
AM2 TE
DM3 RE
AM3
DM4
AM4

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40


4.1.5.1 Signal Flow

A 3-degree ROADM node provides three optical direction and can be upgraded to multi-degree

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The 3-degree ROADM node consists of three WSMD4 boards. The signal grooming of the west
WSMD4 board is used as an example. The signal grooming of the east and south WSMD4 boards
are the same as that of the west WSMD4 board.
l The WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into three equal optical signals.
– The other two optical signals each pass through the east and south WSMD4 boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Client services Client services
Tributary Tributary
Units Units
Line Units Line Units
OD OM OD OM
C-ODD C-ODD C-EVEN C-EVEN
ITL
OA OA
OA
F
WSMD4 I
South
U
OA
West East
OA OA
F F
I WSMD4 WSMD4 I
U U
OA OA
OA OA OA
OA
ITL ITL
OM OD OM OD OM OD OM OD
C-EVEN C-EVEN C-ODD C-ODD C-EVEN C-EVEN C-ODD C-ODD
Line Units Line Units Line Units Line Units
Tributary Tributary Tributary Tributary

Units Units Units Units
Client services Client services Client services Client services
West signal East signal South signal Pass-through

signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

l Three WSMD4 boards, or three combinations of WSD9+WSM9 boards, or three
combinations of RDU9+WSM9 boards, or three WSMD9 boards must be used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to four degrees, the WSMD4 boards are recommended.
recommended.
situations.
– When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OTM node, configure
MCA8/OPM8 boards before you configure MCA4 boards.
detection for 10 Gbit/s rates is not required, configure OPM8 boards before your
configure MCA4/MCA8 boards..
board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

degree ROADM node, three SC1 or one SC2 plus one SC1 board can be configured.
80-wavelength ROADM node that uses three WSMD4 boards. As shown in the figures, this
configuration requires six subracks in total.
node (westbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S I S S X
U U U U C
I C M T C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 2 D L C C
0 0 0 0 8
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
node (eastbound/southbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B
F S S I S X
U U U U
I C M T C
1 1 1 1
U 1 D L C
0 0 0 0
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ROADM node.
subracks of an eastbound or southbound 3-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

IN MONI IN2
TC TM1 IN3
IN IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM1 IN4
DM1
TM VO VO VO VO TO IN5
TM2 AM1
RM VI VI DM2 VI VI RO IN6
RM2
AM2 TE IN7
DM3 RE IN8
AM3
DM4
AM4

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40


4.1.6.1 Signal Flow

A 4-degree ROADM node provides four optical direction and can be upgraded to multi-degree
The 4-degree ROADM node consists of four WSMD4 boards. The signal grooming of the west
WSMD4 board is used as an example. The signal grooming of the east, south, and north WSMD4
boards are the same as that of the west WSMD4 board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

l The WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into four equal optical signals.
– The other three optical signals pass through the east, south, and west WSMD4 boards
each.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-19 Signal flow of 4-degree ROADM in 80-wavelength system


OD OM OD OM OD OM OD OM
C-ODD C-ODD C-EVEN C-EVEN C-ODD C-ODD C-EVEN C-EVEN
ITL ITL
OA OA OA OA
OA OA
F F
North I WSMD4 WSMD4
I South
U (north) (south)
U
OA OA
OA OA
F F
WSMD4 WSMD4
West I I East
(west) (east)
U U
OA OA
OA OA OA OA
ITL ITL
OM OD OM OD OM OD OM OD
C-EVEN C-EVEN C-ODD C-ODD C-EVEN C-EVEN C-ODD C-ODD

West signal North signal East signal South signal
Pass-through
signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

l Four WSMD4 boards, a combination of WSD9 and WSM9 boards, or a combination of
RDU9 and WSM9 boards, or four WSMD9 boards must be used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to more than four degrees, a combination of RDU9 and
WSM9 boards or a combination of WSD9 and WSM9 boards or the WSMD9 boards is
recommended.


l You must configure optical amplifier boards according to the power budget for actual
situations.

board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
degree ROADM node, you can four SC1 or two SC2 boards.
80-wavelength ROADM node that uses four WSMD4 boards. As shown in the figures, this
configuration requires eight subracks.
node (westbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S I S S X
U U U U C
I C M T C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 2 D L C C
0 0 0 0 8
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
node (eastbound/southbound/northbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B
F S S I S X
U U U U
I C M T C
1 1 1 1
U 2 D L C
0 0 0 0
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ROADM node.
subracks of an eastbound, southbound, or northbound 4-degree 80-wavelength ROADM node
are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

IN MONI IN2
TC TM1 IN3
IN IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM1 IN4
DM1
TM VO VO VO VO TO IN5
TM2 AM1
RM VI VI DM2 VI VI RO IN6
RM2
AM2 TE IN7
DM3 RE IN8
AM3
DM4
AM4

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40

4.1.7 Electrical Regenerator
4.1.7.1 Signal Flow

The REG equipment is an electrical regenerator and is used to further extend the optical
transmission distance.
The signal flow of the REG is similar to that of back-to-back OTMs, except that no signal is
added or dropped. Signals are regenerated through the OTU or line unit. The REG node is
responsible for processing the optical signals in two transmission directions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

l It separates the optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals from the
received line signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the OSC unit for processing.
l The main path signals are sent to the demultiplexer after being amplified. The
demultiplexed signals enter the OTU or line unit and are reshaped, re-timed, and
regenerated. Then the wavelengths are multiplexed by the multiplexer before the optical
amplification. Finally, the signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory
signals for line transmission.
Figure 4-23 shows the signal flow of 80-wavelength REG node. OTU, TOM, and line boards
can be used as regeneration units. OTU boards are classified into two types: OTU with the
regeneration function (LSXLR and LSXR) and OTU without the regeneration function (for
example, LOM and TMX). You can cascade two OTU boards that do not have the regeneration
function to provide the regeneration function. Line boards are also classified into two types: line
board with the regeneration function and line board without the regeneration function. Two line
boards that do not have the regeneration function can be cascaded to provide the regeneration
function.
Figure 4-23 Signal flow of an 80-wavelength REG node

 01
OD OM
C-EVEN C-EVEN
n
OA  01 OA
West OM OD East
C-EVEN C-EVEN
n
F I I F
I T  01 T I
U L L U
OD OM
C-ODD C-ODD
n
OA OA
 01
OM OD
C-ODD C-ODD
n
Pass-through signal Regeneration unit

This section describes the principles for configuring an 80-wavelength REG node and the typical
l For an 80-wavelength REG node, ITL boards must be configured if the M40V/M40/D40
boards are used for adding/dropping wavelengths.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
situations.
l When WMU and MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an REG node, configure
l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an REG node, configure MCA4
l For an 80-wavelength REG node, you can configure two SC1 boards or one SC2 board.
Figure 4-24 and Figure 4-25 show the typical configuration for the optical layer of an 80-
wavelength REG node. As shown in the figures, this configuration requires four subracks.
Figure 4-24 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an 80-wavelength REG node
(westbound)
20
A
O O
U
A A M
F S I S S X
U U C
I C T C C
1 1 A
U 2 L C C
0 0 4
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-25 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an 80-wavelength REG node
(eastbound)
20
A
O O
U
A A
F S I S X
U U
I C T C
1 1
U 1 L C
0 0
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M M D D
S X
4 4 4 4
C
0 0 0 0
C
E O E O
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 80-wavelength REG node.
Figure 4-26 uses a westbound 80-wavelength REG node as an example to illustrate how fibers
are connected for the optical subracks of the node. The fiber connections for optical subracks of
an eastbound 80-wavelength REG node are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-26 Subrack fiber connections for an 80-wavelength REG node

OUT MON MON MON IN1
IN IN2
TC TM1 OUT OUT OUT

IN3
RC IN IN IN
RM1 IN4
TM VO VO TO
TM2
RM VI VI RO
RM2
TE
RE

M40E M40O D40E D40O
MON MON MON MON
OUT OUT IN IN
M01 M01 D01 D01
M40 M40 D40 D40


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.2.1 OTM
4.2.1.1 Signal Flow

The DWDM OTM node is used at the terminal station.
l The optical supervisory signal and the main path optical signals are separated. Then the
optical supervisory signal is sent to the optical supervisory channel (OSC) unit for
processing
l The optical demultiplexer unit demultiplexes the optical signals in the main channel into
signals of different wavelengths. The signals are then sent to the corresponding client-side
node after being transformed or divided by the OTUs.
Figure 4-27 shows the signal flow of a 40-wavelength OTM node.
Figure 4-27 Signal flow of a 40-wavelength OTM node
Line Tributary Client-side

OA OD
Units Units services
F
I
SC1
U
OA OM Line Tributary Client-side

Units Units services

This section describes the principles for configuring a 40-wavelength OTM node and the typical

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
situations.

boards before you configure MCA8/OPM8 boards.

l For a 40-wavelength OTM node, you can configure one SC1 board can be configure.
Figure 4-28 shows the typical configuration for the optical layer of a 40-wavelength OTM node.
As shown in the figures, this configuration requires two subracks.
Figure 4-28 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 40-wavelength OTM node
20
A
O O
U
A A M
F S S S X
U U C
I C C C
1 1 A
U 1 C C
0 0 4
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a 40-wavelength OTM node.
Figure 4-29 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of a 40-wavelength OTM
node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-29 Subrack fiber connections for a 40-wavelength OTM node
Shelf1-IU1 Shelf1-IU2 Shelf1-IU3 Shelf1-IU5 Shelf1-IU15

FIU SC1 OAU101 OAU103 MCA4
OUT MON MON IN1
IN IN2
TC TM OUT OUT IN3

RC RM IN IN IN4
TM VO VO
RM VI VI
Shelf2-IU1 Shelf2-IU15
M40 D40
MON MON
OUT IN
M01 D01
M40 D40


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.2.2 Back to Back OTM
4.2.2.1 Signal Flow

This FOADM node type consists of two back-to-back OTMs. It is usually applied to central
sites.
supervisory unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent into the OADM
demultiplexer after amplification.
l Certain wavelengths are dropped and enter the OTU before being sent to the local client
equipment. The other wavelengths are not demultiplexed locally. They pass through the
OADM demultiplexer.
Figure 4-30 shows the signal flow of a 40-wavelength back-to-back OTM node.
Figure 4-30 Signal flow of a 40-wavelength back-to-back OTM node

SC2
West East
OD O Client- O OM
OA side OA
T T
F F
U services U
I I
U U
O Client- O
T side T
OA OM OD OA
U services U
West signal East signal Pass-through

signal

This section describes the principles for configuring a 40-wavelength back-to-back OTM node
situations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

boards before your configure MCA8/OPM8 boards.
l For a 40-wavelength back-to-back OTM node, you can configure two SC1 or one SC2
board.
Figure 4-31 and Figure 4-32 show the typical configuration for the optical layer of a 40-
wavelength back-to-back OTM node. As shown in the figures, this configuration requires four
subracks in total.
Figure 4-31 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 40-wavelength back-to-back OTM
node (westbound)
20
A
O O
U
A A M
F S S S X
U U C
I C C C
1 1 A
U 2 C C
0 0 4
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-32 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 40-wavelength back-to-back OTM
node (eastbound)
20
A
O O
U
A A
F S S S X
U U
I C C C
1 1
U 1 C C
0 0
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a 40-wavelength back-to-
back OTM node.
Figure 4-33 uses a westbound 40-wavelength back-to-back OTM node as an example to
illustrate how fibers are connected for the optical subracks of the node. The fiber connections
for optical subracks of an eastbound 40-wavelength back-to-back OTM node are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-33 Subrack fiber connections for a 40-wavelength back-to-back OTM node

OUT MON MON IN1
IN IN2
TC TM1 OUT OUT IN3

RC RM1 IN IN IN4
TM TM2 VO VO
RM VI VI
RM2
M40 D40
MON MON
OUT IN
M01 D01
M40 D40


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

4.2.3.1 Signal Flow

A 1-degree ROADM node provides only one optical direction. It can be upgraded to multi-degree
The 1 degree ROADM node consists of one WSMD4.
l The main-path optical signal from the west WSMD4 board is locally dropped through the
demultiplexer board.
OA
F
I SC1 WSMD4
West U
OA
OA OA
OM OD
Line Units
Tributary
Units
Client-side
services
West signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Configuration principle for a reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit:
l One WSMD2 board, or one WSMD4 board, or one combination of WSD9+WSM9 board,
or one combination of RDU9+WSM9 board, or one WSMD9 board must be used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to a 2-degree node, WSMD2 boards are recommended.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to a 3-, or 4-degree node, WSMD4 boards are
recommended.

situations.
l When WSMD2 boards are used, no optical amplifier boards are required in the wavelength-
adding or wavelength-dropping directions.

– When an ROADM node requires only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards, configure MCA4
detection for 10 Gbit/s rates is not required, configure OPM8 boards prior to MCA4/
MCA8 boards.
board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
degree ROADM node, one SC1 board can be configured.
Figure 4-35 show the typical configuration for the optical layer of a 1-degree 40-wavelength
ROADM node that uses one WSMD4 boards. As shown in the figures, this configuration requires
two subracks.
node
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S S S X
U U U U C
I C M C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 1 D C C
0 0 0 0 4
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ROADM node.
Figure 4-36 show the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of a 1-degree 40-wavelength
ROADM node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Shelf1-IU1 Shelf1-IU2 Shelf1-IU3 Shelf1-IU5 Shelf1-IU7 Shelf1-IU9 Shelf1-IU10 Shelf1-IU15

FIU SC1 OAU101 OAU103 WSMD4 OBU101 OBU104 MCA4
OUT MON MON MONO MON MON IN1
IN MONI IN2
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
TC TM IN3
IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM IN4
DM1
TM VO VO VO VO
AM1
RM VI VI DM2 VI VI
AM2
DM3
AM3
DM4
AM4
M40 D40
MON MON
OUT IN
M01 D01
M40 D40



OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.2.4.1 Signal Flow

A 2-degree ROADM node provides two optical directions. It can be upgraded to multi-degree
The 2-degree ROADM node consists of two WSMD4s.

l The WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into two equal optical signals. One
optical signal is dropped at the local node after traversing the demultiplexer board. The
other optical signal passes through the east WSMD4 board.
The signal flow in this node is as following.
SC2
F F
OA OA
I I
U U
West WSMD4 WSMD4 East
OA OA
OA OA OA OA
OM OD OM OD
Tributary Tributary
Units Units
Client-side Client-side
services services
West signal East signal Pass-through

signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

l Two WSMD2 boards, two WSMD4 boards, a combination of two WSD9 and two WSM9
boards, or a combination of two RDU9 and two WSM9 boards, or two WSMD9 boards
must be used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to a 3-, or 4-degree node, the WSMD4 boards are
recommended.
recommended.
situations.
l When WSMD2 boards are used, no optical amplifier boards are required in the wavelength-
adding or wavelength-dropping directions.
MCA4 boards before your configure MCA8/OPM8 boards.
board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
degree ROADM node, one SC2 or two SC1 boards can be configured.
40-wavelength ROADM node that uses two WSMD4 boards. As shown in the figures, this
configuration requires four subracks.
node (westbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S S S X
U U U U C
I C M C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 2 D C C
0 0 0 0 4
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
node (eastbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S S S X
U U U U C
I C M C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 2 D C C
0 0 0 0 4
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ROADM node.
subracks of an eastbound 2-degree 40-wavelength ROADM node are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

IN MONI IN2
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
TC TM1 IN3
IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM1 IN4
DM1
TM TM2 VO VO VO VO
AM1
RM RM2 VI VI DM2 VI VI
AM2
DM3
AM3
DM4
AM4
M40 D40
MON MON
OUT IN
M01 D01
M40 D40



OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.2.5.1 Signal Flow

A 3-degree ROADM node provides three optical directions. It can be upgraded to multi-degree
The 3-degree ROADM node uses three WSMD4s. The signal flow from west to east is used as
an example. The signal flow from east and south to the other two of the three directions is the
same as that from west to east and south.
l The WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into three equal optical signals. One
other two optical signals pass through the east and south WSMD4 boards each.
The signal flow in this node is as following.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Client services
Tributary
Units
Line Units
OD OM
OA OA
OA
F
WSMD4 I
South
U
OA
West East
OA OA
F F
I WSMD4 WSMD4 I
U U
OA OA
OA OA OA
OA
OM OD OM OD
Tributary Tributary
Units Units
West signal East signal South signal Pass-through

signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Configuration principle for a reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit:
l Three WSMD4 boards, a combination of three WSD9 and three WSM9 boards, or a
combination of three RDU9 and three WSM9 boards, or three WSMD9 boards must be
used.
l If the node needs to be upgraded to four degrees, the WSMD4 boards are recommended.
situations.
board.
degree ROADM node, three SC1 or one SC2 plus one SC1 board can be configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
80-wavelength ROADM node that uses three WSMD4 boards. As shown in the figures, this
configuration requires six subracks in total.
node (westbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S S S X
U U U U C
I C M C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 2 D C C
0 0 0 0 8
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
node (eastbound/southbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B
F S S S X
U U U U
I C M C
1 1 1 1
U 1 D C
0 0 0 0
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ROADM node.
subracks of an eastbound or southbound 3-degree 40-wavelength ROADM node are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

IN MONI IN2
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
TC TM1 IN3
IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM1 IN4
DM1
TM TM2 VO VO VO VO IN5
AM1
RM RM2 VI VI DM2 VI VI IN6
AM2 IN7
DM3 IN8
AM3
DM4
AM4
M40 D40
MON MON
OUT IN
M01 D01
M40 D40



OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.2.6.1 Signal Flow

A 4-degree ROADM node provides four optical directions. It can be upgraded to multi-degree
An 4-degree ROADM node consists of four WSMD4s. The signal grooming of the west WSMD4
board is used as an example. The signal grooming of the east, south and north WSMD4 boards
are the same as that of the west WSMD4 board.
l The WSMD4 board splits the main-path optical signals into four equal optical signals. One
other three optical signals pass through the east, south, and west WSMD4 boards each.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-45 Signal flow of 4-degree ROADM in 40-wavelength system

Tributary Tributary
Units Units
OD OM OD OM
OA OA OA OA
OA OA
F F
North I WSMD4 WSMD4
I South
U (north) (south)
U
OA OA
OA OA
F F
WSMD4 WSMD4
West I I East
(west) (east)
U U
OA OA
OA OA OA OA
OM OD OM OD
Tributary Tributary
Units Units
West signal North signal East signal South signal
Pass-through
signal

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

l Four WSMD4 board, a combination of four WSD9 and four WSM9 boards, or a
combination of four RDU9 and four WSM9 boards, or four WSMD9 boards must be used.

situations.

board.
MCA8/OPM8 board must be configured in the middle of the spans (spans/2±0.5), both
in the transmit and receive directions.

degree ROADM node, you can configure four SC1 or two SC2 boards.
80-wavelength ROADM node that uses four WSMD4 boards. As shown in the figures, this
configuration requires eight subracks in total.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
node (westbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S S S X
U U U U C
I C M C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 2 D C C
0 0 0 0 8
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
node (eastbound/southbound/northbound)
20
A
O O O O
W U
A A B B M
F S S S S X
U U U U C
I C M C C
1 1 1 1 A
U 2 D C C
0 0 0 0 8
4 A
1 3 1 4
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ROADM node.
subracks of an eastbound, southbound, or northbound 4-degree 40-wavelength ROADM node
are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

IN MONI IN2
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
TC TM1 IN3
IN IN IN IN IN
RC RM1 IN4
DM1
TM TM2 VO VO VO VO IN5
AM1
RM RM2 VI VI DM2 VI VI IN6
AM2 IN7
DM3 IN8
AM3
DM4
AM4
M40 D40
MON MON
OUT IN
M01 D01
M40 D40

4.2.7 Electrical Regenerator

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.2.7.1 Signal Flow

The REG equipment is an electrical regenerator and is used to further extend the optical
transmission distance.
The signal flow of the REG is similar to that of back-to-back OTMs, except that no signal is
added or dropped. Signals are regenerated through the OTU or line unit. The REG node is
responsible for processing the optical signals in two transmission directions.
l It separates the optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals from the
received line signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the OSC unit for processing.
l The main path signals are sent to the demultiplexer after being amplified. The
demultiplexed signals enter the OTU or line unit and are reshaped, re-timed, and
regenerated. The wavelengths are multiplexed by the multiplexer before the optical
amplification. Finally, the signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory
signals for line transmission.
Figure 4-49 shows the signal flow of 40-wavelength REG node. OTU, TOM, and line boards
can be used as regeneration units. OTU boards are classified into two types: OTU with the
regeneration function (LSXLR and LSXR) and OTU without the regeneration function (for
example, LOM and TMX). Two OTU boards that do not have the regeneration function can be
cascaded to provide the regeneration function. Line boards are also classified into two types:
line board with the regeneration function and line board without the regeneration function. Two
line boards that do not have the regeneration function can be cascaded to provide the regeneration
function.
Figure 4-49 Signal flow of a 40-wavelength REG node
 01
OA OD OM OA
West n East
F F
I I
U U
 01
OA OM OD OA
n
Pass-through signal Regeneration unit

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

This section describes the principles for configuring a 40-wavelength REG node and the typical
situations.
l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an REG node, configure MCA4
l For a 40-wavelength REG node, you can configure two SC1 boards or one SC2 board.
Figure 4-50 and Figure 4-51 show the typical configuration for the optical layer of a 40-
wavelength REG node. As shown in the figures, this configuration requires four subracks in
total.
Figure 4-50 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 40-wavelength REG node
(westbound)
20
A
O O
U
A A M
F S S S X
U U C
I C C C
1 1 A
U 2 C C
0 0 4
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-51 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a 40-wavelength REG node
(eastbound)
20
A
O O
U
A A
F S S S X
U U
I C C C
1 1
U 1 C C
0 0
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
A
U
M D S X
4 4 C
0 0 C
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a 40-wavelength REG node.
Figure 4-52 uses a westbound 40-wavelength REG node as an example to illustrate how fibers
are connected for the optical subracks of the node. The fiber connections for optical subracks of
an eastbound 40-wavelength REG node are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-52 Subrack fiber connections for a 40-wavelength REG node

OUT MON MON IN1
IN IN2
TC TM1 OUT OUT IN3

RC RM1 IN IN IN4
TM VO VO
TM2
RM VI VI
RM2
M40 D40
MON MON
OUT IN
M01 D01
M40 D40


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4.3 OLA
4.3.1 Signal Flow

The DWDM OLA equipment is used for amplification of optical signals from two transmission
directions
The FIU board separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and
sends the former to the OSC unit for processing. The main path optical signals are amplified by
the amplifier unit and multiplexed with the OSC that has already been processed, and then sent
to the line fiber for transmission.
Figure 4-53 shows the signal flow of a DWDM OLA node.
Figure 4-53 Signal flow of a DWDM OLA node
OA
West East
F F
I SC2 I
U U
OA
4.3.2 Subrack Layout

This section describes the principles for configuring an OLA node and the typical configurations
of the equipment.
situations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l For an 80-wavelength OLA node, when WMU or MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required
for an OLA node, configure WMU boards before you configure MCA4/MCA8/OPM8
boards.
l When only MCA4/MCA8/OPM8 boards are required for an OLA node, configure MCA4
boards before you configure MCA8/OPM8 boards
l For an OLA node, you can configure two SC1 or one SC2 board.
Figure 4-54 shows the typical configuration for the optical layer of an OLA node. As shown in
the figures, this configuration requires only one subrack in total.
Figure 4-54 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an OLA node
20
A
O O
U
A A M
F S F S S X
U U C
I C I C C
1 1 A
U 2 U C C
0 0 4
1 3 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4.3.3 Subrack Connections

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an OLA node.
Figure 4-55 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of an OLA node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-55 Subrack fiber connections for an OLA node

FIU SC2 OAU101 OAU103 FIU MCA4
OUT MON MON OUT IN1
IN IN IN2
TC TM1 OUT OUT TC IN3

RC RM1 IN IN RC IN4
TM VO VO TM
TM2
RM VI VI RM
RM2

4.4 Less Than 40-Wavelength FOADM Configuration
4.4.1 Signal Flow

A FOADM node provides two optical direction.
An FOADM node consists of two MR4.
The signal flow is as follows.

l The FIU separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and
sends the optical supervisory signal to the SC2 board for processing.
l Main path signals are sent into the MR4 after amplification. Certain wavelengths are
dropped to the local station.
l The other wavelengths pass through and are multiplexed with the locally added
wavelengths before the optical amplification.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Finally, the signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line
transmission.
Figure 4-56 shows the signal flow of an FOADM node.
Figure 4-56 Signal flow of a FOADM node

This section describes the principles for configuring a FOADM node and the typical
Configuration principle for an OADM unit:
l If a DMR1 board is used, and the transmission distance is short, the FIU board cannot be
used.

l If a DMR1 board is used, optical amplifier units cannot be used on the line.
l If DMR1 board is not used, the optical amplifier boards must be configured according to
the power budget for actual situations.
Figure 4-57 and Figure 4-58 show the typical configurations for the optical layer of a FOADM
node that uses two MR4 boards. As shown in the figures, this configuration requires two subracks
in total.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-57 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a FOADM node (westbound)
20
A
O O
U
A B
F S M S S X
U U
I C R C C
1 1
U 2 4 C C
0 0
1 1 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Figure 4-58 Typical configurations for the optical layer of a FOADM node (eastbound)
20
A
O O
U
A B
F M S S X
U U
I R C C
1 1
U 4 C C
0 0
1 1 A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of a FOADM node.
Figure 4-59 uses a westbound FOADM node as an example to illustrate how fibers are connected
for the optical subrack of the node. The fiber connections for optical subracks of an eastbound
FOADM node are similar.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-59 Subrack fiber connections for a FOADM node

FIU SC2 OAU101 OBU101 MR4
OUT MON MON OUT
IN IN
TC OUT OUT MO
TM1
IN IN MI
RC RM1
D1
TM TM2 VO VO
A1
RM RM2 VI VI D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
Receive Transmit Optical

direction direction supervisory
signal signal signal
Figure 4-60 uses a FOADM node as an example to illustrate how fibers are connected for the
optical subrack of the node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-60 Subrack fiber connections for a FOADM node
Shelf1-IU1 Shelf1-IU2 Shelf1-IU3

DMR1 MR4 MR4
WOUT OUT OUT
WIN IN IN
EOUT MO MO
EIN MI MI
WMO D1 D1
WMI A1 A1
EMO D2 D2
EMI A2 A2
WD D3 D3
WA A3 A3
ED D4 D4
EA A4 A4
4.5 PID
4.5.1 Signal Flow

A photonic integrated device (PID) board group integrates an optical transponder unit (OTU)
and an optical multiplexer/demultiplexer (MUX/DEMUX) unit on a PID site, increasing
component density on equipment and simplifying the system configuration and maintenance.
In the receive direction: The PID node can add/drop and pass signals. In this node, line signals
from the west direction are sent to the PID board group, service signals that need to be dropped
locally are cross-connected to the tributary boards and then sent to the local client equipment,
and pass-through signals are cross-connected to the PID board group in the east direction and
transmitted out of the node in the east direction.
The signal flow of the transmit direction is the reverse of this process.
Figure 4-61 shows the signal flow of a PID node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-61 Signal flow of a PID node
For the image above for the PID board group, different PID groups provide different service
access capacities. Currently, three PID groups are available for a 40G to 200G service access
capacity.
l NPO2 or NPO2E: providing a 40G/80G service access capacity
l NPO2+ENQ2 or NPO2E+ENQ2: providing a 120G service access capacity
l NPO2E+ENQ2+NPO2: providing a 160G/200G service access capacity

This section describes the principles for configuring a PID node and the typical configurations
of the equipment.
Table 4-1 shows typical PID configurations.
Table 4-1 Typical PID configurations

Typical Board Group Network Diagram
Configu
ration
40G l TN55NPO2 (not

system configured with Tribut
TN55
TN55 Tribut
ary/ NPO2( ary/
TN54PQ2) line
NPO2(
E) line
E)
board board
l TN55NPO2E (not
configured with
TN54PQ2) shows the structure of a typical 40G system.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Typical Board Group Network Diagram

Configu
ration
80G l TN55NPO2+TN54PQ2
system l TN55NPO2E Tribut
TN55 TN55
Tribut
NPO2( NPO2(
ary/ ary/
+TN54PQ2 line
E)+
TN54
E)+
TN54
line
board board
PQ2 PQ2
shows the structure of a typical 80G system.
120G l TN55NPO2+TN54PQ2
system +TN54ENQ2
TN55 TN55
l TN55NPO2E Tributary/
NPO2(E)
+
NPO2(E)
+
Tributary/
line board
line board
+TN54PQ2 TN54
TN54
PQ2
TN54
PQ2 TN54
+TN54ENQ2 ENQ2 ENQ2
160G TN55NPO2E+TN54PQ2
system +TN54ENQ2+TN55NPO2
(not configured with
TN54PQ2)
TN54 TN55 TN55 TN54
Tributary/ ENQ2 NPO2E NPO2E ENQ2 Tributary/
line board + + line board
TN54 TN54
PQ2 PQ2
TN55 TN55
NPO2 NPO2
200G TN55NPO2E+TN54PQ2
system +TN54ENQ2+TN55NPO2
+TN54PQ2
TN54 TN55 TN55 TN54
ENQ2 NPO2E NPO2E ENQ2 Tributary/
Tributary/ + + line board
line board TN54 TN54
PQ2 PQ2
TN55 TN55
NPO2 NPO2
+ +
TN54 TN54
PQ2 PQ2
Board Configuration Principle

Configuration principles for a PID board group:
l The ENQ2 board can be housed only on the left of the NPO2 board. The ENQ2 board
cannot be used as a line unit.
l The TN55NPO2E board has two models: TN55NPO2ES and TN55NPO2EL.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
– TN55NPO2ES can transmit signals over a short distance without dispersion

compensation. TN55NPO2EL can transmit signals over a long distance without
dispersion compensation.
– The TN55NPO2EL02/TN55NPO2ES02 board can work only with the TN55NPO2L06/
TN55NPO2S06 board and the TN55NPO2EL04/TN55NPO2ES04 board can work only
with the TN55NPO2L08/TN55NPO2S08 board.
l The TN55NPO2 or TN55NPO2E board comprises a 40G/80G/120G system.
– If the fiber distance is 40 km or shorter, whether OA boards are required or not depends
on the fiber distance and attenuation, configure OA boards or not according to
attenuation. If an OA board is required in this case, configure a TN12OBU1P1 board
at the receive end. The TN55NPO2S board is configured as NPO2 and the
TN55NPO2ES board is configured as NPO2E.
– If the fiber length ranges from 40 km to 80 km, an optical amplifier board must be
configured at the receive end. Configure TN12OBU1P1 as an optical amplifier board
at the receive end. The TN55NPO2L board is configured as NPO2 and the
TN55NPO2EL board is configured as NPO2E.
l The TN55NPO2 and TN55NPO2E boards comprise a 160G/200G system.
– If the fiber distance is 40 km or shorter, whether OA boards are required or not depends
on the fiber distance and attenuation, configure OA boards or not according to
attenuation. If an OA board is required in this case, configure a TN12OBU1P1 board
TN55NPO2ES board is configured as NPO2E.
– If the fiber length ranges from 40 km to 80 km, an optical amplifier board must be
configured at the receive end. Configure TN12OBU1P1 as an optical amplifier board
TN55NPO2EL board is configured as NPO2E.
Typical Subrack Configuration

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is used as an example to show how to configure a 200G site.
Figure 4-62 shows typical subrack configurations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-62 Typical subrack configurations
EFI PIU AUX PIU ATE
19 20 21 22 23 24
X X
N N
E N C C E N
P T T T P T T
N P H H N P
O O O O O D D
Q O Q O
2 M M M 2 X X
2 2 2 2
E E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
NOTE
In a subrack, the PID boards in slots 1-3 serve the west direction and those in slots 11-13 serve the east direction.

This section describes how to connect fibers for subracks of a PID node.
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is used as an example to show how to configure a 200G site.
Figure 4-63 shows the subrack fiber connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-63 Subrack fiber connections for a PID node

Shelf1- Shelf1- Shelf1- Shelf1- Shelf1- Shelf1- Shelf1-
IU4, IU5, IU8 IU1,IU11 IU3 IU7 IU13 IU17 IU14,IU15
TOM ENQ2 NPO2E NPO2 NPO2E NPO2 TDX
TO2 TO2
TX1
RO2 RO2
RX1
TO TO
RI RI TX1
TO1 OUT TO1 OUT RX1
RI1 IN RI1 IN TX2
OUT OUT RX2
IN IN
TX8 PQ2 PQ2 PQ2 PQ2
RX8
Receive Transmit
direction signal direction signal
4.6 8-Wavelength CWDM Configuration
4.6.1 Signal Flow

An 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node is responsible for processing the optical signals in two
transmission directions.
The CWDM FOADM node consists of two CMR4.
The CWDM FOADM node receives line signals and sends the signals to the OADM unit, where
some wavelengths are dropped to the OTUs and then to the client side equipment. Other
wavelengths pass through the OADM unit and are multiplexed with the wavelengths that are
added locally. Then, the multiplexed wavelengths are sent to the line for transmission.
Figure 4-64 shows the signal flow of an 8-wavelength CWDM node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 4-64 Signal flow of an 8-wavelength CWDM node

This section describes the typical configurations of an 8-wavelength CWDM node.
Figure 4-65 shows the typical configurations for the optical layer of an 8-wavelength CWDM
FOADM node that uses two CMR4 boards. As shown in the figure, this configuration requires
only one subrack in total.
Figure 4-65 Typical configurations for the optical layer of an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM
node
20
A
U
C C
S S X
M M
C C
R R
C C
4 4
A
U
X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

This section describes how to connect fibers for optical subracks of an 8-wavelength CWDM
FOADM node.
Figure 4-66 shows the subrack fiber connections for the optical layer of an 8-wavelength
CWDM FOADM node.
Figure 4-66 Subrack fiber connections for an 8-wavelength CWDM FOADM node
CMR4 CMR4
OUT OUT
IN IN
MO MO
MI MI
D1 D1
A1 A1
D2 D2
A2 A2
D3 D3
A3 A3
D4 D4
A4 A4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 5 Quick Installation Guide
5 Quick Installation Guide
l For detailed installation procedures of OptiX OSN 8800 T64, refer to OptiX OSN 8800
T64 Quick Installation Guide.
l For detailed installation procedures of OptiX OSN 6800A, refer to OptiX OSN 6800A
Quick Installation Guide.
l For detailed installation procedures of OptiX OSN 3800A, refer to OptiX OSN 3800A
Quick Installation Guide.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 6 Performing Initial Web LCT Commissioning
6 Performing Initial Web LCT Commissioning
About This Chapter
Initial commissioning must be conducted using the Web LCT because NEs cannot be managed
in the network management center (NMC) before initial commissioning is completed. During
initial commissioning, NEs must be connected and configured onsite, so that the U2000 can
remotely manage these NEs.
6.1 Initial Commissioning Flow

Some initial commissioning operations are optional and can be performed when required.
6.2 Connecting NEs to the Web LCT
Before performing initial commissioning on an NE, install the Web LCT on a computer, directly
connect the computer to the NE using a crossover cable, and log in to the Web LCT.
6.3 Configuring NE Attributes
Configure NE attributes using the Web LCT.
6.4 Checking Board Slots
Verify that the logical boards displayed on the Web LCT, physical boards inserted into the
equipment, and boards specified in the network plan are consistent so future operations can be
effectively performed.
6.5 Configuring the TN11TOM Board On-site
If there is no OSC channel on an NE and the TN11TOM board is required to provide an ESC
channel, this operation must be performed. The U2000 can remotely manage the NE and its
connected NEs after the TN11TOM board is configured.
6.7 Configuring the OA Boards
Set optical attenuation and nominal gain for OA boards, with assistance from the engineers in
the network management center (NMC).
6.8 Checking NE Communication Status
Correct configuration of each NE is the basis for the entire network to operate properly. This
section describes how to check whether the configuration of each NE is correct.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
6.9 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board

By backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automatically
restores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE database
to an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. After
a power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration data
from the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE.
6.10 Exiting the Web LCT
After performing initial NE commissioning using the Web LCT, log out of the commissioned
NE, reconnect the network cables to the NE, and exit the Web LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
6.1 Initial Commissioning Flow

Some initial commissioning operations are optional and can be performed when required.
Figure 6-1 shows the flow for conducting initial commissioning using the Web LCT.
Figure 6-1 Initial commissioning flow
Connecting NEs to
the Web LCT
Configuring NE
Attributes
Checking Board Slots
Configuring the
TN11TOM/TN52TOM
Board Onsite
Configuring the OA
Boards
Checking NE
Communication Status
Backing Up the NE
Database to the SCC
Board
Mandatory
Exiting the Web LCT Optional
Optional Operations
l Configure the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board onsite.
If there is no OSC channel on an NE and the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board is required
to provide an ESC channel, this operation must be performed. The U2000 can remotely
manage the NE and its connected NEs after the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board is
configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Only the TOM board needs to be configured to provide an ESC channel.

Figure 6-2 shows an application scenario in which the TOM board provides an ESC
channel.
Figure 6-2 Application scenario in which the TOM board provides an ESC channel
Site A
NMS
WDM side WDM side
Site B Client side M M Client side Site C

U U
X X
/ /
TOM OTU1 D TOM OTU1
OTU1 D OTU1
M M
U U
X X
WDM-side
ESC channel
SCC
Client-side Client-side
ESC channel ESC channel
– The TN11TOM or TN52TOM board provides an ESC channel only when it receives
OTU1 signals on the client side or transmits OTU1 signals on the WDM side. Similarly,
an ESC channel (on the client or WDM side) is available after cross-connections for
OTU1 signals are configured.
– Client-side ESC channel: When the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board receives OTU1
signals on the client side, the client-side ESC channel is available after client-side
OTU1 cross-connections are configured.
– WDM-side ESC channel: When the TN11TOM or TN52TOM board transmits
OTU1 signals on the WDM side, the WDM-side ESC channel is available after
WDM-side OTU1 cross-connections are configured.
– In OTU1 regeneration scenarios, the ESC channel on either the client or WDM side
is required.
l Configure the OA boards.
If NEs are unreachable by the U2000 and optical power must be set for optical amplifier
(OA) boards, connect the Web LCT to the NEs onsite and perform this operation.
6.2 Connecting NEs to the Web LCT

Before performing initial commissioning on an NE, install the Web LCT on a computer, directly
connect the computer to the NE using a crossover cable, and log in to the Web LCT.
6.2.1 Installing the Web LCT

You can install the Web LCT using a CD or DVD, or by copying and decompressing the software
package that contains the Web LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Installing the Web LCT by Copying and Decompressing the Software Package
1. Obtain the software package that contains the Web LCT from Huawei engineers.
2. Decompress the installation software package that includes
U2000WebLCTversion_en_win32_x86.zip.
NOTE
The version indicates the detailed version number of the Web LCT. Ensure that the decompressing
directory contains no spaces, punctuation, or non-alphabetic characters.
Installing the Web LCT Using a CD or DVD

1. Insert the installation CD or DVD.
2. Run the setup.exe file.
3. Select the language version for Wizard, and click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.
6. Select the installation directory, and click Next.
NOTE
When you click Browse to select a different installation folder, ensure that the destination path does
not contain spaces or punctuation.
7. The following dialog box is displayed. Select the features you want to install based on the
following NOTE. Click Next.
NOTE
When you select the features to be installed, COMMON must be selected and other features can be
selected based on the managed equipment.
l For OTN equipment using the North American version only, select NA OTN.
l For OTN equipment using the global version only, select NG WDM.
l It is recommended that all the features are selected.
8. Click Install to install the Web LCT. The entire installation process lasts five minutes.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
9. After the installation is complete, the Installation finished dialog box is displayed. Click
Finish.
6.2.2 Connecting to NEs

Connect the computer where the Web LCT is installed to an NE using a crossover or straight-
through cable so the Web LCT can directly manage the connected NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the crossover or straight-through cable to the Web LCT. One end of the cable should
be connected to the network port of the computer. For the specific ports and boards to be
connected, see Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Specific port on a board
Product Board Name Port
OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX EFI2 NM_ETH1

OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN
6800A EFI1 NM_ETH2
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 EFI NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2
OptiX OSN 3800A AUX NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2
Step 2 Check the green indicator of the network adapter interface of the computer and the indicators
on the board that connect to the computer.
NOTE
The indicator of the computer and the green "LINK" indicator on the board remain on. The orange "ACT"
indicator on the board should blink.
If the three indicators are malfunctioning:
l Replace the network cable with a new one. If the indicators are functioning correctly, the original cable
is faulty.
l If all the above-mentioned indicators are still malfunctioning, check whether the network adapter of
the computer and the board that connects to the network cable are functioning correctly.
Step 3 Change the IP address of the computer being used to commission the NE so that the computer
IP address is on the same subnet as the default IP Address of the NE.
NOTE
l The default IP address of an NE ranges from 129.9.0.0 to 129.9.0.255 or from 129.9.191.0 to

129.9.191.255.
l Change the computer IP address that is in the same network segment as the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N,
where N is an integer from 1 to 255.
l Change the computer subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.
----End
6.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT

Log in to the Web LCT before performing NE settings on the Web LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the startweblct.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to launch the Web LCT
application.
Step 2 In the browser, enter the default value admin for User Name and Changeme_123 for
Password.
Step 3 Click Login to display the NE List window.
----End
6.3 Configuring NE Attributes

Configure NE attributes using the Web LCT.
6.3.1 Searching and Adding NEs

Search and add NEs by IP addresses or IP domains.
Procedure
Step 1 Click NE Search and select Advanced Search at the bottom of the Screen. A Search NE
window opens.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 2 Click Manage Domain. A Manage Domain Search window opens.

Step 3 Click Add and the New Domain window is displayed.
Step 4 Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address, and enter an IP address in the
Domain Address field. Click OK.
Attribute Value
Domain Type l GNE IP Domain: Search for all NEs in the specified IP domain.
l GNE IP Address: Search for a specific NE using the specified IP address.
Domain Address l If Domain Type is set to GNE IP Domain, enter an IP domain value,
for example, 10.191.255.255.
l If Domain Type is set to GNE IP Address, enter an IP address, for
example, 10.191.167.131.
Step 5 Click Cancel to exit the Manage Domain Search window.

Step 6 Select the entered NE IP Address in the Domain drop-down list on the Search NE window.
Step 7 Click Search. After the search for NEs is complete, click End Search.
Step 8 Select the NE being commissioned and click Add NE.
Step 9 Click OK then Cancel.
----End
Result
The NE to be commissioned is now in the list of NEs on the main Web LCT screen, and the
login status is Not Logged In or Logged In.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
6.3.2 Logging In to an NE
Log in to an NE that has been added if the NE indicates "Not Logged In".
Procedure
Step 1 Highlight the NE in the main Web LCT screen and click NE Login. Enter the default value
SONET for both User Name and Password.
Step 2 Click OK. The login status is Logged In.
Step 3 Click NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer of the selected NE.
----End
6.3.3 Setting NE TIDs

The target identifiers (TIDs) of NEs that are searched out and added are still factory defaults,
which may be different from the planned TIDs. The TIDs of NEs must be set according to the
engineering design document so that commissioning engineers can perform operations on the
NEs using the NMS at the network management center.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Set the Name to the TID obtained during deployment.
Step 3 Click Apply. Click OK in the two displayed Confirm dialog boxes. Then click Close in the
displayed Operation Result dialog box.
----End
6.3.4 Setting NE IP Addresses

The IP addresses of NEs that are searched out and added are factory defaults, which may be
different from the planned IP addresses. The IP addresses of NEs must be set according to the
engineering design document so that commissioning engineers can perform operations on the
NEs using the NMS at the network management center.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Set the IP address, Subnet Mask and Gateway of the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 3 Click Apply. Click OK in the two displayed Confirm dialog boxes. Then click Close in the
displayed Operation Result dialog box.
NOTE
You will lose your connection to the NE at this point. To restore communications, perform the following:
l Change the IP address of your computer to an address on the same subnet as the NE.
l Re-run 6.3.1 Searching and Adding NEs and 6.3.2 Logging In to an NE.
----End
6.3.5 Configuring Master-Slave Subracks

This operation applies to versions earlier than V100R005C00SPC900 in which slave subracks
must be manually added. If the equipment version is V100R005C00SPC900 or later, this
operation is not required. Instead, the master and slave subrack configurations are automatically
uploaded when you search and add NEs.
Background Information
The OptiX OSN 8800/6800A supports the management of master/slave subracks. When multiple
subracks are required for an NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be used for centralized
management.
In this mode, the master subrack and its slave subracks are displayed as one NE in the network
management system.
They share the same NE name and IP address.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a NE and the Slot Layout is displayed.
Step 2 Select a subrack on the top of the Slot Layout, right-click, and choose Add Slave Subrack from
the shortcut menu. The Add Slave Subrack dialog box is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 3 Set Shelf Type, Shelf Name, and Subrack FIC in the Add Slave Subrack dialog box. Click
OK.
NOTE
l The subrack FIC is the physical location of the NE in the rack. Set the location information of the shelf.
The recommended format is Floor-Room-Aisle-Open rack-shelf.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the following table lists the values for Cross-Connect Type and Cross-
Connect Capacity.
Parameter Value
Cross-Connect Type OTN
Cross-Connect Capacity l OptiX OSN 8800 T16: 0G to 640G
l OptiX OSN 8800 T32: 0G to 1.28T
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: 0G to 2.56T
Step 4 Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
----End
6.4 Checking Board Slots

Verify that the logical boards displayed on the Web LCT, physical boards inserted into the
equipment, and boards specified in the network plan are consistent so future operations can be
effectively performed.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the logical boards and physical boards are consistent.
l If yes, go to the next step.
l If no, check as follows:
– If the number of logical boards is less than the number of physical boards, verify that
the physical boards are correctly inserted and add the logical boards.
NOTE
If add the CRPC or ROP board, you should click to display the slots.
1. In the NE Explorer, select Slot Layout.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2. Verify that the physical boards are correctly inserted. On the Slot Layout pane,
right-click the corresponding logical slot, and select the required board type from
the shortcut menu.
.
– If the logical board types are inconsistent with the physical board types, delete and re-
add the logical boards.
1. In the NE Explorer, select Slot Layout.
2. Right-click the board to be deleted and change State to OOS. Then right-click the
board and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
3. Right-click the target logical slot and select the required board type from the
shortcut menu.
Step 2 Check whether the physical boards and the boards specified in the network plan are consistent.
l If yes, you do not need to perform any other operations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l If no, replace the physical boards, and delete and re-add the logical boards on the panel
layout.
----End

6.5.1 Working Mode and Signal Flow

Set the working mode for the TN11TOM board according to the network plan and configuration
scenarios.
Table 6-2 lists the available working modes of the TN11TOM board and the service mapping
path for each scenario.
Table 6-2 Mappings between the working modes and the service mapping paths
Board Scenario Port Mapping Path Configuration

Working No. Working Scenario
Mode Mode
Cascading Scenario 1 N/A OTU1/Any->ODU1 6.5.2 Scenario 1: ODU1

tributary mode
(cascading)
Scenario 2 N/A OTU1/Any- 6.5.3 Scenario 2: ODU1

>ODU1->OTU1 tributary-line mode
(cascading)
Non- Scenario 3 N/A OTU1/Any->ODU1 6.5.4 Scenario 3: ODU1

cascading tributary mode (non-
cascading)
Scenario 4 N/A Any->ODU1- 6.5.5 Scenario 4: ODU1

>OTU1 tributary-line mode
(non-cascading)
Scenario 5 N/A OTU1->ODU1- 6.5.6 Scenario 5: ODU1

>OTU1 tributary-line mode
(electrical regeneration
board)
6.5.2 Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (cascading)

The application scenario in which the TN11TOM board works in cascading mode with its ports
working in ODU1 tributary mode is defined as scenario 1: cascading ODU1 tributary mode.
When the TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary mode, intra-board client-side

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
OTU1 cross-connections must be configured so that an ESC channel is available between the
NE equipped with the TN11TOM board and its connected NEs.
Application Diagram
Figure 6-3 shows the position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system where the TN11TOM
board works in cascading ODU1 tributary mode.
Figure 6-3 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 1: ODU1 tributary
mode (cascading))
1xODU1 1xOTU2 1xOTU2 1xODU1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, FDDI, 1
M M 1
STM-1, OC-3, FE, GE, FDDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, U U STM-1, OC-3,
STM-16, OC- X X DVB-ASI, SDI,
1×ODU1
1×ODU1
N N
8×Any
8×Any
48, ESCON, / / STM-16, OC-
S D S
STM-4, OC-12, D 48, ESCON,
2 M 2
FC100, FICON, M STM-4, OC-12,
FC200, FICON U U FC100, FICON,
Express, HD- 8 X X 8 FC200, FICON
SDI, OTU1 Express, HD-
SDI, OTU1
Any ODU1 ODU1 Any
OptiX OSN 6800A: From/To paired slot
OptiX OSN 6800A: N/A
OptiX OSN 3800A: From/To non-paired slots of the mesh group
Cross-Connection Diagram
Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the TN11TOM
board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Cross-connection diagram for the TN11TOM board (scenario 1: cascading ODU1
tributary mode)
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
Other board 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-3
Cross-connect
module
Client side WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
which needs to be configured on the NMS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the state of the TN11TOM board.
Before configuring the TN11TOM board, set the board status to OOS, which indicates that the
board is out of service.
1. Right-click the board in the Slot Layout pane and choose State > OOS from the shortcut
menu.
Step 2 Configure the working mode for the TN11TOM board.
Set Card Mode to CASCADING.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN11TOM board and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface in the navigation tree.
2. Click By Card/Channel and choose Card from the drop-down list.
3. Double-click the Card Mode field and set it to CASCADING.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the preset values.
Step 3 Configure a service mode for the client-side ports on the TN11TOM board. It is recommended
to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN for the ports.
1. Click By Card/Channel and choose Channel from the drop-down list. Click the Basic
Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane.
2. Select a client-side port. Double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTN.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 Set the service type to OTU1 for ClientLP the ports. It is recommended to select the ClientLP
port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane.
2. Select a ClientLP port. Double-click the Service Type field and set it to OTU1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Configure an intra-board client-side cross-connection.
Configure an intra-board bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between a client-side port and a
ClientLP port. Ensure that the client-side and ClientLP ports are identical to those configured
at steps 3 and 4.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Electrical Cross-
Connection Service Management in the navigation tree.
2. In the Electrical Cross-Connection Service Configuration pane, click New. The Create
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed.
3. Set Service Level to OTU1, and set other parameters as required. The following figure
shows an example of configuring a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between the 3
(RX1/TX1) port and the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) port.
4. Click OK. The newly created cross-connection is displayed.

Step 6 Optional: Set the state of the TN11TOM board.
After these configurations are complete, set the state of the board to IS, which indicates that the
board is in service.
1. Right-click the board in the Slot Layout pane and choose State > IS.
----End
6.5.3 Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (cascading)

working in ODU1 tributary-line mode is defined as scenario 2: cascading ODU1 tributary-line
mode. When the TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode, it can receive
OTU1 signals on the client side and transmit OTU1 signals on the WDM side. To provide an

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
ESC channel between the local and remote NEs, configure an intra-board client-side OTU1
cross-connection. In other cases, either a WDM-side or a client-side intra-board cross-
connection is required to provide an ESC channel.
Application Diagram
Figure 6-5 shows two scenarios in which the TN11TOM board works in cascading ODU1
tributary-line mode. Configure the TN11TOM board according to the network plan.
l Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN11TOM board receives a
maximum of six services on the client side and the other two client-side ports work as
WDM-side ports, which selectively receive services.
l Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN11TOM board receives
a maximum of seven services on the client side and the other client-side port works as a
WDM-side port, which also receives services.
Figure 6-5 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (cascading))
Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side:

1xOTU1 1xOTU1
TOM TOM
1 1
FE, GE, FDDI, STM- FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC- MUX/ MUX/ 1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
12, STM-16, OC- DMUX DMUX 12, STM-16, OC-
1×ODU1
1×OTU1
1×ODU1
1×OTU1
6×Any
6×Any
48,ESCON, 48,ESCON,
FC100, FICON, FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON FC200, FICON
MUX/ MUX/
Express, HD-SDI, Express, HD-SDI,
DMUX DMUX
DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1 6 6 DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1
Any Any
Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side:

1xOTU1 1xOTU1
TOM TOM
FE, GE, FDDI, STM- 1 1 FE, GE, FDDI, STM-
1, OC-3, STM-4, OC- 1, OC-3, STM-4, OC-
12, STM-16, OC- 12, STM-16, OC-
1×ODU1
1×OTU1
1×ODU1
1×OTU1
7×Any
48,ESCON, 48,ESCON,
7×Any
MUX/ MUX/
FC100, FICON, DMUX DMUX FC100, FICON,
FC200, FICON FC200, FICON
DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1 7 7 DVB-ASI, SDI, OTU1
Any Any
Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) and WDM-
side ports on the TN11TOM board, which is marked (2) in Figure 6-6.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 6-6 Cross-connection diagram for the TN11TOM board (scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-
line mode (cascading))

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 10(TX8/RX8)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-7
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 TOM
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module

4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3 2
NOTE
l Only the RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.
l A cross-connection can be configured between any client-side port and any ClientLP port.
Configuration Process
The configuration process for providing a client-side ESC channel differs from that for providing
a WDM-side ESC channel. Table 6-3 lists the configuration process.
Table 6-3 Configuration process
No. Task To Provide a Client- To Provide a WDM-

Side ESC Channel Side ESC Channel
1 Set the state of the TOM Yes Yes

board.
2 Configure the working Yes Yes

mode for the TOM board.
3 Set the port type. No Yes
4 Set the service mode. Yes No
5 Configure the service Yes No

type.
6 Configure an intra-board Yes Yes

cross-connection.

board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Remarks:
l Yes: This task is required.
l No: This task is not required.
Procedure
menu.
Set Card Mode to CASCADING.
3. Double-click the Card Mode field and set it to CASCADING.
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: Set the port type.
NOTE
This operation is required to provide a WDM-side ESC channel.
Set an RX/TX port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to
set the type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. For
the application of "dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", set the type for the
port planned to carry the working channel.
1. Right-click the board in the Slot Layout pane and choose Path View from the shortcut
menu.
2. Right-click the port and choose Delete Port.
3. Right-click the blank area and choose Add Port. The Add Port dialog box is displayed.
4. Set Type according to the network plan. Click OK to apply the configuration.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 4 Optional: Configure a service mode for client-side ports on the TN11TOM board. It is
recommended to set a service mode for the client-side port that is carrying the service channel
specified in the network plan.
NOTE
This operation is required to provide a client-side ESC channel.
3. Select a client-side port. Double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTN as shown
in the following figure.
Step 5 Optional: Set the service type to OTU1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to set a service
type for the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
NOTE

2. Select a ClientLP port. Double-click the Service Type field and set it to OTU1 as shown
Step 6 Configure an intra-board cross-connection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3. Set Service Level to OTU1, and set other parameters as required.
l To configure a client-side cross-connection, configure a cross-connection between a
client-side port and a ClientLP port. Ensure that the client-side and ClientLP ports are
identical to those configured in steps 4 and 5. The following figure shows an example
of configuring such a cross-connection.
l To configure a WDM-side cross-connection, configure the cross-connection between

an ODU1LP port and the WDM-side port that is specified in step 3. The following figure
shows an example of configuring such a cross-connection.

----End
6.5.4 Scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (non-cascading)

The application scenario in which the TN11TOM board works in non-cascading mode with its
ports working in ODU1 tributary mode is defined as scenario 3: non-cascading ODU1 tributary

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
mode. When the TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode, intra-board
client-side OTU1 cross-connections must be configured so an ESC channel is available between
the NE equipped with the TN11TOM board and its connected NEs.
Application Diagram
board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode.
Figure 6-7 Position of the TN11TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary
mode (non-cascading))
TOM TOM
1 1
FC100, FICON, FE, FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3, 1 1 GE, STM-1, OC-3,
STM-4, OC-12, STM-4, OC-12,
4×ODU1
4×ODU1
8×Any
8×Any
STM-16, OC-48 MUX/ MUX/ STM-16, OC-48
NS2 NS2
, FC200, FICON DMUX DMUX , FC200, FICON
Express, DVB-ASI, Express, DVB-ASI,
ESCON, FDDI, SDI, 4 4 ESCON, FDDI, SDI,
HD-SDI, OTU1 8 8 HD-SDI, OTU1
Any ODU1 ODU1 Any
Figure 6-8 Cross-connection diagram for the TN11TOM board (scenario 3: ODU1 tributary
mode (non-cascading))
WDM side
Cross-connect 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
module
Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 WDM side

7(TX5/RX5)-1 1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 2
8(TX6/RX6)-1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Procedure
menu.
Set Card Mode to NON-CASCADING.
3. In the Board Working Mode pane, double-click the Work Mode field and set it to NON-
CASCADING.
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure a service mode for the client-side ports on the TN11TOM board. It is recommended
to set a service mode for the client-side port that is carrying the service channel specified in the
network plan.
Step 4 Set the service type to OTU1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to set a service type for
the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
2. Select a ClientLP port. Double-click the Service Type field and set it to OTU1 as shown

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Configure an intra-board bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between a client-side and a
in steps 3 and 4.
4. Click OK. The created cross-connection is displayed.

----End
6.5.5 Scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (non-cascading)

ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode is defined as scenario 4: non-cascading ODU1
tributary-line mode. When the TN11TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line
mode, an intra-board WDM-side OTU1 cross-connection must be configured to provide an ESC
channel.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Application Diagram
board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode.
line mode (non-cascading))
4xOTU1 4xOTU1
TOM TOM
FC100, FICON, FE, 1 1 1 1
FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3 GE, STM-1, OC-3
, STM-4, OC-12, , STM-4, OC-12,
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×Any
4×Any
DVB-ASI, ESCON, MUX/ MUX/ DVB-ASI, ESCON,

FDDI, FC200, DMUX DMUX FDDI, FC200,
FICON Express, FICON Express,
SDI, HD-SDI, STM- SDI, HD-SDI, STM-
16, OC-48 4 4 4 4 16, OC-48
Any Any
Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP and WDM-side ports on the
TN11TOM board, which is marked (2) in Figure 6-10.
line mode (non-cascading))
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1) 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 7(TX5/RX5)-1
1 3 2
TOM Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect

module module module
NOTE
l All RX/TX optical ports can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

l A cross-connection can be configured between any ODU1LP port and any WDM-side port.
Procedure

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
menu.
CASCADING.
4. Click Apply.
Step 3 Set the port type.
set the type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
1. Right-click the board in the Slot Layout pane, and choose Path View from the shortcut
menu.
Step 4 Configure an intra-board WDM-side cross-connection.

Configure a cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and the WDM-side port that is specified
in step 3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

----End
6.5.6 Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration

board)
When the TN11TOM board works as an electrical regeneration board with its ports working in
ODU1 tributary-line mode, it can receive OTU1 signals on the client side and transmit OTU1
signals on the WDM side. To provide an ESC channel between the local and remote NEs,
configure an intra-board client-side OTU1 cross-connection. In other cases, either a WDM-side
or a client-side intra-board cross-connection is required to provide an ESC channel
Application Diagram
board works as an electrical regeneration board in ODU1 tributary-line mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
line mode (electrical regeneration board))
4xOTU1 4xOTU1
TOM
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×OTU1
DMUX MUX
4xOTU1 4xOTU1
TOM4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×OTU1
MUX DMUX
l Create a cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the
l Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP and WDM-side ports on
the TN11TOM board, which is marked (2) in Figure 6-12.
line mode (electrical regeneration board))
1 3 2
TOM Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect

module module module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE



board.


type.

cross-connection.

board.
Remarks:
Procedure
menu.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
CASCADING.
4. Click Apply.
NOTE
set the type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
menu.
Step 4 Optional: Configure a service mode for the client-side ports on the TN11TOM board. It is
recommended to set a service mode for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in
the network plan.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 5 Optional: Set the service type to OTU1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to set a service
type for the ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
NOTE

2. Select a ClientLP port. Double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTU1 as shown


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

shows an example of configuring such a cross-connection..

----End

6.6.1 Working Mode and Signal Flow

Set the working mode for the TN52TOM board according to the network plan and configuration
scenarios.
Table 6-5 lists the available working modes of the TN52TOM board and the service mapping
path for each scenario.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 6-5 Mapping between the working modes and the service mapping paths
Board Scenar Port Working Mapping Path Configuration
Workin io No. Mode Scenario
g Mode
Cascadin Scenari ODU0 mode Any->ODU0[- In this mode, the

g o1 >ODU1] TN52TOM board
cannot receive OTU1
signals, and an ESC
channel cannot be
provided. No
configuration is
required in this mode.
Scenari ODU0 Tributary- Any->ODU0- 6.6.2 Scenario 2:

o2 Line mode >ODU1->OTU1 ODU0 tributary-
line mode
(cascading)
Scenari ODU1 mode Any->ODU1 In this mode, the

o3 TN52TOM board
cannot receive OTU1
signals, and an ESC
channel cannot be
provided. No
configuration is
Scenari ODU1 Tributary- OTU1/Any->ODU1- 6.6.3 Scenario 4:

o4 Line mode >OTU1 ODU1 tributary-
line mode
(cascading)
Non- Scenari ODU0 mode Any->ODU0[- In this mode, the

cascadin o5 >ODU1] TN52TOM board
g cannot receive OTU1
signals, and an ESC
channel cannot be
provided. No
configuration is
Scenari ODU0 Tributary- Any->ODU0- 6.6.4 Scenario 6:

o6 Line Mode >ODU1->OTU1 ODU0 tributary-
line mode (non-
cascading)
Scenari ODU1 mode OTU1/Any->ODU1 6.6.5 Scenario 7:

o7 ODU1 mode (non-
cascading)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Board Scenar Port Working Mapping Path Configuration

Workin io No. Mode Scenario
g Mode
Scenari ODU1_ANY_ODU0 OTU1->ODU1- 6.6.6 Scenario 8:

o8 _ODU1 re- >Any->ODU0- ODU1_ANY_ODU
encapsulation mode >ODU1 0_ODU1 re-
encapsulation mode
(non-cascading)

o9 _ODU1 re- >Any->ODU0- ODU1_ANY_ODU
encapsulation >ODU1->OTU1 0_ODU1 re-
tributary-line mode encapsulation
tributary-line mode
(non-cascading)
Scenari ODU1 tributary-line OTU1/Any->ODU1- 6.6.8 Scenario 10:

o 10 mode >OTU1 ODU1 tributary-
line mode (non-
cascading)
Scenari ODU1_ODU0 mode OTU1->ODU1- 6.6.9 Scenario 11:

o 11 >ODU0 ODU1_ODU0 mode
(non-cascading)

o 12 re-encapsulation >Any->ODU0 ODU1_ANY_ODU
mode 0 re-encapsulation
mode (non-
cascading)
NOTE
[->ODU1]: indicates that "ODU1" is optional. For example, in non-cascading ODU0 tributary mode, there
are two service signal mapping paths: Any->ODU0 and Any->ODU0->ODU1.

mode.When the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU0 tributary-line mode, an intra-board
WDM-side OTU1 cross-connection must be configured to provide an ESC channel.
Application Diagram

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 6-13 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 2: Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1)
1xOTU1 1xOTU1
TOM TOM
1 MUX/ MUX/ 1
DMUX DMUX
FE, GE, FE, GE,
FC100, FICON, FC100, FICON,
2×ODU0
1×ODU1
1×ODU1
2×ODU0
1×OTU1
1×OTU1
6×Any
6×Any
DVB-ASI, SDI, DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI ESCON, FDDI
MUX/ MUX/
6 DMUX DMUX 6
Any Any

1xOTU1 1xOTU1
TOM TOM
1 1
FE, GE, FE, GE,
2×ODU0
FC100, FICON,
2×ODU0
1×ODU1
1×ODU1
1×OTU1
1×OTU1
FC100, FICON,
7×Any
7×Any
DVB-ASI, SDI, MUX/ MUX/
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI DMUX DMUX
ESCON, FDDI
7 7
Any Any
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
Figure 6-14 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 2: Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1 51(ODU1LP1/ 9(TX7/RX7)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 /ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP1)-1
1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 3 2
7(TX5/RX5)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
The straight-through of the board, which does not need to be configured on the NMS

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1 51(ODU1LP1/ 10(TX8/RX8)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 /ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP1)-1 2
1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-5 3
7(TX5/RX5)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-8 161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
NOTE
Procedure
menu.
Set Work Mode to CASCADING and Port Working Mode to ODU0 tributary-line mode
(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
1. In the NE Explorer, select the TN52TOM board and choose Configuration > Working
Mode in the navigation tree.
2. In the Board Working Mode pane, double-click the Work Mode field and set it to
CASCADING.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3. Click Apply.
4. In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) port. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and choose ODU0 tributary-
line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
5. Click Apply.
menu.

Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and a WDM-side
port. Ensure that the WDM-side port the one for which the port type is changed in step 3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

After these configurations are complete, set the state to IS, which indicates that the board is in
service.
----End

mode. When the TN52TOM board works in cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode, an intra-board
WDM-side OTU1 cross-connection must be configured to provide an ESC channel.
Application Diagram
Figure 6-15 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (scenario 4: OTU1/Any->ODU1-

>OTU1)
1xOTU1 1xOTU1
TOM TOM
1 1 FE, GE, STM-1,
FE, GE, STM-1, MUX/ MUX/ STM-4, STM-16,
STM-4, STM-16, DMUX DMUX OC-3, OC-12, OC-
OC-3, OC-12, OC-
1×ODU1
1×ODU1
1×OTU1
1×OTU1
6×Any
48, FC100, FC200,

6×Any
48, FC100, FC200,

FICON, FICON
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
Express, HD-SDI, MUX/ MUX/ DVB-ASI, SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI, DMUX DMUX
6 6 ESCON, FDDI
ESCON, FDDI
Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

1xOTU1 1xOTU1
TOM TOM
1 1
FE, GE, STM-1, FE, GE, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, STM-4, STM-16,
OC-3, OC-12, OC- OC-3, OC-12, OC-
1×ODU1
1×ODU1
1×OTU1
1×OTU1
7×Any
7×Any
48, FC100, FC200, MUX/ MUX/ 48, FC100, FC200,
FICON, FICON DMUX DMUX FICON, FICON
ESCON, FDDI 7 7 ESCON, FDDI
Any Any
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
Figure 6-16 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 4: OTU1/Any-
>ODU1->OTU1)


4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3 2
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
Step 1 Set the state of the TN52TOM board
1. Right-click the board in the Slot Layout pane, and choose State > OOS from the shortcut
menu.
Set Work Mode to CASCADING, and Port Working Mode to ODU1 tributary-line mode
(OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).
2. In the Board Working Mode pane, double-click the Work Mode field and set it to
CASCADING.
3. Click Apply.
4. In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for the 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1) port. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and set it to ODU1 tributary-
line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).
5. Click Apply.
select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan. For the
application of "dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side", set the type for the port
planned to carry the working channel.
menu.

Configure a bidirectional OTU1 cross-connection between an ODU1LP port and a WDM-side
port. Ensure that the WDM-side port is the one for which the port type is changed in step 3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Cross-Connection Service dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters.
After these configurations are complete, set the statel to IS, which indicates that the board is in
service.
----End

ports working in ODU0 tributary-line mode is defined as scenario 6: non-cascading ODU0
tributary-line mode. When the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU0 tributary-line
mode, an intra-board WDM-side OTU1 cross-connection must be configured to provide an ESC
channel.
Application Diagram
Figure 6-17 shows two scenarios in which the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU0
maximum of four services on the client side and the other two client-side ports work as
a maximum of six services on the client side and the other client-side port works as a WDM-
side port, which also receives services.
>ODU1->OTU1)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2xOTU1 2xOTU1
TOM TOM
1 MUX/ MUX/ 1
DMUX DMUX
FE, GE, FE, GE,
FC100, FICON,
2×ODU1
4×ODU0
FC100, FICON,
4×ODU0
2×ODU1
2×OTU1
2×OTU1
4×Any
4×Any
MUX/ MUX/
4 DMUX DMUX 4
Any Any

2xOTU1 2xOTU1
TOM TOM
1 1
FE, GE, FE, GE,
2×ODU1
2×OTU1
4×ODU0
FC100, FICON,
2×ODU1
2×OTU1
4×ODU0
6×Any
FC100, FICON,
6×Any
DVB-ASI, SDI, MUX/ MUX/

DMUX DMUX DVB-ASI, SDI,
6 6
Any Any
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP and WDM-side ports on the
>ODU1->OTU1)
Client side 161(ODU0LP1/ WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ 7(TX5/RX5)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 ODU0LP1)-1 8(TX6/RX6)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 3 ODU1LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 3 9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-4 2 10(TX8/RX8)-1
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-2 ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 162(ODU0LP1/ 52(ODU1LP2/
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP2)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 162(ODU0LP1/ TOM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Client side 161(ODU0LP1/ WDM side

3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 ODU0LP1)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 3 ODU1LP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1 1 3
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ 10(TX8/RX8)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1 ODU0LP1)-2
202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-4 162(ODU0LP1/ 52(ODU1LP2/
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 ODU0LP1)-1 ODU1LP2)-1
204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 162(ODU0LP1/ TOM
NOTE

Procedure
menu.
Set Work Mode to NON-CASCADING, and Port Working Mode to ODU0 tributary-line
mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
CASCADING.
3. Click Apply.
4. In the Port Working Mode pane, double-click the Port Working Mode field and set the
205 (or 207) port to None (not for ports) first. Then set the 201 (or 203) port to ODU0
Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
It is recommended to set a working mode for the port that is carrying the service channel
5. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
menu.
2. Right-click the port and choose Modify Port from the shortcut menu. The Modify Port
dialog box is displayed. Set Type according to the network plan.
3. Click OK to apply the configuration.
Select an internal port from (3) in Figure 6-18. The internal port that is identical to the service
port specified in the network plan is recommended. Then configure an intra-board cross-
connection between the internal port and a WDM-side port. Ensure that the WDM-side port is
the one for which the port type is changed in step 3.
3. Set Service Level and Service Type, and set other parameters as required.
service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
----End
6.6.5 Scenario 7: ODU1 mode (non-cascading)

ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1) is defined as scenario 7: application 1
of non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading
ODU1 tributary mode, an intra-board OTU1 client-side cross-connection must be configured so
an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with the TN52TOM board and its
connected NEs.
Application Diagram
Figure 6-19 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 7: OTU1->ODU1)
TOM TOM
1 1 1 1
4×ODU1
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×OTU1
MUX/ MUX/
OTU1 NS2 NS2 OTU1
DMUX DMUX
4 4 4 4
ODU1 ODU1
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
NOTE
In this working mode, configurations for the TN52TOM board to receive Any services differ from those
for the board to receive OTU1 services. If the TN52TOM board is configured to receive Any services, it
cannot carry an ESC channel. In this case, no configuration is required.
Create an OTU1 cross-connection between the internal client-side and ClientLP ports on the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 6-20 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 7: OTU1->ODU1)
WDM side
module
Client side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 WDM side

7(TX5/RX5)-1 1 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 2
8(TX6/RX6)-1
NOTE
Procedure
menu.
Set Work Mode to NON-CASCADING and Port Working Mode to ODU1 mode (OTU1/
Any->ODU1).
CASCADING.
3. Click Apply.
4. In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for a ClientLP port. The port
that is carrying the channel specified in the network plan is recommended. Double-click
the Port Working Mode field and set it to ODU1 mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
5. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure the working mode for the client-side ports on the TN52TOM board as OTN.
Because the service type is OTU1, set Service Mode to OTN for the port. It is recommended
to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
2. Click By Card/Channel and choose Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Click the Basic Attributes tab and select a client-side port. Double-click the Service
Mode field and choose OTN.
4. Click Apply.
Step 4 Set the service type to OTU1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to select the ClientLP
1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab and select a ClientLP port.
2. Double-click the Service Type field and set it to OTU1.
3. Click Apply.

in steps 3 and 4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

service.
----End
6.6.6 Scenario 8: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation

mode (non-cascading)
ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) is defined as
scenario 8: application 4 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN52TOM board
works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode, an intra-board OTU1 client-side cross-
connection must be configured so an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with
the TN52TOM board and its connected NEs.
Application Diagram

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 6-21 Position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system (scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0->ODU1)
TOM TOM
1 1
1 1 M M 1 1
U U
X X
8×ODU0
8×Any
4×ODU1
4×ODU1
4×ODU1
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
8×ODU0
4×OTU1
64×Any
N N
64×Any
8×Any
8×Any
8×Any
32×Any
/ /
32×Any
OTU1 OTU1
S D S
D
2 M 2
M
U U
4 4 4 4 4
4 X X
Any ODU1 ODU1 Any
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
Figure 6-22 Cross-connection diagram for the TN52TOM board (scenario 8: OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0->ODU1)
WDM
side
module
Client WDM
side 201(ClientLP1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 161(ODU0LP1 side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 /ODU0LP1)-1
/ClientLP1)-1
1 2 3 2 4
4(TX2/RX2)-1 203(ClientLP3 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8
/ClientLP3)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
205(ClientLP5 162(ODU0LP2
6(TX4/RX4)-1 /ClientLP5)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8 /ODU0LP2)-1
234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 239(AnyLP7/AnyLP7)-1
207(ClientLP7
7(TX5/RX5)-1 /ClientLP7)-1
235(AnyLP3/AnyLP3)-1 163(ODU0LP3
8(TX6/RX6)-1 240(AnyLP8/AnyLP8)-1
/ODU0LP3)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)1
10(TX8/RX8)-1 236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-7 164(ODU0LP4
236(AnyLP4/AnyLP4)-8 244(AnyLP12/AnyLP12)-8 /ODU0LP4)-1
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM module module module module module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Procedure
menu.
Set Work Mode to NON-CASCADING, and Port Working Mode to

ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0-
>ODU1).
CASCADING.
3. Click Apply.
4. In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for a ClientLP port. The port
that is carrying the channel specified in the network plan is recommended. Double-click
the Port Working Mode field and choose ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation
mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1).
5. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure the service mode for the client-side ports on the TN52TOM board as OTN.
Because the service type is OTU1, Service Mode must be set to OTN for the ports. It is
recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
3. Click the Basic Attributes tab and select a client-side port.
4. Double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTN.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
5. Click Apply.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Configure intra-board client-side cross-connections.

in steps 3 and 4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

service.
----End
6.6.7 Scenario 9: ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation

tributary-line mode (non-cascading)
ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
is defined as scenario 9: application 1 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode. When the
TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode, it can receive OTU1
services on the client side and also transmit OTU1 services on the WDM side. To provide an
ESC channel between the local and remote NEs, configure an intra-board client-side OTU1
cross-connection. In other cases, either a WDM-side or a client-side intra-board cross-
connection is required to provide an ESC channel.
Application Diagram
board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1).
>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
2xOTU1 2xOTU1
TOM TOM
MUX/ MUX/
1 DMUX DMUX 1
32×Any
32×Any
2×ODU1
4×ODU0
4×ODU0
2×ODU1
2×OTU1
2×OTU1
2×ODU1
2×ODU1
2×OTU1
2×OTU1
16×Any
16×Any
OTU1 OTU1
MUX/ MUX/
2 DMUX DMUX 2
the TN52TOM board, which is marked (4) in Figure 6-24.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
201(ClientLP1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1 161(ODU0LP1 51(ODU1LP1

3(TX1/RX1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 7(TX5/RX5)-1
/ClientLP1)-1 /ODU0LP1)-1 /ODU1LP1)-1
1 2 3
4(TX2/RX2)-1 203(ClientLP3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-8 8(TX6/RX6)-1
233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 2 2
/ClientLP3)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-1 4
5(TX3/RX3)-1
205(ClientLP5 162(ODU0LP2 52(ODU1LP2 9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 /ClientLP5)-1 /ODU0LP2)-1 /ODU1LP2)-1
238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8
10(TX8/RX8)-1
207(ClientLP7
/ClientLP7)-1 234(AnyLP2/AnyLP2)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect

TOM module module module module module module
NOTE



board.


type.

cross-connection.

board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Remarks:
Procedure
menu.
Set Work Mode to NON-CASCADING, and Port Working Mode to

ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1D).
CASCADING.
3. Click Apply.
4. In the Port Working Mode pane, double-click the Port Working Mode field and set the
205 (or 207) port to None (not for ports) first. Then set the 201 (or 203) port to
ODU1_ANY_ODU0_ODU1 re-encapsulation tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1-
>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1).
It is recommended to set a working mode for the port that is carrying the service channel
5. Click Apply.

NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
set a service type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
menu.
dialog box is displayed.
3. Set Type according to the network plan.

Step 4 Optional: Configure a service mode for the client-side ports on the TN52TOM board. It is
recommended to set a service type for the port that is carrying the service channel specified in
the network plan.
NOTE
1. Click the Basic Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Set the service type to OTU1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to select the
ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
NOTE

1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane. Select a port, double-
click the Service Mode field, and set it to OTU1 as shown in the following figure..

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2. Click Apply.
l To configure a WDM-side cross-connection, configure a cross-connection between an

ODU1LP port and the WDM-side port that is specified in step 3. The following figure

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
service.
----End

ports working in ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) is defined as
scenario 10: application 2 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode. When the TN52TOM
board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode, it can receive OTU1 services on the
client side and also transmit OTU1 services on the WDM side. To provide an ESC channel
between the local and remote NEs, configure an intra-board client-side OTU1 cross-connection.
In other cases, either a WDM-side or a client-side intra-board cross-connection is required to
provide an ESC channel.
Application Diagram
Figure 6-25 and Figure 6-26 show the position of the TN52TOM board in a WDM system
where the TN52TOM board works in non-cascading ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any-
>ODU1->OTU1). Configure the TN52TOM board according to the network plan.
l Figure 6-25 shows a scenario in which OTU1 signals are electrically regenerated.
l Figure 6-26 shows a scenario in which the TN52TOM board works in tributary-line mode
and receives Any signals.
– Dual-fed and selectively receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board receives a
maximum of four services on the client side, and the other four client-side ports work
as WDM-side ports, two of which selectively receive services.
– Single transmitting and single receiving on the WDM side: The TN52TOM board
receives a maximum of six services on the client side, and the other two client-side ports
work as WDM-side ports, which also receive services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
>OTU1)
4xOTU1 4xOTU1
TOM
RX1 TX5
D
RX2 TX6 M
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×OTU1
M
U
U RX3 TX7 X
X RX4
TX8
TX1 RX5
D
M TX2
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×OTU1
RX6 M
U
X TX3 RX7 U
X
TX4 RX8
>OTU1)

2xOTU1 2xOTU1
RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1

TOM TOM
RX5 TX5
4 x FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/ TX1 MUX/ MUX/ TX1 4 x FC100/FICON/GE/STM-4/
TX6 RX6
OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/ DMUX DMUX OC-12/DVB-ASI/ESCON/
FDDI/FE/SDI/STM-1/OC-3 RX6 TX6 FDDI/FE/SDI/STM-1/OC-3
2×ODU1
2×ODU1
2×OTU1
2×OTU1
4×Any
4×Any
2 x FC200/FICON Express/ TX7 RX7 2 x FC200/FICON Express/

HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/ RX4 RX7 TX7 RX4 HD-SDI/STM-16/OC-48/
OTU1 MUX/ MUX/ OTU1
TX8 DMUX DMUX RX8
TX4 TX4
RX8 TX8
Any Any

4xOTU1 4xOTU1
RX1 TX5 RX5 RX1

TOM TOM
FC100, FICON, FE, TX1 RX5 TX5 TX1 FC100, FICON, FE,
GE, STM-1, OC-3 GE, STM-1, OC-3
, STM-4, OC-12, , STM-4, OC-12,
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×Any
4×Any
DVB-ASI, ESCON, MUX/ MUX/ DVB-ASI, ESCON,

FDDI, FC200, DMUX DMUX FDDI, FC200,
FICON Express, RX4 TX8 RX8
RX4 FICON Express,
SDI, HD-SDI, STM- SDI, HD-SDI, STM-
16, OC-48 TX4 RX8 TX8 16, OC-48
TX4
Any Any

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A
TN52TOM board, which is marked (1) in Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28.
the TN52TOM board, which is marked (3) in Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28.
>OTU1)
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1) 7(TX5/RX5)-1

1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-2 3
4(TX2/RX2)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2) 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
>OTU1)

4(TX2/RX2)-1 1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-3 3 2 8(TX6/RX6)-1
203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1 9(TX7/RX7)-1
Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module TOM


4(TX2/RX2)-1 1 2 3
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
TOM
8(TX6/RX6)-1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE



board.


type.

cross-connection.

board.
Remarks:
Procedure
menu.
Set Work Mode to NON-CASCADING, and Port Working Mode to ODU1 tributary-line
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
CASCADING.
3. Click Apply.
4. In the Port Working Mode pane, double-click the Port Working Mode field and set Port
Working Mode for each Optical Port.
l For the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7) ports, set Port Working
Mode to ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1).
5. Click Apply.
NOTE
This operation is required to provide an ESC channel.
Set the port as a WDM-side port according to the network plan. It is recommended to select the
menu.
dialog box is displayed. Set Type to Line Side Colorless Optical Port.

Step 4 Optional: Configure a service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board.
NOTE
1. Click the Basic Attributes tab in the WDM Interface pane. Select a client-side port,
double-click the Service Mode field and set it to OTN.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2. Click Apply.
Step 5 Optional: Set the service type to OTU1 for the ClientLP ports. It is recommended to select the
ClientLP port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network plan.
NOTE

2. Select a ClientLP port, double-click the Service Mode field, and set it to OTU1.
3. Click Apply.
Configure bidirectional OTU1 cross-connections between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4) optical ports and 7(RX5/TX5)-10(RX8/TX8) optical ports based on
Figure 6-27 and Figure 6-28.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

service.
----End
6.6.9 Scenario 11: ODU1_ODU0 mode (non-cascading)

ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) is defined as scenario 11:
application 2 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN52TOM board works in
non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode, an intra-board OTU1 client-side cross-connection must
be configured so an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with the TN52TOM
board and its connected NEs.
Application Diagram

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
>ODU0)
TOM TOM
1 1
1 1 M M 1 1
U U
X X
8×ODU0
8×ODU0
4×ODU1
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
4×OTU1
N N
8×Any
8×Any
OTU1 / / OTU1
S D S
D
2 M 2
M
U U
4 8 8 8 8 4
X X
>ODU0)
WDM
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 side
module 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Client WDM
side 3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 side
4(TX2/RX2)-1 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
5(TX3/RX3)-1 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1 3 162(ODU0LP2/ODU0LP2)-2
1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 163(ODU0LP3/ODU0LP3)-1 2
8(TX6/RX6)-1 207(ClientLP7/ClientLP7)-1 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM Cross-connect module Cross-connect module Cross-connect module
NOTE
Procedure

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
menu.
Set Work Mode to NON-CASCADING, and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
CASCADING.
3. Click Apply.
4. In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for a ClientLP port. It is
recommended to select the port that is carrying the service channel specified in the network
plan. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and set it to ODU1_ODU0 mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0).
5. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure the working mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board as OTN.
Mode field and set it to OTN.
4. Click Apply.
2. Double-click the Service Type field and choose OTU1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3. Click Apply.
in steps 3 and 4.
4. Click OK. The newly created cross-connection is displayed in the user interface.
service.
----End
6.6.10 Scenario 12: ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode

(non-cascading)
ports working in ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) is defined as scenario
12: application 3 of non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode. When the TN52TOM board works
in non-cascading ODU1 tributary mode, an intra-board OTU1 client-side cross-connection must

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
be configured so an ESC channel is available between the NE equipped with the TN52TOM
board and its connected NEs.
Application Diagram
>Any->ODU0)
TOM TOM
1 1
1 1 M M 1 1
U U
X X
4×ODU1
8×ODU0
4×OTU1
32×Any
64×Any
8×ODU0
4×ODU1
4×OTU1
64×Any
32×Any
N N
8×Any
8×Any
OTU1 / / OTU1
S D S
D
2 M 2
M
U U
4 8 8 8 8 4
X X
board, as marked (1) in Figure 6-32.
>Any->ODU0)
WDM
161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 side
module 164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
Client WDM
side side
3(TX1/RX1)-1 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 233(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-1 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1
1 2 3 4
5(TX3/RX3)-1 205(ClientLP5/ClientLP5)-1 238(AnyLP6/AnyLP6)-8
7(TX5/RX5)-1 235(AnyLP1/AnyLP1)-8 241(AnyLP9/AnyLP9)-8

8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect Cross-connect
TOM module module module module

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Procedure
menu.
Set Work Mode to NON-CASCADING and Port Working Mode to ODU1_ANY_ODU0

re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0).
CASCADING.
3. Click Apply.
4. In the Port Working Mode pane, set Port Working Mode for a ClientLP port. It is
recommended to set a working mode for the port that is carrying the service channel
specified in the network plan. Double-click the Port Working Mode field and set it to
ODU1_ANY_ODU0 re-encapsulation mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0).
5. Click Apply.
Step 3 Configure the service mode for the ports on the TN52TOM board as OTN.
Mode field and choose OTN.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4. Click Apply.
3. Click Apply.

in steps 3 and 4.
service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
----End
6.7 Configuring the OA Boards

Set optical attenuation and nominal gain for OA boards, with assistance from the engineers in
the network management center (NMC).
Setting Optical Attenuation

menu.
2. Right-click the board and choose WDM Interface. The WDM Interface window is
displayed.
3. In the WDM Interface window, click By Function and choose Attenuation(dB) from the
drop-down list.
4. Double-click the Attenuation(dB) field, enter the data provided by the engineers in the
NMC, and click Apply.
Setting Nominal Gain

1. Right-click the board in the Slot Layout pane and choose State > OOS.
2. Right-click the board and choose WDM Interface. The WDM Interface window is
displayed.
3. In the WDM Interface window, click By Function and choose Standard Gain from the
drop-down list.
4. Double-click the Standard Gain field, enter the data provided by the engineers in the NMC,
and click Apply.
6.8 Checking NE Communication Status

Correct configuration of each NE is the basis for the entire network to operate properly. This
section describes how to check whether the configuration of each NE is correct.
Context
After the initial network configuration of an NE is completed, check the NE communication
status to determine whether the configuration is correct. You can determine that the NE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
communication status is normal if information about the NMS or other NEs is displayed in the
TID IP area.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, choose Communication > TID IP from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If no information about the NMS or other NEs is displayed in the TID IP area, perform the
following checks on NE:
l Check the fiber connections against the fiber connection diagram in the network design.
Correct fiber connections if there are incorrect ones.
l Test the transmit and receive optical power on the line. Handle the line fault if the line
attenuation is abnormal.
l Check the network cable connections against the network cable connection diagram in the
network design. Correct network cable connections if there are incorrect ones.
l Test the transmit and receive optical power of the OSC board or the DAS1 board if OSC
communication is used. Do as follows if the transmit or receive optical power is abnormal:
– Check the fiber connections between the OSC and FIU boards.
– Check the fiber connections between TM and RX ports, and the fiber connections
between RM and TX ports for the DAS1 board.
– If the OSC or DAS1 board receive optical power queried on the Web LCT is remarkably
lower than the IN port input optical power measured using an optical power meter, clean
the fiber connected to the IN port. If the fault persists, replace the board. If the OSC or
DAS1 board receive optical power exceeds the permitted range, add fixed optical
attenuators (FOAs) with reference to OSC commissioning requirements. If the OSC or
DAS1 board transmit optical power exceeds the permitted range, replace the board.
l Check the status of the DCC channels to be used if ESC communication is used. Choose
Communication > DCC Channel Configuration. In the displayed window, check the
value of Channel State for the DCC channels to be used. If RX_F, RX_F&TX_F, or TX_F
is displayed for any channel, perform the following checks:
– Check the WDM-side transmit and receive optical power of the OTU board.
– Check whether electrical cross-connections have been correctly configured for boards
requiring cross-connections to implement ESC communication. An example of such
boards is the TOM board.
– Check whether Protocol is set to TRANSPARENT for all unused ESC channels. If
not, do as follows: Choose Communication > DCC Channel Configuration. In the
displayed window, select all unused ESC channels and set Protocol to
TRANSPARENT. Select GCC0, GCC12, and GCCA for each unused ESC channel to
change Protocol to Transparent.
– Check whether the configuration of the remote NE is completed.
6.9 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board

By backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can ensure that the NE automatically
restores to the normal state in case a power failure occurs. When you back up an NE database

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
to an SCC board, you actually back up the NE data to the flash memory of the SCC board. After
a power-off reset occurs on the NE, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration data
from the flash memory and applies the data to the boards on this NE.
Prerequisites
You must have logged in to an NE.
The NE must be configured properly.
Precautions
NOTE
After backing up an NE database to an SCC board, you can restore the NE database from the SCC board
by performing a warm or cold reset on the SCC board.
Procedure
1. Select one or more NEs in the NE list. Click Back Up NE Database > Back Up to SCC.
NOTE
The Web LCT takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation in the
process of backup.
2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
3. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
6.10 Exiting the Web LCT

After performing initial NE commissioning using the Web LCT, log out of the commissioned
NE, reconnect the network cables to the NE, and exit the Web LCT.
Procedure
Step 1 Highlight the NE that you are logged in to, and click the NE Logout at the bottom of the screen.
Step 2 Physically disconnect the Web LCT from the NE
Step 3 Close the browser.
Step 4 Double-click the stopweblct.bat file at "WebLCT\WebLCT\Tomcat" to stop the Web LCT
application.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 7 Routine Operation On-site
7 Routine Operation On-site
About This Chapter
7.1 Getting to Know Indicators

This section introduces the indicators of equipment.
7.2 Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter
This section describes the basic method for testing optical power by using an optical power meter
during the detection of faults and the commissioning.
7.3 Checking Fiber Jumpers by Using an Optical Power Meter
This section describes the basic method for checking a fiber jumper by using an optical power
meter during the detection of faults or the commissioning.
7.4 Inserting and Removing Fiber Jumpers
This section describes the basic method for replacing a fiber jumper when the fiber jumper is
damaged.
7.5 Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors
Cleaning optical components is to remove dust or other dirt to avoid performance degradation
of optical transmission systems. Inspecting and cleaning fiber connectors used in fiber optic
connections are described here.
7.6 Performing Hardware Loopback
Manually perform loopback to a physical port (optical port) with a fiber.
7.7 Reset a Board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7.1 Getting to Know Indicators

This section introduces the indicators of equipment.
7.1.1 Subrack Indicator

There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800A and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators
are in the following colors: red, yellow and green.
The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table 7-1.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 subrack indicators are on the panel of the fan tray assembly.
Table 7-1 Meanings of subrack indicators

Indicator Name Status Meaning
PWR Power indicator On (Green) The subrack works

normally.
Off The subrack does not

work.
OptiX OSN Critical alarm On (Red) There is a critical alarm.

6800A: CRI indicator
Off There is no critical alarm.
OptiX OSN
8800: CRIT
MAJ Major alarm On (Red) There is a major alarm.

indicator
Off There is no major alarm.
MIN Minor alarm On (Yellow) There is a minor alarm.

indicator
Blinking slowly (Yellow) The MIN indicator is in
the maintenance blinking
mode.
Off There is no minor alarm.
7.1.2 Chassis Indicators

There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 7-2 Meanings of chassis indicators
PWR Chassis power supply On (green) The chassis is powered

indicator on.
Off The chassis is not

powered on.
MIN Minor alarm indicator On (yellow) There is a minor alarm.
Off There is no minor alarm.
MAJ Major alarm indicator On (orange) There is a major alarm.
Off There is no major alarm.
CRIT Critical alarm indicator On (red) There is a critical alarm.
Off There is no critical alarm.
7.1.3 Board Indicators

On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running
status of the board.
The meanings of the board indicators are listed in Table 7-3, Table 7-4, and Table 7-5.
Table 7-3 Meanings of board indicators
Indicato Name Status Meaning

r
STAT Board hardware On (green) The board is working normally in

indicator the IS-NR mode.
Blinking slowly The STAT indicator is in the

(green)a maintenance blinking mode.
On (red) An EQPT-class critical or major

alarm occurs on the board (or the
SFP transceiver of the board).
On (yellow) An EQPT-class minor alarm

occurs on the board (or the SFP
transceiver of the board).
Blinking (red) The board (or the SFP transceiver

of the board) is in the OOS-AU or
MEA state.
Off The board is deleted or is in the

AINS, OOS-AUMA, or OOS-MA
state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

r
PROG Board software On (red) The memory check fails.

indicator Loading the board software fails.
The FPGA file is lost.
The board software is lost.
Blinking quickly On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms:

(red) The BOOTROM check fails.

(green) Writing the flash memory is in
progress.
Blinking slowly On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms:

(green) The BIOS booting is in progress.
On (green) The board software is running

normally.
SRV Service alarm On (green) The service is normal and certain

indicator SFP/XFP transceivers, ports, or
channels of the board are in the IS-
NR state.
On (red) A critical or major service alarm

occurs.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs.
Off No service is configured, or all the

SFP modules, XFP modules, ports,
or channels are in the AINS, OOS-
AUMA, OOS-MA, or SGEO state.
ACTb Service activation On (green) The board is in the working mode.

indicator The board is in the active state for
board-level protection.
Off The board is not in the working

mode.
The board is in the standby state for

(green) Backing up the system database in
batches is in progress.
LAS Laser emission On (green) The Raman laser is in the working

status indicator mode.
Off The Raman laser is ont in the

working mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

r
NOTE
a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. Most
of the boards support this function except the following boards:
APIU, ATE, CMR1, CMR2, CMR4, CRPC, DCM, DCU, DMR1, DFIU, EFI, FAN, TN21FIU, TN13FIU,
GFU, TN11ITL, TN11L4G, MB2, MR2, MR4, MR8, PIU, SBM2, SCS, STI, TBE.
b: During the testing of the indicators on the TN51AUX or TN41AUX board, the ACT indicator is lit
orange.
Table 7-4 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 sub-board

r
STAT Board hardware On (green) The PQ2 sub-board works

indicator normally.
On (red) The PQ2 sub-board is abnormal.
On (yellow) Logical sub-board is not

configured.
Off The PQ2 sub-board is not powered

on.
Table 7-5 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board

r
STAT Board hardware On (green) The board is working in the IS-NR

indicator mode.
Blinking slowly The STAT indicator is in the

(green)a maintenance blinking mode.
On (red) An EQPT-class (related to

hardware or environment) critical
or major alarm occurs on the board.
On (yellow) An EQPT-class (related to

hardware or environment) minor
alarm occurs on the board.
Blinking (red) The board is working in the OOS-

AU or MEA state.
Off The board is deleted or is working

in the AINS, OOS-AUMA, or
OOS-MA state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

r
PROG Board software On (red) The memory check fails.

indicator Loading the board software fails.
The FPGA file is lost.
The NE software is lost.
Blinking (red) On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms:

The BOOTROM check fails.

(green) Writing the flash memory is in
progress.
Blinking slowly On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms:

(green) The BIOS booting is in progress.
On (green) The board software is running

normally.
SRV Service alarm On (green) No alarm is reported on the NE

indicator
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs.
Off No service is configured.
ACT Service activation On (green) The board is in the working mode.

indicator The board is in the active state for
Off The board is not in the working

mode.
The board is in the standby state for

(green) Backing up the system database in
batches is in progress.
PWRA Indicator for system On (green) -48 V power supply A is normal.

power supply
On (red) -48 V power supply A is faulty (lost
or failed).
Off No power is input.
PWRB Indicator for system On (green) -48 V power supply B is normal.

power supply
On (red) -48 V power supply B is faulty (lost
or failed).
Off No power is input.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

r
PWRC Indicator for On (green) The +3.3 V protection power is

protection power normal.
supply
On (red) The +3.3 V protection power is
lost.
ALMC Alarm cut-off On (yellow) There is no audio or visual warning

indicator in case of an alarm.
Off Audio warning is generated in case

of an alarm.
NOTE
a: When the STAT indicator on a board is in maintenance blinking mode, the board can be removed. The
boards that support this function include: TN16SCC, TN51SCC, TN52SCC, and TNK2SCC.
7.1.4 Fan Indicator

There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN.
The corresponding meanings of the Fan indicator are listed in Table 7-6 and Table 7-7.
Table 7-6 Meanings of the FAN indicator (OptiX OSN 8800)

FAN Fan indicator On (green) The fan is normal.
On (red) A major alarm occurs or two or

more fans are faulty.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs or one fan is

faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on, or is

absent, or the software is not
loaded.
Table 7-7 Meanings of the FAN indicator (OptiX OSN 6800A/OptiX OSN 3800A)
Indicator Name Status Description
STAT Fan indicator On (green) The mode of the fan is IS-NR. The
fan is normal.
On (red) An EQPT-class critical or major

alarm occurs on the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Indicator Name Status Description
On (yellow) An EQPT-class minor alarm occurs

on the board.
7.1.5 PIU Indicator

There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.
Table 7-8 Meanings of the PIU indicator

PWR Running status On (green) Indicates that the power is

indicator accessed normally.
Off Indicates that the power is

not accessed.
7.2 Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter

This section describes the basic method for testing optical power by using an optical power meter
during the detection of faults and the commissioning.
Prerequisites
Before the test, make sure that the laser is closed. After the fiber jumper is connected to the
board, open the laser.
Impact on System
The services on the tested board are interrupted.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Fiber jumper, optical power meter, optical fiber extractor
Precaution
DANGER

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
WARNING
Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch any equipment. Make sure that the
wrist strap fully touches your skin. Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the ESD socket in
the subrack.
CAUTION
Keep the optical connector and end face clean. Cover the fiber immediately after the fiber is
removed.
Procedure
Step 1 Turn on the optical power meter, set the unit of the optical power to dBm, and set the operating
wavelength of the meter to 1550 nm.
Step 2 The test of optical power consists of the following two parts:
l Testing the receive optical power: In this test, remove the fiber jumper that is connected to
the receive optical port and connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter.
l Testing the transmit optical power: In this test, remove the fiber jumper that is connected
to the transmit optical port. Connect one end of a known-good fiber jumper to the transmit
optical port and the other end to the optical power meter.
Step 3 Open the laser, after the optical power value displayed on the meter is stable, record the value.
Step 4 Close the laser, connect the removed fiber jumper back to the optical port, and then open the
laser.
----End
7.3 Checking Fiber Jumpers by Using an Optical Power

Meter
This section describes the basic method for checking a fiber jumper by using an optical power
meter during the detection of faults or the commissioning.
Prerequisites
The light source must exist and the transmit optical power must be stable.
The checked fiber does not have services or services are interrupted.
Impact on System
During the test, the services in the tested fiber are interrupted.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Fiber jumper, optical power meter, optical fiber extractor, light source
Precaution
DANGER
WARNING
the subrack.
CAUTION
removed.
Procedure
Step 1 Turn on the optical power meter, set the unit of the optical power to dBm, and set the operating
wavelength of the meter to 1550 nm.
Step 2 Connect one end of a known-good fiber jumper to the light source.
Step 3 Connect the other end of the known-good fiber jumper to the optical power meter.
Step 4 Enable the laser of the light source that is connected to the fiber jumper.
Step 5 Measure the transmit optical power P1 of the light source by using the optical power meter.
Step 6 Disconnect the two ends of the fiber jumper.
Step 7 Connect one end of the tested fiber jumper to the light source.
Step 8 Connect the other end of the tested fiber jumper to the optical power meter.
Step 9 Measure the transmit optical power P2 of the light source by using the optical power meter.
l If the difference between P1 and P2 is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber connection
is normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l If the difference between P1 and P2 is greater than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber connection
is faulty.
----End
7.4 Inserting and Removing Fiber Jumpers

This section describes the basic method for replacing a fiber jumper when the fiber jumper is
damaged.
Prerequisites
The laser that is connected to the fiber jumper must be disabled before the replacement.
Impact on System
The services on the fiber jumper where the fiber jumper is replaced are interrupted.

New fiber jumper, optical fiber extractor
Precaution
DANGER
WARNING
the subrack.
CAUTION
Before installing a fiber jumper, attach temporary labels to the two ends for distinguishing.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
CAUTION
When replacing the fiber jumper that leads out the open rack, make sure that the new fiber jumper
is routed along the route for the original fiber jumper. In addition, the open corrugated pipe is
used to protect the new fiber jumper.
CAUTION
removed.
NOTE
The type of the fiber jumper before and after the replacement must be the same.
Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the two ends of the fiber jumper to be replaced.
Step 2 Insert the new fiber connectors into the corresponding optical ports on the board.
Step 3 Lead the optical fibers out from the subrack through the holder at the subrack bottom and the
hole at the subrack side.
Step 4 Pass the optical fibers to the corresponding subrack side along the space at both sides of the
open rack.
Step 5 Make the optical fibers pass through the hole at the subrack side and the holder at the subrack
bottom.
Step 6 Insert the fiber connectors into corresponding optical ports on the board.
Step 7 Coil the redundant optical fibers around the fiber spool at the side of the subrack.
Step 8 After the fiber installation, insert fiber plugs in idle ports and cover idle fibers with fiber caps.
Step 9 Label the new fiber jumper according to the methods and specifications of labeling for the
original fiber jumper.
Step 10 Bind the new fiber jumper.
NOTE
After replacing the fiber jumper, you should recover the laser status to the status before the replacement.
----End
7.4.1 Inserting the LC/PC Fiber Connector

This section describes how to insert LC/PC fiber connectors.
Prerequisites
The end face of the fiber must be clean.
Wear an ESD wrist strap before carrying out this operation.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

None
Precautions
DANGER
to eyes, or even blindness.
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Remove protective cap on the LC/PC connector.
Step 2 Align the LC/PC connector to the optical port on the board.
Step 3 Push the connector gently in along the guide rail until it clicks.
Figure 7-1 LC/PC fiber connector
LC/PC connector
Protective cap
----End
7.4.2 Removing the LC/PC Fiber Connector

This section describes how to remove LC/PC fiber connectors.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Prerequisites

Optical fiber extractor, protective cap
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Clamp the fiber connector from the up and down sides by hand or with optical fiber extractor.
Press down the hook switch.
NOTE
The LC/PC fiber connector can be directly pulled out by hand. However, if the optical fibers are arranged
densely, a dedicated optical fiber extractor shall be used. Figure 7-2 shows the tweezers-like optical fiber
extractor.
Figure 7-2 Tweezers-like optical fiber extractor

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 2 Pull out the optical fiber gently.
Step 3 Cover the fiber connector with the protective cap.
Figure 7-3 LC/PC fiber connector
LC/PC connector
Protective cap
----End
7.4.3 Inserting the LSH/APC Fiber Connector

This section describes how to insert LSH/APC fiber connectors.
Prerequisites

None
Precautions
DANGER

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
DANGER
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Remove dust-proof protection cover on the LSH/APC fiber connector.
Step 2 Align the connector on optical fiber with the optical port of the board.
Step 3 Push the connector gently in along the guide rail.
Figure 7-4 LSH/APC fiber connector
Protective LSH/APC
slidding cover connector
----End
7.4.4 Removing the LSH/APC Fiber Connector

This section describes how to remove LSH/APC fiber connectors.
Prerequisites

Optical fiber extractor

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Precautions
DANGER
DANGER
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Clamp the connector by hand.
Step 2 Pull it out gently when it gets loose.

NOTE
The LSH/APC fiber connector has a dust-proof protection cover. When the connector is pulled out from
the optical port, the protection cover will be closed automatically so as to protect against dust and intense
light signals output.
Figure 7-5 LSH/APC fiber connector
Protective LSH/APC
slidding cover connector
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7.4.5 Inserting the FC/PC Fiber Connector

This section describes how to insert FC/PC fiber connectors.
Prerequisites

None
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Remove protective cap on the FC/PC connector.
Step 2 Align the keyed ridge on the FC/PC fiber connector with the concave slot of the optical port.
Step 3 Push in the connector with proper force not to damage the fiber connector. After the connector
is seated properly, the keyed ridge shall match the concave slot and the optical connector cannot
be turned around.
Step 4 When the optical fiber connector is pushed to the bottom, turn the outer ring of the optical
connector clockwise to secure the optical fiber connector.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 7-6 FC/PC fiber connector
Protective cap
FC/PC connector
----End
7.4.6 Removing the FC/PC Fiber Connector

This section describes how to remove FC/PC fiber connectors.
Prerequisites

None
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
Step 1 Turn the outer ring of the fiber connector anticlockwise.
Step 2 Pull it out gently when it gets loose.
Figure 7-7 FC/PC fiber connector
Protective cap
FC/PC connector
----End
7.4.7 Inserting the SC/PC Fiber Connector

This section describes how to insert SC/PC fiber connectors.
Prerequisites

None
Precautions
DANGER

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Remove protective cap on the SC/PC connector.
Step 2 Align the keyed ridge on the SC/PC fiber connector with the concave slot of the optical port.
Step 3 Push the connector in with proper force. After the connector is seated properly, the keyed ridge
shall match the concave slot.
Step 4 The fiber is not seated properly until it clicks.
Figure 7-8 SC/PC fiber connector
Protective cap
SC/PC connector
----End
7.4.8 Removing the SC/PC Fiber Connector

This section describes how to remove SC/PC fiber connectors.
Prerequisites

Optical fiber extractor

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Precautions
DANGER
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Clamp the SC/PC fiber connector from the up and down sides with the optical fiber extractor.
Step 2 Pull out the connector slowly from the optical port with force.
Figure 7-9 SC/PC fiber connector
Protective cap
SC/PC connector
----End
7.5 Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors

of optical transmission systems. Inspecting and cleaning fiber connectors used in fiber optic
connections are described here.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7.5.1 Overview
Overview of the purpose and procedure of cleaning optical fiber connectors, the items that may
cause pollution to optical connectors are also described here.
of optical transmission systems. Here describes how to inspect and clean fiber connectors used
in fiber optic connections.
Figure 7-10 shows the optical fiber connector.
Figure 7-10 Optical fiber connector
The following items should be removed because they pollute optical connectors that are
extensively adopted in optical transmission systems:
l Dust
l Oils (frequently from human hands)
l Film residues (condensed from vapors in the air)
l Powdery coatings (left after water or other solvents evaporate)
Dust is the most common dirt in optical connectors. Even small dust that can be seen only under
a microscope can affect the quality of optical signals, degrade the system performance and cause
potential instability in network operation.
A one-micrometer dust granule on an optical connector of a single mode fiber can block 1%
light and cause 0.05 dB lost. A nine-micrometer dust granule that cannot be seen by human eyes
can block an entire fiber core. Therefore, small dirt even that cannot be seen by human eyes
should be removed.
NOTE
Before you connect any optical component, make sure that you have inspected and cleaned the component.
General Procedure
Table 7-9 below describes the general procedure of how to inspect and clean the optical fiber
connectors.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 7-9 General procedure of inspecting and cleaning the optical fiber connectors
Operation Details
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using See "7.5.5 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors
Cartridge Cleaners Using Cartridge Cleaners"
Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using See "7.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors
Lens Tissue Using Lens Tissue"
Cleaning Optical Adapters Using Optical See "7.5.7 Cleaning Optical Adapters Using
Cleaning Sticks Optical Cleaning Sticks"
7.5.2 Protection of Optical Connectors

The requirements of optical connector protection are listed here.
The requirements of optical connector protection are:
l All optical port boards must be transported and stored in reliable packing. This serves to
avoid mechanical and electrostatic damages and to reduce vibrations.
l Store the protective caps in an ESD bag.
l Cover the optical ports of the replaced boards with protective caps in time. Store them in
proper packages to keep the optical ports clean.
l The protective caps recommended are shown in Figure 7-11, and the protective caps not
recommended are shown in Figure 7-12.
Figure 7-11 Protective caps recommended

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 7-12 Protective caps not recommended
NOTE
The air filter caps made of soft rubber are not recommended, which tends to collect dust and sundries. This
type of caps provides poor dustproof function.
7.5.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials

The recommended tools, equipment and materials used in cleaning the optical connector are
listed here.
The recommended tools, equipment and materials are listed below:
l Optical power meter
l Optical fiberscope with 400x magnification (a video fiberscope is recommended)
l CLETOP cassette cleaner, see Figure 7-13
l Clean solvent (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used, alcohol or formalin is never used)
l Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes or fiber cleaning tissue (Non-woven lens tissue is
recommended)
l Compressed air
l Optical cleaning sticks used for optical connectors or cotton swabs (medical cotton or long
fiber cotton) See Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 7-13 CLETOP cassette cleaner
Figure 7-14 Cleaning stick for the SC and FC optical ports (for reference only)
Figure 7-15 Cleaning stick for the LC optical port

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors

The following describes how to inspect the optical connectors and check the status of the fiber
surface.

The tools, equipment and materials are listed below:
Precautions
WARNING
Use a fiberscope equipped with a safety device or a desktop video fiberscope when you inspect
the optical connectors. If one is not available, turn off the lasers and disconnect both ends of the
fiber before you inspect the optical connectors
CAUTION
Electro static discharge (ESD) is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Use proper handlings
to prevent damage to the electronic equipment. Failure to follow this caution can cause
equipment damage and/or loss of traffic
Procedure
Step 1 Turn off the lasers before the inspection. Disconnect both ends of the fiber to be inspected.
Step 2 Test the optical power using a power meter. Ensure that the laser is turned off.
Step 3 Use a fiberscope to inspect the fiber to check if there is any dirt or damage. See the examples
shown below.
l For an image of the intact fiber optic surface through a fiberscope that can be used
successfully in the equipment, see Figure 7-16.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 7-16 An intact fiber
l For images of fibers through a fiberscope with imperfections that can impair the function of
the assembly, see Figure 7-17. The image on the left shows clearly a damaged fiber. Severely
damaged fibers must not be used in the system equipment. Otherwise, permanent and severe
damage to the assembly can occur. The image on the right shows a fiber that is suspect. If
the output power is within an acceptable range, the fiber might not cause any damage to the
assembly. If the output power is unstable or falls outside the acceptable range, however, the
fiber can cause damage to the assembly and must not be used.
Figure 7-17 Damaged or suspect fibers
NOTE
The views shown do not represent the entire surface of the fiber optic. Much of the surface is the metal
connector and only the 800-micron core is the actual fiber.
l For details on acceptable and unacceptable fibers, see Figure 7-18, Figure 7-19 and Figure
7-20.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 7-18 An intact fiber
Figure 7-19 Acceptable fibers with imperfections
Figure 7-20 Unacceptable fibers with imperfections

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 4 If any dirt is detected, clean the optical connector. For details, see "7.5.5 Cleaning Optical Fiber
Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners" and "7.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using
Lens Tissue".
Step 5 If any damage is detected, replace the fiber or board.
----End
7.5.5 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Cartridge Cleaners

Clean the fiber optic only in the case that there are flaws on it. The following describes how to
clean the fiber optic with a type of CLETOP cassette cleaner.
Prerequisites
Before cleaning, inspect the fiber optic surface with a fiberscope or a magnifier to determine the
extent to which the fiber optic might be damaged or dirty. Clean the fiber optic only in the case
that there are flaws on it. If there are not, do not clean it. That is because the cleaning itself might
introduce dust, dirt, or cause potential damage to the fiber optic.
The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using cartridge type
cleaners. There are several types of cartridge cleaners. The following describes a type of
CLETOP cassette cleaner.

l CLETOP cassette cleaner

Precautions
WARNING
CAUTION
ESD is hazardous to the electronic equipment. Use proper handlings to prevent damage to the
electronic equipment. Failure to follow this caution can cause equipment damage and/or loss of
traffic.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
Step 2 Use a power meter to measure and ensure that there is no laser light on the optical connector.
Step 3 Press down and hold the lever of the cassette cleaner, and the shutter slides back and exposes a
new cleaning area. See Figure 7-21.
Figure 7-21 Using the CLETOP cassette cleaner
Step 4 Place the fiber tip lightly against the cleaning area so that the end face is flat on the cleaning
area
Step 5 Drag the fiber tip lightly on one cleaning area in the direction of the arrow once. See Figure
7-22. Do it again on the other cleaning area in the same direction as the first time once. See
Figure 7-23.
CAUTION
Do not scrub the fiber against fabric or clean over the same cleaning area more than once.
Otherwise, the connector can be dirtied or damaged.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 7-22 Dragging the fiber tip lightly on one cleaning area
Figure 7-23 Dragging the fiber tip lightly on the other cleaning area
Step 6 Release the lever of the cassette cleaner to close the cleaning area.
Step 7 Use a fiberscope to inspect the adapter to check if there is any dirt. For details see the examples
shown in 7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors. If the optical adapter is still dirty, repeat the
Step 1 to Step 6.
Step 8 Connect the fiber connector to the board.
Step 9 Turn on the lasers after you connect the fiber to the board.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7.5.6 Cleaning Optical Fiber Connectors Using Lens Tissue

Clean the fiber optic only in the case that there are flaws on it. The following procedure provides
the steps to clean the fiber connectors using lens tissue.
Prerequisites
Before cleaning, inspect the fiber optic surface with a fiberscope or a magnifier to determine the
extent to which the fiber optic might be damaged or dirty. Clean the fiber optic only in the case
that there are flaws on it. If there are not, do not clean it. That is because the cleaning itself might
introduce dust, dirt, or cause potential damage to the fiber optic.
The following procedure provides the steps to clean the fiber connectors using lens tissue. Use
only the special materials for cleaning the fiber connectors. See the local site practices.


l Clean solvent. (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used. Alcohol or formalin is never
used)
l Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes or fiber cleaning tissue (Non-woven lens tissue is
recommended)
l Compressed air
Precautions
WARNING
CAUTION
traffic.
Procedure
Step 2 Use a power meter to measure and ensure that there is no laser light on the optical connector.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 3 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the lens tissue.

Step 4 Clean the fiber tip on the lens tissue. See Figure 7-24 and Figure 7-25.
CAUTION
Do not scrub the fiber against fabric or clean over the same cleaning area more than once. Failure
to comply can result in connector dirt or damage.
CAUTION
Move the fiber connector in the same direction when you wipe the fiber connector on the lens
tissue.
Figure 7-24 Cleaning the fiber tip with the lens tissue on the desk
Figure 7-25 Cleaning the fiber tip with the lens tissue on the hand

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 5 Repeat Step 4 several times on the areas of the lens tissue that have not been used.
Step 6 Use the compressed air to blow off the fiber tip.
NOTE
l When you use the compressed air, keep the injector nozzle as close as possible to the fiber connector
surface without touching it.
l When you use the compressed air, first spray it into the air as the initial spray of compressed air can
contain some condensation or propellant. Such condensation leaves behind a filmy deposit.
l If the compressed air is not available, a clean roll can be used.
Step 7 Use a fiberscope to inspect the adapter to check if there is any dirt. For details, see the examples
shown in 7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors. If the optical adapter is still dirty, repeat the
Step 1 to Step 6.
Step 8 Do not touch the fiber connector after you clean it. Connect it to the optical port board at once.
If it is not used for the time being, put a protective cap on it.
NOTE
A piece of lens tissue can be used for only one time.
----End
7.5.7 Cleaning Optical Adapters Using Optical Cleaning Sticks

Optical adapters must be cleaned with special cleaning tools and materials. The following
procedure provides the steps to clean optical adapters using optical cleaning sticks.
Prerequisites
There are several types of optical cleaning sticks and cotton swabs that can be used. See the local
site practices. You can obtain these tools and materials from a fiber cable and connector
manufacturer.


l Clean solvent. (Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used. Alcohol or formalin is never
used)
l Compressed air
l Optical cleaning sticks used for optical connectors or cotton swabs (medical cotton or long
fiber cotton)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Precautions
WARNING
CAUTION
traffic.
Procedure
Step 2 Test the optical power using a power meter. Ensure that the laser is turned off.
Step 3 Select the cleaning stick with a proper diameter for a certain type of the adapter.
NOTE
For the SC and FC optical port, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 2.5 mm( 0.1 in.); for the LC optical
port, use the cleaning stick with a diameter of 1.25 mm( 0.05 in.). See Figure 7-14 and Figure 7-15.
Step 4 Place a small amount of cleaning solvent on the optical cleaning stick.
Step 5 Place the optical cleaning stick lightly on the optical adapters so that cleaning solvent is against
the fiber tip. Hold the stick straight out from the adapter and turn the stick clockwise one circuit.
Make sure that there is direct contact between the stick tip and fiber tip.
Step 6 Use the compressed air to blow off the fiber tip.
NOTE
l When you use the compressed air, keep the injector nozzle close to the connector surface without
touching it.
l When you use the compressed air, first spray it into the air as the initial spray of compressed air can
contain some condensation or propellant. Such condensation leaves behind a filmy deposit.
Step 7 Use a fiberscope to inspect the adapter to check if there is any dirt. For details, see the examples
shown in "7.5.4 Inspecting Optical Connectors". If the optical adapter is still dirty, repeat the
Step 1 to Step 6.
Step 8 Connect the fiber to the board, or put a protective cap on the port.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7.6 Performing Hardware Loopback

Manually perform loopback to a physical port (optical port) with a fiber.

Optical power meter, fixed attenuator, fiber jumper
Figure 7-26 shows the difference between software loopback and hardware loopback.
Figure 7-26 Differences between hardware loopback and software loopback

Transmitting module
Software Hardware
loopback loopback
Receiving module
Precautions
CAUTION
When you perform hardware loopback, add an optical attenuator according to the range of the
optical power received by different boards.
Procedure
Step 1 Before a hardware loopback, use an optical power meter to measure the optical power of the
output optical port (OUT).
Step 2 Based on the received optical power range of boards, select a proper fixed attenuator.
Step 3 Use fiber jumper to connect the output optical port to the input port on the board, to perform a
loopback.
----End
7.7 Reset a Board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7.7.1 Performing a Warm Reset on the Board

When a board works abnormally, you might need to perform a warm reset of the board.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
Impact on System
In the case of the SCC board, the impacts of resetting the board are as follows:
l The communication between the U2000 and the SCC board and between the SCC board
and other boards stops.
A warm reset of boards does not affect the running services.

U2000
Warm reset of the SCC board:
l After a warm reset of the SCC board, FPGA of the board is not updated, and the
configuration data in the memory of the board remains the same. When a fault is detected,
a warm reset is preferred.
l A warm reset can be performed in any of the following methods:
– By using the U2000: It is applicable to remote maintenance. In this method, the
communication between the U2000 and the SCC board must be normal.
– By pressing the RESET button on the SCC board: It is applicable to field maintenance
or the situation where the communication between the U2000 and the SCC board stops.
Warm reset of the other boards:
l After a warm reset of other boards, FPGA of the boards is not updated, and the configuration
data in the memory of the board remains the same.
l A warm reset can be performed in the following method:
communication between the U2000 and the SCC board and between the SCC board and
other boards must be normal.
Performing a Warm Reset of a Board

1. Right-click the desired board in the NE panel window.
2. Select Warm Reset from the shortcut menu. The warm reset maybe service-affecting.
NOTE
If Cold Reset is not present in the shortcut menu, then board does not support the cold reset function.
3. Click Close on the Result dialog box displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7.7.2 Performing a Cold Reset on the Board

When a board works abnormally, you might need to perform a cold reset of the board.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
Impact on System
If you perform a cold reset of the SCC board, the U2000 stops communicating with the SCC
board, and the SCC board stops communicating with the other boards.
If you perform a cold reset of the TN16XCH board, the U2000 stops communicating with the
TN16XCH board, and the TN16XCH board stops communicating with the other boards.
A cold reset of other boards affects the running services. If a reset of such a board is failing, it
affects the communication between the board and the system control board, or even interrupts
services.
A cold reset on boards other than the SCC board affects the running services. A reset failure on
these boards affects the communication between the board and the system control board, or even
interrupts services.

U2000
Cold reset of the SCC board:
l When the SCC board is faulty, perform a warm reset of the SCC board. If the fault persists
after a warm reset, perform a cold reset.
l The methods of performing a cold reset of the SCC board are as follows:
– Perform a cold reset by removing and then inserting the SCC board. This method applies
to field maintenance or scenarios where the SCC board fails to communicate with the
U2000.
– Perform a cold reset on the U2000. This method applies to remote maintenance where
the communication between the SCC board and the U2000 is normal.
Cold reset of the TN16XCH board:
l When the TN16XCH board is faulty, perform a warm reset of the TN16XCH board. If the
fault persists after a warm reset, perform a cold reset.
l The methods of performing a cold reset of the TN16XCH board are as follows:
– Perform a cold reset by removing and then inserting the TN16XCH board. This method
applies to field maintenance or scenarios where the TN16XCH board fails to
communicate with the U2000.
– Perform a cold reset on the U2000. This method applies to remote maintenance where
the communication between the TN16XCH board and the U2000 is normal.
Cold reset of the other boards:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l After a cold reset of other boards, FPGA of the boards is updated, which is service-affecting.
Perform a warm reset of the board, if the fault persists after a warm reset, perform a cold
reset.
l A cold reset can be performed in any of the following methods:
communication between the U2000 and the system control board must be normal, and
the communication between the board and the system control board must be normal.
– By removing and then inserting the board: It is applicable to field maintenance or the
situation where the communication between the board and the system control board
stops.
Performing a Cold Reset of a Board on the U2000

1. Right-click the desired board in the NE panel window.
2. Choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu. The cold reset may be service-affecting. Then,
the Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
NOTE
If Cold Reset is not present in the shortcut menu, then board does not support the cold reset function.
3. Click Close on the Result dialog box displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 8 Parts Replacement
8 Parts Replacement
About This Chapter
8.1 General Guide for Replacing a Board

Most boards are replaced in similar fashion, and this section provides guidance for replacing a
common board.
8.2 Replacing an SCC Board with One of the Same TNxx Version
This section describes the procedure for replacing an SCC board with one of the same TNxx
version.
8.3 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different TNxx Version
This section describes how to replace an SCC board with an SCC board of a later TNxx version.
The replacement mainly involves the SCC boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN
6800A.
8.4 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board
This section describes how to replace the Cross-Connect boards.
8.5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board
This section describes how to replace TN16XCH board.
8.6 Replacing the PID Board
This section describes how to replace the PID board.
8.7 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board
This section describes how to replace the Raman amplifier board.
8.8 Replacing the AUX Board
This section describes how to replace an AUX board.
8.9 Replacing the DCM
This section describes how to replace the DCM.
8.10 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module
This section describes how to replace the pluggable optical module (eSFP/XFP).
8.11 Replacing the EFI Board
This section describes how to replace the EFI board in the OptiX OSN 6800A/8800.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
8.12 Replacing the PIU Board

This section describes how to replace the PIU board.
8.13 Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly
A skilled engineer can replace the fan tray assembly in one minute.
8.14 Replacing the Air Filter
Replace the air filter periodically to ensure efficient heat dissipation from the equipment. Replace
the air filter with the fans shut down to prevent contamination.
8.15 Replacing the Subrack
If the backplane of a subrack has bent pins or other defects, the subrack must be replaced. This
section describes how to replace the subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
8.1 General Guide for Replacing a Board

Most boards are replaced in similar fashion, and this section provides guidance for replacing a
common board.
It applies to the following boards:
l optical transponder boards

l tributary and line boards
l optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards
l optical add and drop multiplexing boards
l optical amplifier boards
l variable optical attenuator boards
l optical protection boards
l optical power and dispersion equalizing boards
l optical supervisory channel boards
l clock boards
l spectrum analyzer boards
8.1.1 Prerequisite
For the operations on the NMS, you must be an NMS user with "NE operator " authority or
higher.
8.1.2 Impact on the System

This section describes the impact of board replacement on services.
Board Type Impact on System when Replacing a Board
Protection is configured No protection is

configured
Optical Client 1+1 Replacing a board has no impact Replacing a board

transponder protection on services. causes all services
board carried by the
SNCP When SNCP protection is board interruption
protection configured, replacing the OTU
where the sink node is located
brings a service interruption.
Replacing an OTU on other nodes
generally brings no impact on
services.
ERPS Replacing a board causes service

protection interruption at the site where the
board is configured but has no
impact on the services on the
whole ring.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

configured
Tributary board Client 1+1 Replacing a board has no impact

protection on services.
Tributary Replacing a board has no impact

SNCP on services.
protection
Line board Client 1+1 Before replacing a line board,

protection check if the service from the line to
a tributary board is provided with
the client 1+1 protection on the
tributary board. If the protection is
provided, replacing the line board
brings no service interruption upon
a normal switching. If the
protection is not provided,
replacing the line board brings a
service interruption.
ODUk SNCP Replacing a board has no impact

protection on services.
When other protection is configured, replacing a board will cause service interruption.
Optical Replacing a board causes an interruption on all services carried by the

multiplexer and board.
demultiplexer
board
Optical add and

drop
multiplexing
board
Optical
amplifier board
Variable optical
attenuator board
Optical
protection board
Dispersion
equalizing board
Optical Replacing a board causes interruption of the optical supervisory channel

supervisory services, but has no impact on services.
channel board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

configured
Spectrum Replacing a board has no impact on services.

analyzer board
Clock board For OptiX OSN 8800, 1+1 protection is configured for clock boards.
Replacing a clock board will trigger switching on the active and standby
clock boards, therefore, services are not affected.
8.1.3 Tools, Equipment, and Materials

ESD bag, ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, flashlight, optical power meter, and U2000
8.1.4 Precautions
This section describes the precautions to be taken before you replace optical transponder boards,
line boards, tributary boards, and clock boards.
Optical Transponder Board
CAUTION
Before connecting a fiber to the input optical port of a board, measure the optical power. You
can directly connect a fiber to the input optical power of the board only when the measured
optical power is within the permitted range of the receive optical power for the optical module
on the board. If the measured optical power is beyond the permitted range, you must add a VOA
before connecting the fiber to prevent the receiver optical module from being burned or damaged.
The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm, which must be
considered with caution to prevent the optical module from being burned or damaged.
l Before replacing the board, ensure that the wavelength of the new board is consistent with
that of the original board.
NOTE
The wavelength of the board is printed on the PCB board.
l Before replacing the board, test the input optical power. Prevent the input optical power
from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the receiver optical module will be burned or
damaged.
l Before replacing the board, query and record the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive
end of the link.
l If the client 1+1 protection is configured, perform the following steps:
1. Before replacing the board, query the working status of the board to be replaced.
2. If the board to be replaced is the current working board, perform an active/standby
switchover on the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
The channel status of the protection board must be normal. Otherwise, replacing the faulty
board causes a service interruption.
At the opposite end of the link, perform a manual switchover on the U2000 at the same time.
3. After replacing the board, query the state of the new board and ensure that it is the
working board.
l If the SNCP protection is configured, perform the following steps:
2. If the board to be replaced is the working board and the service sink does no reside
on the board, perform an active/standby switchover on the U2000.
NOTE
working board.
l After replacing the board, query the wavelength of the new board on the U2000. Make sure
the wavelength is the same as that of the original board.
NOTE
If the replaced board is a tunable OTU, after the board is replaced, the SCC automatically delivers
the wavelength configuration of the original board.
l After replacing the board, query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the
link. Make sure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before
board replacement.
Line Board
CAUTION
optical power is within the permitted range of the received optical power for the optical module
l Before replacing the board, ensure that the wavelength of the new board is consistent with
that of the original board.
NOTE
The wavelength of the board is printed on the PCB board.
l Before replacing the board, query and record the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive
end of the link.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
damaged.
l If the ODUk SNCP protection or ODUk SPRing protection (four-fiber ring) is configured,
perform the following steps:
NOTE
working board.
l After replacing the board, query the wavelength of the new board on the U2000. Ensure
the wavelength is the same as that of the original board.
l After replacing the board, query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the
link. Ensure that the BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before
board replacement.
Tributary Board
CAUTION
optical power is within the permitted range of the received optical power for the optical module
damaged.
l If the client 1+1 protection or tributary SNCP protection is configured, perform the
following steps:
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
working board.
Clock Board
Before replacing the board, perform an active/standby switchover on the U2000.
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800 T32, assume that the clock board to be replaced is located in slot 42, it is the main
clock board, the clock board in slot 44 works normally and the subrack where it is located has no BUS-
ERR alarm.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64, assume that the clock board to be replaced is located in slot 75, it is the main
cross-connect board, the clock board in slot 86 works normally and the subrack where it is located has no
BUS-ERR alarm.
8.1.5 Substitution Relationships

This section describes the substitution relationships of the boards.
8.1.5.1 Optical Transponder Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical transponder unit boards.
The following board has substitution relationships.
LOG
Original Substitute Substitution Rules
Board Board
TN11LOG TN12LOG The TN12LOG can be created as TN11LOG on the NMS. The
former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOG functions as the
TN11LOG.
NOTE
l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC
code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board
and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution
does not apply.
l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board
with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive
optical power are different.
TN12LOG None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
LOM
Board Board
TN11LOM TN12LOM The TN12LOM can be created as TN11LOM on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOM functions as the
TN11LOM.
NOTE
does not apply.
TN12LOM None -
LSX
Board Board
TN12LSX TN13LSX The TN13LSX can be created as TN12LSX on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN13LSX functions as the
TN12LSX.
NOTE
does not apply.
TN13LSX None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TMX
Board Board
TN11TMX TN12TMX The TN12TMX can be created as TN11TMX on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TMX functions as the
TN11TMX.
NOTE
does not apply.
TN12TMX None -
8.1.5.2 Tributary and Line Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the tributary and line boards.
ND2
Board Board
TN11ND2 TN12ND2 The TN12ND2 can be created as TN11ND2 on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12ND2 functions as the
TN11ND2.
NOTE
When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code
pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and
transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not
apply.
TN12ND2.
NOTE
The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on
the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN12ND2 in relay mode
at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Board Board
TN52ND2.
NOTE
The TN53ND2 does not support OTU2e services at rate 11.3 Gbit/s on
the WDM side and it cannot substitute for the TN52ND2 in relay mode
at rate 11.3 Gbit/s.
TN53ND2 None -
NQ2
Board Board
TN51NQ2 TN52NQ2/ The TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN51NQ2

TN53NQ2 on the NMS to function as a TN51NQ2 board. In this scenario,
the TN52NQ2 /TN53NQ2 only provides the functions of the
TN51NQ2 board, and the board software does not need to be
upgraded.
NOTE
When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code
pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and
transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not
apply.
TN52NQ2 TN53NQ2/ The TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2 can be created as TN52NQ2 on the

TN54NQ2 NMS. The former can substitute for the latter, without any
software upgrade. After substitution, the TN53NQ2/TN54NQ2
functions as the TN52NQ2.
NOTE
Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports the TN54NQ2.
TN54NQ2 TN53NQ2 The TN53NQ2 board can be created as TN54NQ2 on the NMS
to function as a TN54NQ2 board. In this scenario, the
TN53NQ2 board only provides the functions of the TN54NQ2
board, and the board software does not need to be upgraded.
TN53NQ2 None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NS2
Table 8-1 Substitution rules of the NS2 board

Original Substit Substitution Rules
Board ute
Board
TN12NS2 TN53NS On an OptiX OSN 6800 NE of V100R004C04 or a later version or on an OptiX OSN
2 8800 NE, the TN53NS2 board can substitute for the TN12NS2 board without requiring
any software upgrades. After physically replacing the TN12NS2 board with the
TN53NS2 board, the user must create the TN53NS2 board as TN12NS2 on the U2000
to complete the substitution.
NOTE
The substitution can take place only when the TN12NS2 board uses FEC/AFEC-2.
TN52NS2 TN53NS On an OptiX OSN 6800 NE of V100R004C04 or a later version or on an OptiX OSN
2 8800 NE, the TN53NS2 board can substitute for the TN52NS2 board without requiring
any software upgrades. After physically replacing the TN52NS2 board with the
TN53NS2 board, the user must create the TN53NS2 board as TN52NS2 on the U2000
to complete the substitution.
TN53NS2 None -
NS3
Table 8-2 Substitution rules of the NS3 board

Board Board
TN11NS3 TN52NS3 The TN52NS3 can be created as TN11NS3 on the NMS. The former can
substitute for the latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the
TN52NS3 functions as the TN11NS3.
TN52NS3 None -
TN54NS3 None -
TN55NS3 None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TDX
Table 8-3 Substitution rules of the TDX board

Board Board
TN12TDX TN53TDX The TN53TDX can be created as TN12TDX on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the
TN12TDX.
TN52TDX TN53TDX The TN53TDX can be created as TN52TDX on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN53TDX functions as the
TN52TDX.
TN53TDX None -
TQX
Table 8-4 Substitution rules of the TQX board

Board Board
TN11TQX TN55TQX The TN55TQX can be created as TN11TQX on the NMS. The
upgrade. After substitution, the TN55TQX functions as the
TN11TQX.
TN52TQX.
TN53TQX.
TN55TQX None -
8.1.5.3 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer
boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
M40
Board Board
TN11M40 TN12M40 The TN12M40 board can be created as TN11M40 on the NMS.
The former can substitute for the latter without any software
upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40 board functions
as the TN11M40 board. The TN12M40 board occupies two
physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11M40 board
occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the
remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other
board.
TN12M40 None -
M40V
Board Board
TN11M40V TN12M40 The TN12M40V can be created as TN11M40V on the NMS.

V The former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12M40V board
functions as the TN11M40V board. The TN12M40V board
occupies two physical slots and three logical slots while the
TN11M40V board occupies three physical slots. After the
substitution, the remaining one physical slot cannot be used to
house any other board.
TN12M40V None -
D40
Board Board
TN11D40 TN12D40 The TN12D40 can be created as TN11D40 on the NMS. The
upgrade. After the substitution, the TN12D40 board functions
as the TN11D40 board. The TN12D40 board occupies two
physical slots and three logical slots while the TN11D40 board
occupies three physical slots. After the substitution, the
remaining one physical slot cannot be used to house any other
board.
TN12D40 None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
8.1.5.4 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical add and drop multiplexing
boards.
This type of boards does not have substitution relationships.
8.1.5.5 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the reconfigurable optical add and drop
multiplexing boards.
8.1.5.6 Optical Amplifier Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical amplifier boards.
OAU1
Board Board
TN11OAU1 TN12OAU The TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 can be created as

1, TN11OAU1 on the NMS. The former can substitute for the
TN13OAU latter, without any software upgrade. After substitution, the
1 TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1 function as the TN11OAU1.
TN12OAU1 TN13OAU The TN13OAU1 can be created as TN12OAU1 on the NMS.

1 The former can substitute for the latter at type 01,03,05, without
any software upgrade. After substitution, the TN13OAU1
functions as the TN12OAU1.
TN13OAU1 None -
OBU1
Board Board
TN11OBU1 TN12OBU The TN12OBU1 can be created as TN11OBU1 on the NMS.

1 The former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU1 functions as the
TN11OBU1.
TN12OBU1 None -

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
OBU2
Board Board
TN11OBU2 TN12OBU The TN12OBU2 can be created as TN11OBU2 on the NMS.

2 The former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU2 functions as the
TN11OBU2.
TN12OBU2 None -
8.1.5.7 Optical Supervisory Channel Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical supervisory channel boards.
8.1.5.8 Optical Protection Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical protection boards.
8.1.5.9 Spectrum Analyzer Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the spectrum analyzer boards.
8.1.5.10 Variable Optical Attenuator Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the variable optical attenuator boards.
8.1.5.11 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Boards

This section describes the substitution relationships of the optical power and dispersion
equalizing board.
8.1.5.12 Clock Board

This section describes the substitution relationship of the STG board.
8.1.6 Procedure for Replacing a Board

This section provides the common procedure for replacing a board. When replacing a board,
strictly comply with the procedure provided in this section.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, TNxx version, and type of the new board are the same
as those of the original board.
NOTE
If the TNxx versions of the new board and the original board are not the same, you need to determine
whether the new board can be substituted for the original board. For more information regarding the
substitution relationships between boards of different versions, refer to "Substitution Relationship".
Step 2 Review and record current NE alarms.

1. In the Main Topology view, choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the Main Menu.
2. Click the Basic Setting and Alarm Source tabs in turn on the Filter dialog box to set the
filter conditions for the current alarms.
3. Click OK.
4. Record the current alarms of the NE.
NOTE
You can select the desired alarms and right-click to choose Save > Save Selected Records, or right-
click to choose Save > Save All Records from the shortcut menu to save the current alarms of the
NE.
Step 3 Right-click the replaced board on the U2000, and choose State > OOS (out of service) in the
short-cut menu, to set the state of the board to OOS.
Step 4 On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Configuration > Card Removal
Indication in the navigation tree.
2. Select the desired board. Double-click Enable Indication and set it to Enabled.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Query to display the operation result. Verify that the function is successfully enabled.
NOTE
For the boards supporting the removal indication function, see Board Indicators.
NOTE
After the removal indication function is enabled for the board to be replaced, the STAT indicator on the board
and Minor alarm indicator in the subrack slowly blink green so that the onsite maintenance engineer can easily
locate the board to be replaced.
Step 5 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and remove the fibers and cables on the board to be
replaced.
1. Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap. Make sure that the wrist strap fully touches your
skin. Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the ESD socket in the subrack.
2. Record the mapping relationships of the board ports and the fibers.
3. Remove the fiber jumpers connecting to the optical interfaces on the board. Keep the optical
connector and end face clean. Cover the fiber immediately after the fiber is removed. The
cable connector must be sealed to avoid short circuit.
Step 6 Remove the board to be replaced.

1. Optional: If there are screws on the front panel, loosen the captive screws on the front
panel of the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2. Grip the ejector levers and apply an outward force until the ejector levers become horizontal
and the connector of the board leave the backplane.
3. Put the replaced board in an ESD bag and attach a maintenance label on the bag. The label
should contain the NE name and fault description.
Figure 8-1 Removing a board of OptiX OSN 8800/6800A subrack
Figure 8-2 Removing a cross-connect board of OptiX OSN 8800 subrack
1 2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 8-3 Removing a board in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 subrack
1 2 3
1
2
3 4
Figure 8-4 Removing a board of OptiX OSN 3800A chassis
Step 7 Insert the new board.

1. Check the pins on the backplane using a flashlight. Ensure that no pin is bent.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2. Check that the connectors on the board are in good condition.
Figure 8-5 Position of connectors on a board
Figure 8-6 Example of a damaged connector
3. Raise the ejector levers of the board using two hands and align the board with the guide
rail of the slot.
4. Slowly slide the board along the guide rail into the slot until it can no longer move forward.
5. Lower the ejector levers to hold the beam of the subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 8-7 Installing a board of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800A subrack
Figure 8-8 Installing a cross-connect board of the OptiX OSN 8800 subrack
1 2
Figure 8-9 Installing a board in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack
1 2 3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 8-10 Installing a board of the OptiX OSN 3800A chassis
6. Optional: If there are screws on the front panel, tighten the two captive screws on the panel
of the board.
7. Insert the fibers into the connectors on the board according to the mapping relationship.
NOTE
After the board is replaced, the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board automatically.
Step 8 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work normally
after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives an abnormal
indication, reinsert the board or replace the board again.
Step 9 Right-click the replaced board on the U2000 and choose State > IS (in service) in the short-cut
menu, to set the state of the board to IS.
Step 10 Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE. Confirm that the original
alarms or performances issues are cleared.
----End
8.2 Replacing an SCC Board with One of the Same TNxx

Version
This section describes the procedure for replacing an SCC board with one of the same TNxx
version.
NOTE
TNxx indicates the board hardware version that is displayed on the PCB board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the SCC board fills one slot in the subrack. The valid slots
for the SCC board are IU9 and IU10. IU9 is the first choice. If there is 1+1 protection for
the SCC board, IU10 is the default slot for the standby SCC.
for the SCC board are IU11 and IU28. IU28 is the first choice. If there is 1+1 protection
for the SCC board, IU11 is the default slot for the standby SCC.
for the SCC board are IU74 and IU85. IU74 is the first choice. If there is 1+1 protection
for the SCC board, IU85 is the default slot for the standby SCC.
l In the OptiX OSN 6800A, the SCC board fills one slot in the subrack. The valid slots for
the SCC board are IU17 and IU18. IU18 is the first choice. If there is 1+1 protection for
the SCC board, IU17 is the default slot for the standby SCC.
l In the OptiX OSN 3800A, the SCC board fills one slot in the subrack. The valid slots for
the SCC board are IU8 and IU9. IU9 is the first choice. If there is 1+1 protection for the
SCC board, IU8 is the default slot for the standby SCC.
NOTE
If there is SCC 1+1 protection, the data on the active SCC board is synchronized to the standby SCC board
after the standby board is replaced.
CAUTION
Do not replace the EFI1 board on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or OptiX
OSN 6800A when you replace the SCC board.
CAUTION
To help prevent unsynchronized data, do not remove the SCC board during batch data backup.
You can replace the SCC board on the OptiX OSN 8800/6800A when:
l The SCC board of the master subrack is configured with SCC 1+1 protection.
l There is no protection for the SCC board of the master subrack.
l You are replacing the SCC board of the slave subrack.
You can replace the SCC board on the OptiX OSN 3800A when:
l The SCC board of the master subrack is configured with SCC 1+1 protection.
l There is no protection for the SCC board.
8.2.1 Setting the Jumper and DIP Switch on the SCC Board
This section describes how to set the battery jumpers and BIOS jumpers on the spare SCC board
before replacing the SCC board.
The battery on the SCC helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of
the SCC. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit,
which allows the battery to supply power normally.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The BIOS jumper or switch helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash
memory on the SCC board. Table 8-5 shows the function of the BIOS jumper or switch.
Table 8-5 Function of the BIOS switch or jumper

BIOS State Description Binary value
A Clear the system parameter area. 1010
B Restores the system parameter area, database, and NE 1001

software from the CF card.
C Clear the database in the flash memory. 1011
D Clear all the data in the flash memory except the board 1111
manufacturing information. The data includes the
system data, system parameter areas, and extended
BIOS files. The upper layer part of BIOS is not started.
Figure 8-11 shows the position of swiches and jumpers on the TN16SCC board.
Figure 8-12 shows the position of jumpers on the TN22SCC board.
Figure 8-13 shows the jumpers on the TN51SCC board.
Figure 8-14 shows jumpers on the TN52SCC board.
Figure 8-15 shows jumpers on the TNK2SCC board.
Figure 8-11 Position of the switches and jumpers on the TN16SCC board
BIOS Switch Battery Jumper
Binary Value 1010
0 1 0 1
ON DIP 2
Battery is
SW1 used 3 1
State A J1
Battery 1 2 3 4
Jumper
Binary Value 1001
ON DIP 2 1 0 0 1
BIOS DIP SW1 2 ON DIP
Switch 1 234 3 1 2
J1 SW1 Battery is
State B
not used 3 1
1 2 3 4 J1
Binary Value 1011
CF 1 1 0 1
Card ON DIP
SW1
State C
1 2 3 4
Binary Value 1111
1 1 1 1
ON DIP
State D SW1
1 2 3 4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 8-12 Position of the jumpers on the TN22SCC board

BIOS Jumper Battery Jumper
J11
2 4
CPU
2 4
J1
J13
Binary Value 1010 Binary Value 1001

Battery is
J11 J11
used
0 1
1
J1
1 0
4
State A State B
0 0 Battery is
1
not used
1
1 1
4
J1
J13 J13
Binary Value 1011 Binary Value 1111

J11 J11
1 1
1
1 1
4
State C State D
0 1
1
2
1
1 1
4
J13 J13

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

BIOS Jumper
BIOS Jumper
Binary Binary
1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
value value
2 J42 10
2 J42 10
2 J42 10
9
9
0101
1001
State A State B
1
1
Binary Binary
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
value value
2 J42 10
2 J42 10
J12
9
9
1111
1101
2 Sate C State D
J1 Battery Jumper
3 1
1
1
Battery Jumper
CF Card Battery is used Battery is not used

2 2
J1 J1
3 1 3 1
Battery Jumper BIOS Jumper

BIOS Jumper
Binary Binary
10 10 10 01
value value
1010
1
1001
1
2
State A State B
1
2
10
10
9
9
3
J1 J11 J11
1
Binary Binary
1 0 11 11 11
value value
1011
1111
1
2
10
9
J11 State C State D

10
10
9
J11 J11
Battery Jumper
1
Battery Battery is
2
is used not used

CFCCard
3
卡
F J1 J1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 8-15 Position of the jumpers on the TNK2SCC board

J9 J41
2 10
3
2
1 9
1
CF Card
The underlying PCB

Binary Value 1010 Binary Value 1001 J41
0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
3
J9 J9 Battery is
2 10 2 10 used
1
State A State B
1 9 1 9
J41
3
Binary Value 1011 Binary Value 1111 Battery is
2
1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 not used
1
J9 J9
2 10 2 10
State C State D
1 9 1 9
8.2.2 Replacing the Protected SCC in a Master Subrack

This section describes how to replace the SCC board of the master subrack when SCC 1+1
protection is configured.
Prerequisites
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
l The TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the TFTP/SFTP service is started.
l The SCC replacement board must be the same type as the SCC board being replaced.
l Before replacing an SCC board with a spare SCC board, the battery jumper on the spare
board must be set. The 1X3 jumper inside the board is used to enable or disable the power
supply from the battery. Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 on the battery jumper are capped. Then,
cap pin 2 and pin 3 on the battery jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery
voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. In this case, the SCC
board needs to be replaced.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Impact on the System

Replacing an SCC board configured with protection does not affect the existing services.
During board replacement, the following alarms may be reported: COMMUN_FAIL,

BD_STATUS, HARD_ERR, SYNC_FAIL, WRG_BD_TYPE, SWDL_PKG_NOBDSOFT.
These alarms do not affect services and will be cleared after board replacement is completed.
For SCC 1+1 protection, replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt
communication between the NE where the SCC board resides and the U2000 after you switch
services from one SCC board to the other SCC board.

l ESD bag
l U2000
l Multimeter
Precautions
During the SCC board replacement, do not configure the NE before the new SCC board is started
up.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the
SCC board to be replaced have the same name and are of the same type.
Step 2 Review and record the current NE alarms.
Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This is to record the NE database for future reference
when the SCC board is replaced.
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE
Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.
2. Right-click the device(s) that you want to back up in the NE View table.
NOTE
The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected.
3. Select Backup... to open the Backup dialog.
4. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information.
NOTE
By default the NMS Server is selected. If the NMS Server is selected, the selected device information
is stored on the NMS server.
5. Optional: If the NMS Client is selected, click to select the location where the device
data are to be backed up.
6. Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). On the NE View tab
page, the backup progress is displayed.
7. When the backup operation is successful, the NMS creates the dbf.pkg file in the NEName/
yyyymmddhhmmss directory. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE, "yyyymmdd"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
indicates the date when the backup is created, and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the
backup is created.
Step 4 Follow the steps below to review the working state of the board to be replaced.
1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from
the Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
Step 5 If the board to be replaced is the active board, go to Step 6. Otherwise, go to Step 7.
Step 6 If the board to be replaced is the working board, complete the following the steps to perform an
active/standby switching on the U2000.
1. In the Main Topology, right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed.
2. Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
3. In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click the desired SCC Board 1+1 Protection. Select
Working/Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the window
displayed.
4. Click Query. If the Working Board is not the board to be replaced, the switching is
successful.
5. Query the alarms and performance events on the U2000. Check if services are normal. If
services are normal, there must be no new abnormal alarms or performances. The switching
is successful.
Step 7 Right-click the board to be replaced on the U2000 and choose State > OOS (out of service) in
the short-cut menu to set the state of the board to OOS.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
Step 9 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For details about how to remove
a board, see Procedure of Replacing a Board.
NOTE
If the OptiX OSN 3800A is installed in the 23" open rack, the method of replacing the SCC board is the same
as that of the PIU board. For details, see Step 6 of the "Replacing the PIU Board".
Step 10 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board to set the BIOS running mode. Then insert the SCC
board to the slot housing the original SCC board to format the file system of the new SCC board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
1. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to status D (1111) to clear all the data
in the flash memory except the board manufacturing information. shows the settings of the
four jumpers on the SCC board.
2. Insert the spare SCC board in the slot housing the original SCC board. When the STAT
indicator on the inserted SCC board is blinking green quickly, the file system is being
formatted. When the STAT indicator is steady green, the formatting is completed. The
formatting takes about 15 minutes.
NOTE
If the spare SCC board is a version earlier than V100R006C01SPC300, the formatting is not indicated on
any board indicators. Wait 15 minutes until the system formatting is completed.
Step 11 After the file system of the SCC board is formatted completely, remove the board. Remove the
jumper caps which you set in Step 10. Reinsert this SCC board to the slot.
NOTE
At this time, the TL1 may report as follows: AID=<BID>,EQPTTYPE=<SCC>,RSLT=<SW-FAILURE>.
menu to set the state of the board to IS.
Step 13 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. It takes approximately 90 minutes for
a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is blinking slowly
(green). If the indicator is not blinking slowly (green), you need to reinsert the board or select a
new replacement board. For details about the indicators, see Board Indicators.
Step 14 If the board removal indication function is enabled before board replacement, disable this
function on the U2000 after the board replacement is complete.
2. After you remove the board, select the desired board and set Enable Indication to
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.
Step 15 Optional: Follow the steps below to switch the active/standby state of the SCCs back to the
original state.
3. In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click SCC Board 1+1 Protection. Select Working/
Protection Switching from the shortcut menu. Click OK in the window displayed.
NOTE
After you start the new SCC board, the system automatically synchronizes the data between the existing
SCC board and the new SCC board. After data backup completes, perform the preceding step to initiate
active/standby switching.
Step 16 Check and set the other parameters on the U2000 to ensure that the parameter values of the new
board are the same as the original data.
1. Check the software information of the new system control board against the original data.
2. Synchronize the NE time with the NMS server time.
3. Check the NE alarm attribute data against the original data.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4. Enable the NE performance monitoring.

5. Check whether the switching state is correct. Perform a switching test.
NOTE
For details about how to set these parameters, see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE
Management.
Step 17 Query the current alarms of the NE using the U2000.

3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
After replacing the system control board, ensure that the monitoring of the PWR-FAIL alarm is enabled.
If the PWR-FAIL alarm occurs, check whether the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper.
If yes, use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is out.
The board must be replaced.
CAUTION
The standard voltage of the battery is 3.6 V. The battery is fixed on the board and cannot be
replaced.
----End
8.2.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC in a Master Subrack

This section describes how to replace an SCC board in the master subrack when no protection
is configured for the SCC board.
Table 8-6 Modes of replacing the SCC of the master subrack without protection
Scenario Mode Remarks
The NE is reachable on the Replacing the SCC by The database of the NE must be
U2000. Backing Up Database backed up. After replacing the
Data to the NMS SCC, restore the database to the
NE.
Replacing the SCC by The first mode is recommended.
Backing Up Database
If a slot is available for another
Data to a CF Card
SCC, configure the system to
provide 1+1 SCC protection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Scenario Mode Remarks
Replacing the SCC

Board After
Configuring SCC 1+1
Protection
The NE is A backup Replacing the SCC by The current database of the NE

not database is Backing Up Database cannot be backed up. After the
reachable stored on the Data from the NMS SCC is replaced, the NE can only
on the U2000. read the database on the U2000
U2000. or the database on the CF card
No backup Replacing the SCC by saved during the last backup.
database is Backing Up Database
stored on the Data from a CF Card
U2000.
No backup Manually reconfigure

database is NE parameters as
stored on the required
U2000, and the
CF board has
failed.
8.2.3.1 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from the NMS (NE Is
Unreachable)
If the NE is unreachable because of SCC damage, you can restore the NE database from the
NMS after replacing the SCC board.
Prerequisites

Replacing the SCC board does not affect services.

ESD bag, U2000, multimeter, Web LCT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Precautions
CAUTION
l Operations on the U2000 must be performed in the network management center.
l Operations on the Web LCT must be performed on site.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare SCC board. Ensure that the spare SCC board and the SCC board to be replaced
have the same name and are of the same type.
Step 2 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and remove the board. For details about how to remove
NOTE
Step 3 Set the four jumpers on the spare SCC board so as to set the BIOS running mode of the board
and then insert it to the slot housing the original SCC board. In this manner, the database on the
new SCC board is cleared. 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper and DIP Switch on the SCC Board shows
the settings of the four jumpers on the SCC board.
1. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to status C (1011) to clear the database
in the flash memory.
2. Insert the spare SCC board in the slot housing the original SCC board. Wait for 2 minutes
until the database on the spare SCC board is cleared. If the spare SCC board is of
V100R006C03 or a later version, the database is being cleared when the STAT indicator
on the SCC board is quickly blinking and the database clearing is complete when the STAT
indicator is steady green.
3. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to status A (1010) to clear the system
parameter area.
Step 4 After the database of the SCC board is cleared completely, remove the board. Remove the jumper
caps which are shown in Step 3. After that, reinsert this SCC board to the slot.
Step 5 After the new SCC board starts, connect the Web LCT to the NE.
1. Disconnect the cables from the NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 ports (if connected). That is,
disconnect the NE from the computer where the U2000 (hereinafter the computer is referred
to as U2000) is installed.
2. Connect the Web LCT to NM_ETH1.
3. Set the IP address of the Web LCT to ensure that Web LCT is in the same IP subnet segment
as the NE IP address. If the IP address of the Web LCT and the NE IP address are in different
network segments, the Web LCT cannot be connected to the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
The new board is initiated at the factory, and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129.9.*.*.
4. Log in the Web LCT with the user name admin, and the initial password .
Step 6 Create the NE by using the Web LCT.
1. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box is
displayed.
2. Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Add. The New Domain dialog box is displayed.
4. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address. Enter an IP address in the
Domain Address field.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
Repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains.
6. Close the Manage Domain Search dialog box.
7. Select the appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click
Search.
NOTE
l The NE search function searches for only the NEs in the specified network segment.
l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.
8. After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A prompt
message is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK.
9. Select the NE to which you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or
right-click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed,
enter sonet and SONET in the User Name and Password fields.Then click OK.
TIP
You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift.

If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to multiple
NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line.
If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you do not
need to enter the use name and password. The system automatically uses the user name and password
used to log in the last time.
Step 7 Modify the NE IP, gateway IP and subnet mask based on the original information using the Web
LCT.
1. In the NE Explorer, select Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree.
2. Enter the NE IP address, gateway IP address and subnet mask, and click Apply.
3. Click OK after the Warning dialog box pops up.
4. Click OK after the Warning dialog box about communication interruption between NEs
pops up.
NOTE
If the NE IP addresses before and after the modification are in different network segments, the Web LCT cannot
be connected to the NE. When this occurs, set the IP address of the Web LCT in the same network segment as
the NE IP address.
Step 8 Modify the OSPF parameters based on the original information using the Web LCT.
1. In the NE Explorer, choose Communication > OSPF Parameter from the function tree.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
2. In the OSPF Parameter Management pane, change the OSPF parameters to the original
information about the NE.
3. Click Apply.
Step 9 Modify the NE name based on the original information using the Web LCT.
1. In the NE Explorer, choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree.
2. Enter the NE Name, and click Apply.
Step 10 Check the NE attribute using the Web LCT.
1. Select the NE you just created and click the NE Explorer.
2. Select Configuration > NE Attribute from the Function Tree.
3. Check that all NE communication parameters are the same as the original ones.
Step 11 Create a user for an NE using the Web LCT.
NOTE
The created NE user must be included in the activated database and the password must match that recorded
in the database. Otherwise, activating the database fails.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Security > NE User Management from
the function tree.
2. Click New. The Add NE User dialog box is displayed.
3. Refer to Table 8-7 to set attribute values of the new user.
Table 8-7 The attributes of NE users

Field Value Description
On the Web For example: The name of the NE user being created.
LCT: User USER A string, containing 4 to 16 characters. It must
include at least one letter, and no punctuation is
permitted. It cannot be the same as an existing NE
user name.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
On the Web RTRV, PROV, The operations carried out by the NE user are
LCT: Level MAINT and classified into four levels, RTRV, PROV,
SUPER MAINT, and SUPER from the lowest level to the
highest. Higher level users can perform all the
functions that lower level users can. For example, an
operation level user has all the rights of a monitor
level user. The system level user with the highest
level has all rights. The detailed rights settings for
each level are:
RTRV: all query commands, log in, log out, and
modification of its own password.
PROV: all settings for fault and performance, partial
security settings, and partial configuration.
MAINT: partial security settings, partial
configuration, communication settings, and log
management.
SUPER: all security settings, all configurations.
NOTE
For a super user, only one user at a time can log in to an
NE. In the case of an RTRV, PROV, MAINT or user, a
maximum of 16 users can log in to an NE concurrently.
An RTRV, PROV, or MAINT user cannot modify the login
password. The password can be modified only by a super
user.
Allow Multi- ENABLE, Whether to allow multi-terminal login.

Terminal DISABLE
Login
New - New password of the user. The password is a string

Password in any combination of 6 to 16 alphanumeric
characters. Must include one capital letter, one
lowercase letter, and one digit at least. It is displayed
as asterisks (*).
Confirm - Enter the new password again.

Password
Canceling Yes, No Whether to allow an online user to exit automatically

User Default: Yes when no operations are done for a period of time.
Automatically
Time of Any integer This option is in effect only when Yes is selected for
Canceling from 5 to 60 Canceling User Automatically. Set the time to
User Default: 60 automatically cancel the user.
Automatically
(m)
User Yes or No Whether the user is permanently valid.

Permanently Default: Yes
Valid

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
User Valid Any integer The period in which the user's name is in effect. The
Till (days) from 1 to 999 unit measurement is day.
This option is in effect only when No is selected for
User Permanently Valid.
Password Yes or No Whether the password is permanently valid.

Valid
Password Any integer The period in which the password is in effect. The
Valid Till from 25 to 999 unit of measurement is day.
(days) This option is in effect only when No is selected for
Password Permanently Valid.
4. Click Apply.
Step 12 Recover the network connection of the NE.

1. Remove the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT.
2. Connect the network cable removed in the Step 5.
NOTE
After this procedure, you can use the original user name and password to access the NE by using the
U2000.
Step 13 If the software version of the spare SCC board is different from the software version of the SCC
board to be replaced, go to Step 14; otherwise, go to Step 15.
Step 14 Upgrade or downgrade the software of the spare SCC board. For details, see the Upgrade
Guide. Ensure that the software version of the spare SCC board is consistent with that of the
SCC board to be replaced.
Step 15 Restore the NE database from the NMS server.

2. Right click the devices that you want to recover in the NE View table.
3. Select Recover... to open the Recover dialog.
4. In the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered. If the backup file is listed
in the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered, and turn to 15.7. If the
backup file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list, click Browse... to select the backup
file in the Select File dialog box.
5. Select NMS Server or NMS Client to recover the backup file for the selected devices. By
default NMS Server is selected.
l If NMS Server is selected, select the appropriate backup file from the NMS server. The
selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File field.
l If NMS Client is selected, click to select the backup file from the NMS Client.
The selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File field.
6. Click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name drop-
down list.
7. Click Start, the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed.
8. In the Operation Confirmation dialog, click Yes to start the recovery operation. The
recovery operation status is displayed in the NE View table.
NOTE
You must activate the NE database within five minutes after restoring it.
CAUTION
During the process of backing up databases through restoring databases, do not modify the NE
configurations to avoid database inconsistency.
Step 16 Activate the NE database.

2. Select the NE where the SCC that has been replaced resides in the NE View table.
3. Right-click the NE. A pop-up menu is displayed.
4. Select Activate Database..., and the Activate Database dialog box is displayed.
5. Optional: Click the icon in Deliver To Board Activate. This icon is changed to .
Click Start to start the database activation process. The progress of the database activation
is displayed on the NE View tab.
NOTE
The operation on the U2000 may result in a service interruption.
Step 17 Synchronize the fibers.

1. In the main topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable/Microwave Link > WDM
Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the main menu.
2. Select the NEs that need to be set from the NE list in the left-hand pane. After you select
the NEs, the double-right-arrow button turns red. Click the button.
3. Click Synchronize. The data for the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side and the
data for the fiber connections on the NE side are displayed.
NOTE
Synchronized Fiber/Cable: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides.
Uncreated Fiber/Cable in NMS: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the NE side.
Uncreated Fiber/Cable in NE: Indicates the fibers that exist only on the U2000 side.
4. If there are fibers in Uncreated Fiber/Cable in NMS or Uncreated Fiber/Cable in NE,
select all the fibers. Click Create Fiber/Cable. The Operation Result dialog box is
displayed. Click Close. The synchronized fibers are displayed on the Synchronized Fiber/
Cable list.
5. If conflicting fibers are configured and you fail to create a fiber, click Delete Fiber/
Cable to delete the incorrect fiber and click Create Fiber/Cable to re-create the failed
fibers.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
For details to set these parameters, see iManager U2000 Operator Guide for NG WDM NE Management.

3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
CAUTION
replaced.
----End
8.2.3.2 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data from a CF Card (NE Is
Unreachable)
When the NE is unreachable resulting from a damages SCC board, restore the NE database from
the CF card after replacing the SCC board if there is no backup data on the NMS.
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


Precautions
CAUTION
l After the database of the NE is restored on the CF card, the restoration must be completed
within two hours after you install the replacement SCC. If you wait more than two hours to
restore the database of the NE on the CF card, the data automatically saved on the NE
overwrites the original data stored on the CF card. If the original data is overwritten, the
original database of the NE cannot be restored.
l NE data is backed up every 24 hours by default. The database data restored from the CF card
is the latest data backed up if the NE is unreachable. Therefore, it may be different from the
current actual data.
Procedure
Step 2 Remove the SCC board to be replaced. For details about how to remove a board, see Procedure
of Replacing a Board.
Step 3 On the SCC board that has been removed, hold the CF card and pull the card out of the CF card
slot. Put the SCC into an ESD bag.
NOTE
Keep the CF card because it is required for NE data restoration.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
parameter area.
Step 6 After the new SCC board is started, connect the Web LCT to the NE.
NOTE
The new board is initiated at the factory, and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129.9.*.*.
Step 7 Create the NE using the Web LCT.

displayed.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
Search.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TIP

LCT.
pops up.
NOTE
the NE IP address.
3. Click Apply.
Step 12 Create a user for an NE using the Web LCT.
NOTE
The created NE user must be included in the activated database and the password must match that recorded
in the database. Otherwise, activating the database fails.
the function tree.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

user name.
each level are:
management.
NOTE
user.

Terminal DISABLE
Login

as asterisks (*).

Password

Automatically

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Automatically
(m)

Valid

Valid
4. Click Apply.
Step 13 Restore the network connection of the NE.

2. Connect the network cable removed.
NOTE
After this procedure, you can use the original user name and password to access the NE using the
U2000.
Step 14 Query the software version of the spare SCC board, if it is different from the software version
of the SCC board to be replaced, go to Step 15; otherwise, go to Step 16.
Step 16 After the SCC board is started, remove the SCC board just inserted. Insert the CF card that has
been removed in Step 3 into the CF card slot on the SCC board. Then insert the SCC.
Step 17 Restore the initial database of the NE using the U2000.

1. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data
Management from the Main Menu, and the NE Configuration Data Management
interface is displayed.
2. In the Object Tree on the left, select an NE and click .

3. In NE Configuration, select an NE or multiple NEs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
4. Click Restore NE Database from CF Card. The Confirm dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the restoration of the NE database may lead to service interruption.
5. Click OK to start to restore the NE database.
NOTE
If the database is performing a scheduled backup task, the message "NOT IN VALID STATE, FAILED
TO RECOVER FROM CF" will be displayed on the NMS, indicating that restoring data from the CF card
will fail. In this scenario, you are advised to wait 5 minutes, and restore data again from the CF card after
the database finishes the scheduled backup task.
6. Click Closeafter an Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
After the NE databases are restored, the NE software issues the data in the CF card to only the SCC board
but not other boards. To ensure that the configurations in the SCC board and the configurations in other
boards are consistent, you need to perform warm resets on other boards. You can use the TL1 command
to perform warm resets on all the boards, the TL1 command is : init-sys::slot-all:z::warm.
CAUTION
During the process from backing up databases to restoring databases, do not modify the NE

NOTE
Cable list.
fibers.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
CAUTION
replaced.
----End
8.2.3.3 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to the NMS (NE Is
Reachable)
Before replacing an SCC board, you can back up the NE database to the NMS if the NE is
reachable and the slot for housing the standby SCC board is occupied by a service board. In this
manner, you can restore the NE database from the NMS after replacing the SCC board.
Prerequisites


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 3 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This records the NE database for future reference
when the SCC board is faulty.
NOTE
NOTE
backup is created.
Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the system to obtain the user management list of the NE.
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Security > NE User Management from the
Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
3. Record the NE user data returned by the system for future restoration of the NE user data.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Also record the password for each user account of the NE.
Step 5 Follow the steps below to query the NE communication parameters.

1. Select the NE you just created, and click the NE Explorer.
2. Select Configuration > NE Attribute from Function Tree.
3. Record NE communication parameters such as the IP address and the subnet mask in case
you need them for parameter restoration.
Step 6 Follow the steps below to query the NE OSPF parameters.

2. In the OSPF Parameter Management pane, record NE OSPF parameters.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
parameter area.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
The new board is initiated at factory, and the default IP subnet segment of the board is 129.9.*.*.
displayed.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
Search.
NOTE
TIP

LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
pops up.
NOTE
the NE IP address.
3. Click Apply.
Step 17 According to the NE user management list queried in Step 4, create a user for an NE using the
Web LCT.
the function tree.

user name.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
each level are:
management.
NOTE
user.

Terminal DISABLE
Login

as asterisks (*).

Password

Automatically
Automatically
(m)

Valid

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Valid
4. Click Apply.
2. Connect the network cable removed in Step 11.
NOTE
U2000.
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
6. Click OK.
NOTE
down list.
CAUTION

NOTE

NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Cable list.
fibers.
NOTE

3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
CAUTION
replaced.
----End
8.2.3.4 Replacing the SCC by Backing Up Database Data to a CF Card (NE Is

Reachable)
Before replacing an SCC board, back up the NE database to a CF card if the NE is reachable
and the standby SCC slot is occupied by a service board. If you choose to back up the database,
you can restore the NE database from the CF card after you replace the SCC board is replaced.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Prerequisites


Precautions
CAUTION
within two hours after you install the replacement SCC. If you wait more than two hours to
restore the database of the NE on the CF card, the data automatically saved on the NE
overwrites the original data stored on the CF card. If the original data is overwritten, the
original database of the NE cannot be restored.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement board. The spare SCC board and the SCC board
to be replaced must have the same name and type.
Step 3 Back up the database on the U2000.
Management from the Main Menu, and the NE Configuration interface is displayed.
2. In the Object Tree, select an NE and click .

3. Select one or more NEs in the NE Configuration.
4. Click Back Up NE Data and then choose Manually Back Up Database to CF Card.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
5. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box.

6. Click Close in the Result dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Wait four minutes and query the system to obtain the user management list of the NE by
following the steps below.
Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
NOTE

Step 6 Follow the steps below to query the NE OSPF parameters.
2. In the OSPF Parameter Management pane, record NE OSPF parameters.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
parameter area.
NOTE

displayed.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
Search.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TIP

LCT.
pops up.
NOTE
the NE IP address.
3. Click Apply.

Step 18 According to the NE user management list queried in Step 4, create a user of the NE using the
Web LCT.
the function tree.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

user name.
each level are:
management.
NOTE
user.

Terminal DISABLE
Login

as asterisks (*).

Password

Automatically

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Automatically
(m)

Valid

Valid
4. Click Apply.

NOTE
U2000.
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.
of the SCC board to be replaced, go to Step 22; otherwise, go to Step 23.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 23 After the SCC board is started, remove the SCC board just inserted. Insert the CF card that has
been removed in Step 9 into the CF card slot on the SCC board. Then insert the SCC.

NOTE
NOTE
CAUTION

NOTE
Cable list.
fibers.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE

3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
CAUTION
replaced.
----End
8.2.3.5 Replacing the SCC After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection

If the slot designated for the standby SCC board is vacant and will not house a service board,
you can replace the SCC board by installing the new SCC board in the vacant slot and then
performing an active/standby switchover on the SCC boards.
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Replacing the SCC does not affect the existing services.
The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: The SCC is housed in
the active slot by default. When the standby slot is not occupied by another board, it is available
for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in the active slot. In this case,
replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between
the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC
is performed.
Product Active Slot (Default) Standby Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 IU28 IU11
OptiX OSN 6800A IU18 IU17
NOTE
The logical board for the SCC board in the default slot cannot be deleted from the U2000; therefore, two spare
SCC boards must be prepared when this method is used to replace the SCC board.

Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
SCC board to be replaced have the same name and type.
Step 2 Back up the NE database to the NMS server. This records the NE database for future reference

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
NOTE
backup is created.
Step 3 Set the jumpers on the spare SCC board using the following methods and insert it to the specified
slot for a standby SCC board. In this manner, the file system of the new SCC board is formatted.
NOTE
After inserting the spare SCC board to the specified slot for a standby SCC board, you need to add a corresponding
logical board on the U2000. Then, the system automatically configures 1+1 protection for the SCC.
NOTE
Step 4 After the file system of the SCC board is formated completely, remove the board. Remove the
jumper caps which are shown in Step 3. After that, reinsert this SCC board to the slot.
NOTE
a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green.
If the indicator is not steady green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement
board. For details about the indicators, see Board Indicators.
Step 6 Log in to the U2000 and complete the following steps to perform an active/standby switch
between the SCC boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
displayed.
successful.
is successful.
NOTE
After the new SCC board is started, the system automatically backs up the data on the existing SCC board
to the new SCC board. After the data is backed up, you can perform the preceding step to initiate an active/
standby switching.
NOTE

3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
CAUTION
replaced.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 10 Remove the board to be replaced and put it into an ESD bag. Insert a new board in the slot. For
detailed operations, see Step 1 to Step 5.
----End
8.2.4 Replacing the SCC Board in a Slave Subrack

This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a slave subrack.
Prerequisites
l The communication between the master and slave subracks is normal and the slave subrack
is reachable by the NMS.
l If the following alarms are generated on the NE: SHELF-ID-CONFLICT, SHELF-ID-
MISMATCH, SHELF-WRONG-CONNECT, NEW-SHELF-ID-CONFLICT, SHELF-
LOOP, clear them before board replacement.
l If the TN51SCC board is to be replaced and the board is located in a subrack whose ID is
greater than 8, the software of the spare part for the TN51SCC board must be
V100R005C00SPC900 or a later version; otherwise, services are interrupted.

Replacing the SCC board in the slave subrack does not affect services when the communication
between the master and slave subracks is normal.
Replacing the SCC board in the slave subrack may interrupt the services on the slave subrack
when the communication between the master and slave subracks is abnormal.
If the SCC is configured with 1+1 protection, replacing the SCC does not affect the system.
If an SCC is not configured with 1+1 protection, replacing the SCC has the following effects:
l The fan is automatically changed to the "High Speed" mode.
l The ESC and OSC communication of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides fails.
l The PWR-FAIL alarm of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be
reported.
l Certain optical boards in the slave subrack housing the SCC board to be replaced go offline
and cannot be managed. However, the services on these boards are not affected.

ESD bag, U2000, multimeter

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare board. Ensure the name, and the type of the spare board are the same as those of
the original board.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
Step 5 Remove the board to be replaced. For details about how to remove a board, see Procedure of
Replacing a Board.
Step 6 If the TN51SCC board is to be replaced and the software of the SCC board version is earlier
than V100R005C00SPC900, go to Step 7, otherwise go to Step 9.
Step 7 If the SCC board to be replaced is located in a slave subrack whose ID is in the range of 2 to 8,
do the following:
1. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to status D (1111). 8.2.1 Setting the
Jumper and DIP Switch on the SCC Board shows the settings of the four jumpers on
the SCC board.
to format the file system.
3. After the file system is formatted, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which are
shown in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper and DIP Switch on the SCC Board and reinsert this
SCC board to the slot.
Step 8 If the SCC board to be replaced is located in a slave subrack whose ID is greater than 8, do the
following to format the file system and upgrade the spare SCC board to V100R005SPC900 or
a later version:
1. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare SCC board to status D (1111). 8.2.1 Setting the
Jumper and DIP Switch on the SCC Board shows the settings of the four jumpers on
the SCC board.
2. Insert the spare SCC board in a vacant slot in a slave subrack whose ID is in the range of
2 to 8. Wait for 15 minutes to format the file system.
NOTE
The active SCC board configured in the slave subrack must be TN51SCC, and the software version of the
SCC board must be V100R005SPC900 or later.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3. After the file system is formatted, remove the board. Remove the jumper caps which are
shown in 8.2.1 Setting the Jumper and DIP Switch on the SCC Board and reinsert this
SCC board to the slot.
4. Wait about 15 minutes for the software of V100R005SPC900 or a later version to be
automatically loaded to the SCC board. If the STAT indicator on the board is steady green,
then the V100R005SPC900 or a later version software is successfully loaded to the SCC
board.
NOTE
You can also format the file system and upgrade the spare SCC board to V100R005SPC900 or a later version
on an idle NE. Reference to the Upgrade Guide for more information. You are advised to upgrade all spare SCC
boards in a unified mode. If required, contact Huawei engineers to provide technical support.
after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is blinking slowly (green). If the indicator gives
an abnormal indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information
regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.
3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
CAUTION
replaced.
----End
8.3 Replacing the SCC Board with One of a Different TNxx

Version
This section describes how to replace an SCC board with an SCC board of a later TNxx version.
The replacement mainly involves the SCC boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and OptiX OSN
6800A.
NOTE
TNxx indicates a board hardware version displayed on the PCB board.
CAUTION
Do not replace the EFI1 board during the replacement.

This section describes the substitution relationships of the SCC boards.

Board Board
TN16SCC None -
TN51SCC TN52SCC Software upgrade is required for the replacement.
TN52SCC None -
TNK2SCC None -
TN22SCC None -
NOTE
If a subrack/chassis uses two SCC boards (one is active and the other is standby), the versions of the two
SCC boards must be the same.
8.3.2 Replacing the Protected SCC Board in a Master Subrack

This section describes how to replace the SCC board in a master subrack when SCC 1+1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Prerequisites

The replacement does not affect the existing services.
For SCC 1+1 protection, replacing one SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the
communication between the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from
this SCC to the other SCC is performed.

Precautions
During the SCC board replacement, do not configure the NE before the new SCC board is started
up.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare SCC board as the replacement SCC board by referring to "Substitution
Relationships".
NOTE
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
backup is created.
Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced.
the Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
Step 6 If the board to be replaced is the working board, follow the steps below to perform an active/
standby switching on the U2000.
displayed.
successful.
is successful.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
Step 9 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For details about how to replace
a board, refer to Procedure of Replacing a Board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
jumper caps which you set in Step 10. Reinsert this SCC board to the slot.
NOTE
Step 12 Wait 15 to 20 minutes. If the U2000 reports a SWDL-PKG-NOBDSOFT alarm, a software

upgrade is required for the replacement. For details, see Upgrade Guide.
If the indicator is not blinking slowly (green), you need to reinsert the board or select a new
replacement board. For details about the indicators, see Board Indicators.
NOTE
After the new board works normally, the MEA alarm will be reported on the U2000.
Step 14 Follow the steps below to switch the active/standby state of the SCC boards back to the original
state.
NOTE
SCC board and the new SCC board. After the data backup is complete, ensure that the STAT indicator is
steady green, you can perform the preceding step to initiate active/standby switching.
Because data backup cannot be automatically performed between TN22SCC and TN23SCC, active/standby
switching can be performed only when the two SCC boards are replaced with TN23SCC.
Step 15 Set Replace Board Type on the U2000.

1. Double-click the optical NE icon in the Main Topology. Then, the running status of the
optical NE is displayed.
2. Select the desired NE. In the NE Panel tab, right-click the desired SCC board and click
Replace Board Type from the shortcut menu.
3. The dialog box of Replacement Board Type is displayed, select the name of the target
board to be replaced within the Usable Board Type. Click OK.
4. After the replacement, a prompt appears asking you whether to immediately upload the NE
data. Click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
If you click Cancel, the board is successfully upgraded, but you need to manually upload the NE data
later.
5. Click OK to confirm the uploading of the NE data again.
NOTE
later.
6. Click Close in the displayed Result dialog box.
NOTE
After changing the board type , the MEA alarm is cleared.
NOTE
Management.

3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
CAUTION
replaced.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 19 Repeat Step 5 to Step 18 replace the other SCC board in the protection group and ensure that
the two SCC boards are of the same type after the replacement.
----End
8.3.3 Replacing the Unprotected SCC Board in a Master Subrack

This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a master subrack when no protection is
configured for the SCC board.
8.3.3.1 Replacing the SCC with the Database Backed Up to the NMS
Before replacing an SCC board, you can back up the NE database to the NMS. In this manner,
you can restore the NE database from the NMS after replacing the SCC board.
Prerequisites

The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows:
l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, the SCC is housed in IU28 by default. If another board is
installed in IU11, SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. In this case, replacing the SCC
in an NE interrupts the communication between the NE and the U2000.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800A, the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. When IU17 is occupied
by another board, SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. In this case, replacing the SCC

Precautions
CAUTION

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
Relationships".
when the SCC board is faulty.
NOTE
NOTE
backup is created.
Step 4 Follow the steps below to query the system to obtain the user management list of the NE.
Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
NOTE

3. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
NOTE
parameter area.
NOTE
4. Log in the Web LCT with the user name admin, and the initial password Changme_123.

displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
5. Click OK.
NOTE
Search.
NOTE
TIP

LCT.
pops up.
NOTE
the NE IP address.

Step 15 According to the NE user management list queried in Step 4,create an NE's user using the Web
LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
the function tree.
user name.
each level are:
management.
NOTE
user.

Terminal DISABLE
Login

as asterisks (*).

Password

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Automatically
Automatically
(m)

Valid

Valid
4. Click Apply.

2. Connect the network cable removed in Step 10.
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

6. Click OK.
NOTE
down list.
NOTE
CAUTION

NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
U2000.
After recovering the NE database, the U2000 will report a MEA alarm.

NOTE
Cable list.
fibers.

data. Click OK.
NOTE
later.
NOTE
later.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE

3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
CAUTION
replaced.
----End
8.3.3.2 Replacing the SCC with the Database Backed Up to a CF Card

When replacing an SCC board, you can back up the NE database to a CF card. In this manner,
you can restore the NE database from the CF card after replacing the SCC board.
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows:
l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, the SCC is housed in IU28 by default. If another board is
installed in IU11, SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. In this case, replacing the SCC
l For the OptiX OSN 6800A, the SCC is housed in IU18 by default. When IU17 is occupied
by another board, SCC 1+1 protection cannot be configured. In this case, replacing the SCC

Precautions
CAUTION
within two hours after you install the replacement SCC is installed. If you wait more than
two hours to restore the database of the NE on the CF card, the data automatically saved on
the NE overwrites the original data stored on the CF card. If the original data is overwritten,
the original database of the NE cannot be restored.
Procedure
Relationships".
Step 3 Backup the database on the U2000.

Management from the Main Menu, and the NE Configuration interface is displayed.
2. In the Object Tree, select an NE and click .

3. Select one or more NEs in the NE Configuration.
4. Click Back Up NE Data and then choose Manually Back Up Database to CF Card.
6. Click Close in the Result dialog box is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 4 Wait four minutes later, and query the system to obtain the user management list of the NE by
following the steps below.
Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
NOTE

3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
parameter area.
NOTE
4. Log in the Web LCT with the user name admin, and the initial password Changme_123.
displayed.
5. Click OK.
NOTE
Search.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TIP

LCT.
pops up.
NOTE
the NE IP address.
Step 15 Check the NE communication parameters using the Web LCT.

Step 16 According to the NE user management list queried in Step 4,create an NE's user using the Web
LCT.
the function tree.
user name.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
each level are:
management.
NOTE
user.

Terminal DISABLE
Login

as asterisks (*).

Password

Automatically
Automatically
(m)

Valid

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Valid
4. Click Apply.
1. Pull out the network cable which connected the NM_ETH1 port to the Web LCT.
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.
of the SCC board to be replaced, go to Step 20, otherwise go to Step 21.
Step 21 After the SCC board is started, remove the SCC board inserted just now. Insert the CF card that
has been removed in Step 8 into the CF card slot on the SCC board. Then, insert the SCC.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
After this procedure, you can use the original user name and password to access the NE using the U2000.
After recovering the NE database, the U2000 will report a MEA alarm.
CAUTION

NOTE
Cable list.
fibers.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
data. Click OK.
NOTE
later.
NOTE
later.
NOTE
NOTE

3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
CAUTION
replaced.
----End
8.3.3.3 Replacing the Board After Configuring SCC 1+1 Protection

If the slot designated for the standby SCC board is vacant and will not house a service board,
you can replace the properly-functioning SCC board by installing the new SCC board in the
vacant slot and then performing an active/standby switchover on the SCC boards.
Prerequisites

The replacement does not affect the existing services.
The impact caused by replacing an SCC without protection is as follows: The SCC is housed in
the active slot by default. When the standby slot is not occupied by another board, it is available
for another SCC to implement 1+1 protection with the SCC in the active slot. In this case,
replacing one of the SCC in the protection group does not interrupt the communication between
the NE where the SCC resides and the U2000 after a switching from this SCC to the other SCC
is performed.
Product Active Slot (Default) Standby Slot
NOTE
The logical board for the SCC board in the default slot cannot be deleted from the U2000; therefore, two spare
SCC boards must be prepared when this method is used to replace the SCC board.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
Relationships".
NOTE
NOTE
backup is created.
Step 3 Set the jumpers on the spare SCC board using the following methods and insert it to the specified
slot for a standby SCC board. In this manner, the file system of the new SCC board is formatted.
NOTE
After inserting the spare SCC board to the specified slot for a standby SCC board, you need to add a corresponding
logical board on the U2000. Then, the system automatically configures 1+1 protection for the SCC.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Step 4 After the file system of the SCC board is formated completely, remove the board. Remove the
NOTE
If the indicator is not steady green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement
board. For details about the indicators, see Board Indicators.
Step 6 Follow the steps below to perform an active/standby switching on the U2000.
displayed.
successful.
is successful.
NOTE
SCC board and the new SCC board. After data backup completes, you can perform the preceding step to
initiate active/standby switching.
NOTE

3. Click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
CAUTION
replaced.
Step 10 Remove the board to be replaced and put it into an ESD bag. Insert a new board in the slot. For
detailed operations, see Step 1 to Step 5.
----End
8.3.4 Replacing the SCC in a Slave Subrack

This section describes how to replace an SCC board in a slave subrack.
Prerequisites
l If the communication between the master and slave subracks is abnormal, rectify the fault
before replacing the SCC board in the slave subrack.
l If the following alarms are generated on the NE: SHELF-ID-CONFLICT, SHELF-ID-
MISMATCH, SHELF-WRONG-CONNECT, NEW-SHELF-ID-CONFLICT, SHELF-
LOOP, clear them before board replacement.

Replacing the SCC board in the slave subrack does not affect the services when the
communication between the master and slave subracks is normal.
Replacing the SCC board in the slave subrack may interrupt the services on the slave subrack
when the communication between the master and slave subracks is abnormal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
If the SCC is configured with 1+1 protection, replacing the SCC does not affect the system.
If an SCC is not configured with 1+1 protection, replacing the SCC has the following effects:
l The fan is automatically changed to the "High Speed" mode.
l The ESC and OSC communication of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides fails.
l The PWR-FAIL alarm of the subrack where the replacement SCC resides cannot be
reported.
l Certain optical boards in the slave subrack housing the SCC board to be replaced go offline
and cannot be managed; however, the services on these boards are not affected.

Procedure
Relationships".
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
Replacing a Board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
NOTE
Step 8 Wait 15 to 20 minutes. If the U2000 reports a SWDL-PKG-NOBDSOFT alarm, a software

upgrade is required for the replacement. For details, see Upgrade Guide.
NOTE
If the SCC board is isolated during the software upgrade, you must manually release the board isolation after
the software upgrade is completed. When the SCC board isolation is released, it will be automatically matched
and reset.
after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady green. If the indicator gives an abnormal
indication, reinsert the board, or replace the board again. For more information regarding
indicator definitions, refer to Board Indicators.
NOTE
After the new board works normally, the U2000 will report a MEA alarm.

data. Click OK.
NOTE
later.
NOTE
later.
NOTE
After changing the board type by setting Replace Board Type on the U2000, the MEA alarm is cleared.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
CAUTION
replaced.
----End
8.4 Replacing the Cross-Connect Board

This section describes how to replace the Cross-Connect boards.
You can replace the Cross-Connect board if:
l The Cross-Connect board 1+1 protection is configured.
l There is no protection for the Cross-Connect board.

This section describes the substitution relationships of the cross-connect board.
XCH
TN52XCH and TN16XCH are the versions of this boards. The description of replacing the
TN16XCH board will be described separately because its functions are different from those of
a common cross-connect board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
XCT
Original Substitute Board Substitution Rules
Board
TNK2XCT TNK4XCT The TNK4XCT can be created as TNK2XCT on

the NMS. The former can substitute for the latter,
without any software upgrade. After substitution,
the TNK4XCT functions as the TNK2XCT.
TNK4XCT None None
8.4.2 Under Board 1+1 Protection

This section describes how to replace the cross-connect board when cross-connect board 1+1
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
Impact on System
When cross-connect 1+1 board protection is configured, replacing the cross-connect board
brings no impact on the services in case of a normal switching.

ESD bag, U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare board to use as a replacement board. Ensure the name, version and model number
of the new board are the same as those of the original.
NOTE
If the version is inconsistent, determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For more information
regarding the replacement relationship between board versions, see "Substitution Relationship".
Step 2 Query and record the current alarms on the NE.
Step 3 Perform an active/standby switching on the U2000. Check whether the BUS-ERR alarm has
occurred in the standby cross-connect board. If it has occurred, clear the alarm before the
replacement. Otherwise, replacing the board causes a service interruption.
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800 T32, assume that the cross-connect board to be replaced in slot 9 is the active cross-
connect board, and that the cross-connect board in slot 10 works normally and no BUS-ERR alarm is
generated on the subrack.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64, assume that the cross-connect board to be replaced in slot 9 (slot 10) is the
active cross-connect board, and that the cross-connect board in slot 43 (slot 44) works normally and no
BUS-ERR alarm is generated on the subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 6800A, assume that the XCS board to be replaced is located in slot 9 and it is the main
XCS board, and that the XCS board in slot 10 works normally and the subrack where it is located has no
BUS-ERR alarm.
3. In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click the desired XCS Board 1+1 Protection. Select
displayed.
successful.
is successful.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Step 7 Check the indicators of the new board. It takes four or five minutes for a new board to work
normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green. If the indicator is
not steady on green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details
about the indicators, see Board Indicators.
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 10 Follow the steps below to cancel the switching.
3. In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click the desired XCS Board 1+1 Protection. Select
displayed.
alarms or performances are cleared.
----End
8.4.3 Under No Protection

This section describes how to replace the cross-connect board when no protection is configured.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
When you replace the cross-connect board without protection, that is, the only cross-connect
board (suppose it is in IU9) on an NE.
l For OptiX OSN 6800A,
– When IU10 is occupied by other boards, cross-connect board protection cannot be
configured. Replacement of the cross-connect board causes interruption of services.
– When IU10 is not occupied by other boards, it is available for another cross-connect
board to realize 1+1 protection with the cross-connect board in IU10. When the cross-
connect board has 1+1 protection and when the switching is normal, replacement of the
cross-connect board does not cause service interruption

ESD bag, U2000
Procedure
of the new board are the same as those of the original board.
NOTE
If the version is inconsistent, determine if the board with different versions can be replaced. For more
information regarding the replacement relationship between board versions, see "Substitution
Relationship".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 3 For OptiX OSN 6800A, if IU10 is not occupied by other boards, insert another cross-connect
board in IU10 and add a corresponding logical board on the U2000. Then the system
automatically configures the cross-connect board 1+1 protection. For steps to replace an cross-
connect board that is configured with board 1+1 protection, see 8.4.2 Under Board 1+1
Protection.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Step 7 Check the indicators of the new board. It takes four or five minutes for a new board to work
normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator is steady on green. If the indicator is
not steady on green, you need to reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.
----End
8.5 Replacing the TN16XCH Board

This section describes how to replace TN16XCH board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
8.5.1 Setting the Jumper and DIP Switch on the TN16XCH Board
This section describes how to set the battery jumpers and BIOS DIP switches on the spare
TN16XCH board before replacing the TN16XCH board.
The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure
of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a
short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use
a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper.
The BIOS DIP switches helps clear the system parameter area and database in the flash memory
on the board. Table 8-13 shows the function of the BIOS jumper. The value that can be set by
using each of the DIP switch on the board is a binary value 0 or 1. When the DIP switch is ON,
the value of the corresponding bit is set to 1.
Figure 8-16 shows the position of DIP switches on the TN16XCH board.
Table 8-13 Function of the BIOS jumper

Jumper Settings Description
1010 Clear the system parameter area.
1011 Clear the database in the flash memory.
1111 Clear all the data in the flash memory except

the board manufacturing information. The
data includes the system data, system
parameter areas, and extended BIOS files.
The upper layer part of BIOS is not started.
Figure 8-16 Position of the DIP switches on the TN16XCH board

BIOS Switch Battery Jumper
Binary Value 1010
0 1 0 1
ON DIP 2
Battery is
SW1 used 3 1
State A J1
Battery 1 2 3 4
Jumper
Binary Value 1001
ON DIP 2 1 0 0 1
BIOS DIP SW1 2 ON DIP
Switch 1 234 3 1 2
J1 SW1 Battery is
State B
not used 3 1
1 2 3 4 J1
Binary Value 1011
CF 1 1 0 1
Card ON DIP
SW1
State C
1 2 3 4
Binary Value 1111
1 1 1 1
ON DIP
State D SW1
1 2 3 4

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
8.5.2 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Master Subrack

This section describes how to replace the TN16XCH board of the master subrack when
TN16XCH 1+1 protection is configured.
Prerequisites
l Before replacing an board, the battery jumper on the spare board must be set. The 1X3
jumper inside the board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery.
Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 on the battery jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and pin 3 on
the battery jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is
lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. In this case, the SCC board needs to be replaced.

Replacing an TN16XCH board configured with protection does not affect the existing services.
For TN16XCH 1+1 protection, replacing one of the TN16XCH in the protection group does not
interrupt the communication between the NE where the TN16XCH resides and the U2000 after
a switching from this TN16XCH to the other TN16XCH is performed.
Tools, Equipment and Materials

Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare TN16XCH board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare TN16XCH board
and the TN16XCH board to be replaced have the same name and type.
when the TN16XCH board is replaced.
NOTE
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
backup is created.
the Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
displayed.
successful.
is successful.
NOTE
Step 9 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding
how to remove a board, refer to Procedure of Replacing a Board.
Step 10 Set the DIP switch on the spare TN16XCH board to set the BIOS running mode and then insert
the TN16XCH board to the slot housing the original TN16XCH board. In this manner, the
database on the new TN16XCH board is cleared.
1. Set the BIOS running mode of the spare TN16XCH board to status D (1111) to format the
file system in the flash memory. 8.5.1 Setting the Jumper and DIP Switch on the
TN16XCH Board shows the settings of the DIP switch on the TN16XCH board.
2. Insert the spare TN16XCH board to the slot housing the original TN16XCH board. Wait
for 15 minutes to allow the database to be cleared.
Step 11 After the database on the new TN16XCH board is cleared, remove it. In addition, reset the DIP
switch to the 0000 state which is shown in Step 10. Then reinsert this TN16XCH board to the
slot.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Step 12 Review the indicators of the new board. It takes 90 minutes for a board to work normally after
the board is inserted. If replace a cross-connect board whose name is the same with the name of
the original board, the STAT indicator is blinking slowly (green); If replace a cross-connect
board whose name is different from the name of the original board, the STAT indicator is steady
green. If the indicator gives an abnormal indication, reinsert the board or replace the board again.
For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.
Step 15 Optional: Perform a warm reset on the new board, the warm reset takes three to five minutes.
Follow the steps below to switch the active/standby state of the SCCs back to the original state.
NOTE
After the new board is started, the system automatically backs up the data on the existing board to the new
board. After the data is backed up, you can perform the preceding step to initiate an active/standby
switching.
NOTE
Management.
----End
8.5.3 Replacing the TN16XCH Board in a Slave Subrack

This section describes how to replace TN16XCH board in a slave subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Prerequisites
l Before replacing an board, the battery jumper on the spare board must be set. The 1X3
jumper inside the board is used to enable or disable the power supply from the battery.
Ensure that pin 1 and pin 2 on the battery jumper are capped. Then, cap pin 2 and pin 3 on
the battery jumper and use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is
lower than 3 V, the battery is not working. In this case, the SCC board needs to be replaced.

Replacing the TN16XCH board in the slave subrack does not affect the services when the
communication between the master and slave subracks is normal.
Replacing the TN16XCH board in the slave subrack may interrupt the services on the slave
subrack when the communication between the master and slave subracks is abnormal.
Tools, Equipment and Materials

Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare TN16XCH board as the replacement board. Ensure that the spare TN16XCH board
and the TN16XCH board to be replaced have the same name and type.
the Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
displayed.
successful.
is successful.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Step 8 Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board. For more information regarding
how to remove a board, refer to Procedure of Replacing a Board.
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.
Step 12 Query the current alarms of the NE by using the U2000.
3. Click OK.
NOTE
NE.
NOTE
After the TN16XCH is replaced, ensure that the monitoring of the PWR-FAIL alarm is enabled. If the
PWR-FAIL alarm occurs, determine if the jumper cap is correctly placed over the battery jumper. If yes,
use a multimeter to measure the battery voltage. If the voltage is lower than 3 V, the battery is not working.
The board needs to be replaced.
CAUTION
replaced.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
8.6 Replacing the PID Board

This section describes how to replace the PID board.
Methods of replacing the PID board are described under the following scenarios:
l Replacing the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E board.
l Replacing the PQ2 Sub-board
8.6.1 Replacing the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E Board

This section describes how to replace the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E Board.
Methods of replacing the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E board are described under the following
scenarios:
l ODUk SNCP is configured.
l There is no protection for the PID board.
8.6.1.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection

This section describes how to replace a PID board when ODUk SNCP protection is configured.
Involved application scenarios are as follows: replacing a PID board and a PQ2 sub-board at the
same time; replacing only a PID board; replacing only a PQ2 sub-board.
Prerequisites
You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
Impact on System
When ODUk SNCP protection is configured, replacing a PID board generally brings no service
interruption.

ESD wrist strap, ESD bag, U2000, optical power meter
Background
In the following scenarios, when a PID board works with an OBU1P1 board on an NE, check
optical power of the PID board before you replace the PID board to avoid optical power overload
during board replacement:
l When a TN55NPO2L06 or TN55NPO2L08 board needs to be replaced on a 200 Gbit/s NE
configured with a PID board, ensure receive optical power of each channel is lower than 0
dBm.
l When an ENQ2 board needs to be replaced on a 120 Gbit/s NE configured with a PID
board, ensure receive optical power of each channel is lower than 1 dBm.
NOTE
When you replace the NPO2/NPO2E board and the ENQ2 board at the same time, it is recommended to
replace the NPO2/NPO2E board first.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Precautions
CAUTION
When you connect a fiber to the input optical port of an NPO2 or NPO2E board, loosely connect
the fiber to prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point; otherwise, the
receiver optical module is burnt and damaged.
Procedure
1. Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version, and software version of the new board are
the same as those of the original board. If the version is inconsistent, you need to determine
if the board with different versions can be replaced.
2. Review and record the current alarms on the NE.
3. Test the input optical power. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload
point; otherwise, the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. For the procedure, refer
to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter.
4. Query the working status of each channel on the board to be replaced.
a. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the Function Tree. Click the SNCP Service Control tab.
b. Click Query to obtain the SNCP protection state of each NE. Then, you can learn the
service is working on active path or working on standby path.
5. If the board is the current working board, go to 6. If the board is the current protection
board, go to 9.
6. If the board to be replaced is the current working board, follow the steps below to perform
active/standby switching on the U2000.
NOTE
The channel status of the protection board must be normal. Otherwise, replacing the faulty board
causes a service interruption.
NOTE
If an NPO2/NPO2E board needs to be replaced, switch services on the working channels of PID
boards to protection channels. If an ENQ2 board needs to be replaced, switch services on the working
channel only over the ENQ2 board to the protection channel.
a. In the Main Topology, right-click the desire NE and click NE Explorer from the
shortcut menu. The NE Explorer window is displayed.
b. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
c. Click SNCP Service Control tab.
d. Click Function on the bottom of the right-hand interface and select Manual to
Protection Channel from the menu displayed. Click OK on the interface displayed.
e. Click Query on the bottom of the right-hand interface. If the value of Current
Status is Manual(from Working to Protection) Switching State, the switching
succeeds.
f. Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. Make sure that there are no
new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only protection
switching alarm.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
7. At the opposite end perform manual switching on the U2000 to ensure that the working
channel at the opposite end and is consistent with that at the local end. For how to perform
manual switching, see 6.
8. On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced.
a. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Configuration > Card
Removal Indication in the navigation tree.
b. Select the desired board. Double-click Enable Indication and set it to Enabled.
c. Click Apply.
d. Click Query to display the operation result. Verify that the function is successfully
enabled.
NOTE
NOTE
After the removal indication function is enabled for the board to be replaced, the STAT indicator on the
board and Minor alarm indicator in the subrack slowly blink green so that the onsite maintenance engineer
can easily locate the board to be replaced.
9. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board.
a. Remove the pigtail connected to the optical port and remove the board to be replaced.
If the PQ2 sub-board also needs to be replaced, go to 9.3. If the PQ2 sub-board does
not need to be replaced, go to 9.2.
b. Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board. Install the PQ2 sub-
board on the new board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 sub-board.
c. Insert the new board to the original slot. For details on how to remove and insert a
new board, see Procedure of Replacing a Board.
d. After board replacement is complete, clean the fiber connector using a fiber cleaning
tissue and reconnect the pigtail to the optical port based on the fiber labels.
NOTE
After the board is replaced, the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board
automatically.
10. Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work
normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PID board and the PQ2 sub-
board is green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board,
or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to
"Board Indicators".
11. Release the switching on the local and opposite NEs.
b. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management in the Function Tree.
d. Select the switched service, and click Function on the right-hand interface. Select
Clear from the menu displayed.
e. Click Query, and review Status. If the value is Normal State, the switching succeeds.
12. Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Make sure that the
BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
a. Choose Performance > Browse NA WDM Performance from the Main Menu of
the U2000, and then click the Current Performance Data tab.
b. Choose the desired boards in the left pane, and click the double-right-arrow button
(red).
c. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter
Condition.
d. In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute.
e. Click Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and select
Display Zero Data for the Display Options.
f. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side.
g. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.
h. In the Monitored Object, FEC-BEF-COR-ER represents the BER before FEC.
13. Query alarms and performances of the local NE and of the opposite NE and confirm that
the original alarms or performances are cleared.
NOTE
The ENQ2 board does not support the PQ2 sub-board. To replace an ENQ2 board, perform steps 1, 2, 4–
10, and 12.
For OptiX OSN 8800, when the Restart Mode of PID IPA is set to Manual, a manual restarting at two
stations is required after the board is replaced.
8.6.1.2 Under No Protection

This section describes how to replace a PID board when no protection is configured. Involved
application scenarios are as follows: replacing a PID board and a PQ2 sub-board at the same
time; replacing only a PID board; replacing only a PQ2 sub-board.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
Replacing a PID board without protection will interrupt services. Replacing only a PQ2 sub-
board will interrupt channels 5 to 8 on the NPO2 or NPO2E board.

Background
dBm.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
1. Select a spare board. Ensure the name, version, and software version of the new board are
the same as those of the original board. If the version is inconsistent, you need to determine
if the board with different versions can be replaced.
3. Test the input optical power. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload
point; otherwise, the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged. For the procedure, refer
to the Testing Optical Power by Using an Optical Power Meter.
4. On the NMS, enable the removal indication function for the board to be replaced.
a. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Configuration > Card
Removal Indication in the navigation tree.
b. Select the desired board. Double-click Enable Indication and set it to Enabled.
c. Click Apply.
d. Click Query to display the operation result. Verify that the function is successfully
enabled.
NOTE
NOTE
After the removal indication function is enabled for the board to be replaced, the STAT indicator on the
board and Minor alarm indicator in the subrack slowly blink green so that the onsite maintenance engineer
can easily locate the board to be replaced.
5. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the board.
a. Remove the pigtail connected to the optical port and remove the board to be replaced.
If the PQ2 sub-board also needs to be replaced, go to 5.3. If the PQ2 sub-board does
not need to be replaced, go to 5.2.
b. Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board. Install the PQ2 sub-
board on the new board and tighten the screws on the PQ2 sub-board.
c. Insert the new board to the original slot. For details on how to remove and insert a
new board, see Procedure of Replacing a Board.
d. After board replacement is complete, clean the fiber connector using a fiber cleaning
tissue and reconnect the pigtail to the optical port based on the fiber labels.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
After the board is replaced, the NE software delivers the configuration of the original board
automatically.
6. Review the indicators of the new board. It takes ten minutes for a new board to work
normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PID board and the PQ2 sub-
board is green. If the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board,
or replace the board again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to
"Board Indicators".
7. Query the 15-minute BER before FEC at the receive end of the link. Make sure that the
BER before FEC does not deteriorate greatly from the value before board replacement.
a. Choose Performance > Browse NA WDM Performance from the Main Menu of
the U2000, and then click the Current Performance Data tab.
b. Choose the desired boards in the left pane, and click the double-right-arrow button
(red).
c. Choose the option from the drop-down list next to Monitored Object Filter
Condition.
d. In Monitor Period, select 15-Minute.
e. Click Count option button. Select options under Performance Event Type, and select
Display Zero Data for the Display Options.
f. Click Query to query the performance value for bit error on the NE side.
g. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close to finish the operation.
h. In the Monitored Object, FEC-BEF-COR-ER represents the BER before FEC.
NOTE
8.6.2 Replacing the PQ2 Sub-board

This section describes how to replace the ENQ2/NPO2/NPO2E Board.
Methods of replacing the PQ2 sub-board are described under the following scenarios:
l ODUk SNCP is configured.

l There is no protection for the PID board.
8.6.2.1 Under ODUk SNCP Protection

This section describes how to replace a PID board when ODUk SNCP protection is configured.
Involved application scenarios are as follows: replacing a PID board and a PQ2 sub-board at the
same time; replacing only a PID board; replacing only a PQ2 sub-board.
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Impact on System
When ODUk SNCP protection is configured, replacing a PID board generally brings no service
interruption.

Background
dBm.
NOTE
Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
2. Query the working status of the NPO2/NPO2E board where the PQ2 sub-board resides.
a. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the Function Tree. Click the SNCP Service Control tab.
b. Click Query to obtain the SNCP protection state of each NE. Then, you can learn the
service is working on active path or working on standby path.
3. If the board is the working NPO2 or NPO2E board, go to 4. If the board is the protection
NPO2 or NPO2E board, go to 6.
4. If the NPO2/NPO2E board where the PQ2 sub-board to be replaced resides is the working
board, perform manual switching on the NPO2/NPO2E board in U2000.
NOTE
In this step, you need to switch services on all working channels of PID boards to protection channels.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
The channel status of the protection board must be normal. Otherwise, replacing the faulty board
causes a service interruption.
b. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
d. Click Function on the bottom of the right-hand interface and select Manual to
Protection Channel from the menu displayed. Click OK on the interface displayed.
e. Click Query on the bottom of the right-hand interface. If the value of Current
Status is Manual(from Working to Protection) Switching State, the switching
succeeds.
f. Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. Make sure that there are no
new alarms or performance events and services are normal but only protection
switching alarm.
5. At the opposite end perform manual switching on the U2000 to ensure that the working
channel at the opposite end and is consistent with that at the local end. For how to perform
manual switching, see 4.
6. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the PQ2 sub-board.
a. Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board.
b. Install the new PQ2 sub-board on the original board and tighten the screws on the PQ2
sub-board.
7. Review the indicators of the new board. It takes three minutes for a new board to work
normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PQ2 sub-board is green. If
the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board, or replace the board
again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".
8. Release the switching on the local and opposite NEs.
b. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management in the Function Tree.
d. Select the switched service, and click Function on the right-hand interface. Select
Clear from the menu displayed.
e. Click Query, and review Status. If the value is Normal State, the switching succeeds.
NOTE
8.6.2.2 Under No Protection

This section describes how to replace a PID board when no protection is configured. Involved
application scenarios are as follows: replacing a PID board and a PQ2 sub-board at the same
time; replacing only a PID board; replacing only a PQ2 sub-board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Prerequisites
Impact on System
Replacing a PID board without protection will interrupt services. Replacing only a PQ2 sub-
board will interrupt channels 5 to 8 on the NPO2 or NPO2E board.

Background
dBm.
NOTE
Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
2. Inform the onsite maintenance engineer and replace the PQ2 sub-board.
a. Loosen the screws on the PQ2 sub-board and remove the board.
b. Install the new PQ2 sub-board on the original board and tighten the screws on the PQ2
sub-board.
3. Review the indicators of the new board. It takes three minutes for a new board to work
normally after insertion. Ensure that the STAT indicator of the PQ2 sub-board is green. If
the indicator gives abnormal indication, you need to reinsert the board, or replace the board
again. For more information regarding indicator definitions, refer to "Board Indicators".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
8.7 Replacing the Raman Amplifier Board

This section describes how to replace the Raman amplifier board.
Prerequisites
Be aware of the laser security level, potential injuries and protective precautions.
Confirm the amount of the adopted Raman amplifier board. Be familiar with the fiber connection
between the local Raman amplifier board and the remote board. Be familiar with the location of
the connector. Take the drawings into the room.

Replacement of boards that process services causes interruption of services.

ESD bag, U2000
Precautions
WARNING
When replacing the Raman amplifier board or before removing or inserting the Raman amplifier
board shut down the pump laser on the Raman amplifier board. Otherwise, the laser may bring
damage to human body.
Procedure
NOTE
Relationship".
Step 3 Disabling the IPA.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
1. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Click Query to query the created IPA information.
3. Select the IPA that you want to enable or disable, double-click the field of Enable/
Disable, and set the value to Enabled or Disabled.
4. Click Apply.
5. In the NE Explorer of the opposite NE, repeat the steps above.
Step 4 Shutting down the Raman laser.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click By Card/Channel. Select Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Select the board port. Click State and choose OOS to set the Primary, Secondary State.
4. In the Basic Attributes tab, double-click the desired optical port. In the Laser Status field,
choose On or Off to change the laser state.
5. Click Apply.
6. Select the board port or channel. Click State and choose IS to set the Primary, Secondary
State.
7. Click Query.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
Step 7 Replacing the Raman amplifier board.

1. Disconnect the fibers at the LINE port and the SYS port.
2. Remove the Raman amplifier board and put it into the ESD bag.
3. Insert the new Raman amplifier board.
4. Connect the fibers at the LINE port and the SYS port.
Step 9 View the indicators on the front panel of the new board. It takes approximately three or four
minutes for a new board to work normally after insertion. Ensure that the RUN indicator is green.
If the indicator is not green, reinsert the board or select a new replacement board. For details

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Disabled.
3. Click Apply.
Step 11 Enable the IPA function and turn on the Raman laser. Check whether the on-off gain of the
Raman amplifier board complies with the specification requirement for the on-off gain of the
board. If not, adjust the on-off gain of the board.
NOTE
On-off gain = Optical power on the SYS interface when the laser is enabled - Optical power on the SYS
interface when the Raman laser is disabled
Step 12 After the laser status is set, the corresponding port state must be set to IS. Click State, and choose
IS.
Step 14 Check and ensure that the traffic is correct. If there are any anomaly, contact Huawei.
----End
8.8 Replacing the AUX Board

This section describes how to replace an AUX board.
8.8.1 Substitution Relationship

This section describes the substitution relationships of the AXU board.
AUX
Board Board
TN16AUX None -
TN22AUX None -
TN41AUX None -
TN51AUX - -
TN61AUX TN22AUX Upgrade NE software to OptiX OSN 3800A V100R001C02 or

a later version.
8.8.2 Under AUX 1+1 Protection

This section describes how to replace the AUX board when AUX 1+1 protection is configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Prerequisites
Impact on System
The replacement does not affect services.

ESD bag, U2000
Procedure
NOTE
Relationship".
Step 3 Follow the steps below to query the working state of the board to be replaced.
2. In Board 1+1 Protection, click Query.
3. If the board to be replaced is the current working board, go to Step 4. Otherwise, go to
Step 5.
3. In Board 1+1 Protection, right-click the desired AUX Board 1+1 Protection. Select
displayed.
4. Click Query. If the Working Board is not the board to be replaced, the switching succeeds.
5. Query the U2000 for the alarms and performance events. Make sure that there are no new
alarms or performances. Check if services are normal.
NOTE
At the opposite end, perform manual switching on the U2000 at the same time.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
----End
8.8.3 Under No Protection

This section describes how to replace the AUX board when no protection is configured for the
AUX board.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
The replacement does not affect services. During the replacement, the communication with the
U2000 stops.

ESD bag, U2000
Procedure
NOTE
Relationship".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
NOTE
Replacing a Board.
----End
8.9 Replacing the DCM

This section describes how to replace the DCM.
Prerequisites
None

Replacement of DCMs causes interruption of services.

Phillips screwdriver and screw
Procedure
Step 1 Loosen the screws from below on the DCM frame for fixing the DCM with the phillips
screwdriver. Remove the DCM from the DCM frame.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Each DCM frame can hold up to two DCMs.

Each DCM requires four screws.
Step 2 Put a new DCM on the DCM frame. Tighten the screws to fix the DCM, as shown in Figure
8-17.
Figure 8-17 Replacing the DCM on the DCM frame
3
4
1. DCM 2. DCM frame 3. Mounting ear 4. Screw
----End
8.10 Replacing the Pluggable Optical Module

This section describes how to replace the pluggable optical module (eSFP/XFP).
Prerequisites
Impact on System
When you replace an eSFP or XFP, query whether the port of the optical module to be replaced
is configured with protection. If it is not, replacement of the optical module causes interruption
of services.
If the port of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection, module replacement
does not affect services when the protection switching functions properly.

ESD bag, U2000, optical power meter

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Precautions
CAUTION
Before you connect a fiber to a pluggable optical module, test the input optical power of the
module and confirm that the tested input optical power is within the normal range. Otherwise,
the input optical power might cross the overload point and the receiver optical module is burnt
and damaged.
The overload optical power point of an APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm, which must be taken
with special caution to prevent the optical module from being burnt or damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Select a spare pluggable optical module. The part number of the new pluggable optical module
must be the same as the part number of the original pluggable optical module.
NOTE
Query the optical module information. For details, see "Querying Optical Module Information".
NOTE
For boards supporting TXFP modules, you can use a TXFP module when replacing the XFP module on
these boards.

Step 3 Query whether the ports of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection.
l If the port of the optical module to be replaced is not configured with protection, go to Step
4.
l If the port of the optical module to be replaced is configured with protection:
– when you replace the optical module of the protection channel, go to Step 4.
– when you replace the optical module of the working channel, perform a protection
switching.
Step 4 Remove the fiber on the port of the optical module.
WARNING
Cover a fiber with a protection cap immediately after you remove it.
Step 5 Test the input optical power. Prevent the input optical power from crossing the overload point;
otherwise, the receiver optical module is burnt and damaged.
Step 6 Replace the fault optical module. For details, see Figure 8-18.
NOTE
l Before removing an optical module, ensure that the fiber jumpers connecting to the portss of the optical
module are removed.
l Before inserting an optical module, ensure that there are no fiber jumpers on the portss of the optical
module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 8-18 Inserting and removing the eSFP/SFP/XFP/TXFP
port
1
eSFP/SFP+
latch XFP/TXFP
Removing eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP
Inserting eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP
1.Pull out fibre connectors first before removing eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP
1.Insert the eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP into the port.
.
2.Pull the safty latch to pull out eSFP/SFP+/XFP/TXFP from the port.
3.Cover the optical port with cover.
Step 7 Check the wavelength of the new optical module on the U2000. Make sure the wavelength is
the same as that of the original optical module.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM
2. Select By Card/Channel, and then select Basic Attributes tab.
3. Click Query to view Configure Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of
each optical port.
NOTE
If the replaced optical module is a tunable optical module, after the optical module is replaced, the SCC
delivers the wavelength configuration of the original optical module automatically.
Step 8 Insert the fiber removed in Step 4.
----End
8.11 Replacing the EFI Board

This section describes how to replace the EFI board in the OptiX OSN 6800A/8800.
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Impact on System
Replacement of the EFI interrupts alarm signal input and output, communication among
subracks, and communication between NE and U2000. In addition, services may be interrupted.

ESD bag, U2000
NOTE
Do not reset (cold), replace, or upgrade SCC boards when you replace the 51EFI1 boards.
Procedure
NOTE
Relationship".

Step 4 Follow the steps below to replace the EFI on site.
1. Record the mapping relationships of the board interfaces and the cables and wires.
2. Remove the cables and wires on the connectors.
3. TN51EFI board: Loosen the screw at the top right corner of the board. TN16EFI board:
Loosen two screws at the top corner of the board.
4. Gently pull out the board and put it into the ESD bag.
5. Before inserting a new EFI board to the original slot, ensure that DIP switch on the new
EFI board is the same as that of the EFI board to be replaced.
6. Insert the new board gently.
7. TN51EFI board: Tighten the captive screw at the top right corner of the board. TN16EFI
board: Tighten two captive screws at the top corner of the board.
8. Connect the cables and wires on the connectors as recorded.
Step 6 Verify that there are no faults on the board. Query the U2000 for alarms on the NE and ensure
that the alarm detected in Step 2 is cleared.
----End
8.12 Replacing the PIU Board

This section describes how to replace the PIU board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Prerequisite
Impact on System
When 1+1 backup is provided, replacing the standby PIU brings no impact on services.

ESD bag, U2000, Phillips screwdriver, power meter
Precautions
WARNING
Before replacing a PIU board, you must switch off the input power supply on the PIU board.
Procedure (OptiX OSN 3800A)

NOTE
Relationship".

Step 4 Shut down the switch of the input power supply of the PIU board to be replaced.
NOTE
You can use a power meter to verify there is no power on the line.
Step 5 Remove the power cables on the PIU board to be replaced.

a board, see Procedure of Replacing a Board. If the OptiX OSN 3800A is installed in the 23"
open rack, remove the PIU board as shown in Figure 8-19 and insert the new PIU board as
shown in Figure 8-20.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 8-19 Remove the PIU board in the 23" open rack
Figure 8-20 Insert the PIU board in the 23" open rack
Step 7 After the replacement, put the power cables back to the new PIU board. Switch on the
corresponding power switch.
----End
Procedure (OptiX OSN 8800/6800A)


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Relationship".
Step 4 Shut down the switch of the input power supply of the PIU board to be replaced.
Step 5 Remove the plastic cover on the power input terminal block on the PIU board by using the cross
screwdrivers.
Step 6 Unfasten the nuts on the power input terminals by using the cross screwdrivers and remove the
power cables.
Step 7 Follow the steps below to replace the PIU:

1. Loosen the screw at the top right corner of the unit.
2. Remove the unit gently, and put it into the ESD bag.
3. Insert the new PIU gently.
4. Tighten the screw at the top right corner of the unit.
Step 8 After the replacement, put the power cables back to the new PIU board. Switch on the
corresponding power switch.
----End
8.13 Replacing the Fan Tray Assembly

A skilled engineer can replace the fan tray assembly in one minute.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
When there is a fault in the fan tray assembly, replace it immediately to avoid any damage to
the equipment due to power heat dissipation.
Replacing the fan tray assembly does not interrupt the service.

ESD bag, U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
NOTE
Relationship".

Step 4 Follow the steps below to replace the fan try assembly on site.
1. Remove the faulty fan tray assembly.
2. Insert a spare fan tray assembly immediately.
3. put the fan tray assembly replaced into an ESD bag.
NOTE
When the subrack is powered on for the first time, the fans rotate at a low or medium speed for the first
20 minutes. After the 20 minutes, the fans rotate at the specified speed.
----End
8.14 Replacing the Air Filter

Replace the air filter periodically to ensure efficient heat dissipation from the equipment. Replace
the air filter with the fans shut down to prevent contamination.
Prerequisite
None
Impact on System
None

None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Precaution
CAUTION
When drawing out the air filter during its replacement, do not draw out the fans.
Pull out the air filter gently to prevent dust disturbance.
NOTE
It is recommended to replace the air filter every six months.
Procedure (OptiX OSN 8800/6800A)

Step 1 Hold the grooves on the two sides of the air filter panel with two fingers and draw out the air
filter. Figure 8-21 and Figure 8-22 shows the position of the air filter.
Figure 8-21 Drawing out the air filter (OptiX OSN 8800)
Figure 8-22 Drawing out the air filter (OptiX OSN 6800A)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 2 Gently slide the new air filter into the original position along the guide rails below the fan tray
assembly.
Step 3 Dispose of the replaced filter (whole assembly), according to local disposal regulations.
----End
Procedure (OptiX OSN 3800A)

Step 1 Draw out the air filter by the handle. Figure 8-23 shows the position of the air filter.
Figure 8-23 Drawing out the air filter(OptiX OSN 3800A)
Step 2 Gently slide the new air filter into the original position along the guide rails on the left part of
Step 3 Dispose of the replaced filter (whole assembly), according to local disposal regulations
----End
8.15 Replacing the Subrack

If the backplane of a subrack has bent pins or other defects, the subrack must be replaced. This
section describes how to replace the subrack.
Prerequisites

l Impact on services:
– When a subrack is replaced, all services carried by the subrack are interrupted.
l Impact on communication:
– When a subrack on a gateway NE (GNE) is replaced, the GNE will be unreachable and
any non-GNEs connected to the GNE may be unreachable. Before replacing a subrack

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
on a GNE, removing the gateway from this NE and switching it to a different NE is

recommended. For details on how to switch GNEs, see the U2000 Operator Guide for
NG WDM NE Management.
– If you replace the master subrack on a non-GNE, the master subrack and all slave
subracks will be unreachable. If you replace a slave subrack on a non-GNE, the slave
subrack will be unreachable, and other slave subracks that communicate with the master
subrack through the slave subrack will be unavailable.
l Other impact:
– All features, such as automatic level control (ALC) and automatic power equilibrium
(APE), that involve multiple NEs will be affected.

ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, dustproof cap, fiber cleaning tissue, Phillips screwdriver, ESD
bag, U2000
Precautions
l To ensure a safe subrack installation process, two engineers must work together. One holds
the subrack while the other tightens screws that attach it to the rack.
NOTE
For the installation of OptiX OSN 8800 T32 or T64 subracks, three or four engineers must work together
because the subracks are heavy.
l Before replacing a subrack, prepare backup boards for any boards that are unprotected. If
boards are damaged during subrack replacement, the backup boards can be used to restore
services quickly.
l Before replacing a subrack, ensure that labels with complete and accurate information are
attached to all cables and fibers connected to the subrack.
l During the subrack replacement process, do not power off or perform warm or cold reset
on master or slave subracks related to the subrack being replaced.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Subrack Appearance
Figure 8-24 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack structure diagram
6 1
5 2


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
1
5
3
4


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
1
6
5
2
3
4

Figure 8-27 OptiX OSN 6800A subrack structure diagram
1. Indicator 2. Board area 3. Air filter

4. Fiber cabling area 5. Fan tray 6. Fiber spool
7. Mounting ear

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 8-28 Appearance of an OptiX OSN 3800A chassis

6
2
7
1. Fiber frame 2. Mounting ear 3. Board area 4. Fan indicator

5. Air filter 6. Airduct frame 7. Rotary fiber routing rack
Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
Step 2 Have a new subrack available to replace the target subrack. This new subrack must have the
same name and be the same model as the target subrack.
NOTE
Before replacing the target suback with a new subrack, ensure that there are no bent pins on the backplane
connector of the new subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 8-29 Bent pins on the backplane connector
Step 3 Query and record information on current alarms for the target subrack.
Step 4 Back up the NE database to the NMS server.

NOTE
NOTE
backup is created.
Step 5 Use the switch on the power distribution unit (PDU) at the top of the rack to power off the target
subrack.
Step 6 Remove all cables and fibers connected to the target subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Keep fiber connectors clear by capping them immediately after fibers are disconnected from the subrack.
Also keep disconnected cables clean for later use.
Step 7 Loosen the screws for securing the target subrack using a Phillips screwdriver and remove the
subrack. Place the subrack on an ESD pad.
Step 8 Install the new subrack into the rack and secure it with screws.
Step 9 Take the boards from the subrack that has been removed and install them on the new subrack.
NOTE
Before installing a board on the new subrack, check that the connectors on the board are in good condition.
Figure 8-30 Position of connectors on a board
Figure 8-31 Example of a damaged connector
Step 10 Use the labels to reconnect the cables and fibers to the new subrack. Restore the original network
cable connections between subracks.
NOTE
Clean the fiber connectors with fiber cleaning tissues before reconnecting fibers.
Step 11 Use the switch on the PDU at the top of the rack to power on the new subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 12 Wait 20 minutes. Check that there are no new alarms reporting abnormalities in the new subrack.
Step 13 Operate the subrack for 24 consecutive hours. If no alarm reporting abnormalities are generated
during that period, the replacement process is a success and the new subrack is working properly.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 9 Network Reconstruction
9 Network Reconstruction
About This Chapter
9.1 Expanding NEs by Adding Shelves

9.2 Deleting Wavelengths

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
9.1 Expanding NEs by Adding Shelves

If the software version for new shelves is known, perform shelf expansion by referring to 9.1.1
Expanding NEs of Version V100R005 or Later When the New Shelf Software Version Is
V100R005 or Later. Otherwise, perform shelf expansion by referring to 9.1.2 Expanding NEs
of Version V100R005 or Later When the New Shelf Software Version Is Unknown.
CAUTION
A new shelf must be powered off before being connected or cabled to an existing NE. Otherwise,
a shelf ID conflict or service interruption may occur. Once the new shelf is connected to the NE,
power on the new shelf.
9.1.1 Expanding NEs of Version V100R005 or Later When the New

Shelf Software Version Is V100R005 or Later
9.1.1.1 Expansion Flow
Figure 9-1 shows the flow for expanding NEs of version V100R005 or later when the new shelf
software version is V100R005 or later. If the following alarms are generated on the NEs to be
expanded, clear the alarms before the expansion:
l SHELF-ID-CONFLICT
l SHELF-ID-MISMATCH
l SHELF-WRONG-CONNECT
l NEW-SHELF-ID-CONFLICT
l SHELF-LOOP
l INTERSHELF-URGCHAN-FAIL
For information on how to clear the alarms, see Alarm Clearing.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 9-1 Flow for expanding NEs of version V100R005 or later when the new shelf software
version is V100R005 or later
Connect the master and slave

shelves with network cables.
Power on the new shelf.
Check the new shelf ID.
Upload NE data
to the U2000.
Remove the unneeded slave

shelf on the U2000.
Mandatory
Verification
Optional
NOTE
In the figure above, the procedures in the dotted-line frame must be performed on the U2000, and the other
procedures must be performed at the site.
9.1.1.2 Connecting the Master and Slave Shelves with Network Cables
Connect the master and slave shelves according to the network plan. Ensure that the network
cables are in good condition and are connected correctly.
For detailed operations, see Quick Installation Guide.
9.1.1.3 Powering On the Slave Shelf

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
Step 1 Connect power cables to the slave shelf.
Step 2 Turn on the power switch for the slave shelf.
----End
9.1.1.4 Checking the New Shelf ID

After the expansion, check the value displayed in the shelf ID LED. If the ID displayed in the
LED is the same as the shelf ID planned for the network expansion, skip this section. If it is not,
handle the issue based on the fault symptom.
For the mapping between the values displayed in the shelf ID LED and the actual shelf IDs, see
Front Panel.
1. Disconnect the cascading network cable from the new shelf.
2. Take an action based on the fault symptom. The following table lists actions for possible
fault symptoms.
Symptom Possible Cause Action
The new shelf ID is within The new shelf is incorrectly Reconnect the new shelf
the range of 2 to 31. connected. according to the topology
structure defined in the
network plan.
The new shelf ID is 1. The cascading network 1. Power off the new shelf.
cable is faulty. As a result, 2. Replace the cascading
the new shelf fails to network cable to the
communicate with its new shelf.
upstream shelf.
3. Power on the new shelf.
The LED blinks as follows: The shelf ID negotiation Reconnect the network
On with EE displayed -> off fails. cable.
->. On with EE displayed -
> off ->. On with the shelf
ID displayed -> off.
3. Run the following TL1 command to the master shelf using the U2000, to start the shelf ID
negotiation for the NE:
INIT-SYS:::<CTAG>:::SHELFID=AUTO;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Normally, before performing expansion, you should ensure that there is no INTERSHELF-
URGCHAN-FAIL, SHELF-ID-CONFLICT, SHELF-ID-MISMATCH, SHELF-WRONG-
CONNECT, NEW-SHELF-ID-CONFLICT, or SHELF-LOOP alarm. If you have not done this
before the expansion, you must ensure that there are no such alarms for the NE before you run the
TL1 command. If you find any of the above-mentioned alarms before running the TL1 command,
do as follows:
1. Physically disconnect the new shelf from its upstream shelf.
2. Wait 10 minutes then view the alarms on the NE using the U2000.
3. If the alarm clears, the alarm was caused by the new shelf, and you do not need to take any action.
Shelf ID negotiation requires about 4 minutes. Observe the shelf ID LED 4 minutes later.
9.1.1.5 Uploading NE Data to the U2000

After the NE data is uploaded to the U2000, the new slave shelf is displayed on the U2000. The
following describes the procedure for uploading NE data to the U2000.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the main menu of the
U2000.
Step 2 Select the NE to be expanded and click .
Step 3 Select the NE in NE Configuration and click Upload.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 4 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK to start the upload. The Upload dialog box is displayed
indicating the NE data upload progress.
Step 5 In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
----End
9.1.1.6 Removing an Unneeded Logical Slave Shelf on the U2000

Check for a logical slave shelf that is not included in the network plan. If there is such a logical
slave shelf, delete it from the U2000.
Prerequisites

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the optical NE in the Main Topology. The NE Panel is displayed. Select the NE
in the left-hand pane.
Step 2 Select the unneeded slave shelf, right-click and choose Delete the Shelf.
Step 3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
9.1.1.7 Validation
If the status of the indicators complies with the following descriptions, the expansion succeeds.
Otherwise, the expansion fails, and you are advised to contact Huawei engineers to handle the
issue.
l The shelf ID displayed on the LED on the front panel of the SCC board is the same as the
shelf ID specified in the network plan.
l The PROG indicator of all boards in the shelf is steady on (either green or red).
l The STAT indicator of all boards in the shelf is steady on (green, yellow, or red).
9.1.2 Expanding NEs of Version V100R005 or Later When the New

Shelf Software Version Is Unknown
9.1.2.1 Expansion Flow
Figure 9-2 shows the flow for expanding NEs of version V100R005 or later when the new shelf
software version is unknown.
If the following alarms are generated on the NEs to be expanded, clear the alarms before the
expansion:
l SHELF-ID-CONFLICT
l SHELF-ID-MISMATCH
l SHELF-WRONG-CONNECT
l NEW-SHELF-ID-CONFLICT
l SHELF-LOOP
l INTERSHELF-URGCHAN-FAIL
For information on how to clear the alarms, see Alarm Clearing.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 9-2 Flow for expanding NEs of version V100R005 or later when the new shelf software
version is unknown
Start
Y N
Does the new shelf uses
the TN51SCC board?
Does the master subrack of Y

the NE uses the TN52SCC
board?
Is the planned ID of the Upgrade the TN51SCC

N
new shelf within the range software for the new shelf to
of 2 to 8? V100R005C00 or later version.
Y
Power on the new shelf and Power on the new shelf.

delete the SCC software and
database of the new shelf.
Check the ID of the new shelf.
Upload NE data to the

U2000.
Remove the unneeded slave

shelf on the U2000.
Verification
Mandatory
End Optional
NOTE
In the figure above, the procedures in the dotted-line frame must be performed on the U2000, and the other
procedures must be performed at the site.
9.1.2.2 Upgrading the TN51SCC Software of the New Shelf to V100R005C00 or Later
This section describes how to upgrade the TN51SCC software of the new shelf to V100R005C00
or later.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
To facilitate the shelf expansion and reduces the expansion time, you are advised to upgrade
spare SCC boards to V100R005C00 or later in either of the following ways before the expansion
is performed:
l Insert a spare SCC board into the idle SCC slot on an NE of V100R005C00 or later in a
laboratory and upgrade the SCC board. If there are multiple NEs that have idle SCC slots
in the laboratory, upgrade the required SCC boards in one batch to improve upgrade
efficiency.
NOTE
During the upgrade, the active and standby SCC boards must be the same hardware version. For example,
if the replacement SCC board is TN51SCC, it must be inserted in the slot that originally holds the active
TN51SCC board.
l Upgrade SCC boards in a laboratory by loading the required software package to the boards.
For details, see Upgrade Guide.
l Send the SCC boards for the new shelves back to Huawei, and request Huawei to upgrade
these SCC boards.
If you have not upgraded the SCC software to V100R005C00 or later before the expansion, there
are two situations:
l If NEs of V100R005C00 or later have an idle SCC slot at the site, you can upgrade spare
SCC boards one by one. This method has low efficiency.
NOTE
During the upgrade, the active and standby SCC boards must be the same hardware version. For example,
if the replacement SCC board is TN51SCC, it must be inserted in the slot that originally holds the active
TN51SCC board.
l If no NEs at the site have an idle SCC slot, expansion cannot be performed. You must
upgrade the spare SCC boards before the expansion is performed.
Use a proper method to upgrade the new shelf software to V100R005SPC900 or later based on
the actual situation. The following methods are available:
l Method 1: Insert the SCC board of a new shelf into a slave shelf on an active NE of version
V100R005SPC900 or later to automatically upgrade the SCC board software. The detailed
operations are as follows:
1. Set the jumper of the SCC board to 1111 to clear the current SCC board software and
database. For information on how to set the jumper, see 9.1.2.4 Powering On the
New Shelf and Clearing the SCC Software and Database.
2. Insert the SCC board into an idle SCC-specific slot of any slave shelf on an active NE
of version V100R005SPC900 or later.
NOTE
After the four jumpers are set and the SCC board is inserted to the slot, wait about 15 minutes
to allow the software and database to be cleared. Do not remove or insert a board during this
process.
3. Remove the SCC board.
4. Restore the original jumper setting for the SCC board and insert the board back to the
slave shelf on the NE of version V100R005 SPC900 or later.
5. Review the indicators of the SCC board. It takes about 15 minutes for the SCC board
to work normally after it is inserted. If the STAT indicator on the board is steady green,
then the NE software of V100R005SPC900 or later is successfully loaded to the SCC
board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Method 2: Upgrade the spare SCC boards in a laboratory. For details, see Method 1 or
Upgrade Guide. If any technical issue raises during the upgrade, contact Huawei engineers
for assistance.
l Method 3: Send the spare SCC boards back to Huawei, and request Huawei to upgrade
these SCC boards.
9.1.2.3 Connecting the Master and Slave Shelves with Network Cables
For the detailed procedure, see 9.1.1.2 Connecting the Master and Slave Shelves with
Network Cables.
9.1.2.4 Powering On the New Shelf and Clearing the SCC Software and Database
Procedure
Step 1 Set the four jumpers on the board to enable the SCC board to work in BIOS state. The software
and database of the SCC board are cleared.
2. Set the four jumpers to 1111 to clear the database in the flash memory. Figure 9-3 shows
the settings of the four jumpers on each type of SCC board.
Figure 9-3 Position of the BIOS running mode jumper on the TN51SCC
BIOS running mode
04
03 1010
04 02
03 01
02
01 U45 J42
J42
04
J12 U42 03 1001
J1 02
Battery
01
jumper
CPU J42
321
04
03 1011
CF card 02
01
J42
04
03 1111
02
01
J42
BIOS running
mode

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
3. Insert the SCC board back.
Step 2 Power on the slave shelf. For the detailed procedure, see section 9.1.1.3 Powering On the Slave
Shelf.
NOTE
After the four jumpers are set and the SCC board is inserted to the slot, wait about 15 minutes to allow the
software and database to be cleared. Do not remove or insert a board during this process.
Step 3 After the software and database of the SCC board are cleared, remove the SCC board and restore
the previous jumper setting. Then reinsert this SCC board to the slot.
NOTE
If the shelf ID indicator is lit, the software matching and shelf ID negotiation have been completed.
----End
9.1.2.5 Powering On the Slave Shelf

For the detailed procedure, see 9.1.1.3 Powering On the Slave Shelf.
9.1.2.6 Checking the New Shelf ID

After the expansion, check the value displayed in the shelf ID LED. If the ID displayed in the
LED is the same as the shelf ID planned for the network expansion, skip this section. If it is not,
handle the issue based on the fault symptom.
For the mapping between the values displayed in the shelf ID LED and the actual shelf IDs, see
Front Panel.
New Shelf Uses the TN51SCC Board with Its Shelf ID<=8 and the Master Shelf of
the NE to be Expanded Uses the TN52SCC
2. Power off the new shelf.
fault symptoms.
network plan.
The new shelf ID is 1. The cascading network Replace the cascading

cable is faulty. As a result, network cable to the new
the new shelf fails to shelf.
communicate with its
upstream shelf.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The PROG indicator on the The cascading network Replace the cascading
SCC board in the new shelf cable is faulty. As a result, network cable to the new
is steady red. the new shelf fails to shelf.
communicate with its
upstream shelf. The SCC
board stays in the BIOS
state after it restarts, failing
to read the new shelf
software.
4. Clear the SCC board software and database by properly configuring the jumpers on the
SCC board. For details, see 9.1.2.4 Powering On the New Shelf and Clearing the SCC
Software and Database.
Other Scenarios
fault symptoms.
network plan.
The new shelf ID is 1. The cascading network 1. Power off the new shelf.
cable is faulty. As a result, 2. Replace the cascading
the new shelf fails to network cable to the
communicate with its new shelf.
upstream shelf.
3. Power on the new shelf.
3. Run the following TL1 command to the master shelf using the U2000, to start the shelf ID
negotiation for the NE:
INIT-SYS:::<CTAG>:::SHELFID=AUTO;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Normally, before performing expansion, you should ensure that there is no INTERSHELF-
URGCHAN-FAIL, SHELF-ID-CONFLICT, SHELF-ID-MISMATCH, SHELF-WRONG-
CONNECT, NEW-SHELF-ID-CONFLICT, or SHELF-LOOP alarm. If you have not done this
before the expansion, you must ensure that there are no such alarms for the NE before you run the
TL1 command. If you find any of the above-mentioned alarms before running the TL1 command,
do as follows:
1. Physically disconnect the new shelf from its upstream shelf.
2. Wait 10 minutes then view the alarms on the NE using the U2000.
3. If the alarm clears, the alarm was caused by the new shelf, and you do not need to take any action.
Shelf ID negotiation requires about 4 minutes. Observe the shelf ID LED 4 minutes later.
9.1.2.7 Uploading NE Data to the U2000

For the detailed procedure, see 9.1.1.5 Uploading NE Data to the U2000.
9.1.2.8 Removing an Unneeded Logical Slave Shelf on the U2000

For the detailed procedure, see 9.1.1.6 Removing an Unneeded Logical Slave Shelf on the
U2000.
9.1.2.9 Validation
For the detailed procedure, see 9.1.1.7 Validation.
9.2 Deleting Wavelengths
WARNING
Wavelengths to be deleted at a time cannot exceed 1/4 of the existing wavelengths. For example,
if the number of existing wavelengths is less than four, only one wavelength can be deleted at
a time.
9.2.1 Operation Flow

Figure 9-4 shows the flow for deleting existing wavelengths.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Figure 9-4 Flow for deleting wavelengths
Searching for Associated

Trails
Checking the Optical Power on

Associated Trails
Deleting Logical Trails
9.2.2 Searching for Associated Trails
Prerequisites
Associated trails are the OCh trails that are in the same OMS section as the OCh trail that carries
the wavelength to be deleted.
Before deleting the wavelength, ensure that there are no IN-PWR-LOW, IN-PWR-HIGH, or
BEFFEC-EXC alarms for the associated trial. If there are, clear them.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Trail Management from
the main menu of the U2000.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Filter Criteria window, specify the source and sink NEs under Optical NE,
and set NE, Board, and Port for the wavelength to be deleted. Then click Filter All.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 3 Select the trail in the upper pane and click the Associated Trail tab in the lower pane.
Step 4 Select all associated trails by pressing Ctrl+A and copy them by pressing Ctrl+C.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 5 Paste all the associated trail data into an Excel file by pressing Ctrl+V. Save the file.
----End
9.2.3 Checking the Optical Power on Associated Trails
9.2.3.1 Disabling the OTU Line-Side Lasers at Both Ends of the Wavelength to Be
Deleted
Prerequisites

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu of the U2000.
Step 2 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria window, select OCh in the Service Level area and click
Filter All.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 3 In the Manage WDM Trail window, select the wavelength to be deleted.
Step 4 Click the Signal Flow Diagram tab, right-click the OTU or line board on the wavelength to be
deleted and choose WDM Configuration from the shortcut menu.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 5 In the displayed dialog box, select a line-side port carrying the wavelength. Click State and
choose OOS.
Step 6 Set Laser Status to Off and click Apply.
Step 7 Repeat Step 3 to Step 6 to disable the line-side laser on the other OTU or line board on the
wavelength.
Step 8 Check alarms for the associated trails, if the IN-PWR-LOW, IN-PWR-HIGH, or BEFFEC-EXC
alarm is reported for the associated trails, contact Huawei for assistance.
----End
9.2.3.2 Checking the Optical Power on Associated Trails
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

U2000
Procedure
Step 2 In the Set Trail Filter Criteria window, specify the source and sink NEs under Optical NE,
and set NE, Board, and Port for the wavelength to be deleted. Then click Filter All.
Step 3 In the upper pane of the Commissioning Trail Management window, select the OCh trail. Then
click Operate and choose Commissioning Report.
Step 4 Select Link Report for Report Type and Include associated trails for Trail, and click
Generate.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 5 A dialog box is displayed, asking you to confirm the subnet commissioning parameter settings.
Step 6 After confirming the parameter settings, click Yes to start generating a commissioning report.
A progress bar is displayed.
Step 7 After the progress reaches 100%, you can find a commissioning report in the lower pane of the
Commissioning Report window.
Step 8 Click View to view the content of the report.
NOTE
If a value in the report is in red, the trail needs to be optimized. Record the information about the trail and
optimize the trail by following the instructions provided in 9.2.3.3 Optimization (Optional). In more
severe cases, contact Huawei for assistance.
----End
9.2.3.3 Optimization (Optional)
Prerequisites

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Procedure
Step 2 In the Set Trail Filter Criteria window, select the source and sink NEs under Optical NE, and
set NE, Board, and Port for the wavelength to be deleted. Then click Filter All.
Step 3 In the upper pane of the Commissioning Trail Management window, select the OCh trail. Then
click Operate and choose Link Optimization Commissioning.
Step 4 In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning(Link Optimization) window, click Start.
Step 5 In the two confirmation dialog boxes that are displayed, click OK to start link optimization
commissioning.
NOTE
During the commissioning process, you can obtain the commissioning progress from information in Boards or
from the progress information that is displayed at the bottom of the window.
If there are wavelengths with BERs beyond the acceptable range, the Check Wavelength
Status dialog box is displayed. Determine whether to continue the commissioning according to
the actual situation at the site.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The system checks the BERs of wavelengths for the trail to be commissioned and displays the
wavelengths with BERs beyond the acceptable range in red.
l If existing wavelengths are marked in red, optimize the wavelengths manually to lower the
BER to an acceptable range before commissioning. If you do not lower the BERs, the system
does not monitor the BERs of these wavelengths during commissioning. As a result, services
carried by the existing wavelengths may be interrupted.
l If new wavelengths are marked in red, the system does not monitor the BERs of the
wavelengths during commissioning.
1. Click Continue.
2. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
NOTE
In the dialog box that is displayed, the Status column displays the optimization status of the trails. The
values of Status are as follows:
l Not required: The deviation between the monitored optical power and the nominal optical power meet
the requirements of network design requirements. Link optimization is not required.
l In progress: Link optimization is in process.
l Succeeded: Optical power of all OMS sections has been successfully optimized.
l Partially succeeded: Optical power of some OMS sections fails to be optimized, while optical power
of other OMS sections has been successfully optimized or does not need to be optimized.
l Failed: Optical power of all OMS sections fails to be optimized.
l Canceled: You have clicked Stop to cancel link optimization.
Step 6 After the commissioning is complete, click OK.
----End
9.2.4 Deleting Logical Trails

After checking the performance of the associated trails, you can delete the trail that carries the
wavelength to be deleted.
9.2.4.1 Deleting Logical Trails for the Wavelengths
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

When you delete a logical trail, the MCA/OPM8 board reports a WV-DROP-ABN alarm. This
alarm will be automatically cleared after the procedure described in 9.2.4.2 Disabling MCA/
OPM8 Monitoring on the Deleted Wavelength is performed.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click an NE in the Main Topology.
Step 2 Right-click the board involved in the deleted wavelength (for example, the TN52NS3) and
choose Browse WDM Trails from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
Select the board according to the actual networking. The board can be the OTU, or the tributary or line
board at the source or sink end of the wavelength.
Step 3 In the WDM Trail Management window, delete the trail with Level set to Client/Client-
Group, ODUk/ODUk-Group, OTUk/OTUk-Group, or OCh/OCh-Group.
1. Right-click the client trail you want to delete, and choose Deactive from the shortcut menu.
3. Click OK in the Reconfirm dialog box.
4. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
5. Right-click the client trail you want to delete, and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
7. Click OK in the Reconfirm dialog box.
8. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.
9. Repeat the preceding operations and delete ODUk, OTUk, and OCh trails in sequence.
Step 4 Close the WDM Trail Management window.
----End
9.2.4.2 Disabling MCA/OPM8 Monitoring on the Deleted Wavelength
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Identify all OADM NEs that the deleted wavelength traverses.
Step 2 Double-click an NE in the Main Topology.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Step 3 Select an NE and click the NE Explorer icon in the upper-left corner.
Step 4 In the NE Explorer, select the desired MCA/OPM8 board and choose Configuration > WDM
Step 5 Click By Card/Channel, select Channel from the drop-down list, and click Query. The
parameter list of each optical port or channel is displayed.
Step 6 Select Wavelength Monitor from the drop-down list and click Query. The monitoring status
of each optical port or channel is displayed.
Step 7 Select the wavelength to be deleted in the Port column.
NOTE
Be sure to select the wavelength on the correct port. For example, if the wavelength being deleted is on
NE121-24-Shelf1, the OAU on this shelf is connected to MCA8 port 2. Select the port labeled NE121-24-
Shelf1()-11MCA8-2(IN2)-xx.
Step 8 Select N in the Wavelength Monitor Enable Flag column and click Apply.
Step 9 Repeat Step 2 to Step 8 to disable the monitoring function for other related MCA/OPM8 boards
on the deleted wavelength.
----End
9.2.4.3 Checking Whether the APE Unbalance Event Is Reported
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Event logs from the main menu of the U2000. In the Filter dialog box,
click OK. The Browse Events Logs window is displayed.
Step 2 Locate the specified NE and check whether the "APE unbalance" event is generated. If this event
is generated on this NE, rectify the fault by following the instructions provided in 9.2.4.4
Starting APE Adjustment. If this event is not generated on this NE, end the task and do no

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
perform operations described in 9.2.4.4 Starting APE Adjustment and 9.2.4.5 Querying
Performance Events to Check Whether the APE Adjustment Is Successful.
----End
9.2.4.4 Starting APE Adjustment
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NM maintainer" authority or higher.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Configuration > APE Management.
Step 2 Click Query to query information about APE pairs.
Step 3 Select the desired APE pair from the APE Pair list.
Step 4 Click Start Adjustment at the bottom to start APE adjustment. After the operation is successful,
a dialog box is displayed indicating the success.
NOTE
When the U2000 displays a dialog box indicating an APE power exception, you must confirm it to start
the APE adjustment. The APE adjustment takes 5 minutes or less. After the APE adjustment, the "APE
adjust finished" event is reported.
Step 5 Click Close.
----End
9.2.4.5 Querying Performance Events to Check Whether the APE Adjustment Is

Successful
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE monitor" authority or higher.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Fault > Browse Event logs from the main menu of the U2000. In the Filter dialog box,
click OK. The Events tab is displayed.
Step 2 Locate the specified NE and check whether the "APE adjust finished" event is generated. If this
event is generated on this NE, the APE adjustment is successful.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
If the APE adjustment fails, contact Huawei for assistance.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network(For 10 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of DWDM
Field Engineer) System
10 Nominal Central Wavelength and

Frequency of DWDM System
NOTE
C-band 80-wavelength systems consist of even and odd wavelengths. The information about odd and even
wavelengths is provided below:
l C_EVEN: indicates even-numbered wavelengths. In total there are 40 even wavelengths. The center
frequency of the even wavelengths is within the range of 192.100 THz to 196.000 THz (center
wavelength is within the range of 1529.55 nm to 1560.61 nm) and the frequency spacing is 100 GHz.
l C_ODD: indicates odd-numbered wavelengths. In total there are 40 odd wavelengths. The center
frequency of the odd wavelengths is within the range of 192.150 THz to 196.050 THz (center
wavelength is within the range of 1529.16 nm to 1560.20 nm) and the frequency spacing is 100 GHz.
l C-band 40-wavelength systems use C_EVEN wavelengths.
Table 10-1 Wavelengths and frequencies of a C-band 80-channel (spacing of 50 GHz) system
Wavele Central Central Wavele Central Central

ngth Frequency Wavelength ngth Frequency Wavelength
No. (THz) (nm) No. (THz) (nm)
1 196.05 1529.16 41 194.05 1544.92
2 196.00 1529.55 42 194.00 1545.32
3 195.95 1529.94 43 193.95 1545.72
4 195.90 1530.33 44 193.90 1546.12
5 195.85 1530.72 45 193.85 1546.52
6 195.80 1531.12 46 193.80 1546.92
7 195.75 1531.51 47 193.75 1547.32
8 195.70 1531.90 48 193.70 1547.72
9 195.65 1532.29 49 193.65 1548.11
10 195.60 1532.68 50 193.60 1548.51
11 195.55 1533.07 51 193.55 1548.91

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network(For 10 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of DWDM
Field Engineer) System
Wavele Central Central Wavele Central Central

ngth Frequency Wavelength ngth Frequency Wavelength
No. (THz) (nm) No. (THz) (nm)
12 195.50 1533.47 52 193.50 1549.32
13 195.45 1533.86 53 193.45 1549.72
14 195.40 1534.25 54 193.40 1550.12
15 195.35 1534.64 55 193.35 1550.52
16 195.30 1535.04 56 193.30 1550.92
17 195.25 1535.43 57 193.25 1551.32
18 195.20 1535.82 58 193.20 1551.72
19 195.15 1536.22 59 193.15 1552.12
20 195.10 1536.61 60 193.10 1552.52
21 195.05 1537.00 61 193.05 1552.93
22 195.00 1537.40 62 193.00 1553.33
23 194.95 1537.79 63 192.95 1553.73
24 194.90 1538.19 64 192.90 1554.13
25 194.85 1538.58 65 192.85 1554.54
26 194.80 1538.98 66 192.80 1554.94
27 194.75 1539.37 67 192.75 1555.34
28 194.70 1539.77 68 192.70 1555.75
29 194.65 1540.16 69 192.65 1556.15
30 194.60 1540.56 70 192.60 1556.55
31 194.55 1540.95 71 192.55 1556.96
32 194.50 1541.35 72 192.50 1557.36
33 194.45 1541.75 73 192.45 1557.77
34 194.40 1542.14 74 192.40 1558.17
35 194.35 1542.54 75 192.35 1558.58
36 194.30 1542.94 76 192.30 1558.98
37 194.25 1543.33 77 192.25 1559.39
38 194.20 1543.73 78 192.20 1559.79
39 194.15 1544.13 79 192.15 1560.20
40 194.10 1544.53 80 192.10 1560.61

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 11 Nominal Central Wavelengths of CWDM System
11 Nominal Central Wavelengths of

CWDM System
Table 11-1 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system

Wavelengt Wavelength (nm) Wavelength Wavelength (nm)
h No. No.
11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) 12 Technical Specifications
12 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
NOTE
This section provides the roadmaps of all boards available in different versions for the WDM product series.
l For details on support of these boards on OptiX OSN 8800, see 3.6.4 OptiX OSN 8800 Board
Category.
l For details on support of these boards on OptiX OSN 6800A, see 3.6.5 OptiX OSN 6800A Board
Category.
l For details on support of these boards on OptiX OSN 3800A, see 3.6.6 OptiX OSN 3800A Board
Category.
12.1 General Specifications

12.2 Laser Class
Each type of boards of the product has a different laser class.
12.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications
12.4 Tributary Unit and Line Unit Specifications
12.5 PID Unit Specifications
12.6 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication Board Specifications
12.7 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit Specifications
12.8 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit Specifications
12.9 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Specifications
12.10 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications
12.11 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications
12.12 Clock Unit Specifications
12.13 Optical Protection Unit Specifications
12.14 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications
12.15 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board Specifications

12.17 DCM Specifications

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.1 General Specifications
12.1.1 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack Specifications
Table 12-1, Table 12-2, Table 12-3, Table 12-4, and Table 12-5 provide OptiX OSN 8800
T64 subrack specifications.
Table 12-6, Table 12-7, Table 12-8, Table 12-9, and Table 12-10 provide OptiX OSN 8800
T32 subrack specifications.
Item Specification

(19.6 in. (W) × 22.8 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka) 65 kg (143 lb.)
Item Requirement
Rated working current 200 A (Independent power supplies to four

section)
Maximum working current 240 A (Independent power supplies to four

section)
Item Value

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Value
subrack.
Power Power
n at 25°C (77° n at 55°C
F) (W)a (131°F) (W)a
OTU subrack 1 1804.6 2827.9 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x

OTU subrack 2 1686.7 2278.9 4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU, 2 x

OTU electrical 2172.7 2822.9 2 x XCT, 2 x SXH, 8 x NS3, 2 x

cross-connect SCC, 2 x STG, 8 x PIU, 5 x TQX,
subrack 1 5 x TOA, 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x
EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray
assembly
OTU electrical 1839.1 2776.7 2 x XCT, 2 x SXM, 20 x NQ2, 1 x

cross-connect SCC, 8 x PIU, 5 x TOA, 5 x TQX,
subrack 2 2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x

OBU1, 12 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 1 x
SC2, 4 x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1,
1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 4 x fan tray
assembly

OBU1, 4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 8 x PIU,
2 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and open rack is the value in a certain
open rack is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
The power consumption value in the table is the measured value when the ambient temperature is 25 °C
(77 °F). During the starting up of the equipment or in high or low temperature, the power consumption of
the equipment increases. The actual power consumption of the equipment is about 1.2 to 1.5 times of the
value in the table.
Table 12-5 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 system reliability prediction results
Availability MTTR (hours) MTBF (years)
0.9999922 4 58.68
NOTE
The reliability specifications vary according to system configurations.
Item Specification

(19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 35.4 in. (H))
Item Requirement
Rated working current 100 A (Independent power supplies to two

section)
Maximum working current 120 A (Independent power supplies to two

section)
Item Value

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Value
Recommended typical configuration power 2000 W

consumption
subrack.

25°C (77°F) (W)a 55°C (131°F) (W)a
OTU subrack 1 1633.4 2254.6 32 x LDX, 1 x SCC, 4 x

PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1
x EFI2, 1 x ATE, and 2 x
fan tray assembly
OTU subrack 2 1351.8 1701.3 4 x LSC, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU,

tray assembly
OTU electrical 1641.6 2166.5 2 x XCH, 20 x NQ2, 1 x

subrack 1 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x
EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x ATE,
OTU electrical 2039.8 2466.5 2 x XCH, 8 x NS3, 2 x

subrack 2 x TOA, ,2 x STG, 1 x
AUX, 1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2,
1 x ATE, and 2 x fan tray
assembly

OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 23 x
10G OTU (LSX), 1 x
SCC, 4 x PIUs, 1 x AUX,
1 x EFI1, 1 x EFI2, 1 x
ATE, and 2 x fan tray
assembly

OAU1, 1 x OBU1, 4 x
LSC, 2 x SCC, 4 x PIU, 1
tray assembl in an OTM
subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

25°C (77°F) (W)a 55°C (131°F) (W)a
OLA subrack 290.3 706 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x

tray assembly
OADM 974 1497.2 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 16

subrack x 10G OTU (LSX), 1 x
tray assembly
378.2 811 2 x M40V, 2 x D40, 2 x

FIU, 1 x SC2, 2 x RMU9,
2 x WSM9, 2 x OAU1, 2
x OBU1, 1 x SCC, 4 x PIU,
tray assembly
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack is the value in a certain configuration.
The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the subrack is a calculation
NOTE
value in the table.
Table 12-10 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 system reliability prediction results
0.99999244 4 60.40
NOTE
12.1.2 OptiX OSN 6800A Subrack Specifications
Table 12-11, Table 12-11, Table 12-13, Table 12-14, and Table 12-15 provide OptiX OSN
6800A subrack specifications.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 444 mm (H)

(19.44 in. (W) × 11.61 in. (D) × 17.48 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka) 15 kg (33.07 lb)
Table 12-12 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 6800A

Item Requirement
Rated working current 33 A
Maximum working current 40 A
Table 12-13 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 6800A

Item Value
Maximum subrack power consumption 1600 W
Table 12-14 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 6800A
Power Power
Consumpti Consumpti
(77°F)a (131°F)a
Su OTU subrack 597.8 739.9 The power consumed after you

bra install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one
ck SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one
fan tray assembly in an OTU
subrack.
OT Subrack 597.8 739.9 The power consumed after you

M 1 install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one
subr SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one
ack fan tray assembly in an OTM
subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Power Power
Consumpti Consumpti
(77°F)a (131°F)a

2 install one M40V, one D40, one
OAU101, one OBU103, one FIU,
in an OTM subrack.
OLA subrack 176.7 271.6 The power consumed after you

install two OAU101s, two FIUs,
in an OLA subrack.
FOADM 324.1 436 The power consumed after you

subrack install two OAU101s, two VA4s,
two OBU103s, two MR4s, four
10G OTUs (LSXes), two FIUs,
in an FOADM subrack.

AD 1 install one M40V, one D40, two
M WSMD2s, two OBU103s, two
subr OAU101s, one SC2, two FIUs,
ack one SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and
(two one fan tray assembly in an
dime ROADM subrack.
nsio
ns) Subrack 597.8 739.9 The power consumed after you
2 install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one
SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one
fan tray assembly in an ROADM
subrack.

AD 1 install one WSMD4, one DAS1,
M one M40, one D40, one SCC, two
subr PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray
ack assembly in an ROADM subrack.
(four
dime Subrack 186.8 281.5 The power consumed after you
nsio 2 install one WSMD4, one DAS1,
ns)b one M40, one D40, one SCC, two

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Power Power
Consumpti Consumpti
(77°F)a (131°F)a


OTN Optical 200.5 299.3 The power consumed after you

subr subrack install one M40V, one D40, one
ack OBU103, one OAU101, one SC1,
one FIU, one SCC, two PIUs, one
in an OTN subrack.
Electrica 588.8 741.5 The power consumed after you

l subrack install ten ND2s, two TQXes, two
TOMs, two XCSes, one SCC, two
assembly in an OTN subrack.
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis
and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
b: Subrack 1 and subrack 2 are used as subracks in the line dimensions at a four-dimension
RADOM station; subrack 3 and subrack 4 are used as subracks for adding/dropping local
services. Service boards can be configured in another subrack.
NOTE
value in the table.
Table 12-15 OptiX OSN 6800A system reliability prediction results

0.99999098 4 51.64

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
12.1.3 OptiX OSN 3800A Chassis Specification
Table 12-16, Table 12-17, Table 12-18, Table 12-19, Table 12-20, Table 12-21, Table
12-22, and Table 12-23 provide OptiX OSN 3800A chassis specifications.
Item Specification
Dimensions 436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134

mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in.
(D) x 5.28 in. (H)
Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane) 6 kg (13.23 lb.)
Table 12-17 Requirements on DC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800A
Item Requirement
Rated working current 8A
Table 12-18 Requirements on AC voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 3800A
Item Requirement
Nominal working voltage 110 V AC
Working voltage range 90 V AC to 285 V AC
Table 12-19 DC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800A
Item Value

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-20 DC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN
3800A
Power Power
Consump Consumpti
C (77°F) (131°F)

chassis OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x
PIU)
1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and

PIU) 1 x SCC, 2 x DPIU, 1 x AUX, and
Table 12-21 AC Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 3800A

Item Value
Table 12-22 AC Power consumption of the chassis in typical configuration in an OptiX OSN
3800A
Power Power
Consump Consumpti
C (77°F) (131°F)

chassis OTU, 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x
APIU)
1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and

APIU) 1 x SCC, 2 x APIU, 1 x AUX, and

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Power Power
Consump Consumpti
C (77°F) (131°F)
NOTE
value in the table.
Table 12-23 OptiX OSN 3800A system reliability prediction results
0.999983 4 27.35
NOTE
12.1.4 DCM Frame Specifications

Table 12-24 Technical specifications of the DCM frame
Item Specification
Dimensions 48 mm (H) x 484 mm (W) x 270.5 mm (D) or

1.9 in. (H) x 19.1 in. (W) x 10.6 in. (D)
H = Height; W = Width; D = Depth
12.1.5 CRPC Frame Specification
Table 12-25 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame
Item Value
Mechanical specifications 535 mm (W) x 257 mm (D) x 86 mm (H) or 21.1 in.

(W) x 10.1 in. (D) x 3.4 in. (H)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Value
Weight 3 kg (6.6 lb)
12.1.6 Fan-Tray Assembly Specifications

OptiX OSN 8800 T64/8800 T32

Item Specification

l High Speed: 270W
OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W)
x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))
Power Consumptiona l Low Speed: 42.7 W

l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W
l Medium Speed: 106.8 W
l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W
l High Speed: 215 W

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Specification
OptiX OSN 6800A

Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm

(H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in.
(H))

l High Speed: 120 W
OptiX OSN 3800A

Item Specification
Dimensions 41.0 mm (W) x 262.6 mm (D) x 126.5 mm (H) (1.61 in. (W) x
10.34 in. (D) x 4.98 in. (H))

l High Speed: 32.7 W

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Specification
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.
12.2 Laser Class

Each type of boards of the product has a different laser class.
NOTE
The power shown in Table 12-30Table 12-31Table 12-32 refers to the reference output power of the laser.
It is achieved when the mode-field diameter of fiber is 10 um at the 1550 nm wavelength.
The laser class complies with IEC 60825-2 laser safety standards.
For the OptiX OSN 6800A, the laser level of the equipment is CLASS 1M.
Table 12-30 Laser class

Reference Optical
Power Range Laser Class Board Type
Under 10 dBm HAZARD L4G, LDX, LEM24, LEX4, LOA, LOG, LOM,
LEVEL 1 LQG, LQM, LQMD, LQMS, LSC, LSQ, LSX,
LSXL, LSXLR, LSXR, LTX, LWXS, TMX, ND2,
NQ2, NS3, NS2, TBE, TDX, TOM, TQM, TOG,
TQX, TSXL, D40, D40V, M40, M40V, RMU9,
WSM9(TN12), SC1, HSC1, SC2, ST2, DCP, SCS,
DCU, TDC
10 - 21.3 dBma HAZARD FIU, ITL, CMR2, CMR4, DMR1, MR2, MR4,
LEVEL 1M MR8, MR8V, SBM2, RDU9, WSMD2, WSD9,
WSM9(TN13), WSMD4, OAU100, OAU101,
OAU102, OAU103, OBU1, OLP, VA1, VA4,
GFU, HBA, OAU105, OBU2, TN13FIU02,
CRPC, RAU1, DAS1, WSMD9
a: For the HBA, OAU105, OBU2, TN13FIU02, CRPC, RAU1 boards, after the IPA function
is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that
the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW)
to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
For the OptiX OSN 3800A, the laser level of the equipment is CLASS 1M.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Reference Optical
Under 10 dBm HAZARD CMR1, L4G, LDX, LOA, LOG, LOM, LQG, LQM,
LEVEL 1 LQMD, LQMS, LSX, LSXR, LWXS, TMX, NS2,
TBE, TOM, TOG, TQM, SC1, HSC1, SC2, ST2,
DCP, SCS, DCU
10 - 21.3 dBm HAZARD FIU, CMR2, CMR4, DMR1, MR2, MR4, SBM2,
LEVEL 1M OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103, OAU106,
OBU1, OLP, VA1, VA4, OAU105, OBU2, DAS1,
RAU1
a: For OAU105, OBU2 boards, after the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the
board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the
optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the laser level of the equipment is CLASS 1M.

Reference Optical
Under 10 dBm HAZARD LDX, LEM24, LEX4, LOA, LOG, LOM, LQM,
LEVEL 1 LQMD, LQMS, LSC, LSQ, LSX, LSXL, LSXLR,
LSXR, LTX, LWXS, TMX, ND2, NQ2, NS3, NS2,
TEM28, TDX, TOA, TOM, TQX, TOG, D40,
D40V, M40, M40V, RMU9, WSM9(TN11, TN12),
HSC1, SC1, SC2, ST2, DCP, SCS, DCU, TDC
10 - 21.3 dBma HAZARD NPO2, NPO2E, ITL, CMR2, CMR4, DMR1, MR2,
LEVEL 1M MR4, MR8, MR8V, SBM2, RDU9, ROAM,
WSMD2, WSD9, WSM9(TN13), WSMD4,
OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103, OAU106,
OBU1, OLP, VA1, VA4, GFU, HBA, OAU105,
OBU2, TN13FIU01, TN13FIU02, CRPC, DAS1,
WSMD9, RAU1
a: For the HBA, OAU105, OBU2, TN13FIU02, CRPC, RAU1 boards, after the IPA function
is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that
the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3
dBm (136 mW).
12.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.3.1 L4G Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Bo Client-Side Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable
Optical Module Optical
Module Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 3400 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

11L Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
4G 1000 BASE-LX-10 km- NRZ-APD
eSFP 3400 ps/nm-C Band-
1000 BASE-LX-40 km- Tunable Wavelength-
eSFP NRZ-APD
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
NOTE
Margins exist between the default input power low threshold and the receiver sensitivity and between the
default input power high threshold and the overload point. These margins ensure that the system can report
an input power low or high alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or overload
point.
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module
Table 12-33 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (GE services)
Parameter Unit Value
Optical 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE-

Module Multirate-0. LX-10 km- LX-40 km- ZX-80 km-
Type 5 km-eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

transmission mi.) mi.) mi.) mi.)
distance
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

wavelength
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Maximum dBm -2.5 -3 0 5

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z-compliant

mask
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver - PIN PIN PIN PIN

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -3 -3 -3
receiver
overload
Table 12-34 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

(CWDM)-40 km- (CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP eSFP
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target transmission - 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP
Operating wavelength nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611

range
Maximum mean dBm 5 5

launched power
Minimum mean launched dBm 0 0

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength nm ±6.5 ±6.5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 1.0 1.0

spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 30 30

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant

G.959.1-compliant
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver type - PIN APD

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -19 -28
Minimum receiver dBm -3 -9

overload
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module
Table 12-35 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications
Optical Module 3400 ps/nm-C Band- 3400 ps/nm-C Band-

Type Fixed Wavelength- Tunable
NRZ-APD Wavelength-NRZ-
APD

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -2 -3

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 10 10
ratio
Center frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Center frequency GHz ±10

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 3400 3400
Receiver type - APD APD
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650

range

overload
Mechanical Specifications
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 25.4 mm (1.0 in.) x 220 mm
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Typical Power Maximum Power
Module Consumption at 25° Consumption at 55°
C ( 77°F ) (W) C ( 131°F ) (W)
TN11L4 3400 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed 50.0 55.0

G Wavelength-NRZ-APD
3400 ps/nm-C Band- 53.0 58.0

Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
12.3.2 LDX Specifications

Bo Client-Side Client-Side WDM-Side WDM-Side

ard Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Module Optical Module
Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

12L km-XFP (Odd & Even
DX 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 Wavelengths)-Fixed
km-XFP Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-80
km-XFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s Single Rate NRZ-PIN-XFP
-0.3 km-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd
& Even Wavelengths)-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP, 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP, and 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP
optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2/OTU2e
signals.
The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-36 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10 Gbit/s services)
Optical 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Module Multirate-10 Multirate-40 Multirate-80 Single-
Type km-XFP km-XFP km-XFP Rate-0.3 km-
XFP

format
Optical - SLM SLM SLM MLM

source type
Target - 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7 0.3 km (0.2

transmissio mi.) mi.) mi.)
n distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4 -1.3

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9 3
extinction
ratio
Minimum dB 30 30 30 30
side mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - G.691-compliant

mask
Receiver - PIN PIN APD PIN

type

wavelength
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
Minimum dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
Minimum dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance
Table 12-37 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored wavelengths)
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd

PIN-XFP
Line code format - NRZ
Maximum mean launched dBm 2

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -3

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9
Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05
Center frequency deviation GHz ±10

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.3

width
Minimum side mode dB 35

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800
Receiver type - PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity, EOL dBm -16

(FEC on)
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0

(FEC on)
Maximum reflectance dB -27
WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module
Table 12-38 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)

PIN-XFP

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1-compliant

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
Table 12-39 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths)

Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band-

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Bo WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum Power
ard Consumption at 25° Consumption at 55°
C (77°F) (W) C (131°F) (W)
LD 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 44.5 51.2

X Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 45.5 52.2

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
12.3.3 LEM24 Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Module
TN N/A 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km- N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

11L eSFP (I-850-LC) (Odd & Even
EM 1000 BASE-LX-10 km- Wavelengths)-Fixed
24 eSFP (I-1310-LC) Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-
eSFP (SFP+) 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
10G BASE-LR-10 km- NRZ-PIN-XFP
eSFP (SFP+)
km-XFP
km-XFP
km-XFP
NOTE
point.

Optical Module 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 1000 BASE-LX-10

Type km-eSFP (I-850- km-eSFP (I-1310-
LC) LC)
Optical source type - MLM SLM
Target transmission - 0.5 km (0.3 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)

distance
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -2.5 -3

launched power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

LC) LC)
Minimum mean dBm -9.5 -9.5

launched power
ratio
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z –compliant
Receiver type - PIN PIN

wavelength range
Minimum receiver dBm 0 -3

overload
NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.
Table 12-41 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (10GE services)

Optical Module 10G BASE-SR-0.3 10G BASE-LR-10

Type km-SFP+ km-SFP+
Optical interface Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125

service rate

distance

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -1 0.5

launched power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


launched power
Minimum extinction dB 3 3.5

ratio
Output optical power dBm ≤-30 ≤-30

in case of laser
shutdown
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z–compliant

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11.1 (OMA) -12.6 (OMA)
Minimum receiver dBm -1 0.5

overload
Maximum dB -12 -12

reflectance


PIN-XFP

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
Table 12-44 WDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (gray light)

Optical 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Module Type Multirate-10 km- Multirate-40 km- Multirate-80 km-
XFP XFP XFP
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Optical source - SLM SLM SLM

type
Target - 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)

transmission
distance
Operating nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565

wavelength
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP XFP XFP
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
Minimum side dB 30 30 30
mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - G.959.1-compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -1 -1 -7
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Consumption at 25°C (77° Consumption at 55°C
F) (131°F)
TN11LEM24 81 83

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.3.4 LEX4 Specifications


Module
TN N/A 10G BASE-SR-0.3 km- N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

11L SFP+ (Odd & Even
EX 10G BASE-LR-10 km- Wavelengths)-Fixed
4 SFP+ Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
km-XFP
km-XFP
km-XFP
NOTE
point.


service rate

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

in case of laser
shutdown

wavelength range

overload
Maximum dB -12 -12

reflectance

PIN-XFP

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


XFP XFP XFP

format

type

transmission
distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP XFP XFP

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (131°F)
TN11LEX4 64 67
12.3.5 LOA Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Bo Client-Side Client-Side Pluggable WDM-Side WDM-Side

ard Fixed Optical Optical Module Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Optical Module
Module
TN N/A I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km- N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

11L eSFP (Odd & Even
OA S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km- Wavelengths)-Fixed
eSFP Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 km-
Tunable
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 km- Wavelength-NRZ-
eSFP PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP 10 Gbit/s
1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP Multirate-10 km-
1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP XFP
1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP 10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km-
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 XFP
km-eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s
multirate-10 km-Video
eSFP
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3
km-eSFP
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10
km-eSFP
800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 km-
SFP+
800-SM-LC-L-10 km-SFP
+
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
point.

NOTE
I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-eSFP module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km-eSFP module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 km-
eSFP module and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI
signals.
Only the S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km-eSFP optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a
100BASE-LX10-eSFP optical module.
Table 12-49 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDH/SONET services)

Optical I-16/SR-1 S-16.1/IR-1 L-16.1/LR-1 L-16.2/LR-2

Module OC-48-2 km- OC-48-15 OC-48-40 OC-48-80
Type eSFP km-eSFP km-eSFP km-eSFP

format
Optical - MLM SLM SLM SLM

source type
Target - 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

transmission mi.) mi.) mi.)
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -3 0 3 3
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Maximum nm N/A 1 1 1
-20 dB
spectral
width
Minimum dB N/A 30 30 30
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask G.959.1-compliant
Receiver - PIN PIN APD APD

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -3 0 -9 -9
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP module, and
1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP module can be used to access GE signals.
Table 12-50 Client-side pluggable GE optical module specifications (single-fiber bidirectional

transmissions)
Optical 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE-

Module Type BX10-U- BX10-D- BX-U-eSFP BX-D-eSFP
eSFP eSFP

format

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP
Optical source - SLM SLM SLM SLM

type
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -3 -3 3 3
mean launched
power
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3ah-compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN PIN

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate-eSFP module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express,
and FE signals.
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP
module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and
DVB-ASI signals.
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std
802.3.



format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access DVB-ASI, SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.
Table 12-52 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (SDI services)

Optical Module Type 0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s

Multirate 10 km-Video
eSFP
Target transmission distance - 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Service rate Gbit/s 0.1 to 3

power

power

width
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity dBm -22

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP
NOTE
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-eSFP, 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP module can be used to access FC400,
and FICON4G signals.
Table 12-53 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC services)
Optical Module Type 4.25 Gbit/s 4.25 Gbit/s

Multirate-0.3 km- Multirate-10 km-
eSFP eSFP

distance
Transmitter parameter nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

specifications at point S

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -9 -8.4

launched power
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface

(FC-PI-2) parameter template

range
Minimum receiver dBm 0 0

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 km-SFP+ and 800-SM-LC-L-10 km-SFP+ module can be used to access FC800 and
FICON8G signals.
Table 12-54 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FC800/FICON8G services)

Optical Module 800-M5E-SA-I-0.3 800-SM-LC-L-10


service rate

distance

wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

wavelength range

overload
Maximum dB -12 -12

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals.
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE
signals.

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE
signals.
Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-

eSFP
Target transmission - 120 km (74.6 mi.)

distance
Center frequency deviation GHz ±12.5

power
Minimum mean launched dBm 0

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 1

width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (a 5% margin is required for

the eye pattern of STM-16/OC-48 services
and equivalent OTU1 services)
G.959.1-compliant (a 5% margin is required
for the eye pattern of STM-16/OC-48 services

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP
Receiver type - APD
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9


PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40

Type km-XFP km-XFP
Optical source type - SLM SLM

distance

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -1 2

launched power

launched power

ratio

suppression ratio

wavelength range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Type km-XFP km-XFP

overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.19 kg (2.64b.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Typical Power Maximum Power
Optical Module Consumption at Consumption at
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11LOA 800 ps/nm-C Band 31.8 36

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km-
XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band- 32.8 37

Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
12.3.6 LOG Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Optical Module Optical Module
Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band N/A

11L Multirate-0.5 km- (odd & even
OG eSFP wavelengths)-Fixed
1000 BASE-LX-10 Wavelength-NRZ-
km-eSFP PIN
1000 BASE-LX-40 800 ps/nm-C Band-
km-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km-eSFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ-PIN
(CWDM)-40 km-
Tunable Wavelength-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ-APD
(CWDM)-80 km-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

12L Multirate-0.5 km- Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
OG eSFP (D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-
1000 BASE-LX-10 800 ps/nm-C Band- Fixed Wavelength-
km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength- NRZ-PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
km-eSFP Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
1000 BASE-ZX-80 PIN-XFP
km-eSFP
10 Gbit/s
1000 BASE-BX10- Multirate-10 km-
U-eSFP XFP
1000 BASE-BX10- 10 Gbit/s
D-eSFP Multirate-40 km-
1000 BASE-BX-U- XFP
eSFP 10 Gbit/s
1000 BASE-BX-D- Multirate-80 km-
eSFP XFP
(CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP
NOTE
(D)RZ means DRZ or RZ. These two types of optical modules have the same optical performance and can be
interconnected. The availability of the two type of optical module is subject to PCNs. For PCN information,
consult with the product manager at the local representative office.
NOTE
point.

NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE
Std 802.3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP, 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP, 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP, and 1000 BASE-BX-D-

eSFP optical module can be used to access GE signals.

transmissions)

eSFP eSFP

format

type
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
mean launched
power
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP

overload
Table 12-63 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)

Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band 800 ps/nm-C Band-

(odd & even Fixed Wavelength-
wavelengths)-Fixed NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Maximum mean launched dBm 2 2

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -3 -3

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10
Center frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05
Center frequency deviation GHz ±10 ±5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.3 0.3

width

suppression ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Receiver sensitivity, EOL dBm -16 -16

(FEC on)
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 0
Table 12-64 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths)

Optical 1200 ps/ 1200 ps/ 4800 ps/ 800 ps/ 800 ps/
Module Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Band- Band- Band- Band- Band-
Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable
Wavelen Wavele Wavelen Waveleng Waveleng
gth- ngth- gth- th-DRZ- th-NRZ-
NRZ- NRZ- ODB- PIN PIN
PIN APD APD
Line code - NRZ NRZ ODB DRZ NRZ

format
Maximum dBm 2 2 2 2 2
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 10 10 N/Aa 10 10
extinction ratio
Center THz 192.10 to 196.05

frequency
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
PIN APD APD
Minimum side dB 35 35 35 35 35
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN PIN
Operating nm 1200 to 1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
Minimum dBm 0 -9 -9 0 0
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

PIN-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


XFP XFP XFP

format

type

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP XFP XFP

transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TN11LOG: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

TN12LOG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum Power
d Consumption at Consumption at
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even 40 45

1LO wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
G PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 43 48

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN

Wavelength-ODB-APD
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 37.0 41.44

2LO Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
G PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP


Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

12.3.7 LOM Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band N/A

11L Multirate-0.5 km- (odd & even
OM eSFP wavelengths)-Fixed
1000 BASE-LX-10 Wavelength-NRZ-
km-eSFP PIN
1000 BASE-LX-40 800 ps/nm-C Band-
NRZ-PIN
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km-eSFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
FC400/FICON4G NRZ-PIN
Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)-eSFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
FC400/FICON4G NRZ-APD
Module-10 km
(Single mode)-eSFP 4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
FC100/FC200/ ODB-APD
FICON/FICON
Express Module-0.5 800 ps/nm-C Band-
km (Multimode)- Tunable Wavelength-
eSFP (D)RZ-PIN
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-2 km
(Single mode)-eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

12L Multirate-0.5 km- Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
OM eSFP (D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-
1000 BASE-LX-10 800 ps/nm-C Band- Fixed Wavelength-
km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength- NRZ-PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
km-eSFP Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
1000 BASE-ZX-80 PIN-XFP
km-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-
U-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-
D-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-U-
eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-D-
eSFP
FC400/FICON4G
Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)-eSFP
FC400/FICON4G
Module-10 km
(Single mode)-eSFP
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-0.5
km (Multimode)-
eSFP
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-2 km
(Single mode)-eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
NOTE
point.

NOTE
Std 802.3.


format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE


transmissions)

eSFP eSFP

format

type
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
mean launched
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance

Optical FC400/ FC400/ FC100/ FC100/

Module FICON4G FICON4G FC200/ FC200/
Type Module-0.3 Module-10 FICON/ FICON/
km (Multi km (Single FICON FICON
mode)-eSFP mode)-eSFP Express Express
Module-0.5 Module-2
km km (Single
(Multimode) mode)-eSFP
-eSFP

format
Target - 0.3 km (0.2 10 km (6.2 0.5 km (0.3 2 km (1.2 mi.)

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Optical FC400/ FC400/ FC100/ FC100/

Module FICON4G FICON4G FC200/ FC200/
Type Module-0.3 Module-10 FICON/ FICON/
km (Multi km (Single FICON FICON
mode)-eSFP mode)-eSFP Express Express
Module-0.5 Module-2
km km (Single
(Multimode) mode)-eSFP
-eSFP
Transmitter nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 830 to 860 1266 to 1360

parameter
specifications
at point S
Maximum dBm -1.1 -1 -2.5 -3

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9 -8.4 -9.5 -10

mean
launched
power
Eye pattern - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2)

mask parameter template

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -15 -18 -17 -18

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 0 0 0
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -27

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

(FEC on)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
PIN APD APD
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance


PIN-XFP

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
TN11LOM:
(8.7 in.)
TN12LOM:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even 92.7 101.7

1LO wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
M NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD

2LO Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
M NRZ-PIN-XFP


Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

NOTE
When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board
increases by another 2 W.
12.3.8 LQG Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 3400 ps/nm-C Band- 5 Gbit/s Multirate

11L Multirate-0.5 km- Fixed Wavelength- ( CWDM)-50 km-
QG eSFP NRZ-APD eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-10 3400 ps/nm-C Band- 5 Gbit/s Multirate
km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength- (eSFP CWDM)-70
1000 BASE-LX-40 NRZ-APD km-eSFP
km-eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80
km-eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP
NOTE
point.



format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

eSFP eSFP

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


Type Fixed Wavelength- Tunable
NRZ-APD Wavelength-NRZ-
APD

launched power

launched power
ratio
Center frequency GHz ±10

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD APD

range

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-79 CWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)

Optical Module Type 5 Gbit/s Multirate 5 Gbit/s Multirate

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

range

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Typical Power Maximum Power
Optical Module Consumption at Consumption at
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11LQG 3400 ps/nm-C Band- 28.4 32

Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
3400 ps/nm-C Band- 31.0 34.4

Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
APD
5 Gbit/s Multirate 23.18 26

(CWDM)-50 km-
eSFP
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(CWDM)-70 km-
eSFP
12.3.9 LQM Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical
Optical Module Module Module
Module
TN N/A I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km- N/A 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

13L eSFP (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
QM S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
km-eSFP (DWDM)-120 km-
L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 eSFP
km-eSFP
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80
km-eSFP
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 km-eSFP and
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
100BASE-LX10 optical module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE
signals.
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP optical
module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals.



format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

eSFP eSFP

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

power

power
Central wavelength nm ±6.5

deviation

width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver type - APD
Table 12-85 DWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)


(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

power

power
Center frequency deviation nm ±12.5

width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin

are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16/OC-48 services
and equivalent OTU1
services)
Receiver type - APD
(8.7 in.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN13LQM 32.6 35.9
12.3.10 LQMD Specifications


Module Module
TN N/A I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km- 12800 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

12L eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
QM S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 NRZ-APD
D km-eSFP 12800 ps/nm-C Band-
L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 Tunable Wavelength-
km-eSFP NRZ-APD
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 6400 ps/nm-C Band-
km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
2.125 Gbit/s Channels-Tunable)
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP
(eSFP DWDM)-120
km-eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
point.

NOTE
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.



format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4,
OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP
Receiver type - APD

Optical Module Type 12800 ps/nm-C 12800 ps/nm-C 6400 ps/nm-C

Band-Fixed Band-Tunable Band-Tunable
Wavelength- Wavelength- Wavelength-
NRZ-APD NRZ-APD NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean launched dBm -4 0 0

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -8 -5 -5

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 8.2
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.2 0.2 0.5

width
Minimum side mode dB 35 35 35

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6400
Receiver type - APD APD APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Channels-
Tunable)
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9 -9 -9
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum
Consumption at Power
25°C (77°F) (W) Consumption at
55°C (131°F) (W)
TN12 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed 31.1 34.3

LQM Wavelength-NRZ-APD
D 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
12.3.11 LQMS Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Module Module
TN N/A I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km- 12800 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

12L eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
QM S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 NRZ-APD
S km-eSFP 12800 ps/nm-C Band-
L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 Tunable Wavelength-
km-eSFP NRZ-APD
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 6400 ps/nm-C Band-
km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
2.125 Gbit/s Channels-Tunable)
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
TheI-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 km-eSFP and
FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
signals.



format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.

eSFP eSFP

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Channels-
Tunable)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean launched dBm -1 3 3

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -5 -2 -2

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10 8.2
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.2 0.2 0.5

width
Minimum side mode dB 35 35 35

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 12800 12800 6400
Receiver type - APD APD APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to 1575
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9 -9 -9
(8.7 in.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN1 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed 29 32.3

2LQ Wavelength-NRZ-APD
MS 12800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
12.3.12 LSC Specifications


Module Module
TN N/A 100GBASE-10×10G- 40000 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

12L 10 km-CFP Tunable Wavelength-
SC 100GBASE-LR4-10 ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)-
km-CFP PIN
NOTE
A 100GBASE-10×10G-10km-CFP optical module cannot connect to an IEEE 100GBASE-SR10 module.

NOTE
point.

NOTE
The 100GBASE-SR10-100m-CFP optical module complies with IEEE 802.3ba.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Optical Module Type 100G BASE-LR4-10 km-

CFP
Signaling Speed per Lane Gbit/s 25.78125
Signaling Speed Accuracy ppm -100 to 100
Minimum Lane Center nm 1294.53

Wavelength
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09
Maximum Lane Center nm 1296.59

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Total Average Launch Power dBm 1.7

(Min)

(Max)
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm -1.3

(Min)
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm 4.5

(Max)
Average Launch Power per dBm -4.3

Lane (Min)
Average Launch Power per dBm 4.5

Lane (Max)
Optical Extinction Ratio dB 4

(Min)
Side Mode Suppression dB 30

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Optical Module Type 100G BASE-LR4-10 km-

CFP

Wavelength
1299.02
1303.54
1308.09

Wavelength
1301.09
1305.63
1310.19
Average Receiver Power per dBm -10.6

Lane (Min)
Average Receiver Power per dBm 4.5

Lane (Max)
Minimum receiver overload dBm 4.5

(OMA) per Lane
Receiver Sensitivity (OMA) dBm -8.6

per Lane

NOTE
The OMA values are designed to ensure normal equipment operation. They are not provided for equipment
commissioning. In practical, equipment commissioning is performed based on the average receiver power
per lane and total average launched power. It is recommended that the total average launched power be
used as the reference for equipment commissioning.

Optical Module Type 100G BASE-10×10G-10

km-CFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

km-CFP
Minimum Lane Center nm 1521

Wavelength
1529
1537
1545
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585
1593
Maximum Lane Center nm 1525

Wavelength
1533
1541
1549
1557
1565
1573
1581
1589
1597

(Min)

(Max)
Average Launch Power per dBm -5.8

Lane (Min)

Lane (Max)

(Min)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

km-CFP

(Typ)

(Max)
Optical Extinction Ratio dB 2.5

(Min)

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN
Minimum Lane Center nm 1521

Wavelength
1529
1537
1545
1553
1561
1569
1577
1585
1593
Maximum Lane Center nm 1525

Wavelength
1533
1541
1549
1557
1565
1573
1581

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

km-CFP
1589
1597
Receiver Power per Lane dBm -10.8

(Min)
Receiver Power per Lane dBm 3.5

(Max)

(OMA) per Lane

per Lane

NOTE
Table 12-98 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC, RZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)

power

power

width

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance (back- ps/nm 40000

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
TN12LSC
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) x 220
mm (8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN12LSC 240 265
12.3.13 LSQ Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Bo Client-Side Fixed Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Optical Module Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable
Module Optical
Module
TN 40 Gbit/s N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

11L Multirate-2 km Tunable Wavelength-
SQ ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
NOTE
point.
Client-Side Fixed Optical Module
Table 12-99 Client-side fixed optical module specifications
Optical Module Type 40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


Type Tunable Wavelength- Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN
Line code format - ODB DQPSK
Operating frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05

range

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 N/A

ratio
Center frequency GHz ±2.5 ±2.5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.6 N/A

spectral width
Maximum -3 dB nm N/A 0.3

spectral width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm -800 to 800 -800 to 800

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity, dBm -16 -16

EOL (FEC on)

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum Power
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11LS 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 75.0 82.0

Q Wavelength-ODB-PIN

Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN
12.3.14 LSX Specifications

Bo Client- Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Side Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable Optical
Fixed Module Module
Optical
Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd N/A

12L Multirate-10 km- & even wavelengths)-
SX XFP Fixed Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s NRZ-PIN
Multirate-40 km- 800 ps/nm-C Band-
XFP Fixed Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s NRZ-PIN
Multirate-80 km- 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
XFP Tunable Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s Single Rate NRZ-PIN
-0.3 km-XFP 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Bo Client- Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Side Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable Optical
Fixed Module Module
Optical
Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

13L Multirate-10 km- Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
SX XFP (D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-Fixed
10 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- Wavelength-NRZ-
Multirate-40 km- Tunable Wavelength- PIN-XFP
XFP NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
10 Gbit/s Tunable
Multirate-80 km- Wavelength-NRZ-
XFP PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Single Rate
-0.3 km-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
NOTE
NOTE
point.

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km-XFP module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km-XFP module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate
80 km-XFP module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/
OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km-XFP module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP

format

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance
Table 12-102 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (DWDM colored

wavelengths)

PIN-XFP

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

width

suppression ratio

(FEC on)

PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
PIN APD APD
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN12LSX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN13LSX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)

2LS wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 32.5 39


Wavelength-ODB-APD
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 29.4 32.8

3LS Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
X
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 27 30.4

Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 28 31.4

12.3.15 LSXL Specifications


ard Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Pluggable
Module Optical Optical
Module Module

SX DQPSK-PIN
L 500 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ard Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Module Pluggable
Module Optical Optical
Module Module

SX ePDM-BPSK-PIN
L
NOTE
NOTE
point.
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Optical Module Type 500 ps/nm-C Band- 500 ps/nm-C Band-

Tunable Tunable
Wavelength- Wavelength-ODB-
DQPSK-PIN PIN
Line code format - DQPSK ODB
Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05

power

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB N/A 8.2
Center frequency deviation GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm N/A 0.6

width
Maximum -3 dB spectral nm 0.3 N/A

width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm ±500 ±500

range

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-BPSK

power

power

width

suppression ratio

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
TN12LSXL
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 3.75 kg (8.27 lb.)
TN15LSXL
(8.7 in.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
Consumption at Power
25°C (77°F) (W) Consumption at
55°C (131°F) (W)

XL Wavelength-ODB-PIN


XL Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN
12.3.16 LSXLR Specifications

Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable

Optical Module
TN12LS 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- N/A

XLR DQPSK-PIN
500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-ODB-
PIN
NOTE
NOTE
point.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Tunable
Wavelength- Wavelength-ODB-
DQPSK-PIN PIN
Line code format - DQPSK ODB
Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05

power

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB N/A 8.2
Center frequency deviation GHz ±2.5 ±2.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm N/A 0.6

width
Maximum -3 dB spectral nm 0.3 N/A

width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm ±500 ±500

range

(FEC on)

(FEC on)
TN12LSXLR

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum Power
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN12 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 75.0 79.0

LSXL Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN
R
Wavelength-ODB-PIN
12.3.17 LSXR Specifications

Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable Optical

Module
TN11L 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even N/A

SXR wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
NRZ-APD
ODB-APD
(D)RZ-PIN
NOTE
NOTE
point.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

(FEC on)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Optical Module 1200 ps/ 1200 ps/ 4800 ps/nm- 800 ps/nm-C
Type nm-C nm-C C Band- Band-
Band- Band- Tunable Tunable
Tunable Tunable Wavelengt Wavelength-
Wavelengt Wavelengt h-ODB- DRZ-PIN
h-NRZ- h-NRZ- APD
PIN APD
Line code format - NRZ NRZ ODB DRZ
Maximum mean dBm 2 2 2 2

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -3 -3 -3 -3

launched power
Minimum dB 10 10 N/Aa 10
extinction ratio
Center frequency GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

spectral width
Minimum side dB 35 35 35 35
mode suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 1200 1200 4800 800

tolerance
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN

wavelength range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16

sensitivity, EOL
(FEC on)
Minimum receiver dBm 0 -9 -9 0

overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.2 kg. (2.6 lb)
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)

1LS wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
XR NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD
12.3.18 LTX Specifications


Module Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 40000 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

11L km-XFP Tunable Wavelength-
TX 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
km-XFP RZ)-PIN
km-XFP
10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3
km-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
point.
Specifications of optical modules on the client side

NOTE
optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN signals.
The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.

XFP

format

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio
side mode
suppression
ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Specifications of optical modules on the DWDM side
Table 12-114 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (tunable wavelengths, HFEC, RZ)

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-QPSK(HFEC,
RZ)-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-QPSK(HFEC, RZ)

power

power

width

suppression ratio

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
l Dimensions of front panel (H x W x D): 264.6 mm (10.4 in.) x 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) x 220
mm (8.7 in.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11LTX (OTU mode) 248 273
TN11LTX (regeneration 235 247

mode)
12.3.19 LWXS Specifications


Module Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 12800 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

12L Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP Fixed Wavelength-
WX I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km- NRZ-PIN
S eSFP 12800 ps/nm-C Band-
S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 Fixed Wavelength-
km-eSFP NRZ-APD
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 6500 ps/nm-C Band-
NRZ-PIN
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP 3200 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ-APD
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate Tunable Wavelength-
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE
point.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km-eSFP, and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 km-eSFP
optical module can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.
Only the S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km optical module supports FE services, and it can only connect to a 100BASE-
LX10 optical module.
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals.
Table 12-115 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications

Optical 2.125 Gbit/s I-16/SR-1 S-16.1/IR-1 L-16.2/LR-2

Module Multirate-0. OC-48-2 km- OC-48-15 OC-48-80
Type 5 km-eSFP eSFP km-eSFP km-eSFP

format
Optical - MLM MLM SLM SLM

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -10 -5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
Maximum nm N/A N/A 1 1

-20 dB
spectral
width

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Optical 2.125 Gbit/s I-16/SR-1 S-16.1/IR-1 L-16.2/LR-2

Module Multirate-0. OC-48-2 km- OC-48-15 OC-48-80
Type 5 km-eSFP eSFP km-eSFP km-eSFP
Minimum dB N/A N/A 30 30

side mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z- G.957-compliant

mask compliant
Receiver - PIN PIN PIN APD

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -18 -18 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -3 0 -9
receiver
overload
Maximum dB N/A -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100,
STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16,
OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Table 12-116 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (CWDM colored

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

wavelengths)

eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Optical 12800 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6500 ps/ 3200 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6400 ps/
Module Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Band- Band- Band- Band- Band- Band-
Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Tunable Tunable
Waveleng Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng
th-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ-
PINa APDa PIN APD APD APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Maximum dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
mean launched
power
Minimum mean dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2

launched power
Minimum dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2

extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±10

frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5

dB spectral
width
Minimum side dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400

tolerance

mask
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Optical 12800 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6500 ps/ 3200 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6400 ps/
Module Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Band- Band- Band- Band- Band- Band-
Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Tunable Tunable
Waveleng Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng
th-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ-
PINa APDa PIN APD APD APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Operating nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to

wavelength 1575
range
Receiver dBm -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -9 0 -10 -9 -9

receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed

Wavelength-NRZ-APD

power
Minimum mean launched dBm 2.5

power
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength nm ≤±6.5

deviation

width

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed

Wavelength-NRZ-APD

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD
NOTE
l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the line code on the WDM side must
be NRZ.
l When SDH or OTN services are provisioned on the WDM side, the eye pattern on the WDM side
complies with the template defined in ITU-T G.957.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Consumption at 25°C (77°F) Consumption at 55°C (131°
(W) F) (W)
LWXS 33.9 37.3
12.3.20 TMX Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Module
TN N/A I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 800 ps/nm-C Band N/A

11T km-eSFP (odd & even
MX S-16.1/IR-1 wavelengths)-Fixed
OC-48-15 km-eSFP Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
L-16.1/LR-1
OC-48-40 km-eSFP 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Fixed Wavelength-
L-16.2/LR-2 NRZ-PIN
OC-48-80 km-eSFP
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
(CWDM)-80 km- NRZ-PIN
eSFP
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
(DWDM)-120 km- NRZ-APD
eSFP
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
(D)RZ-PIN
TN N/A I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

12T km-eSFP Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
MX S-16.1/IR-1 (D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-
OC-48-15 km-eSFP 800 ps/nm-C Band- Fixed Wavelength-
Tunable Wavelength- NRZ-PIN-XFP
L-16.1/LR-1
OC-48-40 km-eSFP NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
L-16.2/LR-2 Wavelength-NRZ-
OC-48-80 km-eSFP PIN-XFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate 10 Gbit/s
(CWDM)-80 km- Multirate-10 km-
eSFP XFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate 10 Gbit/s
(DWDM)-120 km- Multirate-40 km-
eSFP XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km-
XFP
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
point.



format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

wavelengths)

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
Central wavelength deviation nm ±6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1.0
Minimum side mode suppression dB 30

ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant

G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - APD

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP

Receiver type - APD

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

(FEC on)

PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
PIN APD APD
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


XFP XFP XFP

format

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP XFP XFP

type

transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TMX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN12TMX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)

1TM wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD

2TM Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km



Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
12.3.21 Jitter Transfer Characteristics

Specifications include jitter transfer characteristics specifications of OTUs. These specifications
comply with ITU-T G.8251.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The OTU has the jitter transfer characteristics. Its jitter transfer function should be under the
curve. See Figure 12-1. For its specifications, refer to Table 12-128.
Table 12-128 Jitter transfer characteristics specifications
Signal Level fc (kHz) P (dB)
STM-1/OC-3(A) 130 0.1
STM-4/OC-12(A) 500 0.1
STM-16/OC-48(A)/OTU1 2000 0.1
STM-64/OC-192(A)/OTU2 1000 0.1
STM-256/OC-768(A)/OTU3 4000 0.1
Figure 12-1 Jitter transfer characteristics

Jitter gain
P
-20dB/10 octave
f
0 fc Jitter frequency
12.3.22 Input Jitter Tolerance

Specifications include input jitter tolerance specifications of the OTU. These specifications
comply with ITU-T G.8251.
The OTU is able to tolerate the input jitter pattern shown in Figure 12-2. The specifications are
provided in Table 12-129.
Table 12-129 Input jitter tolerance specifications
Signal Level f0 (kHz) f1 (kHz) A1 (UIp-p) A2 (UIp-p)
STM-1/OC-3 6.5 65 0.15 1.5

(A)
STM-4/OC-12 25 250 0.15 1.5

(A)
STM-16/OC-48 100 1000 0.15 1.5

(A)/OTU1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Signal Level f0 (kHz) f1 (kHz) A1 (UIp-p) A2 (UIp-p)
STM-64/ 400 4000 0.15 1.5

OC-192(A)/
OTU2
STM-256(A) 1920 16000 0.18 1.5
OTU3 480 16000 0.18 6.0
Figure 12-2 Input jitter tolerance

Input jitter amplitude
A
A2
-20dB/10 octave
A1
f
f0 f1 Frequency
12.3.23 Output Jitter

Specifications include output jitter specifications of OTU. These specifications comply with
ITU-T G.8251.
The specifications of OTU output jitter are provided in Table 12-130.
Table 12-130 Output jitter specifications
Interface Measurement Band

Peak-Peak
Signal Level High-Pass (kHz) Low-Pass (MHz) Amplitude (UI)
STM-1/OC-3 0.5 1.3 0.3
65 1.3 0.1
STM-4/OC-12 1 5 0.3
250 5 0.1
STM-16/OC-48/ 5 20 0.3
OTU1
1000 20 0.1
STM-64/OC-192/ 20 80 0.3
OTU2
4000 80 0.1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Interface Measurement Band

Peak-Peak
Signal Level High-Pass (kHz) Low-Pass (MHz) Amplitude (UI)
STM-256/OC-768 80 320 0.3
16000 320 0.14
OTU3 20 320 1.2
16000 320 0.14
12.4 Tributary Unit and Line Unit Specifications
12.4.1 ND2 Specifications


Module
TN11ND 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even N/A

2 Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN12ND 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
2 Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable NRZ-PIN-XFP
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP
TN52ND 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

2 Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN53ND N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

2 Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
NOTE
point.
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

PIN

Tunable Tunable Wavelength-
Wavelength-NRZ- DRZ-PIN
PIN
Line code format - NRZ DRZ

power

power

width

suppression ratio

range

(FEC on)

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


XFP XFP XFP

format

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP XFP XFP

type

transmission
distance

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb. )
TN52ND2: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN53ND2: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum
d Consumption at Power
25-C (77-F) (W) Consumption at
55-C (131-F) (W)

1ND Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
2 PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 62.7 70.2

NRZ-PIN

(D)RZ-PIN
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 57.2 64

2ND NRZ-PIN
2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 62 69
(D)RZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 46 52

PIN-XFP
TN5 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 70.5 77.5

2ND NRZ-PIN
2
(D)RZ-PIN
TN5 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 25 28

3ND Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
2 PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 27 30

NRZ-PIN-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.4.2 NQ2 Specifications

Board WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Optical Module
TN51NQ2 N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-

Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
TN52NQ2/ N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-

TN53NQ2/ Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN54NQ2 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
NOTE
point.


PIN-XFP

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


XFP XFP XFP

format

type

transmission
distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP XFP XFP

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN51NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
– TN52NQ2: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.)
– TN53NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
– TN54NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
Boar WDM-Side Optical Module Typical Power Maximum
d Consumption at Power
25-C (77-F) (W) Consumption at
55-C (131-F) (W)

NQ2 Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP

PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP

PIN-XFP
TN53 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 49 54

NQ2 NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN54 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 53 58.3

PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
12.4.3 NS2 Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Module
TN12NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
2 Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ- Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
PIN NRZ-PIN-XFP
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-ODB-APD
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN52NS 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

2 Wavelength-(D)RZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN53NS N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

NRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE
NOTE
point.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd &

even wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Minimum mean launched power dBm -3
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 0.3
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity, EOL (FEC on) dBm -16

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Center GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
PIN APD APD
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity,
EOL (FEC on)
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance


PIN-XFP

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

(FEC on)

(FEC on)


Type km-XFP km-XFP
Optical source type - SLM SLM

distance

wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

suppression ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Type km-XFP km-XFP

wavelength range

overload
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN12NS2: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb)
TN52NS2: 1.3 kg (2.86 lb.)
TN53NS2: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Consumption Power
at 25-C (77-F) Consumption
(W) at 55-C (131-F)
(W)
TN12NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 38.8 43.40

2 Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD


Wavelength-ODB-APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Consumption Power
(W) at 55-C (131-F)
(W)
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 30.32 34

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 25.35 28.39

Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN52NS 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 51.3 56.4

2 Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

TN53NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 20 24

NRZ-PIN-XFP

12.4.4 NS3 Specifications


Module

3 Wavelength-ODB-PIN


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Module


3 Wavelength-ePDM-BPSK-PIN
NOTE
point.
When using the NRZ module, the TN54NS3 board maps 32 ODU0, 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or one ODU3
signals into one OTU3 service.
When using ODB or DQPSK optical module, the TN54NS3 maps 32 ODU0, or 16 ODU1, four ODU2, or
one ODU3 signals into one OTU3 signals, and also maps four ODU2e into one OTU3e signals.


ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

deviation

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

spectral width

spectral width

suppression ratio

wavelength range

EOL (FEC on)

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance

ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

deviation

spectral width

spectral width

suppression ratio

wavelength range

EOL (FEC on)

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance


Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN
Line code format - ePDM-BPSK

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Tunable Wavelength-
ePDM-BPSK-PIN

width

suppression ratio

to-back)
Receiver type - PIN
Table 12-147 WDM-side fixed optical module specifications (gray light)
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
TN11NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN52NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN54NS3:
(8.7 in.)
TN55NS3:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Optical Typical Power Maximum
Module Consumption Power
(W) at 55-C (131-F)
(W)
TN11NS3 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 92 101.2


Wavelength-ODB-PIN
TN52NS3 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 118 130


Wavelength-ODB-PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Board WDM-Side Optical Typical Power Maximum

Module Consumption Power
(W) at 55-C (131-F)
(W)

TN54NS3 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 73 80


Wavelength-ODB-PIN
40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km 62 69
TN55NS3 60000ps/nm-C Band- 135 150

Tunable Wavelength-ePDM-
BPSK-PIN
12.4.5 TBE Specifications

Board Client-Side Fixed Optical Client-Side Pluggable Optical

Module Module
TN11TB N/A 100 BASE-FX-10 km-eSFP

E 100 BASE-FX-80 km-eSFP
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-
eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-
eSFP
10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km-XFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
point.
Table 12-148 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications (FE services)

Optical Module 100 BASE-FX-10 100 BASE-FX-80

Type km-eSFP km-eSFP

distance

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -11.5 -2

launched power
ratio
Center frequency nm 1310 1550
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z- IEEE802.3z-

compliant compliant

(EOL)

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Std 802.3.

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP

format

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11TBE 40.7 44.8
12.4.6 TDX Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Board Client-Side Fixed Client-Side Pluggable Optical

Optical Module Module
TN12TDX/ N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP

TN52TDX/ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP
TN53TDX
800-SM-LC-L-0.3 km-XFP
NOTE
point.
NOTE
optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s Single-Rate-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.

XFP

format

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The 800-SM-LC-L-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used to access FC800 signals.

Optical Module Type 800-SM-LC-L-0.3 km-XFP
Optical interface service rate Gbit/s 8.5
Optical source type - SLM
Maximum mean launched dBm -1

power

power
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity dBm -14.4
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN12TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
– TN52TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
– TN53TDX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN12TDX 37.4 40.7
TN52TDX 57.3 63.0
TN53TDX 25.0 27.5
12.4.7 TEM28 Specifications

Board Client-Side Fixed Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Optical Module
TN54TE N/A 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km-eSFP (I-850-LC)

M28 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP (I-1310-LC)
10G BASE-SR-0.3 km-SFP+
10G BASE-LR-10 km-SFP+
NOTE
point.


LC) LC)

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

LC) LC)

wavelength range

launched power

launched power
ratio
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z –compliant

wavelength range

overload
NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.



service rate

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


wavelength range

launched power

launched power

ratio

in case of laser
shutdown

wavelength range

overload
Maximum dB -12 -12

reflectance
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (131°F)
TN54TEM28 110 120

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.4.8 TOA Specifications


Optical Module
TN54TO N/A I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-eSFP

A S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km-eSFP
L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 km-eSFP
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 km-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate 10 km-Video eSFP
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-eSFP, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km-eSFP, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 km-eSFP and L-16.2/
LR-2 OC-48-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FICON,
FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE


transmissions)

eSFP eSFP

format

type
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
mean launched
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON,
FICON Express, and FE signals.
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP optical module
can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE and DVB-ASI
signals.
NOTE
802.3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE
signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP

overload
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP optical can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP

Receiver type - APD
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access DVB-ASI, SDI, HD-SDI, HD-SDIRBR, 3G-SDI, and 3G-SDIRBR signals.

eSFP

power

power

width

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP
Receiver type - PIN
NOTE
4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-0.3 km-eSFP and 4.25 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-eSFP optical module can be used to access
FC400, and FICON4G signals.


eSFP eSFP

distance
Transmitter parameter nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

specifications at point S

launched power

launched power
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface

(FC-PI-2) parameter template

range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP

overload
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN54TOA 23 25
12.4.9 TOG Specifications


Optical Module
TN52TO N/A 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP

G 1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
Std 802.3.

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 0.85 kg (1.87 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN52TOG 41.8 46.0
12.4.10 TOM Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Module

11T eSFP (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
OM S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 eSFP
km-eSFP I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 eSFP
km-eSFP S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15
2.125 Gbit/s km-eSFP
Multirate-0.5 km-eSFP L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40
1000 BASE-LX-10 km- km-eSFP
eSFP L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80
1000 BASE-LX-40 km- km-eSFP
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
eSFP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Module

52T eSFP (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
OM S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 eSFP
km-eSFP I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 eSFP
km-eSFP S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15
1000 BASE-BX10-U- km-eSFP
eSFP L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40
1000 BASE-BX10-D- km-eSFP
eSFP L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80
1000 BASE-BX-U- km-eSFP
eSFP
1000 BASE-BX-D-
eSFP
2.125 Gbit/s
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km-
eSFP
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-
eSFP
(CWDM)-40 km-eSFP
(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
eSFP
NOTE
point.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

NOTE
I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-eSFP module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km-eSFP module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 km-
eSFP module and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 km-eSFP module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON Express, FDDI, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI
signals.



format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

side mode
suppression
ratio


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
1000 BASE-BX10-U-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX10-D-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-BX-U-eSFP module, and
1000 BASE-BX-D-eSFP module can be used to access GE signals.

transmissions)

eSFP eSFP

format

type

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP
Target km 10 10 40 40
transmission
distance

wavelength
range
mean launched
power
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 6 6 6
extinction ratio

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -12

reflectance
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate-eSFP module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals.
1000 BASE-LX-10 km-eSFP module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km-eSFP module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km-eSFP
802.3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-40 km-eSFP can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (CWDM)-80 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

width

suppression ratio


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP
Receiver type - APD
NOTE
0.1 Gbit/s to 3 Gbit/s Multirate 10 km-Video eSFP module can be used to access DVB-ASI, SDI, and HD-SDI
signals.


eSFP

power

power

width
Receiver type - PIN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP


(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP

power

power
Central wavelength nm ±6.5

deviation

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(CWDM)-80 km-eSFP
Table 12-172 DWDM-side pluggable optical module specifications (fixed wavelengths)


(DWDM)-120 km-eSFP

power

power
Center frequency deviation nm ±12.5

width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin

are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16/OC-48 services
and equivalent OTU1
services)
Receiver type - APD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-173 WDM-side pluggable optical specifications (SDH/SONET services)



format

source type

distance

wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TOM: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN52TOM: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11TOM 55 60
TN52TOM 81 89.1
12.4.11 TQM Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Board Client-Side Fixed Optical Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Module
TN12TQ N/A I-16/SR-1 OC-48-2 km-eSFP

M S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48-15 km-eSFP
L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48-40 km-eSFP
L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48-80 km-eSFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (DWDM)-120 km-eSFP
NOTE
point.

NOTE
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, and DVB-ASI signals.


format

source type

distance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
signals.
NOTE
Std 802.3.


format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

wavelengths)

eSFP eSFP

distance

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP eSFP

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload
NOTE

wavelengths)

eSFP

distance

power

power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

eSFP

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN12TQM 25 27.5
12.4.12 TQX Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Optical Module
TN11TQX/ N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km-XFP

TN52TQX/ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km-XFP
TN53TQX/
TN55TQX 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km-XFP
800-SM-LC-L-0.3 km-XFP
NOTE
point.
NOTE
optical module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 800-SM-LC-L-0.3 km-XFP optical module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.

XFP

format

source type

n distance

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

XFP
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate)
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
The 800-SM-LC-L-0.3 km-XFP module can be used to access FC800 signals.

Optical Module Type 800-SM-LC-L-0.3 km-XFP
Optical interface service rate Gbit/s 8.5
Optical source type - SLM
Maximum mean launched dBm -1

power

power
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity dBm -14.4
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
TN11TQX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
TN52TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN53TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN55TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11TQX 65.0 71.2
TN52TQX 91.5 100
TN53TQX 45 50
TN55TQX 45 50
12.4.13 TSXL Specifications

Board Client-Side Fixed Optical Client-Side Pluggable Optical

Module Module
TN11TS 40 Gbit/s Multirate-2 km N/A

XL/
TN53TS
XL
TN54TS N/A 40GBASE-LR4-10km (CFP)

XL
NOTE
point.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Receiver type - PIN
Table 12-181 Client-side pluggable optical module specifications
Optical Module Type 40G BASE-LR4-10km-

CFP
Signaling speed per Lane Gbit/s 10.3125
Signaling speed accuracy ppm -100 to 100

Wavelength
1284.5
1304.5
1324.5

Wavelength
1297.5
1317.5
1337.5

(Max)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

CFP
Total Average Launch Power dBm -1

(Min)
Transmit OMA per Lane dBm -4

(Min)

(Max)
Average Launch Power per dBm -7

Lane (Min)

Lane (Max)
Optical Extinction Ratio dB 3.5

(Min)

Ratio (Min)
Receiver type - PIN

Wavelength
1284.5
1304.5
1324.5

Wavelength
1297.5
1317.5
1337.5
Average Receiver Power per dBm -13.7

Lane (Min)
Average Receiver Power per dBm 2.3

Lane (Max)

(OMA) per Lane

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

CFP

per Lane

NOTE
TN11TSXL:
(8.7 in.)
TN53TSXL:
(8.7 in.)
TN54TSXL:
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11TSXL 90.2 96
TN53TSXL 75 83
TN54TSXL 58 64
12.5 PID Unit Specifications

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.5.1 ENQ2 Specifications

The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption Maximum Power
at 25°C (77°F) (W) Consumption at 55°C (131°F)
(W)
ENQ2 40 44
12.5.2 NPO2 Specifications

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.

Optical Module
TN55NP 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km) N/A

O2 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km)
NOTE
point.
Table 12-182 PID optical module specifications

Optical Module 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ- 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-

Type PIN (40 km) PIN (80 km)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Maximum mean dBm +2 +2

launched power
(single wavelength)

launched power
(single wavelength)
ratio
Center frequency GHz ±5 ±5

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm TN55NPO2S01 to -12

(FEC enabled) EOL TN55NPO2S04: -13.5
TN55NPO2S06,
TN55NPO2S08: -15.5
TN55NPO2S0A,
TN55NPO2S0B: -15.5

overload
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
TN55NPO2:
(8.7 in.)
TN54PQ2:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69
in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN55NPO2 143 157.3
TN54PQ2 1.1 1.2
12.5.3 NPO2E Specifications

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.

Optical Module
TN55NP 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km) N/A

O2E 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km)
NOTE
point.
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side
Table 12-183 PID optical module specifications

Maximum mean dBm +2 +2

launched power
(single wavelength)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


launched power
(single wavelength)
ratio
Center frequency GHz ±5 ±5

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

wavelength range

(FEC enabled) EOL

overload
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
Table 12-184 Specifications of the red and blue band filters on the TN55NPO2E board
Item Unit Value
Working wavelength in the C nm 1528 to 1561

band
Working wavelength in the blue THz 196.0 to 193.8

band (T01/R01)
Working wavelength in the red THz 193.6 to 191.4

band (T02/R02)
Demultiplexing loss (RI->T01, dB ≤1

RI->T02)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Multiplexing loss (R01–>T0, dB ≤1

R02->T0)
Isolation between red and blue dB ≥ 13

bands
TN55NPO2E:
(8.7 in.)
TN54PQ2:
l Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69
in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN55NPO2E 143 157.3
TN54PQ2 1.1 1.2
12.6 Cross-Connect Board and System and Communication

Board Specifications
12.6.1 SXM Specifications

Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
TNK2SXM:
l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) or 1.4 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
Board Power Power Typical Power Maximum
Consumption Consumption Consumption Power
at Warm at Warm at 25°C (77°F) Consumption
Backup (25°C, Backup (55°C, (W) at 55°C (131°F)
77°F) (W) 131°F) (W) (W)
TNK2SXM 190 209 530–3.6 x (64– 583–3.6 x (64–

+TNK2XCT n) n)
TNK2SXM 173 190 378–2.5 x (64– 416–2.5 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXM
and XCT must be configured.
12.6.2 SXH Specifications

TNK4SXH:
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
l Weight: 2.68 kg (5.8Ib.)
Power Consumption
77°F) (W) 131°F) (W) (W)
TNK4SXH 95 105 169–1.2 x (64– 186–1.32 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK4SXH 112 123 321–2.5 x (64- 353–2.5 x (64-

+TNK2XCT n) n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the SXH
and XCT must be configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.6.3 XCT Specifications

TNK2XCT:
l Dimensions of front panel: 34.1 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))
TNK4XCT:
in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
77°F) (W) 131°F) (W) (W)
TNK2SXM 190 209 530–3.6 x (64– 583–3.6 x (64–

+TNK2XCT n) n)
TNK4SXH 95 105 169–1.2 x (64– 186–1.32 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK2SXM 173 190 378–2.5 x (64– 416–2.5 x (64–

+TNK4XCT n) n)
TNK4SXH 112 123 321–2.5 x (64- 353–2.5 x (64-

+TNK2XCT n) n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the
SXM/SXH and XCT must be configured.
12.6.4 TN52XCH Specifications

l Dimensions of the front panel: 27.9 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
l Weight: 3.40 kg (7.49 lb.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
77°F) (W) 131°F) (W) (W)
TN52XCH01 65 72 243 - 3.6 x (32 - 267.3 - 3.6 x (32

n) - n)
TN52XCH02 43 47.3 101 - 1.12 x (32 111 - 1.12 x (32

- n) - n)
NOTE
12.6.5 TN16XCH Specifications

l Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))
Power Consumption
77°F) (W) 131°F) (W) (W)
TN16XCH 40 48 73–1.4 x (16–n) 88.8–1.4 x (16–

n)
NOTE
12.6.6 XCS Specifications

(8.7 in.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN12XCS 25.0 27.5
12.6.7 SCC Specifications

Dimensions of front panel:
l TN16SCC: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8
in. (H)
l TN22SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7
in. (H)
l TN51SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4
in. (H)
l TN52SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4
in. (H)
l TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4
in. (H)
Weight:
l TN16SCC: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)
l TN22SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
l TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
l TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
l TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN16SCC 32.0 35.0
TN22SCC 10.0 13.0
TN51SCC 18.0 20.0
TN52SCC 23.0 25.1
TNK2SCC 26.7 29.3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.6.8 AUX Specifications

l Dimensions of the front panel:
– TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
– TN41AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 133.4 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
5.3 in. (H))
4.2 in. (H))
4.7 in. (H))
4.7 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
– TN41AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
– TN51AUX: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb.)
– TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
– TN61AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN16AUX 16.5 19.2
TN22AUX 15.0 17.0
TN41AUX 12.8 14
TN51AUX 17.5 19.0
TN61AUX 15.0 17.0
12.7 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit

Specifications
12.7.1 D40 Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Optical Specifications
Table 12-185 lists the optical specifications of the D40.
Table 12-185 Optical specifications of the D40
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5
Reflectance dB < -40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5
Temperature characteristics nm/°C < 0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤3
-1 dB bandwidth nm ≥ 0.2
-20 dB bandwidth nm < 1.4
l Dimensions of front panel:
– TN11D40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
– TN12D40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11D40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
– TN12D40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11D40 10.0 13.0
TN12D40 10.0 13.0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.7.2 D40V Specifications

Table 12-186 lists the optical specifications of the D40V board.
Table 12-186 Optical specifications of the D40V board

Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB ≤ 8a
Attenuation range dB 0-15
Loss accuracy dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)
≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤ 3a

NOTE
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
D40V 38.5 42.3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.7.3 DFIU Specifications

Table 12-187 Optical specifications of the DFIU board

Interface Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength nm 1529-1561

range

range of optical
supervisory channel
- Optical return loss dB > 40
EIN-ETM Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.5

ERM-EOUT
WIN-WTM
WRM-WOUT
EIN-ETC Insertion loss dB ≤1

ERC-EOUT
WIN-WTC
WRC-WOUT
EIN-ETM Isolation dB > 40

WIN-WTM
EIN-ETC Isolation dB > 12

WIN-WTC
Polarization dependent dB < 0.2

loss
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in.
(D) x 4.7 in. (H))

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN21DFIU 0.2 0.3
12.7.4 FIU Specifications

Table 12-188 Optical specifications of the FIU board


range
- Operating wavelength nm TN13FIU/TN21FIU: 1500-1520

range of optical TN14FIU: 1480-1520
supervisory channel
- Optical return loss dB > 40
IN-TM Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.5

RM-OUT
IN-TC Insertion loss dB ≤1

RC-OUT
IN-TM Isolation dB > 40
IN-TC Isolation dB > 12
- Polarization dependent dB < 0.2

loss
TN13FIU/TN14FIU:
(8.7 in.)
TN21FIU:
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220.0 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN13FIU/TN21FIU 0.2 0.3
12.7.5 ITL Specifications

Table 12-189 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01

Item Unit Value
Input channel spacinga - GHz 100
Output channel spacinga - GHz 50
Insertion loss RE-OUT dB < 4.5

RO-OUT
IN-TE dB < 2.5

IN-TO
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB <1
Isolation IN-TE dB > 25

IN-TO
Maximum reflectance - dB -40
Directivity - dB > 45
PMD - ps < 0.5
Polarization dependent loss - dB < 0.5
Input optical power range - dBm ≤ 26
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-190 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04

Item Unit Value
Input channel spacinga - GHz 100
Output channel spacinga - GHz 50
Insertion loss RE-OUT dB <3

RO-OUT
IN-TE dB <3
IN-TO
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB <1
Isolation IN-TE dB > 25

IN-TO
Maximum reflectance - dB -40
Directivity - dB > 45
PMD - ps < 0.5
Polarization dependent loss - dB < 0.5
Input optical power range - dBm ≤ 26
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical power Maximum power
consumption at 25°C (77° consumption at 55°C
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11ITL 0.2 0.3
12.7.6 M40 Specifications

Table 12-191 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-191 Optical specifications of the M40 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤ 0.5
Temperature characteristics nm/°C ≤ 0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤3
– TN11M40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
– TN12M40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11M40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
– TN12M40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11M40 10.0 13.0
TN12M40 10.0 13.0
12.7.7 M40V Specifications

Table 12-192 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-192 Optical specifications of the M40V board

Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB ≤ 8a
Loss accuracy dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)
≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤ 3a

NOTE
– TN11M40V: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
– TN12M40V: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
– TN12M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11M40V 20.0 25.0
TN12M40V 16.0 26.0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.8 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit

Specifications
12.8.1 CMR1 Specifications

Table 12-193 lists the optical specifications of the CMR1 board.
Table 12-193 Optical specifications of the CMR1 board

Correspondi Item Unit Value
ng interfaces
- Operating wavelength range nm 1260-1360
IN-D Drop channel insertion loss dB ≤1
Isolation dB > 40
A-OUT Add channel insertion loss dB ≤1
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ≤ 0.8

MI-OUT
Isolation dB ≥ 25
- Reflectance dB < -40
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The CMR1 adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN21CMR1 0.2 0.3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Correspondin Item Unit Value

g interfaces

range
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

IN-D2
Drop channel insertion dB ≤ 1.5
loss
Adjacent channel dB > 25

isolation
Non-adjacent channel dB > 35

isolation
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion dB ≤ 1.5
loss

MI-OUT
Isolation dB ≥ 13
- Maximum reflectance dB -40
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.

The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR2 are as follows.
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
CMR2 0.2 0.3


g interfaces
- Operating wavelength nm 1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded)

range
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

IN-D2
Drop channel insertion dB ≤2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
isolation

isolation
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion dB ≤2
A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

g interfaces

MI-OUT
Isolation dB ≥ 13
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are four wavelength groups.
Table 12-196 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board

Group Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
1 1291 1311 1331 1351
2 1391 1411 1431 1451
3 1471 1491 1591 1611
4 1511 1531 1551 1571
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR4 board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR4 board are as follows:
8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
CMR4 0.2 0.3
12.8.4 DMR1 Specifications

Table 12-197 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board

g interfaces
EA/ED/WA/ Operating wavelength nm 1260-1360

WD range
EIN-ED Drop channel insertion dB ≤1

WIN-WD loss
Isolation dB ≥40
EA-EOUT Add channel insertion dB ≤1

WA-WOUT loss
Isolation dB ≥40
EIN-EMO Insertion loss dB ≤ 0.8

WIN-WMO
Isolation dB ≥ 25
EMI-EOUT Insertion loss dB ≤ 0.8

WMI-WOUT
Isolation dB ≥ 15

The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west
directions from the multiplexed signals.
Mechanical specifications of the TN11DMR1 board:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
Mechanical specifications of the TN21DMR1 board:
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
DMR1 0.2 0.3
12.8.5 MR2 Specifications

Table 12-198 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board.
Table 12-198 Optical specifications of the MR2 board

g interfaces

range
- Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
IN-D1 -1dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

IN-D2
loss

isolation

isolation
A1-OUT -1dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

A2-OUT
loss

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

g interfaces
MI-OUT Isolation dB > 13
- Polarization dependence dB < 0.2

loss

The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping wavelengths.
The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
The mechanical specifications of TN21MR2 are as follows:
l Dimensions of front panel: 118.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 4.7 in. (H) x
8.7 in. (D) x 1 in. (W)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MR2 0.2 0.3


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


range

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
isolation

isolation

A2-OUT
A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT

MI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/from the
multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-200 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board

G C A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
r h
o ar Wa Wav Fre W Wa Fre W Wa Fre W Wave Freq
u a vel elen que a vele qu av vele que av lengt uenc
p ct en gth ncy v ngt enc el ngt ncy el h y
er gth (nm) (T el h y en h (TH en (nm) (THz
is No Hz) e (nm (T gt (nm z) gt )
ti . n ) Hz h ) h
c gt ) N N
C h o. o.
o N
d o.
e
1 9 80 1560 192. 7 155 192 76 155 192. 74 1558. 192.4

2 .61 10 8 9.79 .20 8.98 30 17 0
1
0
9
2
4
0
2 9 72 1557 192. 7 155 192 68 155 192. 66 1554. 192.8

2 .36 50 0 6.55 .60 5.75 70 94 0
5
0
9
2
8
0
3 9 64 1554 192. 6 155 193 60 155 193. 58 1551. 193.2

2 .13 90 2 3.33 .00 2.52 10 72 0
9
0
9
3
2
0
4 9 56 1550 193. 5 155 193 52 154 193. 50 1548. 193.6

3 .92 30 4 0.12 .40 9.32 50 51 0
3
0
9
3
6
0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
G C A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4

r h
ti . n ) Hz h ) h
c gt ) N N
C h o. o.
o N
d o.
e
5 9 48 1547 193. 4 154 193 44 154 193. 42 1545. 194.0

3 .72 70 6 6.92 .80 6.12 90 32 0
7
0
9
4
0
0
6 9 40 1544 194. 3 154 194 36 154 194. 34 1542. 194.4

4 .53 10 8 3.73 .20 2.94 30 14 0
1
0
9
4
4
0
7 9 32 1541 194. 3 154 194 28 153 194. 26 1538. 194.8

4 .35 50 0 0.56 .60 9.77 70 98 0
5
0
9
4
8
0
8 9 24 1538 194. 2 153 195 20 153 195. 18 1535. 195.2

4 .19 90 2 7.40 .00 6.61 10 82 0
9
0
9
5
2
0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
G C A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4

r h
ti . n ) Hz h ) h
c gt ) N N
C h o. o.
o N
d o.
e
9 9 16 1535 195. 1 153 195 12 153 195. 10 1532. 195.6

5 .04 30 4 4.25 .40 3.47 50 68 0
3
0
9
5
6
0
1 9 8 1531 195. 6 153 195 4 153 195. 2 1529. 196.0

0 5 .90 70 1.12 .80 0.33 90 55 0
7
0
9
6
0
0
Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
Mechanical specifications of TN21MR4 board are as follows:
l Dimensions of front panel: 118.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 4.7 in. (H) x
8.7 in. (D) x 1 in. (W)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MR4 0.2 0.3


range

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
IN-D5
isolation
IN-D6
IN-D7 Non-adjacent channel dB > 35
isolation
IN-D8

A2-OUT
A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
IN-MRO Insertion loss dB ≤ 3.5

MRI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 12-202 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8
Group 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Code 92109280 92909360 93709440 94509520 95309600
A1/D1 Waveleng 80 64 48 32 16
th No.
Waveleng 1560.61 1554.13 1547.72 1541.35 1535.04

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.10 192.90 193.70 194.50 195.30

y (THz)
A2/D2 Waveleng 78 62 46 30 14
th No.
Waveleng 1559.79 1553.33 1546.92 1540.56 1534.25

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.20 193.00 193.80 194.60 195.40

y (THz)
A3/D3 Waveleng 76 60 44 28 12
th No.
Waveleng 1558.98 1552.52 1546.12 1539.77 1533.47

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.30 193.10 193.90 194.70 195.50

y (THz)
A4/D4 Waveleng 74 58 42 26 10
th No.
Waveleng 1558.17 1551.72 1545.32 1538.98 1532.68

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.40 193.20 194.00 194.80 195.60

y (THz)
A5/D5 Waveleng 72 56 40 24 8
th No.
Waveleng 1557.36 1550.92 1544.53 1538.19 1531.90

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.50 193.30 194.10 194.90 195.70

y (THz)
A6/D6 Waveleng 70 54 38 22 6
th No.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Group 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Code 92109280 92909360 93709440 94509520 95309600
Waveleng 1556.55 1550.12 1543.73 1537.40 1531.12

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.60 193.40 194.20 195.00 195.80

y (THz)
A7/D7 Waveleng 68 52 36 20 4
th No.
Waveleng 1555.75 1549.32 1542.94 1536.61 1530.33

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.70 193.50 194.30 195.10 195.90

y (THz)
A8/D8 Waveleng 66 50 34 18 2
th No.
Waveleng 1554.94 1548.51 1542.14 1535.82 1529.55

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.80 193.60 194.40 195.20 196.00

y (THz)
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MR8 0.2 0.3
12.8.8 MR8V Specifications

Table 12-203 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-203 Optical specifications of the MR8V board

g interfaces

range
IN-D1 –1 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
IN-D5
isolation
IN-D6
IN-D7 Non-adjacent channel dB > 35
isolation
IN-D8
A1-OUT –1 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

A2-OUT
A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation ≤ 10 dB)
A7-OUT 1.5 (attenuation ≤ 15 dB)
A8-OUT 1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)
VI-VO
IN-MRO Insertion loss dB ≤ 3.5

MRI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13

The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 12-204 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V

Group 1 2 3 4 5
A1/D1 Waveleng 80 64 48 32 16
th No.
Waveleng 1560.61 1554.13 1547.72 1541.35 1535.04

th (nm)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Group 1 2 3 4 5
Frequenc 192.10 192.90 193.70 194.50 195.30

y (THz)
A2/D2 Waveleng 78 62 46 30 14
th No.
Waveleng 1559.79 1553.33 1546.92 1540.56 1534.25

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.20 193.00 193.80 194.60 195.40

y (THz)
A3/D3 Waveleng 76 60 44 28 12
th No.
Waveleng 1558.98 1552.52 1546.12 1539.77 1533.47

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.30 193.10 193.90 194.70 195.50

y (THz)
A4/D4 Waveleng 74 58 42 26 10
th No.
Waveleng 1558.17 1551.72 1545.32 1538.98 1532.68

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.40 193.20 194.00 194.80 195.60

y (THz)
A5/D5 Waveleng 72 56 40 24 8
th No.
Waveleng 1557.36 1550.92 1544.53 1538.19 1531.90

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.50 193.30 194.10 194.90 195.70

y (THz)
A6/D6 Waveleng 70 54 38 22 6
th No.
Waveleng 1556.55 1550.12 1543.73 1537.40 1531.12

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.60 193.40 194.20 195.00 195.80

y (THz)
A7/D7 Waveleng 68 52 36 20 4
th No.
Waveleng 1555.75 1549.32 1542.94 1536.61 1530.33

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.70 193.50 194.30 195.10 195.90

y (THz)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Group 1 2 3 4 5
A8/D8 Waveleng 66 50 34 18 2
th No.
Waveleng 1554.94 1548.51 1542.14 1535.82 1529.55

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.80 193.60 194.40 195.20 196.00

y (THz)
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MR8V 7.7 8.6
12.8.9 SBM2 Specifications

Table 12-205 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2 board.
Table 12-205 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board
- Operating wavelength CWDM nm 1271 to 1611

range
LINE-D1 Drop channel insertion loss dB ≤3

LINE-D2
Isolation dB ≥ 30
A1-LINE Add channel insertion loss dB ≤3

A2-LINE
Isolation dB ≥ 30
Optical return loss dB > 40
Pass-through loss dB ≤ 1.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
SMB2 0.2 0.3
12.9 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing

Unit Specifications
12.9.1 RDU9 Specifications

Table 12-206 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board

Item Unit Value
Insertion loss IN-Drop (DM1-DM8) dB ≤ 12.5
ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8) dB ≤ 11.5
IN-EXPO dB ≤ 12.5
IN-TOA dB ≤1
Consistency of the insertion loss of each dB ≤ 1.2

channel

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11RDU9 6.0 6.6
12.9.2 RMU9 Specifications

Table 12-207 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board.
Table 12-207 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss EXPI-OUT dB ≤ 8.5
AMxa-TOA dB ≤ 12.5b
ROA-OUT dB ≤ 1.5
Attenuation precision dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)

< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
VOA attenuation under channel blocking dB > 42

functionc

NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11RMU901 7.7 8.6
TN11RMU902 8.2 9
12.9.3 ROAM Specifications

Table 12-208 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM board.
Table 12-208 Optical specifications of the ROAM board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss Mxa-OUT dB ≤ 9b
IN-DM dB ≤7
EXPI-OUT dB ≤ 14b
IN-EXPO dB ≤3
Operating wavelength range nm 1529 - 1561
Attenuation range dB 0 to 20
Attenuation precision dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Module switch time ms ≤ 50
Extinction ratio dB ≥ 30
-0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength nm > 0.3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
-0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through nm > 0.2

wavelength
NOTE
a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11ROAM 66 72.6
12.9.4 WSD9 Specifications

Table 12-209 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9
Optical channels - 40 80
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100 50
Insertion loss IN-DMxa dB ≤ 8b ≤ 8b

IN-EXPO
Maximum channel insertion loss dB 1.5 1.5

difference
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16
Port isolation dB > 25 > 25

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Type - TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25 > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 30 > 30
Extinction ratio dB ≥ 35 ≥ 35
Reconfiguration time s ≤3 ≤3
Directivity dB 35 35
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤1 ≤1
Attenuation range of each of dB 0-15 0-15

dropping wavelengths
Attenuation precision of each of dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB) ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

dropping wavelengths ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE
a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.
l TN12WSD9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
l TN13WSD9: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
Weight:
l TN12WSD9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
l TN13WSD9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN12WSD9 25.4 28.5
TN13WSD9 25.4 28.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.9.5 WSM9 Specifications

Table 12-210 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9
Insertion AMxa-OUT dB ≤ 8b ≤ 8b
loss
EXPI-OUT
Maximum channel insertion dB 1.5 1.5

loss difference
-1 dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25 > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 30 > 30

adding wavelengths

adding wavelengths ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l TN12WSM9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
l TN13WSM9: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
Weight:
l TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
l TN13WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN12WSM9 25.4 28.5
TN13WSM9 25.4 28.5
12.9.6 WSMD2 Specifications

Table 12-211 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD2 board.
Table 12-211 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board
Item Unit Value
Optical channels - 40
-1 dB spectral width nm > 0.32
Insertion loss AM-OUT dB ≤ 8a

EXPI-OUT
IN-DM ≤ 4.5a
IN-EXPO
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 1.5
Port isolation dB > 25
Reconfiguration time s ≤3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Directivity dB 35
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤1
Attenuation range of each of adding dB 0-15

wavelength
Attenuation precision of each of adding dB ≤ 1 (0 dB to 10 dB)

wavelength ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11WSMD2 17.0 18.7

Table 12-212 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 board

Item Unit Value
TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16
Insertion loss AMxa-OUT dB ≤ 8b ≤ 8b

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4
IN-DMxa ≤8 ≤8
Maximum channel insertion dB 1.5 1.5

loss difference

adding wavelength

adding wavelength ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Dimension - 4 4
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN11WSMD4: 3.2 kg (7.1 lb.)
– TN12WSMD4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11WSMD4 17 18.7
TN12WSMD4 12 15

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Table 12-213 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD9 board

Item Unit Value
Insertion loss AMxa/EXPI-OUT dB ≤ 8b
IN-DMxa/EXPO ≤ 12
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 1.5
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.16
Port isolation dB > 25
Reconfiguration time s ≤3
Directivity dB 35
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤1
Attenuation range of each of adding dB 0 to 15

wavelength
Attenuation precision of each of adding dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)

wavelength < 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Dimension - 9
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.
(8.7 in.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11WSMD9 25 30
12.10 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications
12.10.1 CRPC Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.
Table 12-214 Optical specifications of the CRPC board

Item Un Value
it
CRPC01 CRPC03
Pump wavelength range nm 1400-1500 1400-1500
Maximum pump power dB 29 29.5

m
Channel gain on G.652 fiber dB > 10 > 10
Channel gain on G.653 fiber dB N/A > 16
Channel gain on LEAF fiber dB > 12 N/A
Channel gain on TWRS fiber dB > 13 N/A
Effective noise figure on G.652 dB ≤0 N/A

fiber
Effective noise figure on G.653 dB N/A N/A

fiber
Effective noise figure on LEAF dB ≤ -1 N/A

fiber
Effective noise figure on dB ≤ -1.5 N/A

TWRS fiber
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5
Output connector type - LSH/APC, LC/PC LSH/APC, LC/PC

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Dimensions of board: 345.0 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 76.0 mm (W) or 13.8 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 3.0 in. (W)
Weight
l CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.)
l CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
CRPC01 110.0 121.0
CRPC03 70.0 77.0
12.10.2 DAS1 Specifications

Table 12-215 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board
Item Uni Value

t
Specifica Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561 1529-1561

tions of
OA Nominal gain dB 20 26 31
Nominal input power range dB -32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11

m
Input power range 40 dB -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27

per channel channels m
80 dB -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30

channels m
Nominal single- 40 dB -16 -22 -27

wavelength input channels m
optical power
80 dB -19 -25 -30
channels m
Nominal single- 40 dB 4 4 4
wavelength input channels m
optical power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Uni Value

t
80 dB 1 1 1
channels m
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤ 8.5 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 5.5
Gain response time on adding/ ms < 10 < 10 < 10

dropping of channels
Channel gain dB 20 to 31
Gain flatness dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0
Multi-channel gain slope dB/ ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0

dB
Input reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Pump leakage at input dB < -30 < -30 < -30

m
Maximum reflectance tolerance dB -27 -27 -27

at input
Maximum reflectance tolerance dB -27 -27 -27

at output
Maximum total output optical dB 20 20 20

power m
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5
Input VOA inherent insertion dB ≤ 1.5

loss
Input VOA dynamic attenuation dB 20

range
Input VOA adjustment accuracy dB 1
Specifica Operating wavelength range of nm 1480 to 1520

tions of optical supervisory channel
demultipl
exer and Optical return loss dB > 40
multiplex Insert loss of optical LIN-TM dB ≤ 1.5
er supervisory
channel RM-
LOUT
Insert loss of C-band dB ≤1
Polarization dependent loss dB < 0.2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Uni Value

t
Specifica Operating wavelength range nm 1504.5 to 1517.5

tions of
OSC Signal rate Mbi 155.52
optical t/s
module Launched optical power dB 0.5 to 5
m
Receiver sensitivity dB ≤ -41

m
Receiver overload dB -10

m
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (131°F)
TN11DAS1 22 28.6
12.10.3 HBA Specifications

Table 12-216 Optical specifications of the HBA board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN11HBA
Channel allocation nm 1529 - 1561
Nominal input power range dBm -25 to -3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Typical input power of a single dBm 80-channel system: -22

wavelength 40-channel system: -19
10-channel system: -13
Noise figure (NF) dB <8
Input reflectance dB < -45
Output reflectance dB < -45
Maximum total output power dBm 26
Gain response time on adding/dropping of ms < 10

channels
Channel gain dB 29±1
Gain flatness dB ≤ 2.5
Polarization dependent loss dB < 0.5
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
HBA 47 75
12.10.4 OAU1 Specifications

Table 12-217 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561 1529-1561
Nominal gain dB 16 22 25.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -20 to 2 -26 to -4 -32 to -7.5
Input power range per 40 channels dBm -32 to -14 -32 to -20 -32 to -23.5
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -17 -32 to -23 -32 to -26.5
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm -14 -20 -23.5

wavelength input
optical power 80 channels dBm -17 -23 -26.5
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm 2 2 2

wavelength output
optical power 80 channels dBm -1 -1 -1
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤8 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 5.5

Channel gain dB 16 to 25.5
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30 < -30 < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at dB -27 -27 -27

input

output
Maximum total output optical power dBm 18 18 18
VI-VO Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
Adjustment accuracy dB 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-218 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 board

Item Unit Value
Nominal gain dB 20 26 31
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11
Input power range per 40 channels dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm -16 -22 -27

wavelength input

wavelength output
optical power 80 channels dBm 1 1 1

(TN11OAU101,
TN12OAU101)
≤ 7.5
(TN13OAU101)

Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0

input

output
VI-VOb Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
Adjustment accuracyb dB 1
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
Table 12-219 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 board

Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to -3 -32 to -9 -32 to -14
Input power range per 40 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -22 -32 to -28 -32
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm -19 -25 -30

wavelength input

wavelength output
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤ 7.5 ≤5.5 ≤5.5

Gain flatness dB ≤2 ≤2 ≤2
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤2 ≤2 ≤2

input

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value

output

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1.

Item Unit Value
Input power range 40 dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -25 -32

per channel channels
80 dBm -32 to -23 -32 to -28 -32

channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm -20 -25 -32

wavelength input channels
optical power
80 dBm -23 -28 -32
channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm 4 4 4

wavelength output channels
optical power
80 dBm 1 1 1
channels

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value

(TN11OAU103,
TN12OAU103)
≤ 6.5
(TN13OAU103)


input

output
Maximum total output optical dBm 20 20 20

power

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range

Item Unit Value

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -7 -32 to -11
Input power range 40 dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -23 -32 to -27
80 dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -26 -32 to -30

channels

optical power
80 dBm -19 -26 -30
channels

optical power
80 dBm 4 4 4
channels
Noise figure (NF)a dB < 8.5 <6 <6

Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 <-40

input

output

power

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Table 12-222 Optical specifications of the TN13OAU106 board

Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -24 to 4 -24 to 1 -24 to -3
Input power range 40 dBm -24 to -12 -24 to -15 -24 to -19
80 dBm -24 to -15 -24 to -18 -24 to -22

channels

optical power
80 dBm -15 -18 -22
channels

optical power
80 dBm 1 1 1
channels
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤7 ≤6 ≤5

Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 <-40

input

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value

output

power
VI-VO Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
Adjustment accuracy dB 1
– TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
– TN13OAU1: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 1.8 kg (4.0 lb.)
– TN13OAU1: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (131°F)
TN11OAU101 18.0 24.0
TN11OAU102 14.0 18.0
TN11OAU103 18.0 24.0
TN11OAU105 22.0 29.0
TN12OAU100 11.0 14.0
TN12OAU101 12.0 15.0
TN12OAU102 10.0 13.0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

F) (131°F)
TN12OAU103 12.0 15.0
TN12OAU105 15.0 21.0
TN13OAU101 12.0 15.0
TN13OAU103 12.0 15.0
TN13OAU105 15.0 21.0
TN13OAU106 12.0 15.0
12.10.5 OBU1 Specifications

Table 12-223 Optical specifications of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board
Item Unit Value
TN11OBU10 TN11OBU10 TN11OBU10

1/ 3/ 4/
1 3 4
Input power 40 dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -19 -32 to -17

range per channels
channel
80 -32 to -23 -32 to -22 -32 to -20
channels

wavelength channels
input optical
power 80 -23 -22 -20
channels

wavelength channels
output optical
power 80 -3 1 -3
channels
Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 5.5 ≤ 6.0 ≤ 5.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value

1/ 3/ 4/
1 3 4

Channel gain dB 20±1.5 23±1.5 17±1.5

tolerance at input

tolerance at output

power
Multi-channel gain slope dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0
VI-VOa Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuatio
n range
Adjustment accuracya dB 1
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU1.
Table 12-224 Optical specifications of the OBU1P1 board

Item Unit Value
Total input power range at dBm -30 to 7

the VI optical port

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30

tolerance at input

tolerance at output
Maximum total output dBm 9

optical power
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
l TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)
l TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11OBU101 11.0 13.0
TN11OBU103 13.0 15.0
TN11OBU104 12.0 14.0
TN12OBU101 10.0 11.0
TN12OBU103 11.0 12.0
TN12OBU104 10.0 12.0
TN12OBU1P1 10.0 11.0
12.10.6 OBU2 Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-225 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board
Item Unit Value
OBU205
Nominal input power range dBm -24 to 0
Input power range per 40 dBm -24 to -16

channel Channels
80 -24 to -19
Channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm -16

wavelength input Channels
optical power
80 -19
Channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm 7

wavelength output Channels
optical power
80 4
Channels
Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 7.0
Nominal gain dB 23
Gain response time on adding/ ms < 10

Channel gain dB 23±1.5
Gain flatness dB ≤ 2.0
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at dB -27

input
Maximum reflectance tolerance at dB -27

output
Maximum total output optical dBm 23

power
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
OBU205
VI-VOa Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuatio
n range
Adjustment accuracya dB 1
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU2.
(8.7 in.)
l Weight:
– TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
– TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11OBU205 17 24
TN12OBU205 14 19
12.10.7 RAU1 Specifications

Table 12-226 Optical specifications of the TN11RAU1 board
Item Unit Value
RAU1 Operating nm 1529 to 1561

board wavelength
specific range
ations
Gain range dB G.652 fibers 19 to 33

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
LEAF fibers 19 to 35
G.653 fibers 19 to 35
TWRS fibers 19 to 35
TW-C fibers 19 to 35
Equivalent dB G.652 fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

noise figurea < 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.5 (26 dB gain)
< 1.0 (30 dB gain)
LEAF fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
G.653 fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TWRS fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
TW-C fibers < 5.5 (19 dB gain)

< 3.0 (22 dB gain)
< 1.0 (26 dB gain)
< 0.5 (30 dB gain)
Gain flatness dB G.652 fibers < 3.0

(LINE port to
OUT port) LEAF fibers < 3.0
G.653 fibers < 3.0
TWRS fibers < 3.0
TW-C fibers < 3.0
LINE port dBm -40 to 1

input optical
power
Max. OUT dBm 20

port optical
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Pump nm 1400 to 1500

wavelength
for the LINE
port
Pump optical nW ≥700

power of the
LINE port
PDG dB ≤ 0.7
PMD ps ≤ 0.7
Raman Operating nm 1529 to 1561

module wavelength
specific range
ations
Input optical dBm ≤1
power
Valid gainb dB G.652 fibers 5 to 10
LEAF fibers 5 to 12
G.653 fibers 5 to 12
TWRS fibers 5 to 12
TW-C fibers 5 to 12
SYS port dB < -40

reflectance
LINE port dBm < -40

reflectance
PDG dB ≤ 0.5
PMD ps ≤ 0.5
Pump nm 1400 to 1500

wavelength
Max. pump mW ≥700

optical power
EDFA Operating nm 1529 to 1561

specific wavelength
ations range
Input optical dBm -30 to 6

power
Output dBm -7 to 20
optical power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Gain flatness dB < 2.0
Multi- dB < 2.0

channel gain
slope
PDG dB ≤ 0.5
PMD ps ≤ 0.5
Input dB < -40

reflectance
Output dB < -40

reflectance
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies according to the gain. The previous table lists
the noise figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
b: The gain of the Raman module can be set to the maximum value. The actual gain of the board is a variable and
depends on the fiber type and status.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight: 2.5 kg (5.5 Ib.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11RAU1 55 70
12.11 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications
12.11.1 HSC1 Specifications

NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board
and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board
are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-227 lists the optical specifications of the HSC1 board.
Table 12-227 Optical specifications of the HSC1 board
Item Unit Value
Signal rate Mbit/s 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm 5 to 10
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -48
Receiver overload dBm -3
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
HSC1 8.0 8.8
12.11.2 SC1 Specifications

Table 12-228 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board.
Table 12-228 Optical specifications of the SC1 board
Item Unit Value
Signal ratea Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Signal coding - CMI

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -46 ≤ -48
a: The SC1 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
SC1 11.0 14.9
12.11.3 SC2 Specifications

Table 12-229 lists the optical specifications of the SC2.
Table 12-229 Optical specifications of the SC2 board
Item Unit Value
Signal ratea Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -46 ≤ -48

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
a: The SC2 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
SC2 13.5 14.5
12.11.4 ST2 Specifications

Table 12-230 lists the optical specifications of the ST2.
Table 12-230 Optical specifications of the ST2 board
Item Unit Value
Signal rate Mbit/s 155.52
Operating wavelength range nm 1504.5 to 1517.5
Launched optical power dBm 0.5 to 5
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -41
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 0.95 kg (2.09 lb.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
ST2 17.5 19.5
12.12 Clock Unit Specifications
12.12.1 STG Specifications

l Dimensions of the front panel:
– TNK2STG: 50.3mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2
in. (H))
– TN52STG: 28.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.2 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN52STG/TNK2STG: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TNK2STG 14.0 16.0
TN52STG 13.0 14.1
12.13 Optical Protection Unit Specifications
12.13.1 DCP Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-231 Optical specifications of the DCP board

TN12DCP
TI1-TO11 Insertion loss at Single-mode dB ≤4

TI1-TO12 the transmit end
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
RI11-RO1 Insertion loss at Single-mode dB ≤1.5

RI12-RO1 the receive end
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Range of the input optical power Single-mode dBm -35 to 7
Operating wavelength range Single-mode nm 1270 to 1350,

1528 to 1567
Switching threshold of optical power difference dB 5
Range of the alarm threshold for the optical power dB 3 to 8

difference
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
DCP 6.8 7.5
12.13.2 OLP Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-232 Optical specifications of the OLP board
TN12OLP01 TN12OLP03
TI-TO1 Insertion single dB ≤4 ≤4

TI-TO2 loss at the mode
transmit
end
RI1-RO Insertion single dB ≤1.5 ≤1.5

RI2-RO loss at the mode
receive
end
Range of the input single dBm -35 to 7 -30 to 23

optical power mode
Operating wavelength single nm 1270 to 1350, 1270 to 1350,

range mode 1528 to 1567 1528 to 1567
Switching threshold of optical power dB 5 5

difference
Range of the alarm threshold for the dB 3 to 8 3 to 8

optical power difference
(8.7 in.)
Weight
l TN12OLP: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN12OLP 4.0 4.5
12.13.3 SCS Specifications


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-233 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board.
Table 12-233 Optical specifications of the SCS board
TI1-TO11 Splitting Single-mode dB ≤4

TI1-TO12 insertion loss
Multi-mode dB ≤4.5
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
RI11-RO1 Coupling Single-mode dB ≤4

RI12-RO1 insertion loss
Multi-mode dB ≤4.5
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Operating wavelength range Single-mode nm 1270 to 1350, 1528 to

1567
Multi-mode nm 830 to 870
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
SCS 0.2 0.3
12.14 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications
12.14.1 MCA4 Specifications

Table 12-234 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-234 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board
Item Unit Value
Channel spacing GHz 50/100
Detect range for single channel optical power dBm -30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power dB ±1.5
OSNR detection accuracy (The OSNR of 10 dB ±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)

Gbit/s signals can be detected.) ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm ±0.1
Numbers of optical interface pcs 4
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MCA4 8.0 8.5
12.14.2 MCA8 Specifications

Table 12-235 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board.
Table 12-235 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board
Item Unit Value
Detect accuracy for optical power dB ±1.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Item Unit Value
OSNR detection accuracy (The OSNR of 10 dB ±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)

Gbit/s signals can be detected.) ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm ±0.1
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MCA8 12.0 13.0
12.14.3 OPM8 Specifications

Table 12-236 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board.
Table 12-236 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board
Item Unit Value
Detected accuracy for optical power dB ±1.5
(8.7 in.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11OPM8 12 15
12.14.4 WMU Specifications

Table 12-237 Optical specifications of the WMU board
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 50/100
Per-channel input optical power range dBm -36 to -16
Detect accuracy for central wavelength GHz <2.5
Detect accuracy for single channel optical dB <2

power
Detect range for Central wavelength offset GHz -10 to 10
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Typical Power Maximum Power
Type Consumption at Consumption at
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11WMU - 12 15

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
12.15 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications
12.15.1 VA1 Specifications

TN12VA1 Optical Specifications

Table 12-238 lists the optical specifications of the TN12VA1 board.
Table 12-238 Optical specifications of the TN12VA1 board
Item Unit Value
IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss dB ≤1.5
Dynamic attenuation dB 20
range
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation≤10dB)

1.5 (attenuation≤15dB)
1.8 (attenuation>15dB)
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
VA1 - 6.5 7.2
12.15.2 VA4 Specifications

TN12VA4 Optical Specifications

Table 12-239 lists the optical specifications of the TN12VA4 board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-239 Optical specifications of the TN12VA4 board
Item Unit Value
IN-OUT Inherent insertion dB ≤1.5

loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation range
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation≤10 dB)

1.5 (attenuation≤15 dB)
1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)
(8.7 in.)
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
VA4 - 8.5 9.4
12.16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board

Specifications
12.16.1 GFU Specifications

Table 12-240 Optical specifications of the GFU board
Item Unit Value
Channel insertion loss dB 0.5-6.0
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤0.5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11GFU – 0.2 0.3
12.16.2 DCU Specifications

Table 12-241 Optical specifications of the DCU board (1)
Item Unit Value
DC DC DC DC DC DC D DCU0
U0 U0 U0 U0 U0 U06 CU 8
1 2 3 4 5 07
Typical dispersion km 20 40 60 80 100 120 5 10

compensation distance
Maximum insertion loss dB 3.3 4.7 6.4 8 9 9.8 2.3 2.8
Dispersion compensation - 90%-110%

slope
Polarization mode ps 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3
dispersion
Polarization-dependent dB 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

loss
Maximum input power a dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Operating wavelength nm 1528-1568

range
Dispersion compensating - G.652 fiber

fiber type
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-242 Optical specifications of the DCU board (2)

Item Unit Value
DCU DCU DCU DCU DCU1 DCU1

11 12 13 14 5 6
Typical dispersion km 20 40 60 80 100 120

compensation distance
Maximum insertion loss dB 4 5 5.9 6.9 7.8 8.8
Dispersion compensation - 90%-110%

slope
Polarization mode ps 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

dispersion
Polarization-dependent dB 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

loss
Maximum input power a dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20
Operating wavelength nm 1528-1568

range
Dispersion compensating - G.655 fiber

fiber type
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11DCU – 0.2 0.3
12.16.3 TDC Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and
power consumption.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-243 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board.
Table 12-243 Optical specifications of the TDC board

Dispersion tuning range ps/nm ±400
Dispersion tuning speed sec <15
Input power range dBm -13 to 0
Dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±10
Output optical power dBm The output optical power should

be close to the input power, with
an error range of ±1.5 dB.
The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows:
(8.7 in.)
l Weight: 1.14 kg (2.51 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11TDC 13 15
12.17 DCM Specifications

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
652 fibers)

DCM(S) 3.1/5 2.3 90% 0.3 0.1 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(T) 6.2/10 2.8 110% 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 8 0.7 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 9 0.8 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 9.8 0.8 0.1 20
FBG-DCM 49.7/80 4 1.0 0.2 23

(80)
FBG-DCM 62.1/100 4 1.0 0.2 23

(100)
FBG-DCM 74.5/120 4 1.0 0.2 23

(120)
FBG-DCM 99.4/160 8 1.6 0.4 23

(160)
FBG-DCM 124.2/200 8 1.6 0.4 23

(200)
FBG-DCM 149.1/240 8 1.6 0.4 23

(240)
655 LEAF fibers)

DCM(A) 12.4/20 4 90% 0.4 0.3 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(B) 24.8/40 5 110% 0.5 0.3 20

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

DCM(C) 37.3/60 5.9 0.7 0.3 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 6.9 0.8 0.3 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 7.8 0.9 0.3 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 8.8 1.0 0.3 20
FBG-DCM 74.5/120 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(120)
FBG-DCM 99.4/160 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(160)
FBG-DCM 124.2/200 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(200)
FBG-DCM 149.1/240 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(240)
653 fibers)
DCM Distance Max. DSC PMD PDL Max. Opera
Module (mi./km) Insert R (ps) (dB) Allowe ting
ion d Wavel
Loss Powera ength
(dB) (dBm) (nm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2 90% 0.2 0.1 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(T) 6.2/10 3 110% 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 5 0.5 0.1 20

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Table 12-247 Performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation optical fibers
(TW-RS fibers)
DCM Module Distance Max. DSC PMD PDL Max. Opera
(mi./km) Insert R (ps) (dB) Allowe ting
ion d Wavel
Loss Powera ength
(dB) (dBm) (nm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 2.3 90% 0.3 0.1 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(B) 24.8/40 2.8 110% 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 3.8 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 4.2 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 4.7 0.5 0.1 20

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Field Engineer) A TL1 Command Reference
A TL1 Command Reference
A.1 TL1 Overview

This chapter introduces input command messages, acknowledgments, output response
messages, and autonomous messages of the TL1 command.
A.2 Configuring NE
This section lists the commands used to edit and retrieve system configurations.
A.3 Configuring DCC
This section lists commands used to configure a DCC channel to communicate with a
maintenance computer.
A.4 Communication Management
This section lists commands which used to configure the communication path.
A.5 Equipment Management
This section lists the commands used to configure the equipment hardware.
A.6 Facility Management
This section lists the commands used to configure and maintain the facilities.
A.7 Configuring Fiber
This section lists the commands used to configure and retrieve logical fiber connections between
NEs.
A.8 Configuring Cross-Connections
This section lists the commands used to configure cross-connections.
A.9 Configuring Transparently Transmitted FE Singal
This section lists commands used to configure FE signal which is transparently transmitted on
OSC channel on ST2 card.
A.10 Configuring Service Protection
This section lists the commands used to configure all types of protection that the system supports.
A.11 Configuring SCC Protection
This section lists the commands used to configure SCC protection.
A.12 Configuring Ethernet Related Protection
A.13 Configuring Ethernet Feature

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The section lists the commands used to configure the Ethernet system, such as Ethernet interface,
flow, VLAN, protocols, and QoS.
A.14 Configuring OTN Overhead
A.15 Automatic Optical Power Management
This section lists the commands used to configure all types of the automatic optic power
management functions that system supports.
A.16 Configuring MCA
This section lists the commands used to configure the MCA function.
A.17 Configuring Tunable Dispersion Compensator
This section lists the commands used to configure the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC)
function.
A.18 System Monitor
This section lists the commands used to monitor a system.
A.19 Performance Management
This section lists commands which used to manage the system performance.
A.20 Alarm and Event Management
This section lists commands which used to manage alarm and event.
A.21 Configuring LPT
This section lists the commands used to configure the LPT function.
A.22 Configuring Loopback
This section lists the commands used to check the connection between two points by the loopback
method.
A.23 Connection Test
This section lists the commands used to test the connection by transmitting and detecting the bit
sequence between two points.
A.24 System Maintenance
This section lists the commands used to maintain a system.
A.25 Security Management
This section lists the commands which used to configure the security function to control user's
access.
A.26 Backup and Recover
This section lists commands which used to backup and recover the data on the system.
A.27 System Update
This section lists commands which used to update the system.
A.28 Patch Management
This section lists commands which used to manage the patch running on the system.
A.29 Database Management
This section lists commands which used to manage the databases of the system.
A.30 Log Management
This section lists commands which used to manage the log.
A.31 License Management
This section lists commands which used to maintain the License.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.32 TL1 Parameters

A.33 Parameters Related to State Model
The parameters of certain commands can be set only when the entity is in OOS state. The
following table provides such parameters.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.1 TL1 Overview

This chapter introduces input command messages, acknowledgments, output response
messages, and autonomous messages of the TL1 command.
A.1.1 Input Command Messages

This section describes the structure of a TL1 input command message and the functionality of
its component parts.
General Format
The following is the general structure of TL1 input commands:
<COMMAND_CODE>:<STAGING_PARAMETER_BLOCKS>:<MESSAGE_PAYLOAD_BLOCK(S)>;
l <COMMAND_CODE>
Determines the action (that is, pragmatics) to be taken at the NE as a result of receiving the
input message.
l <STAGING_PARAMETER_BLOCKS>
Determines the target NE and the identifier of the object to be acted upon by the input
message.
l <MESSAGE_PAYLOAD_BLOCK(S)>
The subject matter relating to the action to be performed by the input message.
l semi-colon character (;)
Terminates a TL1 input message.
Command Code
Each command must begin with a command code consisting of a mandatory verb followed by
up to two other optional modifiers, each separated by a hyphen "-".
<COMMAND CODE>::=<VERB>[-<MODIFIER>[-<MODIFIER>]]
l <VERB>
The semantics of the verb are to identify the action to be taken at the NE as a result of
receiving a TL1 message from an OS (for example, ENT, ED, or RTRV).
l <MODIFIER>
Command code modifiers are optional depending upon the specific command and the
application domain. In normal TL1 command usage, the first modifier identifies the object
of the verb where the action is to be applied in the NE. The second modifier further modifies
the object of the verb and may have diverse interpretations in various operation domains.
Staging Parameter Blocks

The structure of the staging parameter blocks consists of the following series:
:[<TID>]:[<AID(s)>]:<CTAG>:[GB]:
l <TID>
The target identifier (TID) is a unique name given to each system when it is installed. The
name identifies the particular NE. to which each command is directed. Each TID can have

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
a maximum of 20 ASCII characters limited to letters, digits, and hyphens, but each TID
must start with an alphabetic character. The presence of the TID is required in all input
commands, but this parameter can be entered with nothing. In this case, the parameter is
represented by two consecutive colons (::). This parameter can be entered with nothing
when the operating system directly communicates with the target NE. The recommended
value for the TID, when it is used, is the common language equipment identification (CLEI)
code of the target NE.
l <AID(s)>
The access identifier (AID) is an access code used to identify and address specific objects
within the system. Typical examples of objects addressed in the AID parameter value are:
individual pieces of equipment, transport spans, and access tributaries
l <CTAG>
The correlation tag (CTAG) is a unique identifier given to each input command by the
operator. When the system responds to a specific command, it includes the command's
CTAG in the reply. The CTAG is included in the system's reply to a specific command.
l [GB]
The general block (GB) includes support parameters whose values affect the way in which
the input command is to be executed in the system. The presence of the GB in all input
commands is a requirement, but this parameter can be entered with nothing. In this case,
the parameter is represented by two consecutive colons (::).
l The general block may be in a format like <parameter=value>. The value may take value1/
value2/value3. This means that value can be value1, value2 or value3.
Message Payload
The remaining part of a TL1 input command is the payload or subject matter of the message.
This section of the message may consist of zero or several data blocks.
The data items within a data block may either be name-defined (of the form
<KEY_WORD>=<VALUE>) or position-defined where the values are specified and the
keyword is implied by its position in the data block. All of the data items must be of the same
type within a given data block. The semantics of the data items are operation domain-specific
and vary with the operation to be performed as a result of the input message.
A.1.2 Acknowledgments
An acknowledgment is a brief output message generated in response to an input command
message.
An acknowledgment is usually followed by an output response message to the command.
However, in some circumstances, an acknowledgment is the only output message triggered by
a command.
Acknowledgments follow the 2-second rule (that is, an acknowledgement is displayed if an
output response message cannot be transmitted within 2 seconds of its receipt).
The following is the format of an acknowledgment:
<ACKNOWLEDGMENT CODE>^<CTAG><cr><lf>
The <ACKNOWLEDGMENT CODE> identifies the reason for the acknowledgment. The
<CTAG> identifies the associated input command. The less than (<) character is the
acknowledgment terminator. The valid values for acknowledgment codes and their meanings
are given in the following subsections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
In Progress (IP) and Printout Follows (PF)

These acknowledgments should produce subsequent output messages that provide a termination
report by itself or a termination report and results of the command after a request has been
initiated.
These acknowledgments imply that the command is being executed and are often used to test
and access messages requiring a long execution time, for example, a 1-minute long noise test.
These acknowledgements are usually followed by output responses indicating that the
commands were completed or denied.
All Right (OK)

The command was received and the requested action was initiated and completed.
Specific uses for the OK acknowledgment are defined in message set criteria documents (for
example, GR-199-CORE, GR-833-CORE, and GR-834-CORE). In addition, OK is used in
response to a command that has been canceled by inclusion of the CAN (cancel) character.
No Acknowledgment (NA)
Under abnormal conditions, NA should be sent when a command has been accepted but control
of the processing has been lost, making correct acknowledgment impossible. Initiation or
execution of the requested command is uncertain.
This acknowledgment should be used only in dire circumstances since the state of execution
status is unknown.
This acknowledgment can also be used to respond to a command that is garbled during
transmission. If the CTAG value of the command could not be determined, the single character
zero (0) should be used as the acknowledgment CTAG value.
No Good (NG)
The command is valid, but the requested action conflicts with current system or equipment status
(an attempt to restore an in-service unit for example). Repeat Later (RL) is displayed in scenarios
with inadequate system resources.
This acknowledgment is seldom used because specific error codes in output response messages
can be employed to signify the same information. However, it can be used if desired.
Repeat Later (RL)

The requested action cannot be executed due to unavailable system resources caused by system
overloads, excessive queue lengths, busy programs, or other similar causes. The command may
be entered again later.
A.1.3 Output Response Messages

This section describes the structure of a TL1 output response message and the functionality of
its component parts. A TL1 output response message is the response to a TL1 input command
message.
General Format
The general structure of a TL1 output response message is as follows:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<HEADER><RESPONSE IDENTIFICATION>[<TEXT BLOCK>]<TERMINATOR>
l <HEADER>
It represents information common to all output response messages; that is, it is independent
of the type of output response.
l <RESPONSE IDENTIFICATION>
It identifies the type of output response message. Five types of output response messages
are defined in this document.
l <TEXT BLOCK>
It represents information specific to the particular output response message. This
component is optional.
l <TERMINATOR>
It indicates the termination or continuation of the output response message.
Header
The form of the header is as follows:
<cr><lf><lf>^^^<SID>^<YEAR>-<MONTH>-<DAY>^<HOUR>:<MINUTE>:<SECOND>
l <SID>
The source identifier (SID) is restricted to 20 characters maximum and identifies the NE
generating the message.
The <SID> value is checked by the NE against the TID parameter of the input command
to verify that the NE's SID matches the command's intended target (that is, TID).
l <YEAR>-<MONTH>-<DAY>
The <YEAR>-<MONTH>-<DAY> construct generally represents the day on which the
command is executed.
l <HOUR>:<MINUTE>:<SECOND>
The <HOUR>:<MINUTE>:<SECOND> construct generally represents the time when the
command is executed.
Response Identification
The form of the response identification is as follows:
<cr><lf>M^^<CTAG>^<COMPLETION CODE>
The character M signifies that the message is the response to an input command message.
The output response message will have the same <CTAG> value as the corresponding input
command message for enabling the OS to associate the received output response message with
a previously-sent command.
The <COMPLETION CODE> will be displayed as COMPLD, DENY, PRTL, DELAY, or
RTRV. The semantics of the completion codes are listed in the following table.
Completion
code Description
COMPLD Represents total successful execution of the input command.
DENY Represents total denial of the input command.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Completion
code Description
PRTL Represents partial successful execution of the input command. This

response code will be returned when input commands specifying
multiple AIDs of which only a subset (but not an empty subset) has been
successfully executed. If all AIDs have failed to be executed, the
response code will be DENY. This response code is valid when the
contingency flag in the general block is false (that is, best effort).
DELAY Represents successful queuing of the input command submitted for

delayed activation.
RTRVa Represents output response of an input retrieve command (that is, with
command verb RTRV) that retrieves extensive amounts of information
from the NE and thus causes lengthy processing in the NE for gathering
all the requested information. For effective operation, the NE may start
returning available information to the OS even before all the requested
information is gathered. The RTRV completion code may be used.
Multiple responses with RTRV completion codes are permitted for the
same RTRV command, but the final response must have a COMPLD
completion code.
Notes:
a: The use of this completion code depends on the application domain.
When the CTAG of an input command cannot be identified (for example, during dial-up
asynchronous connections with noise and errors prevalent), there are two possible results:
l The 2-letter acknowledgment NA is returned.
l A DENY response and error message with CTAG set to the single character zero (0) is
returned.
Text Block
The form of the text block is:
((<cr><lf>^^^<UNQUOTED LINE>)|(<cr><lf>^^^"<QUOTED LINE>")| (<cr><lf>^^^/
*<COMMENT>*/))*
l <UNQUOTED LINE>
The <UNQUOTED LINE> consists of name- or position-defined parameters. The
unquoted line is for representing error codes in some response messages. The error code is
specified by four characters that may contain numerals after the first character, if
appropriate.
l <QUOTED LINE>
The <QUOTED LINE> consists of parsable text and is preceded and followed by quotation
marks (''). The syntax of the parsable text is equivalent to that of an input command message.
l <COMMENT>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
The <COMMENT> component is used to allow free format text (that is, human readable,
not machine parsable). The free form text is preceded and followed by a forward slash and
asterisk (/*).
Terminitor
The form of the terminator is:
<cr><lf>(;|>)
The semicolon (;) character is used to indicate the termination of the output response message.
The greater than (>) character is used to indicate that more output associated with this response
will follow under another header.
Output messages cannot exceed 4096 bytes.
A.1.4 Autonomous Messages

An autonomous message is a message that is sent from the NE to the appropriate OS without
any explicit input message associated with it (such as the normal Input Command/Output
Response message pair).
The following are the typical scenarios where autonomous messages are used:
l Reporting of alarmed and/or non-alarmed trouble events
l Reporting of scheduled diagnostic tests in the NE
l Reporting of Performance Monitoring Data
l Reporting of a change in the NE's database
l Periodic reporting of selected NE conditions
General Format
The following is the general structure of a TL1 autonomous message:
<HEADER><AUTO ID>[<TEXT BLOCK>]<TERMINATOR>
l <HEADER>
The <HEADER> represents information common to all output response and autonomous
messages.
l <AUTO ID>
The <AUTO ID> identifies the severity and the nature of the autonomous message. The
severity is indicated through the use of an alarm code, which will be discussed in further
details.
l <TEXT BLOCK>
The <TEXT BLOCK> represents information specific to the particular autonomous
message. This entry is optional and will be discussed in further details.
l <TERMINATOR>
The <TERMINATOR> indicates the completion or continuation of the autonomous
message. This entry is required in all types of TL1 messages.
Header
The <HEADER> is the standard response header that is defined in A.1.3 Output Response
Messages. It contains system identifier SID, date and time stamps. The header is a required entry

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
in all TL1 output response and autonomous messages. For a more detailed explanation of its
parameters and syntax, see Header.
Identification of Output (AUTO ID)

The auto ID entry for an autonomous message is of the following form:
<cr><lf><ALMCDE>^<ATAG>^<VERB>[^<MODIFIER>[^<MODIFIER>]]
l Alarm Code (ALMCDE)

<ALMCDE> is the alarm code. The alarm code indicates the severity of the autonomous
message. The valid values for <ALMCDE> in decreasing order of severity are listed in the
following table.
Alarm code Description
*C Critical alarm
** Major alarm
*^ Minor alarm
A^ Non-alarm message
Critical, major, and minor correspond to the reporting of alarmed events. The non-alarm
message designation is used when the NE is reporting non-alarmed events, periodic
measurements, or results of previously scheduled diagnostics or audits.
The value of the most severe alarm will be reported in scenarios with multiple alarms.
l Autonomously Generated Correlation Tag (ATAG)
<ATAG> is a decimal number made up of an integer part and an optional fractional
component. The <ATAG> serves two purposes.
– It allows an OS to determine if it has failed to receive any spontaneous outputs by
checking for omissions in the sequence of messages received.
– It allows an OS to correlate spontaneous outputs triggered by a common problem. (To
accomplish this, the NE involved must be capable of recognizing and categorizing
common problems.)
l Verb and Modifier
The <VERB>[^<MODIFIER>[^<MODIFIER>]] entry identifies the nature of the
spontaneous output and allows for quick identification of the semantics of the information
in the text block.
The <VERB> is the autonomous message verb and is a required entry. In most cases, the
verb in an autonomous message will be REPT (Report). The autonomous message verb
can have up to two optional <MODIFIER>s. The first modifier is used to modify the verb.
The second modifier is used to specify the object generating the message.
Text Block
The optional <TEXT BLOCK> is used to represent information specific to the particular
autonomous message. The format of the text block is as follows:
((<cr><lf>^^^<UNQUOTED LINE>)|(<cr><lf>^^^<QUOTED LINE>)| (<cr><lf>^^^<COMMENT>))+

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A more complete description of the individual components is in Text Block.
Terminator
The form of the <TERMINATOR> block is as follows:
<cr><lf>(;|>)
It is required as the termination block for all TL1 message types. The semicolon (;) is used to
indicate the termination of the output response message. The greater than sign (>) is used to
indicate that more output associated with this response will follow under another header.
A.2 Configuring NE
This section lists the commands used to edit and retrieve system configurations.
A.2.1 ED-DAT
Sets the time and date.
Function
This command sets the time and date of an NE.
Usage Note
The <TMZONE> setting will not take effect if the time zone parameter is disabled.
Category
System
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-DAT:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::[<DATE>],[<TIME>],[<TMZONE>],[<DSTIME>];
Command Parameters
Default
Parameter Description Value
<DATE> Indicates the current date in the format of YYYY-MM-DD; NA

where:
l YYYY indicates the year ranging from 1991 to 2060.
l MM indicates the month ranging from 1 to 12.
l DD indicates the day ranging from 1 to 31.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<TIME> Indicates the current time in the format of HH-MM-SS; NA

where:
l HH indicates the hour in a 24 hour format ranging from
00 to 23.
l MM indicates the minute ranging from 00 to 59.
l SS indicates the second ranging from 00 to 59.
<TMZONE> Indicates the time zone. The valid values are Eastern, NA
Central, Mountain, Pacific, Alaska, Hawaii, Samoa and
UTC (also including general time zones GMT-n and GMT
+n).
<DSTIME> Indicates whether the daylight saving time (DST) is NA

enabled. The valid values are Y and N.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<SID>^<DATE>^<TIME><cr><lf>
M^^<ctag>^COMPLD<cr><lf>
^^^<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-DAT:::100::2002-08-26,13-23-45,Eastern,N;
l Response Message
NE 2004-04-09 17:31:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.2.2 RTRV-DAT
A.2.2 RTRV-DAT
Retrieves the time and date.
Function
This command retrieves the time and date parameters of an NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
System
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DAT:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<sid>^<yyyy-mm-dd>^<hh:mm:ss><cr><lf>
M^^<ctag>^^COMPLD<cr><lf>
^^^"<DATE>,<TIME>,<TMZONE>,<DSTIME>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
Parameter Description
<DATE> Indicates the current date in a format of YYYY-MM-DD; where, YYYY

is the year ranging from 1990 to 2087, MM is the month of the year
ranging from 1 to 12, and DD is the day of the month ranging from 1 to
31.
<TIME> Indicates the current time in a format of HH-MM-SS; where, HH is the

hour in a 24 hour format ranging from 00 to 23, MM is the minute ranging
from 00 to 59, and SS is the second ranging from 00 to 59.
<TMZONE> Indicates the time zone. The valid values are Eastern, Central, Mountain,
Pacific, Alaska, Hawaii, Samoa, and UTC (also including general time
zones GMT-n and GMT+n).
NOTE
When <TIMEZONE> is set to UTC, the value of this parameter is displayed as
NON_TZ instead of UTC in the response message.
<DSTIME> Indicates whether DST is enabled. The valid values are Y and N.
Example
l Command
RTRV-DAT:::100;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2004-04-09 17:31:04
M 100 COMPLD
"2004-04-09,17-31-04,PACIFIC,N"
;
Related Commands
A.2.1 ED-DAT
A.2.3 ED-DST
Sets DST.
Function
This command instructs an NE to set DST.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-DST:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<FLAG>,<ADJMODE>,<ADJWAY
>,<ADJMINUTE>,<STARTMONTH>,<STARTDAY>,<STARTWEEKDAY>,<STARTHOU
R>,<STARTMINUTE>,<ENDMONTH>,<ENDDAY>,<ENDWEEKDAY>,<ENDHOUR>,<
ENDMINUTE>;
Command Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Value
<FLAG> Indicates whether DST is enabled. NA
<ADJMODE> Indicates the mode of adjustment, byweek or bydate. NA
<ADJWAY> Indicates the way of adjustment, which can be done NA

on a weekly basis or on a specific date.
<ADJMINUTE> Indicates the minute of adjustment.The range is from NA

1 to 120.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<STARTMONTH> Indicates the month that the adjustment is to start. NA

The value represents a month of the year and is
expressed as an abbreviation (for example, jan, feb,
dec).
<STARTDAY> Indicates when the adjustment is to take start. When NA

adjustment is based on a specific date, the value
represents a date in a month. When adjustment is
based on week, the value represents the number of
the week in a month. For example, 1 represents the
first week in a month, and 5 the last week.
<STARTWEEKDAY When adjustment is based on a specific date, this NA

> parameter is reserved. When adjustment is based on
week, the value represents a day of the week and is
expressed as an abbreviation (for example, mon,
sat).
<STARTHOUR> Indicates the start hour of adjustment. NA
<STARTMINUTE> Indicates the start minute of adjustment. NA
<ENDMONTH> Indicates the end month of adjustment. The value NA

represents a month of the year and is expressed as
an abbreviation (for example, jan, feb, dec).
<ENDDAY> Indicates the end date of adjustment. When NA

based on week, the value represents the week in a
month. For example, 1 represents the first week in a
month, and 5 the last week.
<ENDWEEKDAY> When adjustment is based on a specific date, this NA

parameter is reserved. When adjustment is based on
sat).
<ENDHOUR> Indicates the end hour of adjustment. The range is NA

from 0 to 23.
<ENDMINUTE> Indicates the end minute of adjustment. The range is NA

from 0 to 59.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<sid>^<yyyy-mm-dd>^<hh:mm:ss> <cr><lf>
M^^<ctag>^COMPLD <cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-DST:::1::enable,BYWEEK,FORWARD, 60, apr, 1, tue, 13, 0, oct, 3, tue, 14, 0;
l Response Message
NE 2005-03-21 09:33:54
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.2.4 RTRV-DST
A.2.4 RTRV-DST
Retrieves the DST settings on an NE.
Function
This command retrieves the DST setting on the NE.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DST:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"FLAG=<FLAG>,ADJMODE=<ADJMODE>,ADJWAY=<ADJWAY>,ADJ_MINUTE=<ADJMINUTE>,START_MON
TH=<STARTMONTH>,START_DAY=<STARTDAY>,START_WEEKDAY=<STARTWEEKDAY>,START_HOUR=<STAR
THOUR>,START_MINUTE=<STARTMINUTE>,END_MONTH=<ENDMONTH>,END_DAY=<ENDDAY>,END_WEEKDA
Y=<ENDWEEKDAY>,END_HOUR=<ENDHOUR>,<END_MINUTE>=<ENDMINUTE>,DST_STATUS=<DSTSTATUS>"
<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<ADJMODE> Indicates the mode of adjustment.
<ADJWAY> Indicates the way of adjustment, which can be done on a

weekly basis or on a specific date.
<ADJ_MINUTE> Indicates the minite of adjustment.
<STA_MONTH> Indicates the start month of adjustment.
<START_DAY> Indicates the start day of adjustment.
<START_WEEKDAY> Indicates the start weekday of adjustment.
<START_HOUR> Indicates the start hour of adjustment.
<START_MINUTE> Indicates the start minute of adjustment.
<END_MONTH> Indicates the end month of adjustment.
<END_DAY> Indicates the end day of adjustment.
<END_WEEKDAY> When adjustment is based on a specific date, this parameter

is reserved. When adjustment is based on week, the value
represents a day of the week and is expressed as an
abbreviation (for example, mon, sat).
<END_HOUR> Indicates the end hour of adjustment.
<END_MINUTE> Indicates the end minute of adjustment.
<DST_STATUS> Indicates the status of DST setting.
Example
l Command
RTRV-DST:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-19 12:12:52
M 100 COMPLD
"FLAG=ENABLE,ADJMODE=BYWEEK,ADJWAY=FORWARD,ADJ_MINUTE=60,START_MONTH=APR,START_DAY
=1,START_WEEKDAY=TUE,START_HOUR=13,START_MINUTE=0,END_MONTH=OCT,END_DAY=3,END_WEEK
DAY=TUE,END_HOUR=14,END_MINUTE=0,DST_STATUS=TRUE"
;
Related Commands
A.2.3 ED-DST
A.2.5 ED-SYS
Edits the attributes of the system.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command edits the attributes of the system.
Usage Note
None
Category
System
Security
Super
Command Syntax
ED-SYS:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[CC=<CC>,][NSC=<NSC>,][OPERSPEC=<OPERSPEC>,]
[BUZZER=<BUZZER>,][AUTOP=<AUTOP>,][PWRMODE=<PWRMODE>,]
[NELOCATION=<NELOCATION>,][NEMEMO=<NEMEMO>,]
[STATELEVEL=<STATELEVEL>,][LPBKAUTORLS=<LPBKAUTORLS>,]
[LPBKTIME=<LPBKTIME>,][IPAAUTOENTIME=<IPAAUTOENTIME>,]
[NODEID=<NODEID>,][ASON=<ASON>];
Command Parameters
Default
<CC> Indicates the country code. The valid value is a three- USA
character ISO 3166 Geographic/Political Country Code (G/
PCC). The code for the United States is "USA" in
uppercase.
The field is used for fault type and fault location (FTFL).
<NSC> Indicates an ITU carrier code (ICC). This code consists of NA

one to six left-justified characters, alphabetic, or leading
alphabetic with trailing numeric.
The field is used for FTFL.
<OPERSPEC> Indicates the operator specific. The valid value is a string NA

with 118 bytes.
<BUZZER> Indicates whether the buzzer of the NE is turned on. The OFF
valid values are ON and OFF.
<AUTOP> Indicates whether auto-provisioning is enabled. The valid Y

values are Y (auto-provisioning is enabled) and N (auto-
provisioning is disabled).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<PWRMODE> Indicates the power consumption mode. The valid values NORMAL
are as follows:
l NORMAL: indicates that the NE is in normal running
mode.
l SAVING: indicates that the NE is in energy
conservation mode.
l ENHSAV: indicates that the NE is in enhanced energy
conservation mode.
NOTE
Certain hardware units on the standby cross-connect cards are shut
down in ENHSAV mode. Hence, the faults on the hardware units
cannot be detected.
<NELOCATIO Indicates the NE location. The valid value is a 32-byte NA

N> string.
<NEMEMO> Indicates the NE memo. The valid value is a 64-byte string. NA
<STATELEVE Indicates the state level. The valid values are FULL (full FULL
L> state model) and COMPLEX (complex state model). For
details, see A.32.3.19 STATELEVEL.
<LPBKAUTOR Indicates whether automatic releasing of loopback is For OptiX

LS> enabled. The valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE. OSN
3800A:
ENABLE
For OptiX
OSN
6800A:
DISABLE
For OptiX
OSN 8800:
DISABLE
<LPBKTIME> Indicates the time taken for the loopback to be released 00-05
automatically. It is valid only when the auto-release
loopback function (<LPBKAUTORLS>) is enabled.
The valid format is HH-MM; where: HH ranges from 00
to 48 and MM ranges from 00 to 59. That is, LPBKTIME
ranges from 00-01 to 48-00.
<IPAAUTOEN Indicates the interval for automatically enabling the IPA 01-00
TIME> function. The IPA function is used to control lasers. To
avoid personal injuries caused by lasers, the NE
automatically enables the IPA function after the IPA
function is disabled for a maximum of one hour (01-00).
The valid format is HH-MM; where: HH ranges from 00
to 01 and MM ranges from 00 to 59.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<OLSEN> Indicates whether the optical-layer supervisory is enabled. N

The valid values are Y (optical-layer supervisory is
enabled) and N (optical-layer supervisory is disabled). The
optical-layer supervisory refers to the alarm supervisory
implemented by the overhead of the OSC.
<NODEID> Indicates the node ID of the node, for example, 1.1.1.1. If NA

this parameter is set after the ASON feature is enabled, the
NE is automatically reset.
<ASON> Indicates whether automatically switched optical network DISABLE

(ASON) is enabled. The valid values are ENABLE and
DISABLE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-SYS:::C:::AUTOP=Y, NELOCATION="NEW YORK",NEMEMO="North-east 4BLSR
ring",STATELEVEL=COMPLEX,LPBKAUTORLS=ENABLE,LPBKTIME=00-06,NODEID=1.1.1.2,ASON=DIS
ABLE;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.2.6 RTRV-SYS
A.2.6 RTRV-SYS
Retrieves the attributes of the system.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the system.
Usage Note
None
Category
System

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-SYS:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"DEVICETYPE=<DEVICETYPE>,SHELFTYPE=<SHELFTYPE>,NEVERSION=<NEVERSION>,CC=<CC>,NS
C=<NSC>,OPERSPEC=<OPERSPEC>,BUZZER=<BUZZER>,AUTOP=<AUTOP>,NELOCATION=<NELOCATION>,
NEMEMO=<NEMEMO>,STATELEVEL=<STATELEVEL>,LPBKAUTORLS=<LPBKAUTORLS>,
[LPBKTIME=<LPBKTIME>],IPAAUTOENTIME=<IPAAUTOENTIME>,PWRMODE=<PWRMODE>,RATEDPWR=<RA
TEDPWR>,ACTPWR=<ACTPWR>,SAVEDPWR=<SAVEDPWR>,[NODEID=<NODEID>],
[ASON=<ASON>],OLSEN=<OLSEN>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<DEVICETYPE> Indicates the device type. The valid values are OSN3800A,
OSN6800A, OSN8800T16, OSN8800T32, and OSN8800T64.
<SHELFTYPE> Indicates the shelf type. The valid values are STDSHELF and
NASHELF.
<NEVERSION> Indicates the NE software and patch package version. The valid value
is a 40-byte string, for example, V100R006C00.
<CC> Indicates the country code. The valid value is a three-character ISO
3166 Geographic/Political Country Code (G/PCC). The code for the
United States is "USA" in uppercase.
<NSC> Indicates an ITU carrier code (ICC). This code consists of one to six
left-justified characters, alphabetic, or leading alphabetic with
trailing numeric.
<OPERSPEC> Indicates the operator specific. The field is used for FTFL
<BUZZER> Indicates whether the buzzer of the NE is turned on. The valid values
are ON and OFF.
<AUTOP> Indicates whether auto-provisioning is enabled. The valid values are

Y (auto-provisioning is enabled) and N (auto-provisioning is
disabled).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PWRMODE> Indicates the power consumption mode. The valid values are as
follows:
l NORMAL: indicates that the NE is in the normal running mode.
l SAVING: indicates that the NE is in the energy conservation
mode.
l ENHSAV: indicates that the NE is in enhanced energy
conservation mode.
<RATEDPWR> Indicates the rated power consumption of the NE.
<ACTPWR> Indicates the actual power consumption of the NE.
<SAVEDPWR> Indicates the reduced power consumption after the energy

conservation function is enabled.
<NELOCATION> Indicates the NE location. The valid value is a 32-byte string.
<NEMEMO> Indicates the NE memo. The valid value is a 64-byte string.
<STATELEVEL> Indicates the state level. The valid values are FULL (full state model)
and COMPLEX (complex state model). For details, see A.32.3.19
STATELEVEL.
<LPBKAUTORLS> Indicates whether automatic releasing of loopback is enabled. The

valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
<LPBKTIME> Indicates the time taken for the loopback to be released

automatically. It is valid only when the auto-release loopback
function is enabled.
The valid format is HH-MM; where: HH ranges from 00 to 48 and
MM ranges from 00 to 59.
<IPAAUTOENTIME Indicates the interval for automatically enabling the IPA function.
> The IPA function is used to control lasers. To avoid personal injuries
caused by lasers, the NE automatically enables the IPA function after
the IPA function is disabled for a maximum of one hour (01-00).
The valid format is HH-MM; where: HH ranges from 00 to 01 and
MM ranges from 00 to 59.
<OLSEN> Indicates whether the optical-layer supervisory is enabled. The valid

values are Y (optical-layer supervisory is enabled) and N (optical-
layer supervisory is disabled). The optical-layer supervisory refers
to the alarm supervisory implemented by the overhead of the OSC.
<NODEID> Indicates the node ID of the node, for example, 1.1.1.1. If this
parameter is set after the ASON feature is enabled, the NE is
automatically reset.
<ASON> Indicates whether ASON is enabled. The valid values are ENABLE
and DISABLE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<OLSEN> Indicates whether optical layer surveillance is enabled. The valid

value is Y (optical layer surveillance is enabled ) or N (optical layer
surveillance is disabled).
Example
l Command
RTRV-SYS:::C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-11 20:37:10
M C COMPLD
"DEVICETYPE=OSN6800A,SHELFTYPE=NASHELF,NEVERSION=UNKNOWN,CC=,NSC=\"\",OPERSPEC=
\"\",BUZZER=OFF,AUTOP=Y,NELOCATION=\"\",NEMEMO=
\"\",STATELEVEL=FULL,LPBKAUTORLS=DISABLE,LPBKTIME=00-05,IPAAUTOENTIME=01-00,PWRMOD
E=NORMAL,RATEDPWR=161,ACTPWR=161,SAVEDPWR=0,NODEID=1.1.68.23,ASON=DISABLE,OLSEN=N"
"
;
Related Commands
A.2.5 ED-SYS
A.2.7 RTRV-HDR
Retrieves the header information.
Function
This command requests an NE to reply with a normal response indicating COMPLD and header
information, that is, the source identifier, the date, and the time.
Usage Note
None
Category
System
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-HDR:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
RTRV-HDR:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 16:01:36
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
None
A.2.8 RTRV-HEALTH-STATE
Retrieves the status of an NE for software loading.
Function
This command is issued upon the user's request. MON sends a health check request to all the
registered modules (with MON health check framework), then collects the responses from those
modules and displays the information to the user.
Usage Note
None
Category
System
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-HEALTH-STATE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"CONTENT=GCP Contrl Plane State,HEALTH_STATUS=POK,RESULT=ION is stopped or
initializing now!,ADVICE=Please wait and then try again!"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<CONTEN Indicates the specific function of the NE.

T>
<HEALTH_ Indicates the status of the NE. The valid values are as follows:
STATUS> l OK: indicates the normal state of the specific function.
l POK: indicates the state that may affect software loading.
l NG: indicates the abnormal state of the specific function.
<RESULT> Indicates the description of the specific function of the NE.
<ADVICE> Indicates an advisement that can be applied to clear the fault in situations of
the abnormal status of a specific function.
Example
l Command
RTRV-HEALTH-STATE:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2008-07-19 15:59:52
M 100 COMPLD
"CONTENT=Channel State,HEALTH_STATUS=OK,RESULT=The Channel state is
OK!,ADVICE="
"CONTENT=Master And Slave
State,HEALTH_STATUS=POK,RESULT=Unknown,ADVICE=Unknown"
;
Related Commands
None
A.2.9 RTRV-LOCALIZATION
Retrieves the status of time localization.
Function
This command retrieves the status of time localization.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-LOCALIZATION:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^"<LOCALIZATION_STATUS> "<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
LOCALIZATION_ Indicates the status of time localization. The valid values are as
STATUS follows:
l 0: indicates that time localization is disabled.
l 1: indicates that time radicalization is enabled (starting year: 1990).
l 2: indicates that time radicalization is enabled (starting year: 1970).
Example
l Command
RTRV-LOCALIZATION:::1;
l Response Message
NE 2007-09-19 11:17:54
M 1 COMPLD
"1"
;
Related Commands
None
A.2.10 RTRV-NETYPE
Retrieves the NE type.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command retrieves the type of an NE.
Usage Note
None
Category
Equipment
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-NETYPE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<VENDID>,<DEVICETYPE>,<EQUIPTYPE>,<NEVERSION>"
;
Response Parameters
<VENDID> Indicates the vendor identifier of the equipment. The valid value is
a string.
<DEVICETYPE> Indicates the device type. The valid values are OSN6800A,
OSN3800A, OSN8800T16, OSN8800T32, and OSN8800T64.
<EQUIPTYPE> Indicates the equipment type. It is a 40-byte string. The valid values
are as follows:
l ADM: indicates an add/drop multiplexer.
l MSPP: indicates a multi-service provisioning platform.
<NEVERSION> Indicates the software release version of the NE. It is a 40-byte string.
Example
l Command
RTRV-NETYPE:::C;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2008-07-10 16:13:16
M C COMPLD
"HUAWEI,OSN8800T32,ADM&MSPP,8800V100R002C00"
;
Related Commands
None
A.2.11 RTRV-TOD
Retrieves the time of day.
Function
This command retrieves the system date and time at the instant when the command was executed.
The time is returned in coordinated universal time (UTC).
Usage Note
None
Category
System
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-TOD:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^"<YEAR>,<MONTH>,<DAY>,<HOUR>,<MINUTE>,<SECOND>,<TMTYPE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<YEAR> Indicates the current calendar year that ranges from 1990 to 2087.
<MONTH> Indicates the month of the year. The valid values are 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06,
07, 08, 09, 10, 11, and 12.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<DAY> Indicates the day of the month, which ranges from 01 to 31.
<HOUR> Indicates the hour of the day, which ranges from 00 to 23.
<MINUTE> Indicates the minute of the hour, which ranges from 00 to 59.
<SECOND> Indicates the second of the minute, which ranges from 00 to 59.
<TMTYPE> Indicates the type of the time value returned. The value of this parameter is
always in UTC.
Example
l Command
RTRV-TOD:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 1000 COMPLD
"2003,02,23,12,23,20,UTC"
;
Related Commands
A.2.1 ED-DAT
A.2.2 RTRV-DAT
A.2.12 SET-SID
Sets the system identification.
Function
This command changes the system identification (SID) code to a specified value. Where
appropriate, the value of this SID code is used as the target identifier in an input command and
the source identifier in an output or autonomous message.
Usage Note
None
Category
System
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
SET-SID:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<SID>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Parameter Description Default Value
<SID> Indicates the system identification code of the NA

target NE. The SID is used as the TID, which is a
string with less than 20 characters composed of
letters, digits, or hyphens with a leading letter (the
last character must not be a hyphen).
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
SET-SID:::100::NE;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 16:02:46
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
None
A.3 Configuring DCC

This section lists commands used to configure a DCC channel to communicate with a
A.3.1 ED-<GCC/DCC>
Edits GCC/DCC parameters
Function
This command edits the attributes, state, and link protocol types of a GCC/DCC channel.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Communication
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-<GCC/DCC>:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::[NEGO=<NEGO>],[TYPE=<TYPE>],
[RATEMODE=<RATEMODE>],[BIND=<BIND>],[PROTOCOL=<PROTYPE>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The access identifier which indicates the GCC/DCC NA

channel. The valid formats are as follows:
l For DCC: DCC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL ID>
l For GCC: FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-
<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL ID>
DCC is valid for SONET/OSC. The valid values of
<CHANNEL ID> are as follows:
l 1: (SDCC, DCC1-DCC3)
l 2: (LDCC, DCC4-DCC12)
l 3: (ETHA, Ethernet channel A)
l 4: (ETHB, Ethernet channel B)
GCC is valid for OTN. The valid values of
<CHANNEL ID> are as follows:
l 1: (GCC0)
l 2: (GCC1-GCC2)
l 3: (RESA)
<NEGO> Indicates whether auto-negotiation is enabled. This Y

parameter is only valid for GCC channel 3 of certain
ports with a rate of ODU2 or higher. The channel
mainly supports ASON services and supports the
auto-negotiation parameters of RATEMODE,
BIND, and TYPE. When auto-negotiation is
enabled, values of these parameters cannot be
changed.
l Y: Auto-negotiation is enabled.
l N: Auto-negotiation is disabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TYPE> Indicates the communication type that the channel NA

supports. The valid values are as follows:
l MANAGE: indicates the management channel,
which is used for the communication of
management.
l ASON: indicates the ASON channel, which is
used for the communication of ASON services.
<RATEMODE> Indicates the rate mode. This parameter is only valid NA

for GCC channel 3 of certain ports with a rate of
ODU2 or higher. The channel mainly supports
ASON services. The valid values are as follows:
l 9: 9-byte mode with an actual rate of 9 x 64 kbit/
s.
l 24: 24-byte mode with an actual rate of 24 x 64
kbit/s.
<BIND> Indicates whether the channel supports the function NA

of binding multiple fibers. The NE binds all channels
(that can be bound together) into a communication
channel, thus increasing the communication rate
between NEs.
l Y: The channel can be bound with other
channels.
l N: The channel cannot be bound with other
channels.
<PROTOCOL> Indicates the protocol of the GCC/DCC link layer. NA

The valid values are as follows:
l TRANSPARENT: There are not any link
protocols, and the channel is free in CRS.
l PPP: IP stack is set in this channel.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-GCC::FAC-1-2-1-1:C:::PROTOCOL=TRANSPARENT;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 17:18:06
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.3.2 RTRV-<GCC/DCC>
Retrieves the GCC/DCC channel parameters.
Function
This command retrieves the GCC/DCC attributes and its protocol type.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-<GCC/DCC>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> The access identifier which indicates the NA

GCC/DCC channel. The valid formats are as
follows:
l For DCC: DCC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL ID> and
SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>
l For GCC: FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF
ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<CHANNEL ID> and SLOT-<SHELF
ID>-<SLOT ID>
DCC is valid for SONET/OSC. The valid
values of <CHANNEL ID> are:
<CHANNEL ID> are:
l 1: (GCC0)
l 2: (GCC1-GCC2)
l 3: (RESA)
All the GCC/DCC channels are retrieved if
nothing is entered for this parameter.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>:[NEGO=<NEGO>],TYPE=<TYPE>,
[RATEMODE=<RATEMODE>],BIND=<BIND>,PROTOCOL=<PROTYPE>,BANDWIDTH=<BANDWIDTH>,CHANSTA
TE=<CHANSTATE>", "<cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> The access identifier which indicates the GCC/DCC channel. The
valid formats are as follows:
l For DCC: DCC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<CHANNEL ID>
l For GCC: FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
DCC is valid for SONET/OSC. The valid values of <CHANNEL ID>
are:
GCC is valid for OTN. The valid values of <CHANNEL ID> are:
l 1: (GCC0)
l 2: (GCC1-GCC2)
l 3: (RESA)
<NEGO> Indicates whether auto-negotiation is enabled. This parameter is only

valid for GCC channel 3 of certain ports with a rate of ODU2 or
higher. The channel mainly supports ASON services and supports
the auto-negotiation parameters of RATEMODE, BIND, and TYPE.
When auto-negotiation is enabled, values of these parameters cannot
be changed.
<TYPE> Indicates the communication type that the channel supports. The
valid values are as follows:
l MANAGE: indicates the management channel, which is used for
the communication of management.
l ASON: indicates the ASON channel, which is used for the
communication of ASON services.
<RATEMODE> Indicates the rate mode. This parameter is only valid for GCC channel
3 of certain ports with a rate of ODU2 or higher. The channel mainly
supports ASON services. The valid values are as follows:
l 9: 9-byte mode with an actual rate of 9 x 64 kbit/s.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<BIND> Indicates whether the channel supports the function of binding

multiple fibers. The NE binds all channels (that can be bound
together) into a communication channel, thus increasing the
communication rate between NEs.
l Y: The channel can be bound with other channels.
l N: The channel cannot be bound with other channels.
<PROTOCOL> Indicates the protocol of the DCC/GCC link layer. The valid values
are as follows:
l TRANSPARENT : There are not any link protocols, and the
channel is free in CRS.
<BANDWIDTH> Indicates the bandwidth of the DCC/GCC (units in kbit).
<CHANSTATE> Indicates the data sending and receiving state of the CPU channel
which is assigned to the optical interface. The valid values are as
follows:
l OK: The sending and receiving states are okay.
l RX_F: The sending state is okay, but the receiving fails.
l TX_F: The receiving state is okay, but the sending fails.
l RX_F&TX_F: All fail.
Example
l Command
RTRV-DCC::DCC-1-6-2-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-10 16:12:51
M C COMPLD
"DCC-1-6-2-1:TYPE=MANAGE,BIND=Y,PROTOCOL=PPP,BANDWIDTH=3*64K,CHANSTATE=OK"
;
Related Commands
A.3.1 ED-<GCC/DCC>
A.3.3 RTRV-DETAIL-<GCC/DCC>
Retrieves the GCC/DCC channel parameters.
Function
This command retrieves the GCC/DCC attributes and its protocol type.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DETAIL-<GCC/DCC>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The access identifier which indicates the NA

GCC/DCC channel. The valid formats are as
follows:
l For DCC: DCC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL ID> and
SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>
l For GCC: FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF
ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<CHANNEL ID> and SLOT-<SHELF
ID>-<SLOT ID>
DCC is valid for SONET/OSC. The valid
values of <CHANNEL ID> are:
<CHANNEL ID> are:
l 1: (GCC0)
l 2: (GCC1-GCC2)
l 3: (RESA)
All the GCC/DCC channels are retrieved if
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>:[NEGO=<NEGO>],TYPE=<TYPE>,
[RATEMODE=<RATEMODE>],BIND=<BIND>,PROTOCOL=<PROTYPE>,BANDWIDTH=<BANDWIDTH>,CHANSTA
TE=<CHANSTATE>,CHANID=<CHANID>", "<cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> The access identifier which indicates the GCC/DCC channel. The
valid formats are as follows:
l For DCC: DCC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<CHANNEL ID>
l For GCC: FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
DCC is valid for SONET/OSC. The valid values of <CHANNEL ID>
are:
GCC is valid for OTN. The valid values of <CHANNEL ID> are:
l 1: (GCC0)
l 2: (GCC1-GCC2)
l 3: (RESA)
<NEGO> Indicates whether auto-negotiation is enabled. This parameter is only

valid for GCC channel 3 of certain ports with a rate of ODU2 or
higher. The channel mainly supports ASON services and supports
the auto-negotiation parameters of RATEMODE, BIND, and TYPE.
When auto-negotiation is enabled, values of these parameters cannot
be changed.
<TYPE> Indicates the communication type that the channel supports. The
l MANAGE: indicates the management channel, which is used for
the communication of management.
l ASON: indicates the ASON channel, which is used for the
communication of ASON services.
<RATEMODE> Indicates the rate mode. This parameter is only valid for GCC channel
3 of certain ports with a rate of ODU2 or higher. The channel mainly
supports ASON services. The valid values are as follows:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<BIND> Indicates whether the channel supports the function of binding

multiple fibers. The NE binds all channels (that can be bound
together) into a communication channel, thus increasing the
communication rate between NEs.
l Y: The channel can be bound with other channels.
l N: The channel cannot be bound with other channels.
<PROTOCOL> Indicates the protocol of the DCC/GCC link layer. The valid values
are as follows:
l TRANSPARENT : There are not any link protocols, and the
channel is free in CRS.
<BANDWIDTH> Indicates the bandwidth of the DCC/GCC (units in kbit).
<CHANSTATE> Indicates the data sending and receiving state of the CPU channel
which is assigned to the optical interface. The valid values are as
follows:
l OK: The sending and receiving states are okay.
l RX_F: The sending state is okay, but the receiving fails.
l TX_F: The receiving state is okay, but the sending fails.
l RX_F&TX_F: All fail.
<CHANID> Indicates the NE channel ID associated with the GCC/DCC channel
Example
l Command
RTRV-DETAIL-GCC::SRV3-1-13-2-3:A;
l Response Message
NE-91-5 2012-04-15 00:49:27
M A COMPLD
"SRV3-1-13-2-3:NEGO=N,TYPE=ASON,RATEMODE=9,BIND=Y,PROTOCOL=PPP,BANDWIDTH=9*64K,CHA
NSTATE=RX_F,CHANID=27"
;
Related Commands
A.3.4 RTRV-DCC-CHANERR
Retrieves the channel error info of the GCC/DCC channel.
Function
This command instructs an NE to retrieve the channel error info of the GCC/DCC channel.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DCC-CHANERR:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::CHANID=<CHANID>;
Command Parameters
Value
<CHANID> Indicates the NE channel ID associated with the GCC/DCC NA

channel. The NE channel ID of the GCC/DCC channel can
be retrieved by executing the TL1 command RTRV-
DETAIL-{GCC,DCC},refer toA.3.3 RTRV-DETAIL-
<GCC/DCC>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<SID>^<YYYY-MM-DD>^<HH:MM:SS> <cr><lf>
M^^<CTAG>^COMPLD <cr><lf>
^^^"QFULL=<QFULL>,LG=<LG>,NO=<NO>,CR=<CR>,AB=<AB>,UN=<UN>,MRF=<MRF>,RXF=<RXF>,TXB=
<TXB>,RXERR=<RXERR>,TXERR=<TXERR>", "<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<QFULL> Indicates the number of times when the GCC/DCC channel's packet
sending queue is full.
<LG> Indicates the number of packets whose length exceed the maximum
packet length the NE can process.
<NO> Indicates the number of packets whose bits length is not multiple of
8.
<CR> Indicates the number of packets which have crc error.
<AB> Indicates the number of packets which have abnormal sequence.
<UN> Indicates the number of packets which have receive Overrun errors.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<MRF> Indicates the number of packets which have Maximum receive frame
length violation errors.
<RXF> Indicates the number of packets which are received correctly.
<TXB> Indicates the number of packets which are sended correctly.
<RXERR> Indicates the number of packets which are received with errors.
<TXERR> Indicates the number of packets which are sended with errors.
Example
l Command
RTRV-DCC-CHANERR:::a:::CHANID=27;
l Response Message
NE-91-5 2012-04-15 03:30:24
M A COMPLD
"QFULL=0,LG=0,NO=0,CR=0,AB=0,UN=0,MRF=0,RXF=0,TXB=66,RXERR=0,TXERR=0"
;
Related Commands
A.3.5 RTRV-DCC-CHANINFO
Retrieves the channel info of the GCC/DCC channel.
Function
This command instructs an NE to retrieve the channel info of the GCC/DCC channel.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DCC-CHANINFO:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::CHANID=<CHANID>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Value
<CHANID> Indicates the NE channel ID associated with the GCC/DCC NA

channel. The NE channel ID of the GCC/DCC channel can
be retrieved by executing the TL1 command RTRV-
DETAIL-{GCC,DCC},refer toA.3.3 RTRV-DETAIL-
<GCC/DCC>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"CHANID=<CHANID>,STATE=<STATE>,EVENT=<EVENT>,PEER_CHANID=<PEER_CHANID>,TRNS_NUM
S=<TRNS_NUMS>,TRNS_BYTES=<TRNS_BYTES>,RECV_NUMS=<RECV_NUMS>,RECV_BYTES=<RECV_BYTES
>,RX_SR=<RX_SR>,TX_SR=<TX_SR>,LAST_STATE=<LAST_STATE>", "<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<CHANID> Indicates the NE channel ID associated with the GCC/DCC channel.
<STATE> Indicates the channel state of the GCC/DCC channel.
<EVENT> Indicates the event of the GCC/DCC channel.
<PEER_CHANID> Indicates the NE channel ID associated with the GCC/DCC channel

of the peer NE.
<TRNS_NUMS> Indicates the number of packets sended from the GCC/DCC channel.
<TRNS_BYTES> Indicates the number of bytes sended from the GCC/DCC channel.
<RECV_NUMS> Indicates the number of packets received from the GCC/DCC

channel.
<RECV_BYTES> Indicates the number of bytes received from the GCC/DCC channel.
<RX_SR> Indicates the number of packets which are received with errors.
<TX_SR> Indicates the number of packets which are sended with errors.
<LAST_STATE> Indicates the last channel state of the GCC/DCC channel.
Example
l Command
RTRV-DCC-CHANINFO:::a:::CHANID=27;
l Response Message
NE-91-5 2012-04-15 04:02:04
M A COMPLD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"CHANID=27,STATE=0,EVENT=0,PEER_CHANID=0,TRNS_NUMS=222,TRNS_BYTES=3996,RECV_NUMS=0
,RECV_BYTES=0,RX_SR=0,TX_SR=0,LAST_STATE=0"
;
Related Commands
A.3.6 DLT-CRS-OHBYTE
Deletes cross overhead bytes.
Function
This command deletes cross overhead bytes.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-CRS-OHBYTE:[<TID>]:<FROM_AID>:<CTAG>::<FROM_BYTE>;
Command Parameters
Indicates the source access identifier. NA

<FROM_AI The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
D> <PORT ID>.
<FROM_BY Indicates the source byte of the cross. Overhead bytes NA

TE> include D1-D12, E1, E2, and F1.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
DLT-CRS-OHBYTE::FAC-1-2-1:10::E1;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:35:00
M 10 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.3.7 ENT-CRS-OHBYTE
A.3.8 RTRV-CRS-OHBYTE
Creates cross overhead bytes.
Function
This command creates cross overhead bytes.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-CRS-OHBYTE:[<TID>]:<FROM_AID>, <TO_AID>:<CTAG>::<FROM_BYTE>,
<TO_BYTE>;
Command Parameters
Indicates the source access identifier. NA

The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
<FROM_AID> ID>-<PORT ID>
<TO_AID> Indicates the sink access identifier. NA

ID>-<PORT ID>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<FROM_BYTE> Indicates the source byte of the cross. Overhead NA

bytes include D1-D12, E1, E2 and F1.
<TO_BYTE> The destination byte of the cross. Overhead bytes NA

include D1-D12, E1, E2 and F1.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ENT-CRS-OHBYTE::FAC-1-2-1,FAC-1-6-1:10::D1,D1;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:33:17
M 10 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the information about cross overhead bytes.
Function
This command retrieves the information about cross overhead bytes.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-CRS-OHBYTE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<FROM_AID>,<TO_AID>,<FROM_BYTE>,<TO_BYTE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<FROM_AID> Indicates the source AID.

The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>
<TO_AID> Indicates the destination AID.

ID>
<FROM_BYTE> Indicates the source byte of the cross. Overhead bytes include
D1-D12, E1, E2 and F1.
<TO_BYTE> The destination byte of the cross. Overhead bytes include D1-
D12, E1, E2 and F1.
Example
l Command
RTRV-CRS-OHBYTE:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:36:49
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-2-1,FAC-1-6-1,D1,D1"
;
Related Commands
A.3.9 ED-VACANTSLOT
Sets the DCC/GCC channel allocation trigger status for all vacant slots on the current NE to
enable or disable.
Function
This command sets the DCC/GCC channel allocation trigger status for all vacant slots on the
current NE to enable or disable.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-VACANTSLOT:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[VACANTSLOT=<VACANTSLOT>];
Command Parameters
Parameters Description Default Value
<VACANTSL Indicates the DCC/GCC channel allocation trigger ENABLE

OT> status. Valid values are enable and disable.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^COMPLD<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-VACANTSLOT:::C:::VACANTSLOT=ENABLE;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-11 21:32:07 M C COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.6.9 RTRV-CLNT
A.3.10 RTRV-VACANTSLOT
Retrieves the DCC/GCC channel allocation trigger status of NE level for all vacant slots.
Function
This command retrieves the DCC/GCC channel allocation trigger status of NE level for all vacant
slots.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-VACANTSLOT:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^COMPLD<cr><lf>
^^^VACANTSLOT=<VACANTSLOT> ;
Response Parameters
Parameters Description
<VACANTSL Indicates the DCC/GCC channel allocation trigger status. Valid values are
OT> enable and disable.
Example
l Command
RTRV-VACANTSLOT:::C;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-10 16:12:51 M C COMPLD "VACANTSLOT=ENABLE" ;
Related Commands
A.6.8 ED-CLNT
A.4 Communication Management

This section lists commands which used to configure the communication path.
A.4.1 Configuring VLAN

This section lists commands which used to configure LAN to communicate with maintenance
computer.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.1.1 ED-LAN
Modifies the LAN parameters.
Function
This command changes the attributes and state of a LAN facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-LAN:[<TID>]:<LAN_AID>:<CTAG>:::[IP=<IPADDR>], [MASK=<SUBNETMASK>],
[GATEWAY=<GATEWAY>], [ENABLE=<ENABLE>],[ARPPROXY=<ARPSTATE>],
[CONMODE=<CONMODE>],[SNDIP=<SndIpAddr>],[SNDMASK=<SndSubMask>];
Command Parameters
<LAN_AID> Indicates the access identifier, that is, the LAN NA

number. The valid value is LAN-1.
<IPADDR> Indicates the IP address. The valid values are A, NA

B, and C class IP addresses. The value will not be
changed if nothing is entered for this parameter.
<SUBNETMASK> Indicates the subnet mask address. The value will NA

not be changed if nothing is entered for this
parameter.
NOTE
For configuration of the subnet mask addresses of the
NEs, it is recommended that users configure all NEs in
the same net segment with the same subnet mask.
When the IP address of an NE is changed from
129.9.xx.xx to 192.168.xx.xx, the subnet mask is
changed to 255.255.255.0 automatically. But when the
IP address of the NE is changed back to 129.9.xx.xx,
the subnet mask is not changed and is still
255.255.255.0. If there are other NEs in the network
segment 129.9.xx.xx, some NEs may not communicate
normally, so it is recommended that users configure the
subnet mask back to 255.255.0.0 manually.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<GATEWAY> Indicates the gateway of the LAN.The gateway NA

can not be set to 192.168.0.* or 192.169.0.*.
<ENABLE> Indicates whether communication between the NA

user and the NE is enabled. The valid values are
N (users cannot access this port or the
management flow through this port) and Y (this
port is enabled and users are allowed to use this
port for communication with NE). The null value
means not to change the value before
configuration. The value will not be changed if
<ARPSTATE> Indicates whether the address resolution protocol NA

(ARP) is enabled. The valid values are ENABLE
and DISABLE.
<CONMODE> Indicates the encryption mode. The valid values NA

are NOSSL, and ALL.
<SNDIPADDR> Indicates the DCN IP address. The value will not NA

be changed if nothing is entered for this
parameter. The IP Address and the DCN IP
Address can not be in the same subnet.
<SNDSUBMASK> Indicates the DCN submask. The value will not NA

be changed if nothing is entered for this
parameter.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-
LAN::LAN-1:100:::IP=129.9.0.1,MASK=255.255.255.0,GATEWAY=129.9.0.1,ENABLE=Y,ARPPRO
XY=ENABLE,CONMODE=ALL,SNDIP=130.9.0.22,SNDMASK=255.255.255.0;
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.4.1.6 RTRV-LAN
A.4.1.2 DLT-ACL
Delete an ACL rule.
Function
This command is issued to delete an ACL rule.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
DLT-ACL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::RULEID=<RULEID>
Command Parameters
Value
<RULEID> The Index of an exist ACL rule, If the ruleid is set 4294967295, NA
that means delete all ACL rules.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
M^^<ctag>^^COMPLD<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-ACL:::100::RULEID=10
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NEW-NE 2011-05-25 20:23:32

M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.1.3 ED-ACL
Modify the ACL rule.
Function
This command is issued to modify an ACL rule.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-ACL:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>::RULEID=<RULEID>,OP=<OP>,SOURCE=<SOURCE>,WILDCAR
D=<WILDCARD>
Command Parameters
Value
<RULEID> The Index of an existed ACL rule NA
<OP> The optional operation, DENY or PERMIT. NA
<SOURCE> The source IP address of received packet. NA
<WILDCAR The wildcard mask of an ACL rule. NA

D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ED-ACL:::100::RULEID=10,OP=DENY,SOURCE=128.8.0.0,WILDCARD=0.0.255.255
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2011-05-25 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.1.4 ENT-ACL
Add the ACL rule.
Function
This command is issued to add an ACL rule.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ENT-ACL:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>::RULEID=<RULEID>,OP=<OP>,SOURCE=<SOURCE>,WILDCAR
D=<WILDCARD>
Command Parameters
Value
<RULEID> The Index of ACL rule, number ,can be 0-4294967295.If the NA

ruleid is set 4294967295, that means the acl will be allocated
a valid index by the system.
<WILDCAR The wildcard mask of an ACL rule. NA

D>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-ACL:::100::RULEID=10,OP=DENY,SOURCE=129.9.0.0,WILDCARD=0.0.255.255
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2011-05-25 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.1.5 RTRV-ACL
Retrieves all ACL rules.
Function
This command is issued to retrieve ACL rules.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ACL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"RULEID=<RULEID>,OP=<OP>,SOURCE=<SOURCE>,WILDCARD=<WILDCARD>"<cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<RULEID> The Index of an existed ACL rule
<OP> The optional operation, DENY or PERMIT.
<SOURCE> The source IP address of received packet.
<WILDCARD> The wildcard mask of an ACL rule.
Example
l Command
rtrv-acl:::100;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2011-07-29 19:28:38
M 100 COMPLD
"RULEID=10,OP=PERMIT,SOURCE=129.8.0.0,WILDCARD=0.0.255.255"
A.4.1.6 RTRV-LAN
Retrieves the LAN parameters.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes and state of a LAN facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-LAN:[<TID>]:[<LAN_AID>]:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<LAN_AID> Indicates the access identifier. The valid value is NA

LAN-1.
LAN_AID is optional for this command.
All LAN ports will be retrieved if nothing is
entered for this parameter.
Currently, only LAN-1 is supported.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^^COMPLD<cr><lf>
^^^"IP=<IPADDR><cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"IP=<IPADDR>,MASK=<SUBNETMASK>,GATEWAY=<GATEWAY>,MAC=<MAC>,ENABLE=<ENABLE>,ARPP
ROXY=<ARPSTATE>,CONMODE=<CONMODE>,SNDIP=<DCNIPADDR>,SNDMASK=<DCNSUBNETMASK>"<cr><l
f>
;
Response Parameters
<IPADDR> Indicates the IP address. The valid values are A, B, and C

class IP addresses.
<SUBNETMASK> Indicates the subnet mask address.
<GATEWAY> Indicates the gateway of the LAN.
<MAC> Indicates the MAC address.
<ENABLE> Indicates whether communication between the user and the

NE is enabled.
<ARPSTATE> Indicates whether the ARP is started.
<CONMODE> Indicates the encryption mode. The valid values are SSL,
NOSSL, and ALL.
<DCNIPADDR> Indicates the DCN IP address.
<DCNSUBNETMASK> Indicates the DCN subnet mask address.
Example
l Command
RTRV-LAN::LAN-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 17:16:08
M 10 COMPLD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"IP=129.9.0.1,MASK=255.255.0.0,GATEWAY=129.9.0.1,MAC=08-00-3e-10-00-0b,ENABLE=Y,AR
PPROXY=ENABLE,CONMODE=SSL,SNDIP=0.0.0.0,SNDMASK=0.0.0.0"
;
Related Commands
A.4.1.1 ED-LAN
A.4.1.7 ED-COM-SERVICE
Edit the service status of communication.
Function
This command is issued to open or close communication service.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Super
Command Syntax
ED-COM-SERVICE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<COMSERVICE>,<COMSRVSTATE>;
Command Parameters
Value
<COMSERVI The type of service. The valid values are NA

CE> ftpclient,sftpclient,telserver and stelserver.
<COMSRVS The state of service. The valid values are open and close. NA
TATE>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ED-COM-SERVICE:::100::FTPCLIENT,OPEN;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-07 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.4.1.8 RTRV-COM-SERVICE
A.4.1.8 RTRV-COM-SERVICE
Retrieves the information of the communication service.
Function
This command is issued to retrieve the information of the communication service.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-COM-SERVICE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"SERVICE=<COMSERVICE>,STATE=<COMSRVSTATE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<COMSERVICE> The type of service.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<COMSRVSTATE> The state of service.
Example
l Command
rtrv-com-service:::100;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-07 19:28:38
M 100 COMPLD
"SERVICE=FTPCLIENT,STATE=OPEN"
"SERVICE=SFTPCLIENT,STATE=OPEN"
"SERVICE=TELSERVER,STATE=OPEN"
"SERVICE=STELSERVER,STATE=OPEN"
;
Related Commands
A.4.1.7 ED-COM-SERVICE
A.4.1.9 ACT-SSL-CAFILE
Activates the SSL certificate file.
Function
This command is issued to activates the SSL certificate file.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ACT-SSL-CAFILE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
NONE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ACT-SSL-CAFILE:::100
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-22 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.1.10 ED-SSL-MODE
Modify the SSL mode.
Function
This command is issued to modify the SSL mode.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-SSL-MODE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::SSLMODE=<SSLMODE>
Command Parameters
Value
<SSLMODE> The mode of SSL, SINGLE or BOTH NA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-SSL-MODE:::100::SSLMODE=BOTH
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-22 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.1.11 RTRV-SSL-MODE
Retrieves the SSL mode.
Function
This command is issued to retrieve the SSL mode.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-SSL-MODE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"SSLMODE=<SSLMODE>"<cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<SSLMODE> The SSL mode.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SSL-MODE:::100;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-22 19:28:38
M 100 COMPLD
"SSLMODE=BOTH"
A.4.1.12 ED-SSL-ENCRYPTION
Modify the encryption of the SSL private key file.
Function
This command is issued to modify the encryption of the SSL private key file.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-SSL-ENCRYPTION:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>::MODE=<SSLENCRYMODE>,PASSWORD=<SSLPASSWORD>
Command Parameters
Value
<SSLENCRY The mode of encryption key. ENABLE or DISABLE. NA

MODE>
<SSLPASSW The SSL password string, 0-128 bytes. NA

ORD>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-SSL-ENCRYPTION:::100::MODE=enable,PASSWORD="111"
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-22 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.1.13 RTRV-SSL-ENCRYPTION
Retrieves the mode of the SSL private key file.
Function
This command is issued to retrieve the encryption mode of the SSL private key file.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-SSL-ENCRYPTION:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"MODE=<SSLENCRYMODE>"<cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<SSLENCRYMODE> The mode of encryption key. ENABLE or DISABLE.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SSL-ENCRYPTION:::100;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-22 19:28:38
M 100 COMPLD
"MODE=DISABLE"
A.4.1.14 ED-ADVANCED-ACL
Modify the advanced ACL rule.
Function
This command is issued to modify an advanced ACL rule.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-ADVANCED-ACL:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>::RULEID=<RULEID>,OP=<OP>,SOURCE=<SOURCE>,SRCWILDC
ARD=<SRCWILDCARD>,DESTINATION=<DESTINATION>,DSTWILDCARD=<DSTW
ILDCARD>,PROTOCOL=<PROTOCOLTYPE>,[SRCPORT=<SRCPORTACL>],
[DSTPORT=<DSTPORTACL>],[ICMPTYPE=<ICMPTYPE>],
[ICMPCODE=<ICMPCODE>]
Command Parameters
Value
<RULEID> The Index of an existed advanced ACL rule NA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<SRCWILDC The wildcard mask of the source IP. NA

ARD>
<DESTINATI The destination IP address of received packet. NA

ON>
<DSTWILDC The wildcard mask of the destination IP. NA

ARD>
<PROTOCOL The type of protocol,TCP/UDP/ICMP/IP NA

TYPE>
<SRCPORTA (UL)the source port of advanced ACL rule 42949672

CL> 95
<DSTPORTA (UL)the destination port of advanced ACL rule 42949672

CL> 95
<ICMPTYPE (UC)the type of ICMP packet 255

>
<ICMPCODE (UC)the code of ICMP packet 255

>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-ADVANCEL-ACL:::
100::RULEID=10,OP=DENY,SOURCE=128.9.0.0,SRCWILDCARD=0.0.255.255,DESTINATION=128.8.
0.0,DSTWILDCARD=0.0.255.255,PROTOCOL=IP;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-22 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.1.15 ENT-ADVANCED-ACL
Add the advanced ACL rule.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command is issued to add an advanced ACL rule.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ENT-ADVANCED-ACL:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>::RULEID=<RULEID>,OP=<OP>,SOURCE=<SOURCE>,SRCWILDC
ARD=<SRCWILDCARD>,DESTINATION=<DESTINATION>,DSTWILDCARD=<DSTW
ILDCARD>,PROTOCOL=<PROTOCOLTYPE>,[SRCPORT=<SRCPORTACL>],
[DSTPORT=<DSTPORTACL>],[ICMPTYPE=<ICMPTYPE>],
[ICMPCODE=<ICMPCODE>]
Command Parameters
Value
<RULEID> The Index of an advanced ACL rule. If the ruleid is set NA

4294967295, that means the acl will be allocated a valid index
by the system
<SRCWILDC The wildcard mask of the source IP. NA

ARD>
<DESTINATI The destination IP address of received packet. NA

ON>
<DSTWILDC The wildcard mask of the destination IP. NA

ARD>
<PROTOCOL The type of protocol,TCP/UDP/ICMP/IP NA

TYPE>
<SRCPORTA (UL)the source port of advanced ACL rule 42949672

CL> 95
<DSTPORTA (UL)the destination port of advanced ACL rule 42949672

CL> 95

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<ICMPTYPE (UC)the type of ICMP packet 255

>
<ICMPCODE (UC)the code of ICMP packet 255

>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-ADVANCED-ACL:::
100::RULEID=10,OP=DENY,SOURCE=128.9.0.0,SRCWILDCARD=0.0.255.255,DESTINATION=128.8.
0.0,DSTWILDCARD=0.0.255.255,PROTOCOL=IP;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-22 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.1.16 RTRV-ADVANCED-ACL
Retrieves all advanced ACL rules.
Function
This command is issued to retrieve advanced ACL rules.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ADVANCED-ACL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"RULEID=<RULEID>,OP=<OP>,SOURCE=<SOURCE>,SRCWILDCARD=<SRCWILDCARD>,DESTINATION=
<DESTINATION>,DSTWILDCARD=<DSTWILDCARD>,PROTOCOL=<PROTOCOLTYPE>,SRCPORT=<SRCPORTAC
L>,DSTPORT=<DSTPORTACL>,ICMPTYPE=<ICMPTYPE>,ICMPCODE=<ICMPCODE>"<cr><lf>
Response Parameters
<RULEID> The Index of an existed advanced ACL rule
<OP> The optional operation, DENY or PERMIT.
<SOURCE> The source IP address of received packet.
<SRCWILDCA The wildcard mask of the source IP.

RD>
<DESTINATIO The destination IP address of received packet.

N>
<DSTWILDCA The wildcard mask of the destination IP.

RD>
<PROTOCOLT The type of protocol,TCP/UDP/ICMP/IP

YPE>
<SRCPORTACL (UL)the source port of advanced ACL rule

>
<DSTPORTACL (UL)the destination port of advanced ACL rule

>
<ICMPTYPE> (UC)the type of ICMP packet
<ICMPCODE> (UC)the code of ICMP packet
Example
l Command
RTRV-ADVANCED-ACL:::100;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-22 19:28:38
M 100 COMPLD
"RULEID=10,OP=PERMIT,SOURCE=128.9.0.0,SRCWILDCARD=0.0.255.255,DESTINATION=128.8.0.
0,DSTWILDCARD=0.0.255.255,PROTOCOLTYPE=ip,SRCPORT=0xffffffff,DSTPORT=0xffffffff,IC
MPTYPE=0xff,ICMPCODE=0xff"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.1.17 DLT-ADVANCED-ACL
Delete an advanced ACL rule.
Function
This command is issued to delete an advanced ACL rule.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
DLT-ADVANCED-ACL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::RULEID=<RULEID>
Command Parameters
Value
<RULEID> The Index of an exist advanced ACL rule, If the ruleid is set NA
4294967295, that means delete all advanced ACL rules.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-ADVANCED-ACL:::100::RULEID=10;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-22 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.2 Enquire PPP/IP Interface Information

This section lists commands which used to retrieve the PPP/IP interface information. The PPP/
IP interface is used to communicate with maintenance computer.
A.4.2.1 RTRV-IPIF-INFO
Retrieves information about all IP interfaces.
Function
This command retrieves information about all IP interfaces of an NE.
Usage Note
None
Category
TIPS
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-IPIF-INFO:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"NAME=<INTERFACE_INFO>:INDEX=<INTERFACE_INDEX>:IP=<IP_ADDR>:MASK=<IP_MASK>:FLAG
=<IP_FLAG>:LTYPE=<LINK_TYPE>:LMTU=<LINK_MTU>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<INTERFACE_INFO> Indicates the interface name.
<INTERFACE_INDEX> Indicates the interface index.
<IP_ADDR> Indicates the IP address.
<IP_MASK> Indicates the mask of the IP address.
<IP_FLAG> Indicates the flag of the IP address.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LINK_TYPE> Indicates the link type.
<LINK_MTU> Indicates the link MTU.
Example
l Command
RTRV-IPIF-INFO:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-03-21 09:33:54
M 100 COMPLD
"NAME=ETH1:INDEX=386:IP=129.9.0.20:MASK=255.255.0.0:FLAG=0:LTYPE=ETHERNET:LMTU=150
0",
"NAME=PPP-0-2-255-1-257-1:INDEX=518:IP=129.9.0.20:MASK=255.255.0.0:FLAG=1:LTYPE=PP
P:LMTU=960"
;
Related Commands
None
A.4.2.2 RTRV-PPPIF-COUNT
Retrieves the message count information about a PPP interface.
Function
This command retrieves the message count information about a PPP interface.
Usage Note
None
Category
TIPS
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PPPIF-COUNT:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<INTERFACE_INDEX>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<INTERFACE_INDEX> Indicates the index of the NA

interface. The valid value is a
nonnegative integer.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"INDEX=<INTERFACE_INDEX>:IN=<RECV_IP_NUM>:OUT=<SEND_IP_NUM> "<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<INTERFACE_INDEX> Indicates the index of the interface.
<RECV_IP_NUM> Indicates the number of the received IP messages.
<SEND_IP_NUM> Indicates the number of the transmitted IP messages.
Example
l Command
RTRV-PPPIF-COUNT:::100::1;
l Response Message
NE 2005-03-21 09:33:54
M 100 COMPLD
"INDEX=1:IN=1000:OUT=1500"
Related Commands
None
A.4.2.3 RTRV-PPPIF-STATE
Retrieves the negotiation information about a PPP interface.
Function
This command retrieves the negotiation information about a PPP interface.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
TIPS
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PPPIF-STATE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<INTERFACE_INDEX>;
Command Parameters
<INTERFACE_INDEX> Indicates the index of the NA

interface. The valid value is a
nonnegative integer.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"INDEX=<INTERFACE_INDEX>:NEGOSTATE=<NEGO_STATE>:NEGOTYPE=<NEGO_TYPE>:FSMSTATE=<
FSM_STATE> "<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<INTERFACE_INDEX> Indicates the index of the interface.
<NEGO_STATE> Indicates the negotiation state. The valid values are as

follows:
l DEAD
l ESTABLISH
l AUTHENTICATE
l CBCP
l NETWORK
l TERMINATE
<NEGO_TYPE> Indicates the negotiation type. The valid values are as follows:
l LCP
l NCP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<FSM_STATE> Indicates the finite state machine (FSM) state. The valid
values are as follows:
l INITIAL
l STARTING
l CLOSED
l STOPPED
l CLOSING
l STOPPING
l REQSENT
l ACKRCVD
l ACKSENT
l OPENED
Example
l Command
RTRV-PPPIF-STATE:::100::1;
l Response Message
NE 2005-03-21 09:33:54
M 100 COMPLD
"INDEX=1:NEGOSTATE=ESTABLISH:NEGOTYPE=NCP:FSMSTATE=OPENED"
Related Commands
None
A.4.2.4 RTRV-ROUTE-INFO
Retrieves the information about the route table.
Function
This command retrieves the information about the route table.
Usage Note
None
Category
TIPS
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-ROUTE-INFO:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"IP=<IP_ADDR>:MASK=<IP_MASK>:HOPNEXT=<HOP_NEXT>:INTERFACE=<INTERFACE_INFO>"<cr>
<lf>
;
Response Parameters
<IP_ADDR> Indicates the IP address.
<IP_MASK> Indicates the subnet mask.
<HOP_NEXT> Indicates the next hop.
<INTERFACE_INFO> Indicates the interface address.
Example
l Command
RTRV-ROUTE-INFO:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-03-21 09:33:54
M 100 COMPLD
"IP=127.0.0.0:MASK=255.0.0.0:HOPNEXT=127.0.0.1:INTERFACE=InLoopBack0"
"IP=129.9.16.2:MASK=255.255.255.255:HOPNEXT=127.0.0.1:INTERFACE=InLoopBack0"
;
Related Commands
None
A.4.3 Configuring FTP

This section lists commands which used to configure FTP protocol to communicate with
A.4.3.1 ED-FTP
Edits FTP parameters.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command is issued to modify the attributes and state of FTP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-FTP:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<FTP_SWITCH>
Command Parameters
<FTP_SWITCH> Valid values are as follows. CLOSE

l OPEN: User can access to
the FTP if it is set to
OPEN.
l CLOSE: User cannot
access to the FTP if it is
set to CLOSE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-FTP:::100::CLOSE;
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.4.3.2 RTRV-FTP
A.4.3.2 RTRV-FTP
Retrieves FTP parameters.
Function
This command retrieves the state of an FTP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-FTP:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<FTP_SWITCH >"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
FTP_SWITCH The valid values are as follows:

l OPEN: Users can access the FTP.
l CLOSE: Users cannot access the FTP.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FTP:::100;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 17:16:08
M 10 COMPLD
"CLOSE"
;
Related Commands
A.4.3.1 ED-FTP
A.4.4 Configuring Serial

This section lists commands which used to configure serial port to communicate with
A.4.4.1 ED-SERIAL
Modifies serial port parameters.
Function
This command modifies the attributes and state of the serial port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-SERIAL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[BAUDRATE=<BAUDRATE>],
[LINKWAY=<LINKWAY>],[WORKSTATE=<WORKSTATE>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<BAUDRATE> Indicates the baud rate of the serial port. 38400

l 1200
l 2400
l 4800
l 9600
l 19200
l 38400
l 57600
l 115200
<LINKWAY> Indicates the link way of the serial port. TL1

The valid values are TL1
<WORKSTATE The valid values are open and close. Open

> NOTE
<WorkState> of the serial port is open by default.
<WorkState> is stored in the database.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-SERIAL:::100:::BaudRate=38400;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:35:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.4.4.2 RTRV-SERIAL
A.4.4.2 RTRV-SERIAL
Retrieves serial interface parameters.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command retrieves the parameters of a serial interface.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-SERIAL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^" < BaudRate >,< Linkway >,<WorkState>" <cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<BaudRate> Indicates the baud rate of the serial interface.
<Linkway> Indicates the link way of serial interface.
<WorkState> Indicates the working status of the serial interface. The valid
values are OPEN and CLOSE.
NOTE
The working status of the serial interface is OPEN by default. The
<WorkState> parameter is stored in the database.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SERIAL:::10;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 16:24:31
M 10 COMPLD
"38400,TL1,OPEN"
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.4.4.1 ED-SERIAL
A.4.5 Configuring IP
This section lists commands which used to configure IP to communicate with maintenance
computer.
A.4.5.1 DLT-TIDIPMAP
Deletes a static TID-IP mapping.
Function
This command deletes a static TID-IP mapping.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
DLT-TIDIPMAP:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::TID=<TID>;
Command Parameters
<TID> Indicates the name of an NE. It is a character string NA

with no more than 20 characters.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
DLT-TIDIPMAP:::100:::TID=NE101;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:51:13
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.4.5.2 ENT-TIDIPMAP
A.4.5.3 RTRV-TIDIPMAP
Creates a static TID-IP mapping.
Function
This command creates a static TID-IP mapping.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ENT-TIDIPMAP:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::TID=<TID>,IP=<IPADDR>;
Command Parameters
Value
<TID> Indicates the NE name. It is a character string with no more NA

than 20 characters.
<IPADDR Indicates the IP address of the NE. The IP address must be NA

> valid and cannot be a loop address (127.0.0.1).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-TIDIPMAP:::100:::TID=NE101,IP=192.168.0.101;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:39:50
M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
Retrieves all the TID-IP mapping information.
Function
This command retrieves all the TID-IP mapping information.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-TIDIPMAP:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
^^^" <TID>,<IPADDR>,<MODE> "<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<TID> Indicates the TID of the NE.
<IPADDR> Indicates the IP address of the NE.
<MODE> Indicates the mode in which the mapping relation between

TID and IPAddr is set up. The valid values are AUTOMODE
and MANMODE.
Example
l Command
RTRV-TIDIPMAP:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:53:04
M 100 COMPLD
"NE,129.9.0.1,MANMODE"
;
Related Commands
A.4.5.4 DLT-IPROUTE-STATIC
Deletes static routes.
Function
This command deletes static routes from the route table.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
DLT-IPROUTE-STATIC:<TID>::<CTAG>:::DESTIP=<DESTIP>;
Command Parameters
Paramete Description Default Value
r
<DESTIP Indicates the destination IP address. NA

>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-IPROUTE-STATIC:::100::: DESTIP=129.9.0.2;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:57:06
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.4.5.5 ENT-IPROUTE-STATIC
A.4.5.6 RTRV-IPROUTE-STATIC
Adds static routes.
Function
This command adds static routes to the route table.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ENT-IPROUTE-
STATIC:<TID>::<CTAG>:::DESTIP=<DESTIP>,MASK=<SUBNETMASK>,GATEWAY
=<GATEWAY_LAN>;
Command Parameters
Value
<DESTIP> Indicates the destination IP address. NA
<SUBNETMASK> Indicates the subnet mask. NA
<GATEWAY_LA Indicates the IP address of the gateway. NA

N>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-IPROUTE-STATIC:::10:::DESTIP=129.8.0.0,MASK=255.255.0.0,GATEWAY=129.9.0.1;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:57:06
M 10 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves static routes.
Function
This command retrieves static routes from the route table.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-IPROUTE-STATIC:<TID>::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"[<DESTIP>],[<MASK>],[<GATEWAY>],[<BID>],[<PORT>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
DESTIP Indicates the destination IP address.
GATEWAY Indicates the IP address of the gateway.
MASK Indicates the subnet mask.
BID Indicates the card ID.
PORT Indicates the port ID.
Example
l Command
RTRV-IPROUTE-STATIC:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 16:00:08
M 100 COMPLD
"129.8.0.0,255.255.0.0,129.9.0.1,0,0"
;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.5.7 RTRV-IPROUTE
Retrieves all route information.
Function
This command retrieves all route information.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-IPROUTE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<DESTADDR>,<MASK>,<GATEWAY>,<PROTOCOL>,<METRIC>,<IFNAME>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<DESTADDR> Indicates the destination IP address.
<MASK> Indicates the subnet mask.
<GATEWAY> Indicates the IP address of the gateway.
<PROTOCOL> Indicates the protocol. The valid values are as follows:

l OSPF
l RIP
l Static
l DIRECT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<METRIC> Indicates the metric of the route.
<IFNAME> Indicates the interface name.
Example
l Command
RTRV-IPROUTE:::S;
l Response Message
NE 2008-12-06 16:28:17
M S RTRV
"127.0.0.0,255.0.0.0,127.0.0.1,DIRECT,0,InLoopBack0"
"129.9.0.0,255.255.0.0,129.9.11.19,DIRECT,0,Ethernet1"
"129.9.0.5,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.24,OSPF,120,PPP-0-2-255-1-2-3"
"129.9.0.100,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.24,OSPF,120,PPP-0-2-255-1-2-3"
"129.9.11.15,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.24,OSPF,120,PPP-0-2-255-1-2-3"
"129.9.11.17,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.24,OSPF,120,PPP-0-2-255-1-2-3"
"129.9.11.18,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.24,OSPF,160,PPP-0-2-255-1-2-3"
"129.9.11.21,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.24,OSPF,80,PPP-0-2-255-1-2-3"
"129.9.11.24,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.24,DIRECT,0,PPP-0-2-255-1-0-1"
"129.9.11.24,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.24,DIRECT,0,PPP-0-2-255-1-2-3"
"129.9.11.34,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.24,OSPF,120,PPP-0-2-255-1-2-3"
>
>
NE 2008-12-06 16:28:17
M S COMPLD
"129.9.255.255,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.19,DIRECT,0,Ethernet1"
"255.255.255.255,255.255.255.255,129.9.11.19,DIRECT,0,Ethernet1"
;
>
Related Commands
A.4.5.8 RTRV-STAT-TCP
Retrieves the TCP connection information.
Function
This command retrieves the information about the TCP active sessions.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-STAT-TCP:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"PEERIP=<PEERIPADDR>,PORT=<PORT>,PEERPORT=<PEERPORT>,RECVPACKET=<RECV_PACKET>,R
ECVBYTE=<RECV_BYTE>,SENDPACKET=<SEND_PACKET>,SENDBYTE=<SEND_BYTE>,CONNTIMES=<CONNT
IMES>."<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<PEERIPADDR> Indicates the IP address of the peer port.
<PORT> Indicates the number of the local port.
<PEERPORT> Indicates the number of the peer port.
<RECV_PACKET> Indicates the number of received packets.
<SEND_PACKET> Indicates the number of transmitted packets.
<RECV_BYTE> Indicates the number of received bytes.
<SEND_BYTE> Indicates the number of transmitted bytes.
<CONNTIMES> Indicates the number of connection times, which is always 1.
Example
l Command
RTRV-STAT-TCP:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-12-19 20:21:27
M 100 COMPLD
"PEERIP=129.9.16.17,PORT=1600,PEERPORT=1118,RECVPACKET=25,RECVBYTE=664,SENDPA
CKET=0,SENDBYTE=0,CONNTIMES=1"
;
Related Commands
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.5.9 RTRV-TCPIP-INFO
Retrieves the TCP/IP information.
Function
This command retrieves the information about the TCP/IP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-TCPIP-INFO:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<TYPE_STR>;
Command Parameters
TCPIP funcation name. "TCPIP_ShowNetStatus"

<TYPE_STR> or "TCPIP_ShowPPPState" NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<TYPE_INFO>"<cr><lf>
Response Parameters
<TYPE_INFO> Indicates the information of TCPIP
Example
l Command
RTRV-TCPIP-INFO:::100::"TCPIP_ShowNetStatus";
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2011-10-11 00:10:50
M 100 RTRV

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"
Proto Local Address Foreign Address State
"
"TCP4 0.0.0.0:23 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
"
"TCP4 0.0.0.0:80 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
"
"TCP4 0.0.0.0:1400 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
"
"TCP4 0.0.0.0:2008 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
"
"TCP4 0.0.0.0:3081 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
"
"TCP4 0.0.0.0:3082 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
"
"TCP4 0.0.0.0:5432 0.0.0.0:0 Listening
"
"TCP4 130.9.0.2:23 130.9.0.130:4864 Established
"
"UDP4 0.0.0.0:0 0.0.0.0:0
"
"UDP4 0.0.0.0:161 0.0.0.0:0
"
>
>
NEW-NE 2011-10-11 00:10:50

M 100 COMPLD
"UDP4 0.0.0.0:1400 0.0.0.0:0
"
"UDP4 0.0.0.0:1401 0.0.0.0:0
"
"UDP4 0.0.0.0:1500 0.0.0.0:0
"
"UDP4 0.0.0.0:1501 0.0.0.0:0
"
"UDP4 0.0.0.0:8002 0.0.0.0:0
"
;
A.4.5.10 IP-PING
Communicates with an NE on a network through the ping command.
Function
This command checks the communication with an NE by using the ping command.
Usage Note
The command sends 3 packets and each packet has 56 bytes. TTL is 255.
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
IP-PING:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<TARGETIP>;
Command Parameters
<TARGETIP> Indicates the target IP address. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<PINGRESULT>"
<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<PINGRESULT> Indicates the result in response to the ping command.
Example
l Command
IP-PING:::100::129.9.35.210;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-13 16:11:19
M 100 COMPLD
"\"
PING 129.9.35.210: 56 data bytes\""
"\" Reply from 129.9.35.210: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=128 time=1 ms\""
"\"
--- 129.9.35.210 ping statistics ---\""
"\" 3 packet(s) transmitted\""
"\" 3 packet(s) received\""
"\" Percent 0.00% packet lost \""
"\" round-trip min/avg/max = 1/1/1 ms\""
"\"\""
;
Related Commands
None
A.4.5.11 IP-TRACERT
Traces the path to an NE on a network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command traces the path to an NE on the network.
Usage Note
The user needs to input the maximum number of hops in this command. By default, the system
sends three test data packets for each hop, and the expiration time is five seconds for each packet.
As a result, the proper hop is needed when you input the parameter in the command.
The command does not support the trace of the local IP address, loopback address, network
segment address, and broadcast address.
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
IP-TRACERT:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<TARGETIP>,[MAX_HOPS];
Command Parameters
<TARGETIP> Indicates the target IP address. NA
<MAX_HOPS> Indicates the maximum number NA

of hops. It ranges from 1 to 30.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"< TRACERTRESULT >"
<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<TRACERTRESULT> Indicates the result.
Example
l Command
IP-TRACERT:::100::129.9.35.210;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-13 16:14:42
M 100 CMPLD
"\"
traceroute to 129.9.35.210(129.9.35.210) 30 hops max,40 bytes packet \""
"\"
1 129.9.35.210 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms \""
"\"\""
;
>
Related Commands
None
A.4.6 Configure OSI

This section lists commands which used to configure OSI protocol.
A.4.6.1 RTRV-OSI-ADJS
Retrieves the information of the OSI neighbor.
Function
This command is issued to retrieve the information of the OSI neighbor.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-OSI-ADJS:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<OSI_CIRNAME>:ADJ=<OSI_ADJ>,TYPE=<OSI_ADJSTYPE>,HOLD=<OSI_HOLD>,STATE=<OSI_ADJ
SSTATE>,AREAID=<OSI_AREAID>,SYSID=<OSI_SYSID>,SNPA=<OSI_SNPA>,ATTR=<OSI_ADJSATTR>"
<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
NONE
Example
l Command
RTRV-OSI-ADJS:::123456;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-07 19:28:38
M 123456 COMPLD
;
A.4.6.2 ED-OSI-DCC
Edit the parameter of OSI.
Function
This command is issued to edit the parameter of OSI.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-OSI-DCC:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::[T200=<OSI_T200>],[N200=<OSI_N200>],
[ISHLOTM=<OSI_DCCISHLOTM>],[ESCFGTM=<OSI_DCCESCFGTM>],
[ISCFGTM=<OSI_DCCISCFGTM>],[HLDTM=<OSI_DCCHLDTM>];
Command Parameters
Value
<T200> T200. (1~20). NA
<N200> N200. (2~6) NA
<ISHLOTM> IS Hello Timer. (1~100s) NA
<ESCFGTM> ES Configure Timer. (1~200s) NA
<ISCFGTM> IS Configure Timer. (1~200s) NA
<HLDTM> Hold. (2~63) NA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-OSI-DCC:::3:::T200=1;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-07 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.6.3 ENT-OSI-DLTUNNEL
Add an OSI tunnel.
Function
This command is issued to add an OSI tunnel.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ENT-OSI-DLTUNNEL:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>::PEERIP=<PEERIP>,ROLE=<TUN_LAPDROLE>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Value
<PEERIP> The peer IP address of OSI tunnel. NA
<TUN_LAPD The virtual LAPD role. (USER | NETWORK). NA

ROLE>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-OSI-DLTUNNEL:::100::PEERIP=129.9.35.111,ROLE=USER;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-7 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.6.4 DLT-OSI-DLTUNNEL
Delete an OSI tunnel
Function
This command is issued to delete an OSI tunnel.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
DLT-OSI-DLTUNNEL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::PEERIP=<PEERIP>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<PEERIP> The peer IP address of OSI tunnel. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-OSI-DLTUNNEL:::100::PEERIP=129.9.35.111;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2012-02-06 20:23:32
M 100 COMPLD
;
A.4.7 Configuring OSPF

This section lists commands to configure OSPF protocol
A.4.7.1 ED-OSPF-DCC
Modifies the DCC-type interface parameters of the OSPF protocol.
Function
This command modifies the DCC-type interface parameters of the OSPF protocol.
Usage Note
This command can be successfully issued only after the OSPF protocol is enabled.
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
ED-OSPF-DCC:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[COST=<COST>],[HELLO=<HELLOTIME>],
[DEAD=<DEADTIME>],[RETRANSMIT=<RETRANSMIT_TIME>],
[DELAY=<TRANSIT_DELAY_TIME>],[NOTSILENCE=<NOT_SILENCE>];
Command Parameters
Value
<COST> Indicates the cost. The valid value ranges from 1 to 100
65535. Entering "0" will set this parameter to the
default value.
<HELLOTIME> Indicates the timer of sending hello from the port. 10

The valid value ranges from 1 to 255. Entering "0"
will set this parameter to the default value.
<DEADTIME> Indicates the dead timer of neighbor invalidation. 40

The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535. Entering "0"
will set this parameter to the default value.
<RETRANSMIT_ Indicates the timer of retransmitting LSA. The valid 5

TIME> value ranges from 1 to 65535. Entering "0" will set
this parameter to the default value.
<TRANSIT_DELA Indicates the transmit delay of LSA. The valid value 1

Y_TIME> ranges from 1 to 3600. Entering "0" will set this
parameter to the default value.
<NOT_SILENCE> Indicates whether the DCC interface is allowed to Y

transmit the OSPF message. The valid values are Y
and N.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^^COMPLD<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-OSPF-DCC:::100:::COST=150;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 16:01:49 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.4.7.4 RTRV-OSPF-ALL

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.7.2 ED-OSPF-LAN
Modifies the LAN-type interface parameters of the OSPF protocol.
Function
This command modifies the LAN-type interface parameters of the OSPF protocol.
Usage Note
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-OSPF-LAN:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[COST=<COST>],[HELLO=<HELLOTIME>],
[DEAD=<DEADTIME>],[RETRANSMIT=<RETRANSMITTIME>],
[DELAY=<TRANSITDELAY>],[DRPRI=<PRIORITY>],
[NOTSILENCE=<NOT_SILENCE>];
Command Parameters
Value
Indicates the cost. The valid value ranges from 1 to 10

65535. Entering "0" will set this parameter to the
<COST> default value.
<HELLOTIME> Indicates the hello timer. The valid value ranges from 10
1 to 255. Entering "0" will set this parameter to the
default value.
<DEADTIME> Indicates the dead timer. The valid value ranges from 40
1 to 65535. <DEADTIMER> must be larger than
<HELLOTIMER>. Entering "0" will set this
<RETRANSMITTI Indicates the retransmitting timer. The valid value 5

ME> ranges from 1 to 65535. Entering "0" will set this
<TRANSITDELA Indicates the transit delay. The valid value ranges from 1
Y> 1 to 3600. Entering "0" will set this parameter to the
default value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<PRIORITY> Indicates the OSPF priority. The valid value ranges 1

from 1 to 255. Entering "0" will set this parameter to
the default value.
<NOT_SILENCE> Indicates whether the LAN-type interface is allowed to N

transmit the OSPF message. The valid values are Y and
N.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-OSPF-LAN:::100:::cost=150;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 16:01:49 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.4.7.3 ED-OSPF-SYS
Modifies the system parameters of the OSPF protocol.
Function
This command modifies the system parameters of the OSPF protocol.
Usage Note
Category
Communication
Security
Maintenance

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
ED-OSPF-SYS:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[ENABLE=<OSPF_ENABLE>],[AREA=<AREA>],
[STUB=<STUB_FLAG>],[NSSA=<NSSA_FLAG>],[IMPORTRIP=<IMPORT_RIP>],
[IMPORTSTATIC=<IMPORT_STATIC>],[IMPORTDIRECT=<IMPORT_DIRECT>];
Command Parameters
<OSPF_ENABLE Indicates whether the OSPF protocol is enabled. The Y

> valid values are Y and N.
<AREA> Indicates the area ID. The valid values are IP 0.0.0.0
addresses ranging from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.254.
NOTE
Modification of <AREA> initializes other parameters in
area configuration with default values. The parameters
include <STUB_FLAG> and <NSSA_FLAG>. The value
of <STUB_FLAG> or <NSSA_FLAG> cannot be changed
if <AREA> is set to 0.0.0.0 (backbone area).
<STUB_FLAG> Indicates the stub area flag. The valid values are Y N
and N.
<NSSA_FLAG> Indicates the not-so-stubby area (NSSA) flag. The N

valid values are Y and N.
<IMPORT_RIP> Indicates the import RIP flag. The valid values are Y N
and N.
<IMPORT_STAT Indicates the import static routes flag. The valid N

IC> values are Y and N.
<IMPORT_DIRE Indicates the import direct routes flag. The valid N

CT> values are Y and N.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-OSPF-SYS:::100:::ENABLE=Y;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 16:01:49 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Retrieves all parameters of the OSPF protocol (OSPF-SYS, OSPF-DCC, and OSPF-LAN).
Function
This command retrieves all parameters of the OSPF protocol (OSPF-SYS, OSPF-DCC, and
OSPF-LAN).
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-OSPF-ALL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"
Enable=<OSPF_ENABLE>,AREA=<AREA>,STUB=<STUB_FLAG>,NSSA=<NSSA_FLAG>,IMPORTRIP=<IMPO
RTRIP_FLAG>,IMPORTSTATIC=<IMPORTSTATIC_FLAG>,IMPORTDIRECT=<IMPORTDIRECT_FLAG>,INTE
RFACE=<INTERFACE>,COST=<COST>,HELLO=<HELLOTIMER>,DEAD=<DEADTIMER>,RETRANSMIT=<RETR
ANSMITTIMER>,Delay=<TRANSITDELAY>,NOTSILENCE=<NOT_SILENCE>,DRPRI=<OSPF_DRPRI>,IMPO
RTDEFRT=<IMPORTDEFRT_FLAG>;
Response Parameters
Indicates whether the OSPF protocol is enabled. The valid

<OSPF_ENABLE> values are Y and N (default=Y).
<AREA> Indicates the area ID. The valid value is an IP address ranging
from 0.0.0.0 (default) to 255.255.255.254.
<STUB_FLAG> Indicates the flag. The valid values are Y and N (default=N).
<NSSA_FLAG> Indicates the flag. The valid values are Y and N (default=N).
<IMPORTRIP_FLAG> Indicates the flag. The valid values are Y and N (default=N).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<IMPORTSTATIC_FLAG> Indicates the flag. The valid values are Y and N (default=N).
<IMPORTDIRECT_FLAG> Indicates the flag. The valid values are Y and N (default=N).
<INTERFACE> Indicates the type of the interface. The valid values are Y,
DCC and LAN.
<COST> Indicates the cost. The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 100.
<HELLOTIMER> Indicates the hello timer. The valid value ranges from 1 to
255 (default=1).
<DEADTIMER> Indicates the dead timer. The valid value ranges from 1 to
65535. The default value is 6.
<RETRANSMITTIMER> Indicates the retransmission timer. The valid value ranges

from 1 to 65535. The default value is 5.
<TRANSITDELAY> Indicates the transmission delay. The valid value ranges from
1 to 3600 (default=1). The default value is 1.
<NOT_SILENCE> Indicates the flag. The valid values are Y and N (default=Y).
<OSPF_DRPRI> Indicates the priority.

l For DCC interfaces, set this parameter to 4294967295
(0xffffffff), which indicates that the DCC interfaces do not
support priority setting.
l For LAN interfaces, set this parameter to a value ranging
from 1 to 255 (default=1).
<IMPORTDEFRT_FLAG> Indicates the default route import flag. The valid values are
Y and N (default=N).
Example
l Command
RTRV-OSPF-ALL:::100
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 16:13:16
M 100 COMPLD
"
ENABLE=Y,AREA=0.0.0.0,STUB=N,NSSA=N,IMPORTRIP=N,IMPORTSTATIC=N,IMPORTDIRECT=N,INTE
RFACE=LAN,COST=10,HELLO=10,DEAD=40,RETRANSMIT=5,DELAY=1,NOTSILENCE=N,
DRPRI=1,IMPORTDEFRT=N"
"
ENABLE=Y,AREA=0.0.0.0,STUB=N,NSSA=N,IMPORTRIP=N,IMPORTSTATIC=N,IMPORTDIRECT=N,INTE
RFACE=DCC,COST=100,HELLO=1,DEAD=6,RETRANSMIT=5,DELAY=1,NOTSILENCE=Y,DRPRI=42949672
95,IMPORTDEFRT=N"
;
Related Commands
A.4.7.3 ED-OSPF-SYS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.7.1 ED-OSPF-DCC
A.4.7.2 ED-OSPF-LAN
A.4.8 Configuring NTP

This section lists commands which used to configure NTP protocol.
A.4.8.1 DLT-NTP-ACCTL
Deletes the access control of NTP.
Function
This command is issued to delete the NTP access control.
Usage Note
This command can be successfully issued only after the NTP protocol is enabled.
Category
NTP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
DLT-NTP-ACCTL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[ACLNUM=<NTP_ACLNUM>];
Command Parameters
<NTP_ACLNUM> Indicates the number of NTP NA

access controls.
The valid value ranges from
1 to 250.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
DLT-NTP-ACCTL:::100:::ACLNUM=1;
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.4.8.2 ENT-NTP-ACCTL
A.4.8.3 RTRV-NTP-ACCTL
Adds access control information about the NTP.
Function
This command adds the access control information about the NTP.
Usage Note
Category
NTP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ENT-NTP-ACCTL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[ACLNUM=<NTP_ACLNUM>],
[SRCIP=<SRCIP>],[SRCNSAP=<SRCNSAP>],[ADDRACCESS=<ADDR_ACCESS>],
[NTPACCESS=<NTP_ACCESS>];
Command Parameters
<NTP_ACLN Indicates the number of NTP access controls. The NA

UM> valid value ranges from 1 to 250.
<SRCIP> Indicates the IP address of the source NE. NA
<SRCNSAP> Indicates the NSAP address of the source NE. NA
<ADDR_ACC Determines whether to accept the clock information Accept

ESS> from the source NE. The valid values are ACCEPT
and DENY.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<NTP_ACCES Indicates the working mode of the NTP. The valid Peer
S> values are as follows:
l Query: Only responds to the query of other NEs.
l SYN: Only responds to the time request of other
NEs.
l Server: Responds to the query and time request of
other NEs. It cannot be synchronized to remote
servers.
l Peer: Responds to the query and time request of
other NEs. It can be synchronized to remote
servers.
Response Syntax
cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^^COMPLD<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-NTP-ACCTL:::100:::ACLNUM=1,SRCIP=129.9.0.1,ADDRACCESS =ACCEPT, NTPACCESS =SYN;
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
Retrieves the access controls of an NTP.
Function
This command retrieves the information about the NTP access controls.
Usage Note
None
Category
NTP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-NTP-ACCTL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"ACLNUM=<NTP_ACLNUM>,SRCIP=<SRCIP>,SRCNSAP=<SRCNSAP>,ADDRACCESS=<ADDR_ACCESS>,N
TPACCESS=<NTPACCESS>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
NTP_ACLNUM Indicates the number of NTP access controls. The valid value
ranges from 1 to 250.
SRCIP Indicates the IP address of the source NE.
SRCNSAP Indicates the NSAP address of the source NE.
ADDR_ACCESS Indicates whether clock information from the source NE is

accepted. The valid values are ACCEPT and DENY.
NTP_ACCESS Indicates the working mode of the NTP. The valid values are
as follows:
l QUERY: Only responds to the query of other NEs.
l SYN: Only responds to the time request of other NEs.
l SERVER: Responds to the query and time request of other
NEs. It cannot be synchronized to remote servers.
l PEER: Responds to the query and time request of other
NEs. It can be synchronized to remote servers.
Example
l Command
RTRV-NTP-ACCTL:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2007-05-28 06:51:59
M 100 COMPLD
"ACLNUM=250,SRCIP=129.9.0.1,SRCNSAP=,ADDRACCESS=ACCEPT,NTPACCESS=SERVER"
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.4.8.4 DLT-NTP-AUTHPARA
Deletes NTP authentication parameters.
Function
This command deletes the NTP authentication parameters.
Usage Note
Category
NTP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
DLT-NTP-AUTHPARA:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::KEYID=<NTP_KEYID>;
Command Parameters
<NTP_KEYID> Indicates the ID of the key that is verified by the NTP NA

protocol. The valid values are integers ranging from
1 to 1024.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-NTP-AUTHPARA:::100:::KEYID=12;
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.4.8.6 ENT-NTP-AUTHPARA
A.4.8.5 ED-NTP-AUTHPARA
A.4.8.7 RTRV-NTP-AUTHPARA
Modifies the parameters of NTP authentication.
Function
This command changes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) authentication information.
Usage Note
Category
NTP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-NTP-AUTHPARA:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[AUTHTYPE=<NTP_AUTHTYPE>],
[KEYID=< NTP_KEYID>],[KEY=<NTP_KEY>],[STATE=<NTP_TRUSTSTATE>];
Command Parameters
Parameter Description Defa
ult
Value
<NTP_AUTHT Indicates the authentication type applied. Only MD5 is MD5

YPE> supported.
<NTP_KEYID Indicates the ID of the key that is verified by the NTP protocol. NA
> The valid values are integers ranging from 1 to 1024.
<NTP_KEY> Indicates the password corresponding to the <KEYID> that is to NA

be authenticated. The valid values are character strings with 1 to
16 bytes.
<NTP_TRUST Indicates the state of NTP authentication. The valid values are Y N
STATE> (authenticated) and N (unauthenticated).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-NTP-AUTHPARA:::100:::AUTHTYPE=MD5,KEYID=12,KEY="abc",STATE=Y;
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
Creates the information about NTP authentication.
Function
This command adds the information about NTP authentication.
Usage Note
Category
NTP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ENT-NTP-AUTHPARA:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[AUTHTYPE=<NTP_AUTHTYPE>],
[KEYID=<NTP_KEYID>],[KEY=<NTP_KEY>],[STATE=<NTP_TRUSTSTATE>];
Command Parameters
<NTP_AUTHTYP Indicates the authentication type. Only MD5 is MD5

E> supported.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<NTP_KEYID> Indicates the ID of the key that is verified by the NA

NTP protocol. The valid values are integers
ranging from 1 to 1024.
<NTP_KEY> Indicates the password corresponding to the NA

<KEYID> that is to be authenticated. The valid
value is a string of 1 to 16 bytes.
<NTP_TRUSTST Indicates the state of NTP authentication. The N

ATE> valid value is Y (authentic) and N (unauthentic).
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-NTP-AUTHPARA:::100:::AUTHTYPE=MD5,KEYID=12,KEY="abc",STATE=Y;
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
Retrieves NTP authentication parameters.
Function
This command retrieves NTP authentication parameters.
Usage Note
None
Category
NTP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-NTP-AUTHPARA:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"AUTHTYPE=<NTP_AUTHTYPE>,KEYID=<NTP_KEYID>,KEY=<NTP_KEY>,STATE=<NTP_TRUSTSTATE>
"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
Indicates the applied authentication type. Only MD5 is

<NTP_AUTHTYPE> supported.
<NTP_KEYID> Indicates the ID of the key that is verified by the NTP

protocol. The valid value is an integer ranging from 1 to 1024.
<NTP_KEY> Indicates the password corresponding to the <KEYID> that

is to be authenticated. The valid value is a string of 1 to 16
bytes.
<NTP_TRUSTSTATE> Indicates the state of NTP authentication. The valid values

are Y (authentic) and N (unauthentic).
Example
l Command
RTRV-NTP-AUTHPARA:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2007-05-28 06:49:58
M 100 COMPLD
"AUTHTYPE=MD5,KEYID=1,KEY=\"wangfei\",STATE=Y"
;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.8.8 DLT-NTP-SERVER
Deletes an NTP server.
Function
This command deletes an NTP server.
Usage Note
Category
NTP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
DLT-NTP-SERVER:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[SERVERIP=<NTP_SERVERIP>],
[SERVERNSAP=<NTP_SERVERNSAP>];
Command Parameters
<NTP_SERVERIP> Indicates the IP address of an NA

NTP server that is to be
deleted. The valid values are
A, B, and C class IP
addresses.
<NTP_SERVERNSAP> Indicates the NSAP address NA

of the NTP server that is to be
deleted. This parameter
contains 40 bytes.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
DLT-NTP-SERVER:::100:::SERVERIP=129.9.0.1;
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.4.8.9 ENT-NTP-SERVER
A.4.8.10 RTRV-NTP-SERVER
Creates the information about an NTP server.
Function
This command adds an NTP server.
Usage Note
Category
NTP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ENT-NTP-SERVER:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[SERVERIP=<NTP_SERVERIP>],
[SERVERNSAP=<NTP_SERVERNSAP>],[VERSION=<NTP_VERSION>],
[TRUSTKEY=<TRUSTKEY>],[PRIORITY=<PRI_SERVER>];
Command Parameters
<NTP_SERV Indicates the IP address of an NTP server. The valid NA

ERIP> values are A, B, and C class IP addresses.
<NTP_SERV Indicates the NSAP address of an NTP server to be NA

ERNSAP> entered. This parameter contains 40 bytes.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<NTP_VERSI Indicates the version information. The valid values are 3

ON> integers ranging from 1 to 3.
NOTE
Version 1 is not supported in C/S mode.
<TRUSTKEY Indicates the ID of the key that is verified by the NTP 0

> protocol. The valid values are integers ranging from 0 to
1024.
<PRI_SERVE Indicates the priority of an NTP server. The valid values N

R> are Y (higher priority) and N (lower priority).
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-NTP-SERVER:::100:::SERVERIP=129.9.0.1,VERSION=3,PRIORITY=Y;
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
Retrieves NTP servers.
Function
This command retrieves NTP servers.
Usage Note
None
Category
NTP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-NTP-SERVER:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"SERVERIP=<NTP_SERVERIP>,SERVERNSAP=<NTP_SERVERNSAP>,VERSION=<NTP_VERSION>,TRUS
TKEY=<TRUSTKEY>,PRIORITY=<PRI_SERVER>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<NTP_SERVERI Indicates the IP address of an NTP server. The valid values are A, B,
P> and C class IP addresses.
<NTP_SERVER Indicates the NSAP address of an NTP server. This parameter contains
NSAP> 40 bytes.
<NTP_VERSION Indicates the version information. The valid value is an integer ranging
> from 1 to 3.
NOTE
Version 1 is not supported in C/S mode.
<TRUSTKEY> Indicates the ID of the key that is verified by the NTP protocol. The
valid value is an integer ranging from 0 to 1024.
<PRI_SERVER> Indicates the priority of an NTP server. The valid values are Y (higher
priority) and N (lower priority).
Example
l Command
RTRV-NTP-SERVER:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2007-05-28 06:49:23
M 100 COMPLD
"SERVERIP=129.9.35.23,SERVERNSAP=,VERSION=3,TRUSTKEY=1,PRIORITY=Y"
;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.8.11 ED-NTP-SYS
Modifies the system parameters of an NTP.
Function
This command modifies system parameters of an NTP.
Usage Note
Switching quickly between enable and disable is not allowed.
Category
NTP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-NTP-SYS:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[ENABLE=<NTP_ENABLE>],
[AUTH=<AUTH_ENABLE>];
Command Parameters
Value
<NTP_ENA Indicates whether the NTP is enabled. The valid values are N
BLE> Y (enable NTP) and N (disable NTP).
<AUTH_EN Indicates whether the NTP authentication is enabled. The N

ABLE> valid values are Y (enable authentication) and N (disable
authentication).
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-NTP-SYS:::100:::ENABLE=Y,AUTH=Y;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2002-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.4.8.12 RTRV-NTP-SYS
A.4.8.12 RTRV-NTP-SYS
Retrieves system parameters of an NTP.
Function
This command retrieves system parameters of an NTP.
Usage Note
None
Category
NTP
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-NTP-SYS:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"ENABLE=<NTP_ENABLE>,AUTH=<AUTH_ENABLE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<NTP_ENABLE> Indicates whether the NTP is enabled. The valid values are Y
(enable) and N (disable).
<AUTH_ENABLE> Indicates whether NTP authentication is enabled. The valid

values are Y (enable) and N (disable).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-NTP-SYS:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2007-05-28 06:47:02
M 100 COMPLD
"ENABLE=Y,AUTH=Y"
;
Related Commands
A.4.8.11 ED-NTP-SYS
A.4.8.13 RTRV-NTP-STATUSINFO
Retrieves status information about an NTP.
Function
This command retrieves the status information about an NTP.
Usage Note
None
Category
NTP
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-NTP-STATUSINFO:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"STATUS=<NTP_SYNSTATUS>,REFIP=<REF_IP>,REFNSAP=<REF_NSAP>"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<NTP_SYNSTATUS> Indicate whether the NE is synchronized with the NTP server.

The valid values are SYNCHRONIZED and
UNSYNCHRONIZED.
<REF_IP> Indicates the IP address of the reference NTP server.
<REF_NSAP> Indicates the NSAP address of the reference clock ID.
Example
l Command
RTRV-NTP-STATUSINFO:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2007-05-28 06:50:43
M 100 COMPLD
"STATUS=SYNCHRONIZED,REFIP=129.9.35.23,REFNSAP="
;
Related Commands
None
A.4.9 Configuring SNMP

This section lists commands which used to configure SNMP protocol to communicate with the
equipment or network management center..
A.4.9.1 DLT-SNMP-ACCESSIP
Deletes the IP address from the SNMP agent.
Function
This command deletes an allowed/got/set IP address from the SNMP agent.
Usage Note
None
Category
SNMP
Security
Super

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
DLT-SNMP-ACCESSIP:[<TID>]:<IPAddress>:<CTAG>
Command Parameters
<IPAddress> Indicates the IP address. -
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-SNMP-ACCESSIP::129.9.0.100:c;
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 16:19:03
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.4.9.3 ENT-SNMP-ACCESSIP
A.4.9.2 ED-SNMP-ACCESSIP
A.4.9.4 RTRV-SNMP-ACCESSIP
Changes the access level.
Function
This command changes the access level for a legal IP address.
Usage Note
None
Category
SNMP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Super
Command Syntax
ED-SNMP-ACCESSIP:[TID]:<IPADDRESS>:<CTAG>:::LEVEL=<ACCESSLEVEL>
Command Parameters
r
<IPADDR Indicates the IP address (manager address). The valid values 255.255.255.25
ESS> are 255.255.255.255 and A, B, and C class IP addresses, 5
except the addresses between 127.0.0.0 and
127.255.255.255.
255.255.255.255 means allowing all IP addresses. When the
current IP address is 255.255.255.255, after a new IP address
is entered, the NE will deny this command with an error
message. Users can run the A.4.9.1 DLT-SNMP-
ACCESSIP command to delete the IP address
255.255.255.255 and reenter a new IP address.
<ACCESS Indicates the access level. The valid values are R and RW. R
LEVEL> l R: Indicates the read community.
l RW: indicates the read and write community.
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-SNMP-ACCESSIP::129.9.0.100:C:::LEVEL=R
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 15:52:50
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Enters the IP address into the SNMP agent.
Function
This command enters the get/set IP address into the SNMP agent so that manager can access to
the SNMP agent. The default value before delivery is null. An IP address of no more than 32
bits is allowed.
Usage Note
None
Category
SNMP
Security
Super
Command Syntax
ENT-SNMP-ACCESSIP:[<TID>]:<IPADDRESS>:<CTAG>:::
[LEVEL=<ACCESSLEVEL>]
Command Parameters
Value
<IPADDR Indicates the IP address (manager address). The valid values 255.255.255.2
ESS> are the A, B, and C class IP addresses, and 255.255.255.255, 55
except for the address between 127.0.0.0 and
127.255.255.255.
255.255.255.255 means allowing all IP addresses. When the
current IP address is 255.255.255.255, the NE does not
execute this command and provides an error message after
users enter a new IP address. In this scenario, users can delete
255.255.255.255 by using a command A.4.9.1 DLT-SNMP-
ACCESSIP and then re-enter the new IP address.
<ACCESS Indicates the access level. The valid values are R and RW. R
LEVEL> l R: Indicates the read community.
l RW: indicates the read and write community.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^<sid>^<yyyy-mm-dd>^<hh:mm:ss><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-SNMP-ACCESSIP::129.9.0.102:C;
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 15:48:59
M C COMPLD ;
Related Commands
Retrieves the IP address related information.
Function
This command retrieves the IP address related information.
Usage Note
None
Category
SNMP
Security
Super
Command Syntax
RTRV-SNMP-ACCESSIP:[<TID>]:[<IPAddress>]:<CTAG>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
[<IPADDRESS>] Indicates the IP Address. NULL
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^"IPADDRESS=<IPADDRESS>:LEVEL=<ACCESSLEVEL>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<IPADDRESS> Indicates the IP Address.
<ACCESSLEVEL> Indicates the access level of the IP address.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SNMP-ACCESSIP::129.9.0.100:C;
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 14:26:01
M C COMPLD
"IPADDRESS=129.9.0.100:LEVEL=RW"
;
Related Commands
A.4.9.5 DLT-SNMP-TRAPINFO
Deletes the trap configuration information.
Function
This command deletes the trap configuration information about the specified IP address.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
SNMP
Security
Super
Command Syntax
DLT-SNMP-TRAPINFO:[<TID>]:<IPADDRESS>:<CTAG>
Command Parameters
<IPADDRESS> Indicates the trap IP address. -
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-SNMP-TRAPINFO::129.9.0.100:C;
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 16:57:48
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.4.9.8 RTRV-SNMP-TRAPINFO
A.4.9.6 ED-SNMP-TRAPINFO
A.4.9.7 ENT-SNMP-TRAPINFO
Modifies the trap configuration information.
Function
This command modifies the trap configuration information, including port number, trap
community, and trap version.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
SNMP
Security
Super
Command Syntax
ED-SNMP-TRAPINFO:[<TID>]:<IPADDRESS>:<CTAG>:::[PORT=<PORTNUMBER>],
[TCOMMUNITY=<TPCOMMUNITY>],[VER=<TRAPVERSION>]
Command Parameters
Value
<IPADDRESS> Indicates the IP address of the SNMP trap. The NA

valid values are A, B, and C class IP addresses,
except 127 network addresses.
<PORTNUMBER> Indicates the UDP connection port number. 162
<TPCOMMUNITY> Indicates the trap community, which is a public

character string of 6 to 16 characters. The trap IP
addresses are specific to trap communities.
<TRAPVERSION> Indicates the trap version. The valid values are V1

V1 and V2.
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-SNMP-TRAPINFO::129.9.0.100:C:::PORT=120;
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 16:48:25
M C COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
Adds trap information.
Function
This command adds trap information to the SNMP agent so that the SNMP trap message can be
transmitted to the SNMP manager. A maximum of 32 IP addresses are supported.
Usage Note
None
Category
SNMP
Security
Super
Command Syntax
ENT-SNMP-TRAPINFO:[<TID>]:<IPADDRESS>:<CTAG>:::
[PORT=<PORTNUMBER>], [TCOMMUNITY=<TPCOMMUNITY>],
[VER=<TRAPVERSION>]
Command Parameters
<IPADDRES Indicates the IP address of SNMP trap. The valid values -

S> are A, B, and C class IP addresses, except the network
address started with 127.
<PORTNUM Indicates the UDP connection port number. 162

BER>
<TPCOMMU Indicates the trap community, which is a string of 6 to 16 public

NITY> characters. The trap IP addresses are specific to trap
communities.
<TRAPVER Indicates the trap version. The valid values are V1 and V1
SION> V2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-SNMP-TRAPINFO::129.9.0.100:C;
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 16:40:33
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the trap configuration information.
Function
This command retrieves the trap configuration information about a specified IP address.
Usage Note
None
Category
SNMP
Security
Super
Command Syntax
RTRV-SNMP-TRAPINFO:[<TID>]:[<IPADDRESS >]:<CTAG>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<IPADDRESS> Indicates the IP address of NULL

SNMP trap. The valid values
are A, B, and C class IP
addresses, except 127
network address.
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^"
IPADDRESS=<IPADDRESS>,PORT=<PORTNUMBER>,TCOMMUNITY=<TPCOMMUNITY>,VER=<TRAPVERSION>
"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<IPADDRESS> Indicates the IP address of SNMP trap. The valid values are
A, B, and C class IP addresses, except 127 network address.
<PORTNUMBER> Indicates the UDP connection port number.
<TPCOMMUNITY> Indicates the trap community, which is a string of 6 to 16

characters. The trap IP addresses are specific to trap
communities.
<TRAPVERSION> Indicates the trap version. The valid values are V1 and V2.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SNMP-TRAPINFO:::C;
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 16:26:00
M C COMPLD
"IPADDRESS=129.9.0.12,PORT=162,TCOMMUNITY=PUBLIC,VER=V1"
"IPADDRESS=129.9.0.100,PORT=162,TCOMMUNITY=PUBLIC,VER=V1"
;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.4.9.9 ED-SNMP-COMMUNITY
Changes the read community and write community.
Function
This command changes the read community and write community.
Usage Note
None
Category
SNMP
Security
Super
Command Syntax
ED-SNMP-COMMUNITY:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::[RCOMUNITY=<RDCOMMUNITY>,]
[WCOMMUNITY=<WTCOMMUNITY>]
Command Parameters
<RDCOMMUNITY> Indicates the read A character string of 6 to 16

community. characters.
<WTCOMMUNITY> Indicates the write A character string of 6 to 16

community. characters.
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-SNMP-COMMUNITY:::C:::RCOMMUNITY=readcommunity,WCOMMUNITY=writecommunity
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 17:07:36
M C COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.4.9.10 RTRV-SNMP-COMMUNITY
A.4.9.10 RTRV-SNMP-COMMUNITY
Retrieves the information about all communities.
Function
This command retrieves the information about all communities that have been configured. The
default value of the read community is public and that of the write community is private in NE
factory.
Usage Note
None
Category
SNMP
Security
Super
Command Syntax
RTRV-SNMP-COMMUNITY:[<TID>]::<CTAG>
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^"RCOMMUNITY=<RDOMMUNITY>,WCOMMUNITY=<WTCOMMUNITY>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<RDOMMUNITY> Indicates the read community.
<WTCOMMUNITY> Indicates the write community.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SNMP-COMMUNITY:::100

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-23 13:10:11
M 100 COMPLD
"RCOMMUNITY=public,WCOMMUNITY=private"
Related Commands
A.4.9.9 ED-SNMP-COMMUNITY
A.5 Equipment Management

This section lists the commands used to configure the equipment hardware.
A.5.1 ENT-EQPT
Creates logical equipment.
Function
This command creates a logical shelf, a unit, or an SFP (small form-factor pluggable) on the
unit. It also automatically generates all port facilities supported by the unit and assigns default
values to all port facility attributes.
Usage Note
After a logical card that supports SFP is created (automatically or manually), the associated SFP
and facility objects are created based on the physical SFP module. If the type of the physical
SFP module cannot be recognized, a colorless port is created.
The facility object is gigabit-Ethernet (GETH) by default if an electrical or optical port is created
as an SFP object on cards that support the SFP module and have Layer-2 switching and
processing capability.
Category
Equipment
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<TYPE>::[<PST>,][<SST>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identifier. The valid NA

formats are as follows:
l For shelves: SHELF-<SHELF ID>
l For cards: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>
l For SFPs: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>
l For sub-boards, the valid format of <AID> is
SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
In the format, the value of <PORT ID> for the
TN55NPO2N board is 2 and that for the
TN55NPO2E board is 5 because both the boards
support only one sub-board (the sub-board type
is 54PQ2). An example of the command is as
follows: ENT-EQPT::SLOT-1-3-2:C
NOTE
Parameter <TYPE> can be omitted for the OptiX OSN
3800A as it does not support the SHELF-<SHELF ID>
component in the command parameter.
Like logical boards, logical sub-boards can also be
automatically created. When logical sub-boards are
automatically installed, DBCHG events can be reported.
The format of DBCHG events is similar to the format of
the DBCHG events reported when the logical SFP is
installed. The only difference is the board type.
The valid values of <AID> for specific units are
provided in A.32.2.7 EQPT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TYPE> Indicates the AID unit type, that is, the shelf type, NA
card type, or SFP type.
The valid values are as follows when this command
is used to create a shelf:
l SHELF6800A: indicates that the shelf type is
OptiX OSN 6800A.
l SHELF8800T16: indicates that the shelf type is
OptiX OSN 8800T16.
OptiX OSN 8800T32.
l SHELF8800T32E: indicates that the shelf type
is OptiX OSN 8800T32E.
OptiX OSN 8800T64.
The card type refers to the type of a specific card
supported.
The valid values are as follows when this command
is used to create an SFP module:
l OCH: indicates a colored optical interface.
l OC: indicates a colorless optical interface.
l EC: indicates an electrical interface.
l OSC: indicates an OSC interface.
l CFP4*10G: indicates a 4*10G CFP interface.
<PST> Indicates the primary state of the AID unit. This NA

parameter is optional. It is not valid when creating
shelves.
<SST> Indicates the secondary state of the AID unit. This NA

parameter is optional. It defaults to AINS for cards
and SFPs. It is not valid for shelves.
Response Syntax
Example
l Command
ENT-EQPT::SLOT-1-7:C::13LSX::,AINS;
l Response Message
NE 2008-01-01 11:37:18 M C COMPLD ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.5.3 DLT-EQPT
A.5.2 ED-EQPT
A.5.4 RTRV-EQPT
A.5.2 ED-EQPT
Edits attributes of a unit in an NE.
Function
This command edits attributes of a unit in an NE. The following attributes can be modified:
l State of the equipment
l Upper temperature threshold
l Lower temperature threshold
The TYPE/WORKMODE parameter cannot be set with other parameters at the same time.
Parameters other than TYPE/WORKMODE can be set at the same time.
Usage Note
This command is only applicable in modifying the unit type during unit upgrade, not during
normal circumstances.
The state of the unit, the port, or the SFP must be OOS-MA, OOS-AUMA or AINS before TYPE
or interface type is modified.
Category
Equipment
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PROVTYPE=<TYPE>,]
[WORKMODE=<WORKMODE>,][SVTPID=<SVTPID>,]
[UPTEMPTH=<UPTEMPTH>,][DOWNTEMPTH=<DOWNTEMPTH>,]
[FANSPEED=<FANSPEED>,][FANSPEEDMODE=<FANSPEEDMODE>,]
[MCASCANSPAN=<MCASCANSPAN>,][MCAMONTYPE=<MCAMONTYPE>],
[PWRTH=<PWRTH>],[SHELFLBL=<SHELFLBL>],[USERLBL=<USERLBL>]:
[[<PST>,][<SST>]];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identifier. The NA

valid formats corresponding to the shelf, card
and SFP are as follows:
l For cards: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>
l For SFPs: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<PORT ID>
l For sub-boards, the valid format of <AID>
is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>. In the format, the value of
<PORT ID> for the TN55NPO2N board is
2 and that for the TN55NPO2E board is 5
because both the boards support only one
sub-board (the sub-board type is 54PQ2).
An example of the command is as follows:
ED-EQPT::SLOT-1-3-2:c::::oos
The valid values of <AID> for specific units
are provided in A.32.2.7 EQPT.
<TYPE> Indicates the unit type. NA

In the case of an SFP or XFP module, the valid
l OCH: colored optical interface
l OC: colorless optical interface
In the case of a board, the valid value is as
follows:
l 52SCC: indicates to replace the SCC board
with the 52SCC board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<WORKMOD Indicates the work mode. The valid value varies

E> For the TN52TOM unit, the valid values are with the unit.
as follows: l For TN52TOM unit:
l NON-CASCADING: indicates the non- NON-CASCADING
cascading mode. l For 12LQMS unit:
l CASCADING: indicates the cascading LQM
mode. l For 12LQMS unit:
For the 12LQMS unit, the valid values are as LQM
follows: l For
l NS1: indicates the NS1 mode. 12ND2/52ND2/54NQ
2 unit: NORMAL
l LQM: indicates the LQM mode.
l For 54NS3 unit: REG
For the 12ND2, 52ND2, 54NQ2, or 54NS3
unit, the valid values are as follows: l For 11LSXR/
12LSXLR unit:
l NORMAL: indicates the NORMAL mode. OREG
l REG: indicates the electric regenerator
mode.
l OREG: indicates the optical regenerator
mode.
NOTE
This parameter cannot be set with other parameters
at the same time.
<SVTPID> Indicates the service VLAN TPID field of the 0X8100

port. This parameter is optional. It is only valid
for the L4G and TBE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<UPTEMPTH Indicates the upper temperature threshold in 65

> intervals of 1.0 degrees centigrade.
Range: 60 to 70
Unit: degrees centigrade

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

NOTE
This parameter is different for the following cards:
l For TN11LOG, the range is 62 to 72, the default
value is 67. But In the device type of OptiX
OSN 3800A, the range is 69 to 79, the default
value is 74.
l For TN11LOA, the range is 67 to 77, the default
value is 72.But In the device type of OptiX OSN
3800A, the range is 72 to 82, the default value
is 77.
l For TN12LOG, the range is 65 to 75, the default
value is 70.
l For TN11TBE, the range is 67 to 77, the default
value is 65.
l For TN54TSXL, the range is 68 to 78, the
default value is 73.
l For
TN12TMX,TN13LSX,TN12LDX,TN16XCH,
TN54THA,TN54TOA,TN54TOG,TN53TQX,
TN53NQ2,TN53ND2,TN53TDX,TN55TQX,
TN16SCC,TN11RAU1, the range is 65 to 75,
the default value is 70.
l For
TN53TSXL,TN16AUX,TN11LSQ,TNK4XC
T,TNK4SXH,TN52TDX,TN52STG,TNK2ST
G,TN55NS3, the range is 70 to 80, the default
value is 75.
l For TN52NS3,TN54NQ2, the range is 72 to 82,
the default value is 77.
l For TN11LOM,the range is 72 to 82, the default
value is 79.
l For TN52NS2,the range is 73 to 83, the default
value is 70.
l For TN52ND2, TN52NQ2, TN52TQX,
TNK2XCT and
TNK2SXM,TN12ND2,TN54NS3,TN11LEM
24,TN11LEX4,TN51NQ2,TN11LTX,TN12L
SC, the range is 75 to 85, the default value is
80.
l For TN52TOM,TN53XCH,TN55NPO2
(STND),the range is 80 to 90, the default value
is 85. But In the device type of OptiX OSN
3800A, the range is 65 to 75, the default value
is 70.
l For TN52XCH, the range is 85 to 95, the default
value is 90.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<DOWNTEM Indicates the lower temperature threshold in 0

PTH> intervals of 1.0 degrees centigrade.
Range: 0 to 10
Unit: degrees centigrade
<FANSPEED> Indicates the fan speed. The valid values are HIGH
HIGH, MID-HIGH, MID, MID-LOW, LOW,
and STOP.
This parameter is only valid for the fan card.
<FANSPEED Indicates the fan speed control mode. The AUTO

MODE> valid values are AUTO and MANUAL.
When the fan card operates in MANUAL
mode, the actual operating status of the card is
the same as the configured operating status of
the card. When the fan card operates in AUTO
mode, the FANSPEED parameter indicates
the adjusted fan speed.
<MCASCANS Indicates the scan time span of the multi- 10

PAN> channel spectrum analysis.
The valid values are from 5 to 49995; in
minutes. The value must be a multiple of five.
The default value is 10 minutes.
<MCAMONT Indicates the wavelength monitored type. The NRZDRZ

YPE> valid values are as follows:
l NRZDRZ
l 100GCRZ
l 50GCRZ
l 100G40G
l 50G40G
This parameter is only valid for the MCA card.
PWRTH The power threshold of the shelf. It is invalid 350 W for an OptiX OSN
for the card or SFP/XFP. 3800 shelf
The unit is watt (W). The power threshold can 1350 W for an OptiX
be a value in the range of: OSN 6800 shelf
l 1-350 W for an OptiX OSN 3800 shelf 2400 W for an OptiX
l 1-1350 W for an OptiX OSN 6800 shelf OSN 8800 T16, T32, or
T64 shelf
l 1-2400 W for an OptiX OSN 8800 T16,
T32, or T64 shelf

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<SHELFLBL> Indicates the shelf label. <SHELFLBL> is an NA

optional parameter used for entering the
physical location of the shelf. It is composed
of a maximum of 16 ASCII characters and is
limited to letters, digits, and (.-_&*).
NOTE
This parameter is only applicable for entering or
editing shelf AIDs, but it is retrievable for any level
of equipment AID that is associated with a labeled
shelf AID.
<USERLBL> Indicates the user label. NA

This parameter is of less than 40 bytes, which
is an optional parameter and used for entering
the frame identification code (FIC).
NOTE
This parameter is only applicable for entering or
editing shelf AIDs, but it is retrievable for any level
of equipment AID that is associated with a labeled
shelf AID.
<PST> Indicates the primary state of the unit. NA
<SST> Indicates the secondary state of the unit. NA
Response Syntax
Example
l Command
ED-EQPT::SLOT-1-1-7:C::::IS;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18 M C COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.5.1 ENT-EQPT
A.5.4 RTRV-EQPT
A.5.3 DLT-EQPT
A.5.3 DLT-EQPT
Deletes equipment.
Function
This command deletes a unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
Before users delete the equipment, the state of the equipment should be set to OOS-MA (OOS-
AUMA) or AINS.
Category
Equipment
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[INCL=<INCL>];
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identifier. The valid formats are as NA
follows:.
l For cards: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>
l For SFPs: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
l For sub-boards, the valid format of <AID> is SLOT-
<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>. In the format, the
value of <PORT ID> for the TN55NPO2N board is 2 and
that for the TN55NPO2E board is 5 because both the boards
support only one sub-board (the sub-board type is 54PQ2).
An example of the command is as follows: DLT-
EQPT::SLOT-1-3-2:C
The valid values of <AID> for specific units are provided in A.
32.2.7 EQPT.
NOTE
The shelf can be deleted only after all configurable cards are deleted.
<INCL> The valid values are Y and N. N

l Setting INCL to Y deletes the unit regardless of the status
of the port or path.
l Setting INCL to N deletes the unit with the status of the port
or path considered.
Response Syntax

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
DLT-EQPT::SLOT-1-2:C:::INCL=Y
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18 M C COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.5.1 ENT-EQPT
A.5.2 ED-EQPT
A.5.4 RTRV-EQPT
A.5.4 RTRV-EQPT
Retrieves information about equipment.
Function
This command retrieves all the attributes of a piece of given equipment.
Usage Note
Parameters <SN>, <CLEI>, <DOM>, <PCBVER>, <SWVER>, <FPGAVER>, <BIOSVER>,
<DESCR> are displayed only when the physical unit is online.
In the case of SFP, nothing is entered for parameters <SWVER>, <FPGAVER>, <BIOSVER>,
<PCBVER>, <SVTPID>, <FANSPEEDMODE>, <FANSPEED>, and <MCASCANSPAN>
are null.
When retrieving the attributes of SHELF-<SHELF ID>, the attributes of the slot units and the
SFPs which belong to the shelf will not be displayed. Similarly, when retrieving the attributes
of SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>, the attributes of the SFPs which are located on the slot
unit will not be displayed.
Category
Equipment
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-EQPT:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identifier. The valid formats NA

are as follows.
l For shelves: SHELF-<SHELF ID>, where <SHELF
ID> can be ALL to retrieve all the shelves.
l For cards: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>, where
<SHELF ID> can be ALL(SLOT-ALL) to retrieve
all the slot units on each shelf, and <SLOT ID> can
be ALL(SLOT-<SHELF ID>-ALL) to retrieve all
the slot units on the shelf specified by <SHELF ID>.
l For SFPs: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>, where <PORT ID> can be ALL.
l For sub-boards, the valid format of AID is SLOT-
<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>. In the
format, the value of <PORT ID> for the
TN55NPO2N board is 2 and that for the
TN55NPO2E board is 5 because both the boards
support only one sub-board (the sub-board type is
54PQ2). <PORT ID> can be ALL. For example, the
sub-board type that is returned is 54PQ2 after the
ENT-EQPT::SLOT-1-3-2:C command is executed.
The valid values of <AID> for specific units are
provided in A.32.2.7 EQPT.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^COMPLD<cr><lf> ^^^"<AID>::
[FILTER=<FILTER>,][PROVTYPE=<TYPE>,][ACTTYPE=<TYPE>,][UPTEMPTH=<UPTEMPTH>,]
[DOWNTEMPTH=<DOWNTEMPTH>,][SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>,][SN=<SN>,][CLEI=<CLEI>,]
[PARTNUM=<PARTNUM>,][DOM=<DOM>,][PCBVER=<PCBVER>,][SWVER=<SWVER>,]
[FPGAVER=<FPGAVER>,][BIOSVER=<BIOSVER>,][MODVER=<MODVER>,][WORKMODE=<WORKMODE>,]
[SVTPID=<SVTPID>,][FANSPEED=<FANSPEED>,][FANSPEEDMODE=<FANSPEEDMODE>,]
[MCASCANSPAN=<MCASCANSPAN>,][MCAMONTYPE=<MCAMONTYPE>,][RATEDPWR=<RATEDPWR>,]
[ACTPWR=<ACTPWR>,][PWRTH=<PWRTH>,][USEDCRS=<USEDCRS>,][DESCR=<DESCR>,]
[SHELFLBL=<SHELFLBL>,][USERLBL=<USERLBL>]:<PST>,[<SST>]"<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identifier. The valid formats are as
follows:
l For shelves: SHELF-<SHELF ID>.
l For cards: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
l For SFPs: SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
l For sub-boards, the valid format of AID is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-
<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<FILTER> Indicates the parameters can be retrieved. The valid values are
CARDTYPE or ALL.
<TYPE> Indicates the type of the AID unit.

l PROVTYPE: indicates the type of the logical unit provisioned
by users.
l ACTTYPE: indicates the type of the physical unit installed in
the slot.
The valid PROVTYPE values for SFPs are as follows:
l OCH
l OC
l EC
l CFP4*10G
l CFP4*25G
l CFP10*10G
l OSC
The valid ACTTYPE values for SFPs are as follows:
l OCH-FIX(Fixed module)
l OCH-ESFP
l OC-ESFP
l EC-ESFP
l OSC-ESFP
l CFP4*10G
l CFP4*25G
l CFP10*10G
The valid values for shelves are as follows:
l SHELF6800A
l SHELF8800T16
l SHELF8800T32
l SHELF8800T32E
l SHELF8800T64
<UPTEMPTH> Indicates the upper temperature threshold in intervals of 1.0 degrees

centigrade.
<DOWNTEMPTH> Indicates the lower temperature threshold in intervals of 1.0 degrees

centigrade.
<SWITCHSTATE> Indicates the switching state of the AID unit if it is in an equipment

protection group.
<SN> Indicates the serial number of the equipment/SFP. The valid value
is a string.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<CLEI> Indicates the CLEI code of the equipment/SFP. The valid value is
a string.
<PARTNUM> Indicates the part number of the unit/SFP. The valid value is a
unique eight-digit number for each unit.
<DOM> Indicates the manufacturing date of the unit/SFP.
<PCBVER> Indicates the PCB version of the equipment. The valid value is a
string.
<SWVER> Indicates the software version and patch version of the equipment.
The valid value is a string, such as 3.14H001
<FPGAVER> Indicates the FPGA version of the equipment. The valid value is a
string.
<BIOSVER> Indicates the BIOS version of the equipment. The valid value is a
string.
<MODVER> Indicates the module version of the equipment. The valid value is a
string, such as (M1)XXX. If there are multiple modules, the
versions of the modules are displayed together.
<WORKMODE> Indicates the work mode.

For the TN52TOM unit, the valid values are as follows:
l NON-CASCADING: indicates the non-cascading mode.
l CASCADING: indicates the cascading mode.
For the 12LQMS unit, the valid values are as follows:.
l NS1: indicates the NS1 mode.
l LQM: indicates the LQM mode.
For the 12ND2, 52ND2, 54NQ2 and 54NS3 units, the valid values
are as follows:
l NORMAL: indicates the normal mode.
l REG: indicates the electric regenerator mode.
l OREG: indicates the optical regenerator mode.
<SVTPID> Indicates the service VLAN TPID field of the port. This parameter
is optional. It is only valid for the L4G and TBE.
<FANSPEED> Indicates the fan speed. The valid values are HIGH, MID, LOW,
MID-HIGH,MID-LOW and STOP. This parameter is editable in
MANUAL mode.
The parameter is only valid for the fan card.
<FANSPEEDMODE> Indicates the fan speed control mode. The valid values are AUTO
and MANUAL.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<MCASCANSPAN> Indicates the scan time span of the multi-channel spectrum analysis.
The valid values are from 5 to 49995; units are in minutes. The value
must be a multiple of five.
<MCAMONTYPE> Indicates the wavelength monitoring type. The valid values are as
follows:
l NRZDRZ
l 100GCRZ
l 50GCRZ
l 100G40G
l 50G40G
<RATEDPWR> Indicates the rated power consumption of the shelf and card.
<ACTPWR> Indicates the actual power consumption of the shelf and card.
<PWRTH> Indicates the power consumption threshold of the shelf.
<USEDCRS> Indicates the cross-connect capacity as configured. This parameter

is only valid for shelves and the value format is N*STS1.
<DESCR> Indicates the description of the unit or SFP. It is a string. The

equipment unit description is displayed as NULL.
<SHELFLBL> Indicates the shelf label. The <SHELFLBL> is an optional

parameter used for entering the physical location of the shelf. It is
composed of a maximum of 16 ASCII characters and is limited to
letters, digits, and (.-_&*).
NOTE
This parameter is applicable only for entering or editing the shelf AIDs, but
it is retrievable for any level of equipment AID that is associated with a
labeled shelf AID.
<USERLBL> Indicates the user label.

This parameter is less than 40 bytes and is an optional parameter
used for entering the frame identification code (FIC)
NOTE
This parameter is applicable only for entering or editing shelf AIDs, but it
is retrievable for any level of equipment AID that is associated with a labeled
shelf AID.
<PST> Indicates the primary state of the entity.
<SST> Indicates the secondary state of the entity.
Example
l Command

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
RTRV-EQPT::SLOT-1-11:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-10-12 15:54:55 M C COMPLD
"SLOT-1-11::PROVTYPE=11TQX,ACTTYPE=11TQX,UPTEMPTH=65,DOWNTEMPTH=0,SN=2102316115108
7000012,PARTNUM=02316115,DOM=2008-08-03,DESCR=\"OptiX OSN 6800,TN1M1TQX01,4 x 10G
Tributary Service Processing Board\",PCBVER=VER.B,SWVER=3.13,FPGAVER=(U6)120(U14)
200(U15)200,BIOSVER=2.26/2.62,RATEDPWR=72,ACTPWR=72:IS-NR" ;
Related Commands
A.5.1 ENT-EQPT
A.5.2 ED-EQPT
A.5.3 DLT-EQPT
A.5.5 RTRV-ETH-EQPT
Queries the attributes of Ethernet equipment.
Function
This command queries the attributes of Ethernet equipment.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ETH-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>.
Supports the "&" and "&&" symbols.
Supports ALL, which indicates all values will be
retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
^^^"<AID>::BDMAC=<BDMAC>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
<BDMAC> Indicates the MAC address of the board.
Example
l Command
RTRV-ETH-EQPT::SLOT-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"SLOT-1-1::BDMAC=00-00-00-00-00-01"
;
Related Commands
A.13.4.1 ENT-VB
A.13.4.2 ED-VB
A.13.4.3 DLT-VB
A.6 Facility Management

This section lists the commands used to configure and maintain the facilities.
A.6.1 ED-<FCMOD2>
Edits the attributes of the FC logical facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the FC.
Usage Note
<FCMOD2> includes FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800 and FC1200.
Category
Facility

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-<FCMOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[ EXTERN=<EXTERN>],
[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>]:[<PST>];
Command Parameters
Default
Parameters Description Value
<AID> The valid values are as follows: NA

l FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<CHANNEL ID>
For the valid values of specific units, refer to A.32.2.9
FCMOD2.
<EXTERN> Indicates whether the distance extension function is ENABLE

enabled for FC services. The valid values are as follows:
l DISABLE: indicates that the function is disabled.
l ENABLE: indicates that the function is enabled.
<DELAYTIM This parameter is only valid for the channels in an SNCP NA

E> group.
Indicates the delay time. It is an integer that ranges from
0 to 100, which is expressed in 0.1 seconds.
Delay time is required when multiple protection schemes
are configured. Switching is not initiated until the delay
time is expended when a malfunction is discovered at a
port.
Use the default value when only one type of protection
is configured.
<PST> Indicates the status of the primary state qualifier. The NA

valid values are IS (in-service) and OOS (out-of-
service).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ED-FC100::CLNT-1-8-1-1:C::::oos;
l Response Message
NE 2008-09-03 09:01:04
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.2 RTRV-<FCMOD2>
A.6.2 RTRV-<FCMOD2>
Retrieves the attributes of the FC logical facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the FC logical facility.
Usage Note
<FCMOD2> includes FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800 and FC1200.
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-<FCMOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Parame Description Default
ter Value

l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL
ID>
FCMOD2.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
^^^"<AID>::[EXTERN=<EXTERN>],[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],
[SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>]:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid values are as follows:

l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL ID>
<EXTERN> Indicates whether the FC distance extension function is enabled. The

l DISABLE
l ENABLE
<DELAYTIME> This parameter is only valid for the channels in an SNCP group.
Indicates the delay time (hold-off time). It is an integer ranging from
Delay time is required when multiple protection schemes are
configured. Switching is not initiated until the delay time is expended
when a malfunction is discovered at a port.
Use the default value when only one type of protection is configured.
<SWITCHSTATE Indicates the state of the switching. It is only valid when the port is in
> the protection group. The valid values are provided in A.32.3.20
SWITCHSTATE.
<PST> Indicates the status of the primary state qualifier. The valid values are
IS and OOS.
<SST> Indicates the secondary state.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FC100::CLNT-1-8-1-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-09-03 09:01:12
M C COMPLD
"CLNT-1-8-1-1::EXTERN=DISABLE:OOS-AUMA,SGEO"
;
Related Commands
A.6.1 ED-<FCMOD2>
A.6.3 ED-<OCN/STMN>
Edits the attributes of the SONET OCN/STMN.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command edits the attributes of the SONET OCN/STMN.
Usage Note
OCN includes OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 and OC768. STMN includes STM1, STM4, STM16,
STM64 and STM256.
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-<OCN/STMN>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[B1SFBER=<B1SFBER>],
[B1SDBER=<B1SDBER>],[TRCJ0MODE=<TRCJ0MODE>],
[TRCJ0FMT=<TRCJ0FMT>],[TRCJ0=<TRCJ0>],[EXPTRCJ0=<EXPTRCJ0>],
[PRBS=<PRBS>],[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>]:[<PST>];
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> The valid formats are as follows: NA

l FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<PATH ID>
l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
<PATH ID>
OCN/STMN.
<B1SFBER> Indicates the SF BER threshold for the overhead byte 1E-3
(B1) on a facility. The valid value ranges from 1E-5 to
1E-3.
<B1SDBER> Indicates the SD BER threshold for the overhead byte 1E-6
(B1) on a facility. The valid value ranges from 1E-9 to
1E-5.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<TRCJ0MODE> Indicates the trace J0 mode. The valid values are as MAN
follows:
l MAN: The manually provisioned string is used as the
expected string.
l DISABLE: Ability to trace the path is disabled so
there is not any reported data.
<TRCJ0FMT> Indicates the format of the J0 byte to be transmitted. The 16

l 1: indicates the 1-byte mode.
<TRCJ0> Indicates the J0 byte to be transmitted. The valid value NA

depends on the <TRCJ0FMT>. This parameter is only
valid for cards that can generate the J0 byte.
<EXPTRCJ0> Indicates the expected J0 byte. NA
<PRBS> During a PRBS test in the OCN mode, the transmitted OFF
PRBS code streams are not valid OCN frames. Enable
the PRBS test mode on the receive side so that the test
can be completed. The valid values are as follows:
l OFF: The PRBS test function is disabled.
l ON: The PRBS test function is enabled.
<DELAYTIME This parameter is only valid for the channels in an SNCP NA

> group.
Indicates the delay time. It is an integer ranging from 0
to 100, which is expressed in 0.1 seconds.
port.
Use the default value when only one type of protection
is configured.

valid values are IS and OOS.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ED-OC12::CLNT-1-1-1-1:C:::TRCJ0FMT=64,TRCJ0=HWTEST;
l Response Message
NE 2008-06-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.4 RTRV-<OCN/STMN>
A.6.4 RTRV-<OCN/STMN>
Retrieves the attributes of the OCN/STMN facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the OCN/STMN facility.
Usage Note
OCN includes OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 and OC768. STMN includes STM1, STM4, STM16,
STM64 and STM256.
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-<OCN>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Value
<AID> The valid formats are as follows. NA

l FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<PATH
ID>
l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<PATH
ID>
For the valid values of specific units, refer to A.32.2.18 OCN/
STMN.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>::B1SFBER=<B1SFBER>,B1SDBER=<B1SDBER>,TRCJ0MODE=<TRCJ0MODE>,TRCJ0FMT=<TRC
J0FMT>,[TRCJ0=<TRCJ0>],EXPTRCJ0=<EXPTRCJ0>,INCTRCJ0=<INCTRCJ0>,[PRBS=<PRBS>],
[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],[SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>]:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid formats are as follows:

l FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<PATH ID>
l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<PATH ID>
<B1SFBER> Indicates the SF BER threshold for the overhead byte (B1) on a facility.
The valid value ranges from 1E-5 to 1E-3. The default value is 1E-3.
<B1SDBER> Indicates the SD BER threshold for the overhead byte (B1) on a
facility. The valid value ranges from 1E-9 to 1E-5. The default value
is 1E-6.
<TRCJ0MODE> Indicates the trace J0 mode. The valid values are as follows:
l MAN: The manually provisioned string is used as the expected
string.
l DISABLE: Ability to trace the path is disabled so there is not any
reported data.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TRCJ0FMT> Indicates the format of the J0 byte to be transmitted. The valid values
are as follows:
<TRCJ0> Indicates the J0 byte to be transmitted. The valid value depends on the
<TRCJ0FMT>. This parameter is only valid for cards that can generate
the J0 byte.
<EXPTRCJ0> Indicates the expected J0 byte.
<INCTRCJ0> Indicates the incoming J0 byte.
<PRBS> During a PRBS test in the OCN mode, the transmitted PRBS code
streams are not valid OCN/STMN frames. Enable the PRBS test mode
on the receive side so that the test can be completed.
l OFF: The PRBS test function is disabled.
l ON: The PRBS test function is enabled.
Indicates the delay time. It is an integer ranging from 0 to 100, which
is expressed in 0.1 seconds.
SWITCHSTATE.
IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-OC3::CLNT-1-7-1-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 1990-01-03 08:34:44
M C COMPLD
"CLNT-1-7-1-1::B1SFBER=1E-3,B1SDBER=1E-6,TRCJ0MODE=DISABLE,TRCJ0FMT=16,EXPTRCJ0=
\" \",INCTRCJ0=\" \",PRBS=OFF,:OOS-AU,SGEO"
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.6.3 ED-<OCN/STMN>
A.6.5 RTRV-FECER-<OTUN>
Queries pre-FEC or post-FEC BER.
Function
This command queries pre-FEC or post-FEC BER.
Usage Note
OTUn includes OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU5G, and OTU4.
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-FECER-<OTUN>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

l SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
A.32.2.22 OTUN for the valid values of <AID> for
specific units.
Response Syntax
[BEFECBER=<BEFECBER>],[AFTFECBER=<AFTFECBER>]"<cr><lf> ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters

l FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<PATH ID>
<BEFECBER> Indicates the pre-FEC BER, in the format of m.xE-n. In the format,
m.x stands for the coefficient, -n stands for the index, and there are at
most two decimal places. The parameter value is INVALID when a
BER is invalid.
<AFTFECBER> Indicates the post-FEC BER, in the format of m.xE-n. In the format,
m.x stands for the coefficient, -n stands for the index, and there are at
most two decimal places. The parameter value is INVALID when a
BER is invalid.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FECER-OTU1::SRV1-1-6-1:D;
l Response Message
NE 2008-01-03 09:18:24 M D COMPLD
"SRV1-1-6-1::BEFECBER=1.5E-6,AFTFECBER=1.5E-6" ;
Related Commands
A.14.3 ED-<OTUN>
A.6.6 ED-<TRAFFICMOD2>
Edits the attributes of the logical facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the logical facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
ED-<TRAFFICMOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>]:
[<PST>];
Command Parameters
Default
<TRAFFICMOD2> The valid values are FICON, FICONEXP, NA

FICON4G, FICON8G, HDSDI, DVBASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI, ANY, ETR, CLO, ISC1G, ISC2G,
IBSDR, IBDDR, IBQDR, CBR10G, CPRI1, CPRI2,
CPRI3, 3GSDI, HDSDIRBR, 3GSDIRBR

<CHANNEL ID>
For the valid values of specific units, refer to A.
32.2.28 TRAFFICMOD2
<DELAYTIME> This parameter is only valid for the channels in an NA

SNCP group.
Indicates the delay time. It is an integer ranging from
Delay time is required when multiple protection
schemes are configured. Switching is not initiated
until the delay time is expended when a malfunction
is discovered at a port.
Use the default value when only one type of

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-FICON::CLNT-1-6-1-1:C::::OOS;
l Response Message
NE 2008-06-01 12:37:18
M C COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.6.7 RTRV-<TRAFFICMOD2>
A.6.7 RTRV-<TRAFFICMOD2>
Retrieves the attributes of the logical facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the logical facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-<TRAFFICMOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default
<TRAFFICM The valid values are FICON, NA

OD2> FICONEXP,FICON4G,FICON8G, HDSDI, DVBASI,
SDI, ESCON, FDDI, ANY, ETR, CLO, ISC1G, ISC2G,
IBSDR, IBDDR, IBQDR, CBR10G, CPRI1, CPRI2,
CPRI3, 3GSDI, HDSDIRBR, 3GSDIRBR.

<CHANNEL ID>
Refer to A.32.2.28 TRAFFICMOD2 for the valid values
of <AID> for specific units.
Response Syntax
[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],[SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>]:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf> ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid values are as follows:

<SWITCHSTATE Indicates the state of switching. It is valid only when the port is in the
> protection group. The valid values are provided in A.32.3.20
SWITCHSTATE.
IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FICON::CLNT-1-6-1-1:D;
l Response Message
NE 2008-10-06 18:25:59 M D COMPLD "CLNT-1-6-1-1:::OOS-AUMA,SGEO" ;
Related Commands
A.6.6 ED-<TRAFFICMOD2>
A.6.8 ED-CLNT
Edits the attributes of the logical client facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the facility.
Usage Note
When the TQX board accesses services through the LP3 and LP4 optical interfaces on the client
side, it must be housed in slot 1, slot 4, slot 11, or slot 14 when deploying an OSN6800A device.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[WORKMODE=<WORKMODE>],
[PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>],[RATE=<RATE>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The value format is as follows: NA

l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>
ID>-<CHANNEL ID>
l VCLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>
ID>-<CHANNEL ID>
Refer to A.32.2.4 CLNT for the valid values of
<AID> corresponding to the specific units.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<WORKMOD Indicates the working mode and is applicable only ANY-ODU1

E> to the 52TOM board. If the value ends with ODUn,
the board functions as a tributary board. In this
mode, the services are transmitted to the cross-
connect board. If the value ends with OTUn, the
board functions as a line and tributary board. In
this mode, the service is not transmitted to the
cross-connect board but is output directly. The
description of each value is as follows:
l NONE: indicates that the port is not used.
l ANY-ODU0/-ODU1: indicates that the board
functions as a tributary board and receives the
ODU0 service. In non-cascading mode, the
service mapping trails is ANY->ODU0-
>cross-connect board, or ANY->ODU0-
>ODU1->cross-connect board. In cascading
mode, the service mapping trail is n*ANY-
>2*ODU0->cross-connect board, or n*ANY-
>2*ODU0->ODU1->cross-connect board.
l ANY-ODU0-OTU1: indicates that the board
functions as a line and tributary board and
receives the ODU0 service. In non-cascading
mode, the service mapping trail is ANY-
>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1->line side. In
cascading mode, the service mapping trail is
n*ANY->2*ODU0->ODU1->OTU1->line
side.
l ANY-ODU1: indicates that the board
service mapping trail is OTU1/ANY->ODU1-
>cross-connect board. In cascading mode, the
service mapping trail is n*ANY->ODU1-
>cross-connect board.
l OTU1-ANY-ODU0-ODU1: indicates that the
board functions as a tributary board and
receives the ODU1 service. The service
mapping trails is OTU1->ODU1->n*ANY-
>2*ODU0->ODU1->cross-connect board.
l OTU1-ODU0: indicates that the board
ODU1 service. The service mapping trail is
OTU1->ODU1->2*ODU0->cross-connection
board.
l OTU1-ANY-ODU0: indicates that the board
ODU1 service. The service mapping trail is

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
OTU1->ODU1->n*ANY->2*ODU0->cross-
connect board.
l OTU1-ANY-ODU0-OTU1: indicates that the
board functions as a line and tributary board
and receives the ODU1 service. The service
mapping trail is OTU1->ODU1->n*ANY-
>2*ODU0->ODU1->OTU1->line side.
l ANY-OTU1: indicates that the board functions
as a line and tributary board and receives the
service mapping trail is OTU1/ANY->ODU1-
>OTU1->line side. In cascading mode, the
service mapping trail is n*ANY->ODU1-
>OTU1->line side.
l ANY-ODUFLEX-NONAGGR:service
package that enables 8 x GE services to be
encapsulated into ODU0 services.
For the 54TOA, 54THA, 11LOA, 55TQX, and
53TDX boards, valid values are as follows:
l NONE: indicates that the port is not used. All
the boards support this mode.
l ANY-ODUFLEX: tributary ODUFlex mode.
In this mode, client-side signals (2.5 Gbit/s to
4.25 Gbit/s for 54TOA and 54THA, 8 Gbit/s to
10 Gbit/s for 53TDX and 55TQX) are
encapsulated into ODUFlex signals and then
output to the WDM side. The 54TOA, 54THA,
55TQX, and 53TDX boards support this mode.
l ANY-ODU2: tributary ODU2 non-
convergency mode. In this mode, 8 Gbit/s to
10 Gbit/s client-side signals are encapsulated
into ODU2 signals and then output to the
WDM side. The 55TQX and 53TDX boards
support this mode.
l OTU1-ODU0: tributary ODU1-ODU0 mode.
In this mode, a board functions as a tributary
board and receives the OTU1 service. The
service mapping trail is OTU1->ODU1-
>2*ODU0->cross-connection board. The
54TOA and 54THA boards support this mode.
l ANY-ODU0-NONAGGR: tributary ODU0
non-convergence mode. The service mapping
trail is Any -> ODU0 -> cross-connection
board. The 54TOA and 54THA boards support
this mode.
l ANY-ODU1-AGGR: tributary ODU1
convergence mode. The service mapping trail

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
is Any -> ODU1 -> cross-connection board.

The 54TOA and 54THA boards support this
mode.
l ANY-ODU1-NONAGGR: tributary ODU1
trail is 1.5–2.5 Gbit/s signals (including OTU1
signals) -> ODU1 -> cross-connection board.
The 54TOA and 54THA boards support this
mode.
l ANY-ODU0(-ODU1)-OTU2: tributary ODU0
trail is ANY -> ODU0 -> [ODU1->]ODU2->
OTU2 -> line side. The timeslot allocation
mode of WDM-side ports determines whether
signals traverse ODU1. When the consecutive
timeslot allocation mode is used, signals
traverse ODU1. The 11LOA board supports
the tributary ODU0 non-convergence mode.
l ANY-ODU1-OTU2: tributary ODU1 non-
convergence mode. The service mapping trail
is ANY/OTU1 -> ODU1 –> ODU2 -> OTU2-
> line side. The 11LOA board supports this
mode.
l OTU1-ODU0(-ODU1)-OTU2: tributary
ODU1-ODU0 mode. The service mapping trail
is OTU1 -> ODU1 -> ODU0 ->(ODU1 ->)
ODU2 -> OTU2->line side. The timeslot
allocation mode of WDM-side ports
determines whether signals traverse ODU1.
When the consecutive timeslot allocation
mode is used, signals traverse ODU1. The
11LOA board supports this mode.
l ANY-ODUFLEX-OTU2: tributary ODUflex
trail is ANY -> ODUFlex -> ODU2 -> OTU2
-> line side. The 11LOA board supports this
mode.
l ANY-OTU2: tributary ODU2 mode.The
service mapping trail is ANY->ODU2-
>OTU2->line side. The 11LOA board supports
this mode.
NOTE
This parameter cannot be set with other parameters at
the same time.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PLDTYPE> Indicates the service type that the port supports. NA

l ANY
l GETH
l XGETH (For the TBE unit, there are two
working modes: 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.)
l FETH
l OTU1
l OTU2
l OTU3
l OTU5G
l STM1
l STM4
l STM16
l STM64
l STM256
l OC3
l OC12
l OC48
l OC192
l OC768
l FC100
l FC200
l FC400
l FC800
l FC1200
l FICON
l FICONEXP(FICON Express)
l FICON4G
l FICON8G
l HDSDI
l DVBASI(DVB-ASI)
l SDI
l ESCON
l FDDI
l ISC1G
l ISC2G
l ETR
l CLO

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l IBSDR
l CBR10G
l CPRI1
l CPRI2
l CPRI3
l 3GSDI
l HDSDIRBR
l 3GSDIRBR
NOTE
This parameter cannot be set with other parameters at
the same time.
<RATE> Indicates the rate of a service type. It is only NA

applicable to ANY services.
It can be a floating-point value; measured in units
of 1M; accurate to 0.01M.
For the TOM unit, the valid values are as follows:
l Path 1: 125 to 200, 250 to 400, 500 to 800, 1000
to 1600, 2000 to 2200.
l Path 2 to 8: 125 to 200, 250 to 400, 500 to 800,
1000 to 1250.
For the TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN13LQM/
TN12TQM unit, the valid values are as follows:
l Path 1: 125 to 200, 250 to 400, 500 to 800, 1000
to 1600, 2000 to 2200.
l Path 2 to 4: 125 to 200, 250 to 400, 500 to 800,
1000 to 1250.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-CLNT::CLNT-1-6-1-4:C:::PLDTYPE=ESCON;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-11 21:32:07 M C COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.6.9 RTRV-CLNT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.6.9 RTRV-CLNT
Retrieves the attributes of the logical client facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the logical client facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-CLNT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Paramet Description Default Value
er

ID>
ID>-<CHANNEL ID>
ID>
ID>-<CHANNEL ID>
Refer to A.32.2.4 CLNT for the valid values of
<AID> for specific units.
Response Syntax
[WORKMODE=<WORKMODE>,][PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>,][RATE=<RATE>]"<cr><lf> ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters

l VCLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
l VCLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL ID>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<WORKMOD Indicates the working mode and is applicable only to the 52TOM board.
E> If the value ends with ODUn, the board functions as a tributary board. In
this mode, the services are transmitted to the cross-connect board. If the
value ends with OTUn, the board functions as a line and tributary board.
In this mode, the service is not transmitted to the cross-connect board but
is output directly. The description of each value is as follows:
l NONE: indicates that the port is not used.
l ANY-ODU0/-ODU1: indicates that the board functions as a tributary
board and receives the ODU0 service. In non-cascading mode, the
service mapping trails is ANY->ODU0->cross-connect board, or
ANY->ODU0->ODU1->cross-connect board. In cascading mode, the
service mapping trail is n*ANY->2*ODU0->cross-connect board, or
n*ANY->2*ODU0->ODU1->cross-connect board.
l ANY-ODU0-OTU1: indicates that the board functions as a line and
tributary board and receives the ODU0 service. In non-cascading mode,
the service mapping trail is ANY->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1->line side.
In cascading mode, the service mapping trail is n*ANY->2*ODU0-
>ODU1->OTU1->line side.
l ANY-ODU1: indicates that the board functions as a tributary board and
receives the ODU1 service. In non-cascading mode, the service
mapping trail is OTU1/ANY->ODU1->cross-connect board. In
cascading mode, the service mapping trail is n*ANY->ODU1->cross-
connect board.
l OTU1-ANY-ODU0-ODU1: indicates that the board functions as a
tributary board and receives the ODU1 service. The service mapping
trails is OTU1->ODU1->n*ANY->2*ODU0->ODU1->cross-connect
board.
l OTU1-ODU0: indicates that the board functions as a tributary board
and receives the ODU1 service. The service mapping trail is OTU1-
>ODU1->2*ODU0->cross-connection board.
l OTU1-ANY-ODU0: indicates that the board functions as a tributary
board and receives the ODU1 service. The service mapping trail is
OTU1->ODU1->n*ANY->2*ODU0->cross-connect board.
l OTU1-ANY-ODU0-OTU1: indicates that the board functions as a line
and tributary board and receives the ODU1 service. The service
mapping trail is OTU1->ODU1->n*ANY->2*ODU0->ODU1-
>OTU1->line side.
l ANY-OTU1: indicates that the board functions as a line and tributary
board and receives the ODU1 service. In non-cascading mode, the
service mapping trail is OTU1/ANY->ODU1->OTU1->line side. In
cascading mode, the service mapping trail is n*ANY->ODU1->OTU1-
>line side.
l ANY-ODUFLEX-NONAGGR:service package that enables 8 x GE
services to be encapsulated into ODU0 services.
For the 54TOA, 54THA, 11LOA, 55TQX, and 53TDX boards, valid

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l NONE: indicates that the port is not used. All the boards support this
mode.
l ANY-ODUFLEX: tributary ODUFlex mode. In this mode, client-side
signals (2.5 Gbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/s for 54TOA and 54THA, 8 Gbit/s to
10 Gbit/s for 53TDX and 55TQX) are encapsulated into ODUFlex
signals and then output to the WDM side. The 54TOA, 54THA,
55TQX, and 53TDX boards support this mode.
l ANY-ODU2: tributary ODU2 non-convergency mode. In this mode, 8
Gbit/s to 10 Gbit/s client-side signals are encapsulated into ODU2
signals and then output to the WDM side. The 55TQX and 53TDX
boards support this mode.
l OTU1-ODU0: tributary ODU1-ODU0 mode. In this mode, a board
functions as a tributary board and receives the OTU1 service. The
service mapping trail is OTU1->ODU1->2*ODU0->cross-connection
board. The 54TOA and 54THA boards support this mode.
l ANY-ODU0-NONAGGR: tributary ODU0 non-convergence mode.
The service mapping trail is Any -> ODU0 -> cross-connection board.
The 54TOA and 54THA boards support this mode.
l ANY-ODU1-AGGR: tributary ODU1 convergence mode. The service
mapping trail is Any -> ODU1 -> cross-connection board. The 54TOA
and 54THA boards support this mode.
l ANY-ODU1-NONAGGR: tributary ODU1 non-convergence mode.
The service mapping trail is 1.5–2.5 Gbit/s signals (including OTU1
signals) -> ODU1 -> cross-connection board. The 54TOA and 54THA
boards support this mode.
l ANY-ODU0(-ODU1)-OTU2: tributary ODU0 non-convergence
mode. The service mapping trail is ANY -> ODU0 -> [ODU1->]
ODU2-> OTU2 -> line side. The timeslot allocation mode of WDM-
side ports determines whether signals traverse ODU1. When the
consecutive timeslot allocation mode is used, signals traverse ODU1.
The 11LOA board supports the tributary ODU0 non-convergence
mode.
l ANY-ODU1-OTU2: tributary ODU1 non-convergence mode. The
service mapping trail is ANY/OTU1 -> ODU1 –> ODU2 -> OTU2->
line side. The 11LOA board supports this mode.
l OTU1-ODU0(-ODU1)-OTU2: tributary ODU1-ODU0 mode. The
service mapping trail is OTU1 -> ODU1 -> ODU0 ->(ODU1 ->) ODU2
-> OTU2->line side. The timeslot allocation mode of WDM-side ports
determines whether signals traverse ODU1. When the consecutive
timeslot allocation mode is used, signals traverse ODU1. The 11LOA
board supports this mode.
l ANY-ODUFLEX-OTU2: tributary ODUflex non-convergence mode.
The service mapping trail is ANY -> ODUFlex -> ODU2 -> OTU2 ->
line side. The 11LOA board supports this mode.
l ANY-OTU2: tributary ODU2 mode.The service mapping trail is ANY-
>ODU2->OTU2->line side. The 11LOA board supports this mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NOTE
This parameter cannot be set with other parameters at the same time.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PLDTYPE> Indicates the service type that the port supports. The valid values are as
follows:
l GETH
l XGETH (For the TBE unit, there are two working modes: 10GE WAN
and 10GE LAN.)
l FETH
l OTU1
l OTU2
l OTU3
l OTU5G
l STM1
l STM4
l STM16
l STM64
l STM256
l OC3
l OC12
l OC48
l OC192
l OC768
l FC100
l FC200
l FC400
l FC800
l FC1200
l FICON
l FICON4G
l HDSDI
l DVBASI(DVB-ASI)
l SDI
l ESCON
l FDDI
l ISC1G
l ISC2G
l ETR
l CLO
l IBSDR
l IBDDR

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l ANY
l IBSDR
l CBR10G
l CPRI1
l CPRI2
l CPRI3
l 3GSDI
l HDSDIRBR
l 3GSDIRBR
<RATE> Indicates the rate of a service type. It is applicable only to Any services.
Example
l Command
RTRV-CLNT::CLNT-1-6-1-4:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-11 21:32:26
M C COMPLD
"CLNT-1-6-1-4::PLDTYPE=ESCON" ;
Related Commands
A.6.8 ED-CLNT
A.6.10 ED-LEDSTATE
Configures the status of the stat indicator on a board.
Function
This command configures the status of the stat indicator on a board.
Usage Note
None.
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
ED-LEDSTATE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[LEDSTATE=<LEDSTATE>]
Command Parameters

l SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>
Refer to A.32.2.7 EQPT for the valid values of
<AID> corresponding to the specific units.
<LEDSTATE> The value format is as follows: OFF

l ON: enables the stat indicator to blink.
l OFF: enables the stat indicator not to blink.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
M^^<ctag>^COMPLD<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ed-ledstate::slot-1-9:s:::ledstate=on;
l Response Message
NE 2011-06-13 08:59:05
M S COMPLD;
Related Commands
A.6.11 RTRV-LEDSTATE
A.6.11 RTRV-LEDSTATE
Queries the status of the stat indicator on a board.
Function
This command queries the status of the stat indicator on a board.
Usage Note
None.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-LEDSTATE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>
Command Parameters

l SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>
Response Syntax
^^^"<AID>::[LEDSTATE=<LEDSTATE>]"<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
rtrv-ledstate::slot-1-9:s;
l Response Message
NE 2011-06-13 08:59:04
M S COMPLD
"SLOT-1-3::LEDSTATE=OFF";
Related Commands
A.6.10 ED-LEDSTATE
A.6.12 ED-EC
Edits the attributes of the physical electric facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the physical electric facility.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-EC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PORTMEMO=<PORTMEMO>],
[PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>],[SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>]:[[<PST>],[<SST>]];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>- NA

<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.6 EC for the valid values of <AID>
for specific units.
<PORTMEMO> Indicates additional information about the optical NA

port. It is a string that consists of no more than 64
bytes. Usually it is used to identify the port name.
<PLDTYPE> Indicates the service type at the port. This parameter GETH
is only valid for cards that support Ethernet layer 2
processing. The valid values are as follows:
l FETH
l GETH
<SVTIMER> Indicates the signal validation timer; units are 00-15

expressed in minutes. It is valid only when Auto In-
Service is supported. SVTIMER is a string in an HH-
MM (00-15...48-00) format.
l HH: hour
l MM: minute

<SST> Indicates the secondary state. The valid values are NA

AINS, SB, and SB-DEA. It can be set to SB if the
entity is in OOS-MA; no outgoing traffic is allowed
and incoming traffic is ignored. When PWRMODE
is set to SAVING, the port is in a power-saving state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-EC::FAC-1-8-3:C:::PLDTYPE=FETH;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-11 21:12:53
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.13 RTRV-EC
A.6.13 RTRV-EC
Retrieves the attributes of the physical electric facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the physical electric facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-EC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>-<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.6 EC for the valid values of

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[PORTMEMO=<PORTMEMO>],[SILKSCREEN=<SILKSCREEN>],TYPE=<TYPE>,
[PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>],SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
<PORTMEMO> Indicates additional information about the optical port. It is a string that
consists of no more than 64 bytes. Usually it is used to identify the port
name.
<SILKSCREEN> Indicates the character string silk-screened at the corresponding port on

the front panel.
<TYPE> Indicates the port type. Electrical ports can only serve as client-side
ports.
The valid value is CLIENT.
<PLDTYPE> Indicates the service type at the port. This parameter is only valid for
cards that support Ethernet layer 2 processing. The valid values are as
follows:
l FETH
l GETH
<SVTIMER> Indicates the signal validation timer; units are expressed in minutes. It
is valid only when Auto In-Service is supported. SVTIMER is a string
in an HH-MM format.
l HH: hour, which is an integer ranging from 0 to 48.
l MM: minute, which is an integer ranging from 0 to 59.
IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-EC::FAC-1-16-3:C;
l Response Message
AAAAA 1990-01-01 15:22:46
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-16-3::PORTMEMO=\"\",TYPE=CLIENT,PLDTYPE=GETH,SVTIMER=00-15:OOS-
AU,AINS&SGEO"
;
>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.6.12 ED-EC
A.6.14 ED-CFP
Edits the attributes of the physical optical carrier facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the physical optical carrier facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-CFP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PORTMEMO=<PORTMEMO>],
[LSRSTATE=<LSRSTATE>],[ALS=<ALS>],[LOSTH=<LOSTH>],
[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],[SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>]:[[<PST>],[<SST>]];
Command Parameters

<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.16 OC for the valid values of <AID>
for specific units.

<LSRSTATE> Indicates the status of the laser. The valid values are OPEN
OPEN and CLOSE.
<ALS> Indicates whether the automatic laser shutdown is ENABLE

enabled. The valid values are ENABLE and
DISABLE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LOSTH> Indicates the threshold power value of the LOS (Loss NA

of Signal). This parameter is only valid for the DCP/
OLP unit.
<LOSTH> is measured in units of 1.0 dBm.
<DELAYTIME> Indicates the delay time. It is an integer ranging from NA

This parameter is only valid for the channels in a
protection group.

MM (00-15...48-00) format.
HH: hour
MM: minute


AINS, SB and SB-DEA.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-CFP::FAC-1-4-3:D:::ALS=ENABLE;
l Response Message
NE 2008-06-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.6.15 RTRV-CFP
A.6.15 RTRV-CFP
Retrieves the attributes of the physical optical carrier facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the physical optical carrier facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-CFP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>-<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.16 OC for the valid values of
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[PORTMEMO=<PORTMEMO>],SILKSCREEN=<SILKSCREEN>,[LSRSTATE=<LSRSTATE>],
[ALS=<ALS>],[LOSTH=<LOSTH>],[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],
[SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>],SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PORTMEMO> Indicates additional information about the optical port. It is a string

that consists of no more than 64 bytes. Usually it is used to identify the
port name.
<SILKSCREEN> Indicates the character string silk-screened at the corresponding port

on the front panel.
<LSRSTATE> Indicates the status of the laser. The valid values are OPEN and
CLOSE.
<ALS> Indicates the automatic laser shutdown flag. The valid values are
ENABLE and DISABLE.
<LOSTH> Indicates the threshold power value of the LOS. This parameter is only
valid for the DCP/OLP unit.
<DELAYTIME> It is only valid for the ports of a protection group.

SWITCHSTATE.
in an HH-MM format.
HH: hour, which is an integer ranging from 0 to 48.
MM: minute, which is an integer ranging from 0 to 59.
IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-CFP::FAC-1-7-3:C;
l Response Message
NE 1990-01-03 08:37:13
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-7-3::PORTMEMO=\"\",SILKSCREEN=TX1/RX1
( IP3 ),LSRSTATE=CLOSE,ALS=ENABLE,SVTIMER=00-15:OOS-AU,AINS&SGEO"
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.6.14 ED-CFP
A.6.16 ED-OC
Edits the attributes of the physical optical carrier facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the physical optical carrier facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-OC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PORTMEMO=<PORTMEMO>],
[LSRSTATE=<LSRSTATE>],[ALS=<ALS>],[OFC=<OFC>,][PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>],
[CLNTPLDTYPE=<CLNTPLDTYPE>],[MAXSPEED=<MAXSPEED>],
[LOSTH=<LOSTH>],[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],[TSMODE=<TSMODE>],
[SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>]:[[<PST>],[<SST>]];
Command Parameters

<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.16 OC for the valid values of <AID>
for specific units.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TYPE> Indicates the port type (client-side or line-side). This

parameter is only valid for cards that support
configurable client-side and line-side working
modes. The valid values are as follows:
l CLIENT
l LINE
NOTE
This parameter cannot be set with other parameters at the
same time.
OPEN and CLOSE.

enabled. The valid values are ENABLE and
DISABLE.
<OFC> Indicates whether OFC is enabled or disabled. This DISABLE

parameter is applicable only for the ISC1G and
ISC2G services. The valid values are ENABLE and
DISABLE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PLDTYPE> Indicates the service type at the port. This parameter NA

is only valid for the Ethernet Layer 2 processing card
(TBE and L4G), LSX and the transparent transmit
card (LWX). The valid values are as follows:
l ANY
l GETH
l 10GETH (There are two working modes for TBE
units: 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.)
l FETH
l OTU1
l OTU2
l OTU3
l OTU5G
l STM1
l STM4
l STM16
l STM64
l STM256
l OC3
l OC12
l OC48
l OC192
l OC768
l FC100
l FC200
l FC400
l FC1200
l FICON
l FICON4G
l HDSDI
l DVBASI(DVB-ASI)
l SDI
l ESCON
l FDDI
l ISC1G
l ISC2G
l ETR
l CLO

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Only FETH, GETH, and 10GETH are valid values

for layer 2 processing cards.
All the preceding values are valid for the transparent
transmit card. MAXSPEED is invalid (not displayed
upon query) unless PLDTYPE is set to ANY.
NOTE
This parameter cannot be set with other parameters at the
same time.
<CLNTPLDTYPE Indicates the service type at the client side. This NA

> parameter is only valid for cards that support OTUk
services on the client side.
The valid values are OTN and CLIENT.
<MAXSPEED> Indicates the maximum bearer rate of client services. NA

This parameter is only valid for transparent transmit
cards such as the LWX. The value is expressed in
Mbit/s. MAXSPEED is valid when PLDTYPE is set
to ANY.
<LOSTH> Indicates the threshold power value of the LOS (Loss NA

of Signal). This parameter is only valid for the DCP/
OLP unit.
<DELAYTIME> Indicates the delay time. It is an integer ranging from NA

protection group.
<TSMODE> Indicates the timeslot allocation mode. The valid

l FIX: The number of timeslots allocated is fixed.
l RANDOM: The number of timeslots allocated is
random.

MM (00-15...48-00) format.
HH: hour
MM: minute

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


AINS, SB and SB-DEA.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-OC::FAC-1-4-3:D:::ALS=ENABLE,PLDTYPE=ANY,MAXSPEED=24700;
l Response Message
NE 2008-06-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.17 RTRV-OC
A.6.17 RTRV-OC
Retrieves the attributes of the physical optical carrier facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the physical optical carrier facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-OC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>-<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.16 OC for the valid values of
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
[TYPE=<TYPE>],[ALS=<ALS>],[OFC=<OFC>],[PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>],
[CLNTPLDTYPE=<CLNTPLDTYPE>],[MAXSPEED=<MAXSPEED>],[ACTSPEED=<ACTSPEED>],
[LOSTH=<LOSTH>],[ELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],
[SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>],TSMODE=<TSMODE>,SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters

that consists of no more than 64 bytes. Usually it is used to identify the
port name.

on the front panel.
<LSRSTATE> Indicates the status of the laser. The valid values are OPEN and
CLOSE.
<TYPE> Indicates the port type. Colorless optical ports can only serve as client-
side ports.
The valid values are CLIENT and LINE.
<ALS> Indicates the automatic laser shutdown flag. The valid values are
ENABLE and DISABLE.
<OFC> Indicates whether OFC is enabled or disabled. This parameter is only

valid to ISC1G and ISC2G services. The valid values are ENABLE
and DISABLE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PLDTYPE> Indicates the service type at the port. This parameter is only valid for
Ethernet Layer 2 processing cards, LSX and transparent transmit cards
(LWX). The valid values are as follows:
l ANY
l GETH
l 10GETH (There are two working modes for TBE units: 10GE
WAN and 10GE LAN.)
l FETH
l OTU1
l OTU2
l OTU3
l OTU5G
l STM1
l STM4
l STM16
l STM64
l STM256
l OC3
l OC12
l OC48
l OC192
l OC768
l FC100
l FC200
l FC400
l FC1200
l FICON
l FICON4G
l HDSDI
l DVBASI(DVB-ASI)
l SDI
l ESCON
l FDDI
l ISC1G
l ISC2G
l ETR
l CLO

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Only FETH, GETH, and 10GETH are valid values for layer 2
processing cards.
All the preceding values are valid for the transparent transmit card.
MAXSPEED is invalid (not displayed upon query) when PLDTYPE
is not set to ANY.
<CLNTPLDTYPE Indicates the service type at the client side. This parameter is only valid
> for cards which support OTUk services on the client side.
<MAXSPEED> Indicates the maximum bearer rate of client services. This parameter
is only valid for transparent transmit cards such as the TN12LWXS.
The value is expressed in Mbit/s. MAXSPEED is valid when
PLDTYPE is set to ANY.
<ACTSPEED> Indicates the actual bit rate of client services. The value is expressed
in Mbit/s.
<DELAYTIME> It is only valid for the ports of a protection group.

SWITCHSTATE.
<TSMODE> Indicates the timeslot allocation mode. The valid values are as follows:
l RANDOM: The number of timeslots allocated is random.
in an HH-MM format.
IS and OOS.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-OC::FAC-1-7-3:C;
l Response Message
NE 1990-01-03 08:37:13
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-7-3::PORTMEMO=\"\",SILKSCREEN=TX1/RX1
( IP3 ),LSRSTATE=CLOSE,TYPE=CLIENT,ALS=ENABLE,SVTIMER=00-15:OOS-AU,AINS&SGEO"
;
Related Commands
A.6.16 ED-OC
A.6.18 ED-OCH
Edits the attributes of the physical OCH facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the physical OCH facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PORTMEMO=<PORTMEMO>],
[LSRSTATE=<LSRSTATE>],[TYPE=<TYPE>],[ALS=<ALS>],[OFC=<OFC>],
[BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>],[WVNUM=<WVNUM>],
[ADBANDTYPE=<ADBANDTYPE>],[ADWVNUM=<ADWVNUM>],
[EXPBANDTYPE=<EXPBANDTYPE>],[EXPWVNUM=<EXPWVNUM>],
[PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>],[CLNTPLDTYPE=<CLNTPLDTYPE>],
[MAXSPEED=<MAXSPEED>],[LOSTH=<LOSTH>],[EXPPWR=<EXPPWR>],
[ATTEN=<ATTEN>],[VOAOFFSET=<VOAOFFSET>],[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],
[TSMODE=<TSMODE>],[SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>]:[[<PST>],[<SST>]];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Default

<CHANNEL ID>
Refer to A.32.2.17 OCH for the valid values of <AID>
for specific units.
<PORTMEMO> Indicates additional information about the optical port. It NA

is a string that consists of no more than 64 bytes. Usually
it is used to identify the port name.
OPEN and CLOSE.
<TYPE> Indicates the port type (client-or line-side). This CLIENT

parameter is only valid for cards that support configurable
client-side and line-side working modes.
l CLIENT
l LINE
NOTE
This parameter cannot be set with other parameters at the same
time.
<ALS> Indicates whether the automatic laser shutdown is NA

enabled. The valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
This parameter is only valid for the LWX card.
<OFC> Indicates whether OFC is enabled or disabled. This DISABLE

parameter is applicable only to ISC1G and ISC2G
services. The valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
<BANDTYPE> Indicates the working band of the port. The valid values NA
are CBAND and CWDMBAND.
<WVNUM> Indicates the operating wavelength number of the port. NA
<ADBANDTYP Indicates the band type of add/drop wavelengths. The NA

E> valid values are CBAND and CWDMBAND. This
parameter is only valid for the MR series card.
<ADWVNUM> Indicates the add/drop wavelength number. This NA

parameter is only valid for the MR series card.
<EXPBANDTYP Indicates the expected receive band at the port. The valid NA
E> values are CBAND, CWDMBAND, and TX. The value
TX indicates that the expected receive band is the same
as the transmit band.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<EXPWVNUM> Indicates the number of the expected receive wavelength. NA

The valid values are from 1 to 80, and TX. The value TX
indicates that the number of the expected receive
wavelength is the same as the that of the transmit
wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<PLDTYPE> Indicates the service type at the port. This parameter is NA

only valid for the Ethernet Layer 2 processing card (L4G
and TBE) and the transparent transmit card (LWX). The
l ANY
l GETH
l 10GETH (There are two working modes for TBE
units: 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.)
l FETH
l OTU1
l OTU2
l OTU3
l OTU5G
l STM1
l STM4
l STM16
l STM64
l STM256
l OC3
l OC12
l OC48
l OC192
l OC768
l FC100
l FC200
l FC400
l FC1200
l FICON
l FICONEXP (FICON Express)
l FICON4G
l HDSDI
l DVBASI(DVB-ASI)
l SDI
l ESCON
l FDDI
l ISC1G
l ISC2G
l ETR

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
l CLO
Only FETH, GETH, and 10GETH are valid values for
Layer 2 processing cards.
All the preceding values are valid for transparent transmit
cards. MAXSPEED is invalid (not displayed upon query)
unless PLDTYPE is set to ANY.
NOTE
This parameter cannot be set with other parameters at the same
time.
<CLNTPLDTYP Indicates the service type at the client side. This parameter NA
E> is only valid for the card that supports the OTUk services
on the client side.
The valid values are OTN and CLIENT.
<MAXSPEED> Indicates the maximum bearer rate of client services. This NA

parameter is only valid for transparent transmit cards such
as the LWX. The value is expressed in Mbit/s.
MAXSPEED is valid when PLDTYPE is set to ANY.
<LOSTH> Indicates the threshold power value of the LOS. This NA

parameter is only valid for the DCP/OLP unit.
<EXPPWR> Indicates the optical power transmitted expected for NA

ROAM.
The system adjusts the output power to EXPPWR when:
a command is issued; a card resets; or the received signal
status at the port recovers from LOS.
<ATTEN> Indicates the attenuation applied at the interface. The NA

value is expressed in dBm and is accurate to 0.1 dBm.
<VOAOFFSET> Indicates the attenuation adjustment change expressed in NA

1 dB; accurate to 0.1 dB.
<DELAYTIME> Indicates the delay time. It is an integer ranging from 0 to NA

100, which is expressed in 0.1 seconds.
protection group.
port.
Use the default value when only one type of protection is
configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<TSMODE> Indicates the timeslot allocation mode. The valid values

are as follows:
l RANDOM: The number of timeslots allocated is
random.
<SVTIMER> Indicates the signal validation timer; units are expressed 00-15
in minutes. It is valid only when Auto In-Service is
supported. SVTIMER is a string in an HH-MM
(00-15...48-00) format.
l HH: hour
l MM: minute

<SST> Indicates the secondary state. The valid values are AINS, NA
SB, and SB-DEA. It can be set to SB if the entity is in
OOS-MA; no outgoing traffic is allowed and incoming
traffic is ignored. When PWRMODE is set to SAVING,
the port is in the power-saving state.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-OCH::FAC-1-4-3:C:::PLDTYPE=FETH;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.19 RTRV-OCH
A.6.19 RTRV-OCH
Retrieves the attributes of the physical OCH facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the physical OCH facility

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-OCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

<CHANNEL ID>
Refer to A.32.2.17 OCH for the valid values of
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
[TYPE=<TYPE>],[ALS=<ALS>],[OFC=<OFC>],[BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>],[WVNUM=<WVNUM>],
[ACTBANDTYPE=<ACTBANDTYPE>],[ACTWVNUM=<ACTWVNUM>],[ADBANDTYPE=<ADBANDTYPE>],
[ADWVNUM=<ADWVNUM>],[ADWV=<ADWV>],[ACTADBANDTYPE=<ACTADBANDTYPE>],
[ACTADWVNUM=<ACTADWVNUM>],[ACTADWV=<ACTADWV>],[WVNUMRANGE=<WVNUMRANGE>],
[PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>],[CLNTPLDTYPE=<CLNTPLDTYPE>],[MAXSPEED=<MAXSPEED>],
[ACTSPEED=<ACTSPEED>],[LOSTH=<LOSTH>],[EXPPWR=<EXPPWR>],[ATTEN=<ATTEN>],
[MINATTEN=<MINATTEN>],[MAXATTEN=<MAXATTEN>],[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],
[SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>],[TSMODE=<TSMODE>],
[SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>]:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters

l FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL ID>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PORTMEMO> Indicates the optical port memo. It is a string consists of not more than
64 bytes. Usually it is used to identify the port name.

the front panel.
<LSRSTATE> Indicates the status of the laser. The valid values are OPEN and CLOSE.
<TYPE> Indicates the port type (client-side or line-side). The valid values are as
follows:
l CLIENT
l LINE
<ALS> Indicates whether the automatic laser shutdown is enabled. The valid
values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
<OFC> Indicates whether OFC is enabled. This parameter is only valid to ISC1G
and ISC2G services. The valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
<BANDTYPE> Indicates the working band of the port. The valid values are CBAND and
CWDMBAND.
<WVNUM> Indicates the operating wavelength number of the port.
<WV> Indicates the information of the operating wavelength specified by

<WVNUM>. The valid format is frequency/wavelength: xxxxTHz/
xxxnm.
<ACTBANDTYP Indicates the actual working band of the port. The valid values are
E> CBAND and CWDMBAND (Coarse Wavelength Division
Multiplexing Band).
<ACTWVNUM> Indicates the actual operating wavelength number of the port.
<ACTWV> Indicates the information of the actual operating wavelength specified

by <ACTWVNUM>. The valid format is frequency/wavelength:
xxxxTHz/xxxnm.
<ADBANDTYP Indicates the band type of add/drop wavelengths. The valid values are
E> CBAND and CWDMBAND. This parameter is only valid for the MR
series card.
<ADWVNUM> Indicates the add/drop wavelength number. This parameter is only valid
for the MR series card.
<ADWV> Indicates the information of the add/drop wavelength specified by

<ADWVNUM>. The valid format is frequency/wavelength: xxxxTHz/
xxxnm. This parameter is only valid for the MR series card.
<ACTADBAND Indicates the actual band type of add/drop wavelengths. The valid values
TYPE> are CBAND and CWDMBAND. This parameter is only valid for the
MR series card.
<ACTADWVNU Indicates the actual add/drop wavelength number. This parameter is only
M> valid for the MR series card.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<ACTADWV> Indicates the information of the actual add/drop wavelength specified by

<ACTADWVNUM>. The valid format is frequency/wavelength:
xxxxTHz/xxxnm. This parameter is only valid for the MR series card.
<WVNUMRAN Indicates the actual operating wavelength range that the port supports.
GE> The range is expressed by using &&. For example, 1&&40.
<EXPBANDTYP Indicates the expected receive band at the port. The valid values are
E> CBAND, CWDMBAND, and TX. The value TX indicates that the
expected receive band is the same as the transmit band.
<EXPWVNUM> Indicates the number of the expected receive wavelength. The valid
values are from 1 to 80, and TX. The value TX indicates that the number
of the expected receive wavelength is the same as that of the transmit
wavelength.
<EXPWV> Indicates the information of the expected receive wavelength specified

by <EXPWVNUM>. The valid format is frequency/wavelength:
xxxxTHz/xxxnm.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PLDTYPE> Indicates the service type at the port. This parameter is only valid for the
Ethernet Layer 2 processing card (TBE and L4G) and the transparent
transmit card (LWX). The valid values are as follows:
l ANY
l GETH
l 10GETH (There are two working modes for TBE units: 10GE WAN
and 10GE LAN.)
l FETH
l OTU1
l OTU2
l OTU3
l OTU5G
l STM1
l STM4
l STM16
l STM64
l STM256
l OC3
l OC12
l OC48
l OC192
l OC768
l FC100
l FC200
l FC400
l FC1200
l FICON
l FICON4G
l HDSDI
l DVBASI(DVB-ASI)
l SDI
l ESCON
l FDDI
l ISC1G
l ISC2G
l ETR
l CLO

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Only FETH, GETH, and 10GETH are valid values for layer 2 processing
cards.
All the preceding values are valid for transparent transmit cards.
MAXSPEED is invalid (not displayed upon query) unless PLDTYPE is
set to ANY.
<CLNTPLDTYP Indicates the service type at the client side. This parameter is only valid
E> for cards that support OTUk services on the client side.
<MAXSPEED> Indicates the maximum bearer rate of client services. This parameter is
only valid for transparent transmit cards such as the LWX. The value is
expressed in Mbit/s. MAXSPEED is valid when PLDTYPE is set to
ANY.
<ACTSPEED> Indicates the actual bit rate of client services. The value is expressed in
Mbit/s.
<EXPPWR> Indicates the optical power transmitted expected for ROAM.

The system adjusts the output power to <EXPPWR> when: a command
is issued; a card resets; or the received signal status at the port recovers
from LOS.
<ATTEN> Indicates the attenuation applied at the interface. The value is expressed
in dBm and is accurate to 0.1 dBm.
<MINATTEN> Indicates the minimum attenuation that can be configured on this

interface. The value is expressed in dBm and is accurate to 0.1 dBm.
<MAXATTEN> Indicates the maximum attenuation that can be configured on this

<DELAYTIME> This parameter is only valid for the ports of a protection group.
Indicates the delay time. It is an integer ranging from 0 to 100, which is
expressed in 0.1 seconds.
Delay time is required when multiple protection schemes are configured.
Switching is not initiated until the delay time is expended when a
malfunction is discovered at a port.
<SWITCHSTAT Indicates the state of the switching. It is only valid when the port is in
E> the protection group. For the valid values of <SWITCHSTATE>, refer
to A.32.3.20 SWITCHSTATE.
<TSMODE> Indicates the timeslot allocation mode. The valid values are as follows:
l RANDOM: The number of timeslots allocated is random.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
in an HH-MM format.
<PST> Indicates the status of the primary state qualifier. The valid values are IS
and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-OCH::FAC-1-2-1:D;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-17 08:25:01
M D COMPLD
"FAC-1-2-1::PORTMEMO=\"\",SILKSCREEN=OUT1/IN1
( OP1 ),LSRSTATE=OPEN,BANDTYPE=CBAND,WVNUM=1,WV=196.05THz/
1529.16nm,ACTBANDTYPE=CBAND,ACTWVNUM=1,ACTWV=196.05THz/
1529.16nm,WVNUMRANGE=1&&80,SVTIMER=00-15:IS-NR"
;
Related Commands
A.6.18 ED-OCH
A.6.20 ED-OMS
Edits the attributes of the OMS facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the OMS facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-OMS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::::[[<PST>],[<SST>]];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Default

<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.19 OMS for the valid values of

<SST> Indicates the secondary state. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-OMS::FAC-1-1-1:100::::OOS;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.25 RTRV-OTS
A.6.21 RTRV-OMS
Retrieves the attributes of the OMS facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the OMS facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-OMS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC- NA

<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.19 OMS for
the valid values of <AID> for
specific units.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>:::<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
Response Parameters
IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-OMS::FAC-1-2-1:C;
l Response Message
AAAAA 2008-11-01 20:45:44
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-2-1:::OOS-AUMA,SGEO"
;
Related Commands
A.6.24 ED-OTS
A.6.22 ED-OSC
Edits optical supervisory channel.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command edits the attributes of the OSC port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-OSC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PORTMEMO=<PORTMEMO>],
[LSRSTATE=<LSRSTATE>],[BEFECSDBER=<BEFECSDBER>],[DEGTH=<DEGTH>],
[DEGTIME=<DEGTIME>],[SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>]:[[<PST>],[<SST>]];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>- NA

<PORTMEMO> Indicates additional information about the NA

optical port. It is a string that consists of no
more than 64 bytes. Usually it is used to
identify the port name.
<LSRSTATE> Indicates the status of the laser. The valid OPEN

values are OPEN and CLOSE.
<BEFECSDBER> Indicates the SD threshold before FEC alarm. 1E-4

The valid value ranges from 1E-12 to 1E-1.
<DEGTH> Indicates the SD threshold for bit errors in 190

BURST mode. The valid value is 0-10167.
<DEGTIME> Indicates the DEG detection time expressed 7

in seconds.
The valid value ranges from 2 to 10.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

expressed in minutes. It is valid only when
Auto In-Service is supported. SVTIMER is a
string in an HH-MM format.
HH: hour, which is an integer ranging from
0 to 48.
MM: minute, which is an integer ranging
from 0 to 59.
<PST> Indicates the status of the primary state NA

qualifier. The valid values are IS and OOS.
<SST> Indicates the secondary state. The valid NA

values are AINS, SB, and SB-DEA. It can be
set to SB if the entity is in OOS-MA; no
outgoing traffic is allowed and incoming
traffic is ignored. When PWRMODE is set to
SAVING, the port is in a power-saving state.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-OSC::FAC-1-2-1:C:::LSRSTATE=OPEN;
l Response Message
NE 2008-06-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.23 RTRV-OSC
A.6.23 RTRV-OSC
Retrieves optical supervisory channel.
Function
This command retrieves the attribute of the OSC port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-OSC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF NA

ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
[WV=<WV>],[BEFECSDBER=<BEFECSDBER>],[DEGTH=<DEGTH>],
[DEGTIME=<DEGTIME>],SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<PORTMEMO> Indicates additional information about the optical port. It is a string that
consists of no more than 64 bytes. Usually it is used to identify the port
name.

the front panel.
<WV> Indicates the operating wavelength information of the port. The valid
format is frequency/wavelength: xxxxTHz/xxxnm.
<BEFECSDBER> Indicates the SD threshold before FEC. The valid value ranges from
1E-12 to 1E-1. The default value is 1E-4.
<DEGTH> Indicates the SD threshold for bit errors in BURST mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<DEGTIME> Indicates the DEG detection time expressed in seconds.

in an HH-MM format.
IS (in-service) and OOS (out-of-service).
Example
l Command
RTRV-OSC::FAC-1-2-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-06-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-2-1::PORTMEMO=\"\",SILKSCREEN=TM1/RM1,SVTIMER=00-15:OOS-AU,AINS&SGEO"
;
Related Commands
A.6.22 ED-OSC
A.6.24 ED-OTS
Edits the attributes of the OTS facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the OTS facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
ED-OTS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[TIMACT=<TIMACT>],
[TIMMODE=<TIMMODE>],[EXPTTISAPI=<EXPTTISAPI>],
[EXPTTIDAPI=<EXPTTIDAPI>],[TTISAPI=<TTISAPI>],[TTIDAPI=<TTIDAPI>],
[TTIOPER=<TTIOPER>]:[[<PST>],[<SST>]];
Command Parameters
Default

<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.21 OTS for the valid values of
<TIMACT> Indicates whether the reporting of the after-TIM DISABLE

response is enabled. The valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<TIMMODE> Indicates the TIM detection mode. OFF

l SAPI: Only the SAPI of the TTI received is
compared with that of the TTI to be received.
l DAPI: Only the DAPI of the TTI received is
l BOTH: The SAPI and DAPI of the TTI received
are compared with those of the TTI to be received.
l OFF: TIM detection is disabled.
<EXPTTISAPI> Indicates the expected TTI SAPI string. NULL

The TTI is defined by ITU-T G.709 as a 64-byte
string and contains SAPI, DAPI, and OPER.
SAPI: maximum 15-character source access point
identifier
<EXPTTIDAPI> Indicates the expected TTI DAPI string. NULL

DAPI: maximum 15-character destination access
point identifier
<TTISAPI> Indicates the TTI SAPI string to be transmitted. NULL

identifier

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<TTIDAPI> Indicates the TTI DAPI string to be transmitted. NULL

DAPI: maximum 15-character destination access
point identifier
<TTIOPER> Indicates the TTI OPER string to be transmitted. NULL

OPER: maximum 32-character operator specific

<SST> Indicates the secondary state. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-OTS::FAC-1-1-1:100:::TIMACT=ENABLE,TIMMODE=SAPI;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.25 RTRV-OTS
A.6.25 RTRV-OTS
Retrieves the attributes of the OTS facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the OTS facility.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-OTS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC- NA

<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.21 OTS for
the valid values of <AID> for
specific units.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>::TIMACT=<TIMACT>,TIMMODE=<TIMMODE>,EXPTTISAPI=<EXPTTISAPI>,EXPTTIDAPI=<E
XPTTIDAPI>,TTISAPI=<TTISAPI>,TTIDAPI=<TTIDAPI>,TTIOPER=<TTIOPER>,INCTTISAPI=<INCTT
ISAPI>,INCTTIDAPI=<INCTTIDAPI>,INCTTIOPER=<INCTTIOPER>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
Response Parameters
<TIMACT> Indicates whether the reporting of the after-TIM response is enabled.

l ENABLE
l DISABLE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TIMMODE> Indicates the TIM detection mode.

l SAPI: Only the SAPI of the TTI received is compared with that of
the TTI to be received.
l DAPI: Only the DAPI of the TTI received is compared with that of
l BOTH: The SAPI and DAPI of the TTI received are compared with
those of the TTI to be received.
<EXPTTISAPI> Indicates the expected TTI SAPI string.

The TTI is defined by ITU-T G.709 as a 64-byte string and contains
SAPI, DAPI, and OPER.
SAPI: maximum 15-character source access point identifier.
<EXPTTIDAPI> Indicates the expected TTI DAPI string.

DAPI: maximum 15-character destination access point identifier.
<TTISAPI> Indicates the TTI SAPI string to be transmitted.

<TTIDAPI> Indicates the TTI DAPI string to be transmitted.

<TTIOPER> Indicates the TTI OPER string to be transmitted.

OPER: maximum 32-character operator specific.
INCTTISAPI Indicates the incoming TTI SAPI string.

INCTTIDAPI Indicates the incoming TTI DAPI string.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
INCTTIOPER Indicates the incoming TTI OPER string.

IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-OTS::FAC-1-2-1:C;
l Response Message
AAAAA 2008-11-01 20:45:44
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-2-1::TIMACT=DISABLE,TIMMODE=OFF,EXPTTISAPI="AA",EXPTTIDAPI="BB",TTISAPI="CC
",TTIDAPI="",TTIOPER="",INCTTISAPI="",INCTTIDAPI="",INCTTIOPER="":OOS-AUMA,SGEO"
;
Related Commands
A.6.24 ED-OTS
A.6.26 ED-WDM
Edits the attributes of the WDM.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the WDM.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-WDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PORTMEMO=<PORTMEMO>],
[LSRSTATE=<LSRSTATE>],[ALS]=<ALS>,[PROWORKBAND=<PROWORKBAND>],

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
[AUTOBLCK=<AUTOBLCK>],[RATEDPOWER=<RATEDPOWER>],
[STDGAIN=<STDGAIN>],[SFTH=<SFTH>],[LOSTH=<LOSTH>],
[PWROFFSET=<PWROFFSET>],[ATTEN=<ATTEN>],
[VOAOFFSET=<VOAOFFSET>],[PMDCOEF=<PMDCOEF>],[CDCOEF=<CDCOEF>],
[FIBERTYPE=<FIBERTYPE>],[TXDC=<TXDC>],[RXDC=<RXDC>],
[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],[RLSTARTUPUPTH=<RLSTARTUPUPTH>],
[RLSTARTUPDOWNTH=<RLSTARTUPDOWNTH>],[RLALMUPTH=<RLALMUPTH>],
[RLALMDOWNTH=<RLALMDOWNTH>],[RLENABLE=<RLENABLE>],
[WORKMODE=<OAWORKMODE>],[OUTPWR=<OALOCKPWR>],
[SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>]:[[<PST>][,<SST>]];
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> Indicates the WDM access identifier. NA

The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.30 WDM for the valid values of <AID>
for specific units.
<PORTMEMO> Indicates additional information about the optical port. It NA

is a string that consists of no more than 64 bytes. Usually
it is used to identify the port name.
<LSRSTATE> Indicates the state of the laser. The valid values are OPEN OPEN
and CLOSE.

enabled. The valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
<PROWORKBA l Indicates the operating wavelength band type NA

ND> provisioned. The valid values are as follows:
l C-ALL: indicates all C band wavelengths.
l C-ODD: indicates all C band odd wavelengths.
l C-EVEN: indicates all C band even wavelengths.
<AUTOBLCK> Indicates whether to automatically block a port. This N

parameter is only valid for RMU cards.
Y: A port is blocked automatically when there are not any
optical cross-connections that pass the port to ensure that
the attenuation of the port is at the maximum.
N: A port is not blocked when there are not any optical
cross-connections that pass the port to ensure that the
attenuation of the port remains unchanged.
<RATEDPOWE Indicates the rated power of the laser. This parameter is NA

R> only valid for the OA unit.
<STDGAIN> Indicates the standard gain of the optical amplifier. This NA

parameter is only valid for the OA unit. The unit is 1.0
dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<SFTH> Indicates the threshold power of the SF (Signal fail) NA

alarm. This parameter is only valid for the DCP/OLP unit.
<LOSTH> Indicates the threshold power of the LOS (Loss of Signal). NA

<PWROFFSET> Indicates the original power offset between the working NA

port and protection port. This parameter is only valid for
the DCP/OLP unit. The valid value ranges from 30 to
4294967295.
<ATTEN> Indicates the attenuation applied at the interface. The NA

value is expressed in dBm and is accurate to 0.1 dBm.
<VOAOFFSET> Indicates the attenuation adjustment change expressed in NA

1 dB; accurate to 0.1 dB.
<PMDCOEF> Indicates the PMD dispersion coefficient in units of ps/ 0.05

SQRT(km). This parameter is only valid for the ports on
FIU cards and is determined by the type of the fiber used.
This parameter is required by ASON.
The valid value ranges from 0.00 to 1.00.
<CDCOEF> Indicates the chromatic dispersion coefficient in units of NA

ps/(nm*km). This parameter is only valid for the ports on
FIU cards and is determined by the type of the fiber used.
This parameter is required by ASON.
<FIBERTYPE> Indicates the fiber type. This parameter is only valid for NA
FIU ports and must be consistent with the type of fiber
used. This parameter is required by ASON. The valid
G652
LEAF
TW-RS
TW-C
TWPLUS
G653
SMF-LS
G654B
G656
G654A
Tera_light

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<TXDC> Indicates the dispersion compensation value in the 0

transmit direction in units of ps/nm. This parameter is
only valid for FIU ports. This parameter must be
consistent with the DCM/DCU dispersion compensation
value in the transmit direction of the connected FIU port.
<RXDC> Indicates the dispersion compensation value in the receive 0

direction in units of ps/nm. This parameter is only valid
for FIU ports. This parameter must be consistent with the
DCM/DCU dispersion compensation value in the receive
direction of the connected FIU port.
<DELAYTIME> This parameter is only valid for the channels in a NA

protection group.
Indicates the delay time. It is an integer ranging from 0 to
100, which is expressed in 0.1 seconds.
port.
configured.
<RLSTARTUPU The upper threshold of RL (Return Loss) to starting the NA

PTH> pump. Only for the Raman unit.
<RLSTARTUPD The down threshold of RL (Return Loss) to starting the NA

OWNTH> pump. Only for the Raman unit.
<RLALMUPTH> The upper threshold of RL (Return Loss) alarm. Only for NA

the Raman unit.
<RLALMDOWN The down threshold of RL (Return Loss) alarm. Only for NA

TH> the Raman unit. RLALMDOWNTH <=
RLSTARTUPDOWNTH < RLSTARTUPUPTH <=
RLALMUPTH.
<RLENABLE> Enables the RL (Return Loss) check. Range: ENABLE| ENABLE

DISABLE.
<WORKMODE> Indicates the work mode of the amplifier board.The valid LOCKGAI
value is LOCKGAIN/LOCKPWR/MAXGAIN/ N
PLLOCKPWR.
<OUTPWR> Indicates the work mode of the amplifier board.Only valid NA

if WORKMODE is LOCKPWR.For the valid value
range, see the reference file.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<SVTIMER> Indicates the signal validation timer; units are expressed 00-15
in minutes. This parameter is only valid if the Auto In-
Service feature is supported. SVTIMER is a string in an
HH-MM format.
The maximum timer setting is 48 hours.
<PST> Indicates the primary state of the entity. NA
<SST> Indicates the secondary state of the entity. The valid NA

values are AINS, SB, and SB-DEA. It can be set to SB if
the entity is in OOS-MA; no outgoing traffic is allowed
and incoming traffic is ignored. When PWRMODE is set
to SAVING, the port is in a power-saving state.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-WDM::FAC-1-1-2:C::::IS;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18 M C COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.6.27 RTRV-WDM
A.6.27 RTRV-WDM
Retrieves the attributes of the WDM.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the WDM.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-WDM:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the WDM access NA

identifier.
The valid format is FAC-<SHELF
Refer to A.32.2.30 WDM for the
valid values of <AID> for specific
units.
Response Syntax
[PORTMEMO=<PORTMEMO>],SILKSCREEN=<SILKSCREEN>,[LSRSTATE=<LSRSTATE>],[ALS=<ALS>],
[ACTGAIN=<ACTGAIN>],[STDGAIN=<STDGAIN>],[MAXGAINTH=<MAXGAINTH>],
[MINGAINTH=<MINGAINTH>],[ACTMAXGAINTH=<ACTMAXGAINTH>],
[ACTMINGAINTH=<ACTMINGAINTH>],[AUTOBLCK=<AUTOBLCK>],[RATEDPOWER=<RATEDPOWER>],
[PROWORKBAND=<PROWORKBAND>],[ACTWORKBAND=<ACTWORKBAND>],[SFTH=<SFTH>],
[LOSTH=<LOSTH>],[PWROFFSET=<PWROFFSET>],[ATTEN=<ATTEN>],[MINATTEN=<MINATTEN>],
[MAXATTEN=<MAXATTEN>],[PMDCOEF=<PMDCOEF>],[CDCOEF=<CDCOEF>],
[FIBERTYPE=<FIBERTYPE>],[TXDC=<TXDC>],[RXDC=<RXDC>],[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],
[RLSTARTUPUPTH=<RLSTARTUPUPTH>],[RLSTARTUPDOWNTH=<RLSTARTUPDOWNTH>],
[RLALMUPTH=<RLALMUPTH>],[RLALMDOWNTH=<RLALMDOWNTH>],[RLENABLE=<RLENABLE>],
[WORKMODE=<OAWORKMODE>],[OUTPWR=<OALOCKPWR>],[SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>],
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the WDM access identifier.

The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.

that consists of no more than 64 bytes. Usually it is used to identify
the port name.

on the front panel.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LSRSTATE> Indicates the state of the laser. The valid values are OPEN and
CLOSE.
<ALS> Indicates whether the automatic laser shutdown is enabled. The

<ACTGAIN> Indicates the actual gain of the optical amplifier.

This parameter is only valid for the OA unit.
<STDGAIN> Indicates the standard gain of the optical amplifier. This parameter
is only valid for the OA unit. The unit is 1.0 dB.
<MAXGAINTH> Indicates the maximum threshold of the gain. The unit is 1.0 dB.
<MINGAINTH> Indicates the minimum threshold of the gain. The unit is 1.0 dB.
<ACTMAXGAINTH The actual maximum threshold of the gain. Only for the OA unit.
> The parameter value INVALID indicates that the dispersion
compensation value exceeds the upper limit.
<ACTMINGAINTH> The actual minimum threshold of the gain. Only for the OA unit.
The parameter value INVALID indicates that the dispersion
compensation value exceeds the lower limit.
<AUTOBLCK> Indicates whether to automatically block a port. This parameter is

only valid for RMU cards.
Y: A port is blocked automatically when there are not any optical
cross-connections that pass the port to ensure that the attenuation of
the port is at the maximum.
N: A port is not blocked when there are not any optical cross-
connections that pass the port to ensure that the attenuation of the
port remains unchanged.
<RATEDPOWER> Indicates the rated power of the laser. This parameter only is valid
for the OA unit.
<PROWORKBAND> Indicates the provisioned operating wavelength band type. The

<ACTWORKBAND> Indicates the actual operating wavelength band type. The valid

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<SFTH> Indicates the threshold optical power of the SF (signal fail). This
parameter is only valid for the DCP/OLP unit.
<LOSTH> Indicates the threshold power value of the LOS (Loss of Signal).
<PWROFFSET> Indicates the original power offset between the working port and
protection port. This parameter is only valid for the DCP/OLP unit.
<ATTEN> Indicates the attenuation applied at the interface. The value is

expressed in dBm and is accurate to 0.1 dBm.
<MINATTEN> Indicates the minimum attenuation that can be configured on this

<MAXATTEN> Indicates the maximum attenuation that can be configured on this

<PMDCOEF> Indicates the PMD dispersion coefficient in units of ps/SQRT(km).

This parameter is only valid for the ports on FIU cards and is
determined by the type of the fiber used. This parameter is required
by ASON.
The valid value ranges from 0.00 to 1.00.
<CDCOEF> Indicates the chromatic dispersion coefficient in units of ps/

(nm*km). This parameter is only valid for the ports on FIU cards
and is determined by the type of the fiber used. This parameter is
required by ASON.
<FIBERTYPE> Indicates the fiber type. This parameter is only valid for FIU ports
and must be consistent with the type of fiber used. This parameter
is required by ASON. The valid values are as follows:
G652
LEAF
TW-RS
TW-C
TWPLUS
G653
SMF-LS
G654B
G656
G654A
Tera_light
<TXDC> Indicates the dispersion compensation value in the transmit

direction in units of ps/nm. This parameter is only valid for FIU
ports. This parameter must be consistent with the DCM/DCU
dispersion compensation value in the transmit direction of the
connected FIU port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<RXDC> Indicates the dispersion compensation value in the receive direction

in units of ps/nm. This parameter is only valid for FIU ports. This
parameter must be consistent with the DCM/DCU dispersion
compensation value in the receive direction of the connected FIU
port.
<DELAYTIME> This parameter is only valid for the ports of a protection group.
configured. Switching is not initiated until the delay time is
expended when a malfunction is discovered at a port.
configured.
<RLSTARTUPUPTH The upper threshold of RL (Return Loss) to starting the pump. Only
> for the Raman unit.
<RLSTARTUPDOW The down threshold of RL (Return Loss) to starting the pump. Only
NTH> for the Raman unit.
<RLALMUPTH> The upper threshold of RL (Return Loss) alarm. Only for the Raman
unit.
<RLALMDOWNTH> The down threshold of RL (Return Loss) alarm. Only for the Raman
unit. RLALMDOWNTH <= RLSTARTUPDOWNTH <
RLSTARTUPUPTH <= RLALMUPTH.
<RLENABLE> Enables the RL (Return Loss) check. Range: ENABLE|DISABLE.
<WORKMODE> Indicates the work mode of the amplifier board.The valid value is
LOCKGAIN/LOCKPWR/MAXGAIN/PLLOCKPWR
<OUTPWR> Indicates the work mode of the amplifier board.Only valid if

WORKMODE is LOCKPWR.For the valid value range, see the
reference file..
<SWITCHSTATE> Indicates the state of switching. It is only valid when the port is in
the protection group. The valid values are provided in A.32.3.20
SWITCHSTATE.
<SVTIMER> Indicates the signal validation timer; units are expressed in minutes.
This parameter is only valid if the Auto In-Service feature is
supported. SVTIMER is a string in an HH-MM format.
l MM: minute, which is an integer ranging from 0 to 59. The
maximum timer setting is 48 hours.
<PST> Indicates the primary state of the entity.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-WDM::FAC-1-5-1:D;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-13 10:38:47 M D COMPLD "FAC-1-5-1::PORTMEMO=\"\",SILKSCREEN=TO11/
RI11,LOSTH=-35.0,SVTIMER=00-15:OOS-AU,AINS&SGEO" ;
Related Commands
A.6.26 ED-WDM
A.6.28 RMV-<MOD2>
Removes the port or channel from service and places it into the maintenance state.
Function
This command changes the service state of the specified port (optical or electrical port) to Out
of Service - Maintenance (OOS-MA, MT). There are not any alarms generated for the
corresponding facility and the existing alarms must be cleared after this command is issued. All
conditions that are reported as NR and PM continue to be collected and marked as invalid. This
command is required before the loopback or PRBS test command is issued.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RMV-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>
Command Parameters
Default
<MOD2> OC, OCH, OCn(OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, OC768), STMn NA

(STM1, STM4, STM16, STM64, STM256), OTUn(OTU1,
OTU2, OTU3, OTU5G, OTU4), ODUn (ODU0, ODU1,
ODU2, ODU3, ODU4, ODU5G and ODUflex), OSC, WDM,
EC, CFP, FETH, GETH, XGETH, 40GETH, 100GETH.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<AID> Indicates the access identifier. NA

FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL
ID>
CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
…
Refer to A.32.2.16 OC, A.32.2.17 OCH, A.32.2.18 OCN/
STMN, A.32.2.22 OTUN, A.32.2.23 ODUN and A.32.2.20
OSC for the valid values of <AID> for specific units.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
RMV-OC::FAC-1-4-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.29 RST-<MOD2>
A.6.29 RST-<MOD2>
Restores the port or channel back into service.
Function
This command instructs an NE to restore the facility to service. The entity is changed from a
maintenance state to the original state. Existing alarms are reported.
Usage Note
The WDM-side optical interfaces 1 and 2 have only one laser on the dual fed and selective
receiving unit. A loopback on any of the two interfaces makes the two turn to the loopback state
at the same time. Hence, after the loopback at optical interface 1 is released, modify the state to
IS manually if optical interface 2 is still in the MT or OOS state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Facility
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RST-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>
Command Parameters
<MOD2> OC, OCH, OCn (OC3, OC12, OC48, NA

OC192,OC768), STMn (STM1, STM4, STM16,
STM64,STM256),OTUn (OTU1, OTU2, OTU3,
OTU5G, OTU4), ODUn (ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,
ODU3, ODU4, ODU5G and ODUflex), OSC,
WDM, EC, CFP, FETH, GETH, XGETH,
40GETH, 100GETH.
<AID> Access identifier NA

FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<CHANNEL ID>
CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
…
Refer to A.32.2.16 OC, A.32.2.17 OCH, A.
32.2.18 OCN/STMN, A.32.2.22 OTUN, A.
32.2.23 ODUN and A.32.2.20 OSC for the valid
values of <AID> for specific units.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
RST-OC::FAC-1-4-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.6.28 RMV-<MOD2>
A.6.30 ED-PL
Edits the attributes of the Raman pump laser.
Function
This command modifies the attributes of the Raman pump laser.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-PL:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[LOCKPOWER=<LOCKPOWER>],
[LSRSTATE=<LSRSTATE>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identity. The valid format NA

is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<PATH ID>.
<LOCKPO Indicates the locked power of the pump laser. This NA

WER> parameter only applies to Raman units. The valid value
ranges from 5.0 to 30.0 and -60.0.
<LSRSTAT Indicates the status of the laser. The valid values are CLOSE
E> OPEN and CLOSE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ED-PL::FAC-1-120-1-1:C::: LOCKPOWER=6,LSRSTATE=OPEN;
l Response Message
NE 04-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.31 RTRV-PL
A.6.31 RTRV-PL
Retrieves the attributes of the Raman pump laser.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the Raman pump laser.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PL:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identity. The valid format NA

is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<PATH ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[LSRSTATE=<LSRSTATE>],[LOCKPOWER=<LOCKPOWER>],
[UPLOCKPOWERTH=<UPLOCKPOWERTH>],[DOWNLOCKPOWERTH=<DOWNLOCKPOWERTH>]"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identity. The valid format is FAC-<SHELF
ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<PATH ID>.
<LOCKPOWER Indicates the locked power of the pump laser. This parameter only applies
> to Raman units. The valid value ranges from 5.0 to 30.0,and -60.0.
<UPLOCKPOW Indicates the upper threshold of the <LOCKPOWER>.

ERTH> The parameter is only valid for the Raman unit.
<DOWNLOCKP Indicates the lower threshold of the <LOCKPOWER>.

OWERTH> The parameter is only valid for the Raman unit.
Example
l Command
rtrv-pl::fac-1-127-1-1:c;
l Response Message
NE 2009-01-12 09:17:22
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-127-1-1::LSRSTATE=CLOSE,LOCKPOWER=20.0,UPLOCKPOWERTH=26.1,DOWNLOCKPOWERTH=2
0.0"
;
Related Commands
A.6.30 ED-PL
A.6.32 ED-VCG
Edits the attributes of the VCG facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the VCG facility.
Usage Note
The ED-VCG is used to edit the bandwidth at an inverse multiplexing port of the 10GE card.
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
ED-VCG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::::[<PST>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>-<PORT ID>.
<PST> Indicates the status of the primary state qualifier. NA

The valid values are IS and OOS.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-VCG::CLNT-1-7-1:C::::OOS;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-13 15:33:04
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.6.33 RTRV-VCG
A.6.33 RTRV-VCG
Retrieves the attributes of the VCG facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the VCG facility.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-VCG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>-<PORT ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>::PATHTYPE=<PATHTYPE>,UPPATH=<UPPATH>,DOWNPATH=<DOWNPATH>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr
><lf>
;
Response Parameters
Table A-1 Output parameters
<AID> The valid format is CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
<PATHTYPE> Indicates the path type of VCG. The valid values are ODU1V and
ODU2V.
<UPPATH> Indicates the time slot number in the uplink direction, which is assigned
for the VCG ID. The initial digit of the value is 0 (0 means that the
path is cleared). The VCG member is changed only when it is set.
The value must be consecutive and start from 1. For example, 1&&4.
<DOWNPATH> Indicates the time slot number in the downlink direction, which is
assigned for the VCG ID. The initial digit of the value is 0 (0 means
that the path is cleared). The VCG member is changed only when it is
set.
The value must be consecutive and start from 1. For example, 1&&4.
IS and OOS.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-VCG::CLNT-1-7-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-13 15:33:04
M C COMPLD
"CLNT-1-7-1::PATHTYPE=ODU2V,UPPATH=1&&4,DOWNPATH=1&&4,:OOS-AUMA,SGEO"
;
Related Commands
A.6.32 ED-VCG
A.6.34 ACT-CFG-TEMP
Sets service packages.
Function
This command sets service packages for a board.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ACT-CFG-TEMP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[TEMPNAME=<TEMPNAME>],
[ADDXCFLG=<ADDXCFLG>];
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>. NA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<TEMPNA Indicates the name of a service package. The valid values N

ME> are as follows:
l OC48-ODU1: service package that enables 4 x
STM-16 or 8 x STM-16 services on a tributary board
to be encapsulated into ODU1 services.
l GE-ODU0: service package that enables 8 x GE or 16
x GE services to be encapsulated into ODU0 services.
l OC3-OTU1: service package that enables 7 x STM-1
services on a tributary-line board to be encapsulated
into ODU1 services.
l FE-ODU0-OTU1: service package that enables 7 x FE
services on a tributary-line board to be encapsulated
into ODU0 services.
l OTU1-OTU1: service package that enables 4 x OTU1
services to be regenerated.
l OTU1-ANY-ODU0-ODU1: service package that
enables 4 x OTU1 services on a tributary board to be
encapsulated into ODU1_ODU0 services.
<ADDXCFL Indicates whether cross-connections are automatically N

G> added. The valid values are as follows:
l XC: Cross-connections are automatically added.
l NOXC: Cross-connections are not automatically
added.
Response Syntax
Example
l Command
ACT-CFG-TEMP::FAC-1-1:D:::TEMPNAME=GE-ODU0-NONAGGR,ADDXCFLG=XC;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18 M C COMPLD ;
Related Commands
None
A.6.35 RTRV-PWR
Queries the optical power.
Function
This command queries the optical power of an optical port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PWR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^COMPLD<cr><lf> ^^^"<AID>::[OPR=<OPR>],
[OPT=<OPT>]"<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
<OPR> Indicates the input optical power of the current optical port.
<OPT> Indicates the output optical power of the current optical port.
Example
l Command
RTRV-PWR::FAC-1-1-2:D;
l Response Message
NE-91-7 2011-01-22 11:57:11 M D COMPLD "FAC-1-1-2::OPR=-2.2" ;
Related Commands
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.6.36 RTRV-OPMOD
Retrieves the type of the optical module.
Function
This command retrieves the type of the optical module.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-OPMOD:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> Indicates the AID of an optical port. NA

<PORT ID>
Response Syntax
(^^^"<AID>::INBAND=<INBANDNOISE>"<cr><lf>)+
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the AID of an optical port.

The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
<NAME> Indicates the type of the optical module.
Example
l Command

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
RTRV-OPMOD::FAC-1-2-4:C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18 M C COMPLD "FAC-1-2-4::NAME=TN11RAU1" ;
Related Commands
None
A.7 Configuring Fiber

This section lists the commands used to configure and retrieve logical fiber connections between
NEs.
A.7.1 ENT-FIBER
Creates a logical fiber connection.
Function
This command creates a logical fiber connection between cards. The fiber connection is
directional
Usage Note
The source or sink port must be on the local NE.
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-FIBER:[<TID>]:<SRCPORT>,<DSTPORT>:<CTAG>:::[SRCTID=<SRCTID>,]
[DSTTID=<DSTTID>];
Command Parameters
<SRCPORT> Indicates the source port from which the fiber is NA

connected.
<PORT ID>.
FIBER.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<DSTPORT> Indicates the destination port to which the fiber is NA

connected.
<PORT ID>.
FIBER.
<SRCTID> Indicates the source TID of the NE from which the fiber NA
is connected. If nothing is entered for this parameter, it
indicates that the source NE of the fiber connection to
be created is the local NE.
<DSTTID> Indicates the destination TID of the NE to which the NA

fiber is connected. If nothing is entered for this
parameter, it indicates that the destination NE of the
fiber connection to be created is the local NE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Example
l Command
ENT-FIBER::FAC-1-13-1,FAC-1-13-1:C:::SRCTID=NE23,DSTTID=NE26;
l Response Message
NE714 2009-09-21 10:58:17
M C COMPLD
Related Commands
A.7.2 DLT-FIBER
A.7.3 RTRV-FIBER
A.7.2 DLT-FIBER
Deletes a logical fiber connection.
Function
This command deletes a logical fiber connection between cards. The fiber connection is
directional.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-FIBER:[<TID>]:<SRCPORT>,<DSTPORT>:<CTAG>:::[SRCTID=<SRCTID>,]
[DSTTID=<DSTTID>];
Command Parameters
<SRCPORT Indicates the source port from which the fiber is NA

> connected.
<PORT ID>.
FIBER.
<DSTPORT Indicates the destination port to which the fiber is NA

> connected.
<PORT ID>.
FIBER.
<SRCTID> Indicates the source TID of the NE from which the fiber NA
indicates that the source NE of the fiber connection to be
deleted is the local NE.
<DSTTID> Indicates the destination TID of the NE to which the fiber NA

indicates that the destination NE of the fiber connection
to be deleted is the local NE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
Example
l Command
DLT-FIBER::FAC-3-9-1,FAC-2-11-1:C:::SRCTID=NE1,DSTTID=NE2;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE714 2009-09-21 10:58:29

M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.7.1 ENT-FIBER
A.7.3 RTRV-FIBER
A.7.3 RTRV-FIBER
Retrieves information about the logical fiber connection.
Function
This command retrieves information about the logical fiber connection.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-FIBER:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
AID Indicates the access identifier. The valid format is ALL

FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
This parameter can be set to ALL. <PORT ID> can be
ALL to retrieve information about all fiber connections
to FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
Response Syntax
^^^"<SRCPORT>,<DSTPORT>::SRCTID=<SRCTID>,DSTTID=<DSTTID>;" ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<SRCPORT> Indicates the source port from which the fiber is connected.
<DSTPORT> Indicates the destination port to which the fiber is connected.

<SRCTID> Indicates the source TID of the NE from which the fiber is connected.
<DSTTID> Indicates the destination TID of the NE to which the fiber is connected.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FIBER:::C;
l Response Message
NE714 2009-09-21 10:58:27 M C COMPLD
"FAC-2-3-1,FAC-3-2-1::SRCTID=NE1,DSTTID=NE2" ;
Related Commands
A.7.2 DLT-FIBER
A.7.1 ENT-FIBER
A.7.4 ENT-WMU-CONN
Creates the monitoring mapping for the wavelengths between the WMU and OTU.
Function
This command creates the monitoring mapping for the wavelengths between the WMU and
OTU.
Users need to create monitoring mapping for the wavelengths between the WMU and OTU by
running this command when logical connections between the WMU and OTU cannot be learnt
based on the existing fiber connection configuration (for example, no fiber connections are
created or inter-NE fiber connections exist).
When the NE can determine the logical connections between the WMU and OTU, it neglects
the monitoring mapping for the wavelengths between the WMU and OTU created by users.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-WMU-CONN:[<TID>]:<WMUPORT>,<OTUPORT>:<CTAG>:::
[OTUNE=<OTUNE>];
Command Parameters
<WMUPORT> Indicates a port on the WMU. The value format is NA

FAC-<SHLEF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
<OTUNE> Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the NA

OTU is located. If nothing is entered for this
parameter, it indicates that the NE where the OTU
is located is the local NE.
The valid value is a string of less than or equal to 20
characters which is composed of letters, digits and
hyphens. The string should begin with a letter and
cannot end with a hyphen.
<OTUPORT> Indicates a port on the OTU. The value format is NA

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-WMU-CONN::FAC-2-3-1,FAC-1-2-1:C:::OTUNE=NE01
l Response Message
NE 1990-01-01 15:00:00
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.7.5 DLT-WMU-CONN
A.7.6 RTRV-WMU-CONN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.7.5 DLT-WMU-CONN
Deletes a monitoring mapping for the wavelengths between the WMU and OTU.
Function
This command deletes a monitoring mapping for the wavelengths between the WMU and OTU.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-WMU-CONN:[<TID>]:<WMUPORT>,<OTUPORT>:<CTAG>:::
[OTUNE=<OTUNE>];
Command Parameters
<WMUPORT> Indicates a port on the WMU. The valid format is NA

<OTUNE> Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the NA

OTU is located. If nothing is entered for this
parameter, it indicates that the NE where the OTU
is located is the local NE.
The valid value is a string of less than or equal to
20 characters which is composed of letters, digits
and hyphens. The string should begin with a letter
and cannot end with a hyphen.
<OTUPORT> Indicates a port on the OTU. The valid format is NA

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-WMU-CONN::FAC-2-3-1,FAC-1-2-1:C
l Response Message
NE 1990-01-01 15:00:00
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.7.4 ENT-WMU-CONN
A.7.6 RTRV-WMU-CONN
A.7.6 RTRV-WMU-CONN
Retrieves the monitoring mapping for the wavelengths between the WMU and the OTU.
Function
This command retrieves the monitoring mapping for the wavelengths between the WMU and
the OTU.
If a port number of the WMU is entered in the command, the system retrieves all the monitoring
mapping for the wavelengths between the port on the WMU and the ports/channels on the OTU
and returns the values in separate records.
If a port/channel number is entered in the command, the system retrieves the monitoring mapping
for the wavelengths between the port/channel on the OTU and the corresponding port on the
WMU.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-WMU-CONN:<TID>:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::[OTUNE=<OTUNE>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier. It can represent either a NA

port on the WMU or a port on the OTU. The valid
format is FAC-<SHLEF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>.
<OTUNE> Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the OTU NA
is located. If nothing is entered for this parameter, it
indicates that the NE where the OTU is located is the
local NE.
characters, which is composed of letters, digits and
hyphens. The string should begin with a letter and
cannot end with a hyphen.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
(^^^"<WMUPORT>,<OTUPORT>:::OTUNE=<OTUNE>" <cr><If>)
;
Response Parameters
<WMUPORT> Indicates a port on the WMU. The valid format is FAC-

<SHLEF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
<OTUNE> Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the OTU is
located.
characters, which is composed of letters, digits and hyphens.
The string should begin with a letter and cannot end with a
hyphen.
<OTUPORT> Indicates a port on the OTU. The valid format is FAC-

<SHLEF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
Example
l Command
RTRV-WMU-CONN::FAC-2-2-1:C
l Response Message
NE 2005-01-01 01:01:00
M C COMPLD
"FAC-2-2-1,FAC-3-2-1:::OTUNE=NE-8;"
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.7.4 ENT-WMU-CONN
A.7.5 DLT-WMU-CONN
A.8 Configuring Cross-Connections

This section lists the commands used to configure cross-connections.
A.8.1 Configuring OXC

This section lists the commands used to configure an OXC.
A.8.1.1 ENT-PXC-OCH
Creates a cross-connection (OCH).
Function
This command creates an OCH layer cross-connection.
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-PXC-OCH:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>::[<CCT>],[<CRSTYPE>]:
[BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>],WVNUM=<WVNUM>,[OPAMODE=<OPAMODE>],
[CONSTR=<CONSTR>][CKTID=<CKTID>]:,[<SST>];
Command Parameters
<FROM> Indicates the source of the cross-connection. NA

ID>-<PORT ID>.
<TO> Indicates the sink of the cross-connection. NA

ID>-<PORT ID>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<CCT> Indicates the cross-connection type. The valid 2WAY

values are 2WAY (bidirectional) and 1WAY
(unidirectional).
l The cross-connection of the INTRA must be
unidirectional.
l The cross-connection of the E2E can be either
unidirectional or bidirectional.
<CRSTYPE> Indicates the cross-connection type. The valid E2E

l E2E: indicates that the connection is end-to-
end.
l INTRA: indicates that the cross-connection is
only within a unit.
<BANDTYPE> Indicates the type of the wave band. The default and CBAND
only available value for this parameter is CBAND.
<WVNUM> Indicates the number of the wavelength channels. NA
<OPAMODE> Indicates the optical power adjustment mode. The AUTO

valid values are MAN and AUTO.
NOTE
This parameter can be empty when CRSTYPE is set to
INTRA.
<CONSTR> Specifies one or more constraint ports. If more than NULL

one constraint port exists, separate them with the
mark (&).
ID>-<PORT ID>.
<CKTID> Indicates the circuit identification. It is a string of NULL

no more than 32 ASCII characters. The circuit
identification parameter contains the common
language circuit ID or alias of the circuit being
provisioned.
<SST> Indicates the red-lined state. The valid values are RDLD-DEA
shown in section A.32.3.17 SST_STATE.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ENT-PXC-OCH::FAC-1-1-1,FAC-1-4-1:C::2WAY,E2E:WVNUM=1,CKTID=A1:,RDLD;
l Response Message
NE 2008-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.8.1.3 DLT-PXC-OCH
A.8.1.2 ED-PXC-OCH
A.8.1.4 RTRV-PXC-OCH
A.8.1.2 ED-PXC-OCH
Edits a cross-connection (OCH).
Function
This command modifies an OCH layer cross-connection.
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-PXC-OCH:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>:::
[BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>],WVNUM=<WVNUM>,
[DSTBANDTYPE=<DSTBANDTYPE>],[DSTWVNUM=<DSTWVNUM>],
[OPAMODE=<OPAMODE>,][CKTID=<CKTID>]:,[<SST>];
Command Parameters
Paramete
rs Description Default Value

<PORT ID>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Paramete

<PORT ID>.
<BANDT Indicates the type of the wave band. The default and CBAND
YPE> only available value for this parameter is CBAND.
<WVNU Indicates the number of the wavelength channels. NA

M>
<DSTBA Indicates the type of the band to which the sink CBAND
NDTYPE wavelength belongs.
>
<DSTWV Indicates the number of the sink wavelength. NA

NUM>
<OPAMO Indicates the optical power adjustment mode. The valid NA

DE> values are MAN and AUTO.
<CKTID> Indicates the circuit identification. It is a string of no NA

more than 32 ASCII characters. The circuit
provisioned.
<SST> Indicates the red-lined state. The valid states are NA

provided in section A.32.3.17 SST_STATE.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-PXC-OCH::FAC-1-1-1,FAC-1-4-1:C:::WVNUM=1,CKTID=A1:,RDLD;
l Response Message
NE 2008-09-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.8.1.3 DLT-PXC-OCH
A.8.1.1 ENT-PXC-OCH

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.8.1.3 DLT-PXC-OCH
Deletes a cross-connection (OCH).
Function
This command deletes an OCH layer cross-connection.
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-PXC-OCH:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>::[<CRSTYPE>]:
[DSTBANDTYPE=<DSTBANDTYPE>],[DSTWVNUM=<DSTWVNUM>],
[INCL=<INCL>];
Command Parameters

<PORT ID>.

<PORT ID>.
<CRSTYPE Indicates the cross-connection type. The valid values E2E

> are as follows:
l E2E: indicates that the connection is end-to-end.
l INTRA: indicates that the cross-connection is only
within a unit.
<BANDTY Indicates the type of the wavelength band. The default CBAND
PE> and only available value for this parameter is
CBAND.
<WVNUM Indicates the number of the wavelength channels. NA

>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<DSTBAN Indicates the type of the band to which the sink CBAND
DTYPE> wavelength belongs.
<DSTWVN Indicates the number of the sink wavelength. NA

UM>
<INCL> Indicates inclusive. The valid values are as follows: N

l Y: indicates that the requested channel is
disconnected regardless of its red-lined state.
l N: indicates that the status of the cross-connection
is considered to determine whether the requested
channel should be disconnected.
NOTE
A red-lined connection can be deleted only when <INCL>
is set to Y.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-PXC-OCH:FAC-1-1-1,FAC-1-4-1:100::WVNUM=1,INCL=Y;
l Response Message
NE 2008-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.8.1.1 ENT-PXC-OCH
A.8.1.2 ED-PXC-OCH
Retrieves information on a cross-connection (OCH).
Function
This command retrieves the information on an OCH layer cross-connection.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PXC-OCH:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::[BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>],
[WVNUM=<WVNUM>],[DSTBANDTYPE=<DSTBANDTYPE>],
[DSTWVNUM=<DSTWVNUM>];
Command Parameters
Paramete
<AID> Indicates the access identifier. It can be the source or NA

sink of the cross-connection, or any path of the source
or sink. It can be null. If nothing is entered, all the cross-
connections with the entered rate level with be
retrieved. The symbols"&" and "&&" are supported.
<PORT ID>.
<BANDT Indicates the type of the wave band. The default and CBAND
YPE> only available value for this parameter is CBAND.
<WVNU Indicates the number of the wavelength channels. NA

M>
<DSTBA Indicates the type of the band to which the sink CBAND
NDTYPE wavelength belongs.
>
<DSTWV Indicates the number of the sink wavelength. NA

NUM>
Response Syntax
("<FROM>,<TO>:<CCT>,<CRSTYPE>:BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>,WVNUM=<WVNUM>,
[DSTBANDTYPE=<DSTBANDTYPE>,DSTWVNUM=<DSTWVNUM>],OPAMODE=<OPAMODE>,WV=<WV>,
[DSTWV=<DSTWV>],CKTID=<CKTID>:,<SST>" <cr><lf>)+ ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<FROM> Indicates the source of the cross-connection.

The valid format is: FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>
<TO> Indicates the sink of the cross-connection.

The valid format is: FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>
<CCT> Indicates the type of the cross-connection. The valid values are as
follows:
l 2WAY: indicates that the cross-connection is bidirectional.
l 1WAY: indicates that the cross-connection is unidirectional.
<CRSTYPE> Indicates the cross-connection type. The valid values are as

follows:
l E2E: indicates that the cross-connection is end-to-end.
l INTRA: indicates that the cross-connection is only within a
unit.
<BANDTYPE> Indicates the type of the wave band. The default and only available
value for this parameter is CBAND.
<WVNUM> Indicates the number of the wavelength channels.
<DSTBANDTYPE> Indicates the type of the band to which the sink wavelength
belongs.
<DSTWVNUM> Indicates the number of the sink wavelength.
<OPAMODE> Indicates the optical power adjustment mode. The valid value is
either MAN or AUTO.
NOTE
This parameter is displayed for E2E type cross-connections.
<WV> Indicates the wavelength information of the optical channel. The

valid format is frequency/wavelength: xxxxTHz/xxxnm.
<DSTWV> Indicates the information about the sink wavelength.
<CKTID> Indicates the circuit identification. It is a string of no more than

32 ASCII characters. The circuit identification parameter contains
the common language circuit ID or alias of the circuit being
provisioned.
<SST> Indicates the red-lined state.

l If the cross-connection is RDLD-DEA, the SST will not be
displayed.
l If the cross-connection is RDLD, the SST will be displayed as
RDLD.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-PXC-OCH:::c;
l Response Message
NE 2009-01-16 08:21:44 M C COMPLD
"FAC-2-10-1,FAC-2-10-4:1WAY,INTRA:BANDTYPE=CBAND,WVNUM=4,
DSTBANDTYPE=CBAND,DSTWVNUM=78,WV=195.90THz/1530.33nm, DSTWV=192.20THz/1559.79nm "
"FAC-2-14-1,FAC-2-1-1:1WAY,E2E:BANDTYPE=CBAND,WVNUM=78,
DSTBANDTYPE=CBAND,DSTWVNUM=2,OPAMODE=AUTO,WV=192.20THz/1559.79nm, DSTWV=196.00THz/
1529.55nm " ;
Related Commands
A.8.1.3 DLT-PXC-OCH
A.8.1.2 ED-PXC-OCH
A.8.1.1 ENT-PXC-OCH
A.8.1.5 RTRV-PXCINFO-OCH
Retrieves information on a cross-connection information (OCH).
Function
This command queries the sub-cross-connections in an end-to-end optical cross-connection.
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross connection
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PXCINFO-OCH:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>:::
[DSTBANDTYPE=<DSTBANDTYPE>],[DSTWVNUM=<DSTWVNUM>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<FROM> Indicates the slot number and port number of the NA

source units.
ID>-<PORT ID>.
<TO> Indicates the slot number and port number of the NA

sink units.
ID>-<PORT ID>.
<BANDTYPE> Indicates the type of the wave band. The default CBAND
and only available value for this parameter is
CBAND.
<WVNUM> Indicates the number of the wavelength channels. NA
<DSTBANDTYP Indicates the type of the band to which the sink CBAND
E> wavelength belongs.
<DSTWVNUM> Indicates the number of the sink wavelength. NA
Response Syntax
("<FROM>,<TO>:<CCT>,<CRSTYPE>:BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>,WVNUM=<WVNUM>,
[DSTBANDTYPE=<DSTBANDTYPE>,DSTWVNUM=<DSTWVNUM>];" <cr><lf>)+ ;
Response Parameters
<FROM> Indicates the source of the cross-connection


<CCT> Indicates the type of the cross-connection. The valid values are
2WAY and 1WAY.
<CRSTYPE> Indicates the cross-connection type. The values are E2E and
INTRA. INTRA is the only valid cross-connection type for this
scenario.
<BANDTYPE> Indicates the type of the wave band. The default and only available
value for this parameter is CBAND.
<WVNUM> Indicates the number of the wavelength channels.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<DSTBANDTYPE> Indicates the type of the band to which the sink wavelength
belongs.
<DSTWVNUM> Indicates the number of the sink wavelength.
Example
l Command
RTRV-PXCINFO-OCH::FAC-2-14-1,FAC-2-1-1:C:::wvnum=78;
l Response Message
NE 2009-01-16 08:23:19 M C COMPLD
"FAC-2-16-1,FAC-2-16-4:1WAY,INTRA:BANDTYPE=CBAND,WVNUM=78"
"FAC-2-1-3,FAC-2-1-1:1WAY,INTRA:BANDTYPE=CBAND,WVNUM=78" ;
Related Commands
A.8.1.6 RTRV-PXC-WASTAGE
Queries the line insertion loss that is set.
Function
This command queries the line insertion loss that is set.
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PXC-WASTAGE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::LOCAID=<LOCAID>,
[SRCNE=<SRCNE>],[DSTNE=<DSTNE>],[OTHAID=<OTHAID>],
[PXCDATA=<PXCDATA>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Paramete
<LOCAI Indicates the optical port number of the local NE for NA

D> which the insertion loss is set.
<PORT ID>.
<SRCNE Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the NA

> source OCh is located
<DSTNE Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the sink NA
> OCh is located
<OTHAI Indicates the optical port number of the peer NE. NA

D>
<PXCDA Indicates the insertion loss. NA

TA>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^COMPLD<cr><lf> ("LOCAID=<LOCAID>,
[SRCNE=<SRCNE>,DSTNE=<DSTNE>],OTHAID=<OTHAID>,PXCDATA=<PXCDATA>" <cr><lf>)+ ;
Response Parameters
<LOCAID> Indicates the optical port number of the local NE for which the
insertion loss is set.
<SRCNE> Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the source OCh is
located
<DSTNE> Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the sink OCh is
located
<OTHAID> Indicates the optical port number of the peer NE.
<PXCDATA> Indicates the insertion loss.
Example
l Command
RTRV-PXC-WASTAGE:::c;
l Response Message
NE 2009-01-16 08:21:44 M C COMPLD
"FAC-2-10-1,FAC-2-10-4:1WAY,INTRA:BANDTYPE=CBAND,WVNUM=4,
DSTBANDTYPE=CBAND,DSTWVNUM=78,WV=195.90THz/1530.33nm, DSTWV=192.20THz/1559.79nm "

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"FAC-2-14-1,FAC-2-1-1:1WAY,E2E:BANDTYPE=CBAND,WVNUM=78,
DSTBANDTYPE=CBAND,DSTWVNUM=2,OPAMODE=AUTO,WV=192.20THz/1559.79nm, DSTWV=196.00THz/
1529.55nm " ;
Related Commands
A.8.1.7 DLT-PXC-WASTAGE
A.8.1.8 ED-PXC-WASTAGE
Deletes the insertion loss.
Function
This command deletes the insertion loss.
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
RTRV-PXC-WASTAGE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::LOCAID=<LOCAID>,
[SRCNE=<SRCNE>],[DSTNE=<DSTNE>],[OTHAID=<OTHAID>],
[PXCDATA=<PXCDATA>];
Command Parameters
<LOCAID> Indicates the optical port number of the local NE for NA

which the insertion loss is set.
<PORT ID>.
<SRCNE> Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the NA

source OCH is located
<DSTNE> Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the NA

sink OCH is located
<OTHAID> Indicates the optical port number of the peer NE. NA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PXCDAT Indicates the insertion loss. NA

A>
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-PXC-
WASTAGE:::C:::LOCAID=FAC-1-1-1&FAC-1-3-1&FAC-1-5-1,SRCNE=NE2,OTHAID=FAC-1-2-1,PXCD
ATA=\"WVTOTAL=1,WVNUM=4;
l Response Message
NE 2008-03-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
Sets the insertion loss.
Function
This command sets the insertion loss.
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-PXC-WASTAGE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::LOCAID=<LOCAID>,[SRCNE=<SRCNE>],
[DSTNE=<DSTNE>],[OTHAID=<OTHAID>],[PXCDATA=<PXCDATA>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Paramete
<LOCAI Indicates the optical port number of the local NE for NA

D> which the insertion loss is set.
<PORT ID>.
<SRCNE Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the NA

> source OCh is located
<DSTNE Indicates the name of the TID of the NE where the sink NA
> OCh is located
<OTHAI Indicates the optical port number of the peer NE. NA

D>
<PXCDA Indicates the insertion loss. NA

TA>
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-PXC-
WASTAGE:::C:::LOCAID=FAC-1-1-1&FAC-1-3-1&FAC-1-5-1,SRCNE=NE2,OTHAID=FAC-1-2-1,PXCD
ATA=\"WVTOTAL=1,WVNUM=4,WASTAGE=3;
l Response Message
NE 2008-09-04 15:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.8.1.9 ED-OXC-NEPORT
Edits the edge port of an NE.
Function
When creating an end-to-end optical cross-connection, users must run this command at the
source and sink interfaces of all units except the OTU and the FIU unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross Connection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-OXC-NEPORT:[<TID>]:<AID>:CTAG:::[IN=<IN>],[OUT=<OUT>],
[MARK=<MARK>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier of the port. NA

The valid format is: FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<PORT ID>
<IN> Indicates the attribute of the input edge port. The ENABLE
This parameter must be set to ENABLE if the AID
port is the source interface when users create an end-
to-end optical cross-connection.
<OUT> Indicates the attribute of the output edge port. The ENABLE
This parameter must be set to ENABLE if the AID
port is the sink interface when users create an end-
to-end optical cross-connection.
<MARK> Indicates the memo information of the protection NULL

group. It is a string with no more than 64 characters.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-OXC-NEPORT::FAC-1-3-1:C:::IN=ENABLE,OUT=DISABLE;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.8.1.10 RTRV-OXC-NEPORT
A.8.1.10 RTRV-OXC-NEPORT
Retrieves the edge port of an NE.
Function
This command instructs the NE to retrieve the edge port status of the optical cross-connection.
Usage Note
The optical interface will not be displayed if the attribute of the edge ports IN and OUT are on
the same optical interface.
Category
Cross Connection
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-OXC-NEPORT:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Value
<AID> Indicates the access identifier of the port. NA

<PORT ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.25 PORT for the valid values of <AID> for
specific units.
The PORT parameter supports ALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>::IN=<IN>,OUT=<OUT>,[MARK=<MARK>];"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier of the port.

<IN> Indicates the attribute of the edge port IN. The valid values are
ENABLE and DISABLE.
<OUT> Indicates the attribute of the edge port OUT. The valid values are
ENABLE and DISABLE.
<MARK> Indicates the memo information of the protection group. It is a string

with no more than 64 characters.
Example
l Command
RTRV-OXC-NEPORT:::C
RTRV-OXC-NEPORT::FAC-1-3-ALL:C
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-3-1::IN=ENABLE,OUT=DISABLE"
;
Related Commands
A.8.1.9 ED-OXC-NEPORT
A.8.1.11 RTRV-OCCUP-WAVE
Queries reserved wavelength resources at the optical layer.
Function
This command queries the wavelength resources reserved for ASON services. In scenarios with
a revertive ASON service, the original trail or wavelength is reserved for restoration when the
service is rerouted. The reserved wavelength cannot be used to carry a static service.
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-OCCUP-WAVE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the number of a port on the FIU. NA

The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-
Response Syntax
(^^^"<AID>::BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>,WV=<WV>,OCCUP=<OCCUP>"<cr><lf>)+
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the number of a reserved wavelength at the specified port on

the FIU. The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>-<CHANNEL ID>.
<BANDTYPE> Indicates the band of the port. The valid values is CBAND.
<WV> Indicates the information about the wavelength specified by <AID>.

The valid format is frequency/wavelength: xxxxTHz/xxxnm.
<OCCUP> Indicates whether the wavelength is reserved by ASON. The valid

values are Y and N.
Y: indicates that the wavelength is reserved.
N: indicates that the wavelength is not reserved.
Example
l Command
RTRV-OCCUP-WAVE::FAC-1-8-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2009-11-11 20:37:10
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-8-1-1::BANDTYPE=CBAND,WV=196.05THz/1529.16nm,OCCUP=Y"
;
Related Commands
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.8.2 Configuring EXC

This section lists the commands used to configure an EXC.
A.8.2.1 ENT-CRS-<MOD2>
Creates a cross-connection.
Function
This command creates an electrical layer cross-connection.
The symbol "&" can be used in the AID field of this command to indicate multiple objects.
l The following command is used to create a common one-way cross-connection from point
F1 to point T1.
ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1,T1:<CTAG>::1WAY;
l The following command is used to create a common two-way cross-connection from point
F1 to point T1.
ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1,T1:<CTAG>::2WAY;
l The following command is used to create a one-way selector from points F1&F2 to point
T1.
ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1:<CTAG>::SNCPTYPE=<SNCPTYPE>
[,OTNLEVEL=<OTNLEVEL>],1WAY;
l The following command is used to create SNCP (a one-way selector and one-way bridge)
from points F1&F2 to point T1. (Either of the two commands can be used.)
– ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1:<CTAG>::SNCPTYPE=<SNCPTYPE>
– ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:T1,F1&F2:<CTAG>::SNCPTYPE=<SNCPTYPE>
l The following command is used to create two one-way selectors, one from points F1&F2
to point T1 and the other from points F1&F2 to point T2.
ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1&T2:<CTAG>::SNCPTYPE=<SNCPTYPE>
l The following command is used to create broadcast from point F1 to points
T1&T2&T3&T4.
ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1,T1&T2&T3&T4:<CTAG>::1WAY;
l The following command is used to interconnect two SNCP cross-connections from points
F1&F2 to points T1&T2.
ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1&T2:<CTAG>::SNCPTYPE=<SNCPTYPE>
l If there is one common one-way cross-connection from F1 to T1, the following command
will convert it to a one-way selector; the preferred path is F1.
ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F2,T1:<CTAG>::SNCPTYPE=<SNCPTYPE>
l If there is one common two-way cross-connection from F1 to T1, the following command
will convert it to SNCP; the preferred path is F1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F2,T1:<CTAG>::SNCPTYPE=<SNCPTYPE>
Usage Note
When an SNCP cross-connection is created, the path presented by the first AID is configured
to be the preferred path by default. For example, the AID (F1) of the cross-connection (created
by ENT-CRS-ODU1::F1&F2,T1:123;) is the preferred path. The user can also set the preferred
path by using parameter <PREFERREDPATH>.
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>::[<CCT>]:[TS=<TS>],
[PLDRATE=<PLDRATE>],[PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>],[SNCPTYPE=<SNCPTYPE>]
[,OTNLEVEL=<OTNLEVEL>][,PREFERREDPATH=<PREFERREDPATH>]
[,RVRTV=<RVRTV>][,RVTM=<RVTM>][,SDFLAG=<SDFLAG][,CKTID=<CKTID>]:,
[<SST>];
Command Parameters
Paramete
<MOD2> The <MOD2> includes ODUn, OTUn, and STSn. For NA

other <MOD2> values, see the service type parameter
in A.6.8 ED-CLNT.
<FROM> Indicates the source AID. This parameter supports "&" NA

and is used to create an SNCP group.
It can be null. If nothing is entered, all the cross-
connections with the entered rate level with be
retrieved. The symbol "&" is allowed.
The valid format of <FROM> depends on the level of
the electrical cross-connection which is specified by
<MOD2>. For example, if <MOD2> is STS3, refer to
A.32.2.18 OCN/STMN for the valid format
corresponding to the desired unit; if <MOD2> is
FC200, refer to A.32.2.9 FCMOD2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Paramete
<TO> Indicates the sink AID. This parameter supports "&" NA

and is used to create an SNCP group.
Multiple '&' and '&&' are allowed when creating a 1-
to-N one-way cross-connection. In most cases, only
one "&" is allowed. The value for <TO> cannot be null.
The valid format of <TO> depends on the level of the
electrical cross-connection which is specified by
<MOD2>. For example, if <MOD2> is STS3, refer to
corresponding to the desired unit; if <MOD2> is
<CCT> Indicates the cross-connection type. The valid values 2WAY

are as follows:
l 2WAY: Bidirectional
l 1WAY: Unidirectional
<TS> Indicates the bandwidth occupied by the ODUflex 0

service when the ODUflex service is configured. This
parameter is unavailable for other service types.
<PLDRA Indicates the rate of a channel service and is valid only NA

TE> when ODUflex services are configured on the channel.
<PLDTY Indicates the type of a channel service and is valid only NA

PE> when ODUflex services are configured on the channel.
<SNCPT Indicates an SNCP protection type. The valid values NA

YPE> are as follows:
l swsncp: SW SNCP protection
l snci: SNC/I
l sncn: SNC/N
l sncs: SNC/S
Users can specify this parameter only when creating or
changing the current protection group to an SNCP
group.
<OTNLE Indicates the monitoring layer of SNCP. NA

VEL> Users can input a value for this parameter only when
the type of SNCP is SNCS or SNCN.
l SNC/S: TCM1-TCM6
l SNC/N: PM, TCM1-TCM6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Paramete
<PREFER Indicates the preferred path. <PREFERREDPATH> is For common cross-

REDPAT only supplied for SNCP. Two values separated by "&" connections: NA
H> are only applicable to SNCP with 2 sources or 2 For cross-connections
destinations. within an SNCP
This value can only be specified for cross-connections group: the AID of F1
within an SNCP group. (mentioned in the
foregoing Function.)
<RVRTV Indicates the revertive mode which only applies to N

> SNCP. The valid values are Y and N.
<RVTM> Indicates the revertive time expressed in minutes. The 5

valid value ranges from 5 to 12.
<SDFLA This parameter is only available for SNCP. DISABLE

G> Indicates whether SD is enabled as the trigger condition
of a protection switching.
The valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
<CKTID> Indicates the circuit identification. It is a string of no NULL

more than 32 ASCII characters. The circuit
provisioned.
<SST> Indicates the red-lined state. The valid states are RDLD-DEA
provided in section A.32.3.17 SST_STATE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<SID>^<YYYY-MM-DD>^<HH:MM:SS> <cr><lf> M^^<CTAG>^COMPLD <cr><lf> ;
Example
l Command
ENT-CRS-ODU1::CLNT-1-7-1,SRV2-1-3-1:C::2WAY:CKTID=A1:,RDLD;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.8.2.2 ED-CRS-<MOD2>
A.8.2.3 DLT-CRS-<MOD2>
A.8.2.4 RTRV-CRS-<MOD2>
Edits a cross-connection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command edits the attributes of an electrical layer cross-connection.
l The symbol "&" can be used in the AID field of this command to indicate multiple objects.
l The AIDs must be in the same order as originally entered for the one-way cross-
connections. Either order will work for the two-way cross-connections.
l The AID format in the command is the same as the AID format in the retrieved response
message. For example, if the output of any retrieved AID is "F1&F2,T1:CCT", a command
with the AID format (F1&F2,T1) is required to edit this cross-connection.
l The following command is used to edit the name of the specified cross-connection.
ED-CRS-<MOD2>::F1,T1:<CTAG>:::CKTID=FISTONE;
l The following command is used to edit the red-lined state of the specified cross-connection.
ED-CRS-<MOD2>::F1,T1:<CTAG>::::,RDLD-DEA;
Usage Note
This command edits the preferred path when the switching state is not idle to ensure that the
future automatic switching is performed successfully.
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>::: [OTNLEVEL=<OTNLEVEL>,]
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>,][RVTM=<RVTM>,][SDFLAG=<SDFLAG>,][CKTID=<CKTID>]:,
[<SST>];
Command Parameters
Paramete Default
rs Description Value
<MOD2> The <MOD2> includes ODUn, OTUn, STSn, etc. For other NA
<MOD2> values, see the service type parameter in A.6.8 ED-
CLNT.
<FROM> Indicates the source of the cross-connection or any path of the NA

source or sink.
The valid format of <FROM> depends on the level of the
electrical cross-connection which is specified by <MOD2>.
For example, if the <MOD2> is STS3, refer to A.32.2.18 OCN/
STMN for the valid format corresponding to the desired unit;
if the <MOD2> is FC200, refer to A.32.2.9 FCMOD2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Paramete Default
rs Description Value

The valid format of <TO> depends on the level of the electrical
cross-connection which is specified by <MOD2>. For
example, if the <MOD2> is STS3, refer to A.32.2.18 OCN/
STMN for the valid format corresponding to the desired unit;
if the <MOD2> is FC200, refer to A.32.2.9 FCMOD2.
<OTNLE Indicates the monitoring layer of SNCP. NA

VEL> This parameter is available only when the type of SNCP is
SNCS or SNCN.
l SNC/S: TCM1-TCM6
<RVRTV Indicates the revertive mode which only applies to SNCP. The N
> valid values are Y and N.
<RVTM> Indicates the revertive time expressed in minutes. It ranges 5

from 5 to 12. The default value is 5.
This parameter is available only for SNCP and when
<RVRTV> is enabled.
<SDFLA Indicates whether SD is enabled as the trigger condition of a DISABLE

G> protection switching.
This parameter is only available for SNCP.
<CKTID> Indicates the circuit identification. It is an alphanumeric string. NA

The maximum length is 32 characters. The <CKTID>
parameter contains the common language circuit ID or alias of
the circuit being provisioned.
It cannot include escape characters except \ and ".
<SST> Indicates the red-lined state. The valid values are provided in NA
section A.32.3.17 SST_STATE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-CRS-ODU1::CLNT-3-1-1&CLNT-4-1-1,SRV1-5-1-1:123:::CKTID=SHENZHEN:,RDLD;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:50
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Deletes a cross-connection.
Function
This command deletes a cross-connection.
l The AIDs must be in the same order as originally entered for the one-way cross-
connections. Either order will work for the two-way cross-connections.
l This command does not support deleting multiple cross-connections.
l The AID format in the deletion command is the same as the AID format in the retrieved
response message. For example, if the output of any retrieved AID is "F1&F2, T1: CCT",
the deletion command with the AID format (F1&F2, T1) is required to delete this cross-
connection.
l If there is a common one-way cross-connection from point F1 to point T1, the following
command is used to delete it.
DLT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1,T1:<CTAG>;
l If there is a common two-way cross-connection from point F1 to point T1, the following
commands are used to delete it. (Either of the two commands can be deleted.)
– DLT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1,T1:<CTAG>;
– DLT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:T1,F1:<CTAG>;
l If there is a selector from points F1& F2 to point T1, the following command is used to
delete it.
DLT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1:<CTAG>;
l The following command is used to delete two one-way selectors:
– From points F1&F2 to point T1
– From points F1&F2 to point T2
DLT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:F1&F2,T1&T2:<CTAG>;
l If there is one one-way selector form F1 and F2 to T1, the following command will convert
it to a common one-way cross-connection from F1 to T1.
l If there is one SNCP from F1 and F2 to T1, the following command will convert it to a
common two-way cross-connection from F1 to T1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>:::[INCL=<INCL>];
Command Parameters

other <MOD2> values, see the service type parameter in
A.6.8 ED-CLNT.
<FROM> Indicates the source identifier at one end of a cross- NA

connection. <FROM> does not support "&" or "&&" to
delete multiple cross-connections.
The valid format of <FROM> depends on the level of the
<MOD2>. For example, if the <MOD2> is STS3, refer
to A.32.2.18 OCN/STMN for the valid format
corresponding to the desired unit; if the <MOD2> is
<TO> Target identifier at one end of a cross-connection. <TO> NA

does not support "&" or "&&" to delete multiple cross-
connections.
The valid format of <TO> depends on the level of the
<MOD2>. For example, if the <MOD2> is STS3, refer
to A.32.2.18 OCN/STMN for the valid format
<INCL> Indicates inclusive (red-lined circuits). The valid values N

are as follows:
Y: indicates that the requested channel is disconnected
regardless of its red-lined state.
N: indicates a normal disconnection in most cases and no
disconnection if the channel is designated as RDLD.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-CRS-ODU1::SRV1-1-5-1-1,CLNT-1-1-1:C:::INCL=Y;
Related Commands
Retrieves a cross-connection.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes for the cross-connections.
l Symbol "&" is used in the AID field of this command to indicate multiple objects.
l The following command is used to retrieve all level cross-connections with specified path
F1:
RTRV-CRS-<MOD2>::F1:<CTAG>;
l F1&F2 indicates the working path and protection path respectively, so the following
command is used to retrieve all the SNCP cross-connections with the specified two paths
of F1 and F2:
RTRV-CRS-<MOD2>::F1&F2:<CTAG>;
l Use the following commands to retrieve all the cross-connections with any path between
F1 and F2.
For example, create 4 cross-connections by using the following four commands:
– ENT-CRS-ODU1::CLNT-7-1-1,CLNT-10-1-1:S::2WAY:CKTID=CHA9;
The RTRV-CRS-ODU1::STS-7-1-1&&-4:S command can retrieve all the cross-
connections between the two ODU1s.
l The following command is used to retrieve all the cross-connections:
RTRV-CRS-<MOD2>:::<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Cross-connection
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-CRS-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default

other <MOD2> values, see the service type parameter in
A.6.8 ED-CLNT.
<AID> Indicates the access identifier. It can be the source or sink NA

of a cross-connection, or any path of the source or sink. It
can be null. If nothing is entered, all the cross-connections
with the entered rate level with be retrieved.
The valid format of <AID> depends on the level of the
<MOD2>. For example, if the <MOD2> is STS3, refer to
Response Syntax
("<FROM>,<TO>:<CCT>,<LEVEL>:[TS=<TS>][,PLDRATE=<PLDRATE>][,PLDTYPE=<PLDTYPE>]
[,SNCPTYPE=<SNCPTYPE>][,OTNLEVEL=<OTNLEVEL>][,PREFERREDPATH=<PREFERREDPATH>]
[,ACTIVEPATH=<ACTIVEPATH>,][,RVRTV=<RVRTV>][,RVTM=<RVTM>][,SDFLAG=<SDFLAG>]
[,AUTOFLAG=<AUTOFLAG>][,CKTID=<CKTID>]:[,<SST>]" <cr><lf>)+ ;
Response Parameters
<FROM> Indicates the source of the cross-connection. It can be null. If

nothing is entered, all the cross-connections with the entered rate
level with be retrieved. The symbol "&" is allowed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<CCT> Indicates the type of the cross-connection. The valid values are as
follows:
l 2WAY: indicates that the cross-connection is bidirectional.
l 1WAY: indicates that the cross-connection is unidirectional.
<LEVEL> Indicates the level of the cross-connection. The valid values are
as follows:
l FETH/GETH/XGETH
l OTU1/OTU2/OTU3/OTU5G
l ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU3/ODU5G/ODUFLEX
l STS3/STS12/STS48/STS192/STS768
l STM1/STM4/STM16/STM64/STM256
l FC100/FC200/FC400/FC1000/FC1200
l FICON/FICONEXP
l HDSDI
l DVBASI/SDI
l ESCON
l FDDI
l ISCIG
l ISC2G
<PLDRATE> Indicates the rate of a channel service and is valid only when
ODUflex services are configured on the channel.
<PLDTYPE> Indicates the type of a channel service and is valid only when
ODUflex services are configured on the channel.
<TS> Indicates the bandwidth occupied by the ODUflex service when

the service is queried. This parameter is unavailable when other
services are queried.
<SNCPTYPE> Indicates the SNCP protection type The valid values are as
follows:
swsncp: SW SNCP protection
snci: SNC/I
sncn: SNC/N
sncs: SNC/S
NA: Non-SNCP group
<OTNLEVEL> Indicates the monitoring layer of SNCP.

It is displayed only when the SNCP type is SNCS or SNCN. The
l SNC/S: TCM1-TCM6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PREFERREDPATH> Indicates the preferred path. It is only available for SNCP. Two
values separated by "&" are only applicable to SNCP with two
sources or two destinations.
<ACTIVEPATH> Indicates the active path. It is only available for SNCP. Two values
separated by "&" are applicable to only SNCP with 2 sources or
2 destinations. The active path is the actual working path of the
SNCP.
<RVRTV> Indicates the revertive mode which only applies to SNCP.
<RVTM> This parameter is available only for SNCP and when <RVRTV>
is enabled.
Indicates the revertive time expressed in minutes. It ranges from
5 to 12. The default value is 5.
<SDFLAG> This parameter is only available for SNCP.

Indicates whether SD is enabled as the trigger condition of a
<AUTOFLAG> Indicates whether the cross-connection is automatically created

by the system. The valid values are Y and N.
<CKTID> Indicates the circuit identification. It is a string of no more than

32 ASCII characters. The circuit identification parameter contains
the common language circuit ID or alias of the circuit being
provisioned.
<SST> Indicates the red-lined state. This parameter is omitted in the

response when <SST> is set to RDLD-DEA.
Example
l Command
RTRV-CRS-ODU1::CLNT-1-2-1:C;
l Response Message
NGWDM-NE 2003-03-12 07:28:39 M 100 COMPLD
"CLNT-1-3-1&CLNT-1-2-1,SRV1-1-7-1-1:2WAY,ODU1:SNCPTYPE=SNCI,PREFERREDPATH=CLNT-1-3
-1,ACTIVEPATH=CLNT-1-3-1,CKTID=MERRY:,RDLD" ;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.9 Configuring Transparently Transmitted FE Singal

This section lists commands used to configure FE signal which is transparently transmitted on
OSC channel on ST2 card.
A.9.1 ENT-CRS-OHFE
Creates a pass-through FE service in the OSC.
Function
This command creates a pass-through FE service in the OSC. After the pass-through FE service
is created in the OSC, the FE port on the ST2 board where the OSC is located cannot be used to
transparently transmit third-party management information.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-CRS-OHFE:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Indicates the source OSC AID. NA

<FROM> ID>-<PORT ID>
<TO> Indicates the sink OSC AID. NA

ID>-<PORT ID>
Response Syntax

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ENT-CRS-OHFE::FAC-1-2-1,FAC-1-3-1:10;
l Response Message
NE 2011-01-25 15:33:17 M 10 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.9.3 DLT-CRS-OHFE
Retrieves the cross of a transparent FE channel of OSC.
Function
Retrieves the cross of a transparent FE channel of OSC.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-CRS-OHFE:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<FROM>,<TO>"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<FROM> Indicates the source AID.

ID>
<TO> Indicates the destination AID.

ID>
Example
l Command
RTRV-CRS-OHFE:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2011-01-20 15:36:49
M 10 COMPLD
"FAC-1-2-1,FAC-1-6-1"
;
Related Commands
A.9.1 ENT-CRS-OHFE
A.9.3 DLT-CRS-OHFE
A.9.3 DLT-CRS-OHFE
Deletes the cross of a transparent FE channel of OSC.
Function
Deletes the cross of a transparent FE channel of OSC.
Usage Note
None
Category
Communication
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-CRS-OHFE:[<TID>]:<FROM>,<TO>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Indicates the source OSC AID. NA

<FROM> ID>-<PORT ID>
<TO> Indicates the sink OSC AID. NA

ID>-<PORT ID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
DLT-CRS-OHFE::FAC-1-2-1,FAC-1-3-1:10;
l Response Message
NE 2011-01-25 15:33:17
M 10 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.9.1 ENT-CRS-OHFE
A.10 Configuring Service Protection

This section lists the commands used to configure all types of protection that the system supports.
A.10.1 Configuring Equipment Level Protection

This section lists the commands used to configure equipment level protection.
A.10.1.1 ENT-EQPT-PG
Creates an equipment level protection group.
Function
This command creates an equipment level protection group. It corresponds to the BPS protection
group function.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
EQPT protection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-EQPT-PG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::WORK=<WORK>,[CTRL=<CTRL>]:
[<PGSTATE>];
Command Parameters
Value
<AID> Indicates the protection slot identifier of the equipment in a NA

protection group.
The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>. For the
valid values for specific units, refer to A.32.2.7 EQPT.
<WORK> Indicates the list of the working equipment AIDs. NA
<CTRL> Indicates whether the protection card can disable the service N
output.
l N: indicates that the protection card is not able to disable
the service output. In this scenario, no control unit is
available. (default value).
l Y: indicates that the protection card is able to disable the
service output. In this scenario, the SCS is the control unit.
<PGSTATE Indicates the state of the protection group. The valid values IS
> are IS (In-service) and OOS (out-of-service).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ENT-EQPT-PG::SLOT-1-4:C:::WORK=SLOT-1-5,CTRL=N:IS;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.10.1.4 RTRV-EQPT-PG
A.10.1.3 DLT-EQPT-PG
A.10.1.2 ED-EQPT-PG
A.10.1.2 ED-EQPT-PG
Edits an equipment level protection group.
Function
This command edits the attributes of an equipment level protection group.
Usage Note
None
Category
EQPT protection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-EQPT-PG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::::[<PGSTATE>];
Command Parameters
Value

protection group.
<PGSTATE> Indicates the state of the equipment level protection group. The NA
valid values are IS (in-service) and OOS (out-of-service).
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^<rsphdr> <cr> <lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
M^^<ctag>^COMPLD <cr> <lf>

;
Example
l Command
ED-EQPT-PG::SLOT-1-4:C::::OOS;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Deletes an equipment level protection group.
Function
This command deletes an equipment level protection group.
Usage Note
None
Category
EQPT protection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-EQPT-PG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Param Description Default
eter Value

protection group.
The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>. For the valid
values for specific units, refer to A.32.2.7 EQPT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Example
l Command
DLT-EQPT-PG::SLOT-1-4:C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves an equipment level protection group.
Function
This command retrieves the parameters for a specified equipment level protection group.
Usage Note
None
Category
EQPT protection
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-EQPT-PG:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Parame Description Default
ter Value

protection group.
The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>. For the valid
values for specific units, refer to A.32.2.7 EQPT.
When nothing is entered, all the protection groups are retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^("<AID>::RVRTV=<RVRTV>,PSTYPE=<PSTYPE>,WORK=<WORK>,CTRL=
<CTRL>,SWSTATE=<SWSTATE>:<PGSTATE>")+<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the AID of the protection card.
<RVRTV> Indicates the revertive mode. The only valid value supported by BPS is N (non-
revertive mode).
<PSTYPE Indicates the protection type. 1+1 indicates the BPS protection.
>
<CTRL> Indicates whether the protection card can disable service output.
l N: indicates that the protection card is not able to disable service output. In
this scenario, no control unit is available. (default value).
l Y: indicates that the protection card is able to disable service output. In this
scenario, the SCS is the control unit.
<WORK> Indicates the AID(s) of the working card.
<SWSTAT Indicates the switching status of the protection group. The valid values are as
E> follows:
l IDLE: The service is running on the working card.
l SWITCHING: The service is running on the protection card.
<PGSTAT Indicates the state of the protection group. The valid values are IS (in-service)
E> and OOS (out-of-service).
Example
l Command
RTRV-EQPT-PG:::C;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NGWDM-NE 2004-01-01 15:54:55
M C COMPLD
"SLOT-1-4::RVRTV=N,PSTYPE=1+1,CTRL=N,WORK=SLOT-1-3,SWSTATE=IDLE:IS"
;
Related Commands
A.10.1.2 ED-EQPT-PG
A.10.1.5 OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT
Performs an equipment level protection switching.
Function
This command instructs an NE to perform an equipment level protection switching.
Usage Note
None
Category
EQPT protection
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<SC>:[<DIRN>];
Command Parameters
Paramete Description Default
r Value
<AID> Indicates the equipment AID. NA

<SC> Indicates the state of switching that is to be initiated. The valid NA

values are FRCD and MAN.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of transmission in which switching is to BTH

be performed and is dependent on the line or path identified by
<AID>. The valid values are BTH, RCV, and TRMT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT::SLOT-1-5:C::MAN:BTH;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.10.1.6 RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT
A.10.1.6 RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT
Releases an equipment level protection switching.
Function
This command instructs the NE to release an equipment level protection switching.
Usage Note
None
Category
EQPT protection
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<DIRN>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the equipment AID. NA

The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>. For
the valid values for specific units, refer to A.32.2.7
EQPT.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of transmission in which switching BTH

is to be performed and is dependent on the line or path
identified by <AID>. The valid values are BTH, RCV, and
TRMT.
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Example
l Command
RLS-PROTNSW-EQPT::SLOT-1-5:C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.10.1.5 OPR-PROTNSW-EQPT
A.10.2 Configuring FFP Protection

This section lists the commands used to configure FFP protection.
A.10.2.1 ENT-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>
Creates a facility protection group of the optical level, such as OCH, OC, WDM or CFP.
Function
This command creates an optical facility protection group. It can also be used to input attributes
of the protection group.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
FFP protection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>:
[<TID>]:<PROTECT>,<WORK>:<CTAG>:::FFPTYPE=<FFPTYPE>,
[PROTNE=<PROTNE>],[WORKNE=<WORKNE>],[MARK=<MARK>],
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>],[RVTM=<RVTM>],[SDFLAG=<SDFLAG>],
[DETECT=<DETECT>],[CTRL=<CTRL>],[CTRLNE=<CTRLNE>]:[<FFPSTATE>];
Command Parameters
Value
<MOD2> The valid values are as follows. NA

l When <FFPTYPE> is set to OLP1+1, the valid value is
WDM.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to INNER1+1, the valid value is
OCH or OC.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to CLIENT1+1, the valid value
is OC, OCH, WDM or CFP.
<PROTEC Indicates the protection optical ports. NA

T> Refer to A.32.2.11 FFP for the valid values of <PROTECT>
for specific units.
<WORK> Indicates the working optical facilities protected by NA

<PROTECT>.
Refer to A.32.2.11 FFP for the valid values of <WORK> for
specific units.
<FFPTYPE Indicates the type of protection group. The valid values are as NA
> follows:
l OLP1+1: indicates optical line protection.
l INNER1+1: indicates intra-card 1+1 protection.
l Client1+1: indicates client-side 1+1 protection.
<PROTNE Indicates the NE on which the protection optical facility is NA

> located. If the protection optical facility is local, nothing is
<WORKN Indicates the NE on which the working optical facility is NA

E> located. If the working optical facility is local, nothing is

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<MARK> Indicates the protection group memo information. It is a string NULL

with no more than 64 characters. The default value is NULL.
<RVRTV> Indicates the revertive mode. The valid values are as follows: N
l Y: indicates the revertive mode.
l N: indicates the non-revertive mode.
<RVTM> Indicates the revertive time expressed in minutes. It ranges 5

from 5 to 12.
<SDFLAG Indicates the signal degrade flag. The valid values are DISABLE
> ENABLE and DISABLE.
<DETECT Indicates the detection facility. NA

> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>.
This parameter is only valid for the INNER1+1 protection
(intra-card 1+1 protection) group. When the extended intra-
card 1+1 protection is configured, the two channels of the OLP
unit are the working channel and protection channel
respectively, and the WDM-side optical port of the OTU unit
acts as the detection facility.
<CTRL> When the client-side inter-subrack 1+1 protection or the NA

extended intra-card 1+1 protection is configured, an
additional unit (control unit or detection unit) is required.
<CTRLNE The NE on which the control unit (OLP) is located. If the NA

> control unit is local, nothing is entered for this parameter.
<FFPSTAT Indicates the state of the protection group. The valid values IS
E> are IS (In-service) and OOS (out-of-service).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ENT-FFP-WDM::FAC-1-11-2,FAC-1-11-1:100:::FFPTYPE=OLP1+1,RVRTV=Y:;
l Response Message
NE 2006-01-07 09:50:17
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.10.2.2 ED-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>
A.10.2.3 DLT-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>
A.10.2.4 RTRV-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>
Edits a facility protection group of the optical level, such as OCH, OC ,WDM or CFP.
Function
This command edits the attributes of an optical facility protection group.
Usage Note
None
Category
FFP protection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[NE=<NE>],
[MARK=<MARK>],[RVRTV=<RVRTV>],[RVTM=<RVTM>],[SDFLAG=<SDFLAG>]:
[<FFPSTATE>];
Command Parameters
Paramet Default
er Description Value
<MOD2 The valid values are as follows: NA

> l When <FFPTYPE> is set to OLP1+1, the valid value is WDM.
OCH or OC.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to CLIENT1+1, the valid value is
OC, OCH, WDM or CFP.
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that identifies the OCh/OC/WDM/ NA

CFP port, which is the protection or working port in the FFP
group.
Refer to A.32.2.11 FFP for the valid values of <AID> for specific
units.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Paramet Default
er Description Value
<NE> Indicates the NE where the working or protection facility is NA

located. When the facility is local, nothing is entered for this
parameter.
<MARK Indicates the protection group memo information. It is a string NA

> with no more than 64 characters. If nothing is entered, the previous
value will be retained.
<RVRT Indicates the revertive mode. The valid values are as follows: N
V> l Y: indicates the revertive mode.
If nothing is entered, the previous value will be retained.
<RVTM Indicates the revertive time expressed in minutes. It ranges from 5

> 5 to 12. If nothing is entered, the previous value will be retained.
<SDFLA Indicates the signal degrade flag. The valid values are ENABLE DISABLE
G> and DISABLE. If nothing is entered, the previous value will be
retained.
<FFPST Indicates the state of the facility protection group. The valid values NA
ATE> are IS (in-service) and OOS (out-of-service).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-FFP-OC::FAC-2-2-1:C:::MARK=TEST,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=10;
l Response Message
NE 2006-01-07 09:50:17
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Deletes a facility protection group of the optical level, such as OCH, OC, WDM or CFP.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command deletes an entire optical facility protection group of a specified optical carrier
(OCH/OC/WDM/CFP) level.
Usage Note
None
Category
FFP protection
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[NE=<NE>];
Command Parameters
Paramet Description Default
er Value
<MOD2 The valid values are as follows: NA

> l When <FFPTYPE> is set to OLP1+1, the valid value is
WDM.
OCH or OC.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to CLIENT1+1, the valid value is
OC, OCH, WDM or CFP.
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that identifies the OCH/OC/ NA

WDM/CFP port, which is the protection or working port in the
FFP group.
Refer to A.32.2.11 FFP for the valid values of <AID> for
specific units.
<NE> Indicates the NE on which the working or protection optical NA

facility is located.
The default NE is the local NE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
DLT-FFP-OC::FAC-2-2-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-01-07 09:50:17
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the attributes of a facility protection group of the optical level, such as OCH, OC,
WDM or CFP.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of an optical facility protection group.
Usage Note
None
Category
FFP protection
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-FFP-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::[NE=<NE>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<MOD2> The valid values are as follows: ALL

l When <FFPTYPE> is set to OLP1+1, the valid value
is WDM.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to INNER1+1, the valid
value is OC or OCH.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to CLIENT1+1, the valid
value is OC, OCH, WDM, or CFP.
The default value is ALL which indicates all MOD2 types.
<AID> Indicates the access identifier of the OCH/OC/WDM/CFP ALL

port, which is the protection or working port in the FFP
group. The parameter is optional.
The default value is ALL, which indicates all the FFP
groups for the OCH/OC/WDM/CFP that are retrieved.
specific units.
When the value of <MOD2> is ALL, the <AID> parameter
must be empty.
<NE> Indicates the NE on which the working or protection NA

facility is located. All of the NEs will be retrieved if the
parameter is empty. The default NE is the local NE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> <SID> <DATE> <TIME> <cr><lf> M CTAG COMPLD<cr><lf>
("<PROTECT>,<WORK>:<MOD2>:FFPTYPE=<FFPTYPE>,[PROTNE=<PROTNE>],[WORKNE=<WORKNE>],
[DETECT=<DETECT>],[CTRL=<CTRL>],[CTRLNE=<CTRLNE>],[MARK=<MARK>],[RVRTV=<RVRTV>],
[RVTM=<RVTM>],SDFLAG=<SDFLAG>,[SWSTATE=<SWSTATE>],[ACTIVE=<ACTIVE>],
[WORKSTATE=<WORKSTATE>],[PROTSTATE=<PROTSTATE>],[CTRL=<CTRL>],[CTRLNE=<CTRLNE>]:
[<FFPSTATE>]"<cr><lf>);
Response Parameters
<PROTECT Indicates the protection optical ports.

>
<WORK> Indicates the optical facilities protected by <PROTECT>.
<MOD2> The valid values are as follows:

l When <FFPTYPE> is set to OLP1+1, the valid value is WDM.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to INNER1+1, the valid value is OCH or OC.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to CLIENT1+1, the valid value is OC, OCH,
WDM, or CFP.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<FFPTYPE> Indicates the type of the protection group. The valid values are as follows:
l OLP1+1: indicates OLP 1+1 protection.
l INNER1+1: indicates inner-unit 1+1 protection.
l CLIENT1+1: indicates client-side 1+1 protection.
<PROTNE> Indicates the NE on which the protection optical facility is located. If the
protection optical facility is local, nothing is entered for this parameter.
<WORKNE Indicates the NE on which the working optical facility is located. If the
> working optical facility is local, nothing is entered for this parameter.
<DETECT> Indicates the detection facility.

This parameter is only valid for the INNER1+1 protection (intra-card 1+1
protection) group. When the extended intra-card 1+1 protection is configured,
the two channels of OLP unit are the working channel and protection channel
respectively, and the WDM-side optical port of the OTU unit acts as the
detection facility.
<CTRL> When the client-side inter-subrack 1+1 protection or the extended intra-card
1+1 protection is configured, an additional unit (control unit or detection unit)
is required.
<CTRLNE> The NE on which the control unit (OLP) is located. If the control unit is local,
<MARK> Indicates the protection group memo information. It is a string with no more
than 64 characters. The default value is NULL.
<RVRTV> Indicates the revertive mode. The valid values are as follows:
l Y: indicates the revertive mode.
The default value is N.
<RVTM> Indicates the revertive time.
<SDFLAG> Indicates the signal degrade flag. The valid values are ENABLE and
DISABLE.
<SWSTATE Indicates the switching state of the protection group. The valid values are as
> follows:
l IDLE: indicates that the active card is working.
l SWITCHING: indicates that the standby card is working.
l INIT: indicates that the protection group is in the initial state.
<ACTIVE> Indicates the current active port. The valid values are WORK and PROTECT.
<WORKST Indicates the current state of the working port. The valid values are provided
ATE> in A.32.3.20 SWITCHSTATE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PROTSTA Indicates the current state of the working port. The valid values are provided
TE> in A.32.3.20 SWITCHSTATE.
<FFPSTATE Indicates the state of the facility protection group. The valid values are IS (in-
> service) and OOS (out-of-service).
Example
l Command
RTRV-FFP-WDM::ALL:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-18 14:08:37 M C COMPLD "FAC-1-11-2,FAC-1-11-1:WDM:MARK=
\"\",FFPTYPE=OLP1+1,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=5,SDFLAG=DISABLE,:IS"
"FAC-1-13-2,FAC-1-13-1:WDM:MARK=\"\",FFPTYPE=OLP1
+1,RVRTV=N,RVTM=0,SDFLAG=DISABLE,:IS" ;
Related Commands
A.10.2.5 RTRV-FFP-LOG
Retrieves the FFP event records.
Function
This command retrieves the FFP event records.
Usage Note
The logs of deleted protection groups cannot be queried.
Category
FFP protection
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-FFP-LOG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Value

WDM/CFP port, which is the protection or working part in
the FFP group.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
(^^^<AID>:EVENT-NO=<EVENT-NO>,PS-EVENT=<PS-EVENT>,EVENT-PARA=<EVENT-
PARA>,Date=<date>,Time=<time>"<cr><lf>)+ ;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that identifies the OCh/OC/WDM/CFP port in
the FFP group.
<EVENT- Indicates the event number that increases from 1 to 65535. The maximum
NO> record number of 1-N is 250 and the limit of the 1+1 protection group is 1250.
<PS- Indicates the protection switching event.

EVENT>
<EVENT- Indicates the event parameters.

PARA>
<DATE> Indicates the date when the event happens. The valid format is YY-MM-DD.
<TIME> Indicates the time when the event happens. The valid format is HH-MM-SS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FFP-LOG::FAC-2-2-1:C1;
l Response Message
NE 2006-02-01 11:37:18
M C1 COMPLD
FAC-2-1-1::EVENT-NO=1,PS-EVENT=SFSW,EVENT-
PARA=0x010f0200,Date=2005-11-12,Time=11-33-23;
Related Commands
A.10.2.6 INIT-FFP-LOG
A.10.2.6 INIT-FFP-LOG
Clear the FFP event records.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command clears the FFP event records.
Usage Note
None
Category
FFP protection
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
INIT-FFP-LOG:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INIT-FFP-LOG:::S;
l Response Message
NE-122-23 2012-08-02 20:11:25
M S COMPLD
;
>
Related Commands
A.10.2.5 RTRV-FFP-LOG
A.10.2.7 OPR-PROTNSW-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>
Performs a protection switching of an optical level, such as OCH, OC, WDM or CFP.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command performs a protection switching.
Usage Note
If this command is successfully executed, the channel indicated by the input parameter AID
turns to a non-working state.
Category
FFP protection
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<SC>:[<DIRN>]
[,<NE>];
Command Parameters
Value
<MOD2> The valid values are as follows: NA

WDM.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to INNER1+1, the valid value
is OCH or OC.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to CLIENT1+1, the valid value
is OC, OCH, WDM or CFP.
NOTE
The FFPTYPE depends on the parameter <AID>.

WDM/CFP port, which is the protection port or working port
in the FFP group. When FFPTYPE is another 1+1 channel
protection type:
l If <SC> is LOCKOUT, the AID must be the protection
optical device.
l If <SC> is FRCD or MAN.
– In the non-revertive mode, the AID can be a working
optical device or a protection optical device.
– In the revertive mode, the AID must be a working
optical device.
specific units.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<SC> Indicates the switching command to be initiated. The valid NA

l LOCKOUT
l FRCD
l MAN
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of transmission in which switching is BTH

to be made and is dependant on the line or path identified by
<AID>.
The valid values are BTH, RCV, and TRMT.
<NE> Indicates the NE on which the working or protection facility NA

is located. If the facility is local, nothing is entered for this
parameter.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
OPR-PROTNSW-OC::FAC-2-2-1:100::FRCD;
l Response Message
NE 2006-01-07 09:50:17
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.10.2.8 RLS-PROTNSW-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>
A.10.2.8 RLS-PROTNSW-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>
Releases a protection switching (OCH/OC/WDM/CFP).
Function
This command instructs an NE to release (clear) line protection switching between a working
line and an established protection line.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
Releasing switching command can release only external switching commands. After a switching
is released, the protection group returns to a proper state. For example, if the working channel
and protection channel are both normal, the group returns to the working channel. If the working
channel is faulty and the protection channel is normal, the group switches to the protection
channel.
Category
FFP protection
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<DIRN>][,<NE>];
Command Parameters
Paramet Description Default Value
er

WDM.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to INNER1+1, the valid value
is OCH or OC.
l When <FFPTYPE> is set to CLIENT1+1, the valid
value is OC, OCH, WDM or CFP.
NOTE
The FFPTYPE depends on the parameter <AID>.

WDM/CFP port, which is the protection or working port in
the FFP group.
specific units.

is to be made and is dependant on the line or path identified
by <AID>.
<NE> Indicates the NE on which the working or protection facility NA

is located. If the facility is local, nothing is entered for this
parameter.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
RLS-PROTNSW-OC::FAC-2-2-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-01-07 09:50:17
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.10.2.7 OPR-PROTNSW-<OCH/OC/WDM/CFP>
A.10.3 Configuring SNCP Protection

This section lists the commands used to configure SNCP protection.
NOTE
For configuring SNCP protection, refer to A.8.2 Configuring EXC.
A.10.3.1 RLS-PROTNSW-<MOD2>
Releases a protection switching.
Function
This command instructs the NE to release path protection switching request that is created by
the external command.
Usage Note
None
Category
SNCP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[<DIRN>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<MOD2> The <MOD2> includes ODUn, OTUn, and STSn. For other NA
<MOD2> values, see the service type parameter in A.6.8
ED-CLNT.
<AID> Indicates the access identifier. It must be a working path or NA

protection path.
For example, if the <MOD2> is STS3, refer to A.32.2.18
OCN/STMN for the valid format corresponding to the
desired unit; if the <MOD2> is FC200, refer to A.32.2.9
FCMOD2, etc.

is to be performed and is dependant on the line or path
identified by <AID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Example
l Command
RLS-PROTNSW-ODU1::SRV1-1-2-1-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-29 12:24:50
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.10.3.2 OPR-PROTNSW-<MOD2>
A.10.3.2 OPR-PROTNSW-<MOD2>
Performs the protection switching.
Function
This command instructs an NE to execute the external switching command.
l This command is applicable to SNCP configuration only.

l The AID must be a working or protection path AID. A DENY message will be returned
when users send this command with the sink AID.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Use the RTRV-COND-ALL or RTRV-ALM-ALL command to retrieve the protection

switching state (manual, lockout, or force).
Usage Note
None
Category
SNCP
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<SC>:[<DIRN>];
Command Parameters
Value
<MOD2> The <MOD2> includes ODUn, OTUn, and STSn. For other NA
<MOD2> values, see the service type parameter in A.6.8 ED-
CLNT.
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that identifies the path. This NA
parameter must be a working path or protection path.
For example, if the <MOD2> is STS3, refer to A.32.2.18
OCN/STMN for the valid format corresponding to the
desired unit; if the <MOD2> is FC200, refer to A.32.2.9
FCMOD2.
<SC> Indicates the external switching command. NA

The valid values are LOCKOUT, FRCD, and MAN.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of transmission in which the switching BTH

is to be performed and is dependant on the line or path
identified by <AID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
OPR-PROTNSW-ODU1::SRV1-1-1-1-1:123::MAN:BTH;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-29 12:23:50
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.10.3.1 RLS-PROTNSW-<MOD2>
A.11 Configuring SCC Protection

This section lists the commands used to configure SCC protection.
A.11.1 ED-AUTOSYNC-ENABLE
Edit the attribute for automatic synchronization.
Function
The command edit the attribute for automatic synchronization.
Usage Note
None
Category
HBU
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ED-AUTOSYNC-ENABLE:[<TID>]:<SLOT_ID>:<CTAG>::<AUTOSYNC>;
Command Parameters
<SLOT_ID> Indicates the Board ID.
<AUTOSYNC State for automatic synchronization. (ENABLE/ ENABLE/DISABLE

> DISABLE).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-AUTOSYNC-ENABLE::SLOT-1-18:100::ENABLE;
l Response Message
M1050 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.2 REPT^SW
Reports the SCC switching.
Function
This event is reported to indicate that an SCC protection switching occurred.
Usage Note
None
Category
Equipment
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A^^<ctag>^REPT^SW<cr><lf>
^^^"<ACT_SLOT>,<STANDBY_SLOT>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<ACT_SLOT> Indicates the slot of the working card after the switching.
<STANDBY_SLO Indicates the slot of the protection card after the switching.
T>
Example
l Command
None
l Response Message
NE 2004-06-17 18:03:52
A 41 REPT SW
"SLOT-18,SLOT-17"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.3 RTRV-BACKUP-INFO
Retrieves the backup information about the SCC.
Function
This command retrieves the backup information about the SCC.
Usage Note
None
Category
SCC protection switching
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-BACKUP-INFO:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"BACKUPINFO=<BACKUP_INFO>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
Paramete Description
r
<BACKU The valid values are as follows:

P_INFO> l INITIALIZATION: The two cards are performing an initialization task to
finish shaking hands.
l SHAKE HANDS: The two cards finished shaking hands, but backup has not
started yet.
l IN PROGRESS: The memory data or database files are being backed up, or
database files are being recovered.
l COMPLETED: The backup is successful. It is only in this state that SCC
switching does not have any impact.
l SMOOTHDATA: Data is being smoothed to ensure the integrity of the data.
l WAITREQUEST: It indicates the request for audit state.
l BACKUPREQUEST: It indicates the request for backup state.
Example
l Command
RTRV-BACKUP-INFO:::100;
l Response Message
NE 1990-02-07 07:16:23
M 100 COMPLD
"BACKUPINFO= COMPLETED"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.4 ALW-SWDX-EQPT
Allows an automatic or manual switching.
Function
This command allows an automatic or manual switching on a system containing duplex
equipment. Use the INH-SWDX-EQPT command to inhibit the switching if necessary.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
SCC protection switch
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
ALW-SWDX-EQPT:[<TID>]:<HSCSLOT_NUM>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<HSCSLOT_NU Indicates an allowable target slot, such as NA

M> SLOT-9.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ALW-SWDX-EQPT::SLOT-1-9:100;
l Response Message
NE 1990-02-07 07:07:36
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.11.5 INH-SWDX-EQPT
A.11.5 INH-SWDX-EQPT
Inhibits an automatic or manual switching.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command inhibits an automatic or manual switching on a system containing duplex
equipment. Use the ALW-SWDX-EQPT command to release the inhibition if necessary.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
INH-SWDX-EQPT:[<TID>]:<HSCSLOT_NUM>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<HSCSLOT_N Indicates the inhibited target slot, such as SLOT-9. NA

UM>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INH-SWDX-EQPT::SLOT-1-9:100;
l Response Message
NE 2004-02-07 07:07:36
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.11.4 ALW-SWDX-EQPT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.11.6 RTRV-BATCHBAK-CAUSEHIS
Retrieves history records of the batch backup reason.
Function
This command retrieves history records of the batch backup reason.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-BATCHBAK-CAUSEHIS:[<TID>]:<SLOT_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<SLOT_ID> Indicates the card ID. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"SLOT_ID=<SLOT_ID>,BEGIN_TIME=<HBU_TIME_BEGIN>,BATCH_REASON=<HBU_BATCH_REASON>,
BATCH_TIMES=<HBU_BATCH_TIMES>,TIME_OUT=<HBU_BATCH_TIMEOUT>,RESULT=<HBU_SYNC_RESULT
>,END_TIME=<HBU_TIME_END>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<SLOT_ID> Indicates the card ID.
<HBU_TIME_BEGIN> Indicates the start time of batch backup.
<HBU_BATCH_REASON> Indicates the reason of batch backup.
<HBU_BATCH_TIMES> Times from batch time out which result batch backup.
<HBU_BATCH_TIME- Indicates the times of timeout during batch backup.

OUT>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<HBU_SYNC_RESULT> Indicates the result of batch backup.
<HBU_TIME_END> Indicates the end time of batch backup.
Example
l Command
RTRV-BATCHBAK-CAUSEHIS::SLOT-9:100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-19 11:03:16
M 100 COMPLD
"SLOT_ID=SLOT-9,BEGIN_TIME=\"2006-05-19 07:18:24
\",BATCH_REASON=AFTERSW,BATCH_TIMES=0,TIME_OUT=300000,RESULT=SYNC OK,END_TIME=
\"2006-05-19 07:18:49\""
"SLOT_ID=SLOT-9,BEGIN_TIME=\"2006-05-19 07:31:58
\",BATCH_REASON=AFTERSW,BATCH_TIMES=0,TIME_OUT=300000,RESULT=SYNCING...,END_TIME=
\"1990-00-00 00:00:00\""
Related Commands
None
A.11.7 RTRV-MSCOM-INTRPHIS
Retrieves history interruption due to the active/standby switching.
Function
This command retrieves history interruption due to the active/standby switching.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MSCOM-INTRPHIS:[<TID>]:<SLOT_ID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<SLOT_ID> Indicates the card ID. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"SLOT_ID=<SLOT_ID>,TIME=<HBU_TIME_END>,COM_STATE=<HBU_CMOS_STATE>,STDBY_ONLINE=
<HBU_BDONLINE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<SLOT_ID> Indicates the card ID.
<HBU_TIME_END> Indicates the time of corresponding state vary.
<HBU_CMOS_STATE> Indicates the state of corresponding variety.
<HBU_BDONLINE> Indicates the online state of the standby card.
Example
l Command
RTRV-MSCOM-INTRPHIS::SLOT-1-18:100;
l Response Message
OSP-118 2011-06-23 18:37:04
M 100 COMPLD
"SLOT_ID=SLOT-1-18,TIME=2011-06-22
12-57-54,COM_STATE=OK,STDBY_ONLINE=HBUONLINE"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.8 RTRV-AUTOSYNC-ENABLE
Retrieves the automatic synchronization status.
Function
This command retrieves the automatic synchronization status.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-AUTOSYNC-ENABLE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AUTOSYNC>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AUTOSYNC> Indicates the automatic synchronization status. The valid

values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
Example
l Command
RTRV-AUTOSYNC-ENABLE::SLOT-1-17:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-02 18:25:07
M 100 COMPLD
"ENABLE"
;
Related Commands
A.29.4 SET-DBMS-AUTOBACKUP
A.11.9 RTRV-SWITCH-HIS
Retrieves records of the recent active/standby switching actions.
Function
This command retrieves the records of the recent active/standby switching actions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-SWITCH-HIS:[<TID>]:<HSCSLOT_NUM>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<HSCSLOT_ Indicates the target slot that will be queried, NA

NUM> such as scc 1.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"SLOT_NUM=<HSCSLOT_NUM>,SWITCH_TIME=<HSC_SWITCH_TIME>,MANUAL_SWITCH=<FORCE_LOCK
_SUPPORT>,AUTO_SWITCH=<HSC_SWITCH_AUTO>,"FORCE_SWITCH=<HSC_SWITCH_FORCE>,PLUG_SWIT
CH=<HSC_SWITCH_PLUG>,BIOS_LINGER=<HSC_BIOS_LINGER>,BIOS_RESET=<HSC_BIOS_RESET>,"AS
_ENABLE=<HSCSWENABLE>,SELF_AS=<HSC_AS_TYPE>,PEER_ONLINE=<HSC_BDONLINE>,SELF_WORK=<
STDBY_WORK>,PEER_WORK=<HSC_WORK_PEER>,READY_STATE=<HSC_READY_STATE>,SOFT_DETECT=<H
SC_SOFT_DETECT>,BAD_CODE=<HSC_BAD_CODE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<HSCSLOT_NUM> Indicates the slot number of the local card.
<HSC_SWITCH_TIME> Indicates the switching time.
<FORCE_LOCK_SUP- Indicates the manual switching.

PORT>
<HSC_SWITCH_AUTO> Indicates the auto switching.
<HSC_SWITCH_FORCE> Indicates the forced switching.
<HSC_SWITCH_PLUG > Indicates the plug switching.
<HSC_BIOS_LINGER> Indicates the Bios switching.
<HSC_BIOS_RESET> Indicates the high frequency reboot.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<HSCSWENABLE> Indicates the master and slave switching flag.
<HSC_AS_TYPE> Indicates the card type before switching.
<HSC_BDONLINE> Indicates the online flag before switching of the peer card.
<STDBY_WORK> Indicates the working state of the local card before switching.
<HSC_WORK_PEER> Indicates the working state of the peer card before switching.
<HSC_READY_STATE> Indicates the ready state before switching.
<HSC_SOFT_DETECT> Indicates the woft detecting state when switching.
<HSC_BAD_CODE> Indicates the reason code of bad switching.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SWITCH-HIS::SLOT-9:100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-19 11:04:53
M 100 COMPLD
"SLOT_NUM=SLOT-9,SWITCH_TIME=\"2006-05-19 07:31:41
\",MANUAL_SWITCH=YES,AUTO_SWITCH=NO,FORCE_SWITCH=NO,PLUG_SWITCH=NO,BIOS_LINGER=NO,
BIOS_RESET=NO,AS_ENABLE=ENABLE,SELF_AS=ACTIVE,PEER_ONLINE=ONLINE,SELF_WORK=GOOD,PE
ER_WORK=BAD,READY_STATE=DISABLE,SOFT_DETECT=DISABLE,BAD_CODE=0"
"SLOT_NUM=SLOT-10,SWITCH_TIME=\"2006-05-19 07:44:34
\",MANUAL_SWITCH=YES,AUTO_SWITCH=NO,FORCE_SWITCH=NO,PLUG_SWITCH=NO,BIOS_LINGER=NO,
BIOS_RESET=NO,AS_ENABLE=ENABLE,SELF_AS=ACTIVE,PEER_ONLINE=ONLINE,SELF_WORK=GOOD,PE
ER_WORK=BAD,READY_STATE=DISABLE,SOFT_DETECT=DISABLE,BAD_CODE=0"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.10 RTRV-BAD-INFO
Retrieves bad information about the active/standby switching.
Function
This command retrieves bad information about the active/standby switching.
Usage Note
None
Category

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-BAD-INFO:[<TID>]:<HSCSLOT_NUM>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<HSCSLOT_NUM> Indicates the card ID. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"SLOT_NUM=<HSCSLOT_NUM>,FILE_NAME=<HSC_FILE_NAME>,FILE_LINE=<HSC_FILE_LINE>"<cr
><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<HSCSLOT_NUM> Indicates the card ID.
<HSC_FILE_NAME> Indicates the name of the file that is bad. It is a string with a
maximum of 20 characters.
<HSC_FILE_LINE> Indicates the line number of the bad file.
Example
l Command
RTRV-BAD-INFO::SLOT-9:100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-19 11:00:58
M 100 COMPLD
"SLOT_NUM=SLOT-9,FILE_NAME=\"xcs_xcs_harddrv.cpp\",FILE_LINE=3685"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.11 RTRV-BACKUPMOD-INFO
Retrieves the information about the batch backup module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command retrieves the information about the batch backup module.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-BACKUPMOD-INFO:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"
BACKUPMODID=<BACKUP_MOD_ID>,BACKUPSUBMODID=<BACKUP_SUBMODID>,BACKUPNUM=<BACKUP_NUM
>,ENTRYID=<ENTRY_ID>,FILENUM=<HBU_FILENUM>,MODREADY=<MOD_READY>,SMODREADY=<SMOD_RE
ADY>,A2S=<A2S_RECV>,ISPOST=<IS_POST>,POSTRESULT=<POST_RESULT>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<BACKUP_MOD_ID> Indicates the ID of the backup module.
<BACKUP_SUBMODID> Indicates the ID of the backup submodule.
<BACKUP_NUM> Indicates the backup data number.
<ENTRY_ID> Indicates the ID of the mailbox entry.
<HBU_FILENUM> Indicates the ID of the backup file.
<MOD_READY> Indicates whether the module on the active card is ready.
<SMOD_READY> Indicates whether the module on the standby card is ready.
<A2S_RECV> Indicates whether the state of the standby card is changed

from active to standby successfully.
<IS_POST> Indicates whether the module needs postrecovery.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<POST_RESULT> Indicates the result of postrecovery.
Example
l Command
RTRV-BACKUPMOD-INFO:::100;
l Response Message
NE 1990-02-07 07:07:36
M 100 COMPLD
"BACKUPMODID=12,BACKUPSUBMODID=0,BACKUPNUM=0,ENTRYID=130,FILENUM=0,MODREADY=READY,
SMODREADY=READY,A2S=RECIEVE,ISPOST=NOTNEED,POSTRESULT=IDLE"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.12 RTRV-BATCH-PROCESS
Retrieves the batch backup process.
Function
This command retrieves the batch backup process.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-BATCH-PROCESS:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<sid>^<yyyy-mm-dd>^<hh:mm:ss> <cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^COMPLD <cr><lf>
^^^"
PEERONLINE=<HBU_BDONLINE>,VERVERIFY=<VERSION_VERIFY>,SYNCENABLE=<SYNC_ENABLE>,NEST

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
ATE=<NE_STATE>,ASCOM=<AS_COM>,LASTAPPMOD=<LAST_APP_MOD>,DBMSRSPRECV=<DBMS_RSP_RECV
>,DBMSRSPRESLT=<DBMS_RSP_RESULT>,RECORSPRECV=<RECOVER_RSP_RECV>,RECVERLASTAPP=<REC
OVER_LASTMOD>,CFGSTDBYXC=<CFG_STDBY_XC>,POSTRECV=<POST_RECOVER_RECV>,POSTLASTMOD=<
POST_RECOVER_LASTMOD>,SMOOTHLASTAPP=<SMOOTH_LASTMOD>,ACTVERINFO=<ACTIVE_VERINFO>,S
TDVERINFO=<STDBY_VERINFO>"<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
<HBU_BDONLINE> Indicates whether the standby SCC board is online.
<VERSION_VERIFY Indicates the verification result of the active card version.

>
<SYNC_ENABLE> Indicates that the synchronization of the active card is enabled.
<NE_STATE> Indicates the NE status.
<AS_COM> Indicates the communication status between the active and standby
cards.
<LAST_APP_MOD> Indicates the last module which reponds to the HBU module.
<DBMS_RSP_RECV> Indicates whether the HBU module receives the response of DBMS
about the backup status.
<DBMS_RSP_RESUL Indicates the result of DBMS backup.

T>
<RECOVER_RSP_RE Indicates whether the HBU module receives the response of DBMS
CV> about the recovery status.
<RECOVER_LASTM Indicates the ID of the last module of the standby card that provides
OD> the HBU module with the response indicating the end of the
recovery.
<CFG_STDBY_XC> Indicates whether the active card receives the response from the
standby card about the total config take effects.
<POST_RECOVER_R Indicates whether the HBU module receives the postrecovery

ECV> result.
<POST_RECOVER_L Indicates the last module that performs recovery.

ASTMOD>
<SMOOTH_LASTMO Indicates the last module that performs smoothly.

D>
<ACTIVE_VERINFO Indicates the version information about the active card.

>
<STDBY_VERINFO> Indicates the version information about the standby card.
Example
l Command
RTRV-BATCH-PROCESS:::100;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 1990-02-07 07:07:36 M 100 COMPLD
"PEERONLINE=0,VERVERIFY=SUCCESS,SYNCENABLE=ENABLE,NESTATE=NE_RUNNING,ASCOM=SUCCESS
,LASTAPPMOD=65535,DBMSRSPRECV=NOTREVEIVE,DBMSRSPRESLT=0,RECORSPRECV=REVEIVE,RECVER
LASTAPP=9,CFGSTDBYXC=RECEIVE,POSTRECV=RECEIVE,POSTLASTMOD=65535,SMOOTHLASTAPP=0,AC
TVERINFO= NeSoft(T) 5.51.04.21T01 Platform(D) 050021B012,STDVERINFO= NeSoft(T)
5.51.04.21T01 Platform(D) 050021B012" ;
Related Commands
None
A.11.13 RTRV-SYNC-ENABLE
Retrieves the reason of synchronization enabling or diabling.
Function
This command retrieves the reason of synchronization enabling or diabling.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-SYNC-ENABLE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"HANDLE=<HANDLE>,FILENAME=<FILE_NAME>,FILELINE=<FILE_LINE>"
<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
NA
Example
l Command

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
RTRV-SYNC-ENABLE:::100;
l Response Message
NE 1990-02-07 07:07:36
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.14 RTRV-DX-MODE
Retrieves the switching mode.
Function
This command retrieves the switching mode.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DX-MODE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"SWITCHMODE=<SWITCH_MODE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<SWITCH_MODE> Indicates the switching mode. The valid values are COLD
(reset occurs after the switching) and WARM (no reset occurs
after the switching).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-DX-MODE:::100;
l Response Message
NE 1990-02-07 07:07:36
M 100 COMPLD
"SWITCHMODE=WARM"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.15 RTRV-DX-WORK
Retrieves the ID and working status of the active SCC card and the ID and working status of the
standby SCC card.
Function
This command retrieves the ID and working status of the active SCC card and the ID and working
status of the standby SCC card.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DX-WORK:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"
ACTSLOT=<ACT_SLOT>,ACTWORK=<ACT_WORK>,STDBYSLOT=<STDBY_SLOT>,STDBYWORK=<STDBY_WORK
>"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<ACT_SLOT > Indicates the card ID.
<STDBY_SLOT> Indicates the card ID.
<ACT_WORK> Indicates the working status.
<STDBY_WORK> Indicates the working status.
Example
l Command
RTRV-DX-WORK:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-19 11:00:58
M 100 COMPLD
"ACTSLOT=SLOT-1-17,ACTWORK=GOOD,STDBYSLOT=SLOT-1-18,STDBYWORK=GOOD"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.16 RTRV-DX-EQPT
Retrieves the ID of the active SCC card and the ID of the standby SCC card.
Function
This command retrieves the ID of the active SCC card and the ID of the standby SCC card.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DX-EQPT:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^" ACTSLOT=<ACT_SLOT>,STDBYSLOT=<STDBY_SLOT>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<ACT_SLOT > Indicates the card ID.
<STDBY_SLOT> Indicates the card ID.
Example
l Command
RTRV-DX-EQPT:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-19 11:00:58
M 100 COMPLD
"ACTSLOT=SLOT-1-17,STDBYSLOT=SLOT-1-18"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.17 RTRV-HD-STA
Retrieves the hardware status.
Function
This command retrieves the hardware status.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-HD-STA:[<TID>]:<HSCSLOT_NUM>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<HSCSLOT_NUM> Indicates the card ID. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^" HDSTA=<HD_STA>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<HSCSLOT_NUM> Indicates the card ID.
Example
l Command
RTRV-HD-STA::SLOT-18:100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-19 11:00:58
M 100 COMPLD
HDSTA=<HF: 2>
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.18 RTRV-AS-ENABLE
Retrieves whether the switching is enabled or disabled.
Function
This command retrieves whether the switching is enabled or disabled.
Usage Note
None
Category

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-AS-ENABLE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^" ASENABLE=<HSCSWENABLE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<HSCSWENABLE> Indicates the switching status.
Example
l Command
RTRV-AS-ENABLE:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-19 11:00:58
M 100 COMPLD
ASENABLE=ENABLE;
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.19 RTRV-FORCELOCK-SUPPORT
Retrieves the information about whether the forced/locked switching is supported.
Function
This command retrieves the information about whether the forced/locked switching is supported.
Usage Note
Supported by OSP08 and later versions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-FORCELOCK- SUPPORT:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<FORCE_LOCK_SUPPORT>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<FORCE_LOCK_SUP- Indicates whether the forced/locked switching is supported.

PORT> The valid values are YES, NO, and NOT SURE. YES
indicates that the forced/locked switching is supported. NO
indicates that the forced/locked switching is not supported.
NOT SURE indicates whether the forced/locked switching is
supported is unknown.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FORCELOCK-SUPPORT:::100;
l Response Message
NE 1990-02-07 07:07:36
M 100 COMPLD
"YES"
;
Related Commands
None
A.11.20 RTRV-MANU-ENABLE
Retrieves the information about whether the switching is enabled or disabled and the reason.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command retrieves the information about whether the switching is enabled or disabled and
the reason.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MANU-ENABLE:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^" HANDLE=<HSC_HANDLE>,FILENAME=<HSCFILE_NAME>,FILELINE=<HSCFILE_LINE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<HSC_HANDLE> Indicates the handle name.
<HSCFILE_NAME> Indicates the file name.
<HSCFILE_LINE> Indicates the number of line.
Example
l Command
RTRV-MANU-ENABLE:::100;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-19 11:00:58
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
None
A.11.21 SW-DX-EQPT
Executes SCC protecting switch.
Function
This command executes SCC protecting switch.
Usage Note
None
Category
Security
maintenance
Command Syntax
SW-DX-EQPT:[<TID>]:<HSCSLOT_NUM>:<CTAG>::<HSCSWMODE>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
SW-DX-EQPT::SLOT-1-17:100::MANUAL;
l Response Message
M 100 COMPLD
;
>
DESMOINESPH-6800A-2 2012-05-16 14:27:31

A 36130 REPT SW
"SLOT-1-18,SLOT-1-17"
;
>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
None
A.12 Configuring Ethernet Related Protection
A.12.1 Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection

This section lists the commands used to configure the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).
A.12.1.1 ENT-ERPS
Creates ERPS on a card.
Function
This command creates ERPS on a card.
Usage Note
ERPS defines the APS protocol and a protection switching mechanism for an ETH layer Ethernet
ring.
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-ERPS:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::EASTPORT=<EASTPORT>,WESTPORT=<WESTPORT>,RP
LPORT=<RPLPORT>,RPLOWNER=<RPLOWNER>,CTRLVLAN=<CTRLVLAN>,DMA
C=<DMAC>,[GUARDTIME=<GUARDTIME>],[HOLDTIME=<HOLDTIME>],
[WTRTIME=<WTRTIME>],[MEL=<MEL>],[INTERVAL=<INTERVAL>];
Command Parameters
Value
<AID> ERPS-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<ERPS> NA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<EASTPORT> Indicates the east port. The valid values are as follows: NA
l 1-MAX_ETH_PORT: indicates an Ethernet port.
l 0x8001-0x8000+MAX_ETH_VCTRUNK:
indicates a VCTRUNK.
The valid formats are as follows:
FAC-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<PORT>
ACC-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<PORT>
<WESTPORT> Indicates the west port. The valid values are as follows: NA
<RPLPORT> Indicates the ring protection link (RPL) port. NA

0xFFFF: indicates an invalid port.
<RPLOWNER> Indicates the RPL owner flag. The valid values are as NOTOWNE
follows: R
l NOTOWNER: indicates that it is not an
RPLOWNER.
l OWNER: indicates that it is an RPLOWNER.
<CTRLVLAN> Indicates the VLAN that carries the control message of NA

the ERPS protocol. The valid value ranges from 1 to
4094. This parameter cannot be the same as a service
VLAN.
<DMAC> Indicates the destination MAC address. 01-19-

The value can only be set to 01-19-A7-00-00-01 in this A7-00-00-0
version, which is the default value. 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<GUARDTIME> Indicates the guard time. 500 ms

In the guard time, all received R-APS packets are
ignored by the ring protection control program,
therefore preventing a ring node from receiving expired
R-APS packets.
The valid value ranges from 10 ms to 2000 ms with a
step length of 10 ms.
<HOLDTIME> Indicates the protection hold-off time. 0ms

<WTRTIME> Indicates the WTR time. 5min

The valid value ranges from 5 minutes to 12 minutes
with a step length of 1 minute. The default value is 5
minutes.
<MEL> Indicates the maintenance entity level. 4

The valid value ranges from 0 to 7. The default value is
4.
<INTERVAL> Indicates the interval for transmitting R-APS packets. 5s

The valid value ranges from 1s to 10s with a step length
of 1s.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-
ERPS::ERPS-1-1-1:100:::EASTPORT=FAC-1-1-2,WESTPORT=FAC-1-1-3,RPLPORT=FAC-1-1-2,RPL
OWNER=OWNER,CTRLVLAN=1,DMAC=01-19-
A7-00-00-01,GUARDTIME=500,HOLDTIME=100,WTRTIME=5,MEL=4,INTERVAL=5;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.12.1.2 ED-ERPS
A.12.1.4 DLT-ERPS
A.12.1.3 RTRV-ERPS
A.12.1.2 ED-ERPS
Edits ERPS attributes.
Function
This command edits ERPS attributes.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-ERPS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[CTRLVLAN=<CTRLVLAN>],[DMAC=<DMAC>],
[GUARDTIME=<GUARDTIME>],[HOLDTIME=<HOLDTIME>],
[WTRTIME=<WTRTIME>],[MEL=<MEL>],[INTERVAL=<INTERVAL>];
Command Parameters
Value
<AID> Indicates the ERPS identifier. The valid format is ERPS- NA

<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<ERPS>.
<CTRLVLAN> Indicates the VLAN that carries the control message of NA

the ERPS protocol. The valid value ranges from 1 to
4094. This parameter cannot be the same as a service
VLAN.
<DMAC> Indicates the destination MAC address. NA

The value is set temporarily to 01-19-A7-00-00-01.
<GUARDTIME Indicates the guard time. 500ms

> The valid value ranges from 10 ms to 2000 ms with a

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<HOLDTIME> Indicates the protection hold-off time. 0ms

<WTRTIME> Indicates the wait-to-restore (WTR) time. 5min

The valid value ranges from 5 minutes to 12 minutes with
a step length of 1 minute. The default value is 5 minutes.
<MEL> Indicates the maintenance entity level. 4

The valid value ranges from 0 to 7. The default value is
4.
<INTERVAL> Indicates the interval for transmitting R-APS packets. 5s

The valid value ranges from 1s to 10s with a step length
of 1s.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-ERPS::ERPS-1-1-1:100:::CTRLVLAN=1,DMAC=01-19-
A7-00-00-01,GUARDTIME=500,HOLDTIME=100,WTRTIME=5,MEL=4,INTERVAL=5;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.1.1 ENT-ERPS
A.12.1.4 DLT-ERPS
A.12.1.3 RTRV-ERPS
A.12.1.3 RTRV-ERPS
Retrieves ERPS attributes.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command retrieves ERPS attributes.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ERPS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Value

The "&" and "&&" symbols are supported. The valid formats
are as follows:
l ERPS-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<ERPS>: indicates querying a
certain ERPS attribute.
l ERPS-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-ALL: indicates querying all
ERPS attributes of a card.
l All ERPS attributes on the equipment will be queried if
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::EASTPORT=<EASTPORT>,WESTPORT=<WESTPORT>,RPLPORT=<RPLPORT>,RPLOWNER=<RPL
OWNER>,CTRLVLAN=<CTRLVLAN>,DMAC=<DMAC>,NODEID=<NODEID>,
[LASTREQUEST=<LASTREQUEST>],[RECVPKTRB=<RECVPKTRB>],[RECVPKTDNF=<RECVPKTDNF>],
[FSMSTATE=<FSMSTATE>],[RECVPKTNODEID=<RECVPKTNODEID>],[GUARDTIME=<GUARDTIME>],
[HOLDTIME=<HOLDTIME>],[WTRTIME=<WTRTIME>],[MEL=<MEL>],
[INTERVAL=<INTERVAL>]"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the ERPS identifier. The valid format is ERPS-<SHELF>-

<SLOT>-<ERPS>.
<EASTPORT> Indicates the east port. The valid formats are as follows:
<WESTPORT> Indicates the west port. The valid formats are as follows:
<RPLPORT> Indicates the RPL port. The valid formats are as follows:
0xFFFF: indicates an invalid port.
<RPLOWNER> Indicates the enable status of RPLOwner. The valid values are Y(1)
and N(0). The default value is N(0).
<CTRLVLAN> Indicates the identifier of the VLAN for control message of the ERPS
protocol.
<DMAC> Indicates the destination MAC address.

The valid value ranges from 01-19-A7-00-00-00 to 01-19-A7-00- 00
-FF. The value is set to 01-19-A7-00-00-01 in this version, which is
the default value.
<NODEID> Indicates the ID of the current node.

The value is set temporarily to 01-19-A7-00-00-01.
<LASTREQUEST Indicates the type of the most recent ERPS switching request. The valid
> values are as follows:
l RAPS(NR): a ring network automatic protection switching (RAPS)
message indicating no request
l RAPS(NR,RB): an RAPS message indicating no request and that
the ring protection link is blocked
l WTR-RUNNING: a message indicating that the WTR timer is in
a running state.
l WTR-EXPIRES: a message indicating that the WTR timer has
timed out
l RAPS(SF): an RAPS message indicating a signal failure
l LOCAL-SF: a message indicating a signal failure on the local node
l LOCAL-CLEAR-SF: a message indicating that the signal failure
on the local node is cleared
l INITIAL-REQUEST: the initial request

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<RECVPKTRB> Indicates the RB status on the current ring. The valid values are as
follows:
l NORB
l RB
<RECVPKTDNF> Indicates whether the DNF status is contained in a remote request. The
l NODNF
l DNF
<FSMSTATE> Indicates the status of the state machine on the current node.
IDLE
PROTECTION
<RECVPKTNODE Indicates the source node of the switching request, that is, the source
ID> MAC address of the switching.
<GUARDTIME> Indicates the guard time.

The valid value ranges from 10 ms to 2000 ms with a step length of 10
ms.
<HOLDTIME> Indicates the protection hold-off time.

The valid value ranges from 0 ms to 10000 ms with a step length of
100 ms.
<WTRTIME> Indicates the WTR time.

The valid value ranges from 5 minutes to 12 minutes with a step length
of 1 minute. The default value is 5 minutes.
<MEL> Indicates the maintenance entity level.

The valid value ranges from 0 to 7. The default value is 4.
<INTERVAL> Indicates the interval for transmitting R-APS packets.

The valid value ranges from 1s to 10s with a step length of 1s.
Example
l Command
RTRV-ERPS::ERPS-1-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"ERPS-1-1-1:: EASTPORT=FAC-1-1-2, WESTPORT=FAC-1-1-3, RPLPORT=FAC-1-1-2,
RPLOWNER=OWNER,CTRLVLAN=1,DMAC=01-19-A7-00-00-01, NODEID=01-19-
A7-00-00-01,LASTREQUEST= LOCAL-SF,RECVPKTRB=RB,RECVPKTDNF=DNF,FSMSTATE=
PROTECTION, RECVPKTNODEID =01-80-
C2-00-00-00,GUARDTIME=500,HOLDTIME=100,WTRTIME=5,MEL=4,INTERVAL=5"
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.12.1.1 ENT-ERPS
A.12.1.2 ED-ERPS
A.12.1.4 DLT-ERPS
A.12.1.4 DLT-ERPS
Deletes ERPS.
Function
This command deletes ERPS on a card.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-ERPS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Value

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
M^^<CTAG>^COMPLD <cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
DLT-ERPS::ERPS-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.1.1 ENT-ERPS
A.12.1.2 ED-ERPS
A.12.1.3 RTRV-ERPS
A.12.1.5 REPTÊVTÊRPS
Reports the switching state of ERPS.
Function
This command reports the switching state of ERPS.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
A^^<ATAG>^REPTÊVTÊRPS<cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>:<REQUEST>,<STATE>" <cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the ERPS identifier. The valid format is ERPS-<SHELF>-

<SLOT>-<ERPS>.
<REQUEST> Indicates the type of the most recent ERPS switching request. The valid
l RAPS(NR): a ring network automatic protection switching (RAPS)
message indicating no request
l RAPS(NR,RB): an RAPS message indicating no request and that
the ring protection link is blocked
l WTR-RUNNING: a message indicating that the WTR timer is in
a running state.
l WTR-EXPIRES: a message indicating that the WTR timer has
timed out
l RAPS(SF): an RAPS message indicating a signal failure
l LOCAL-SF: a message indicating a signal failure on the local node
l LOCAL-CLEAR-SF: a message indicating that the signal failure
on the local node is cleared
l INITIAL-REQUEST: the initial request
<STATE> Indicates the switching state.

l Idle
l Protection
Example
l Command
RTRV-ERPS::ERPS-1-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
A 100 REPT EVT ERPS
"ERPS-1-1-2: Local SF, Protection "
;
Related Commands
None
A.12.2 Configuring LAG

This section lists the commands used to configure the LAG function.
A.12.2.1 ENT-LAG
Creates a link aggregation group (LAG).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command creates a LAG in the unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-LAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[TYPE=<TYPE>],[BALANCE=<BALANCE>],
[SLVPORTS=<SLVPORTS>],[NAME=<NAME>],
[LAGSHAREMODE=<LAGSHAREMODE>],[LAGHOTIME=<LAGHOTIME>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the master port of the LAG. NA

l ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
<TYPE> Indicates the LAG type. STATIC

The valid values are MANUAL and STATIC.
<BALANCE> Indicates whether the load-balance function is Y

enabled.
The valid values are Y and N.
<SLVPORTS Indicates the list of slave ports in a LAG. NA

> The valid formats is FAC(ACC)-<SHELF ID>-
This parameter supports the "&" and "&&" symbols.
The valid format is
l FAC(ACC)-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>&FAC(ACC)-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>
l FAC(ACC)-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>&&-<PORT ID>
<NAME> Indicates the name of the LAG. The valid value is a NA

string of 0 to 31 bytes.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LAGSHARE Indicates the mode of LAG share load. NA

MODE> The valid values are IP and MAC.
<LAGHOTIM Indicates the time of LAG holding. NA

E>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-
LAG::FAC-1-1-1:100:::TYPE=MANUAL,BALANCE=Y,SLVPORTS=FAC-1-1-2&-3,NAME=HUAWEI,LAGSH
AREMODE=IP,LAGHOTIME=500;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 16:55:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.2 ED-LAG
A.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
A.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
A.12.2.2 ED-LAG
Edits a LAG (link aggregation group).
Function
This command modifies the attributes of the LAG in the unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-LAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[SLVPORTS=<SLVPORTS>],[NAME=<NAME>],
[LAGSHAREMODE=<LAGSHAREMODE>],[LAGHOTIME=<LAGHOTIME>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the master port of a LAG. NA

<SLVPORTS Indicates the list of slave ports in a LAG. NA

> The valid formats are as follows:
It supports the "&" and "&&" symbols.
<NAME> Indicate the name of the LAG. The valid value is a NA

<LAGSHAR Indicates the mode of LAG share load. NA

EMODE> The valid values are IP and MAC.
<LAGHOTI Indicates the time of LAG holding. NA

ME>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-
LAG::FAC-1-1-1:100:::SLVPORTS=FAC-1-1-1&FAC-1-1-2,NAME=HUAWEI,LAGSHAREMODE=IP,LAGH
OTIME=500;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.1 ENT-LAG
A.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
A.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
A.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
Deletes a link aggregation group (LAG).
Function
This command deletes a LAG in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-LAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-LAG::FAC-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.1 ENT-LAG
A.12.2.2 ED-LAG
A.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
A.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
Retrieves the attributes of a link aggregation group (LAG).
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of a LAG in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-LAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters

Supports ALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[TYPE=<TYPE>],[BALANCE=<BALANCE>],[SLVPORTS=<SLVPORTS>],
[REFPORT=<REFPORT>],[LOCSYSPRI=<LOCSYSPRI>],[LOCSYSMAC=<LOCSYSMAC>],
[DSTSYSPRI=<DSTSYSPRI>],[DSTSYSMAC=<DSTSYSMAC>],[SELECTED=<SELECTED>],
[STANDBY=<STANDBY>],[LOCPORT=<LOCPORT>],[WORKSTATE=<WORKSTATE>],
[LOCPORTSTA=<LOCPORTSTA>],[LOCPORTPRI=<LOCPORTPRI>],[LOCOPRKEY=<LOCOPRKEY>],
[LOCLACP=<LOCLACP>],[DSTPORT=<DSTPORT>],[DSTPORTPRI=<DSTPORTPRI>],
[DSTOPRKEY=<DSTOPRKEY>],[DSTLACP=<DSTLACP>],[ACTPORTS=<ACTPORTS>],
[NAME=<NAME>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the master port of the LAG.

<TYPE> Indicates the type of the LAG.

The valid values are MANUAL and STATIC.
<BALANCE> Indicates whether load balance is enabled.

<SLVPORTS> Indicates the list of slave ports in a LAG.

<REFPORT> Indicates the reference port of a LAG.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LOCSYSPRI> Indicates the priority of the local LAG system.

The initial value is 32768.
<LOCSYSMAC> Indicates the MAC address of the local LAG system.
<DSTSYSPRI> Indicates the priority of the destination LAG system.

<DSTSYSMAC> Indicates the MAC address of the destination LAG system.
<SELECTED> Indicates the selected port ID of the aggregation group.
<STANDBY> Indicates the standby port ID of the aggregation group.
<LOCPORT> Indicates the local port ID.

<WORKSTATE> Indicates the status of the local LAG port. The valid values are Y and
N.
<LOCPORTSTA> Indicates the local port state. The valid values are SELECTED,
STANDBY and UNSELECTED.
<LOCPORTPRI> Indicates the local port priority.

<LOCOPRKEY> Indicates the local operate key.

<LOCLACP> Indicates the local Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) state.
<DSTPORT> Indicates the destination port ID.

The valid format is Ethernet port identifier.
<DSTPORTPRI> Indicates the destination port priority.

<DSTOPRKEY> Indicates the destination operate key.

<DSTLACP> Indicates the destination LACP state.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<ACTPORTS> Indicates the list of active ports on the aggregation group.

<NAME> Indicates the name of the LAG. The valid value is a string of 0 to 31
bytes.
Example
l Command
RTRV-LAG::FAC-1-1-ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 18:05:00
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-1::TYPE=MANUAL,BALANCE=Y,SLVPORTS=FAC-1-2-1,REFPORT=FAC-1-3,LOCSYSPRI=327
68,LOCSYSMAC=00-00-00-00-00-01,DSTSYSPRI=32768,DSTSYSMAC=00-00-00-00-00-02,SELECTE
D=1,STANDBY=0,LOCPORT=FAC-1-1-2,WORKSTATE=Y,LOCPORTSTA=SELECTED,LOCPORTPRI=32768,L
OCLACP=ENABLE,DSTPORT=FAC-1-1-2,DSTPORTPRI=32768,DSTLACP=ENABLE,ACTPORTS=FAC-1-1-1
&FAC-1-1-2,NAME=HUAWEI"
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.1 ENT-LAG
A.12.2.2 ED-LAG
A.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
A.12.2.5 ED-LAGSYS
Edits system attributes of a link aggregation group (LAG).
Function
This command modifies the attributes of a LAG.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
ED-LAGSYS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PRIORITY=<PRIORITY>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the unit identifier. NA

The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
<PRIORITY Indicates the priority of the LAG system. 32768

> The valid value ranges from 0 to 65535.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-LAGSYS::SLOT-1-1:100:::PRIORITY=1;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.6 RTRV-LAGSYS
A.12.2.6 RTRV-LAGSYS
Retrieves the attributes of a LAG system.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of a LAG system.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-LAGSYS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the unit identifier. NA

The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<SLOT>::[PRIORITY=<PRIORITY>],[MAC=<MAC>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<SLOT> Indicates the unit identifier.
<PRIORITY> Indicates the priority of the LAG system.

<MAC> Indicates the MAC address of the LAG system.
Example
l Command
RTRV-LAGSYS::SLOT-1-1:100;
RTRV-LAGSYS::SLOT-ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 18:05:00
M 100 COMPLD
"SLOT-1-1::PRIORITY=1,MAC=00-00-00-00-00-01"
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.12.2.5 ED-LAGSYS
A.12.2.7 ED-LAGPORT
Edits ports in a link aggregation group (LAG).
Function
This command modifies attributes of ports in a LAG.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-LAGPORT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::PRIORITY=<PRIORITY>;
Command Parameters
Parameter Para Description Default Value
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet facility that is composed of the NA

slot number and port ID.
<PRIORITY> Indicates the priority of the LAG port. 32768

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ED-LAGPORT::FAC-1-1-1:100:::PRIORITY=1;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.8 RTRV-LAGPORT
Retrieves the port attributes of a link aggregation group (LAG).
Function
This command retrieves the port attributes of a LAG.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-LAGPORT:<TID>:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::[FRAMETYPE=<FRAMETYPE>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet facility which is composed of the NA

Supports ALL.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<FRAMETY Indicates the frame type. ALL

PE> The valid value are as follows:
l RCVLACPDU: Link Aggregation Protocol
(LACP) frames received
l RCVERRLACPDU: errored LACP frames
received
l SNDLACPDU: LACP frames sent
l ALL: all LACP frames
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[LOCSYSPRI=<LOCSYSPRI>],[LOCSYSMAC=<LOCSYSMAC>],[PRIORITY=<PRIORITY>],
[KEY=<KEY>],[LOCLACP=<LOCLACP>],[DSTSYSPRI=<DSTSYSPRI>],[DSTSYSMAC=<DSTSYSMAC>],
[DSTPORT=<DSTPORT>],[DSTPRI=<DSTPRI>],[DSTKEY=<DSTKEY>],[DSTLACP=<DSTLACP>],
[<RCVLACPDUNUM>=<RCVLACPDUNUM>],[<RCVERRLACPDUNUM >=<RCVERRLACPDUNUM>],
[<SNDLACPDUNUM>=<SNDLACPDUNUM>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet facility which is composed of the slot number
and port ID.
<LOCSYSPRI> Indicates the priority of the local LAG system.

<LOCSYSMAC> Indicates the MAC address of the local LAG system.
<PRIORITY> Indicates the priority of the LAG system.

<KEY> Indicates the operate key of the LAG port.

<LOCLACP> Indicates the local LACP (link aggregation control protocol) state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<DSTSYSPRI> Indicates the priority of the destination LAG system.

<DSTSYSMAC> Indicates the MAC address of the destination LAG system.
<DSTPORT> Indicates the destination port.
<DSTPRI> Indicates the priority of the destination port.
<DSTKEY> Indicates the operator key of the destination port.

<DSTLACP> Indicates the destination LACP (link aggregation control protocol)

state.
<RCVLACPDUN Indicates the number of LACP frames received.

UM>
<RCVERRLACP Indicates the number of errored LACP frames received.

DUNUM>
<SNDLACPDUN Indicates the number of LACP frames sent.

UM>
Example
l Command
RTRV-LAGPORT::FAC-1-1-1:100:::FRAMETYPE=RCVLACPDU;
RTRV-LAGPORT::FAC-1-1-ALL:100:::FRAMETYPE=RCVLACPDU;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 18:05:00
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-5::LOCSYSPRI=32768,LOCSYSMAC=00-00-
ef-10-38-10,PRIORITY=32768,KEY=257,LOCLACP=71,DSTSYSPRI=32768,DSTSYSMAC=00-00-00-0
0-00-00,DSTPRI=32768,DSTKEY=0,DSTLACP=48,RCVLACPDUNUM=0,RCVERRLACPDUNUM=0,SNDLACPD
UNUM=0"
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.7 ED-LAGPORT
A.12.2.9 INIT-LAGPORT
Initializes the port attributes of a LAG.
Function
This command initiates the port attributes of a LAG.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
INIT-LAGPORT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[FRAMETYPE=<FRAMETYPE>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet facility of the slot number and NA

port ID.
<FRAMETYP Indicates the frame type. ALL

E> The valid values are as follows:
l RCVLACPDU: link aggregation protocol
(LACP) frames received
l RCVERRLACPDU: errored LACP frames
received
l SNDLACPDU: LACP frames sent
l ALL: all the LACP frames
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INIT-LAGPORT::FAC-1-1-1:100:::FRAMETYPE=ALL;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.7 ED-LAGPORT
A.12.2.10 ENT-DLAG
Creates a distributed link aggregation group (DLAG).
Function
This command creates a DLAG between two units.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-DLAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[MSTPORTPRI=<MSTPORTPRI>],
[SLVPORT=<SLVPORT>],[SLVPORTPRI=<SLVPORTPRI>],[NAME=<NAME>],
[SYSPRI=<SYSPRI>],[RVRTV=<RVRTV>];
Command Parameters
Value

<PORT ID>.
<MSTPORTPRI> Indicates the priority of the master port on the LAG. 32768
The port with the higher priority is the master port if a
LAG involves two or more cards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<SLVPORT> Indicates the list of slave ports in the LAG. NA

<PORT ID>.
<SLVPORTPRI> Indicates the priority of the salve port on the LAG. 32768
<NAME> Indicates the name of the DLAG. The valid format is NA

a string of 0 to 31 bytes.
<SYSPRI> Indicates the system priority. 32768

The LAG with the higher system priority dominates
when negotiating with peer equipment if a LAG
involves two or more cards.
<RVRTV> Indicates the revertive mode. The valid values are Y Y

(revertive) and N (non-revertive mode).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-
DLAG::FAC-1-1-3:100:::MSPORTPRI=8,SLVPORT=FAC-1-1-4,SLVPORTPRI=8,NAME=aaa,SYSPRI=9
,RVRTV=N;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-05 16:55:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.11 ED-DLAG
A.12.2.12 DLT-DLAG
A.12.2.13 RTRV-DLAG

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.12.2.11 ED-DLAG
Edits a distributed link aggregation group (DLAG).
Function
This command modifies the attributes of a DLAG between two units.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-DLAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[MSTPORTPRI=<MSTPORTPRI>],
[SLVPORTPRI=<SLVPORTPRI>],[NAME=<NAME>],[SYSPRI=<SYSPRI>],
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>];
Command Parameters

<PORT ID>.
<MSTPORTP Indicates the priority of the master port on the LAG. 32768
RI> The port with the higher priority is the master port if a
LAG involves two or more cards.
<SLVPORTP Indicates the priority of the salve port on the LAG. 32768
RI> The valid value ranges from 0 to 65535.
<NAME> Indicates the name of the DLAG. The valid format is a NA

<SYSPRI> Indicates the system priority. 32768

The LAG with the higher system priority dominates
when negotiating with peer equipment if a LAG
involves two or more cards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

(revertive) and N (non-revertive mode).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-DLAG::FAC-1-1-3-4:100:::MSTPORTPRI=8,SLVPORTPRI=8,NAME=DLAG-A,SYSPRI=9,RVRTV=n;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 16:55:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.10 ENT-DLAG
A.12.2.12 DLT-DLAG
A.12.2.13 RTRV-DLAG
A.12.2.12 DLT-DLAG
Deletes a distributed link aggregation group (DLAG).
Function
This command deletes a DLAG between two units.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
DLT-LAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

<PORT ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-DLAG::FAC-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-10 15:33:17
M 10 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.10 ENT-DLAG
A.12.2.11 ED-DLAG
A.12.2.13 RTRV-DLAG
A.12.2.13 RTRV-DLAG
Retrieves the information about a distributed link aggregation group (DLAG).
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of a DLAG between two units.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DLAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[FRAMETYPE=<FRAMETYPE>];
Command Parameters
Value

ID>.
Supports ALL.
<FRAMET Indicates the frame type. The valid value are as follows: ALL
YPE> l RCVLACPDU
l RCVERRLACPDU
l SNDLACPDU
l ALL
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"::[MSTPORT=<MSTPORT>],[MSTPORTPRI=<MSTPORTPRI>],[SLVPORT=<SLVPORT>],
[SLVPORTPRI=<SLVPORTPRI>],[NAME=<NAME>],[SYSPRI=<SYSPRI>], [SYSMAC=<SYSMAC>],
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>],[WORKPORT=<WORKPORT>],[LOCMSTPORT=<LOCMSTPORT>],
[LOCMSTPORTSTA=<LOCMSTPORTSTA>],[LOCMSTPORTPRI=<LOCMSTPORTPRI>],
[LOCMSTOPRKEY=<LOCMSTOPRKEY>],[LOCMSTLACP=<LOCMSTLACP>], [DSTSYSPRI=<DSTSYSPRI>],
[DSTSYSMAC=<DSTSYSMAC>],[DSTMSTPORT=<DSTMSTPORT>],[DSTMSTPORTPRI=<DSTMSTPORTPRI>],
[DSTMSTOPRKEY=<DSTMSTOPRKEY>],[DSTMSTLACP=<DSTMSTLACP>],[LOCSLVPORT=<LOCSLVPORT>],
[LOCSLVPORTSTA=<LOCSLVPORTSTA>],[LOCSLVPORTPRI=<LOCSLVPORTPRI>],
[LOCSLVOPRKEY=<LOCSLVOPRKEY>],[LOCSLVLACP=<LOCSLVLACP>],[DSTSLVPORT=<DSTSLVPORT>],
[DSTSLVPORTPRI=<DSTSLVPORTPRI>],[DSTSLVOPRKEY=<DSTSLVOPRKEY>],
[DSTSLVLACP=<DSTSLVLACP>],[SHAREMODE=<SHAREMODE>],
[<MSTRCVLACPDUNUM>=<MSTRCVLACPDUNUM>],[<MSTRCVERRLACPDUNUM>=<MSTRCVERRLACPDUNUM>],
[<MSTSNDLACPDUNUM>=<MSTSNDLACPDUNUM>],[<SLVRCVLACPDUNUM>=<SLVRCVLACPDUNUM>],
[<SLVRCVERRLACPDUNUM>=<SLVRCVERRLACPDUNUM>],
[<SLVSNDLACPDUNUM>=<SLVSNDLACPDUNUM>]"<cr><lf>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
Parameter Para Description
<AID> Indicates the master port on the LAG.

<MSPORTPRI> Indicates the master port priority of the DLAG.

In the DLAG, the port with the highest priority serves as the master
port.
<SLVPORT> Indicates the list of slave ports on the LAG.

<SLVPORTPRI> Indicates the slave port priority of the DLAG
<NAME> Indicates the name of the DLAG. The valid format is a string of 0 to
31 bytes.
<SYSPRI> Indicates the local system priority.

The DLAG with the higher system priority dominates when
negotiating with peer equipment.
<SYSMAC> Indicates the MAC address of local system.
<RVRTV> Indicates the revertive mode. The valid values are Y (revertive mode)
and N (non-revertive mode).
<WORKPORT> Indicates the working port ID of the LAG.

<LOCMSTPORT> Indicates the local master port ID.

<LOCMSTPORTS Indicates the local master port state. The valid values are SELECTED
TA> and STANDBY.
<LOCMSTPORTP Indicates the local master port priority.

RI>
<LOCMSTOPRKE Indicates the local master operate key.

Y>
<LOCMSTLACP> Indicates the local master link aggregation control protocol (LACP)
state. The valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
<DSTSYSPRI> Indicates the destination system priority.
<DSTSYSMAC> Indicates the MAC address of destination system.
<DSTMSTPORT> Indicates the destination master port ID.

<DSTMSTPORTP Indicates the destination master port priority.

RI>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<DSTMSTOPRKE Indicates the destination master operate key.

Y>
<DSTMSTLACP> Indicates the destination master LACP state. The valid values are
ENABLE and DISABLE.
<LOCSLVPORT> Indicates the local slave port ID.

<LOCSLVPORTS Indicates the local slave port state. The valid values are SELECTED
TA> and STANDBY.
<LOCSLVPORTP Indicates the local slave port priority.

RI>
<LOCSLVOPRKE Indicates the local slave operate key.

Y>
<LOCSLVLACP> Indicates the local slave LACP state. The valid values are ENABLE
and DISABLE.
<DSTSLVPORT> Indicates the destination slave port ID.

<DSTSLVPORTP Indicates the destination slave port priority.

RI>
<DSTSLVOPRKE Indicates the destination slave operate key.

Y>
<DSTSLVLACP> Indicates the destination slave LACP state. The valid values are
ENABLE and DISABLE.
<SHAREMODE> Indicates the share mode. The valid values are SHARE and
NONSHARE.
<MSTRCVLACPD Indicates the master card's RCVLACPDU frame number.

UNUM>
<MSTRCVERRLA Indicates the master card's RCVERRLACPDU frame number.

CPDUNUM>
<MSTSNDLACPD Indicates the master card's SNDLACPDU frame number.

UNUM>
<SLVRCVLACPD Indicates the slave card's RCVLACPDU frame number.

UNUM>
<SLVRCVERRLA Indicates the slave card's RCVERRLACPDU frame number.

CPDUNUM>
<SLVSNDLACPD Indicates the slave card's SNDLACPDU frame number.

UNUM>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-DLAG::FAC-2-5-5:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-25 18:38:24
M C COMPLD
"FAC-3-11::MSPORTPRI=8,SLVPORT=FAC-4-11,SLVPORTPRI=8,NAME=aaa,SYSPRI=9,SYSMAC=00-
ab-ca-
ef-12-34,RVRTV=Y,WORKPORT=FAC-0-0,LOCMSTPORT=FAC-3-11,LOCMSTPORTSTA=UNSELECTED,LOC
MSTPORTPRI=8,LOCMSTOPRKEY=33025,LOCMSTLACP=71,DSTSYSPRI=32768,DSTSYSMAC=00-00-00-0
0-00-00,DSTMSTPORTPRI=32768,DSTMSTOPRKEY=0,DSTMSTLACP=48,LOCSLVPORT=FAC-4-11,LOCSL
VPORTSTA=UNSELECTED,LOCSLVPORTPRI=8,LOCSLVOPRKEY=33025,LOCSLVLACP=71,DSTSLVPORTPRI
=32768,DSTSLVOPRKEY=0,DSTSLVLACP=48,SHAREMODE=NONSHARE"
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.10 ENT-DLAG
A.12.2.11 ED-DLAG
A.12.2.12 DLT-DLAG
A.12.2.14 DLT-MCLAG
Deletes a multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG).
Function
This command deletes an MC-LAG.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-MCLAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the master port of the local LAG. NA

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-MCLAG::FAC-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
ENT-MCLAGA.12.2.1 ENT-LAG
ED-MCLAGA.12.2.2 ED-LAG
RTRV-MCLAGA.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
A.12.2.15 ED-MCLAG
Modifies a multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG).
Function
This command modifies an MC-LAG.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-MCLAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[MCSP=<MCSP>],[RVRTV=<RVRTV>],
[RVTM=<RVTM>],[ASSPORT=<ASSPORT>];
Command Parameters

<MCSP> Indicates the master port of the MCSP. NA

<RVRTV> Indicates the reversion mode. NA

Y: revertive
N: non-revertive
<RVTM> Indicates the reversion time. NA

The value ranges from 1 minute to 12 minutes.
Note: This parameter is unavailable when users set
RVRTV to N.
<ASSPORT> Indicates the list of south ports. NA

l The valid formats are as follows:
– ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
– Support the & and && symbol.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ED-MCLAG::FAC-1-1-1:100:::MCSP=ACC-1-1-1,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=10,ASSPORT=FAC-1-1-2&-3;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
RTRV-MCLAGA.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
DLT-MCLAGA.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
A.12.2.16 ENT-MCLAG
Creates a multi-chassis link aggregation group (MC-LAG).
Function
This command creates an MC-LAG.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-MCLAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::RMTLAG=<RMTLAG>,MCSP=<MCSP>,
[PROTTYPE=<PROTTYPE>],[RVRTV=<RVRTV>],[RVTM=<RVTM>],
[ASSPORT=<ASSPORT>];
Command Parameters


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<RMTLAG> Indicates the master port of the remote LAG. NA

<MCSP> Indicates the master port of the MCSP. NA

<PROTTYPE Indicates the type of protection that can be configured ERPS

> with MC-LAG.
ERPS
MSSNCP
<RVRTV> Indicates the reversion mode. Y

Y: revertive
N: non-revertive
<RVTM> Indicates the reversion time. 5

Note: This parameter is unavailable when users set
RVRTV to N.
<ASSPORT> Indicates the list of south ports. NA

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-
MCLAG::FAC-1-1-1:100:::RMTLAG=FAC-1-1-1,MCSP=ACC-1-1-1,PROTTYPE=ERPS,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=
1,ASSPORT=FAC-1-1-2&-3;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2005-08-05 16:55:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
RTRV-MCLAGA.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
DLT-MCLAGA.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
A.12.2.17 RTRV-MCLAG
Queries an MC-LAG.
Function
This command queries an MC-LAG.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MCLAG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

Supports ALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::RMTLAG=<RMTLAG>,MCSP=<MCSP>,PROTTYPE=<PROTTYPE>,[RVRTV=<RVRTV>],
[RVTM=<RVTM>],[ASSPORT=<ASSPORT>],[MCLAGSTAT=<MCLAGSTAT>],

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
[LAGSTAT=<LAGSTAT>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the master port of the local LAG.

<RMTLAG> Indicates the master port of the remote LAG.

<MCSP> Indicates the master port of the MCSP.

<PROTTYPE> Indicates the type of protection that can be configured with MC-LAG.
ERPS
MSSNCP
<RVRTV> Indicates the reversion mode.

Y: revertive
N: non-revertive
<RVTM> Indicates the reversion time.

Note: This parameter is unavailable when users set RVRTV to N.
<ASSPORT> Indicates the list of south ports.

<MCLAGSTAT> Indicates the working status of the MC-LAG. The local LAG
cooperates with the remote LAG when the communication between
them is normal. They work independently and the client equipment
selectively receives services when the communication between them
is abnormal.
COLLABORATIVE: The local LAG cooperates with the remote
LAG.
INDEPENDENT: The local LAG and remote LAG work
independently.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LAGSTAT> Indicates the status of the local LAG.

ACTIVE: The local LAG is in active state.
STANDBY: The local LAG is in standby state.
Example
l Command
RTRV-MCLAG::FAC-1-1-1:100;
RTRV-MCLAG::FAC-1-1-ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 18:05:00
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-1::RMTLAG=FAC-1-1-1,MCSP=ACC-1-1-1,PROTTYPE=ERPS,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=5,ASSPORT=F
AC-1-1-2&FAC-1-1-3,MCLAGSTAT=COLLABORATIVE,LAGSTAT=ACTIVE"
;
Related Commands
DLT-MCLAGA.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
A.12.2.18 DLT-MCSP
Deletes a multi-chassis service path (MCSP).
Function
This command deletes an MCSP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-MCSP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the master port of the MCSP. NA

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-MCSP::FAC-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
ENT-MCSPA.12.2.1 ENT-LAG
ED-MCSPA.12.2.2 ED-LAG
RTRV-MCSPA.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
A.12.2.19 ED-MCSP
Modifies a multi-chassis service path (MCSP).
Function
This command modifies an MCSP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-MCSP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[MONTM=<MONTM>];
Command Parameters

<MONTM> Indicates the interval for sending Hello packets that 1

are used for monitoring faults.
The value ranges from 1s to 10s.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-MCSP::FAC-1-1-1:100:::MONTM=10;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
ENT-MCSPA.12.2.1 ENT-LAG
RTRV-MCSPA.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
DLT-MCSPA.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
A.12.2.20 ENT-MCSP
Creates a multi-chassis synchronization protocol (MCSP).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command creates an MCSP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-MCSP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::COMMFLAG=<COMMFLAG>,
[MONTM=<MONTM>];
Command Parameters

<COMMFLA Indicates the MCSP number. The MCSP number is NA

G> unique on each board. The local MSCP can
communicate with the peer MCSP only when they
have the same number.
The value ranges from 1 to MAX_ETH_MCSP.
Note: MAX_ETH_MCSP indicates the maximum
number of MCSPs that can be configured on a board.
<MONTM> Indicates the interval for sending Hello packets that 1

are used for monitoring faults.
The value ranges from 1s to 10s.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ENT-MCSP::FAC-1-1-1:100:::COMMFLAG=1,MONTM=10;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 16:55:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
ED-MCSPA.12.2.2 ED-LAG
RTRV-MCSPA.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
DLT-MCSPA.12.2.4 RTRV-LAG
A.12.2.21 RTRV-MCSP
Queries an MCSP.
Function
This command queries an MCSP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MCSP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

Supports ALL.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::COMMFLAG=<COMMFLAG>,MONTM=<MONTM>,STAT=<STAT>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the master port of the MCSP.

<COMMFLAG> Indicates the MCSP number. The MCSP number is unique on each
board. The local MSCP can communicate with the peer MCSP only
when they have the same number.
The value ranges from 1 to MAX_ETH_MCSP.
l Note: MAX_ETH_MCSP indicates the maximum number of
MCSPs that can be configured on a board.
<MONTM> Indicates the interval for sending Hello packets that are used for
monitoring faults.
l The value ranges from 1s to 10s.
<STAT> Indicates the peer status.

The valid values are UP, DOWN, and UNKNOWN.
Example
l Command
RTRV-MCSP::FAC-1-1-1:100;
RTRV-MCSP::FAC-1-1-ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 18:05:00
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-1::COMMFLAG=1,MONTM=10,STAT=UP"
;
Related Commands
DLT-MCLAGA.12.2.3 DLT-LAG
A.12.2.22 INIT-LACP-PKT
Clears statistics on the number of transmitted and received Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) packets.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command clears statistics on the number of transmitted and received LACP packets.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
INIT-LACP-PKT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::PKTTYPE=<PKTTYPE>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet facility of the slot number and NA

port ID.
<PKTTYPE> Indicates the type of LACP packet statistics to be NA

cleared.
The value ranges from 0 to 3. Meaning of the values
are as follows:
l 1: number of received LACPDUs
l 2: number of received error LACPDUs
l 3: number of transmitted LACPDUs
l 0: number of each type of LACPDUs
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
INIT-LACP-PKT::FAC-1-1-1:100:::PKTTYPE=1;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
RTRV-LACP-PKTA.12.2.7 ED-LAGPORT
A.12.2.23 RTRV-LACP-PKT
Queries statistics on the number of transmitted and received LACP packets.
Function
This command queries statistics on the number of transmitted and received LACP packets.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-LACP-PKT:<TID>:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::PKTTYPE=<PKTTYPE>;
Command Parameters

Supports ALL.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PKTTYPE> Indicates the type of LACP packet statistics to be NA

queried.
The value ranges from 0 to 3. Meaning of the values
are as follows:
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::PKTTYPE=<PKTTYPE>,PKTCNT=<PKTCNT>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
and port ID.
<PKTTYPE> Indicates the type of LACP packet statistics to be queried.

The value ranges from 0 to 3. Meaning of the values are as follows:
<PKTCNT> Indicates the number of LACP packets of the specified type.
Example
l Command
RTRV-LACP-PKT::FAC-1-1-1:100:::PKTTYPE=1;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 18:05:00
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-1::PKTTYPE=1,PKTCNT=100"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
INIT-LACP-PKTA.12.2.7 ED-LAGPORT
A.12.2.24 INIT-LAGSTAST-<FETH/GETH>
Clear the counter of linkagg port.
Function
Clear the counter of linkagg port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Debug
Command Syntax
INIT-LAGSTAT-<FETH/GETH>:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::FRAMETYPE=<FRAMETYPE>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Valid value can be following: NA

<PORT>:FAC/ACC-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<PORT>.
<FRAMETY Indicates the frame type.Valid value can be as follows: ALL

PE> RCVLACPDU
RCVERRLACPDU
SNDLACPDU
ALL
default value is ALL
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INIT-LAGSTAT-GETH::FAC-1-1-4:100:::FRAMETYPE=RCVLACPDU;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.25 RTRV-LAGSTAT-<FETH/GETH>
A.12.2.25 RTRV-LAGSTAT-<FETH/GETH>
Retrieves the packet content of a port test.
Function
This command instructs the NE to retrieve the packet content of a port test.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-LAGSTAT-<FETH/GETH>:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::FRAMETYPE=<FRAMETYPE>;
Command Parameters

FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<FRAMETYPE Indicates the frame type.Valid value can be as ALL

> follows:
RCVLACPDU
RCVERRLACPDU
SNDLACPDU
ALL
default value is ALL
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::FRAMETYPE=<FRAMETYPE>,[FRAMENUM=<FRAMENUM>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
<FRAMETYPE Indicates the frame type.

>
<FRAMENUM> Indicates the frame number.
Example
l Command
RTRV-LAGSTAT-GETH::FAC-1-1-4:100:::FRAMETYPE=ALL;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-1::FRAMETYPE=RCVLACPDU,FRAMENUM=5000"
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.24 INIT-LAGSTAST-<FETH/GETH>
A.12.2.26 RTRV-STATE-LAGPORT
Retrieve the state of the state machine in a LAGPORT.
Function
This command retrieves the state of the state machine in a LAGPORT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-STATE-LAGPORT:<TID>:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::[SMTYPE=<SMTYPE>];
Command Parameters

Supports ALL.
<SMTYPE> Indicates the type of the state machine. ALL

The valid value are as follows:
l ALL: 0
l RX(Receive mathine):1
l PTX(Periodic transmission machine):2
l MUX(Multiplexer mathine):3
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[SMTYPE=<SMTYPE>],[CURSTATE=<CURSTATE>],[PRESTATE=<PRESTATE>],
[REASON=<REASON>]"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
and port ID.
<SMTYPE> Indicates the type of the state machine.
<CURSTATE> Current state of the state machine specified by SMID.
<PRESTATE> Previous state of the state machine specified by SMTYPE.
<REASON> Indicates why the state of the state machine changes into
<CURSTATE>.
Example
l Command
RTRV-STATE-LAGPORT::FAC-1-1:100:::SMTYPE=RX;
RTRV-STATE-LAGPORT::FAC-1-ALL:100:::SMTYPE=RX;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 18:05:00
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1::SMTYPE=RX,CURSTATE=RXINIT,LSTSTATE=RXINIT,REASON=INITIALIZE"
;
Related Commands
A.12.2.7 ED-LAGPORT
A.12.3 Configuring STP

This section lists the commands used to configure the STP function.
A.12.3.1 ED-STP-VB
Edits the spanning tree protocol (STP) of a virtual bridge.
Function
This command modifies the spanning tree protocol of a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-STP-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[STPENABLE=<STPENABLE>],
[STPMODE=<STPMODE>],[BPRI=<BPRI>],[HELLOTIME=<HELLOTIME>],
[MAXAGE=<MAXAGE>],[FWDDELAY=<FWDDELAY>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VB-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>- NA

<VB ID>.
<STPENABL Indicates whether the spanning tree protocol is N

E> enabled. The valid values are Y and N.
<STPMODE Indicates the working mode of the rapid spanning tree RSTP
> protocol (RSTP). The valid values are as follows:
l STP: The RSTP operates in the STP compatibility
mode.
l RSTP: The RSTP operates normally.
This parameter is required only if the equipment
supports RSTP.
<BPRI> Indicates the priority of the bridge. The valid value NA

ranges from 0 to 65535, among which "0" is the highest
priority.
<HELLOTIM Indicates the transmitting period of the bridge protocol 2

E> data unit (BPDU). <HELLOTIME> is a integer. The
valid value ranges from 1(s) to 10(s).
NOTE
The relation among the <HELLOTIME>, <MAXAGE>, and
<FWDDELAY> is:
2 x (<HELLOTIME> + 1) <= <MAXAGE> <= 2 x
(<FWDDELAY> - 1)
<MAXAGE> Indicates the aging time of the BPDU. <MAXAGE> 20

is a integer. The valid value ranges from 6(s) to 40(s).
<FWDDELA Indicates the time interval for switching the port state, 15
Y> the port state includes: discarding, learning and
forwarding. <FWDDELAY> is a integer. The valid
value ranges from 4(s) to 30(s).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-STP-
VB::VB-1-4-1:100:::STPENABLE=Y,STPMODE=STP,BPRI=1,HELLOTIME=2,MAXAGE=20,FWDDELAY=1
5;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.3.2 RTRV-STP-VB
A.12.3.3 INIT-STP-VB
Retrieves the attributes of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) within a virtual bridge
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the STP protocol within a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-STP-VB:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.
retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::STPENABLE=<STPENABLE>,STPMODE=<STPMODE>,BPRI=<BPRI>,BMAC=<BMAC>,HELLOTI
ME=<HELLOTIME>,ACTHELLOTIME=<ACTHELLOTIME>,MAXAGE=<MAXAGE>,ACTMAXAGE=<ACTMAXAGE>,F
WDDELAY=<FWDDELAY>,ACTFWDDELAY=<ACTFWDDELAY>,DROOTPRI=<DROOTPRI>,DROOTMAC=<DROOTMA
C>,ROOTPATH=<ROOTPATH>,ROOTPORTID=<ROOTPORTID>,HOLDTIME=<HOLDTIME>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VB-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>.
<STPENABLE> Indicates whether the STP protocol is enabled. The valid values are Y
and N.
<STPMODE> Indicates the work mode of the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
l STP: The RSTP operates in STP Compatibility mode.
l RSTP: The RSTP operates normally.
This parameter is required only if the equipment supports RSTP.
<BPRI> Indicates the priority of a virtual bridge. The valid value ranges from
0 to 65535, among which "0" is the highest priority.
<BMAC> Indicates the MAC address of a virtual bridge.
<HELLOTIME> Indicates the transmitting period of the BPDU. <HELLOTIME> It is

an integer. The valid value ranges from 1(s) to 10(s). The initial value
is 2(s).
<ACTHELLOTIM Indicates the actual HELLOTIME. The valid value ranges from 1(s)
E> to 10(s).
<MAXAGE> Indicates the aging time of the BPDU. It is an integer. The valid value
ranges from 6(s) to 40(s). The initial value is 20(s).
<ACTMAXAGE> The actual MAXAGE. The valid value ranges from 6(s) to 40(s).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<FWDDELAY> Indicates the time interval for switching the port state, the port state
includes: discarding, learning and forwarding. <FWDDELAY>It is an
integer. The valid value ranges from 4(s) to 30(s). The initial value is
15(s).
<ACTFWDDELA Indicates the actual FWDDELAY. The valid value ranges from 4(s) to
Y> 30(s).
<DROOTPRI> Indicates the designated root bridge priority.

The valid value ranges from 0 to 65535 and the step-length is 4096,
among which "0" is the highest priority.
<DROOTMAC> Indicates the designated root bridge MAC address.

The valid format is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX.
<ROOTPATH> Indicates the root bridge path cost.

<ROOTPORTID> Indicates the root bridge port identifier.

<HOLDTIME> Indicates the period from the latest reset or initialization till the current
time.
Example
l Command
RTRV-STP-VB::VB-1-4-1:100;
RTRV-STP-VB::VB-1-4-ALL:101;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"VB-1-4-1::STPENABLE=Y,STPMODE=STP,BPRI=1,BMAC=00-32-0B-0E-10-0D,HELLOTIME=1,ACTHE
LLOTIME=1,MAXAGE=20,ACTMAXAGE=20,FWDDELAY=10,ACTFWDDELAY=10,MAXINC=2,DROOTPRI=1,DR
OOTMAC=00-32-0B-0E-10-0E,ROOTPATH=1,ROOTPORTID=12,HOLDTIME=5"
;
Related Commands
A.12.3.1 ED-STP-VB
Initializes the spanning tree protocol (STP) of a VB.
Function
This command is used to initialize the STP.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
This command initializes the STP bridge attributes (such as <STPMODE>,<BPRI>,

<HELLOTIME>, <MAXAGE>, <FWDDELAY>) and STP port attributes (such as
<PORTPRI>, <PATHCOST>, <ADMEDGE>) to retain the default values, which will result in
reforming the topology.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
INIT-STP-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INIT-STP-VB::VB-1-4-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.3.1 ED-STP-VB

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.12.3.4 ED-STP-VBLP
Edits parameters of the spanning tree protocol within a VBLP.
Function
This command modifies the parameters of the spanning tree protocol within a VBLP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-STP-VBLP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[STPPORTENABLE=<STPPORTENABLE>],
[PORTPRI=<PORTPRI>],[PATHCOST=<PATHCOST>],[ADMEDGE=<ADMEDGE>],
[AUTOEDGEDETECTEN =<AUTOEDGEDETECTEN>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>- NA

<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>.
<STPPORTE Indicates whether the VBLP is enabled. The valid Y

NABLE> values are Y and N.
<PORTPRI> Indicates the priority of the port. The valid value ranges 128
from 0 to 240,and can be divided by 16.among which
"0" is the highest priority.
<PATHCOST Indicates the path cost of the root bridge. For Ethernet
> For cards compliant with [802.1w] standard, the valid interface: 19
value ranges from 1 to 65535. For VC-Trunk
For cards compliant with [802.1D] standard, the valid interface: 4
value ranges from 1 to 200000000.
The default values vary depending on the interfaces.
<ADMEDGE Indicates the administrating edge attribute of the port. N

> The valid values are Y and N. The initial value is N.
This parameter is required only if STPMODE (See A.
12.3.1 ED-STP-VB) is RSTP.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<AUTOEDG Indicates if automatic edge detection is enabled. The DISABLE

EDETECTEN valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-STP-VBLP::VBLP-1-1-1-3:100:::STPPORTENABLE=Y,PORTPRI=128,PATHCOST=19,ADMEDGE=N;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.3.5 RTRV-STP-VBLP
A.12.3.5 RTRV-STP-VBLP
Retrieves parameters of the STP protocol within a VBLP.
Function
This command instructs an NE to retrieve the parameters of the STP protocol within a VBLP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-STP-VBLP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB NA

ID>-<VBLP ID>.
Supports ALL, which indicates all values will be retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::STPPORTENABLE=<STPPORTENABLE>,PORTPRI=<PORTPRI>,PATHCOST=<PATHCOST>,ACT
PATHCOST=<ACTPATHCOST>,ADMEDGE=<ADMEDGE>,ACTADMEDGE=<ACTADMEDGE>,PORTID=<PORTID>,P
ORTSTATE=<PORTSTATE>,DPORTID=<DPORTID>,DROOTPRI=<DROOTPRI>,DROOTMAC=<DROOTMAC>,DCO
ST=<DCOST>,DBPRI=<DBPRI>,DBMAC=<DBMAC>,UPTIME=<UPTIME>,AUTOEDGEDETECTEN=<AUTOEDGED
ETECTEN>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB

ID>-<VBLP ID>.
<STPPORTENABLE> Indicates whether the VBLP is enabled. The valid value can be
Y or N.
<PORTPRI> Indicates the priority of a VBLP. The valid value ranges from
0 to 255, among which "0" is the highest priority and "128" is
the initial value.
<PATHCOST> It is an integer. The valid values range from 1 to 65535. The

initial value varies depending on the device.
<ACTPATHCOST> The actual PATHCOST of the specified VBLP.
<ADMEDGE> Indicates the administration edge attribute of a VBLP. The valid

values are Y and N. The initial value is N.
This parameter is required only if STPMODE is set to RSTP
(See A.12.3.1 ED-STP-VB).
<ACTADMEDGE> Indicates the actual ADMEDGE attribute of a VBLP. The valid

value is Y or N.
This parameter is required only if STPMODE is set to RSTP
(See A.12.3.1 ED-STP-VB).
<PORTID> Indicates the VBLP identifier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PORTSTATE> Indicates the current state of a VBLP. The valid values are as
follows:
l DISABLE
l LISTENING
l LEARNING
l FORWARDING
l BLOCKING
l DISCARDING
<DPORTID> Indicates the designated port identifier.
<DROOTPRI> Indicates the designated route priority.
<DROOTMAC> Indicates the designated route MAC address.
<DCOST> Indicates the designated route path cost.
<DBPRI> Indicates the designated bridge priority.
<DBMAC> Indicates the designated bridge MAC address.
<UPTIME> Indicates the time elapsed since the port was last reset or
initialized. The value is expressed in seconds.
<AUTOEDGEDETECT- Indicates the enabling flag of automatic edge detection. The

EN> valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE (default).
Example
l Command
RTRV-STP-VBLP::VBLP-1-1-1-3:100;
RTRV-STP-VBLP::VBLP-1-1-1-ALL:101;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"VBLP-1-1-1-3::STPPORTENABLE=Y,PORTPRI=128,PATHCOST=19,ACTPATHCOST=19,ADMEDGE=N,AC
TADMEDGE=N,PORTID=10,PORTSTATE=FORWARDING,DPORTID=12,DROOTPRI=1,DROOTMAC=00-32-0B-
0E-10-0D,DCOST=30,DBPRI=4,DBMAC=00-32-0B-0E-10-0E,UPTIME=50,AUTOEDGEDETECTEN=DISAB
LE"
;
Related Commands
A.12.3.4 ED-STP-VBLP
A.12.3.6 SW-STP-VBLP
Switches the STP state of the VBLP.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command switches the STP state of the VBLP to send bridge protocol data unit (BPDU)
of the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) to the interconnected network.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
SW-STP-VBLP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
SW-STP-VBLP::VBLP-1-1-1-3:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.12.3.7 REPTÊVT^VBLP
Reports the STP state of a virtual bridge logical port (VBLP).
Function
This command is used for an NE to report the STP state of a VBLP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
A^^<ATAG>^REPTÊVT^VBLP<cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>:<CONDYPE>,<CONDEFF>" <cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB

ID>-<VBLP ID>.
<CONDYPE> Indicates the type of the event. The valid values are as follows:
l STPPORT-DISABLE (0)
l STPPORT-LISTENING (1)
l STPPORT-LEARNING (2)
l STPPORT-FORWARDING (3)
l STPPORT-BLOCKING (4)
l STPPORT-DISCARDING (5)
<CONDEFF> Indicates the impact of the event on the NE. The valid value is
TC.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
None
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
A 100 REPT EVT VBLP
"VBLP-1-1-1-2-3:STPPORT-DISABLE,TC"
;
Related Commands
None
A.12.4 Configuring VLAN SNCP

This section lists the commands used to configure the SNCP function based on VLAN.
A.12.4.1 ENT-VLANSNCP-PG
Creates a VLAN SNCP group.
Function
This command creates a VLAN SNCP protection group.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-VLANSNCP-PG:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::WORKLINKFROM=<WORKLINKFROM>,WORKLINKTO=<WOR
KLINKTO>,[WORKLINKINTAG=<WORKLINKINTAG>],
[WORKLINKINSTAG=<ORKLINKINSTAG>],BACKUPLINKFROM=<BACKUPLINKF
ROM>,BACKUPLINKTO=<BACKUPLINKTO>,
[BACKUPLINKINTAG=<BACKUPLINKINTAG>],
[BACKUPLINKINSTAG=<BACKUPLINKINSTAG>],[SOURCEIP =<SOURCEIP>],
[RVRTV =<RVRTV>],[RVTM=<RVTM>],[HOLDOFFTIME=<HOLDOFFTIME>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<WORKLINKFR Indicates the source of the working link. The valid NA

OM> values is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
<WORKLINKT Indicates the sink of the working link. The valid NA

O> values is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
<WORKLINKIN Indicates the tag of incoming packets from the NA

TAG> working link. The tag can be a VLAN ID. This
parameter is optional and indicates an EPL in this
response.
<WORKLINKIN Indicates the VLAN tag of the incoming service NA

STAG> from the working link.
This parameter is optional. See A.13.3.1 ENT-
ETHLINK.
<BACKUPLINK Indicates the source of the backup link. The valid NA

FROM> values is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
<BACKUPLINK Indicates the sink of the backup link. The valid NA

TO> values is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
<BACKUPLINK Indicates the tag of incoming packets from the NA

INTAG> backup link. The tag can be a VLAN ID. This
parameter is optional and indicates an EPL in this
response.
<BACKUPLINK Indicates the VLAN tag of the incoming service NA

INSTAG> from the backup link.
ETHLINK.
<SOURCEIP> VLAN Protection source IP. 192.168.0.1
<RVRTV> Indicates the revertive mode. The valid values are Y

Y (revertive) and N (non-revertive).
<RVTM> Indicates the revertive time. 6

The valid value can be 0 or range from 6 to 720
(units in seconds).
The value "0" indicates the non-revertive mode.
<HOLDOFFTIM Indicates the hold-off time of VLAN SNCP 0

E> protection.
The valid value ranges from 0 to 100 (units in 0.1s).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-VLANSNCP-PG:::
100:::WORKLINKFROM=FAC-1-3-4,WORKLINKTO=FAC-1-3-5,WORKLINKINTAG=1,BACKUPLINKFROM=F
AC-1-3-6,BACKUPLINKTO=FAC-1-3-5,BACKUPLINKINTAG=1,RVRTV=N,RVTM=0;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-25 18:54:51
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.4.2 ED-VLANSNCP-PG
A.12.4.4 DLT-VLANSNCP-PG
A.12.4.3 RTRV-VLANSNCP-PG
Edits the parameters of a VLAN SNCP group.
Function
This command edits the parameters of a VLAN SNCP group.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-VLANSNCP-PG:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::LINKFROM=<LINKFROM>,LINKTO=<WORKLINKTO>,
[LINKINTAG=<LINKINTAG>],[LINKINSTAG=<LINKINSTAG>],[RVRTV=<RVRTV>],
[RVTM=<RVTM>],[HOLDOFFTIME=<HOLDOFFTIME>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<LINKFROM> Indicates the source of the link. The valid value is NA

ID>.
<LINKTO> Indicates the sink of the link. The valid value is NA

ID>.
<LINKINTAG> Indicates the tag of incoming packets. It can be a NA

VLAN ID. This parameter is optional and indicates
an EPL in this response.
<LINKINSTAG Indicates the VLAN tag of the incoming service. NA

> This parameter is optional. See A.13.3.1 ENT-
ETHLINK.

(revertive) and N (non-revertive).
<RVTM> Indicates the revertive time of the VLAN SNCP 6

The valid value can be 0 or range from 6 to 720 (units
in seconds).
"0" indicates the non-revertive mode.
<HOLDOFFTI Indicates the hold-off time (units in 0.1s) of VLAN 0

ME> SNCP protection.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-VLANSNCP-PG:::
10:::LINKFROM=FAC-1-3-4,LINKTO=FAC-1-3-5,LINKINTAG=1,RVRTV=Y,HOLDOFFTIME=100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 10 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
Retrieves the parameters of a VLAN SNCP group.
Function
This command retrieves the parameters of a VLAN SNCP group.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-VLANSNCP-PG:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::LINKFROM =<LINKFROM>,LINKTO
=<LINKTO>,[LINKINTAG =<LINKINTAG>],[LINKINSTAG =<LINKINSTAG>]
Command Parameters
<LINKFROM> Indicates the source of the working link. The valid NA

value is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
<LINKTO> Indicates the sink of the working link. The valid NA

value is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
<LINKINTAG Indicates the tag of incoming packets over the NA

> working link. It can be a VLAN ID. This parameter
is optional and denotes an EPL in this document.
See A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK.
<LINKINSTA Indicates the incoming service VLAN tag of the NA

G> working link.
ETHLINK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<WORKLINKFROM>,<WORKLINKTO>,<BACKUPLINKFROM>,<BACKUPLINKTO>::
[WORKLINKINTAG=<WORKLINKINTAG>],[WORKLINKINSTAG=<WORKLINKINSTAG>],
[WORKLINKSTATE=<WORKLINKSTATE>],[BACKUPLINKINTAG=<BACKUPLINKINTAG>],
[BACKUPLINKINSTAG=<BACKUPLINKINSTAG>],[BACKUPLINKSTATE=<BACKUPLINKSTATE>],
[RVRTV=<RVRTV>],[RVTM=<RVTM>],[HOLDOFFTIME=<HOLDOFFTIME>],[SWSTATE=<SWSTATE>],
[ACTIVELINK=<ACTIVELIKE>]"<cr><lf>
Response Parameters
<WORKLINKFRO Indicates the source of the working link. The valid format is FAC/
M> ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
<WORKLINKTO> Indicates the sink of the working link. The valid format is FAC/ACC-
<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
<BACKUPLINKF Indicates the source of the backup link. The valid format is FAC/ACC-
ROM> <SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
<BACKUPLINKT Indicates the sink of the backup link. The valid format is FAC/ACC-
O> <SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
<WORKLINKINT Indicates the tag of incoming packets over the working link. It can be
AG> a VLAN ID. This parameter is optional and denotes an EPL in this
document. See A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK.
<WORKLINKINS Indicates the incoming service VLAN tag of the working link.
TAG> This parameter is optional. See A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK.
<WORKLINKSTA Indicates the status of the working link. The valid values are NORMAL
TE> and SF (signal fail).
<BACKUPLINKI Indicates the tag of incoming packets from the backup link. It can be
NTAG> a VLAN ID. This parameter is optional and denotes an EPL in this
document.
<BACKUPLINKI Indicates the incoming service VLAN tag of the backup link.
NSTAG> This parameter is optional. See A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK.
<BACKUPLINKS Indicates the status of the backup link. The valid values are NORMAL
TATE> and SF (signal fail).
<RVRTV> Indicates the revertive mode. The valid values are Y (revertive mode)
and N (non-revertive mode).
<RVTM> Indicates the revertive time (units in seconds).

The value "0" indicates the non-revertive mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<HOLDOFFTIME Indicates the hold-off time (units in 0.1s) of VLAN SNCP protection.
>
<SWSTATE> Indicates the protection switching status. The valid values of switching
status are as follows:
l IDLE
l AUTO_SW
l WTR
l MANUAL
l FRCD
l LOCKOUT
<ACTIVELINK> Indicates the current active link.
Example
l Command
RTRV-VLANSNCP-PG:::C:::LINKFROM=FAC-1-11-3,LINKTO=ACC-1-11-1,LINKINTAG=1;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-02 21:20:39
M C COMPLD
"ACC-2-4-15,FAC-2-4-11,ACC-2-4-16,FAC-2-4-11::WORKLINKINTAG=200,WORKLINKSTATE=SF,B
ACKUPLINKINTAG=200,BACKUPLINKSTATE=NORMAL,RVRTV=Y,RVTM=6,HOLDOFFTIME=0,SWSTATE=AUT
O_SW,ACTIVELINK=ACC-2-4-16"
;
Related Commands
Deletes a VLAN SNCP group.
Function
This command deletes a VLAN SNCP protection group.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-VLANSNCP-PG:[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::LINK_FROM =<LINKFROM>,LINKTO
=<LINKTO>,[LINKINTAG =<LINKINTAG>][LINKINSTAG =<LINKINSTAG>];
Command Parameters
<LINKFROM> Indicates the source of the link. The valid format is NA

ID>.
<LINKTO> Indicates the sink of the link. The valid format is NA

ID>.
<LINKINTAG Indicates the tag of incoming packets. It can be a NA

> VLAN ID. This parameter is optional and indicates
an EPL.
<LINKINSTAG Indicates the incoming service VLAN tag. NA

ETHLINK.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-VLANSNCP-PG:::10:::LINKFROM=FAC-1-3-4,LINKTO=FAC-1-3-5,LINKINTAG=1
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.12.4.5 OPR-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP
Operates the protection switching of a VLAN SNCP group.
Function
This command is used to operate the protection switching of a VLAN SNCP group.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
OPR-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::LINK_FROM=<LINKFROM>,LINKTO =<LINKTO>,[LINKINTAG
=<LINKINTAG>],[LINKINSTAG=<LINKINSTAG>],SC=<SC>,[DIRN=<DIRN>];
Command Parameters
<LINKFROM> Indicates the source of the link. The valid format is NA

ID>.

ID>.
<LINKINTAG Indicates the tag of incoming packets. The tag can NA

> be a VLAN ID. This parameter is optional and
indicates an EPL in this response.
<LINKINSTA Indicates the VLAN tag of the incoming service. NA

G> This parameter is optional. See A.13.3.1 ENT-
ETHLINK.
<SC> Indicates the external switching command. The NA

valid values are LOCKOUT, FRCD, and MAN.
<DIRN> Indicates the transmission direction in which BTH

protection switching is to be performed. The valid
values are BTH (both), RCV (receive), and TRMT
(transmit).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
OPR-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP:::
100:::LINKFROM=FAC-1-3-4,LINKTO=FAC-1-3-5,LINKINTAG=1,SC=FRCD,DIRN=BTH;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.4.6 RLS-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP
A.12.4.6 RLS-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP
Releases the protection switching of a VLAN SNCP group.
Function
This command releases the protection switching of a VLAN SNCP group.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RLS-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>:::LINKFROM=<LINKFROM>,LINKTO=<LINKTO>,
[LINKINTAG=<LINKINTAG>],[LINKINSTAG=<LINKINSTAG>],[DIRN=<DIRN>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<LINKFROM> Indicates the source of the link. The valid format NA

is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>.

ID>.
<LINKINTAG> Indicates the tag of incoming packets. The tag can NA

be a VLAN ID. This parameter is optional and
indicates an EPL in this response.
<LINKINSTAG Indicates the VLAN tag of the incoming service. NA

ETHLINK.
<DIRN> Indicates the transmission direction in which NA

protection switching is to be released. The valid
values are BTH (both), RCV (receive), and
TRMT (transmit).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
RLS-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP:::
10:::LINKFROM=FAC-1-3-4,LINKTO=FAC-1-3-5,LINKINTAG=1,DIRN=BTH;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 10 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.12.4.5 OPR-PROTNSW-VLANSNCP
A.13 Configuring Ethernet Feature

The section lists the commands used to configure the Ethernet system, such as Ethernet interface,
flow, VLAN, protocols, and QoS.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.1 Configuring Ethernet Interface

This section lists the commands used to configure and maintain Ethernet interfaces.
A.13.1.1 ED-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
Edits the attributes of the Ethernet port.
Function
This command modifies the attributes of an FE, GE, 10GE, 100GE or 40GE port.
Usage Note
When a TQX card is used, the client-side optical interfaces (LP1-LP4) must comply with the
following configuration rules when 10GE LAN services are accessed and the GFP encapsulation
format is adopted:
l If the service type for the LP1 optical interface is configured as 10GE LAN, the LP2 optical
interface is invalid (the service type must be set to None).
NOTE
When the configured service (for example, 10GE LAN, OC-192, STM64, and OTU2E) for the LP1 optical
interface is not encapsulated based on the GFP format, the LP2 optical interface is not affected.
l The data encapsulation format for the LP2 optical interface cannot be GFP.
l Optical interfaces LP3 and LP4 are independent from optical interfaces LP1 and LP2. The
relationship between optical interfaces LP3 and LP4 is the same as the relationship between
optical interfaces LP1 and LP2.
When 10GE LAN services are accessed and the GFP encapsulation format is adopted on a TDX
card, the relationship between optical interfaces LP1 and LP2 is the same as the relationship
between optical interfaces LP1 and LP2 of the TQX card.
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::
[WORKMODE=<WORKMODE>],[FLOWCTRL=<FLOWCTRL>],
[FLOWCTRLAUTO=<FLOWCTRLAUTO>],[MTU=<MTU>],
[PTPMODE=<PTPMODE>],[PORTENABLE=<PORTENABLE>],
[PORTCHECK=<PORTCHECK>],[TAGTYPE=<TAGTYPE>],[PVID=<PVID>],
[PVPRI=<PVPRI>],[BCSENABLE=<BCSENABLE>],[BCSTH=<BCSTH>],
[PPTENABLE=<PPTENABLE>],[PORTTYPE=<PORTTYPE>],
[LABELTYPE=<LABELTYPE>],[PSVID=<PSVID>],[PSVPRI=<PSVPRI>],
[STAGTYPE=<STAGTYPE>],[SVENABLE=<SVENABLE>],

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
[ROUTEMAC=<ROUTEMAC>],[MDIMODE=<MDIMODE>], [B1SFBER=<B1SFBER>],
[B1SDBER=<B1SDBER>],[TRCJ0MODE=<TRCJ0MODE>],
[TRCJ0FMT=<TRCJ0FMT>],[TRCJ0=<TRCJ0>],[EXPTRCJ0=<EXPTRCJ0>],
[MAPMODE=<MAPMODE>],[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],
[SVTIMER=<SVTIMER>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format are as follows: NA

l FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>
l ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>
l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>
l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>-<PATH ID>
It supports the "&" and "&&" symbols and
ALL.
<WORKMODE> Indicates the working mode of the port. NA

l AUTO: Auto Negotiation
l HALF10M: 10Mbps half-duplex mode
l FULL10M: 10Mbps full-duplex mode
l FULL1000M: 1000Mbps full-duplex
mode
l 10GFULLLAN: 10GE LAN full-duplex
mode
l 10GFULLWAN: 10GE WAN full-duplex
mode
This parameter is optional.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<FLOWCTRL> Indicates the non-auto-negotiation flow DISABLE

control attribute of the port. This parameter is
optional. The valid values are as follows:
l DISABLE: Disables the flow control of the
port (close the flow control function of
bidirectional traffic)
l ENABLE: Enables the flow control of the
port (send and receive)
l SEND: Enables the flow control in the send
direction (send only)
l RECV: Enables the flow control in the
receive direction (receive only)
<FLOWCTRLA Indicates whether automatic flow control is DISABLE

UTO> enabled. The valid values are ENABLE and
DISABLE.
<MTU> Indicates the maximum transmission unit of NA

the port. The valid value ranges from 1518 to
9600. This parameter is optional.
<PTPMODE> Indicates the PTP (point-to-point) attribute of AUTO

the port.
l FORCETRUE: indicates that the ports are
forcibly connected in a point-to-point link.
l FORCEFALSE: indicates that the ports are
forcibly connected to a shared medium.
l AUTO: indicates an auto-sensing
connection.
<PORTENABLE Indicates whether the port is enabled. This N

> parameter is optional. The valid values are Y
(enable) and N (disable).
<PVID> Indicates the default VLAN ID of the port. 1

NOTE
For L4G cards, the range is from 1 to 4094.
For TBE cards, the range is from 1 to 4095.
<PVPRI> Indicates the priority of the default VLAN for 0

the port. This parameter is optional.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PORTCHECK> Indicates whether the incoming packet needs Y

to be checked. The valid values are Y and N.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for the TBE.
<TAGTYPE> Indicates the tag attribute of the port. The valid TAGAWARE
l TAGAWARE
l HYBRID
l ACCESS
<BCSENABLE> Indicates whether broadcast packet N

suppression is enabled. The valid values are Y
and N. This parameter is optional.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for the TBE.
<BCSTH> Indicates the threshold percentage of the 3

broadcast suppression. It indicates the
percentage of the total planned bandwidth that
broadcast packets occupy.
The valid value ranges from 1 to 10. This
parameter is optional.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for TBE.
<PPTENABLE> Indicates whether flow control frames are NA

transmitted to the next hop transparently.
<PORTTYPE> Indicates the type of the port specified by AID. UNI

l UNI (user to network interface)
l NUNI
l NNI (network to network interface)
l CAWARE (customer VLAN tag aware)
l SAWARE (service VLAN tag aware)
<LABELTYPE> Indicates the label type of the label port. NA

NOTE
This parameter is not valid for NGWDM
equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PSVID> Indicates the default service VLAN ID of the NA

port.
NOTE
equipment.
<PSVPRI> Indicates the priority of the default service NA

VLAN for the port.
NOTE
equipment.
<STAGTYPE> Indicates the service VLAN tag attribute of the NA

port. Optional.
NOTE
equipment.
<SVENABLE> Indicates the service VLAN enable attribute of NA

the port.
NOTE
equipment.
<ROUTEMAC> Indicates the MAC address of the remote NA

router in the DBPS protection group.
Supports the "&" symbol.
<MDIMODE> Indicates MDI (Media Dependent Interface) AUTO

mode. The valid values are AUTO, MDIX,
and MDI.
NOTE
equipment.
<B1SFBER> Indicates the SF BER threshold for the 1E-4

overhead byte (B1) on a facility.
This parameter is valid only when the
<WORKMODE> is 10GFULLWAN.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<B1SDBER> Indicates the SD BER threshold for the 1E-7

overhead byte (B1) on a facility.
<TRCJ0MODE> Indicates the path tracing mode of J0 byte. NA

l MAN: uses the provisioned string as the
expected J0 tracing string.
l DISABLE: disables the path tracing
function.
<TRCJ0FMT> Indicates the expected format of path tracing NA

J0 byte.
l 1: 1-byte mode
l 16: 16-byte mode
l 64: 64-byte mode
<TRCJ0> Indicates the J0 byte which is expected to be NA

transmitted. The valid value depends on the
format specified by <TRCJ0FMT>.
This parameter is valid for the units which
support generating J0 bytes and only when the
<EXPTRCJ0> Indicates the expected path tracing J0 byte. NA


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<MAPMODE> Indicates the service mapping route. l The type of the

This parameter is only valid for the OTU service loaded by
cards. the port or path is
10GETH LAN:
When 10GETH LAN data is encapsulated into OTU2E
the OTU service, the valid values of the
parameter are as follows: l The type of the
service loaded by
l OTU2E:10GETH LAN->OTU2E(11.1G) the port or path is
l GFP: 10GETH LAN->GFP->OTU2 GETH: GFPF
(10.71G)
l OTU2: 10GETH LAN->OTU2(10.71G,
only valid for AFEC)
NOTE
When the TQX and 12TDX card are used to access
10GE LAN services and the GFP encapsulation
format is adopted, follow the description provided
in Usage Note to allocate the client-side optical
interfaces. Otherwise, GFP encapsulation cannot be
realized.
When GETH is used, the valid values of the
parameter are GFPF (frame mapping GFP),
GFPT (transparent GFP) and TTT-AGMP.
NOTE
Only channel 1 can be set for GFPT with the LOG.
The <MAPMODE>s of other channels will be the
same with that of channel 1 automatically.
<DELAYTIME> This parameter is only valid for the channels NA

in a protection group (for example: SNCP
group).
Indicates the hold-off time. It is an integer
ranging from 0 to 255, which is expressed in
units of 100 ms..
Delay time is required when multiple
protection schemes are configured. Switching
is not initiated until the delay time is expended

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<SVTIMER> Indicates the signal validation timer, units are 00-15

expressed in minutes. Only valid if the Auto
In-Service feature is supported (SST displayed
as AINS). SVTIMER is a string in an HH-MM
format.
l HH: Hour is an integer, ranging from 0 to
48.
l MM: Minute is an integer, ranging from 0
to 59.
l The maximum timer setting is 48 hours.
<PST> Indicates the Ethernet port state. NA

The valid can be IS or OOS. This parameter is
optional.
<SST> Indicates the secondary state of the entity. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-
FETH::FAC-1-1-5-2:100:::WORKMODE=AUTO,FLOWCTRLAUTO=DISABLE,MTU=1522,PTPMODE=AUTO,P
ORTENABLE=Y,PORTCHECK=Y,TAGTYPE=ACCESS,PVID=22,PVPRI=2,BCSENABLE=Y,BCSTH=3,PPTENAB
LE=N,PORTTYPE=UNI,PSVID=1000,PSVPRI=7,STAGTYPE=TAGAWARE,SVENABLE=Y:OOS;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.13.1.3 RTRV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
A.13.1.2 RMV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
Removes the Ethernet port from service an places it into the maintenance (MT) state.
Function
This command is used for a specified Ethernet port to enter the MT state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RMV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that identifies the NA

Ethernet facility. The valid format is FAC-<SHELF
ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>. This parameter
supports the "&" and "&&" symbols.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
RMV-FETH::FAC-1-5-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-07-06 10:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.1.4 RST-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
A.13.1.3 RTRV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
Retrieves the attributes of an Ethernet port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of an Ethernet port.
Usage Note
None.
Category
Configuration.
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>
ID>
ID>
ID>-<PATH ID>
This parameter supports ALL. If no AID is
input, all the attributes of the Ethernet ports
will be retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::WORKMODE=<WORKMODE>,ACTWORKMODE=<ACTWORKMODE>,FLOWCTRL=<FLOWCTRL>,FLOWC
TRLAUTO=<FLOWCTRLAUTO>,ACTFLOWCTRL=<ACTFLOWCTRL>,MTU=<MTU>,[PTPMODE=<PTPMODE>],
[ACTPTPMODE=<ACTPTPMODE>], [PORTENABLE=<PORTENABLE>],[PORTCHECK=<PORTCHECK>],
[TAGTYPE=<TAGTYPE>],[PVID=<PVID>],[PVPRI=<PVPRI>],[BCSENABLE=<BCSENABLE>],
[BCSTH=<BCSTH>],[PPTENABLE=<PPTENABLE>],[PORTTYPE=<PORTTYPE>],
[LABELTYPE=<LABELTYPE>],[PSVID=<PSVID>],[PSVPRI=<PSVPRI>],[STAGTYPE=<STAGTYPE>],
[SVENABLE=<SVENABLE>],[SVTPID=<SVTPID>],[MACADDR=<MACADDR>],[ROUTEMAC=<ROUTEMAC>],
[MDIMODE=<MDIMODE>],[B1SFBER=<B1SFBER>],[B1SDBER=<B1SDBER>],
[TRCJ0MODE=<TRCJ0MODE>],[TRCJ0FMT=<TRCJ0FMT>],[TRCJ0=<TRCJ0>],
[EXPTRCJ0=<EXPTRCJ0>],[INCTRCJ0=<INCTRCJ0>],[MAPMODE=<MAPMODE>],
[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],[SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>],

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
<WORKMODE> Indicates the working mode of the port. The valid values are as follows:
l AUTO: Auto Negotiation
l 10GFULLLAN: 10GE LAN full-duplex mode
l 10GFULLWAN: 10GE WAN full-duplex mode
<ACTWORKMOD Indicates the actual working mode of the port.

E>
<FLOWCTRL> Indicates the non-auto-negotiation flow control attribute of the port.
<FLOWCTRLAUT Indicates the auto-negotiation flow control attribute of the port and
O> whether the automatic flow control is enabled. The valid values are in
section "FLOWCTRLAUTO" of TL1 Parameters.
<ACTFLOWCTRL Indicates the actual flow control state of the port.

> l DISABLE: Disables the flow control of the port (closes the flow
control function of bidirectional traffic).
l ENABLE: Enables the flow control of the port (send and receive).
l SEND: Enables the flow control in the send direction (send only).
l RECV: Enables the flow control in the receive direction (receive
only).
<MTU> Indicates the maximum transmission unit of the port.
<PTPMODE> Indicates the point-to-point attribute of the port.
<ACTPTPMODE> Indicates the point-to-point actual attribute of the port.
<PORTENABLE> Indicates whether the port is enabled. The valid values are Y (enable)
and N (disable).
<PVID> Indicates the default VLAN ID of the port.
<PVPRI> Indicates the priority of the default VLAN for the port.
<PORTCHECK> Indicates whether the incoming packets are checked.
<TAGTYPE> Indicates the tag attribute of the port. The valid values are as follows:
l TAGAWARE
l HYBRID
l ACCESS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<BCSENABLE> Indicates whether the function of suppressing broadcast packets is

<BCSTH> Indicates the threshold for broadcast ; that is, the percentage of the total
planned bandwidth that broadcast packets occupy.
<PPTENABLE> Indicates whether flow control frames are transmitted to the next hop
transparently.
<PORTTYPE> Indicates the type of the port identified by AID. The valid values are
as follows:
l User to network interface (UNI)
l NUNI
l Network to network interface (NNI)
l Customer VLAN tag aware (CAWARE)
l Service VLAN tag aware (SAWARE)
<LABELTYPE> Indicates the label type of the label port.

NOTE
This parameter is not valid for NGWDM equipment.
<PSVID> Indicates the default service VLAN ID of the port.

NOTE
<PSVPRI> Indicates the priority of the default service VLAN for the port.
NOTE
<STAGTYPE> Indicates the service VLAN tag attribute of the port.

NOTE
<SVENABLE> Indicates the service VLAN enable attribute of the port.

NOTE
<SVTPID> Indicates the service VLAN TPID field of the port.

NOTE
<MACADDR> Indicates the MAC address of the port.

NOTE
<ROUTEMAC> Indicates the MAC address of the remote router in the DBPS protection
group.
<MDIMODE> Indicates the MDI (Media dependent Interface) mode.

NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<B1SFBER> Indicates the SF BER threshold for the overhead byte (B1) on a facility.
This parameter is valid only when the <WORKMODE> is
10GFULLWAN.
<B1SDBER> Indicates the SD BER threshold for the overhead byte (B1) on a
facility.
10GFULLWAN.
<TRCJ0MODE> Indicates the path tracing mode of J0 byte.

l MAN: uses the provisioned string as the expected J0 tracing string.
l DISABLE: disables the path tracing function.
10GFULLWAN.
<TRCJ0FMT> Indicates the expected format of path tracing J0 byte.

l 1: 1-byte mode
l 16: 16-byte mode
l 64: 64-byte mode
10GFULLWAN.
<TRCJ0> Indicates the J0 byte which is expected to be transmitted. The valid

value depends on the format specified by <TRCJ0FMT>.
This parameter is valid for the units which support generating the J0
byte and only when the <WORKMODE> is 10GFULLWAN.
<EXPTRCJ0> Indicates the expected path tracing J0 byte.

10GFULLWAN.
<INCTRCJ0> Indicates the incoming J0 byte.

10GFULLWAN.
<MAPMODE> Indicates the service mapping route.

This parameter is only valid for the OTU cards.
<DELAYTIME> Indicates the delay time, that is, hold-off time. The valid value is an
integer ranging from 0 to 255 in units of 100 ms.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<SWITCHSTATE Indicates the protection switching status. It is only valid when the port
> is in the protection group.
For the valid values of this parameter, refer to A.32.3.20
SWITCHSTATE.
in an HH-MM format.
l The maximum timer setting is 48 hours.
<PST> Indicates the Ethernet port state.

This valid values are IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FETH::FAC-5-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-5-2::WORKMODE=AUTO,ACTWORKMODE=FULL100M,FLOWCTRL=DISABLE,FLOWCTRLAUTO=DISABLE
,ACTFLOWCTRL=DISABLE,MTU=1522,PTPMODE=AUTO,PORTENABLE=Y,PORTCHECK=Y,TAGTYPE=ACCESS
,PVID=22,PVPRI=2,BCSENABLE=Y,BCSTH=3,PPTENABLE=N,PORTTYPE=UNI,PSVID=1000,PSVPRI=7,
STAGTYPE=TAGAWARE,SVENABLE=Y,SVTPID=34832,MACADDR=00-e0-fc-59-b2-70:IS"
;
Related Commands
A.13.1.1 ED-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
A.13.1.4 RST-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
Restores the Ethernet port into service.
Function
This command is used for a specified Ethernet port of the NE to exit the maintenance state.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RST-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that NA

identifies the Ethernet facility. The valid
format is FAC-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>. This parameter supports the "&"
and "&&" symbols.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
RST-FETH::FAC-1-5-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-07-06 10:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.1.2 RMV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
A.13.1.5 OPR-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
Operates a loopback on the Ethernet port.
Function
This command is used for an NE to operate a loopback on a specified Ethernet port.
Usage Note
The loopback can be performed only when the Ethernet port is in the MT state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
OPR-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<LPBKMODEETH>:LPBKTYPE=<LPBKTYPE>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the port. The valid format is FAC- NA

This parameter supports the "&" and "&&"
symbols.
<LPBKMODE Indicates the loopback mode. The valid values NA

ETH> are MAC (MAC loopback) and PHY (physical
loopback). This parameter is compulsory.
<LPBKTYPE> Indicates the loopback type. The valid values NA

are FACILITY and TERMINAL. This
parameter is compulsory.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
OPR-LPBK-GETH::FAC-1-2-5:100::MAC:LPBKTYPE=TERMINAL;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.1.6 RLS-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.1.6 RLS-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
Releases the loopback of an Ethernet port.
Function
This command is used for an NE to release the loopback of a specified Ethernet port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RLS-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<LPBKMODEETH>;
Command Parameters
<AID> FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID> NA

This parameter supports the "&" or "&&"
symbols.
<LPBKMOD Indicates the loopback mode. The valid values are NA

EETH> MAC (MAC loopback) and PHY (physical
loopback). This parameter is compulsory.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
RLS-LPBK-FETH::FAC-1-5-2:100::MAC;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.1.7 RTRV-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
Retrieves the loopback information about a specified Ethernet port
Function
This command instructs the NE to retrieve the loopback information about a specified Ethernet
port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-LPBK-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>-<PORT ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::LOCN=<LOCN>,LPBKTYPE=<LPBKTYPE>"<cr><lf> ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters

<LOCN> Indicates the loopback mode. The valid values are MAC (MAC
loopback) and PHY (physical loopback).
<LPBKTYPE> Indicates the loopback type. The valid values are FACILITY and
TERMINAL.
Example
l Command
RTRV-LPBK-GETH::FAC-1-3-4:100;
l Response Message
NE 2009-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-3-4::LOCN=MAC,LPBKTYPE=TERMINAL"
Related Commands
A.13.1.8 ED-ETH-VCG
Edits the attributes of an Ethernet VCG port.
Function
This command modifies the attributes of an Ethernet VCG port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-ETH-VCG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[ENCPROTOCOL=<ENCPROTOCOL>],
[SCRAMBLER=<SCRAMBLER>],[EXTHDR=<EXTHDR>],[REVCRC=<REVCRC>],
[FCSTYPE=<FCSTYPE>],[ENDIAN=<ENDIAN>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters

ID>
ALL.
<ENCPROTOC Indicates the type of encapsulation protocol at NA

OL> the VCG port.
The valid values are HDLC, GFP-F, GFP-T,
PPP, and LAPS.
<SCRAMBLER> Indicates the scrambling mode that is used by NA

the scrambler of the encapsulation protocol.
The valid values are DISABLE, X43, and
X48.
<EXTHDR> Indicates whether the extension header of the NA

encapsulation protocol is enabled.
The valid values are N and Y.
<REVCRC> Indicates whether CRC of the encapsulation NA

protocol is enabled.
<FCSTYPE> Indicates the FCS mode of the encapsulation NA

protocol.
The valid values are NONE, FCS32, and
FCS16.
<ENDIAN> Indicates the byte order of the encapsulation NA

protocol.
The valid values are BIG and LITTLE.

The valid values are IS or OOS. This
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ED-ETH-VCG::ACC-1-5-3:100:::ENCPROTOCOL=GFP-
F,SCRAMBLER=X43,FCSTYPE=FCS32,ENDIAN=LITTLE,EXTHDR=Y:OOS;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
RTRV-ETH-VCGA.13.1.3 RTRV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
A.13.1.9 RTRV-ETH-VCG
Queries the attributes of an Ethernet VCG port.
Function
This command queries the attributes of an Ethernet VCG port.
Usage Note
None.
Category
Configuration.
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ETH-VCG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>
will be retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
^^^"<AID>::ENCPROTOCOL=<ENCPROTOCOL>,SCRAMBLER=<SCRAMBLER>,EXTHDR=<EXTHDR>,REVCRC=
<REVCRC>,FCSTYPE=<FCSTYPE>,ENDIAN=<ENDIAN>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
Response Parameters
<AID> ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
<ENCPROTOCOL Indicates the type of encapsulation protocol at the VCG port.

> l The valid values are HDLC, GFP-F, GFP-T, PPP, and LAPS.
<SCRAMBLER> Indicates the scrambling mode that is used by the scrambler of the
encapsulation protocol.
l The valid values are DISABLE, X43, and X48.
<EXTHDR> Indicates whether the extension header of the encapsulation protocol

is enabled.
l The valid values are N and Y.
<REVCRC> Indicates whether CRC of the encapsulation protocol is enabled.

l The valid values are N and Y.
<FCSTYPE> Indicates the FCS mode of the encapsulation protocol.

l The valid values are NONE, FCS32, and FCS16.
<ENDIAN> Indicates the byte order of the encapsulation protocol.

l The valid values are BIG and LITTLE.

Example
l Command
RTRV-ETH-VCG::ACC-5-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"ACC-5-2::ENCPROTOCOL=GFP-
F,SCRAMBLER=X43,FCSTYPE=FCS32,ENDIAN=LITTLE,EXTHDR=Y:IS"
;
Related Commands
ED-ETH-VCGA.13.1.1 ED-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
A.13.1.10 ED-PORT-TRAFFIC
Edits the traffic attribute of a port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command modifies the traffic attribute of a port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-PORT-TRAFFIC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[NTMENABLE=<NTMENABLE>],
[NTMTIME=<NTMTIME>],[TRFCTH=<TRFCTH>],[TRFCTIME=<TRFCTIME>],
[FLUXMON=<FLUXMON>]:[<PST>],[<SST>];
Command Parameters

ID>
ID>
ALL.
<NTMENABLE Indicates whether an alarm is reported when N

> no traffic is received at a port.
<NTMTIME> Indicates the time that allows a port to receive 15

no traffic. An alarm is reported when the time
that a port does not receive any traffic exceeds
this parameter.
<TRFCTH> Indicates the maximum traffic that is allowed 100 (FE port), 1000
by a port. An alarm is reported when the traffic (GE port), 10000
receives at a port exceeds this parameter. (10GE port)
The value ranges from 1 Mbit/s to 100 Mbit/s
for an FE port, ranges from 1 Mbit/s to 1000
Mbit/s for a GE port, and ranges from 1 Mbit/
s to 10000 Mbit/s for a 10GE port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TRFCTIME> Indicates the time that allows a port to receive 0

traffic exceeding the value of TRCTH. An
alarm is reported when the time that a port
receives traffic higher than the value of
TRCTH exceeds this parameter.
<FLUXMON> Indicates whether the traffic of a port is N

monitored.

The valid values are IS or OOS. This
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-PORT-TRAFFIC::FAC-1-5-2:100:::NTMENABLE=Y,NTMTIME=15,
TRFCTH=100,TRFCTIME=30,FLUXMON=Y:OOS;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
RTRV-PORT-TRAFFICA.13.1.3 RTRV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
RTRV-PORT-TRFFLUXA.13.1.3 RTRV-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
A.13.1.11 RTRV-PORT-TRAFFIC
Queries the traffic attribute of a port.
Function
This command queries the traffic attribute of a port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ETH-VCG:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>
– ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>
will be retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::NTMENABLE=<NTMENABLE>,NTMTIME=<NTMTIME>,TRFCTH=<TRFCTH>,TRFCTIME=<TRFCT
IME>,FLUXMON=<FLUXMON>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
Response Parameters
<AID> FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>

<NTMENABLE> Indicates whether an alarm is reported when no traffic is received at a

port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<NTMTIME> Indicates the time that allows a port to receive no traffic. An alarm is
reported when the time that a port does not receive any traffic exceeds
this parameter.
<TRFCTH> Indicates the maximum traffic that is allowed by a port. An alarm is

reported when the traffic receives at a port exceeds this parameter.
The value ranges from 1 Mbit/s to 100 Mbit/s for an FE port, ranges
from 1 Mbit/s to 1000 Mbit/s for a GE port, and ranges from 1 Mbit/s
to 10000 Mbit/s for a 10GE port.
<TRFCTIME> Indicates the time that allows a port to receive traffic exceeding the
value of TRCTH. An alarm is reported when the time that a port
receives traffic higher than the value of TRCTH exceeds this
parameter.
<FLUXMON> Indicates whether the traffic of a port is monitored.


Example
l Command
RTRV-PORT-TRAFFIC::FAC-5-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-5-2::NTMENABLE=ENABLE,NTMTIME=15,TRFCTH=100,TRFCTIME=10,FLUXMON=Y:IS"
;
Related Commands
ED-PORT-TRAFFICA.13.1.1 ED-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
RTRV-PORT-TRFFLUXA.13.1.1 ED-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
A.13.1.12 RTRV-PORT-TRFFLUX
Queries historical traffic records of a port.
Function
This command queries historical traffic records of a port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PORT-TRFFLUX:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::<BGNDATE>:<BGNTIME>:<ENDDATE>:<ENDTIME>;
Command Parameters

ID>
ID>
<BGNDATE> Indicates the start date for querying traffic NA

records.
Format: <YYYY-MM-DD>
Example: 2011-09-21
<BGNTIME> Indicates the start time for querying traffic NA

records.
Format: <HH-MM-SS>
Example: 15-30-00
<ENDDATE> Indicates the end date for querying traffic NA

records.
Example: 2011-09-21
<ENDTIME> Indicates the end time for querying traffic NA

records.
Format: <HH-MM-SS>
Example: 15-30-00
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
^^^"<AID>::BGNDATE=<BGNDATE>,BGNTIME=<BGNTIME>,ENDDATE=<ENDDATE>,ENDTIME=<ENDTIME>
:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>
Response Parameters
<AID> l FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>

<RECDATE> Indicates the date of a flow record.

Example: 2011-09-21
<RECTIME> Indicates the time of a flow record.

Format: <HH-MM-SS>
Example: 15-30-00
<RECFLAG> Indicates the flag that represents whether flow records are generated.
<RXRATE> Indicates the flow receiving rate at the time specified by RECDATE
and RECTIME. The unit is Kbit/s. The value of this parameter is 0
when RECFLAG is N.
<TXRATE> Indicates the flow transmitting rate at the time specified by RECDATE
and RECTIME. The unit is Kbit/s. The value of this parameter is 0
when RECFLAG is N.

Example
l Command
RTRV-PORT-TRFFLUX::FAC-1-1-2:100:::2003-02-28,09-00-00,2003-02-28,12-00-00;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-2::RECDATE=2003-02-28,RECTIME=10-00-00,RECFLAG=Y,RXRATE=10,TXRATE=10:IS"
;
Related Commands
ED-PORT-TRAFFICA.13.1.1 ED-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>
RTRV-PORT-TRAFFICA.13.1.1 ED-<FETH/GETH/XGETH/100GETH/40GETH>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.2 Configuring Flow

This section lists the commands used to configure the Ethernet service flow.
A.13.2.1 ENT-FLOW
Creates a flow.
Function
This command creates a flow entity of the unit. Currently, the flow can be classified as follows:
l By the incoming port (FAC or ACC).
l By the incoming port and incoming tag.
In the future, the flow can be classified as follows:
l By the incoming tag.

l By the incoming port, incoming tag, and incoming tag priority.
l By the MAC address.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-FLOW:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::PORT=<PORT>,[INTAG=<INTAG>],
[INSTAG=<INSTAG>],[TAGPRI=<TAGPRI>],[LABEL=<LABEL>];
Command Parameters
Indicates the Ethernet flow identifier. The valid

format is FLOW-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<FLOW ID>.
<AID> The <FLOW ID> ranges from 1 to 65535. NA
<PORT> Indicates the Ethernet port identifier. The valid NA

format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
This parameter is optional and has no default value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<INTAG> Indicates the incoming tag. The tag can be a VLAN NA

tag.
l For TBE cards, the range is from 1 to 4095.
l For L4G cards, the range is from 1 to 4094.
<INSTAG> Indicates the incoming service VLAN tag. The valid NA

<TAGPRI> Indicates the tag priority of <INSTAG> when NA

<INSTAG> is used and the priority of <INTAG>
when <INSTAG> is used. The valid values are
integers ranging from 0 to 7.
<LABEL> Indicates the incoming label. Valid value can range NA

from 0x01 to MAX_MPLS_INLABEL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-FLOW::FLOW-1-1-1:100:::PORT=FAC-2-1-1;
ENT-FLOW::FLOW-1-1-2:100:::PORT=ACC-2-1-1,INTAG=3;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.2.3 DLT-FLOW
A.13.2.2 ED-FLOW
A.13.2.4 RTRV-FLOW

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.2.2 ED-FLOW
Edits a flow.
Function
This command modifies a flow entity of the unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-FLOW:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[CARID=<CARID>],[COSID=<COSID>],
[PKTSTATEN=<PKTSTATEN>],[PKTSTATCLR=<PKTSTATCLR>],
[FLUXMONEN=<FLUXMONEN>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet flow identifier. The valid NA

format is FLOW-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<FLOW ID>.
The <FLOW ID> ranges from 1 to 65535.
<CARID> Indicates the associated CAR. The valid format is NULL

CAR-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<CAR ID>. The
CAR must be created before this parameter is
input.
For L4G cards, the range is from 1 to 65535.
NULL indicates that the flow has no CAR.
<COSID> Indicates the identifier of CoS. The valid format NULL

is COS-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<COS ID>.
The <COS ID> ranges from 1 to 65535. NULL
indicates that the flow has no CoS.
The CoS must be created before this parameter is
input.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PKTSTA Indicates whether the function of collecting N

TEN> statistics on flow packets is enabled. The system
starts to collect statistics on flow packets after
users set this parameter to Y.
<PKTSTA Indicates whether the statistical results on flow N

TCLR> packets are cleared. The system clears the
statistical results if users set this parameter to Y.
Note: Users can set this parameter to Y only after
setting PKTSTATEN to Y.
<FLUXM Indicates whether traffic monitoring is enabled for N

ONEN> a flow. The system starts to periodically record the
traffic of a flow after users set this parameter to Y.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-
FLOW::FLOW-1-1-1:100:::CARID=CAR-1-1-20,COSID=COS-1-1-10,PKTSTATEN=Y,PKTSTATCLR=Y,
FLUXMONEN=N;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.2.1 ENT-FLOW
A.13.2.3 DLT-FLOW
A.13.2.4 RTRV-FLOW
A.13.2.3 DLT-FLOW
Deletes the flow.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command deletes a flow entry of the unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-FLOW:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet flow NA

identifier. The valid format is
FLOW-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<FLOW ID>.
The <FLOW ID> ranges from 1 to
65535.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-FLOW::FLOW-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.13.2.1 ENT-FLOW
A.13.2.2 ED-FLOW
A.13.2.4 RTRV-FLOW
A.13.2.4 RTRV-FLOW
Retrieves a flow entry of the unit.
Function
This command retrieves a flow entry of a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-FLOW:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> FLOW-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<FLOW ID> NA

Supports ALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[PORT=<PORT>],[INTAG=<INTAG>],[INSTAG=<INSTAG>],[TAGPRI=<TAGPRI>],
[CARID=<CARID>],[COSID=<COSID>],[PKTSTATEN=<PKTSTATEN>],[PKTRIGHTH4=<PKTRIGHTH4>],
[PKTRIGHTL4=<PKTRIGHTL4>],[PKTERRH4=<PKTERRH4>],[PKTERRL4=<PKTERRL4>],
[PKTTOTALH4=<PKTTOTALH4>],[PKTTOTALL4=<PKTTOTALL4>],[PKTBYTEH4=<PKTBYTEH4>],
[PKTBYTEL4=<PKTBYTEL4>],[FLUXMONEN=<FLUXMONEN>]"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet flow identifier.

The valid format is FLOW-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<FLOW ID>.
<PORT> Indicates the Ethernet port identifier.

The valid format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>.
<INTAG> Indicates the incoming tag. The tag can be a VLAN tag.
<INSTAG> Indicates the incoming service VLAN tag.
<TAGPRI> Indicates the priority of <INTAG>. The valid value ranges from 0 to
7.
<CARID> Indicates the associated CAR. The valid format is CAR-<SLOT ID>-
<CAR ID>.
<COSID> Indicates the identifier of CoS. The valid format is COS-<SHELF ID>-
<SLOT ID>-<COS ID>.
<PKTSTATEN> Indicates whether the function of collecting statistics on flow packets

is enabled. The system starts to collect statistics on flow packets after
users set this parameter to Y.
<PKTRIGHTH4> Indicates the most significant four bytes in the number of correct flow
packets. This parameter is displayed only when users set
PKTSTATEN to Y.
<PKTRIGHTL4> Indicates the least significant four bytes in the number of correct flow
PKTSTATEN to Y.
<PKTERRH4> Indicates the most significant four bytes in the number of error flow
PKTSTATEN to Y.
<PKTERRL4> Indicates the least significant four bytes in the number of error flow
PKTSTATEN to Y.
<PKTTOTALH4> Indicates the most significant four bytes in the number of all flow
PKTSTATEN to Y.
<PKTTOTALL4> Indicates the least significant four bytes in the number of all flow
PKTSTATEN to Y.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PKTBYTEH4> Indicates the most significant four bytes in the total length of all flow
PKTSTATEN to Y.
<PKTBYTEL4> Indicates the least significant four bytes in the total length of all flow
PKTSTATEN to Y.
<FLUXMONEN> Indicates whether traffic monitoring is enabled for a flow. The system
starts to periodically record the traffic of a flow after users set this
parameter to Y.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FLOW::FLOW-1-1-1:100;
RTRV-FLOW::FLOW-1-1-ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FLOW-1-1-1::PORT=FAC-1-1-2,INTAG=3,CARID=CAR-1-1-10,COSID=COS-1-1-20,PKTSTATEN=N,
FLUXMONEN=Y";
Related Commands
A.13.2.2 ED-FLOW
A.13.2.1 ENT-FLOW
A.13.2.3 DLT-FLOW
A.13.3 Configuring Ethernet Link

This section lists the commands used to configure the Ethernet link.
A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK
Creates an Ethernet link.
Function
This command creates an Ethernet link in the unit.
Usage Note
The relation between action and TAG parameters required by the action is listed in the following
table. "MUST" means the parameter must be entered, "MAY" means the parameter is optional,
hyphen("-") means the parameter cannot be entered.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Action INTA OUT INSTA OUTS OUTTAG OUTSTAG

G TAG G TAG PRI PRI
Forward based C- MAY - - - - -

VLAN
Switch C-VLAN MUS MUS - - - -

T T
Pop S-VLAN MAY - MAY =NULL - -
Pop S-VLAN & MUS MUS MAY =NULL - -

Switch C-VLAN T T
Pop S-VLAN & C- MAY =NUL MAY =NULL - -

VLAN L
Push S-VLAN - - - MUST - MAY
Push S-VLAN & MUS MUS - MUST - MAY

Switch C-VLAN T T
Push S-VLAN & C- - MUS - MUST MAY MAY

VLAN T
Forward based C- MUS MUS - - - -

VLAN & S-VLAN T T
Switch S-VLAN MAY - MUST MUST - -
Switch S-VLAN & MUS MUS MUST MUST - -

C-VLAN T T
Category
Provision
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-ETHLINK:[<TID>]:<LINKFROM>,<LINKTO>:<CTAG>:::[INTAG=<INTAG>],
[OUTTAG=<OUTTAG>],[INSTAG=<INSTAG>],[OUTSTAG=<OUTSTAG>],
[OUTTAGPRI=<OUTTAGPRI>],[OUTSTAGPRI=<OUTSTAGPRI>],
[CTYPE=<CTYPE>],[OAMFLAG=<OAMFLAG>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<LINKFROM Indicates the source of the Ethernet link. The valid NA

l PORT: FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>
l VBLP: VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB
ID>-<VBLP ID>
<LINKTO> Indicates the sink of the Ethernet link. The valid NA

<PORT ID>
ID>-<VBLP ID>
Ethernet links between VBLPs are not supported.
<INTAG> Indicates the tag of incoming packets. The tag can NA

be a VLAN ID.
This parameter is optional and indicates an Ethernet
private line (EPL) in this response.
<OUTTAG> Indicates the tag of outgoing packets. The tag can NA

be a VLAN ID. Set this parameter when creating a
VLAN switch.
This parameter is optional and indicates an EPL in
this response. NULL means to strip the C-VLAN
tag.
<INSTAG> Indicates the VLAN tag of the incoming service. NA

<OUTSTAG> Indicates the VLAN tag of the outgoing service. NA

This parameter is optional. NULL means to strip the
S-VLAN tag.
<OUTTAGPR Indicates the VLAN tag priority of the outgoing NA

I> service. The valid value ranges from 0 to 7 (step
length: 1).
This parameter is optional and used only when link
type is Q-in-Q.
<OUTSTAGP Indicates the VLAN tag priority of the outgoing NA

RI> service. The valid value ranges from 0 to 7 (step
length: 1).
This parameter is optional and used only when link
type is Q-in-Q.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<CTYPE> The valid values are 1WAY and 2WAY. 2WAY

l 1WAY: unidirectional service from the source
to sink.
l 2WAY: bidirectional service from the source to
sink and from the sink to source.
If this parameter is 2WAY, enter both <INTAG>
and <OUTTAG> or neither.
NOTE
The general link supports 1WAY only; the VB link
supports 1WAY and 2WAY.
<OAMFLAG> Indicates whether the OAM of the link is enabled. DISABLE

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
Example for VLAN switch link:
ENT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-4:100:::INTAG=3,OUTTAG=5,CTYPE=1WAY;
Example for VLAN link:

ENT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-1-4:100:::INTAG=3,OUTTAG=3,CTYPE=1WAY;
Example for LPT:

ENT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-1-4:100:::LPTENABLE=Y;
NOTE
This example is not valid for NGWDM equipment.
Example for VB link:

ENT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-1-2,VBLP-1-1-1-1-20:100;
Example for general port link:

ENT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-1-2,FAC-1-1-1-4:100:::CTYPE=1WAY;
Example for poping S-VLAN & C-VLAN:

EENT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-1-4:100:::INTAG=3,INSTAG=10, CTYPE=1WAY;
Example for pushing S-VLAN & C-VLAN:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
ENT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-1-4:100:::OUTTAG=3,OUTSTAG=10,CTYPE=1WAY;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.2 ED-ETHLINK
A.13.3.3 DLT-ETHLINK
A.13.3.4 RTRV-ETHLINK
A.13.3.2 ED-ETHLINK
Edits the Ethernet link.
Function
This command modifies the attributes of an Ethernet link in the unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-ETHLINK:[<TID>]:<LINKFROM>,<LINKTO>:<CTAG>:::[INTAG=<INTAG>],
[INSTAG=<INSTAG>],[OUTTAGPRI=<OUTTAGPRI>],
[OUTSTAGPRI=<OUTSTAGPRI>],[CTYPE=<CTYPE>],
[BANDWIDTH=<BANDWIDTH>],[OAMFLAG =<OAMFLAG >];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<LINKFROM Indicates the source of the Ethernet link. The valid NA

l PORT: FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<PORT ID>
l VBLP: VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>
NOTE
Primary state (PST) of PORT must be switched to the
OOS state first.

ID>-<PORT ID>
<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>
The Ethernet link from VBLP to VBLP is not
supported.
NOTE
PST of PORT must be switched to the OOS state first.
<INTAG> Indicates the tag of incoming packets. It can be a NA

VLAN ID.
This parameter is optional and indicates an EPL in
this command.
<INSTAG> Indicates the incoming service VLAN tag. This NA

parameter is optional. See also "Usage Note" in
A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK.
<OUTTAGPR Indicates the default tag priority of the outgoing NA

I> customer VLAN tag. The valid value ranges from
0 to 7 (the step length is 1).
This parameter is optional. See also "Usage Note"
in A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK.
<OUTSTAGP Indicates the default tag priority of the outgoing NA

RI> service VLAN tag. The valid value ranges from 0
to 7 (the step length is 1).
This parameter is optional. See also "Usage Note"
in A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<CTYPE> The valid values are 1WAY and 2WAY. 2WAY

l 1WAY: unidirectional service from the source
to sink
l 2WAY: bidirectional service from the source
to sink and from the sink to source
If this parameter is 2WAY, enter both <INTAG>
and <OUTTAG> or neither.
<BANDWIDT Indicates the service bandwidth. NA

H> It is only provided for the NMS.
<OAMFLAG> Indicates the enabling state of the link OAM (for DISABLE
the VLANSNCP protection). The valid values are
ENABLE and DISABLE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-4:100:::CTYPE=2WAY;
l Response Message
NE 2005-07-14 09:55:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Deletes the Ethernet link.
Function
This command deletes an Ethernet link in the unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-ETHLINK:[<TID>]:<LINKFROM>,<LINKTO>:<CTAG>:::[INTAG=<INTAG>],
[INSTAG=<INSTAG>];
Command Parameters
<LINKFRO Indicates the source of the Ethernet link. The NA

M> valid values are as follows:
ID>-<PORT ID>
<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>

ID>-<PORT ID>
<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>
supported.
<INTAG> Indicates the tag of incoming packets. It can be NA

a VLAN ID.
It supports the VB connection of the PORT
+CVLAN group, and thus "&" is supported.
This parameter is optional and indicates an EPL
in this command.
<INSTAG> Indicates the incoming service VLAN tag. This NA

parameter is optional. See also "Usage Note" in
A.13.3.1 ENT-ETHLINK.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
Example for EPL:

DLT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-4:100;
Example for EVPL:

DLT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-4:100:::INTAG=3;
Example for forwarding based S-VLAN & C-VLAN:

DLT-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-4:100:::INTAG=3,INSTAG=4;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.2 ED-ETHLINK
Retrieves the information about an Ethernet link.
Function
This command retrieves the information about an Ethernet link in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-ETHLINK:[<TID>]:[<LINK_FROM>,<LINK_TO>]:<CTAG>:::
[INTAG=<INTAG>],[INSTAG=<INSTAG>];
Command Parameters
<LINKFROM> Indicates the source end of the Ethernet link. The NA

<PORT ID>
ID>-<VBLP ID>
l SLOT: SLOT-<SHELF>-<SLOT>
Enter SLOT-<SHELF>-<SLOT> to retrieve the
link information about the specified card.
The values of source <SLOT> and end <SLOT>
must be same.
If the value of <SLOT> is ALL, all of the link
information for the cards on the shelf will be
retrieved.
Supports ALL, which means to retrieve the
information at the NE level.
<LINKTO> Indicates the sink end of the Ethernet link. The valid NA
<PORT ID>
ID>-<VBLP ID>
l SLOT: SLOT-<SHELF>-<SLOT>
Enter SLOT-<SHELF>-<SLOT> to retrieve the
link information about the specified card.
The values of source <SLOT> and end <SLOT>
must be same.
If the value of <SLOT> is ALL, all of the link
information for the cards on the shelf will be
retrieved.
Supports ALL, which means to retrieve the
information at the NE level.
supported.
<INTAG> Indicates the tag of incoming packets. It can be a NA

VLAN ID.
This parameter is optional. If not specified, all
INTAGs are retrieved by default.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<INSTAG> Indicates the VLAN tag of incoming services. NA

This parameter is optional. If not specified, all
INTAGs are retrieved by default.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<LINK_FROM>,<LINK_TO>:: [INTAG=<INTAG>],[OUTTAG=<OUTTAG>], [INSTAG=<INSTAG>],
[OUTSTAG=<OUTSTAG>],[OUTTAGPRI=<OUTTAGPRI>],[OUTSTAGPRI=<OUTSTAGPRI>],
[CTYPE=<CTYPE>],[BANDWIDTH=<BANDWIDTH >],[OAMFLAG=<OAMFLAG>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<LINKFROM> The valid value is in the following format:

<PORT>:FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
<VBLP>:VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>
<LINKTO> The valid value is in the following format:

<PORT>:FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
<VBLP>:VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>
The Ethernet link from VBLP to VBLP is not supported.
<INTAG> Indicates the incoming tag. The tag can be a VLAN tag.
This parameter is optional and denotes an EPL in this document.
<OUTTAG> Indicates the out tag. The tag can be a VLAN tag.
This parameter is optional and denotes an EPL in this document.
<INSTAG> Indicates the VLAN tag of incoming services.

This parameter is optional. See "Usage Note" in A.13.3.1 ENT-
ETHLINK.
<OUTSTAG> Indicates the VLAN tag of outgoing services.

ETHLINK.
<OUTTAGPRI> Indicates the default priority of the VLAN tag of outgoing client services.
ETHLINK.
<OUTSTAGPRI Indicates the default priority of the VLAN tag of outgoing services.
> This parameter is optional. See "Usage Note" in A.13.3.1 ENT-
ETHLINK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<CTYPE> The valid values are 1WAY(1) and 2WAY(2).
<BANDWIDTH Indicates the service bandwidth.

> It is only provided for the NMS.
<OAMFLAG> Indicates whether the OAM is enabled for the link (used for the VLAN
SNCP protection). The valid values are as follows:
DISABLE: disabled (default)
ENABLE: enabled
Example
l Command
Retrieves the link according to specified FROM and TO:
RTRV-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-4:100;
RTRV-ETHLINK::FAC-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-4:100:::INTAG=1;
Retrieves all links within a card:

RTRV-ETHLINK::SLOT-1-1,SLOT-1-1:100;
RTRV-ETHLINK::SLOT-1-all,SLOT-1-all:100;
Retrieves all links within an NE:

RTRV-ETHLINK:::100;
RTRV-ETHLINK::all,all:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-2,ACC-1-1-4::INTAG=2,OUTTAG=2,CTYPE=1WAY"
"FAC-1-1-1,ACC-1-1-1::INTAG=2,OUTTAG=NULL,INSTAG=10,OUTSTAG=NULL,CTYPE=1WAY"
"FAC-1-1-1,ACC-1-1-1::OUTTAG=10,OUTSTAG=20,OUTTAGPRI=0,OUTSTAGPRI=7,CTYPE=1WAY"
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.2 ED-ETHLINK
A.13.3.5 ENT-PW
Creates the PW.
Function
This command creates PW.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-PW:[<TID>]:<ENT_PWID>:<CTAG>:::INPORT=<INPORT>,
[INACPORT=<ENT_ACPORTID>],[FWINLABEL=<FWINLABEL>],
[FWOUTLABEL=<FWOUTLABEL>],[OUTPORT=<OUTPORT>],
[TUNNEL=<ENT_TUNNELID>],[BWINLABEL=<BWINLABEL>],
[BWOUTLABEL=<BWOUTLABEL>],[BWOUTLABEL=<BWOUTLABEL>],
[NHIP=<NHIP>],[EXPVALUE=<EXPVALUE>],[BANDWIDTH=<BANDWIDTH>];
Command Parameters
<ENT_PWID PW index. NA
>
<INPORT> Ingress port ID. NA
<INACPORT Sub port index. NA

>
<FWINLABE Ingress VC label. NA

L>
<FWOUTLA Egress VC label. NA

BEL>
<OUTPORT> Egress port ID. NA
<TUNNEL> Indicates the tunnel index. NA
<BWINLABE Indicates the opposite ingress VC label. NA

L>
<BWOUTLA Indicates the opposite egress VC label. NA

BEL>
<NHIP> Indicates the next-hop IP address. NA
<EXPVALUE EXP Value of PW. NA

>
<BANDWID Bandwidth of PW. NA

TH>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-
PW::PW-1-1:100:::INPORT=FAC-1-1,INACPORT=ACPORT-1-1,FWOUTLABEL=1000,TUNNEL=TUNNEL-
1-10,BWINLABEL=16,EXPVALUE=0,BANDWIDTH=64;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.6 ED-PW
A.13.3.8 DLT-PW
A.13.3.7 RTRV-PW
A.13.3.6 ED-PW
Edits the specified pw.
Function
This command modifies the attributes of the specified pw.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-PW:[<TID>]:[<TID>]:<ED_PWID>:<CTAG>:::[EXPVALUE=<EXPVALUE>],
[BANDWIDTH=<BANDWIDTH>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<ED_PWID> Indicates the pw identifier. NA
<EXPVALUE> EXP Value of PW. NA
<BANDWIDT Bandwidth of PW. NA

H>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-PW::PW-1-10:100:::EXPVALUE=0,BANDWIDTH=64;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.5 ENT-PW
A.13.3.8 DLT-PW
A.13.3.7 RTRV-PW
A.13.3.7 RTRV-PW
Retrieves the information about PW.
Function
This command retrieves the information about PW.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PW:[<TID>]:<RTRV_PWID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<RTRV_PWI Indicates the Ethernet PW identifier. NA

D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<RTRV_PWID>::TYPE=<PWTYPE>,[INPORT=<INPORT>],[INACPORT=<ENT_ACPORTID>],
[FWINLABEL=<FWINLABEL>],[FWOUTLABEL]=<FWOUTLABEL>,[OUTPORT]=<OUTPORT>,[TUNNEL]
=<ENT_TUNNELID>,[BWINLABEL]=<BWINLABEL>,[BWOUTLABEL]=<BWOUTLABEL>,[NHIP]=<NHIP>,
[EXPVALUE]=<EXPVALUE>,[BANDWIDTH]=<BANDWIDTH>;"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<RTRV_PWID> Indicates the Ethernet PW identifier.
<PWTYPE> PW type
<INPORT> Indicates ingress port identifier.
<INACPORT> Indicates the sub-port identifier.
<FWINLABEL> Forward ingress VC label.
<FWOUTLABEL> Forward egress VC label.
<OUTPORT> Egress port.
<ENT_TUNNELI Indicates the tunnel identifier.

D>
<BWINLABEL> Backward ingress VC label.
<BWOUTLABEL> Backward egress VC label.
<NHIP> Next hop ip address.
<EXPVALUE> EXP value of tunnel.
<BANDWIDTH> Bandwidth of pw.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-PW::PW-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"PW-1-1:100:::INPORT=FAC-1-1,INACPORT=ACPORT-1-1,FWOUTLABEL=1000,TUNNEL=TUNNEL-1-1
0,BWINLABEL=16,EXPVALUE=0,BANDWIDTH=64"
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.5 ENT-PW
A.13.3.6 ED-PW
A.13.3.8 DLT-PW
A.13.3.8 DLT-PW
Deletes the specified pw.
Function
This command deletes a specified pw.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-PW:[<TID>]:<ENT_PWID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<ENT_PWID> Indicates the PW identifier. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-PW::PW-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.5 ENT-PW
A.13.3.6 ED-PW
A.13.3.7 RTRV-PW
A.13.3.9 ENT-TUNNEL
Creates the TUNNEL.
Function
This command creates TUNNEL.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-TUNNEL:[<TID>]:<ENT_TUNNELID>:<CTAG>:::INPORT=<INPORT>,
[INTNLABEL=<INTNLABEL>],[OUTPORT=<OUTPORT>],
[OUTTNLABEL=<OUTTNLABEL>],[NHIP=<NHIP>],[RETTUNNEL=<RETTUNNEL>],
[EXPMODE=<EXPMODE>],[EXPVALUE=<EXPVALUE>],
[TTSILSRID=<TTSILSRID>],[TTSITUNNELID=<TTSITUNNELID>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<ENT_TUNN Tunnel index. NA

ELID>
<INPORT> Ingress port ID. NA
<INTNLABE Indicates the ingress label. NA

L>
<OUTPORT> Indicates the egress port. NA
<OUTTNLA Indicates the egress label. NA

BEL>
<OUTPORT> Egress port ID. NA
<NHIP> Indicates the next hop ip address. NA
<RETTUNNE Indicates the index of return tunnel. NA

L>
<EXPMODE Indicates the EXP model. NA

>
<EXPVALUE Indicates the EXP value. NA

>
<TTSILSRID Indicates the TTSI value of tunnel. NA

>
<TTSITUNN Indicates the TTSI tunnel index. NA

ELID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-
TUNNEL::TUNNEL-1-1:100:::OUTPORT=VCG-1-4,OUTTNLABEL=20,NHIP=10.11.12.13,EXPMODE=VA
LUE,EXPVALUE=0,TTSILSRID=192.168.0.1,TTSITUNNELID=1;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.13.3.12 ED-TUNNEL
A.13.3.10 DLT-TUNNEL
A.13.3.11 RTRV-TUNNEL
Deletes the specified tunnel.
Function
This command deletes a specified tunnel.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-TUNNEL:[<TID>]:<ENT_TUNNELID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<ENT_TUNN Indicates the tunnel identifier. NA

ELID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-TUNNEL::TUNNEL-1-10:100;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.9 ENT-TUNNEL
A.13.3.12 ED-TUNNEL
Retrieves the information about tunnel.
Function
This command retrieves the information about tunnel.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-TUNNEL:[<TID>]:<RTRV_TUNNEL>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<RTRV_TUN Indicates the Ethernet TUNNEL identifier. NA

NEL>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<RTRV_TUNNEL>::TYPE=<TUNNELTYPE>,[INPORT=<INPORT>],[INTNLABEL=<INTNLABEL>],
[OUTPORT]=<OUTPORT>,[OUTTNLABEL]=<OUTTNLABEL>,[NHIP]=<NHIP>,[RETTUNNEL]
=<RETTUNNEL>,[EXPMODE]=<EXPMODE>[EXPVALUE]=<EXPVALUE>,[TTSILSRID]=<TTSILSRID>,
[TTSITUNNELID]=<TTSITUNNELID>;"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<RTRV_PWID> Indicates the Ethernet PW identifier.
<TUNNELTYPE> the type of tunnel
<INPORT> Indicates ingress port identifier.
<INTNLABEL> Indicates the ingress label.
<OUTPORT> Indicates the egress port
<OUTTNLABEL> Indicates the egress label
<NHIP> Next hop IP address.
<RETTUNNEL> The return tunnel.
<EXPMODE> TIndicates the EXP mode.
<EXPVALUE> Indicates the EXP value.
<TTSILSRID> Indicates the TTSI value of tunnel.
<TTSITUNNELID Indicates the TTSI tunnel index.

>
Example
l Command
RTRV-TUNNEL::TUNNEL-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"TUNNEL-1-1::TYPE=ENGRESS, INPORT=FAC-1-1, INTNLABEL=20,OUTPORT=
VCG-1-4,OUTTNLABEL=20,NHIP=10.11.12.12,RETTUNNEL=TUNNEL-1-2,EXPMODE=VALUE,EXPVALUE
=0,TTSILSRID=192.168.0.1,TTSITUNNELID=1"
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.9 ENT-TUNNEL
A.13.3.12 ED-TUNNEL
A.13.3.12 ED-TUNNEL
Edits the information of a tunnel.
Function
This command modifies the attributes of the specified tunnel.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-TUNNEL:[<TID>]:[<TID>]:<ENT_TUNNELID>:<CTAG>:::
[RETTUNNEL=<RETTUNNEL>],[EXPMODE=<EXPMODE>],
[EXPVALUE=<EXPVALUE>],[TTSILSRID=<TTSILSRID>],
[TTSITUNNELID=<TTSITUNNELID>];
Command Parameters
<ENT_TUNNE Indicates the Ethernet tunnel identifier. The valid NA

LID> format is TUNNEL-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-
<TUNNEL>.
<RETTUNNE Indicates the index of return tunnel. NA

L>
<EXPMODE> Indicates the EXP mode. NA
<EXPVALUE> Indicates the EXP value. NA
<TTSILSRID> Indicates the TTSI value of tunnel. NA
<TTSITUNNE Indicates the TTSI tunnel index. NA

LID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
ED-
TUNNEL::TUNNEL-1-10:100:::EXPMODE=VALUE,EXPVALUE=0,TTSILSRID=192.168.0.1,TTSITUNNE
LID=2;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.3.9 ENT-TUNNEL
A.13.4 Configuring Virtual Bridge

This section lists the commands used to configure the virtual bridge (VB).
A.13.4.1 ENT-VB
Creates a virtual bridge (VB).
Function
This command creates a VB.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[VBNAME=<VBNAME>],
[FDBAGTM=<FDBAGTM>],[MACAGETIMEUNIT=<MACAGETIMEUNIT>],
[FILTER=<FILTER>],[LEARNMODE=<LEARNMODE>],[TYPE=<TYPE>],
[STPTXHOLDCOUNT=<STPTXHOLDCOUNT>],
[IGMPSNPDISCAR=<IGMPSNPDISCAR>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.
<VBNAME> Indicates the name of a VB, which contains a maximum NA

of 16 bytes.
<FDBAGTM Indicates the filtering database aging time, that is, the 5
> aging time of the MAC address. The valid value ranges
from 1 to 120, which is expressed in minutes.
NOTE
Currently, all VBs share the same FDBAGTM.
<MACAGET Indicates the unit used for the aging time of the MAC MIN
IMEUNIT> address. The valid values are as follows:
l MIN: minute
l HOUR: hour
l DAY: day
<FLTREN> Indicates whether the ingress filter is enabled. The valid Y

values are Y and N.
This parameter is optional and its default value is Y.
<LEARNMO Indicates the VLAN learning constraints. The valid IVL

DE> values are as follows:
l Shared virtual LAN learning (SVL): In this mode,
the VB learns only the MAC address of the message
source. The VLAN in the MAC address table is
uniformly set.
l Independent virtual LAN learning (IVL): In this
mode, the VB learns the MAC address of the
message source and the carried VLAN, and then
stores them into the MAC address table.
Currently, the following two combination modes of
<FLTREN> and <LEARNMODE> are supported:
l <FLTREN> is set to N and <LEARNMODE> is set
to SVL.
l <FLTREN> is set to Y and <LEARNMODE> is set
to IVL.
This parameter is optional and its default value is IVL.
<TYPE> Indicates the VB type. The valid values are as follows: 802.1q
l 802.1q VB
l 802.1d VB
l 802.1ad VB

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<STPTXHOL Indicates the TxHoldCount value of the spanning tree. 6

DCOUNT> The valid value ranges from 1 to 10, and units are in
times per second.
<IGMPSNPD Indicates whether IGMP snooping packets are Y

ISCAR> discarded.
l N: not discarded
l Y: discarded
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-VB::VB-1-1-1:100:::VBNAME="VB-
HW",FDBAGTM=20,FLTREN=Y,LEARNMODE=IVL,IGMPSNPDISCAR=N;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.4.2 ED-VB
A.13.4.3 DLT-VB
A.13.4.4 RTRV-VB
A.13.4.2 ED-VB
Edits the parameters of a virtual bridge (VB).
Function
This command modifies a VB on the unit.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[VBNAME=<VBNAME>],
[FDBAGTM=<FDBAGTM>],[MACAGETIMEUNIT=<MACAGETIMEUNIT>],
[FLTREN=<FLTREN>],[LEARNMODE=<LERANMODE>],[TYPE=<TYPE>],
[STPTXHOLDCOUNT =<STPTXHOLDCOUNT>],
[IGMPSNPDISCAR=<IGMPSNPDISCAR>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VB-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>-<VB ID>.
<VBNAME> Indicates the name of a VB. The maximum NA

length is 16 bytes.
<FDBAGTM> Indicates the filtering database aging time, that NA

is, the aging time of the MAC address. The
valid value ranges from 1 to 120, which is
expressed in minutes. The initial value is 5.
NOTE
<MACAGETIMEU Indicates the unit used for the aging time of the MIN
NIT> MAC address. The valid values are as follows:
l MIN: minute
l HOUR: hour
l DAY: day
<FLTREN> Indicates whether the ingress filter is enabled. Y

This parameter is optional, and the initial value
is Y.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LEARNMODE> Indicates the VLAN learning constraints. The NA

valid values are as follows.
l SVL (shared virtual local area network
learning): In this mode, VB learns only the
MAC address of the message source. The
VLAN in the MAC address table is
uniformly set.
l IVL (independent virtual local area
network learning): In this mode, the VB
learns the MAC address of the message
source and the carried VLAN ID, and then
stores them into the MAC address table.
This parameter is optional, and the initial value
is IVL.
<TYPE> Indicates the type of VB (virtual bridge). The 802.1q

valid values are as follows.
l 802.1q network bridge
l 802.1d network bridge
l 802.1ad network bridge
<STPTXHOLDCO Indicates the TxHoldCount of the spanning 6

UNT> tree network bridge.
The valid value ranges from 1 to 10, and units
are in times per second.
<IGMPSNPDISCA Indicates whether IGMP snooping packets are Y

R> discarded.
l N: not discarded
l Y: discarded
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-VB::VB-1-1-2:100:::VBNAME="VB-
HW",FDBAGTM=20,FLTREN=N,LEARNMODE=SVL,IGMPSNPDISCAR=N;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.4.1 ENT-VB
A.13.4.3 DLT-VB
A.13.4.4 RTRV-VB
A.13.4.3 DLT-VB
Deletes a virtual bridge (VB).
Function
This command deletes a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VB-<SHELF ID>- NA

<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
DLT-VB::VB-1-1-2:101;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.4.1 ENT-VB
A.13.4.2 ED-VB
A.13.4.4 RTRV-VB
A.13.4.4 RTRV-VB
Retrieves the information about a virtual bridge (VB).
Function
This command retrieves the information about a VB.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.
retrieved.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<VBID>::VBNAME=<VBNAME>,VBLPNUM=<VBLPNUM>,FDBAGTM=<FDBAGTM>,
[MACAGETIMEUNIT=<MACAGETIMEUNIT>],FLTREN=<FLTREN>,LEARNMODE=<LEARNMODE>,
[TYPE=<TYPE>],[STPTXHOLDCOUNT=<STPTXHOLDCOUNT>],
[IGMPSNPDISCAR=<IGMPSNPDISCAR>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<VBID> Indicates the valid format is VB-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>.
<VBNAME> Indicates the name of a VB.
<VBLPNUM> Indicates the number of a virtual bridge logical port.
<FDBAGTM> Indicates the filtering database aging time, that is, the aging time of the
MAC address. The valid value ranges from 1 to 120, which is expressed
in minutes. The initial value is 5.
NOTE
<MACAGETIM Indicates the unit used for the aging time of the MAC address. The valid
EUNIT> values are as follows:
l MIN: minute
l HOUR: hour
l DAY: day
<FLTREN> Indicates whether the ingress filter is enabled. The valid values are Y and
N.
This parameter is optional. The initial value is Y.
<LEARNMODE Indicates the VLAN learning constraints. The valid values are as follows:
> l SVL (shared virtual local area network learning): In this mode, the
VB learns the MAC address of only the message source. The VLAN
ID in the MAC address table is uniformly set.
l IVL (independent virtual local area network learning): In this mode,
the VB learns the MAC address of the message source and the carried
VLAN ID, and then stores them into the MAC address table.
This parameter is optional. The initial value is IVL.
<TYPE> Indicates the VB type. The valid values are as follows:

l 802.1q bridge
l 802.1d bridge
l 802.1ad bridge
<STPTXHOLD Indicates the TxHoldCount of the spanning tree bridge.

COUNT> The valid value ranges from 1 to 10, and units are in times per second.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<IGMPSNPDIS Indicates whether IGMP snooping packets are discarded.

CAR> N: not discarded
Y: discarded
Example
l Command
RTRV-VB::VB-1-1-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"VB-1-1-2::VBNAME="VB-HW",FDBAGTM=20,FLTREN=N,LEARNMODE=SVL,IGMPSNPDISCAR=Y"
;
Related Commands
A.13.4.1 ENT-VB
A.13.4.2 ED-VB
A.13.4.3 DLT-VB
A.13.4.5 ENT-VLANENTRY-VB
Creates a VLAN filter entry of a VB.
Function
This command creates a VLAN filter entry of a VB.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-VLANENTRY-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::VLANID=<VLANID>,
[VBLPLIST=<VBLPLIST>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters

ID>-<VB ID>.
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of the VLAN entry. NA

<VBLPLIST> Indicates the list of the VB logical ports The valid NA

format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>.
symbols. The format is
l VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-
<VBLP ID>&VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>
<VBLP ID>&&-<VBLP ID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-VLANENTRY-VB::VB-1-1-1:100:::VLANID=2,VBLPLIST=VBLP-1-1-1-1&&-4;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.4.6 ED-VLANENTRY-VB
A.13.4.7 DLT-VLANENTRY-VB
A.13.4.8 RTRV-VLANENTRY-VB
Edits the VLAN filtering entry of a virtual bridge.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command edits the VLAN filtering entry of a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-VLANENTRY-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::VLANID=<VLANID>,
[VBLPLIST=<VBLPLIST>];
Command Parameters

ID>-<VB ID>.

<VBLPLIST> Indicates the list logical ports of the VB. The NA

valid format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>.
symbols. The valid format is as follows:
<VBLP ID>&VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
<VBLP ID>&&>-<VBLP ID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-VLANENTRY-
VB::VB-1-1-1:100:::VLANID=2,VBLPLIST=VBLP-1-1-1-1&VBLP-1-1-1-2&VBLP-1-1-1-6;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Deletes the VLAN filtering entry of a virtual bridge.
Function
This command deletes the VLAN filtering entry of a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-VLANENTRY-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::VLANID=<VLANID>;
Command Parameters

ID>-<VB ID>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-VLANENTRY-VB::VB-1-1-1:100:::VLANID=2;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the VLAN entry of a virtual bridge.
Function
This command retrieves the VLAN entry of a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-VLANENTRY-VB:[<VLANID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[VLANID=<VLANID>];
Command Parameters
<AID> VB-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<VB> NA
retrieved.

This parameter is optional. All VLAN entries are
retrieved by default.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::VLANID=<VLANID>,VBLPLIST=<VBLPLIST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of the VLAN entry.
<VBLPLIST> Indicates the list of VB logical ports. The valid format is VBLP-
<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>.
Example
l Command
RTRV-VLANENTRY-VB::VB-1-4-1:100:::VLANID=2;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"VB-1-4-1::VLANID=2,VBLPLIST=VBLP-1-4-1-1&VBLP-1-4-1-2&VBLP-1-4-1-6"
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.13.4.9 ED-VBLP
Edits a virtual bridge logical port (VBLP).
Function
This command modifies the attributes of a logic port in a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-VBLP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[MACLIMIT=<MACLIMIT>],
[ISOLATION=<ISOLATION>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>-<VB ID>-<LP ID>.
<MACLIMIT Indicates the max number of mac-address in a vblp.

> Valid value can be 0 to ETH_MAX_MACNUM,Ini-
tial value is UNLIMITED.
<ISOLATION Indicates the isolation mode in a VBLP. The valid HUB

> values are HUB and SPOKEN.
NOTE
l If <ISOLATION> of a port is configured as HUB, this
port can interconnect to other HUB ports or SPOKEN
ports.
l If <ISOLATION> of a port is configured as SPOKEN,
this port can only interconnect to other HUB ports.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-VBLP::VBLP-1-1-2-1:100:::MACLIMIT=100,ISOLATION=HUB;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
Related Commands
A.13.4.10 RTRV-VBLP
A.13.4.10 RTRV-VBLP
Retrieves the information about a virtual bridge logical port (VBLP).
Function
This command instructs the NE to retrieve the information about the logical port in a virtual
bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-VBLP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters

<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>.
Supports ALL, which means to retrieve the information
at NE level.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[ISOLATION=<ISOLATION>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-

<VBLP ID>.
<ISOLATION> Indicates the isolation mode of a VBLP. The valid values are HUB and
SPOKEN.
NOTE
l If the <ISOLATION> of a port is configured as HUB, this port can
interconnect to other HUB ports or SPOKEN ports.
l If the <ISOLATION> of a port is configured as SPOKEN, this port can only
interconnect to other HUB ports.
Example
l Command
RTRV-VBLP::VBLP-1-1-2-1:100;
RTRV-VBLP::VBLP-1-1-1-ALL:101;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"VBLP-1-1-2-1::ISOLATION=HUB"
;
Related Commands
A.13.4.9 ED-VBLP

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.4.11 INIT-MACENTRY
Initialize the MAC-address forwarding entry of a card.
Function
This command initializes the MAC-address forwarding entry of a card.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
INIT-MACENTRY:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The equipment unit identifier. Valid value can be NA

as follows:
l SLOT-<BAY>-<SHELF>-<SLOT>
Support & or && symbol.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INIT-MACENTRY::SLOT-1-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
None
A.13.5 Configuring VLAN Group

This section lists the commands used to configure a VLAN group for the specified port.
A.13.5.1 ENT-PORT-VLANGROUP
Edit a VLAN group for a port.
Function
This command creates a VLAN group for a port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-PORT-VLANGROUP:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::TOPID=<TOPID>,CVLANNUM=<CVLANNUM>;
Command Parameters
<AID> This valid format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>-<PORT ID>.
<TOPID> Indicates the first CVLAN (TOPID) of the CVLAN NA

group.
The valid value ranges from MIN_ETH_VLANID to
MAX_ETH_VLANID.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<CVLANNU Indicates the number of CVLANs (CVLANNUM) in NA

M> the CVLAN group.
l If <TOPID> = MIN_ETH_VLANID
CVLANNUM = 2^n - MIN_ETH_VLANID.
– n = 0,1,2,.... .
– TOPID+CVLANNUM <= 4096.
– CVLANNUM > 0
l If <TOPID> != MIN_ETH_VLANID
CVLANNUM = 2^n.
– n = 0,1,2,.... .
– TOPID + CVLANNUM <= 4096.
– CVLANNUM is one factor for TOPID.
For example:
If <TOPID>=1 (the MIN_ETH_VLANID), then
CVLANNUM = 2^n - 1.
l According to TOPID+CVLANNUM <= 4096,
2^n <= 4096, then n <= 12.
l Suppose n = 1, CVLANNUM = 1.
l ...
If <TOPID>=2048 (not equal to
MIN_ETH_VLANID), then CVLANNUM = 2^n.
l According to TOPID+CVLANNUM <= 4096,
2^n <= 2048, then n <= 11.
l ...
l All of the CVLANNUM values figured out above
meet the restriction that CVLANNUM is one
factor for TOPID.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-PORT-VLANGROUP::FAC-1-3-4:100:::TOPID=1,CVLANNUM=1
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.5.2 ED-PORT-VLANGROUP
A.13.5.3 DLT-PORT-VLANGROUP
A.13.5.4 RTRV-PORT-VLANGROUP
Edits the VLAN group of a port.
Function
This command modifies the VLAN group of a port.
Usage Note
For NGWDM equipment, this command is only valid for the TBE.
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-PORT-VLANGROUP:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::TOPID=<TOPID>,CVLANNUM=<CVLANNUM>;
Command Parameters
<AID> This valid format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>-<PORT ID>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TOPID> Indicates the first CVLAN value (TOPID) in the NA

CVLAN group.
MAX_ETH_VLANID.
<CVLANNU Indicates the number of CVLANs (CVLANNUM) in NA

M> the CVLAN group.
l If <TOPID> = MIN_ETH_VLANID
– n = 0,1,2,.... .
– CVLANNUM > 0
l If <TOPID> != MIN_ETH_VLANID
CVLANNUM = 2^n.
– n = 0,1,2,.... .
For example:
If <TOPID>=1 (the MIN_ETH_VLANID), then
CVLANNUM = 2^n - 1.
l According to TOPID+CVLANNUM <= 4096, 2^n
<= 4096, then n <= 12.
l ...
If <TOPID>=2048 (not equal to
MIN_ETH_VLANID), then CVLANNUM = 2^n.
l According to TOPID+CVLANNUM <= 4096, 2^n
<= 2048, then n <= 11.
l ...
l All of the CVLANNUM values figured out above
meet the restriction that CVLANNUM is one factor
for TOPID.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-PORT-VLANGROUP::FAC-1-3-4:100:::TOPID=8,CVLANNUM=2
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Deletes the VLAN group of a port.
Function
This command deletes the port VLAN group.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-PORT-VLANGROUP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::TOPID=<TOPID>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> This valid format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>- NA

<TOPID> Indicates the first CVLAN value in the CVLAN NA

group (TOPID).
The valid value ranges from MIN_ETH_VLANID
to MAX_ETH_VLANID.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-PORT-VLANGROUP::FAC-1-3-4:100:::TOPID=1
l Response Message
NE 2005-11-02 09:48:24
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the VLAN group information about a port
Function
This command retrieves the VLAN group information about a port.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PORT-VLANGROUP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::[TOPID=<TOPID>];
Command Parameters
<AID> This valid format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>- NA

retrieved.
<TOPID> Indicates the first CVLAN ID in the CVLAN group. NA

MAX_ETH_VLANID:
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[TOPID=<TOPID>],[CVLANNUM=<CVLANNUM>]"<cr><lf>
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT

ID>.
<TOPID> Indicates the first CVLAN ID in the CVLAN group.

MAX_ETH_VLANID

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<CVLANNUM> Indicates the number of CVLANs (CVLANNUM) in the CVLAN

group.
l If TOPID = MIN_ETH_VLANID
– n = 0,1,2,.... .
– CVLANNUM > 0
l If TOPID != MIN_ETH_VLANID
CVLANNUM = 2^n.
– n = 0,1,2,.... .
Example
l Command
RTRV-PORT-VLANGROUP::FAC-1-5-4:100:::TOPID=1
l Response Message
NE 2008-10-16 03:43:01
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-5-4::TOPID=1,CVLANNUM=7"
;
Related Commands
A.13.6 Configuring MAC Filter

This section lists the commands used to configure an MAC filter entry for a virtual bridge (VB).
A.13.6.1 ENT-MACENTRY-VB
Creates a static MAC filter entry of a virtual bridge (VB).
Function
This command creates a static MAC filter entry of the VB.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-MACENTRY-VB:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::VLANID=<VLANID>,MACADDR=<MACADDR>,FLTRMO
DE=<FILTMODE>,[FWDVBLP=<FWDVBLP>];
Command Parameters
Value
<AID> The valid format is VB-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB NA

ID>.
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of the VLAN entry. The valid value NA
ranges from 1 to 4095. This parameter is optional and the
default VLAN ID can be used only when <LEARNMODE>
of the VB is set to SVL (see A.13.4.1 ENT-VB).
<MACADDR Indicates a 48-bit MAC address. It must be a unicast MAC NA

> address.
<FLTRMODE Indicates the filter mode. The valid values are SA, DA, FORWAR
> BOTH, and FORWARD. D
l SA: discards the data whose source MAC address is the
same as the specified MAC address. The entry functions
as a MAC address blacklist.
l DA: discards the data whose sink MAC address is the
same as the specified MAC address. The entry functions
as a MAC address blacklist.
l BOTH: discards the data whose source MAC address or
sink MAC address is the same as the specified MAC
address. The entry functions as a MAC address blacklist.
l FORWARD: forwards the data packets whose source
MAC address is the specified MAC address
(<MACADDR>) at the specified VBLP
(<FWDVBLP>). The entry functions as the entry of the
static MAC address.
NOTE
The SA and DA are not valid for NGWDM equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<FWDVBLP> Indicates that the data packets whose source MAC address NA
is the specified MAC address (<MACADDR>) will be
forwarded at the VBLP.
The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB
ID>-<VBLPID>.
This parameter is available only when <FLTRMODE> is set
to FORWARD.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-MACENTRY-
VB::VB-1-4-1:100:::VLANID=2,MACADDR=00-32-0B-0E-10-0D,FLTRMODE=FORWARD,FWDVBLP=VBL
P-1-4-1-2;
ENT-MACENTRY-VB::VB-1-4-1:100:::VLANID=2,MACADDR=00-32-0B-0E-10-0E,FLTRMODE=BOTH;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.6.2 DLT-MACENTRY-VB
A.13.6.3 RTRV-MACENTRY-VB
Deletes a static MAC filtering entry of a virtual bridge.
Function
This command deletes a static MAC filtering entry.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-MACENTRY-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::
[VLANID=<VLANID>],MACADDR=<MACADDR>;
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of the VLAN entry. The valid NA

value ranges from 1 to 4095. This parameter is
optional, and the default value can only be used
when <LEARNMODE> of the VB is SVL (see A.
13.4.1 ENT-VB).
<MACADDR Indicates the 48-bit MAC address. The valid format NA

> is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-MACENTRY-VB::VB-1-4-1:100:::VLANID=2,MACADDR=00-32-0B-0E-10-0D;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Retrieves the static MAC filtering entry of a virtual bridge.
Function
This command retrieves a static MAC filtering entry of a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MACENTRY-VB:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::[VLANID=<VLANID>]
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.

This parameter is optional. If not specified, it outputs
the MAC entries of all VLANIDs.
<VLANID> cannot be entered if the
<LEARNMODE> of the VB is SVL (see A.13.4.1
ENT-VB).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[VLANID=<VLANID>,]MACADDR=<MACADDR>,FLTRMODE=<FLTRMODE>,
[FWDVBLP=<VBLP>]"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of the VLAN entry. The valid value ranges from
0 to 4095.
<VLANID> will not be displayed if the <LEARNMODE> of the VB
is SVL (see A.13.4.1 ENT-VB).
<MACADDR> Indicates the 48-bit MAC address. The valid format is XX-XX-XX-
XX-XX-XX.
This parameter is optional. If not specified, it outputs the MAC entries
of all MAC addresses.
This parameter is required only if <FLAG> (see A.13.6.4 RTRV-
FWDTABPHY-VB) is set to STATIC.
<FLTRMODE> Indicates the filter mode. The valid values are SA, DA, BOTH, and
FORWARD.
l SA: discards the data whose source MAC address is the same as
the specified MAC address. The entry functions as a MAC address
blacklist.
l DA: discards the data whose sink MAC address is the same as the
specified MAC address. The entry functions as a MAC address
blacklist.
l BOTH: discards the data whose source MAC address or sink MAC
address is the same as the specified MAC address. The entry
functions as a MAC address blacklist.
l FORWARD: forwards the data packets whose source MAC
address is the specified MAC address (<MACADDR>) at the
specified VBLP (<FWDVBLP>). The entry functions as the entry
of the static MAC address.
NOTE
The SA and DA are not valid for NGWDM equipment.
<FWDVBLP> This parameter is available only when <FLTRMODE> is set to

FORWARD. It indicates that the data packet with the specified MAC
address (<MACADDR>) was forwarded at this VBLP.
Example
l Command
RTRV-MACENTRY-VB::VB-1-4-1:100:::VLANID=2;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"VB-1-4-1::VLANID=2,MACADDR=00-32-0B-0E-10-0D,FLTRMODE=FORWARD,FWDVBLP=VBLP-1-4-1-
2"
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.13.6.4 RTRV-FWDTABPHY-VB
Queries the physical forwarding tables of the VB in batches.
Function
The command queries the physical forwarding tables of the VB in batches.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-FWDTABPHY-VB:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>:::[VLANID=<VLANID>],
[MACADDR=<MACADDR>],[FLAG=<FLAG>],[MAXNUM=<MACMAXNUM>];
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.

the MAC entries of all VLANIDs.
<VLANID> cannot be entered if the
<LEARNMODE> of the VB is SVL (see A.13.4.1
ENT-VB).
<MACADDR Indicates the 48-bit MAC address. The valid format NA

> is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX.
the MAC entries of all MAC addresses.
This parameter is required only if <FLAG> is set to
STATIC.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<FLAG> Indicates the retrieving mode flag of the filtering NA

entries. The valid values are BEGIN and CONT.
l BEGIN: indicates to retrieve flags from the
beginning of the entries (including the static and
dynamic forwarding tables).
l CONT: indicates to continue retrieving flags
starting from the entry last retrieved (include the
static and dynamic forwarding table).
This parameter is optional when <MACADDR> is
specified.
<MAXNUM Indicates the maximum number of entries returned. 100

> The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535.
NOTE
For NGWDM equipment, the valid value ranges from 1 to
200.
This parameter is required only if <FLAG> is set to
BEGIN or CONT.
This parameter is optional when <MACADDR> is
specified.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[VLANID=<VLANID>],MACADDR=<MACADDR>,[FWDVBLP=<VBLP>],
[MACSTATE=<MACSTATE>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of the VLAN entry. The valid value ranges from
0 to 4095.
<MACADDR> Indicates the 48-bit MAC address. The valid format is XX-XX-XX-
XX-XX-XX.
This parameter is optional. If not specified, it outputs the MAC entries
of all MAC addresses.
This parameter is required only if <FLAG> is set to STATIC.
<FWDVBLP> This parameter is available only when <FLTRMODE> is set to

FORWARD. It indicates that the data packet with the specified MAC
address (<MACADDR>) was forwarded at this VBLP.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<MACSTATE> Indicates the MAC address state. The valid values are as follows:
l STATIC: indicates the MAC address is manually specified.
l DYNAMIC: indicates the MAC address is self-learned.
l STATIC-END: indicates the MAC address is the last one of the
static MAC addresses.
l DYNAMIC-END: indicates the MAC address is the last one of the
dynamic MAC addresses.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FWDTABPHY-VB::VB-1-4-1:100:::VLANID=2,FLAG=BEGIN,MAXNUM=100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"VB-1-4-1::VLANID=2,MACADDR=00-32-0B-0E-10-0D,FWDVBLP=VBLP-4-1-2,MACSTATE=DYNAMIC
"
;
Related Commands
A.13.6.5 RTRV-MACSTAT
Retrieves the number of the MAC addresses which are learned by a card.
Function
The command queries the number of the MAC addresses which are learned by a card.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MACSTAT:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identifier. The valid NA

format is SLOT-<SHELF>-<SLOT>.
retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::DYNAMIC_NUM=<DYNAMIC_NUM>,STATIC_NUM=<STATIC_NUM>,BLACKLIST_NUM=<BLACKL
IST_NUM>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the equipment unit identifier. The valid format is SLOT-
<SHELF>-<SLOT>.
<DYNAMIC_NU Indicates the number of dynamic forwarding entries.

M>
<STATIC_NUM> Indicates the number of static forwarding entries.
<BLACKLIST_NU Indicates the number of blacklist entries.

M>
Example
l Command
RTRV-MACSTAT::SLOT-1-4:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-29 10:30:00
M 100 COMPLD
"SLOT-1-4::DYNAMIC_NUM=200,STATIC_NUM=100,BLACKLIST_NUM=50";
Related Commands
None
A.13.7 Configuring IGMP

This section lists the commands used to configure the IGMP function.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.7.1 ED-IGMP-VB
Edits the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping attributes of a virtual bridge.
Function
This command modifies the IGMP snooping attributes of a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-IGMP-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[IGSPENABLE=<IGSPENABLE>],
[ROUTERAGTM=<ROUTERAGTM>],[NORSPTIMES=<NORSPTIMES>];
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.
<IGSPENABL Indicates whether IGMP snooping is enabled. The N

E> valid values are Y and N.
<ROUTERAG Indicates the aging time of the Router port. The 8

TM> valid value ranges from 1(min) to 120(min).
NOTE
Currently, all VBs share a ROUTERAGTM.
<NORSPTIME Indicates the maximum number of times for a 3

S> member not responding to IGMP query packets
before the member is aging. The value ranges from
1 to 4.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-IGMP-VB::VB-1-4-1:100:::IGSPENABLE=Y,ROUTERAGTM=5,NORSPTIMES=2;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.7.2 RTRV-IGMP-VB
A.13.7.2 RTRV-IGMP-VB
Retrieves the IGMP snooping attributes of a virtual bridge (VB).
Function
This command retrieves the IGMP snooping attributes of a VB.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-IGMP-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is VB-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB NA

ID>.
retrieved.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[IGSPENABLE=<IGSPENABLE>],[ROUTERAGTM=<ROUTERAGTM>],
[NORSPTIMES=<NORSPTIMES>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<IGSPENABLE> Indicates whether IGMP snooping is enabled. The valid values are Y
and N.
<ROUTERAGTM Indicates the aging time of the Router port. The valid value ranges from
> 1 (min) to 120 (min).
NOTE
Currently, all VBs share the same ROUTERAGTM.
<NORSPTIMES> Indicates the maximum number of times for a member not responding
to IGMP query packets before the member is aging. The value ranges
from 1 to 4.
Example
l Command
RTRV-IGMP-VB::VB-1-4-1:100;
RTRV-IGMP-VB::VB-1-4-ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"VB-4-1::IGSPENABLE=Y,ROUTERAGTM=8,NORSPTIMES=3"
;
Related Commands
A.13.7.1 ED-IGMP-VB
A.13.7.3 ENT-IGMPTABLE-VB
Creates the IGMP table within a VLAN of a virtual bridge.
Function
This command creates the multicast group member of an IGMP within a VLAN of a virtual
bridge.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-IGMPTABLE-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::VLANID=<VLANID>,MACADDR
=<MACADDR>,[VBLPLIST=<VBLPLIST>]
Command Parameters

<VB ID>

NOTE
<MACADDR Indicates the 48-bit MAC address. NA

> The valid value ranges from 01-00-5E-00-01-00 to
01-00-5E-7F-FF-FF
<VBLPLIST> Indicates the list of the VB logical ports, the valid NA

format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-
<VBLP ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-IGMPTABLE-VB::VB-1-1-1:100:::VLANID=2,MACADDR=01-00-5e-45-e5-
f6,VBLPLIST=VBLP-1-1-1-1;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2007-11-02 09:48:24
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.7.4 ED-IGMPTABLE-VB
A.13.7.5 DLT-IGMPTABLE-VB
A.13.7.6 RTRV-IGMPTABLE-VB
Edits the IGMP table within a VLAN of a virtual bridge.
Function
This command modifies the multicast group of an IGMP within a VLAN of a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-IGMPTABLE-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::VLANID =<VLANID>,MACADDR
=<MACADDR>,[<VBLPLIST>=<VBLPLIST>]
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.

value ranges from 0 to 4095
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

> The valid format is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX.
The valid value ranges from 01-00-5E-00-01-00 to
01-00-5E-7F-FF-FF.
<VBLPLIST> Indicates the list of the VB logical ports, the valid NA

format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-
<VBLP ID>.
Supports the "&" and "&&" symbols. The valid format
is as follows:
<VBLP ID>&VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>
<VBLP ID>&&-<VBLP ID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-IGMPTABLE-VB::VB-1-7-1:100:::VLANID=2,MACADDR=01-00-5e-45-e5-f6;
ED-IGMPTABLE-VB::VB-1-7-1:100:::VLANID=2,MACADDR=01-00-5e-45-e5-
f6,VBLPLIST=VBLP-1-7-1-1;
ED-IGMPTABLE-VB::VB-1-7-1:100:::VLANID=2,MACADDR=01-00-5e-45-e5-
f6,VBLPLIST=VBLP-1-7-1-1&VBLP-1-7-1-2;
l Response Message
NE 2008-10-16 02:32:56
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Deletes an item of the IGMP table within a VLAN of a virtual bridge.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command deletes the multicast group members of an IGMP within a VLAN of a virtual
bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-IGMPTABLE-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::VLANID=<VLANID>,MACADDR
=<MACADDR>;
Command Parameters

<VB ID>

NOTE

> The valid value ranges from 01-00-5E-00-01-00 to
01-00-5E-7F-FF-FF
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
DLT-IGMPTABLE-VB::VB-1-1-1:100:::VLANID=2,MACADDR=01-00-5e-45-e5-f6;
l Response Message
NE 2008-09-22 21:01:29
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the IGMP table within a VLAN of a virtual bridge.
Function
This command retrieves all the multicast group members of an IGMP within a VLAN of a virtual
bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-IGMPTABLE-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[VLANID=<VLANID>];
Command Parameters

<VB ID>.
retrieved.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

NOTE
all VLAN entries.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::VLANID=<VLANID>,MACADDR=<MACADDR>,VBLPLIST=<VBLPLIST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters

Supports ALL, which indicates all values will be retrieved.
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of VLAN entry.
<MACADDR> Indicates the 48-bit MAC address.
<VBLPLIST> Indicates the list of the VB logical ports, the valid format is VBLP-
<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>.
Example
l Command
RTRV-IGMPTABLE-VB::VB-1-1-1:100:::VLANID=2;
RTRV-IGMPTABLE-VB::VB-1-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2008-09-22 20:57:57
M 100 COMPLD
"VB-1-1-1::VLANID=2,MACADDR=01-00-5e-45-e5-f6,VBLPLIST=VBLP-1-1-1-1"
;
Related Commands

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.7.7 RTRV-MCGROUP-VB
Retrieves the multicast group parameters within a virtual bridge.
Function
This command retrieves the actual multicast group parameters within a virtual bridge.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MCGROUP-VB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[VLANID=<VLANID>];
Command Parameters

ID>-<VB ID>.
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of the VLAN entry. The NA

valid value ranges from 0 to 4095.
NOTE
This parameter can be omitted when
<LEARNMODE> of the VB is set to SVL (see A.
13.4.1 ENT-VB).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::VLANID=<VLANID>,[ROUTERPORTLIST=<ROUTERPORT>],[MACADDR=<MACADDR>],
[VBLPLIST=<VBLPLIST>]"<cr><lf>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of VLAN entry.
<ROUTERPORT> Indicates the list of multicast router ports.

The valid formats is: VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-
<VBLP ID>.
<MACADDR> Indicates the 48 bit MAC address. The valid format is XX-XX-XX-
XX-XX-XX.
<VBLPLIST> Indicates the list of the VB logical ports, the format is VBLP-<SLOT
Example
l Command
RTRV-MCGROUP-VB::VB-1-4-1:100:::VLANID=100;
l Response Message
NE 2008-09-10 00:54:11
M 100 COMPLD
"
VB-1-4-1::VLANID=100,ROUTERPORTLIST=VBLP-1-4-1-4,MACADDR=01-00-5e-00-29-65,VBLPLIS
T=VBLP-1-4-1-4"
;
Related Commands
None
A.13.7.8 ED-IGMP-QKLV
Edits the quick leaving attribute of the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP).
Function
This command modifies the quick leaving attribute of the IGMP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-IGMP-QKLV:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::VLANID=<VLANID>,VBLPLIST=<VBLPLIST>,QKLVEN=<
QKLVEN>;
Command Parameters

ID>-<VB ID>.

l The value ranges from 1 to 4095.
<VBLPLIST> Indicates the list logical ports of the VB. The NA

valid format is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>.
symbols.
<QKLVEN> Indicates whether quick leaving is enabled for the N

IGMP. The valid values are Y and N.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-IGMP-
QKLV::VB-1-1-1:100:::VLANID=2,VBLPLIST=VBLP-1-1-1-1&VBLP-1-1-1-2&VBLP-1-1-1-6,QKLV
EN=Y;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
RTRV-IGMP-QKLVA.13.4.5 ENT-VLANENTRY-VB

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.7.9 RTRV-IGMP-QKLV
Queries the quick leaving attribute of the IGMP.
Function
This command queries the quick leaving attribute of the IGMP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-IGMP-QKLV:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::VLANID=<VLANID>,VBLPLIST=<VBLPLIST>;
Command Parameters
<AID> VB-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<VB> NA
retrieved.

The range is from 1 to 4095. All VLAN entries are
retrieved by default.
<VBLPLIST Indicates the list of VB logical ports. The valid format NA

> is VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-
<VBLP ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
^^^"<AID>::VLANID=<VLANID>,VBLPLIST=<VBLPLIST>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<VLANID> Indicates the identifier of the VLAN entry.
<VBLP> Indicates the VB logical port. The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF

ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>.
<QKLVEN> Indicates whether quick leaving is enabled for the IGMP. The valid
values are Y and N.
Example
l Command
RTRV-IGMP-QKLV::VB-1-4-1:100:::VLANID=2,VBLP-1-4-1-1&&VBLP-1-4-1-3;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"VB-1-4-1::VLANID=2,VBLP=VBLP-1-4-1-1,QKLVEN=Y"
"VB-1-4-1::VLANID=2,VBLP=VBLP-1-4-1-2,QKLVEN=N"
"VB-1-4-1::VLANID=2,VBLP=VBLP-1-4-1-3,QKLVEN=N"
;
Related Commands
ED-IGMP-QKLVA.13.4.5 ENT-VLANENTRY-VB
A.13.7.10 REPTÊVTÎGMPMEMFULL
Reports an event indicating that the number of dynamic members in the IGMP reaches the
maximum.
Function
This commands reports an event indicating that the number of dynamic members in the IGMP
reaches the maximum. When the event is reported, no new members can be added to the IGMP.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
A^^<ATAG>^REPTÊVT^VBLP<cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>:<CONDYPE>,<CONDEFF>" <cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
<MEMNUM> Indicates the current number of members in the IGMP.
Example
l Command
None
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
A 100 REPT EVT IGMPMEMFULL
"SLOT-1-1:256,TC"
;
Related Commands
None
A.13.8 Configuring QoS

This section lists the commands used to configure the QoS function, such as committed access
rate (CAR), class of service (CoS), and queue.
A.13.8.1 ENT-CAR
Creates the committed access rate (CAR).
Function
This command creates an entry for the CAR within a unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-CAR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[CARENABLE=<CARENABLE>],[CIR=<CIR>],
[PIR=<PIR>],[DCBS=<DCBS>],[DMBS=<DMBS>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet CAR identifier. The valid NA

format is CAR-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<CAR
ID>.
<CARENAB Indicates whether CAR is enabled. The valid values N

LE> are Y and N . This parameter is optional.
<CIR> Indicates the committed information rate of CAR. The 0

unit is 1 kbit/s and the step length is 64 kbit/s. This
<PIR> Indicates the peak information rate. The unit is 1 kbit/ 0

s and the step length is 64 kbit/s. This parameter is
optional.
l For TBE cards, the range is from 0 to 1048576s.
The <CIR> must be less than or be equal to the
<PIR>.
l For L4G cards, the parameter is invalid.
<DCBS> Indicates the delta committed burst size. The unit is 1 0

KB. This parameter is optional.
<DMBS> Indicates the delta maximum burst size. The unit is 1 0

l For L4G cards, the parameter is invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-CAR::CAR-1-1-10:100:::CARENABLE=Y,CIR=10240,PIR=20480;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.8.2 ED-CAR
A.13.8.3 DLT-CAR
A.13.8.4 RTRV-CAR
A.13.8.2 ED-CAR
Edits the committed access rate (CAR).
Function
This command modifies the attributes of the specified CAR within a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-CAR:[<TID>]:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[CARENABLE=<CARENABLE>],
[CIR=<CIR>],[PIR=<PIR>],[DCBS=<DCBS>],[DMBS=<DMBS>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters

ID>.
<CARENABL Indicates whether the CAR is enabled. The valid N

E> values are Y and N. The initial value is N. This
<CIR> Indicates the committed information rate of the CAR. 0

The unit is 1 kbit/s and generally its step length is 64
kbit/s. This parameter is optional.

s and generally the step length is 64 kbit/s. This
<DCBS> Indicates the delta committed burst size. The unit is 0

1 KB. This parameter is optional.

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-CAR::CAR-1-1-10:100:::CARENABLE=Y,CIR=10240,PIR=20480;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.8.1 ENT-CAR
A.13.8.3 DLT-CAR
A.13.8.4 RTRV-CAR

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.8.3 DLT-CAR
Deletes the committed access rate (CAR).
Function
This command deletes an entry of the CAR within a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-CAR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-CAR::CAR-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.13.8.1 ENT-CAR
A.13.8.2 ED-CAR
A.13.8.4 RTRV-CAR
A.13.8.4 RTRV-CAR
Retrieves the information about committed access rate (CAR).
Function
This command retrieves the information about CAR.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-CAR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet CAR identifier. The valid format NA

is CAR-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<CAR ID>.
Support the <CAR ID> to be entered as ALL to retrieve
all items of the CAR within the unit.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<CARID>::CARENABLE=<CARENABLE>,CIR=<CIR>,PIR=<PIR>,DCBS=<DCBS>,DMBS=<DMBS>"<cr
><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet CAR identifier.
<CARENABLE> Indicates whether the CAR is enabled.
<CIR> Indicates the committed information rate of the CAR. Unit is 1 kbit/s.
<PIR> Indicates the peak information rate. The unit is 1 kbit/s.
<DCBS> Indicates the delta committed burst size. The unit is 1 KB.
<DMBS> Indicates the delta maximum burst size. The unit is 1 KB.
Example
l Command
RTRV-CAR::CAR-1-1-10:100;
RTRV-CAR::CAR-1-1-ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"CAR-1-1-10::CARENABLE=Y,CIR=10240,PIR=20480,DCBS=0,DMBS=0"
;
Related Commands
A.13.8.1 ENT-CAR
A.13.8.2 ED-CAR
A.13.8.3 DLT-CAR
A.13.8.5 ENT-COS
Creates the class of service (CoS).
Function
This command creates an entry for the CoS within an unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
ENT-COS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[COSTYPE=<COSTYPE>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of CoS. NA

The valid format is COS-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<COS ID>.
<COSTYPE> Indicates the type of CoS. The valid values are as SIMPLE
follows:
l SIMPLE
l TAGPRI
l IPTOS
l MPLSEXP
l DSCP
This parameter is optional and the default value is
SIMPLE.
NOTE
l IAGPRI is not valid for L4G.
l IPTOS, MPLSEXP and DSCP are not valid for
NGWDM equipment.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-COS::COS-1-1-1:100:::COSTYPE=SIMPLE;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.8.6 ED-COS

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.8.7 DLT-COS
A.13.8.8 RTRV-COS
A.13.8.6 ED-COS
Edits the class of service (CoS).
Function
This command modifies an entry of the CoS within a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-COS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[SIMPLEPRI=<SIMPLEPRI>],
[TAGPRI0=<TAGPRI0>],[TAGPRI1=<TAGPRI1>],[TAGPRI2=<TAGPRI2>],
[TAGPRI3=<TAGPRI3>],[TAGPRI4=<TAGPRI4>],[TAGPRI5=<TAGPRI5>],
[TAGPRI6=<TAGPRI6>],[TAGPRI7=<TAGPRI7>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of CoS. NA

The valid format is COS-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<COS ID>.
<SIMPLEPRI> Indicates simple priority. The valid value ranges 0

from 0 to 7. This parameter is optional.
This parameter is available only when
<COSTYPE> is SIMPLE (see A.13.8.5 ENT-
COS).
<TAGPRIn> Indicates the priority corresponding to the tag 0

priority n. The valid value ranges from 0 to 7. This
This parameter is only when COSTYPE is
TAGPRI (see A.13.8.5 ENT-COS).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-COS::COS-1-1-1:100:::SIMPLEPRI=1;
ED-
COS::COS-1-1-1:100:::TAGPRI0=0,TAGPRI1=0,TAGPRI2=0,TAGPRI3=0,TAGPRI4=1,TAGPRI5=1,T
AGPRI6=1,TAGPRI7=1;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.8.5 ENT-COS
A.13.8.7 DLT-COS
A.13.8.8 RTRV-COS
A.13.8.7 DLT-COS
Deletes the class of service (CoS).
Function
This command deletes an entry of the CoS within a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-COS:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the CoS. NA

The valid format is COS-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<COS ID>.
Response Syntax
cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-COS::COS-1-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.8.5 ENT-COS
A.13.8.6 ED-COS
A.13.8.8 RTRV-COS
A.13.8.8 RTRV-COS
Retrieves the class of service (CoS).
Function
This command retrieves the information about the CoS within a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-COS:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
r
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the CoS. The valid format is NA

COS-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<COS ID>.
Supports the <COS ID> to be entered as ALL to retrieve
all the CoS of the unit.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::COSTYPE=<COSTYPE>,[SIMPLEPRI=<SIMPLEPRI>],[TAGPRI0=<TAGPRI0>],
[TAGPRI1=<TAGPRI1>],[TAGPRI2=<TAGPRI2>],[TAGPRI3=<TAGPRI3>],[TAGPRI4=<TAGPRI4>],
[TAGPRI5=<TAGPRI5>],[TAGPRI6=<TAGPRI6>],[TAGPRI7=<TAGPRI7>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the CoS. The valid format is COS-<SHELF
ID>-<SLOT ID>-<COS ID>.
<COSTYPE> Indicates the type of the CoS. The valid values are as follows:
l SIMPLE
l TAGPRI
This parameter is optional. The default value is SIMPLE.
<SIMPLEPRI> Indicates the simple priority. The valid value ranges from 0 to 7. This
parameter is optional. <SIMPLEPRI> does not have a default value
and is available only when <COSTYPE> is set to SIMPLE (See A.
13.8.5 ENT-COS).
<TAGPRIn> Indicates the priority corresponding to tag priority n. The valid value
ranges from 0 to 7. This parameter is optional. This parameter is valid
only when <COSTYPE> is set to TAGPRI (See A.13.8.5 ENT-
COS).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-COS::COS-1-1-1:100;
RTRV-COS::COS-1-2-ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"COS-1-1-11::COSTYPE=SIMPLE,SIMPLEPRI=1"
;
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"COS-1-2-11::COSTYPE=TAGPRI,TAGPRI0=0,TAGPRI1=0,TAGPRI2=0,TAGPRI3=0,TAGPRI4=1,TAGP
RI5=1,TAGPRI6=1,TAGPRI7=1"
;
Related Commands
A.13.8.5 ENT-COS
A.13.8.6 ED-COS
A.13.8.7 DLT-COS
A.13.8.9 ED-QUEUE
Edits the queue.
Function
This command edits the parameters of the queue.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-QUEUE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::QUEUEID=<QUEUEID>,
[SHAPINGENABLE=<SHAPINGENABLE>],[CIR=<CIR>],[PIR=<PIR>],
[DCBS=<DCBS>],[DMBS=<DMBS>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>-<PORT ID>
<QUEUEID> Indicates the ID of the port queue. The valid value NA

ranges from 1 to 8.
<SHAPINGE Indicates whether shaping is enabled. The valid values N

NABLE> are Y and N.
This parameter is optional and does not change after it
is set.
<CIR> Indicates the committed information rate of the 0

shaping. The unit is 1 kbit/s, and generally, the step is
64 kbit/s. This parameter is optional.



Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-QUEUE::fac-1-10-1:100:::QUEUEID=1,SHAPINGENABLE=Y,CIR=10240,PIR=20480;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.8.10 RTRV-QUEUE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.8.10 RTRV-QUEUE
Retrieves the parameters of a queue.
Function
This command retrieves the parameters of a queue.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-QUEUE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[<QUEUEID>=<QUEUEID>];
Command Parameters

ID>-<PORT ID>.
retrieved.
<QUEUEID Indicates the ID of the port queue. The valid value ranges NA
> from 1 to 8 or it can be ALL.
"ALL" means to retrieve the information about all
queues.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::<QUEUEID>=<QUEUEID>,<SHAPINGENABLE>=<SHAPINGENABLE>,CIR=<CIR>,PIR=<PIR>
,DCBS=<DCBS>,DMBS=<DMBS>"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters

ID>.
<QUEUEID> Indicates the ID of the port queue. The valid value ranges from 1 to 8.
<SHAPINGENAB Indicates whether shaping is enabled. The valid values are Y and N.
LE>
<CIR> Indicates the committed information rate of shaping. The unit is 1 kbit/
s and generally the step length is 64 kbit.
<PIR> Indicates the peak information rate. The unit is 1 kbit/s and generally
its step length is 64.
Example
l Command
RTRV-QUEUE::FAC-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
M1050 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-10::QUEUEID=1,SHAPINGENABLE=Y,CIR=10240,PIR=20480,DCBS=0,DMBS=0"
;
Related Commands
A.13.8.9 ED-QUEUE
A.13.8.11 ED-PORT-SHAPING
Edits the shaping attribute of a port.
Function
This command modifies the shaping attribute of a port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-PORT-SHAPING:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[SHAPINGEN=<SHAPINGEN>],
[CIR=<CIR>],[PIR=<PIR>],[DCBS=<DCBS>],[DMBS=<DMBS>];
Command Parameters

ID>-<PORT ID>
<SHAPINGE Indicates whether shaping is enabled. The valid values N

N> are Y and N.
This parameter is optional and does not change after it
is set.
<CIR> Indicates the committed information rate of the 0

shaping. The unit is 1 kbit/s, and generally, the step is
64 kbit/s. This parameter is optional.



Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-PORT-SHAPING::fac-1-10-1:100:::SHAPINGEN=Y,CIR=10240,PIR=20480;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
RTRV-PORT-SHAPINGA.13.8.10 RTRV-QUEUE
A.13.8.12 RTRV-PORT-SHAPING
Queries the shaping attribute of a port.
Function
This command queries the shaping attribute of a port.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PORT-SHAPING:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>-<PORT ID>.
retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::<SHAPINGEN>=<SHAPINGEN>,CIR=<CIR>,PIR=<PIR>,DCBS=<DCBS>,DMBS=<DMBS>"<cr
><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters

ID>.
<SHAPINGEN> Indicates whether shaping is enabled. The valid values are Y and N.
<CIR> Indicates the committed information rate of the shaping. The unit is 1
kbit/s and generally the step length is 64 kbit.
<PIR> Indicates the peak information rate. The unit is 1 kbit/s and generally
its step length is 64 kbit/s.
Example
l Command
RTRV-PORT-SHAPING::FAC-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
M1050 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-10::SHAPINGEN=Y,CIR=10240,PIR=20480,DCBS=0,DMBS=0"
;
Related Commands
ED-PORT-SHAPINGA.13.8.9 ED-QUEUE
A.13.8.13 RTRV-FLUX-FLOW
Queries the traffic record of a flow.
Function
This command queries the traffic record of a flow.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-FLUX-FLOW:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::<BGNDATE>,<BGNTIME>,<ENDDATE>,<ENDTIME>;
Command Parameters
<AID> FLOW-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<FLOW ID> NA

<BGNDATE> Indicates the start date for querying traffic records. NA

Example: 2010-12-20
<BGNTIME> Indicates the start time for querying traffic records. NA

Format: <HH-MM-SS>
Example: 15-30-00
<ENDDATE> Indicates the end date for querying traffic records. NA

Example: 2010-12-20
<ENDTIME> Indicates the end time for querying traffic records. NA

Format: <HH-MM-SS>
Example: 15-30-00
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::BGNDATE=<BGNDATE>,BGNTIME=<BGNTIME>,ENDDATE=<ENDDATE>,ENDTIME=<ENDTIME>
"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the Ethernet flow identifier.

The valid format is FLOW-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<FLOW ID>.
<RECDATE> Indicates the date of a flow record.

Example: 2010-12-20
<RECTIME> Indicates the time of a flow record.

Format: <HH-MM-SS>
Example: 15-30-00

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<RECFLAG> Indicates the flag that represents whether flow records are generated.
<RATE> Indicates the rate of the flow at the time specified by RECDATE and
RECFLAG. The unit is Kbit/s. The value of this parameter is 0 when
RECFLAG is N.
Example
l Command
RTRV-FLUX-FLOW::FLOW-1-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FLOW-1-5-2::RECDATE=2003-02-28,RECTIME=10-00-00,RECFLAG=Y,RATE=10";
"FLOW-1-5-2::RECDATE=2003-02-28,RECTIME=11-00-00,RECFLAG=Y,RATE=100"
Related Commands
ED-FLOWA.13.2.2 ED-FLOW
RTRV-FLOWA.13.2.1 ENT-FLOW
A.13.2.3 DLT-FLOW
A.13.9 Configuring Ethernet Interface Mirror

This section lists the commands used to configure mirror function to the specified Ethernet
interface. This function can be used to maintain the Ethernet interface flow.
A.13.9.1 ENT-MIRROR
Creates a mirror port.
Function
This command creates a mirror port in the unit. All packets of the mirror port can be duplicated
to another specified port, which then can collect and analyze the traffic of the mirror port.
Usage Note
If any service is running on the monitored port, an error message will be displayed.
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-MIRROR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[INGRESS=<INGRESS>],
[EGRESS=<EGRESS>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the monitored port. NA

The valid format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<PORT ID>.
<INGRESS> Indicates the ingress mirror port. The packets received NA

from the ingress mirror port are duplicated to the
specified monitored port (<AID>).
ID>-<PORT ID>.
This parameter is optional. An ingress mirror port will
not be indicated unless this parameter is set.
<EGRESS> Indicates the egress mirror port. The packets sent by NA

the egress mirror port are duplicated to the specified
monitored port (<AID>).
ID>-<PORT ID>.
This parameter is optional. The default setting will
indicate absence of an egress mirror port.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-MIRROR::FAC-1-1-1:100:::INGRESS=FAC-1-1-2,EGRESS=FAC-1-1-4;
ENT-MIRROR::FAC-1-1-1:102:::INGRESS=ACC-1-1-2,EGRESS=ACC-1-1-3;
ENT-MIRROR::FAC-1-1-1:102:::INGRESS=ACC-1-1-2;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.9.2 ED-MIRROR
A.13.9.4 DLT-MIRROR
A.13.9.3 RTRV-MIRROR
A.13.9.2 ED-MIRROR
Edits a mirror port.
Function
This command modifies the attributes of a mirror port in the unit.
Usage Note
If there is a service existing on the observing port, an error result will be returned.
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-MIRROR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[INGRESS=<INGRESS>],
[EGRESS=<EGRESS>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the observing port. NA

ID>-<PORT ID>.
<INGRESS> Indicates the ingress mirror port. The packets received NA

are copied to the specified observing port (<AID>).
ID>-<PORT ID>.
This parameter is optional. An ingress mirror port will

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<EGRESS> Indicates the egress mirror port. The packets sent are NA
copied to the specified observing port (<AID>).
ID>-<PORT ID>.
This parameter is optional. An egress mirror port will
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-MIRROR::FAC-1-1-1:100:::INGRESS=FAC-1-1-2,EGRESS=FAC-1-1-4;
ED-MIRROR::FAC-1-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.9.1 ENT-MIRROR
A.13.9.4 DLT-MIRROR
Retrieves information about a mirror port.
Function
This command retrieves information about a mirror port in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MIRROR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>-<PORT ID>.
retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[INGRESS=<INGRESSMIRROR>],[EGRESS=<EGRESSMIRROR>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the observing port.

ID>.
<INGRESS> Indicates the ingress mirror port. The packets received are copied
to a specified observing port (<AID>).
ID>.
This parameter is optional. An ingress mirror port will not be
indicated unless this parameter is set.
<EGRESS> Indicates the egress mirror port. The packets sent are copied to the
specified observing port(<AID>).
ID>.
This parameter is optional. An egress mirror port will not be
indicated unless this parameter is set.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-MIRROR::FAC-1-1-1:100;
RTRV-MIRROR::FAC-1-1-ALL:100;
RTRV-MIRROR::ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1-1::INGRESS=FAC-1-1-2,EGRESS=FAC-1-1-4"
;
Related Commands
A.13.9.1 ENT-MIRROR
A.13.9.2 ED-MIRROR
A.13.9.4 DLT-MIRROR
A.13.9.4 DLT-MIRROR
Deletes a mirror port.
Function
This command deletes a mirror port in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-MIRROR:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>-<PORT ID>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-MIRROR::FAC-1-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.9.1 ENT-MIRROR
A.13.9.2 ED-MIRROR
A.13.9.5 DLT-SRVMIRROR-ETHLINK
Delete service mirror of an ethernet link.
Function
This command delete service mirror of an ethernet link.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-SRVMIRROR-ETHLINK:[<TID>]:<LINK_FROM>,<LINK_TO>:<CTAG>:::
[INTAG=<INTAG>],[INSTAG=<INSTAG>],[PORTPOSITION=<PORTPOSITION>],
[SRVDIR=<SRVDIR>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<LINK_FROM Valid value can be following: NA

> <PORT>:FAC/ACC-<BAY>-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-
<PORT>.
<LINK_TO> Valid value can be following: NA

<PORT>:FAC/ACC-<BAY>-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-
<PORT>.
<INTAG> Incoming Tag. The tag can be VLAN tag. NA

Optional;
if not specified, it defaults to retrieve include all
INTAGs.
<INSTAG> Incoming service VLAN Tag. NA

It is optional. if not specified, it defaults to retrieve
include all INSTAGs.
<PORTPOSITI Mirror position. NA

ON>
<SRVDIR> Service direction. NA
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-SRVMIRROR-
ETHLINK::fac-1-1,vcg-1-2:100:::INTAG=10,PORTPOSITION=OUT,SRVDIR=INGRESS;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.9.6 ENT-SRVMIRROR-ETHLINK
A.13.9.7 RTRV-SRVMIRROR-ETHLINK

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Creates service mirror of an ethernet link.
Function
This command creates service mirror of an ethernet link.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-SRVMIRROR-ETHLINK:[<TID>]:<LINK_FROM>,<LINK_TO>:<CTAG>:::
[SRVDIR=<SRVDIR>],[OBSERPORT=<ETN_PORT>];
Command Parameters
<LINK_FROM Valid value can be following: NA

> <PORT>:FAC/ACC-<BAY>-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-
<PORT>.

<PORT>.

Optional;
INTAGs.


ON>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<OBSERPORT Indicates the observing port. NA

> Valid value can be following:
FAC/ACC-<BAY>-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<PORT>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-SRVMIRROR-
ETHLINK::FAC-1-1,VCG-1-2:100:::INTAG=10,PORTPOSITION=OUT,SRVDIR=INGRESS,OBSERPORT=
FAC-1-3;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the information about service mirror.
Function
This command retrieves the information about service mirror.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-SRVMIRROR-ETHLINK:[<TID>]:<LINK_FROM>,<LINK_TO>:<CTAG>:::
[SRVDIR=<SRVDIR>];
Command Parameters
<LINK_FRO Valid value can be following: NA

M> <PORT>:FAC/ACC-<BAY>-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-
<PORT>.

<PORT>.

Optional;
INTAGs.

<PORTPOSI Mirror position. NA

TION>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<SPEC_FROM>,<SPEC_TO>::[INTAG=<INTAG>],[INSTAG=<INSTAG>],
[PORTPOSITION=<PORTPOSITION>],[SRVDIR=<SRVDIR_GET>],[OBSERPORT=<ETN_PORT>],
[BYTENULL=<BYTE_NULL>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<SPEC_FROM> Valid value can be following:

<PORT>:FAC/ACC-<BAY>-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<PORT>.
<SPEC_TO> Valid value can be following:


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<INTAG> Incoming Tag. The tag can be VLAN tag.

Optional;
if not specified, it defaults to retrieve include all INTAGs.
<INSTAG> Incoming service VLAN Tag.

It is optional. if not specified, it defaults to retrieve include all
INSTAGs.
<PORTPOSITION Mirror position.

>
<SRVDIR_GET> Service direction.
<ETN_PORT> Indicates the observing port

Valid value can be following:
<BYTE_NULL> NO use.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SRVMIRROR-
ETHLINK::FAC-1-1,VCG-1-2:100:::INTAG=10,PORTPOSITION=IN,SRVDIR=INGRESS;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1,VCG-1-2:100:::INTAG=10,PORTPOSITION=OUT,SRVDIR=INGRESS,OBSERPORT=FAC-1-3"
;
Related Commands
A.13.9.8 DLT-SRVMIRROR-PW
Delete service mirror of an ethernet PW.
Function
This command delete service mirror of an ethernet PW.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-SRVMIRROR-PW:[<TID>]:<ENT_PWID>:<CTAG>:::
[PORTPOSITION=<PORTPOSITION>],[SRVDIR=<SRVDIR>];
Command Parameters
<ENT_PWID> Valid value can be following: NA

<PORT>.

ON>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-SRVMIRROR-PW::PW-1-1:100:::PORTPOSITION=IN,SRVDIR=INGRESS;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.9.9 ENT-SRVMIRROR-PW
A.13.9.10 RTRV-SRVMIRROR-PW

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Creates service mirror of an ethernet PW.
Function
This command creates service mirror of an ethernet PW.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-SRVMIRROR-PW:[<TID>]:<ENT_PWID>:<CTAG>:::
[PORTPOSITION=<PORTPOSITION>],[SRVDIR=<SRVDIR>],
[OBSERPORT=<ETN_PORT>];
Command Parameters
<ENT_PWID> Indicates the PW index. NA

ON>

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
ENT-SRVMIRROR-PW::PW-1-1:100:::PORTPOSITION=IN,SRVDIR=INGRESS,OBSERPORT=FAC-1-3;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the information about service mirror of PW.
Function
This command retrieves the information about service mirror of PW.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-SRVMIRROR-PW:[<TID>]:<RTRV_PWID>:<CTAG>:::
Command Parameters
<RTRV_PWI Valid value can be following: NA

D> <PORT>:FAC/ACC-<BAY>-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-
<PORT>.

TION>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<RTRV_PWID>::[PORTPOSITION=<PORTPOSITION_GET>],[SRVDIR=<SRVDIR_GET>],
[OBSERPORT=<ETN_PORT>],[OBSERPORT=<ETN_PORT>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<RTRV_PWID> Valid value can be following:


>

Example
l Command
RTRV-SRVMIRROR-PW::PW-1-1:100:::PORTPOSITION=IN,SRVDIR=INGRESS;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"PW-1-1:100:::PORTPOSITION=IN,SRVDIR=INGRESS,OBSERPORT=FAC-1-3;"
;
Related Commands
A.13.9.11 DLT-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL
Delete service mirror of an ethernet TUNNEL.
Function
This command delete service mirror of an ethernet TUNNEL.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL:[<TID>]:<ENT_TUNNELID>:<CTAG>:::
Command Parameters
<ENT_TUNNE Indicates the tunnel index. NA

LID>

ON>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL::TUNNEL-1-1:100:::PORTPOSITION=IN,SRVDIR=INGRESS;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.9.12 ENT-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL
A.13.9.13 RTRV-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL
Creates service mirror of an ethernet TUNNEL.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command creates service mirror of an ethernet TUNNEL.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL:[<TID>]:<ENT_TUNNELID>:<CTAG>:::
[PORTPOSITION=<PORTPOSITION>],[SRVDIR=<SRVDIR>],
[OBSERPORT=<ETN_PORT>];
Command Parameters
<ENT_TUNNE Indicates the tunnel index. NA

LID>

ON>

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-SRVMIRROR-
TUNNEL::TUNNEL-1-1:100:::PORTPOSITION=IN,SRVDIR=INGRESS,OBSERPORT=FAC-1-3;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the information about service mirror of TUNNEL.
Function
This command retrieves the information about service mirror of TUNNEL.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL:[<TID>]:<RRTRV_TUNNELID>:<CTAG>:::
Command Parameters
<RTRV_TUN Indicates the tunnel index. NA

NELID>

TION>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<RTRV_TUNNELID>::[PORTPOSITION=<PORTPOSITION_GET>],[SRVDIR=<SRVDIR_GET>],

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
[OBSERPORT=<ETN_PORT>],[OBSERPORT=<ETN_PORT>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<RTRV_TUNNEL Indicates the tunnel index.

ID>

>

Example
l Command
RTRV-SRVMIRROR-TUNNEL::TUNNEL-1-1:100:::PORTPOSITION=IN,SRVDIR=INGRESS;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"TUNNEL-1-1:100:::PORTPOSITION=IN,SRVDIR=INGRESS,OBSERPORT=FAC-1-3"
;
Related Commands
A.13.10 Configuring OAM

This section lists the commands used to configure the Ethernet OAM function.
A.13.10.1 OPR-OAM-LB
Operates an Ethernet OAM loopback test.
Function
This command is used to operate an Ethernet OAM loopback test.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
OPR-OAM-LB:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::LBTYPE=<LBTYPE>,
[DSTMPID=<DSTMPID>],[DSTMACADDR =<DSTMACADDR >];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the source MP identifier. NA

The valid format is MP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<MP ID>.
The <MPTYPE> parameter of the MP must be MEP.
<LBTYPE> Indicates the type of an LB test. The valid values are NA

as follows:
l MP: LB test based on MP
l MACADDR: LB test based on MAC address
<DSTMPID> Indicates the sink MP identifier (LB test based on MP, NA

which is valid for NOSTANDARDMP).
The valid value ranges from 1 to 0xFFFFFF00.
The <MPTYPE> parameter of the MP must be MEP
or MIP.
<DSTMACA Indicates the LB destination MAC, that is, the MAC NA

DDR> address of the destination system (LB test based on
MAC address, which is valid for STANDARDMP).
The valid format is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::LBTYPE=<MPSTDTYPE>,[DSTMPID=<DSTMPID>],[DSTMACADDR=<DSTMACADDR>],
[OAMRESULT=<OAMRESULT>]"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the source MP identifier.

The valid format is MP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MP ID>.
The <MPTYPE> (see A.13.10.9 ENT-MP) parameter of the MP must
be MEP.
<LBTYPE> Indicates the type of an LB test. The valid values are as follows:
l MP: LB test based on MP
l MACADDR: LB test based on MAC address
<DSTMPID> Indicates the sink MP identifier.

The valid value ranges from 1 to 0xFFFFFF00.
The <MPTYPE> (see A.13.10.9 ENT-MP) parameter of the MP must
be MEP or MIP.
<DSTMACADDR Indicates the MAC address of the destination system.

>
<OAMRESULT> Indicates the test result. The valid values are FAIL and SUCCESS.
Example
l Command
OPR-OAM-LB::MP-1-1-10:100:::LBTYPE=MP,DSTMPID=2;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
"MP-1-1-10::DSTMPID=2,OAMRESULT=SUCCESS"
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.3 ENT-MD
A.13.10.4 DLT-MD
A.13.10.5 RTRV-MD
A.13.10.2 OPR-OAM-LT
Operates an Ethernet OAM link trace test.
Function
This command is used to operate an Ethernet OAM link trace test.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
OPR-OAM-LT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::DSTMPID=<DSTMPID>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the source MP identifier. NA

<MP ID>.
The <MPTYPE> (see A.13.10.9 ENT-MP) parameter
of the MP must be MEP.
<DSTMPID> Indicates the sink MP identifier. NA

For nonstandard MP, the valid value ranges from 1 to
0xFFFFFF00.
For standard MP, the valid value ranges from 1 to
0x1FFF.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[DSTMPID=<DSTMPID],[RSPMPID=<RSPMPID>],[RSPMACADDR=<RSPMACADDR>],
[RSPMPTYPE=<RSPMPTYPE>],[HOPNUM=<HOPNUM>],[OAMRESULT=<OAMRESULT>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the source MP identifier.

The <MPTYPE> parameter of the MP must be MEP.
<DSTMPID> Indicates the sink MP identifier.
<RSPMPID> Indicates the RSP MP identifier.

This parameter is valid for non-standard MP.
<RSPMACADDR> Indicates the RSP MP address. This parameter is valid for standard
MP.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<RSPMPTYPE> Indicates the RSP MP type. The valid values are as follows:
l MEP: maintenance end point.
l MIP: maintenance intermediate point.
l NULL: unknown MP type.
<HOPNUM> Indicates the hop number. The valid value ranges from 0 to 255.
<OAMRESULT> Indicates test result. The valid values are FAIL and SUCCESS.
Example
l Command
OPR-OAM-LT::MP-1-1-10:100:::DSTMPID=2;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
"MP-1-1-10::DSTMPID=2,RSPMPID=3,RSPMPTYPE=MEP,HOPNUM=1,OAMRESULT=SUCCESS"
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.3 ENT-MD
A.13.10.4 DLT-MD
A.13.10.5 RTRV-MD
A.13.10.3 ENT-MD
Creates a maintenance domain (MD).
Function
This command creates an MD of Ethernet OAM in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
ENT-MD[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::LEVEL=<LEVEL>,NAMETYPE=<NAMETYPE>,
[NAME=<NAME>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is MD-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>- NA

<MD ID>.
<LEVEL> Indicates the level of the MD, which is used to identify NA

different customers.
The valid value ranges from 0 to 7. The value "0"
indicates the highest priority.
<NAMETYPE Indicates the type of the MD name. NA

> l NoName
l DNSName
l String
<NAME> Indicates the name of the MD, which is a string with NA

no more than 20 ASCII characters.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-MD::MD-1-2-1:1:::LEVEL=0,NAMETYPE=STRING,NAME="MD1"
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-25 18:54:51
M 1 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.4 DLT-MD
A.13.10.5 RTRV-MD
A.13.10.4 DLT-MD
Deletes an MD (maintenance domain).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command deletes a MD for Ethernet OAM in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-MD:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

<MD ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-MD::MD-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.3 ENT-MD
A.13.10.5 RTRV-MD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.10.5 RTRV-MD
Retrieves the maintenance domain (MD).
Function
This command retrieves an MD for Ethernet OAM in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MD:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

<MD ID>.
Supports ALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[LEVEL=<LEVEL>],[NAMETYPE=<NAMENAME>],[NAME=<NAME>],
[MALIST=<MAID>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is MD-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MD ID>.
<LEVEL> Indicates the level of the MD, which is used to identify different
customers.
The valid value ranges from 0 to 7. The value "0" indicates the highest
priority.
<NAMETYPE> Indicates the MD name type.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<NAME> Indicates the MD name. It is a string which contains no more than 20

ASCII characters.
<MALIST> The identifier of the MA (a collection of MPs of the same VLAN ID

within an MD).
This valid format is MA-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MA ID>.
Example
l Command
RTRV-MD::MD-1-1-10:100;
RTRV-MD::MD-1-1-ALL:100;
RTRV-MD::ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-05 18:05:00
M 100 COMPLD
"MD-1-1-10:: LEVEL=7,NAMETYPE=NONAME,NAME=,MALIST=MA-1-11-1&MA-1-11-2"
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.3 ENT-MD
A.13.10.4 DLT-MD
A.13.10.6 ENT-MA
Creates a maintenance association (MA).
Function
This command creates an MA for Ethernet OAM in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-MA:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::MDID=<MD_AID>,NAME=<MANAME>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the MA. NA

The valid format is MA-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<MA ID>.
<MD_AID> Indicates the maintenance domain (MD) to which the NA

MA belongs.
The valid format is MD-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<MD ID>.
<MANAME> Indicates the name of the MA, which is a string with NA

no more than 20 ASCII characters.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-MA::MA-1-2-1:1:::MDID=MD-1-2-1,NAME=MA1;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-25 18:54:51
M 1 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.7 DLT-MA
A.13.10.8 RTRV-MA
A.13.10.7 DLT-MA
Deletes a maintenance association (MA).
Function
This command deletes an MA for Ethernet OAM in a unit.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-MA:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

The valid format is MA-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MA
ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-MA::MA-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.6 ENT-MA
A.13.10.8 RTRV-MA
A.13.10.8 RTRV-MA
Retrieves the maintenance association (MA).
Function
This command retrieves the MA for Ethernet OAM in a unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MA:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

The valid format is MA-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MA
ID>.
Supports ALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[MD=<SPEC_MDID>],[NAME=<MANAME>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the MA.

The valid format is MA-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MA ID>.
<MD> Indicates the maintenance domain (MD) to which the MA belongs.

The valid format is MD-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MD ID>
<NAME> Indicates the MA name. It is a string which contains no more than 20

ASCII characters.
Example
l Command
RTRV-MA::MA-1-1-10:100;
RTRV-MA::MA-1-1-ALL:100;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
RTRV-MA::ALL:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 18:05:00
M 100 COMPLD
"MA-1-1-10::MD=MD-1-1-1,NAME=HUAWEI"
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.6 ENT-MA
A.13.10.7 DLT-MA
A.13.10.9 ENT-MP
Creates a maintenance point (MP).
Function
This command creates an MP for Ethernet OAM in a unit.
Usage Note
For NGWDM equipment, the OAM function is not supported by the L4G.
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-MP:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::STANDARDTYPE=<STANDARDTYPE>,SRVTYPE=<SRVTY
PE>,LINKFROM=<LINKFROM>,LINKTO=<LINKTO>,[INTAG=<INTAG>],
[INSTAG=<INSTAG>],[VLANID=<VLANID>],
[LEVEL=<LEVEL>],MPTYPE=<MPTYPE>,MPDIR=<MPDIR>,
[CCTIMER=<CCTIMER>],[LBTIME=<LBTIME>],[LTTIME=<LTTIME>],
[MCCCSTATUS=<MCCCSTATUS>],[MD=<MD>],[MA=<MA>],
[MACADDR=<MACADDR>],[IPADDR=<IPADDR>],
[PINGFRAMELENGTH=<PINGFRAMELENGTH>],
[PINGOVERTIME=<PING_OVER_TIME>],
[PDFRAMELENGTH=<PDFRAMELENGTH>],[PDOVERTIME=<PDOVERTIME>],
[AISSTATE=<AISSTATE>],[CLIENTLAYER=<CLIENTLAYER>],
[AISPERIOD=<AISPERIOD>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Value
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the MP. NA

<MP ID>.
The valid value for <MP ID> ranges from 1 to
0x00001FFF.
For the standard MP, the value ranges from 1 to
0x00001FFF; for nonstandard MP, the value ranges
from 1 to 0xFFFFFF00.
<STANDARDTY Indicates the type of the MP. The valid values are as NA
PE> follows:
l NOSTANDARDMP: draft 3 MP
l STANDARDMP: standard MP
<SRVTYPE> Indicates the service type. NA

The valid values are LINK and LSP.
NOTE
The LSP is not valid for NGWDM equipment.
<LINKFROM> Indicates the source of the link. NA

The valid format is
<PORT ID>
l VBLP: VBLP-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<VBID>-
<VBLP>
NOTE
For TBE cards
l The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID> for PORT3 to PORT11.
l The valid format is ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
l The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-
<VBID>-<VBLP> for VBLP1 to VBLP25.
For L4G cards
This parameter is valid only when <SRVTYPE> is set
to LINK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<LINKTO> Indicates the sink of the link. NA

<PORT ID>
ID>-<VBLP ID>
NOTE
Ethernet links between VBLPs are not supported.
l NOTE
For TBE cards
l The valid format is VBLP-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-
<VBID>-<VBLP> for VBLP1 to VBLP25.
For L4G cards
<INTAG> Indicates the tag of incoming packets. The tag can be NA

a VLAN ID. This parameter is optional and indicates
an EPL in this response.
If the packets of the VBLINK are untagged, the
<INTAG> must be in the VLAN filter entry of a virtual
bridge. The VLAN entry is retrieved by the command
A.13.4.8 RTRV-VLANENTRY-VB.
<INSTAG> Indicates the VLAN tag of the incoming service. The NA

parameter must correspond with the service.
<VLANID> Indicates the VLAN ID of the service. The valid value NA

<LEVEL> Indicates the level of OAM frames, which is used to 4

identify different customers.
The valid value ranges from 0 to 7. The value "0"
indicates the highest priority.
For standard MP, this parameter is invalid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<MPTYPE> Indicates the type of the MP. NA

l MEP: maintenance end point. OAM message
capsules must be generated or terminated at the
MEP or returned to the responding frame in the LB
or LT test.
l MIP: maintenance intermediate point. OAM
message capsules are only transparently
transmitted, or returned to the responding frame in
the LB or LT test.
<MPDIR> Indicates the direction of the MP. NA

l BIDIR: bidirectional
l INGRESS
l EGRESS
If <MPTYPE> is set to MIP, this parameter must be
BIDIR. If the <MPTYPE> is set to MEP, this
parameter must be INGRESS or EGRESS.
<CCTIMER> Indicates the transmission cycle of the continuity l For

check (CC) message. This parameter is used for the CC nonstandar
test. d MP:
l For nonstandard MP: 5000 (ms)
The valid value ranges from 1000 to 60000 (units l For
in milliseconds with the step length of 100). standard
MP: 4(1s)
l For standard MP:
The transmission cycles of CCM are defined by
Draft 8.0: 1(3.3ms), 2(10ms), 3(100ms), 4(1s), 5
(10s), 6(60s), 7(600s)
Currently, the products support the following
transmission cycles for CC:
4(1s), 5(10s), 6(60s), 7(600s)
<LBTIME> Indicates the period when an LB test times out. This 5000 (ms)
parameter is used for the LB test.
The valid value ranges from 3000 to 60000 (units in
milliseconds with the step length of 100).
<LTTIME> Indicates the period when an LT test times out. This 5000(ms)
parameter is used for the LT test that serves the same
purpose as that of the LB test.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<MCCCSTATUS Indicates whether the CC test is activated. INACTIVE

> This valid values are INACTIVE and ACTIVE.
<MD> Indicates the MD identifier. NA

The valid format is MD-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<MD ID>.
<MD ID> ranges from 1 to 0xFFFFFF00.
<MA> Indicates the MA identifier. NA

The valid format is MA-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<MA ID>.
<MA ID> ranges from 1 to 0xFFFFFF00.
<MACADDR> Indicates the CC destination multicast MAC address. 01-80-

The valid value ranges from 01-80-c2-00-00-30 to c2-00-00-30
01-80-c2-00-00-3f.
This parameter is valid only for standard MP.
<IPADDR> Indicates the IP address of the MP. 0.0.0.0

This parameter can not be specified with the following Indicates that
values. the IP address
0.*.*.*; 127.*.*.*; 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255; is invalid.
240.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255; *.*.*.255; *.*.*.0
<PINGFRAMEL Indicates the length of the ping frame. 64

ENGTH> The valid value ranges from 64 to 1522 (units in bytes).
<PINGOVERTIM Indicates the period when a ping operation times out. 5

E> The valid value ranges from 3 to 60 (units in seconds).
<PDFRAMELEN Indicates the length of the performance detection 64

GTH> frame.
The valid value ranges from 64 to 1522 (units in bytes).
<PDOVERTIME Indicates the period when performance detection times 5

> out.
The valid value ranges from 3 to 60 (units in seconds).
<AISSTATE> Indicates whether certain alarms are suppressed by INACTIVE

sending packets to the opposite end.
INACTIVE
ACTIVE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<CLIENTLAYER Indicates the client layer. The valid value ranges from 7
> 1 to 7.
Sets the alarm suppression level of a node. This level
should be higher than the level of the MD where the
node resides.
<AISPERIOD> Indicates the AIS period (units in milliseconds) and 60000

does not have any step lengths.
The valid value is 1000 or 60000.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-
MP::MP-1-12-2:C:::STANDARDTYPE=STANDARDMP,SRVTYPE=LINK,LINKFROM=FAC-1-12-3,LINKTO=
ACC-1-12-1,VLANID=2,MPTYPE=MEP,MPDIR=INGRESS,CCTIMER=4,LBTIME=5000,LTTIME=5000,MCC
CSTATUS=INACTIVE,MD=MD-1-12-1,MA=MA-1-12-1,MACADDR=01-80-
c2-00-00-30,IPADDR=10.1.1.2,PINGFRAMELENGTH=64,PINGOVERTIME=3,PDFRAMELENGTH=64,PDO
VERTIME=3,AISSTATE=ACTIVE,CLIENTLAYER=7,AISPERIOD=60000;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-25 18:54:51
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.10 ED-MP
A.13.10.11 DLT-MP
A.13.10.12 RTRV-MP
A.13.10.10 ED-MP
Edits the maintenance point (MP).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command modifies the MP for Ethernet OAM in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-MP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[CCTIMER=<CCTIMER>],[LBTIME=<LBTIME>],
[LTTIME=<LTTIME>],[MCCCSTATUS=<MCCCSTATUS>],
[MACADDR=<MPCCMAC>],[IPADDR=<MPIP>],
[PINGFRAMELENGTH=<MPPINGFRMLEN>],
[PINGOVERTIME=<MPPINGOVERTIME>],
[PDFRAMELENGTH=<MPPDFRMLEN>],[PDOVERTIME=<MPPDOVERTIME>],
[AISSTATE=<AISSTATE>],[CLIENTLAYER=<CLIENTLAYER>],
[AISPERIOD=<AISPERIOD>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the MP. NA

<MP ID>.
<CCTIMER> Indicates the transmission cycle of the continuity l For

check (CC) message. This parameter is used for the nonstandard
CC test. MP: 5000 (ms)
l For nonstandard MP: l For standard
The valid value ranges from 1000 to 60000 (units MP: 4(1s)
in milliseconds with the step length of 100).
l For standard MP:
The transmission cycles of CCM are defined by
Draft 8.0: 1(3.3ms), 2(10ms), 3(100ms), 4(1s), 5
(10s), 6(60s), 7(600s)
Currently, the products support the following
transmission cycles for CC:
4(1s), 5(10s), 6(60s), 7(600s)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LBTIME> Displays the LB test timeout time. This parameter is 5000

used for the LB test.
The valid value ranges from 3000 to 60000. The unit
is 1 ms, and the step length is 100.
<LTTIME> Displays the LT test timeout time. This parameter is 5000

used for the LT test, which serves the same purpose as
that of the LB test.
The valid value ranges from 3000 to 60000. The unit
is 1 ms, and the step length is 100.
<MCCCSTA Displays whether the CC test is activated. INACTIVE

TUS> This valid values are INACTIVE and ACTIVE.
<MPCCMAC Indicates the CC destination multicast MAC Address. 01-80-

> The valid value ranges from 01-80-c2-00-00-30 to c2-00-00-30
01-80-c2-00-00-3f.
<MPIP> Indicates the IP of the MP. 0.0.0.0

This parameter can not be specified with the following Indicates that the
values. IP address is
0.*.*.*; 127.*.*.*; 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255; invalid.
240.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255; *.*.*.255; *.*.*.0
<MPPINGFR Indicates the length of the ping frame. 64

MLEN> The valid value ranges from 64 to 1522 (units in bytes).
<MPPINGOV Indicates the ping timeout time. 5

ERTIME> The valid value ranges from 3 to 60 (units in seconds).
<MPPDFRM Indicates the length of the performance detection 64

LEN> frame.
<MPPDOVE Indicates the performance detection timeout time. 5

RTIME> The valid value ranges from 3 to 60 (units in seconds).
<AISSTATE Indicates whether certain alarms are suppressed by INACTIVE

> sending packets to the opposite end.
The valid values are INACTIVE and ACTIVE.
<CLIENTLA Indicates the client layer. The valid value ranges from 7
YER> 1 to 7.
Sets the alarm suppression level of a node. This level
should be higher than the level of the MD in which the
node resides.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<AISPERIOD Indicates the AIS period. The unit is expressed in 60000

> milliseconds and does not have any step lengths.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-
MP::MP-1-12-2:C:::CCTIMER=4,LBTIME=5000,LTTIME=5000,MCCCSTATUS=INACTIVE,MD=MD-1-12
-1,MA=MA-1-12-1,MACADDR=01-80-
VERTIME=3,AISSTATE=ACTIVE,CLIENTLAYER=7,AISPERIOD=60000;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-25 18:54:51
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.9 ENT-MP
A.13.10.11 DLT-MP
A.13.10.12 RTRV-MP
A.13.10.11 DLT-MP
Deletes a maintenance point (MP).
Function
This command deletes an MP for Ethernet OAM in a unit.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-MP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Value
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the maintenance point. NA

The valid format is MP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MP
ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-MP::MP-1-1-10:100;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 17:50:00
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.9 ENT-MP
A.13.10.10 ED-MP
A.13.10.12 RTRV-MP
A.13.10.12 RTRV-MP
Retrieves a maintenance point (MP).
Function
This command retrieves an MP for Ethernet OAM in a unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MP:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Paramet Description Default
er Value
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the maintenance point. NA

Supports ALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::STANDARDTYPE=<STANDARDTYPE>,SRVTYPE=<SRVTYPE>,LINKFROM=<LINKFROM>,LINKT
O=<LINKTO>,[INTAG=<INTAG>],[INSTAG=<INSTAG>],[VLANID=<VLANID>],
[LEVEL=<LEVEL>],MPTYPE=<MPTYPE>,MPDIR=<MPDIR>,CCTIMER=<CCTIMER>,LBTIME=<LBTIME>,LT
TIME=<LTTIME>,MCCCSTATUS=<MCCCSTATUS>,[MD=<MD>],[MA=<MA>],[ MACADDR=<MACADDR>],
[IPADDR=<IPADDR>],[PINGFRAMELENGTH=<PINGFRAMELENGTH>],
[PINGOVERTIME=<PINGOVERTIME>],[PDFRAMELENGTH=<PDFRAMELENGTH>],
[PDOVERTIME=<PDOVERTIME>],[AISSTATE=<AISSTATE>],[CLIENTLAYER=<CLIENTLAYER>],
[AISPERIOD=AISPERIOD]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the maintenance point.

<STANDARDTYP Indicates the type of the MP. The valid values are as follows:
E> l NOSTANDARDMP: draft 3 MP
l STANDARDMP: standard MP
<SRVTYPE> Indicates the service type.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LINKFROM> Indicates the source of the link.

The valid format is
l PORT: FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
l VBLP: VBLP-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<VBID>-<VBLP>
This parameter is valid only when <SRVTYPE> is set to LINK.
<LINKTO> Indicates the sink of the link.

l PORT: FAC/ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
l VBLP: VBLP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<VB ID>-<VBLP ID>
<INTAG> Indicates the tag of incoming packets. The tag can be a VLAN ID. This
parameter is optional and indicates an EPL in this response.
<INSTAG> Indicates the VLAN tag of the incoming service. This parameter is
optional.
<VLANID> Indicates VLAN ID of the service.
<LEVEL> Indicates the level of OAM frames, which is used to identify different
customers.
The valid value ranges from 0 to 7. The value "0" indicates the highest
priority.
<MPTYPE> Indicates the type of the MP.

MEP: maintenance end point. OAM message capsules must be
generated or terminated at the MEP or returned to the responding frame
in the LB or LT test.
MIP: maintenance intermediate point. OAM message capsules are
transparently transmitted only, or returned to the responding frame in
the LB or LT test.
<MPDIR> Indicates the direction of the MP.

l BIDI: bidirectional
l INGRESS
l EGRESS
If <MPTYPE> is set to MIP, this field must be BIDIR. If the
<MPTYPE> is MEP, this field must be INGRESS or EGRESS.
<CCTIMER> Indicates the transmission cycle of the continuity check (CC) message.
This parameter is used for the CC test.
<LBTIME> Displays the LB test timeout time. This parameter is used for the LB
test.
The valid value ranges from 3000 to 60000. Units are in milliseconds
and the step length is 100.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LTTIME> Displays the LT test timeout time. This parameter is used for the LT
test, which serves the same purpose as that of the LB test.
The valid value ranges from 3000 to 60000. Units are in milliseconds
and the step length is 100.
<MCCCSTATUS> Displays whether the CC test is activated.

The valid values are INACTIVE and ACTIVE.
<MD> Indicates the maintenance domain (MD) identifier.

The valid format is MD-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MD ID>.
<MA> Indicates the maintenance association (MA) identifier.

The valid format is MA-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MA ID>.
<MACADDR> Indicates the CC destination multicast MAC Address.

The valid value ranges from 01-80-c2-00-00-30 to 01-80-c2-00-00-3f.
<IPADDR> Indicates the IP of the MP.
<PINGFRAMELE Indicates the length of the Ping frame.

NGTH> The valid value ranges from 64 to 1522 (units in bytes).
<PINGOVERTIM Indicates the expiring time of Pinging.

E> The valid value ranges from 3 to 60 (units in seconds).
<PDFRAMELENG Indicates the length of the PD frame.

TH> The valid value ranges from 64 to 1522 (units in bytes).
<PDOVERTIME> Indicates the timeout time of PD.

<AISSTATE> Indicates whether certain alarms are suppressed by sending packets to

the opposite end.
INACTIVE
ACTIVE
<CLIENTLAYER> Indicates the client layer. The valid value ranges from 1 to 7.
Sets the alarm suppression level of a node. This level should be higher
than the level of the MD in which the node resides.
<AISPERIOD> Indicates the AIS period (units are in milliseconds and there are not
any step lengths).
Example
l Command
RTRV-MP::MP-1-12-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-08-25 00:27:16
M C COMPLD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"MP-1-12-1::STANDARDTYPE=STANDARDMP,SRVTYPE=LINK,LINKFROM=FAC-1-12-3,LINKTO=ACC-1-
12-1,VLANID=1,LEVEL=0,MPTYPE=MEP,MPDIR=INGRESS,CCTIMER=5000,LBTIME=5000,LTTIME=500
0,MCCCSTATUS=INACTIVE,MD=MD-1-12-1,MA=MA-1-12-1,MACADDR=01-80-
VERTIME=3,AISSTATE=ACTIVE,CLIENTLAYER=7,AISPERIOD=60000"
;
Related Commands
A.13.10.9 ENT-MP
A.13.10.11 DLT-MP
A.13.10.10 ED-MP
A.13.10.13 REPTÊVTÔAMSERVICELOOP
Reports service loop events.
Function
When the OAM service loop is detected by the ETHOAM protocol, the MP service loop events
will be reported.
This function is only valid for nonstandard MPs.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
A^^<ATAG>^REPTÊVTÔAMSERVICELOOP<cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>:<PORT>,<VLANID>,<LEVEL>,<DIR>" <cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the identifier of the source maintenance point.

The valid format is MP-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<MP>.
The type of the <MP> must be MEP.
<PORT> Indicates the channel on which the service loop occurred. The valid
format is FAC/ACC-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<PORT>.
<VLANID> Indicates the VLAN ID of the MP.
<LEVEL> Indicates the level of the source MP.
<DIR> Indicates the direction of the source MP.
Example
l Command
None
l Response Message
NE 2008-12-11 15:11:53
* 667681 REPT EVT OAMSERVICELOOP
"MP-1-3-1:FAC-1-3-1,1,0,EGRESS"
;
>
Related Commands
None
A.13.10.14 STA-OAM-PING
Starts an OAM ping test.
Function
This command instructs an NE to start a ping test.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
STA-OAM-PING:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::DSTIP=<DSTIP>,PINGTIME
=<PINGTIME>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the source MP identifier. The valid format NA

is MP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MP ID>. The
field <MPTYPE> (see A.13.10.9 ENT-MP) of the
MP must be MEP.
<DSTIP> Indicates the IP of the destination MP. NA
<PINGTIME> Indicates the number of pings. NA

The valid value ranges from 1 to 1000 or 65535. 65535
denotes an infinite number of pings.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
STA-OAM-PING::MP-1-12-2:a:::dstip=129.9.0.100,pingtime=100;
l Response Message
NE 1990-01-03 10:36:49
M A COMPLD
;
Related Commands
None
A.13.10.15 STP-OAM-PING
Stops an Ethernet OAM ping test.
Function
This command instructs an NE to stop a ping test.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
STP-OAM-PING:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Value
<AID> Indicates the source MP identifier. The valid format is NA

MP-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<MP ID>. The field
<MPTYPE> (see A.13.10.9 ENT-MP) of the MP must
be MEP.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<SID>^<YYYY-MM-DD>^<HH:MM:SS>
<cr><lf>M^^<CTAG>^COMPLD <cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
STP-OAM-PING::MP-1-12-2:a;
l Response Message
NE 2008-01-03 10:36:49
M A COMPLD
;
Related Commands
None
A.13.10.16 STA-OAM-PERDECT
Starts Ethernet OAM performance detection

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command instructs an NE to start Ethernet OAM performance detection.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
STA-OAM-PERDECT:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::DSTMP=<DSTMP>,PDTIME=<PDTIME>;
Command Parameters

field <MPTYPE> (See A.13.10.9 ENT-MP) of the
MP must be MEP.
<DSTMP> Indicates the sink MP identifier. The valid value NA

<PDTIME> Indicates the number of pings. NA

The valid value ranges from 1 to 1000 or 65535.
65535 denotes an infinite number of pings.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
STA-OAM-PERDECT::MP-1-12-1:1:::DSTMP=2,PDTIME=10;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 1990-01-03 12:59:28
M 1 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
None
A.13.10.17 STP-OAM-PERDECT
Stops Ethernet OAM performance detection.
Function
This command instructs an NE to stop Ethernet OAM performance detection.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
STP-OAM-PERDECT:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

field <MPTYPE> (see A.13.10.9 ENT-MP) of the
MP must be MEP.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
STP-OAM-PERDECT::MP-1-12-1:1;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 1990-01-03 12:59:28
M 1 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
None
A.13.10.18 ED-P2POAM-ADMIN
Edits the administration parameters of the point-to-point OAM.
Function
This command modifies the administration parameters of the point-to-point OAM.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-P2POAM-ADMIN:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::
[P2POAMENABLE=<P2POAMENABLE>],[P2POAMMODE=<P2POAMMODE>],
[LNKEVTNTFY=<LNKEVTNTFY>],[RSPRMTLB=<RSPRMTLB>],
[ERRFRMWINDOW=<ERRFRMWINDOW>],[ERRFRMTH=<ERRFRMTH>],
[ERRFRMPRDWINDOW=<ERRFRMPRDWINDOW>],
[ERRFRMPRDTH=<ERRFRMPRDTH>],
[ERRFRMSECWINDOW=<ERRFRMSECWINDOW>],
[ERRFRMSECTH=<ERRFRMSECTH>],[UNIOPEREN=<UNIOPEREN>],
[RMTLBCNTL=<RMTLBCNTL>],[LDPORTBLOCK=<LDPORTBLOCK>],
[LDENABLE=<LDENABLE>];
Command Parameters

<PORT ID>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<P2POAMENA Indicates whether the Ethernet OAM is enabled. The DISABLE

BLE> valid values are DISABLE and ENABLE.
<P2POAMMOD Indicates the working mode of Ethernet OAM. The ACTIVE

E> valid values are PASSIVE and ACTIVE.
<LNKEVTNTFY Indicates whether remote reporting of Ethernet OAM ENABLE

> link events is supported. The valid values are
DISABLE and ENABLE.
<RSPRMTLB> Indicates whether the reporting of responses to the DISABLE

remote loopback in Ethernet OAM is supported. The
valid values are DISABLE and ENABLE.
<ERRFRMWIN Indicates the monitoring time window of errored 1000

DOW> frames.
<ERRFRMTH> Indicates the monitoring threshold of errored frames. 1

The valid value ranges from 1 to 4294967295 (units
in frames).
<ERRFRMPRD Indicates the monitoring time window of the error Maxpps (The
WINDOW> frame period (units in frames). value varied
The value is determined as follows: with different
units.)
l 1. Based on the MaxSpeed (units are in bits and
valid values are: 10M, 100M, 1000M, or 10000M)
that the specific card supports, the following
formula is used to compute the maximum number
of frames that the port can receive per second at
the maximum speed. (The frames are computed at
64 bytes; preambles at 8 bytes; and IPG*Speed 96
bits.).
Maxpps (number of frames received per second)
= MaxSpeed/(Frame*8 + Preamble*8 +
IPG*Speed) = MaxSpeed/(64*8 + 8*8 + 96). The
result should be an integer.
NOTE
The values of Maxpps at each rate are as follows:
l 10 Mbit/s: 14880
l 100 Mbit/s: 148800
l 1000 Mbit/s: 1488000
l 10 Gbit/s: 14880000
l 2. The step length is 1.
l 3. According to the preceding computation, the
range of the monitoring window is as follows:
Maxpps/10 to Maxpps*60
Default value: Maxpps

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<ERRFRMPRDT Indicates the monitoring threshold of the error frame 1

H> period.
Units are expressed in frames.
<ERRFRMSEC Indicates the monitoring time window of errored 60

WINDOW> frames.
seconds).
<ERRFRMSECT Indicates the monitoring threshold of frame-errored 1

H> seconds.
seconds).
<UNIOPEREN> Indicates whether unidirectional operation is DISABLE

supported. The valid values are DISABLE and
ENABLE.
<RMTLBCNTL> Indicates whether the loopback control for Ethernet DISABLE

OAM is enabled. The valid values are DISABLE and
ENABLE.
<LDPORTBLOC Indicates whether blocking a port is enabled. The ENABLE

K> valid values are DISABLE and ENABLE.
<LDENABLE> Indicates whether the loopback test is enabled. The DISABLE

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-P2POAM-
ADMIN::FAC-1-2-4:100:::P2POAMENABLE=DISABLE,P2POAMMODE=ACTIVE,LNKEVTNTFY=ENABLE,RS
PRMTLB=DISABLE,ERRFRMWINDOW=1000,ERRFRMTH=1,ERRFRMPRDWINDOW=14880000,ERRFRMPRDTH=1
,ERRFRMSECWINDOW=60,ERRFRMSECTH=1,UNIOPEREN=DISABLE,LDPORTBLOCK=ENABLE,LDENABLE=DI
SABLE
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-05 16:55:00
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.13.10.19 RTRV-P2POAM-ADMIN
A.13.10.19 RTRV-P2POAM-ADMIN
Retrieves the administration parameters of the point-to-point OAM
Function
This command retrieves the administration parameters of the point-to-point OAM.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-P2POAM-ADMIN:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Value

<PORT ID>.
Supports the "&" and "&&" symbols and ALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::[P2POAMENABLE=<P2POAMENABLE>],[P2POAMMODE=<P2POAMMODE>],
[LNKEVTNTFY=<LNKEVTNTFY>],[RSPRMTLB=<RSPRMTLB>],[ERRFRMWINDOW=<ERRFRMWINDOW>],
[ERRFRMTH=<ERRFRMTH>],[ERRFRMPRDWINDOW=<ERRFRMPRDWINDOW>],
[ERRFRMPRDTH=<ERRFRMPRDTH>],[ERRFRMPRDTH=<ERRFRMPRDTH>],
[ERRFRMSECWINDOW=<ERRFRMSECWINDOW>],[ERRFRMSECTH=<ERRFRMSECTH>],
[UNIOPEREN=<UNIOPEREN>],[RMTLBSTATE=<RMTLBSTATE>],[LDPORTBLOCK=<LDPORTBLOCK>],
[LDENABLE =<LDENABLE>]"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT

ID>.
<P2POAMENABLE> Indicates whether the Ethernet OAM is enabled. The valid

values are DISABLE and ENABLE.
<P2POAMMODE> Indicates the working mode of Ethernet OAM. The valid values
are PASSIVE and ACTIVE.
<LNKEVTNTFY> Indicates whether remote reporting of Ethernet OAM link

events is supported. The valid values are DISABLE and
ENABLE.
<RSPRMTLB> Indicates whether the response to the remote loopback in

Ethernet OAM is supported. The valid values are DISABLE and
ENABLE.
<ERRFRMWINDOW> Indicates the monitoring time window of errored frames.

<ERRFRMTH> Indicates the monitoring threshold of errored frames.

The valid value ranges from 1 to 4294967295 (units in frames).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<ERRFRMPRDWINDO Indicates the monitoring time window of the frame-errored

W> period.
The units are expressed in frames
The value is determined as follows:
l 1. Based on the MaxSpeed (units are in bits and valid values
are: 10M, 100M, 1000M, or 10000M) that the specific card
supports, the following formula is used to compute the
maximum number of frames that the port can receive per
second at the maximum speed. (The frames are computed at
64 bytes; preambles at 8 bytes; and IPG*Speed 96 bits.)
Maxpps (number of frames received per second) =
MaxSpeed/(Frame*8 + Preamble*8 + IPG*Speed) =
MaxSpeed/(64*8 + 8*8 + 96). The result should be an
integer.
NOTE
1. The values of Maxpps at each rate are as follows:
l 10 Mbps: 14880
l 100 Mbps: 148800
l 1000 Mbps: 1488000
l 10 Gbps: 14880000
l 2. The step length is 1.
l 3. According to the preceding computation, the range of the
monitoring window is as follows:
Maxpps/10 to Maxpps*60
Default: Maxpps
<ERRFRMPRDTH> Indicates the monitoring threshold of the error frame period.

The valid value ranges from 1 to 4294967295 (units in frames).
<ERRFRMSECWINDO Indicates the monitoring time window of frame-errored

W> seconds.
<ERRFRMSECTH> Indicates the monitoring threshold of frame-errored seconds.

<UNIOPEREN> Indicates whether the unidirectional operation is supported. The

<RMTLBSTATE> Indicates the state of the remote loopback in Ethernet OAM.

The valid value is as follows:
l NOLOOP: no loopback
l STALOOP: start loopback at local point.
l RSPLOOP: response to remote loopback.
<LDPORTBLOCK> Indicates whether port blocking is enabled. The valid values are
DISABLE and ENABLE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LDENABLE> Indicates whether loopback detection is enabled. The valid

<MAXOAMPKTLEN> Indicates the maximum length of the OAM packet.

The value can only be set to 1518 currently.
<RMTLNKEVTNTFY> Indicates whether the remote reporting of Ethernet OAM link

events is supported by the opposite port. The valid values are
DISABLE and ENABLE.
<RMTRSPRMTLB> Indicates whether the response to the remote loopback in

Ethernet OAM is supported by the opposite port. The valid
<RMTUNIOPEREN> Indicates whether the unidirectional operation is supported by

the opposite port. The valid values are DISABLE and ENABLE.
<RMTP2POAMMODE> Indicates the Ethernet OAM work mode of the opposite port.
The valid values are PASSIVE and ACTIVE.
<RMTMAXOAMPKTLE Indicates the maximum length of the OAM packet of the

N> opposite port (units in bytes).
Example
l Command
RTRV-P2P0AM-ADMIN::FAC-1-2-4:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-01-06 20:25:54
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-2-4::P2POAMENABLE=ENABLE,P2POAMMODE=ACTIVE,LNKEVTNTFY=ENABLE,RSPRMTLB=DISAB
LE,ERRFRMWINDOW=1000,ERRFRMPRDWINDOW=14880000,ERRFRMPRDTH=1,ERRFRMSECWINDOW=60,ERR
FRMSECTH=1,LDPORTBLOCK=ENABLE,LDENABLE=DISABLE"
;
>
Related Commands
A.13.10.18 ED-P2POAM-ADMIN
A.13.11 Other Maintenace commands

This section lists the commands used to maintain network communication.
A.13.11.1 STA-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
Starts sending Ethernet test frames.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command instructs an NE to start sending Ethernet test frames.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
STA-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::
[PKTNUM=<PKTNUM>];
Command Parameters
<MOD2> The valid values for modifier 2 are FETH, GETH NA

and XGETH (10GETH).

<PATH ID>
<PKTNUM> Indicates the number of test packets to be sent. NA

This parameter is optional. By default, packets are
continuously sent until a user changes this
parameter.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
STA-PING-GETH::ACC-1-1-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.11.2 STP-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
A.13.11.3 RTRV-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
Stops sending Ethernet test frames.
Function
This command instructs an NE to stop sending Ethernet test frames.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
STP-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

and XGETH (10GETH).

<PATH ID>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
STP-PING-GETH::ACC-1-1-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the parameters of a ping test.
Function
This command instructs the NE to retrieve the state and count of Ethernet test frames.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters

and XGETH (10GETH).

ID>-<PATH ID>
retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::TESTMODE=<TESTMODE>,[PKTNUM=<PKTNUM>],TOTALSEND=<TOTALSEND>,
[RESPONDRECV=<RESPONDRECV>,NORMALRECV=<NORMALRECV>]"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<TESTMODE> Indicates the current test mode.

l STOP: indicates that test frames are not transmitted.
l CONTINUOUS: indicates the continuous transmitting of test frames.
If <PKTNUM> is not set, the test frames are sent continuously by
default.
l BURST: indicates the continuous transmission of test frames. If
<PKTNUM> needs to be set, this parameter must be set to BURST.
<PKTNUM> Indicates the number of test packets. By default, packets are continuously
sent until a user changes this parameter.
This parameter is optional. It is required only when <TESTMODE> is set
to BURST.
<TOTALSEND Indicates the total number of transmitted test frames.

>
<RESPONDRE Indicates the number of received responses to the test frames.

CV>
<NORMALREC Indicates the number of test frames received.

V>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-PING-GETH::ACC-1-1-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"ACC-1-1-2::TESTMODE=BURST,PKTNUM=200,TOTALSEND=200,RESPONDRECV=200,NORMALRECV=0"
;
Related Commands
A.13.11.4 INIT-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>
Initializes the ping test parameters.
Function
This command initializes the counter for Ethernet test frames.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
INIT-PING-<FETH/GETH/XGETH>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::
[COUNTERTYPE=<COUNTERTYPE>];
Command Parameters

and XGETH (10GETH).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ID>
ID>-<PATH ID>
<COUNTERTY Indicates the type of counter to be cleared. The ALL

PE> valid values are as follows:
l ALL
l TOTAL-SEND
l RSP-RECV
l NORM-RECV
l CUR-SEND
This parameter is optional and its default value is
ALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INIT-PING-GETH::ACC-1-1-1:100:::COUNTERTYPE=NORM-RECV;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.11.5 REPTÊVT^PING
Reports the frame test event.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command reports the result of the frame test.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
A^^<ATAG>^REPTÊVT^PING<cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>:<RESPONDRECV>,<NORMALRECV>,<TOTALSEND>,<IPFLAG>" <cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format are as follows:

l CLNT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<PATH ID>
<RESPONDRECV> Indicates the number of received responses to the test frame.
<NORMALRECV> Indicates the number of test frames received.
<TOTALSEND> Indicates the total number of test frames transmitted.
<IPFLAG> Indicates whether the test is in process or complete.

The valid values are IP (in progress) and COMPLD (completed).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
None
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
A 100 REPT EVT PING
"ACC-1-5-3:100,100,100,COMPLD"
;
Related Commands
None
A.13.11.6 STA-CAPT
Create port capture rules.
Function
This command instructs an NE create port capture rules.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
STA-CAPT:[<TID>]:<STA_PCSN>:<CTAG>:::PORT=<INPORT>,
[VLANID=<PKTVLANID>],[CAPTDIR=<CAPTDIR>],[PKTTYPE=<DFTPKTTYPE>],
[CAPTNUM=<CAPTNUM>];
Command Parameters
<STA_PCSN> Valid value can be following:PCSN-<SHELF>- NA

<SLOT>-<PCSN>.
<PCSN> <PCSN>is the protocol capture session number that NA

uniquely identifies the protocol capture session for
which data is being retrieved. <PCSN>can range
from 1 to MAX_PCSN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<PORT> ndicates the port.Valid value can be as follows: NA

FAC/ACC-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<PORT>
<VLANID> Indicates the identify of a vlan.Valid value can range NA

from 0 to 4095. Default to capture packet from the
port.
<CAPTDIR> Indicates the direction from which the user will NA

capture packet. Valid value can be as follows:TX: 1
RX: 2 ,Optional, default value is TX.
<PKTTYPE> Type of the packet that will be captured. Valid value NA

can be as follows:
GFPCMF:1(If <PORT> is ACC-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT>)
LPT:2
IGMP:3
RSTP:4
MPLSOAM:5
ETHOAM:6
LACP:7.
this is Optional, default value is GFPCMF
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
STA-CAPT::PCSN-1-1:100:::PORT=FAC-1-1,VLANID=1,CAPTDIR=RX,PKTTYPE=RSTP,CAPTNUM=10;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.11.7 STP-CAPT
A.13.11.8 RTRV-CAPT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.13.11.7 STP-CAPT
Delete port capture rules.
Function
This command instructs an NE delete port capture rules.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
STP-CAPT:[<TID>]:<STA_PCSN>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<STA_PCSN> Valid value can be following:PCSN-<SHELF>- NA

<SLOT>-<PCSN>.
<PCSN> <PCSN>is the protocol capture session number that NA

which data is being retrieved. <PCSN>can range
from 1 to MAX_PCSN
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
STP-CAPT::PCSN-1-1:100;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.13.11.6 STA-CAPT
A.13.11.8 RTRV-CAPT
A.13.11.8 RTRV-CAPT
Retrieve port capture rules.
Function
This command instructs the NE to retrieve port capture rules.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-CAPT:[<TID>]:<RTRV_PCSN>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<RTRV_PCS> <PCSN>is the protocol capture session number that NA

which data is being retrieved.<PCSN>can range
from 1 to MAX_PCSN
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::PORT=<INPORT>,[VLANID=<PKTVLANID>],CAPTDIR=<CAPTDIR>,[PKTTYPE]
=<DFTPKTTYPE>,[CAPTNUM]=<CAPTNUM>,[PKTLEN]=<DFTPKTLEN>,[PACKET]
=<DFTPKT>;"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> The valid format is PCSN-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<PCSN>.
<INPORT> Indicates the port.Valid value can be as follows:PCSN-<SHELF>-

<SLOT>-<PCSN>.
<PKTVLANID> Indicates the identify of a vlan.Valid value can range from 0 to 4095.
Default to capture packet from the port.
<CAPTDIR> Indicates the direction from which the user will capture packet. Valid
value can be as follows:TX: 1 RX: 2 ,Optional, default value is TX.
<DFTPKTTYPE Type of the packet that will be captured.

>
<CAPTNUM> Indicates the packet number of captured.
<DFTPKTLEN> Indicates the length of single packet.
<DFTPKT> Indicates the content of packet.
Example
l Command
RTRV-CAPT::PCSN-1-1:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"PCSN-1-1::PORT=FAC-1-1-1,VLANID=100,CAPTDIR=TX,PKTTYPE=GFPCMF,CAPTNUM=10,PKTLEN=1
0,PACKET=10"
;
Related Commands
A.13.11.6 STA-CAPT
A.13.11.7 STP-CAPT
A.13.11.9 INIT-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>
Initialize all the ethernet test packet counter.
Function
This command initializes the ethernet test packet counter.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
INIT-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::COUNTERTYPE=<COUNTERTYPE>;
Command Parameters

<PORT>:FAC/ACC-<SHELF>-<SLOT>-<PORT>.
<COUNTER Select a counter to be cleared: NA

TYPE> ALL(0)
TOTAL-SEND(1)
when TESTTYPE is FRAME:
RSP-RECV(2)
NORM-RECV(3)
when TESTTYPE is PACKET:
CUR-SEND(4)
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INIT-TEST-FETH::FAC-1-2-3:102:::COUNTERTYPE=ALL;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.13.11.11 STA-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>
A.13.11.12 STP-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>
A.13.11.10 RTRV-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>
Retrieves the packet content of a port test.
Function
This command instructs the NE to retrieve the packet content of a port test.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PING-<FETH/GETH/VCG>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<AID>::TESTMODE=<TESTMODE>,[PKTNUM=<PKTNUM>],TOTALSEND=<TOTALSEND>,
[CURRENTSEND]=<CURRENTSEND>,[PKTLEN]=<PKTLEN>,[PKTTYPE]=<PKTTYPE>,[STUFFTYPE]
=<PKTDATATYPE>,[PKTMACDA]=<PKTMACDA>,[PKTMACSA]=<PKTMACSA>,[PKTIPDA]=<PKTIPDA>,
[PKTIPSA]=<PKTIPSA>,[PKTVLANID]=<PKTVLANID>"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<TESTMODE> Indicates the current test mode.
<PKTNUM> Indicates the number of test packets.
<TOTALSEND Indicates the total number of transmitted test frames.

>
<CURRENTSE Indicates the current send number.

ND>
<PKTLEN> Indicates the packet length.
<PKTTYPE> Indicates the packet type.
<PKTDATATY Indicates the packet data type.

PE>
<PKTMACDA> Indicates the packet destination mac address.
<PKTMACSA> Indicates the packet source mac address.
<PKTIPDA> Indicates the packet destination ip address.
<PKTIPSA> Indicates the packet source ip address.
<PKTVLANID> Indicates the packet vlan id.
Example
l Command
RTRV-TEST-FETH::FAC-1-2:100;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
"FAC-1-1::TESTMODE=BURST,PKTNUM=6000,TOTALSEND=3000,CURRENTSEND=500,PKTLEN=128,PKT
TYPE=CUSTOM,STUFFTYPE=0xAA,PKTMACDA=01-02-03-04-05-06,PKTMACSA=06-05-04-03-02-01"
;
Related Commands
Starts Ethernet port test.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command instructs an NE to start sending Ethernet port test frames.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
STA-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[PKTNUM=<PKTNUM>],
[PKTLEN=<PKTLEN>],[PKTTYPE=<PKTTYPE>],[STUFFTYPE=<PKTDATATYPE>],
[PKTMACDA=<PKTMACDA>],[PKTMACSA=<PKTMACSA>],
[PKTIPDA=<PKTIPDA>],[PKTIPSA=<PKTIPSA>],[PKTVLANID=<PKTVLANID>];
Command Parameters
<AID> The valid format is ACC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT NA

ID>-<PORT ID>.
<PKTNUM> Indicates the number of test packets. NA
<PKTLEN> Indicates the packet length. NA
<PKTTYPE> Indicates the packet type. NA
<PKTDATAT Indicates the packet data type. NA

YPE>
<PKTMACDA Indicates the packet destination mac address. NA

>
<PKTMACSA Indicates the packet source mac address. NA

>
<PKTIPDA> Indicates the packet destination ip address. NA
<PKTIPSA> Indicates the packet source ip address. NA
<PKTVLANID Indicates the packet vlan id. NA

>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
STA-TEST-
GETH::FAC-1-2-3:100:::PKTNUM=200,PKTLEN=128,PKTTYPE=IP,STUFFTYPE=4,PKTMACDA=01-02-
03-04-05-06,PKTMACSA=01-02-03-04-05-06,PKTIPDA=10.11.12.13,PKTIPSA=10.11.12.13,PKT
VLANID=1;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Stops Ethernet port test.
Function
This command instructs an NE to stop Ethernet port test.
Usage Note
None
Category
Configuration
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
STP-TEST-<FETH/GETH/VCG>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
STP-TEST-FETH::FAC-1-2-3:102;
l Response Message
NE 2003-02-28 12:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.14 Configuring OTN Overhead
A.14.1 ED-<ODUN>
Edits the attributes of ODUn logical facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the ODUn logical facility.
Usage Note
ODUn includes ODU0,ODU1,ODU2,ODU5G,ODU3,ODU4 and ODUflex.
Category
Facility

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-<ODUN>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[TYPE=<TYPE>],
[SPEEDCHG=<SPEEDCHG>],[ENCAP=<ENCAP>],[BIP8MODE=<BIP8MODE>],
[DEGTH=<DEGTH>],[DEGTIME=<DEGTIME>],
[DEGINTERVAL=<DEGINTERVAL>],[SFBER=<SFBER>],[SDBER=<SDBER>],
[TIMACT=<TIMACT>],[TIMMODE=<TIMMODE>],[EXPTTISAPI=<EXPTTISAPI>],
[TTIOPER=<TTIOPER>],[EXPPT=<EXPPT>],[FTFLOPER=<FTFLOPER>],
[LCKEN=<LCKEN>],[NONINTRMON=<NONINTRMON>],
[LTCACTEN=<LTCACTEN>],[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],
[PLM2AIS=<PLM2AIS>],[MSIM2AIS=<MSIM2AIS>],[VCPLM2AIS=<VCPLM2AIS>],
[GCCTRANS=<GCCTRANS>],[RESTRANS=<RESTRANS>],[RATETOL=<RATETOL>]:
[<PST>];
Command Parameters
Parameter Default
s Description Value
<ODUN> The valid values are NA

ODU0,ODU1,ODU2,ODU5G,ODU3,ODU4 and ODUflex.

l FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>
l FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>-<CHANNEL ID>
ODUN.
<TYPE> ODU2 and ODU3 have a standard mode and a high-speed The default
mode. This parameter is only valid for ODU2 and ODU3. The value varies
valid values are as follows: with different
l STD: indicates the standard mode; the rate is 10.7 Gbit/s units.
(ODU2) or 43 Gbit/s (ODU3).
l ODU2E: The bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s.
l ODU3E: The bit rate is 44 Gbit/s.
<SPEEDCH Indicates whether the rate of ODUN is variable. The valid NA

G> values are as follows:
l ENABLE: the rate of ODUN is variable.
l DISABLE: the rate of ODUN is fixed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Parameter Default
s Description Value
<ENCAP> Indicates the encapsulation mode. It is only valid for channels NA

where the encapsulation mode is configurable.
l ODU2: ODU2 cross-connection is configurable in this
channel.
l ODU2_TMUX_ODU1: ODU1 signals are encapsulated
into ODU2 signals, and the inner ODU1 cross-connection
is configurable in this channel.
l ODU1_TMUX_ODU0: ODU0 signals are encapsulated
into ODU1 signals, and the inner ODU0 cross-connection
is configurable in this channel.
l ODU3_TMUX: ODU1 and ODU2 signals are
encapsulated into ODU3 signals. The inner ODU1 and
ODU2 cross-connections are configurable in this channel.
l ODU3: ODU3 cross-connection is configurable in this
channel.
l AUTO: AUTO mode
<BIP8MOD Indicates the BIP8 error detection mode of an OTN. The valid The default
E> values are as follows: value varies
l POISSON with different
units.
l BURST
<DEGTH> Indicates the SD threshold for bit errors in BURST mode. This ODU0:3050
parameter is valid only when <BIP8MODE> is set to BURST. ODU1: 6126
The value ranges are as follows: ODU5G:
l ODU0: 1-10167 12303
l ODU1: 1-20420 ODU2:
l ODU5G: 1-41012 24607
l ODU2: 1-82025 ODU3:
98847
l ODU3: 1-329491
ODU4:
l ODU4: 1-856387 256916
l ODUFLEX: For ODUFlex (N = 1), the DEG value range
is the same as that of ODU0; for ODUFlex (N = 2), the
maximum DEG threshold is 2 x ODU0 maximum
threshold. For ODUFlex (N = [3,7]), the maximum DEG
threshold is (N – 0.5) x ODU0 maximum threshold.
<DEGTIM Indicates the DEG detection time expressed in seconds. This 7

E> parameter is valid only when <BIP8MODE> is set to BURST.
<DEGINTE Indicates the DEG detection time. Valid values include 10 ms, 1000 ms
RVAL> 100 ms, and 1000 ms.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Parameter Default
s Description Value
<SFBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN ODUk PM BIP-8 SFBER on 1E-3

a facility. This parameter is valid only when <BIP8MODE>
is set to POISSON.
<SDBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN ODUk PM BIP-8 SDBER on 1E-6

a facility. This parameter is valid only when <BIP8MODE>
is set to POISSON.
<TIMACT> Indicates whether the reporting of the after-TIM response is DISABLE

enabled. The valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<TIMMOD Indicates the TIM detection mode. OFF

E> The valid values are as follows:
l SAPI: Only the source access point identifier (SAPI) of
the TTI received is compared with that of the TTI to be
received.
l DAPI: Only the DAPI of the TTI received is compared
with that of the TTI to be received.
l BOTH: The SAPI and DAPI of the TTI received are
compared with those of the TTI to be received.
<EXPTTIS Indicates the expected TTI SAPI string. NULL

API> The TTI is defined by ITU-T G.709 as a 64-byte string and
contains SAPI, DAPI, and OPER.
<EXPTTID Indicates the expected TTI DAPI string. NULL

API> The TTI is defined by ITU-T G.709 as a 64-byte string and
DAPI: maximum 15-character destination access point
identifier.

The TTI is defined by ITU-T G.709 as a 64-byte string and

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Parameter Default
s Description Value

The TTI is defined by ITU-T G.709 as a 64-byte string and
identifier.
<TTIOPER Indicates the TTI OPER string to be transmitted. NULL

> The TTI is defined by ITU-T G.709 as a 64-byte string and
<EXPPT> Indicates the expected PT byte. The value is a Hexagonal NA

integera with single byte. Some of the values are defined in
the OTN specifications as follows.
0x01: Experimental mapping
0x02: Asynchronous CBR mapping
0x03: Bit synchronous CBR mapping
0x04: ATM mapping
0x05: GFP mapping
0x06: Virtual Concatenated signal
0x07: PCS codeword transparent Ethernet mapping
0x08: FC-1200 into OPU2e mapping
0x09: GFP mapping into Extended OPU2 payload
0x0A: STM-1 mapping into OPU0
0x0B: STM-4 mapping into OPU0
0x0C: FC-100 mapping into OPU0
0x0D: FC-200 mapping into OPU1
0x0E: FC-400 mapping into OPUflex
0x0F: FC-800 mapping into OPUflex
0x10: Bit stream with octet timing mapping
0x11: Bit stream without octet timing mapping
0x20: ODU multiplex structure supporting ODTUjk only
0x21: ODU multiplex structure supporting ODTUk.ts or
ODTUk.ts and ODTUjk
0xFD: NULL test signal mapping
0xFE: PRBS test signal mapping
<FTFLOPE Indicates the operator-specific field that contains the fault type NA
R> and fault location information. It is a string with no more than
118 bytes.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Parameter Default
s Description Value
<LCKEN> Indicates whether maintenance signal insertion is enabled. DISABLE

l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<NONINT Indicates whether non-intrusive monitoring is enabled. The DISABLE

RMON> valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<LTCACT Indicates whether the reporting of the after-LTC response is DISABLE

EN> enabled. The valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<DELAYTI This parameter is only valid for the channels in an SNCP NA

ME> group.
Indicates the delay time. It is an integer ranging from 0 to 100,
which is expressed in 0.1 seconds.
configured. Switching is not initiated until the delay time is
expended when a malfunction is discovered at a port.
configured.
<PLM2AIS Indicates whether PLM-triggered AIS insertion is enabled. DISABLE

> The valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<MSIM2AI Indicates whether MSIM-triggered AIS insertion is enabled. DISABLE

S> The valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<VCPLM2 Indicates whether VCPLM-triggered AIS insertion is enabled. DISABLE

AIS> The valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Parameter Default
s Description Value
<GCCTRA Indicates whether GCC1/2 is transparently transmitted with N

NS> service cross-connections. It is applicable only to ODU2
services. The valid values are as follows:
l Y: GCC1/2 is transparently transmitted with service cross-
connections. GCC1/2 cannot be used for IP
communication.
l N: GCC1/2 is not transparently transmitted with service
cross-connections. GCC1/2 can be used for inter-NE
communication. In the GCC management command, the
number of the channel corresponding to GCC1/2 is 2.
l GCC1: GCC1 is transparently transmitted with service
cross-connections. GCC1 cannot be used for IP
communication.
l GCC2: GCC2 is transparently transmitted with service
cross-connections. GCC2 cannot be used for IP
communication.
<RESTRA Indicates whether the reserved overhead byte is transparently N

NS> transmitted with service cross-connections. It is applicable
only to ODU2 services. The valid values are as follows:
l Y: The reserved overhead byte is transparently transmitted
with service cross-connections. The reserved overhead
byte cannot be used for IP communication.
l N: The reserved overhead byte is not transparently
transmitted with service cross-connections. The reserved
overhead byte can be used for inter-NE communication.
In the GCC management command, the number of the
channel corresponding to the reserved overhead byte is 3.
<RATETO Indicates the frequency deviation of an ODUflex channel, in NA

L> the range of 0 ppm to 100 ppm.
<PST> Indicates the status of the primary state qualifier. The valid NA
values are IS and OOS.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-ODU1::CLNT-1-1-1-1:100:::BIP8MODE=POISSON;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2008-06-01 10:30:18 M 100 COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.14.2 RTRV-<ODUN>
A.14.2 RTRV-<ODUN>
Retrieves the attributes of the ODUn logical facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the ODUn logical facility.
Usage Note
ODUn includes ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU5G, ODU3, ODU4 and ODUflex.
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-<ODUN>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<ODUN> The valid values are ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, NA

ODU5G, ODU3, ODU4 and ODUflex.

l FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<PORT ID>
l FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT
ID>-<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL ID>
For the valid values of the specific units, refer to
A.32.2.23 ODUN.
Response Syntax
[TYPE=<TYPE>],[SPEEDCHG=<SPEEDCHG>],[ENCAP=<ENCAP>],[BIP8MODE=<BIP8MODE>],
[DEGTH=<DEGTH>],[DEGTIME=<DEGTIME>],[DEGINTERVAL=<DEGINTERVAL>],[SFBER=<SFBER>],
[SDBER=<SDBER>],[TIMACT=<TIMACT>],[TIMMODE=<TIMMODE>],[EXPTTISAPI=<EXPTTISAPI>],

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
[TTIOPER=<TTIOPER>],[INCTTISAPI=<INCTTISAPI>],[INCTTIDAPI=<INCTTIDAPI>],
[INCTTIOPER=<INCTTIOPER>],[EXPPT=<EXPPT>],[INCPT=<INCPT>],[EXPVCPT=<EXPVCPT>],
[INCVCPT=<INCVCPT>],[FTFLOPER=<FTFLOPER>],[INCFWFT=<INCFWFT>],[INCFWOI=<INCFWOI>],
[INCFWOPER=<INCFWOPER>],[INCBWFT=<INCBWFT>],[INCBWOI=<INCBWOI>],
[INCBWOPER=<INCBWOPER>],[LCKEN=<LCKEN>],[NONINTRMON=<NONINTRMON>],
[DELAYTIME=<DELAYTIME>],[SWITCHSTATE=<SWITCHSTATE>],[PLM2AIS=<PLM2AIS>],
[MSIM2AIS=<MSIM2AIS>],[VCPLM2AIS=<VCPLM2AIS>],[GCCTRANS=<GCCTRANS>],
[RESTRANS=<RESTRANS>],[TS=<TS>],[RATETOL=<RATETOL>]:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters

l FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
l FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<CHANNEL ID>
<TYPE> ODU2 and ODU3 have a standard mode and a high-speed mode. This
parameter is only valid for ODU2 and ODU3.
l STD: indicates standard mode; the bit rate is 10.7 Gbit/s (ODU2)
or 43 Gbit/s (ODU3).
l ODU2E: The bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s.
l ODU3E: The bit rate is 44 Gbit/s.
<SPEEDCHG> Indicates whether the rate of ODUN is variable. The valid values are
as follows:
l ENABLE: the rate of ODUN is variable.
l DISABLE: the rate of ODUN is fixed.
<ENCAP> Indicates the encapsulation mode. It is only valid for channels where
the encapsulation mode is configurable.
l ODU2: ODU2 cross-connection is configurable on this channel.
l ODU2_TMUX_ODU1: ODU1 signals are encapsulated into
ODU2 signals, and the inner ODU1 cross-connection is
configurable on this channel.
l ODU1_TMUX_ODU0: ODU0 signals are encapsulated into
ODU1 signals, and the inner ODU0 cross-connection is
l ODU3_TMUX: ODU1 and ODU2 signals are encapsulated into
ODU3 signals. The inner ODU1 and ODU2 cross-connections are
l ODU3: ODU3 cross-connection is configurable on this channel.
l AUTO: AUTO mode
<BIP8MODE> Indicates the BIP8 error detection mode of an OTN. The valid values
are as follows:
l POISSON
l BURST

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<DEGTH> Indicates the signal degrade (SF) threshold for bit errors in BURST
mode. This parameter is only valid when the BIP8MODE is set to
BURST.
The value ranges are as follows:
l ODU0: 1-10167
l ODU1: 1-20420
l ODU5G: 1-41012
l ODU2: 1-82025
l ODU3: 1-329491
l ODU4: 1-856387
l ODUFLEX: For ODUFlex (N = 1), the DEG value range is the
same as that of ODU0; for ODUFlex (N = 2), the maximum DEG
threshold is 2 x ODU0 maximum threshold. For ODUFlex (N =
[3,7]), the maximum DEG threshold is (N – 0.5) x ODU0 maximum
threshold.
<DEGTIME> Indicates the DEG detection time expressed in seconds. This parameter
is valid only when BIP8MODE is set to BURST.
The value range is 1-10.
<DEGINTERVAL Indicates the DEG detection time. Valid values include 10 ms, 100 ms,
> and 1000 ms.
<SFBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN ODUk PM BIP-8 SFBER on a facility.

This parameter is valid only when BIP8MODE is set to POISSON.
<SDBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN ODUk PM BIP-8 SDBER on a facility.


l ENABLE
l DISABLE


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A





INCTTISAPI Indicates the incoming TTI SAPI string.

SAPI: SAPI: maximum 15-character source access point identifier.
INCTTIDAPI Indicates the incoming TTI DAPI string.

DAPI: maximum 15-character destination access point identifier
INCTTIOPER Indicates the incoming TTI OPER string.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<EXPPT> Indicates the expected PT byte. The value is Hexagonal integera with
single byte. Some of the values are defined in the OTN specifications
as follows.
0x01: Experimental mapping
0x02: Asynchronous CBR mapping
0x03: Bit synchronous CBR mapping
0x04: ATM mapping
0x05: GFP mapping
0x06: Virtual Concatenated signal
0x07: PCS codeword transparent Ethernet mapping
0x08: FC-1200 into OPU2e mapping
0x09: GFP mapping into Extended OPU2 payload
0x0A: STM-1 mapping into OPU0
0x0B: STM-4 mapping into OPU0
0x0C: FC-100 mapping into OPU0
0x0D: FC-200 mapping into OPU1
0x0E: FC-400 mapping into OPUflex
0x0F: FC-800 mapping into OPUflex
0x10: Bit stream with octet timing mapping
0x11: Bit stream without octet timing mapping
0x20: ODU multiplex structure supporting ODTUjk only
0x21: ODU multiplex structure supporting ODTUk.ts or ODTUk.ts
and ODTUjk
0xFD: NULL test signal mapping
0xFE: PRBS test signal mapping
<INCPT> Indicates the incoming PT byte. The value is a Hexagonal integera with
single byte, the meaning of each parameter is the same with the
<EXPPT>.
<EXPVCPT> Indicates the expected virtual concatenation PT byte. This parameter

is only valid for the virtually concatenated ODU channels.
<INCVCPT> Indicates the incoming PT byte. This parameter is only valid for the
virtually concatenated ODU channels.
<FTFLOPER> Indicates the operator-specific field that contains the fault type and
fault location information.
<INCFWFT> Indicates the incoming forward fault type of FTFL.

l NORMAL: 0x0
l SF: 0x1
l SD: 0x2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<INCFWOI> Indicates the incoming forward operator identifier field of FTFL.

It consists of two sub-fields: CC and NSC.
<INCFWOPER> Indicates the incoming forward operator-specific field of FTFL.
<INCBWFT> Indicates the incoming backward fault type of FTFL.

l NORMAL: 0x0
l SF: 0x1
l SD: 0x2
<INCBWOI> Indicates the incoming backward operator identifier field of FTFL.

It consists of two sub-fields: CC and NSC.
<INCBWOPER> Indicates the incoming backward operator-specific field of FTFL.
<LCKEN> Indicates whether maintenance signal insertion is enabled. The valid

l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<NONINTRMON> Indicates whether non-intrusive monitoring is enabled. The valid

l ENABLE
l DISABLE
SWITCHSTATE.
<PLM2AIS> Indicates whether PLM-triggered AIS insertion is enabled. The valid

l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<MSIM2AIS> Indicates whether MSIM-triggered AIS insertion is enabled. The valid

l ENABLE
l DISABLE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<VCPLM2AIS> Indicates whether VCPLM-triggered AIS insertion is enabled. The

l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<GCCTRANS> Indicates whether GCC1/2 is transparently transmitted with service

cross-connections. It is applicable only to ODU2 services. The valid
l Y: GCC1/2 is transparently transmitted with service cross-
connections. GCC1/2 cannot be used for IP communication.
l N: GCC1/2 is not transparently transmitted with service cross-
connections. GCC1/2 can be used for inter-NE communication. In
the GCC management command, the number of the channel
corresponding to GCC1/2 is 2.
l GCC1: GCC1 is transparently transmitted with service cross-
connections. GCC1 cannot be used for IP communication.
l GCC2: GCC2 is transparently transmitted with service cross-
connections. GCC2 cannot be used for IP communication.
<RESTRANS> Indicates whether the reserved overhead byte is transparently

transmitted with service cross-connections. It is applicable only to
ODU2 services. The valid values are as follows:
l Y: The reserved overhead byte is transparently transmitted with
service cross-connections. The reserved overhead byte cannot be
used for IP communication.
l N: The reserved overhead byte is not transparently transmitted with
service cross-connections. The reserved overhead byte can be used
for inter-NE communication. In the GCC management command,
the number of the channel corresponding to the reserved overhead
byte is 3.
<RATETOL> Indicates the frequency deviation of an ODUflex channel, in the range

of 0 ppm to 100 ppm.
<TS> Indicates the bandwidth occupied by the ODUflex service when the
ODUflex service is configured on this channel. This parameter is
invalid when other services or no service is configured on this channel.
IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-ODU1::CLNT-1-8-1:C;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2008-11-01 09:21:21 M C COMPLD

"CLNT-1-8-1::BIP8MODE=POISSON,SFBER=1E-3,SDBER=1E-6,TIMACT=DISABLE,TIMMODE=OFF,EXP
TTISAPI=\"\",EXPTTIDAPI=\"\",TTISAPI=\"\",TTIDAPI=\"\",TTIOPER=\"\",FTFLOPER=
\"\",LCKEN=DISABLE,PLM2AIS=DISABLE,:OOS-AU,SGEO" ;
Related Commands
A.14.1 ED-<ODUN>
A.14.3 ED-<OTUN>
Edits the attributes of OTUn logical facility.
Function
This command edits the attributes of the OTUn.
Usage Note
OTUn includes OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU5G and OTU4.
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-<OTUN>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[AUTOADAPT=<AUTOADAPT>],
[FEC=<FEC>],[BEFECSDBER=<BEFECSDBER>],[TYPE=<TYPE>],
[BIP8MODE=<BIP8MODE>],[DEGTH=<DEGTH>],[DEGTIME=<DEGTIME>],
[TTIOPER=<TTIOPER>]:[<PST>];
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> The valid formats are as follows. NA

Refer to A.32.2.22 OTUN for the valid values of

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<AUTOADAPT> Indicates whether a port is operating in auto-sensing Y

mode. This parameter is only valid for ports on
regeneration cards. The valid values are Y and N.
l Y: The port is operating in auto-sensing mode.
l N: The port is operating in manual mode.
<FEC> Indicates the forward error correction (FEC). The valid The default
values are as follows: value varies
l OFF: indicates that FEC is disabled. with the
different
l STDFEC: indicates that standard FEC is enabled. units.
l AFEC: indicates that advanced FEC is enabled.
l AUTO: Automatically detects the FEC mode.
l HFEC: indicates that High performance FEC is
enabled.
<BEFECSDBER> Indicates the signal degrade (SD) threshold before For standard
FEC. The valid value ranges from 1E-12 to 1E-1. FEC, the
default value
is 1E-6. For
advanced
FEC, the
default value
is 1E-4. For
high
performance
FEC, the
default value
is 8.5E-4.
<TYPE> OTU2 and OTU3 have a standard and high-speed STD

mode. This parameter is only valid for OTU2 and
OTU3. The valid values are as follows:
l STD: indicates standard mode; the bit rate is 10.7
Gbit/s (OTU2) or 43 Gbit/s (OTU3).
l OTU2E: The bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s.
l OTU3E: The bit rate is 44 Gbit/s.
<BIP8MODE> Indicates the BIP8 error detection mode of an OTN. The default
The valid values are as follows: value varies
l POISSON with the
different
l BURST units.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<DEGTH> Indicates the SD threshold for bit errors in BURST OTU1: 6126
mode. This parameter is only valid when BIP8MODE OTU5G:
is set to BURST. The valid values are as follows: 12303
l OTU1: 1-20420 OTU2:
l OTU5G: 1-41012 24607
l OTU2: 1-82025 OTU3:
98847
l OTU3: 1-329491
OTU4:
l OTU4: 1-856387 256916
<DEGTIME> Indicates the DEG detection time expressed in 7

seconds. This parameter is only valid when
BIP8MODE is set to BURST.
<DEGINTERVAL Indicates the DEG detection time window. Valid 1000 ms

> values include 10 ms, 100 ms, and 1000 ms.
<SFBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN OTUk SM BIP-8 1E-3

SFBER on a facility. This parameter is valid only when
BIP8MODE is set to POISSON.
<SDBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN OTUk SM BIP-8 1E-6

SDBER on a facility. This parameter is valid only when
<TIMACT> Indicates whether the TIM subsequent response is DISABLE

l ENABLE
l DISABLE

l SAPI: Only the SAPI of the TTI received is
l BOTH: The SAPI and DAPI of the TTI received
are compared with that of the TTI to be received.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default

The TTI is defined by ITU-T G.709 as a 64-byte string
and contains SAPI, DAPI, and OPER.
identifier.

identifier.
<TTISAPI> Indicates the TTI SAPI string to be transmitted NULL

identifier.

identifier.


Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-OTU1::CLNT-1-1-1:100:::FEC=OFF;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18 M 100 COMPLD ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.14.4 RTRV-<OTUN>
A.14.4 RTRV-<OTUN>
Retrieves the attributes of the OTUn logical facility.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the OTUn logical facility.
Usage Note
OTUn includes OTU1,OTU2,OTU3,OTU5G and OTU4.
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-<OTUN>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

A.32.2.22 OTUN for the valid values of <AID> for
specific units.
Response Syntax
^^^"<AID>::AUTOADAPT=<AUTOADAPT>,FEC=<FEC>,BEFECSDBER=<BEFECSDBER>,TYPE=<TYPE>,BIP
8MODE=<BIP8MODE>,DEGTH=<DEGTH>,DEGTIME=<DEGTIME>,DEGINTERVAL=<DEGINTERVAL>,SFBER=<
SFBER>,SDBER=<SDBER>,TIMACT=<TIMACT>,TIMMODE=<TIMMODE>,EXPTTISAPI=<EXPTTISAPI>,EXP
TTIDAPI=<EXPTTIDAPI>,TTISAPI=<TTISAPI>,TTIDAPI=<TTIDAPI>,TTIOPER=<TTIOPER>,INCTTIS
API=<INCTTISAPI>,INCTTIDAPI=<INCTTIDAPI>,INCTTIOPER=<INCTTIOPER>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><
lf> ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters

<AUTOADAPT> Indicates whether a port is operating in auto-sensing mode. This

parameter is only valid for ports on regeneration cards. The valid
l Y: The port is operating in auto-sensing mode.
l N: The port is operating in manual mode.
<FEC> Indicates the forward error correction. It is either disabled or enabled

in standard or enhanced mode. The valid values are as follows:
l AFEC: indicates that advanced FEC is enabled.
l OFF: indicates that FEC is disabled.
l STDFEC: indicates that standard FEC is enabled.
l AUTO: Automatically detects the FEC mode.
l HFEC: indicates that High performance FEC is enabled.
<BEFECSDBER> Indicates the SD threshold before FEC. The valid value ranges from
1E-12 to 1E-1.
the default value is 1E-4 when <FEC> is set to AFEC, 1E-6 when
<FEC> is set to STDFEC, 8.5E-4 when <FEC> is set to HFEC.
<TYPE> OTU2 and OTU3 have a standard and high-speed mode. This
parameter is only valid for OTU2 and OTU3.
l STD: indicates the standard mode; the bit rate is 10.7 Gbit/s (OTU2)
or 43 Gbit/s (OTU3).
l OTU2E: The bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s.
l OTU3E: The bit rate is 44 Gbit/s.
<BIP8MODE> Indicates the BIP8 error detection mode of an OTN. The valid values
are as follows:
l POISSON
l BURST
<DEGTH> Indicates the SD threshold for bit errors in BURST mode. This
parameter is only valid when BIP8MODE is set to BURST.
l OTU1: 1-20420
l OTU5G: 1-41012
l OTU2: 1-82025
l OTU3: 1-329491
l OTU4: 1-856387

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
is only valid when BIP8MODE is set to BURST.
> and 1000 ms.
<SFBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN OTUk SM BIP-8 SFBER on a facility.

<SDBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN OTUk SM BIP-8 SDBER on a facility.


l ENABLE
l DISABLE

that of the TTI to be received.




OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A


SAPI, DAPI, and OPERR.
<INCTTISAPI> Indicates the incoming TTI SAPI string.

<INCTTIDAPI> Indicates the incoming TTI DAPI string.

<INCTTIOPER> Indicates the incoming TTI OPER string.

IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-OTU1::SRV1-1-6-1:D;
l Response Message
NE 2008-01-03 09:18:24 M D COMPLD
"SRV1-1-6-1::AUTOADAPT=Y,FEC=STDFEC,BEFECSDBER=1E-6,BIP8MODE=POISSON,DEGTH=3064,DE
GTIME=7,SFBER=1E-3,SDBER=1E-6,TIMACT=DISABLE,TIMMODE=OFF,EXPTTISAPI=
\"\",EXPTTIDAPI=\"\",TTISAPI=\"\",TTIDAPI=\"\",TTIOPER=\"\",:OOS-AU,SGEO" ;
Related Commands
A.14.3 ED-<OTUN>
A.14.5 ED-<TCMMOD2>
Edits the attributes of TCM.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command edits the attributes of the TCM.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-<TCMMOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[BIP8MODE=<BIP8MODE>],
[DEGTH=<DEGTH>],[DEGTIME=<DEGTIME>],
[TTIOPER=<TTIOPER>],[SRCEN=<SRCEN>],[SRCMODE=<SRCMODE>],
[SINKEN=<SINKEN>],[SINKMODE=<SINKMODE>],[LCKEN=<LCKEN>],
[NONINTRMON=<NONINTRMON>],[LTCACTEN=<LTCACTEN>]:[<PST>];
Command Parameters
Default
<TCMMOD2> The valid values are as follows: NA

l ODU1TCM1-ODU1TCM6
l ODU2TCM1-ODU2TCM6
l ODU3TCM1-ODU3TCM6
l ODU5GTCM1-ODU5GTCM6
l ODU0TCM1-ODU0TCM6

l FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>
Refer to A.32.2.23 ODUN for the valid values of <AID>
for specific units.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<BIP8MODE> Indicates the BIP8 error detection mode of an OTN. The The default
valid values are as follows: value varies
l POISSON with the
different
l BURST units.
<DEGTH> Indicates the SD threshold for bit errors in BURST mode. ODU1TCM
This parameter is only valid when BIP8MODE is set to i: 6126
BURST. ODU5GTC
The value ranges are as follows: Mi: 12303
l ODU1TCMi: 1-20420 ODU2TCM
i: 24607
l ODU5GTCMi: 1-41012
ODU3TCM
l ODU2TCMi: 1-82025
i: 98847
l ODU3TCMi: 1-329491 ODU0TCM
l ODU0TCMi: 1-10167 i: 1000
<DEGTIME> Indicates the DEG detection time expressed in seconds. 7

This parameter is only valid when BIP8MODE is set to
BURST.
<DEGINTERVA Indicates the DEG detection time. Valid values include 1000 ms
L> 10 ms, 100 ms, and 1000 ms.
<SFBER> The valid value ranges from 1E-5 to 1E-3. 1E-3
<SDBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN OTUk SM BIP-8 SDBER 1E-6

on a facility. This parameter is only valid when
<TIMACT> Indicates whether the reporting of the after-TIM response DISABLE

is enabled. The valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE

l SAPI: Only the SAPI of the TTI received is compared
with that of the TTI to be received.
l BOTH: The SAPI and DAPI of the TTI received are

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default

identifier.

identifier.

identifier.

identifier.

OPER: maximum 32-character, operator specific.
<SRCEN> Indicates whether the source is enabled. The valid values DISABLE
are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<SRCMODE> Indicates the source mode. The valid values are as TRAN
follows:
l OPER: operational
l TRAN: transparent
<SINKEN> Indicates whether the sink is enabled. The valid values DISABLE
are as follows:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<SINKMODE> Indicates the sink mode. The valid values are as follows: TRAN
l OPER: operational
l MON: monitoring
l TRAN: transparent
<LCKEN> Indicates whether maintenance signal insertion is DISABLE

l ENABLE
l DISABLE
<NONINTRMO Indicates whether non-intrusive monitoring is enabled. DISABLE

N> The valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE: enabled
l DISABLE: disabled
<LTCACTEN> Indicates whether the reporting of the after-LTC response DISABLE

is enabled. The valid values are as follows:
l ENABLE: enabled
l DISABLE: disabled

Response Syntax
Example
l Command
ED-ODU1TCM1::CLNT-1-1-1:C:::LTCACTEN=ENABLE;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18 M C COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.14.6 RTRV-<TCMMOD2>
A.14.6 RTRV-<TCMMOD2>
Retrieves the attributes of the TCM.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the TCM.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-<TCMMOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Value
<TCMMOD2> The valid values are as follows: NA

l ODU1TCM1-ODU1TCM6
l ODU2TCM1-ODU2TCM6
l ODU3TCM1-ODU3TCM6
l ODU5GTCM1-ODU5GTCM6
l ODU0TCM1-ODU0TCM6

<PORT ID>
Refer to A.32.2.23 ODUN for the valid values of <AID>
for specific units.
Response Syntax
^^^"<AID>::BIP8MODE=<BIP8MODE>,DEGTH=<DEGTH>,DEGTIME=<DEGTIME>,DEGINTERVAL=<DEGINT
ERVAL>,SFBER=<SFBER>,SDBER=<SDBER>,TIMACT=<TIMACT>,TIMMODE=<TIMMODE>,EXPTTISAPI=<E
XPTTISAPI>,EXPTTIDAPI=<EXPTTIDAPI>,TTISAPI=<TTISAPI>,TTIDAPI=<TTIDAPI>,TTIOPER=<TT
IOPER>,INCTTISAPI=<INCTTISAPI>,INCTTIDAPI=<INCTTIDAPI>,INCTTIOPER=<INCTTIOPER>,SRC
EN=<SRCEN>,SRCMODE=<SRCMODE>,SINKEN=<SINKEN>,SINKMODE=<SINKMODE>,LCKEN=<LCKEN>,NON
INTRMON=<NONINTRMON>,LTCACTEN=<LTCACTEN>:<PST>,<SST>"<cr><lf>+ ;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters

l FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>
l FAC/CLNT/SRVN-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<CHANNEL ID>
<BIP8MODE> Indicates the BIP8 error detection mode of an OTN.
<DEGTH> Indicates the SD threshold for bit errors in BURST mode. This
parameter is only valid when BIP8MODE is set to BURST.
is only valid when BIP8MODE is set to BURST.
> and 1000 ms.
<SFBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN OTUk SM BIP-8 SFBER on a facility.

This parameter is only valid when BIP8MODE is set to POISSON.
<SDBER> Indicates the threshold of OTN OTUk SM BIP-8 SDBER on a facility.

This parameter is only valid when BIP8MODE is set to POISSON.




OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A



<INCTTISAPI> Indicates the incoming TTI SAPI string.

<INCTTIDAPI> Indicates the incoming TTI DAPI string.

<INCTTIOPER> Indicates the incoming TTI OPER string.

<SRCEN> Indicates whether the source is enabled.
<SRCMODE> Indicates the source mode. The valid values are as follows:
l OPER: operational
l TRAN: transparent
<SINKEN> Indicates whether the sink is enabled.
<SINKMODE> Indicates the sink mode. The valid values are as follows:
l OPER: operational
l MON: monitoring
l TRAN: transparent
<LCKEN> Indicates whether maintenance signal insertion is enabled.The valid

values are ENABLE and DISABLE
<NONINTRMON> Indicates whether non-intrusive monitoring is enabled.The valid

values are ENABLE and DISABLE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LTCACTEN> Indicates whether the reporting of the after-LTC response is

enabled.The valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE
IS and OOS.
Example
l Command
RTRV-ODU1TCM1::SRV1-1-7-1:C;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 2008-09-03 08:41:25 M C COMPLD
"SRV1-1-7-1::BIP8MODE=POISSON,SFBER=1E-3,SDBER=1E-6,TIMACT=DISABLE,TIMMODE=OFF,EXP
TTISAPI=\"\",EXPTTIDAPI=\"\",TTISAPI=\"\",TTIDAPI=\"\",TTIOPER=\"\",INCTTISAPI=
\" \",INCTTIDAPI=\" \",INCTTIOPER=
\"
\",SRCEN=DISABLE,SRCMODE=TRAN,SINKEN=DISABLE,SINKMODE=TRAN,LCKEN=DISABLE,NONINTRMO
N=DISABLE,LTCACTEN=DISABLE:IS-NR" ;
Related Commands
A.14.5 ED-<TCMMOD2>
A.15 Automatic Optical Power Management

This section lists the commands used to configure all types of the automatic optic power
management functions that system supports.
A.15.1 Configuring Intelligent Power Adjustment (IPA)

This section lists the commands used to configure the IPA function.
A.15.1.1 ENT-IPA
Creates an IPA group.
Function
This command creates an IPA group.
Usage Note
An error message will be returned when an existing IPA group is entered.
Category
IPA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-IPA:[<TID>]:<DECT>,<OPRT>:<CTAG>:::[BAND=<BAND>]
[,RAMANTID=<RAMANTID>,RAMANBID =<RAMANBID>];
Command Parameters
Default
<DECT> Indicates the detection unit. NA

ID> or NULL.
The valid value is provided in A.32.2.13 IPA.
<OPRT> Indicates the control implementation unit. NA

ID>.
<BAND> Indicates the band type of a line. The only available value CBAND
for this parameter is CBAND.
<RAMANT Indicates the name of the NE TID in which the Raman unit NA
ID> lies.
characters which is composed of letters, digits and hyphens.
The string should begin with a letter and cannot end with a
hyphen.
<RAMANB Indicates the card ID of the Raman unit. NULL

ID> The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ENT-IPA::FAC-1-1-1,FAC-1-5-2:C:::BAND=CBAND;
l Response Message
NE 2005-11-02 09:48:24
M C COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.15.1.2 ED-IPA
A.15.1.4 RTRV-IPA
A.15.1.3 DLT-IPA
A.15.1.2 ED-IPA
Edits an IPA group.
Function
This command edits the control attributes of an IPA group.
Usage Note
None
Category
IPA
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-IPA:[<TID>]:<DECT>,<OPRT>:<CTAG>:::[RESTART=<RESTART>]
[,LSROFF=<LSROFF>][,LSRON=<LSRON>][,TESTTM=<TESTTM>]
[,RXLOSTH=<RXLOSTH>][,SAFE=<SAFE>][,RSPULSE=<RSPULSE>]
[,RMNALMFLAG=<RMNALMFLAG>][,ENABLE=<ENABLE>]
[,ROPOPRT=<ROPOPRT>][,RAMANOPRT=<RAMANOPRT>];
Command Parameters
Default

<PORT ID> or NULL. Refer to A.32.2.13 IPA for the valid
values.

<PORT ID>. Refer to A.32.2.13 IPA for the valid values.
<OPRT> must be entered.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<RESTART Indicates the restart mode. The valid values are as follows: MAN
> l MAN: restarts the laser switch manually.
l AUTO: restarts the laser switch automatically.
<LSROFF> Indicates the duration of laser shutdown. 100

Range: 100-300 (units in seconds).
<LSRON> Indicates the duration of laser turn-on. 3.00

Range: 1.75-45.00 (units in seconds).
<TESTTM> Indicates the time the laser switch is held on when the test 80
mode is active..
<RXLOSTH The card detects the input optical power of the Raman card. -30.0
> If the optical power is less than the <RXLOSTH>, a LOS
event is reported to the SCC card. The SCC card determines
whether to enable the IPA function.
Range: -35.0 to -14.0 (unit is 1.0 dBm).
NOTE
After the detection card is configured with a Raman card, the LOS
threshold changes. The LOS threshold with a single wavelength is
different from one with multiple wavelengths. Hence, the LOS
threshold should be set according to the actual situation of the
network.
<SAFE> Uses the safe-level power when users open the laser switch. N
Sets the security control mode of the IPA. The IPA security
switch is set to meet the requirements for long-distance
networking. Do not restrain the output optical power to a
very low value.
l When the security control switch is shut down, it
indicates that the IPA is restarted, and all the optical
power detection cards are enabled.
l When the security control switch is open, it indicates
that the IPA is restarted, and the optical power is
restrained to less than 10 dBm.
<RSPULSE> Indicates whether to use a restart pulse when the timer or Y

command requires opening the laser switch.
Sets the timing pulse restart switch.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<RMNALM Enables the detecting function of the IPA pair. N

FLAG> The valid values are Y and N.
NOTE
The <RMNALMFLAG> can be set only when the IPA function is
configured with the backward Raman amplifier. That is, the setting
of this parameter is prohibited when the forward Raman amplifier
is used and the parameter cannot be set when the ROP is used.
When <RMNALMFLAG> is set to Y, alarms of the Raman card
are set as trigger conditions for starting IPA. The Raman card acts
like a detection card.
<ENABLE> Indicates whether the IPA group is enabled. Y

<ROPOPRT Indicates the control ROP equipment unit. NULL

> The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
NULL means to delete the ROPOPRT.
The ROPOPRT will not be displayed if the IPA pair does
not set the ROPOPRT.
<RAMANO Indicates the control Raman equipment unit. NULL

PRT> The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
NULL means to delete the RAMANOPRT.
The RAMANOPRT will not be displayed if the IPA pair
does not set the RAMANOPRT parameter.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-IPA::FAC-1-1-1,FAC-1-2-2:C:::RESTART=AUTO,LSROFF=100,LSRON=40,SAFE=Y;
l Response Message
NE 2005-11-02 09:48:24
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.1.1 ENT-IPA
A.15.1.4 RTRV-IPA
A.15.1.3 DLT-IPA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.15.1.3 DLT-IPA
Deletes an IPA group.
Function
This command deletes an IPA group.
Usage Note
This command deletes all information about an IPA group including the ASTDECT.
When the communication between subracks fails and the IPA group has Raman parameters that
belong to another rack, this command does not delete the IPA parameters and returns a
communication failure.
Category
IPA
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-IPA:[<TID>]:<DECT>,<OPRT>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default

ID> or NULL. Refer to A.32.2.13 IPA for the valid values.

ID>. Refer to A.32.2.13 IPA for the valid values.
<OPRT> must be entered.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
DLT-IPA::FAC-1-1-1,FAC-1-2-2:C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.1.2 ED-IPA
A.15.1.4 RTRV-IPA
A.15.1.1 ENT-IPA
A.15.1.4 RTRV-IPA
Retrieves an IPA group.
Function
This command retrieves the control attributes of an IPA group.
Usage Note
If ALL is input for this parameter, all the IPA groups will be retrieved. If only DECT or OPRT
are entered, then this command will retrieve the related IPA group.
Category
IPA
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-IPA:[<TID>]:[<DECT>,<OPRT>]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default
DECT Indicates the detection unit. NA

<PORT ID> or NULL.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
OPRT Indicates the operation unit. NA

<PORT ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
(^^^"<DECT>,<OPRT>::BAND=<BAND>[,RAMANTID=<RAMANTID>]
[,RAMANBID=<RAMANBID>],RESTART=<RESTART>,LSROFF=<LSROFF>,LSRON=<LSRON>,TESTTM=<TES
TTM>,RXLOSTH=<RXLOSTH>,SAFE=<SAFE>,RSPULSE=<RSPULSE>
[,RMNALMFLAG=<RMNALMFLAG>],ENABLE=<ENABLE>,STATE=<STATE>")
;
Response Parameters
<DECT> Indicates the detection unit.

The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID> or
NULL.
<OPRT> Indicates the control implementation unit.

<BAND> Indicates the band type of the IPA group.
<RAMANTID> Indicates the name of the NE where the Raman unit is located. The
<RAMANTID> is string of less than or equal to 20 characters which
is composed of letters, digits and hyphens. The string should begin
with a letter and cannot end with a hyphen.
NOTE
This parameter is not displayed if the IPA pair is not configured with
<RAMANTID>.
<RAMANBID> Indicates the slot where the Raman unit is located. The valid format
is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
NOTE
This parameter is not displayed if the IPA pair is not configured with
<RAMANBID>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<RESTART> Indicates the restart mode.

l MAN: This mode restarts the laser switch manually. Execute the
OPR-IPA command. After the <LSROFF> period, the laser is
turned on to test whether the line becomes normal. If the line is
normal, IPA stops. If the line is abnormal, the laser shuts down
after On Period.
l AUTO: This mode restarts the laser switch automatically. The
control implementation card tests whether the line is recovered by
restarting the laser every <LSROFF> period. If the line is normal,
IPA stops. If the line remains abnormal, the laser shuts down after
the <LSRON> period. The previously mentioned operation is
repeated until the line becomes normal.
The default value is MAN.
<LSROFF> Indicates the duration of holding the laser switch off.

The default value is 100 seconds.
<LSRON> Indicates the time the laser switch is held on.

Range: 1.75-45.00 (units in seconds).
The default value is 3.00 seconds.
<TESTTM> Indicates the time the laser switch is held on when the test mode is
active.
<RXLOSTH> The card detects the input optical power of the Raman card. If the
optical power is less than the <RXLOSTH>, a LOS event is reported
to the SCC card. The SCC card determines whether to enable the IPA
function.
Range: -35.0 to -14.0 (unit is 1.0 dB). The default value is -30.0.
NOTE
After the detection card is configured with a Raman card, the LOS threshold
changes. The LOS threshold with a single wavelength is different from one
with multiple wavelengths. Hence, the LOS threshold should be set according
to the actual situation of the network.
<SAFE> Indicates whether a safe level power is used when a laser switch is
open.
The default value is N.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<RSPULSE> Indicates whether a restart pulse is used when the timer or a command
requires opening the laser switch.
The default value is Y.
NOTE
The RSPULSE value must be Y if the IPA pair does not set the OSC auxiliary
detection equipment.
<RMNALMFLAG> Indicates whether the detecting function of the IPA pair is enabled.
The valid values are Y or N. The default value is N.
NOTE
When <RMNALMFLAG> is set to Y, alarms of the Raman card are set as
trigger conditions for starting IPA. The Raman card acts like a detection card.
<ENABLE> Indicates whether the IPA group is enabled.

<STATE> Indicates the current state of an IPA group. The valid values are as
follows:
l END: A detection period has been completed.
l LSRON: The laser switch is open.
l LSROFF: The laser switch is closed.
l ALM: Alarms are present.
l RESTART: The IPA restarts.
l SAFEDECT: It indicates to perform detection in security mode.
l BEGIN: It indicates to wait to begin a new IPA control period.
<ROPOPRT> Indicates the control ROP equipment unit.

The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>. NULL means
to delete the ROPOPRT.
The ROPOPRT will not be displayed if the IPA pair does not set the
ROPOPRT.
<RAMANOPRT> Indicates the control Raman equipment unit.

The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>. NULL means
to delete the RAMANOPRT.
The RAMANOPRT will not be displayed if the IPA pair does not set
the RAMANOPRT parameter.
Example
l Command
RTRV-IPA:::C;
l Response Message
NE 2006-05-08 16:44:52
M C COMPLD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"FAC-1-11-1,FAC-1-3-4::BAND=CBAND,RESTART=AUTO,LSROFF=100,LSRON=2.00,TESTTM=80,SAF
E=N,RSPULSE=Y,ENABLE=Y,STATE=BEGIN"
"FAC-1-3-1,FAC-1-11-4::BAND=CBAND,RESTART=AUTO,LSROFF=100,LSRON=2.00,TESTTM=80,SAF
E=N,RSPULSE=Y,ENABLE=Y,STATE=BEGIN" ;
Related Commands
A.15.1.2 ED-IPA
A.15.1.1 ENT-IPA
A.15.1.3 DLT-IPA
A.15.1.5 ED-IPA-WDM
Edits the IPA attributes of a port.
Function
This command is used to edit the IPA attributes of a port.
Usage Note
None
Category
IPA
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-IPA-WDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[ENABLE=<ENABLE>]
[,RESTART=<RESTART>][,LSROFF=<LSROFF>];
Command Parameters
Default

The format is: FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>.
<ENABLE> Indicates whether to enable the IPA function. Y

The valid value is Y or N.
<RESTART Indicates the restart mode. AUTO

> l MAN: restarts the laser switch manually.
l AUTO: restarts the laser switch automatically.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<LSROFF> Indicates the duration of laser shutdown. 100

Range: 100-300 (unit in second).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-IPA-WDM::FAC-2-1-1:C100:::ENABLE=Y,RESTART=AUTO,LSROFF=100;
l Response Message
NE 05-01-01 00:00:00
M C100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.1.7 RTRV-IPA-WDM
A.15.1.6 OPR-IPA-WDM
Manually restarts port IPA.
Function
This command is used to manually restart port IPA.
Usage Note
None
Category
IPA
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
OPR-IPA-WDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default

ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
OPR-IPA-WDM::FAC-2-1-1:C100;
l Response Message
NE 05-01-01 00:00:00
M C100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.1.5 ED-IPA-WDM
Retrieves the IPA attributes of a port.
Function
This command is used to retrieve the IPA attributes of a port.
Usage Note
None
Category
IPA
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-IPA-WDM:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default

ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<ENABLE> Indicates whether the IPA function is enabled.

Range: Y|N.
<RESTART> Indicates the restart mode.

l MAN: This mode restarts the laser switch manually. Execute the
OPR-IPA-WDM command. After the <LSROFF> period, the
laser is turned on to test whether the line becomes normal. If the
line is normal, IPA stops. If the line is abnormal, the laser shuts
down after on period.
l AUTO: This mode restarts the laser switch automatically. The
control implementation board tests whether the line is recovered
by restarting the laser every <LSROFF> period. If the line is
normal, IPA stops. If the line remains abnormal, the laser shuts
down after the On period. The previously mentioned operation
is repeated until the line becomes normal.
The default value is AUTO.
<LSROFF> Indicates the duration of holding the laser switch off.

Range: 100-300 (unit in second).
Example
l Command
RTRV-IPA-WDM::FAC-2-1-1:C100;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 05-01-01 00:00:00
M C100 COMPLD
"FAC-2-1-1::ENABLE=Y,RESTART=AUTO,LSROFF=100";
Related Commands
A.15.1.5 ED-IPA-WDM
A.15.1.8 OPR-IPA
Operates an IPA group.
Function
This command is used to operate an IPA group.
If RESTART is set to AUTO, IPA automatically enables the laser periodically. When RESTART
is set to MAN, use this command to enable the laser manually.
This command can be used only when <RESTART> is set to MAN, <ENABLE> is set to Y,
and <STATE> is set to LSROFF.
Usage Note
None
Category
IPA
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
OPR-IPA:[<TID>]:<DECT>,<OPRT>:<CTAG>::<FLAG>;
Command Parameters

ID>-<PORT ID> or NULL. Refer to A.32.2.13
IPA for the valid values.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

ID>-<PORT ID>. Refer to A.32.2.13 IPA for the
valid values. <OPRT> must be entered.
<FLAG> Indicates the operation to be done. NA

TEST: restarts the IPA in test mode. The IPA test
is automatically started in the non-automatic
starting mode.
MAN: restarts the IPA in manual mode. The IPA is
manually started in non-automatic starting mode.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
OPR-IPA::FAC-1-1-1,FAC-1-2-2:C::TEST;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.1.2 ED-IPA
A.15.1.9 ENT-IPA-ASTDECT
Creates an auxiliary detection unit for an IPA group.
Function
This command creates an auxiliary detection unit for an IPA group.
Usage Note
One command creates only one ASTDECT unit. The maximum number of ASTDECT units is
4.
Category
IPA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-IPA-ASTDECT:[<TID>]:<DECT>,<OPRT>:<CTAG>::<ASTDECT>;
Command Parameters
Default


ID>. Refer to A.32.2.13 IPA for the valid values. <OPRT>
must be entered.
<ASTDEC Indicates the auxiliary detection unit. NA

T> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ENT-IPA-ASTDECT::FAC-1-4-1,FAC-1-1-2:C::FAC-1-2-1;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.1.11 RTRV-IPA-ASTDECT
A.15.1.10 DLT-IPA-ASTDECT
Deletes an auxiliary detection unit of an IPA group.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command deletes an auxiliary detection unit for an IPA group.
Usage Note
One command deletes only one ASTDECT unit.
Category
IPA
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-IPA-ASTDECT:[<TID>]:<DECT>,<OPRT>:<CTAG>::<ASTDECT>;
Command Parameters
Default

<PORT ID>.

<PORT ID>.
<ASTDECT> Indicates the auxiliary detection unit. NA

<PORT ID>.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
DLT-IPA-ASTDECT::FAC-1-1-1,FAC-1-2-2:C::FAC-1-6-1;
l Response Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves all auxiliary detection units of an IPA group.
Function
This command retrieves all auxiliary detection units of an IPA group.
Usage Note
None
Category
IPA
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-IPA-ASTDECT:[<TID>]:<DECT>,<OPRT>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Paramete Default
r Description Value
DECT Indicates the detection unit. NA

OPRT Indicates the control implementation unit. NA

ID>. Refer to A.32.2.13 IPA for the valid values. <OPRT>
must be entered.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
(^^^"<DECT>,<OPRT>::[<ASTDECT1>][,<ASTDECT2>][,< ASTDECT3>][,< ASTDECT4>]")

;
Response Parameters

NULL.

<ASTDECT1> Indicates the auxiliary detection unit.

This parameter is not displayed if nothing is entered.



Example
l Command
RTRV-IPA-ASTDECT::FAC-1-4-1,FAC-1-1-2:C;
l Response Message
NE 2008-11-22 14:18:50
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-4-1,FAC-1-1-2::FAC-1-2-1"
;
Related Commands
A.15.1.12 REPTÊVTÎPA
Reports an IPA group event.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This autonomous message is generated by an NE to inform the OS or maintenance personnel
about IPA information.
Usage Note
None
Category
IPA
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>^^^<rsphdr> <cr> <lf>
A^^<atag>^REPTÊVTÎPA <cr> <lf>
(^^^"[<DECT>,<OPRT>]:<EVENTID>" <cr> <lf>)+
;
Response Parameters

NULL. Refer to A.32.2.13 IPA for the valid values.

Refer to A.32.2.13 IPA for the valid values.
<EVENTID> The states of the event are as follows:

l START: A detection period has been started.
l END: A detection period has been completed.
l LSRON: The laser switch is open.
l LSROFF: The laser switch is closed.
l ABNSTOP: It indicates an abnormal stop.
l ENABLE: The IPA is enabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
None
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
A 1 REPT EVT IPA
"FAC-1-1-2,FAC-1-2-2:START"
;
Related Commands
None
A.15.2 Configuring Automatic Power Equilibrium (APE)

This section lists the commands used to configure the APE function.
A.15.2.1 ENT-APE
Creates an APE group.
Function
This command creates an APE group.
Usage Note
None
Category
APE
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-APE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[BAND=<BAND>][,ODDNE=<ODDNE>]
[,ODDBD=<ODDBD>][,EVENNE=<EVENNE>][,EVENBD=<EVENBD>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> Indicates the AID of the analyzer equipment, for example, the NA
port of an MCA.
ID>.
The valid value is provided in A.32.2.2 APE.
<BAND> Indicates the band type of the line. CBAND

Range: CBAND.
<ODDNE> Indicates the TID of the odd wave adjustment equipment. NULL
When the <ODDNE> is NULL, it indicates that the odd wave
adjustment equipment does not exit.
<ODDBD> Indicates the slot of the odd wave adjustment equipment. NA

The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>
<EVENNE> Indicates the TID of the even wave adjustment equipment. NULL
When the <EVENNE> is NULL, it indicates that the even
wave adjustment equipment does not exit.
<EVENBD> Indicates the slot of the even wave adjustment unit. NA

The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ENT-
APE::FAC-1-2-1:C:::BAND=CBAND,ODDNE=ShenZhen1,ODDBD=SLOT-1-2,EVENNE=ShenZhen2,EVEN
BD=SLOT-1-9;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.2.2 ED-APE
A.15.2.5 RTRV-APE
A.15.2.3 DLT-APE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.15.2.4 OPR-APE
A.15.2.2 ED-APE
Edits an APE group.
Function
This command edits the control attributes of an APE group.
Usage Note
None
Category
APE
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-APE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[AUTOADJ=<AUTOADJ>][,TH=<TH>];
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> Indicates the AID of the analyzer equipment, for example, NA

the port of an MCA.
<PORT ID>.
<AUTOADJ Indicates whether adjustment is automatically started N

> when an unbalanced output power event occurs.
<TH> Indicates the threshold of un-equilibrium. This is the 1.5

power threshold for the APE pair to report an unbalanced
power event.
Range: 0.5-3.0 (unit is 1.0 dBm).
Sets the threshold of un-equilibrium detection for path
power.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
;
Example
l Command
ED-APE::FAC-1-2-1:C:::AUTOADJ=Y,TH=2.0;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.2.5 RTRV-APE
A.15.2.3 DLT-APE
A.15.2.4 OPR-APE
A.15.2.1 ENT-APE
A.15.2.3 DLT-APE
Deletes an APE group.
Function
This command deletes an APE group.
Usage Note
None
Category
APE
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-APE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the AID of analyzer equipment, for example, NA

the port of an MCA.
<PORT ID>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-APE::FAC-1-2-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.2.2 ED-APE
A.15.2.5 RTRV-APE
A.15.2.4 OPR-APE
A.15.2.1 ENT-APE
A.15.2.4 OPR-APE
Operates an APE group.
Function
This command starts/stops the adjustment of an APE group.
Usage Note
None
Category
APE
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
OPR-APE:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<OPRT>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the AID of analyzer equipment, for example, NA

the port of an MCA.
<PORT ID>.
<OPRT> Indicates the operation to be performed. NA

l START: starts an adjustment period.
l STOP: stops an adjustment period.
l INITSTD: scans the optical power of channels, and
saves the optical power as the standard value.
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Example
l Command
OPR-APE::FAC-1-2-1:C::START;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.2.2 ED-APE
A.15.2.5 RTRV-APE
A.15.2.3 DLT-APE
A.15.2.1 ENT-APE
A.15.2.5 RTRV-APE
Retrieves an APE group.
Function
This command retrieves the control attributes of an APE group.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
APE
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-APE:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> Indicates the AID of an analyzer port, for example, the port NA
of an MCA.
<PORT ID>
When nothing is entered for this parameter, it indicates all
APE groups are retrieved.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
(^^^"<AID>::BAND=<BAND>[,ODDNE=<ODD_NEID>][,ODDBD=<ODDBD>][,EVENNE=<EVENNE>]
[,EVENBD=<EVENBD>],AUTOADJ=<AUTOADJ>,TH=<TH>,STATE=<STATE>"<cr><lf>)+
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the AID of an analyzer port, for example, the port of an
MCA.
<BAND> Indicates the band type of a line.
<ODDNE> Indicates the TID of an odd wave adjustment unit.
<ODDBD> Indicates the slot ID of an odd wave adjustment unit.
<EVENNE> Indicates the TID of an even wave adjustment unit.
<EVENBD> Indicates the slot ID of an even wave adjustment unit.
<AUTOADJ> Indicates whether adjustment is automatically started when an

unbalanced output power event occurs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TH> Indicates the threshold of un-equilibrium. This is the power threshold

for the APE pair to report an unbalanced power event.
Range: 0.5-3.0 (unit is 1.0 dBm).
<STATE> Indicates the state of an APE pair. The valid values are as follows:
l NORMAL: The pair is in the normal state.
l ABNORMAL: The pair detects that the waves are in a state of un-
equilibrium.
l ADJUSTING: The APE pair is adjusting the waves for pre-
equilibrium.
l PREV_ADJUSTING: The upstream pair is adjusting the waves
for pre-equilibrium.
Example
l Command
RTRV-APE:::C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-12-1::BAND=CBAND,ODDNE=SHENZHEN1,ODDBD=SLOT-2,EVENNE=SHENZHEN2,EVENBD=SLOT-
9,AUTOADJ=Y,TH=1.5,STATE=NORMAL"
"FAC-1-12-4::BAND=CBAND,ODDNE=SHENZHEN10,ODDBD=SLOT-3,EVENNE=SHENZHEN20,EVENBD=SLO
T-10,AUTOADJ=Y,TH=1.3,STATE=NORMAL"
;
Related Commands
A.15.2.2 ED-APE
A.15.2.3 DLT-APE
A.15.2.4 OPR-APE
A.15.2.1 ENT-APE
A.15.2.6 ED-APE-WCH
Edits a channel of an APE group.
Function
This command edits the attributes of a channel of an APE group.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
APE
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-APE-WCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>]
[,STDBIAS=<STDBIAS>][,ENABLE=<ENABLE>];
Command Parameters
Default
of an MCA.
<PORT ID>-<CHANNEL ID>.
<BANDTYP Indicates the type of wave band. The only available value CBAND
E> for this parameter is CBAND.
<STDBIAS> Indicates the standard power bias of channel-n (n ranges NA

from 1 to 80).
Range: -10.0 to 10.0 (unit is 1.0 dB).
If the channel does not exist, set it to 12.7.
This parameter is optional. The default value will not be
changed if nothing is entered.
<ENABLE> Enables the wavelength to be adjusted in the APE group. N

In OADM, some wavelengths cannot be adjusted. Set this
parameter to N if adjustment cannot be made.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-APE-WCH::FAC-1-2-1-1:C:::BANDTYPE=CBAND,STDBIAS=1.0,ENABLE=Y;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.15.2.7 RTRV-APE-WCH
A.15.2.7 RTRV-APE-WCH
Retrieves the wavelengths of an APE group.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of each channel.
Usage Note
None
Category
APE
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-APE-WCH:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>];
Command Parameters
Default
of an MCA.
ID>-<CHANNEL ID>.
Support the "&" and "&&" symbol.
<BANDTYP Indicates the type of wave band. The only available value for CBAND
E> this parameter is CBAND.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
(
^^^"<AID>::BANDTYPE=BANDTYPE,ENABLE=<ENABLE>,STDBIAS=<STDBIAS>,FACTBIAS=<FACTBIAS>
" <cr><lf>)+
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the AID of a channel. This parameter supports the "&" and
"&&" symbols.
The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-
<CHANNEL ID>. The <CHANNEL ID> supports ALL.
<BANDTYPE> Indicates the type of wave band. The default and only available value
for this parameter is CBAND.
<ENABLE> Indicates whether the channel to be adjusted in an APE group is

enabled.
<STDBIAS> Indicates the standard power offset of the channel.

The valid value ranges from -10.0 to 10.0 (unit is 1.0 dB). The default
value is unavailable.
<FACTBIAS> Indicates the actual power offset of the channel.

Range: -12.8 to +12.6 (unit is 1.0 dB).
Example
l Command
RTRV-APE-WCH::fac-1-11-4-80&FAC-1-11-4-72:C;
l Response Message
NE 1990-01-01 11:59:46
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-11-4-72::BAND=CBAND,ENABLE=Y,STDBIAS=12.7,FACTBIAS=12.7"
"FAC-1-11-4-80::BAND=CBAND,ENABLE=Y,STDBIAS=-0.8,FACTBIAS=-1.0"
;
Related Commands
A.15.2.6 ED-APE-WCH
A.15.2.8 REPTÊVTÂPE
Reports an APE group event.
Function
This autonomous message is generated by an NE to inform the OS or maintenance personnel
about the APE information.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
APE
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
A^^<atag>^REPTÊVTÂPE <cr> <lf>
(^^^"<AID>:<EVENTID>:[WAVE=<WAVE>][,REASON=<REASON>][,NE=<NE>][,EQPT=<EQPT>]
[,BDERR=<BDERR>]" <cr> <lf>)+
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the AID of an analyzer port, for example, the port of an MCA.
<EVENTID> Indicates the event type. The valid values are as follows:
l UNEQ: The channel power is unequal.
l SUCC: The adjustment was successful.
l FAIL: The adjustment failed.
l ADDWAVE: Wavelengths were added.
l DROPWAVE: Wavelengths were dropped.
<WAVE> Indicates which wavelength is over the threshold or is added/dropped.

This parameter is valid when <EVENTID> is set to UNEQ, ADDWAVE,
or DROPWAVE.
This parameter is valid when <EVENTID> is set to FAIL and <REASON>
is set to DROP_WAVE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<REASON> Indicates why the adjustment failed. This parameter is valid when
<EVENTID> is set to FAIL.
l UNKNOWN: Unknown failure
l STOP_MANUALLY: Adjustment was stopped by the user.
l NO_REACH_EQ: Equilibrium cannot be reached after adjustment.
l COMM_FAIL: The communication failed.
l CARD_UNINSTALL: The unit is not installed.
l CARD_TYPE_ERR: It indicates the unit type error.
l CARD_OFFLINE: The unit is offline.
l VMUX_CARRY_ERR: The VMUX attenuation adjusting failed.
l BOARD_RESP_ERR: The unit responded with an error.
l BOARD_SYS_ERR: It indicates a system error.
l ADJNE_NOT_FOUND: The adjustment subrack was not found.
l DROP_WAVE: Wavelength was dropped.
<NE> Indicates the TID of a failed NE. It is a string with no more than 20 bytes.
This parameter is valid when <EVENTID> is set to FAIL.
<EQPT> Indicates the AID of the failed equipment. It indicates which equipment
reports an error. The valid format is SLOT-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>.
<BDERR> Indicates the error code responded from a unit, if the failure is caused by
unit operation failure.
l CMD-INVALID: The parameters in the command are incorrect.
l PARA-ERR: The parameter length is incorrect.
l OPR-FAIL: Execution of the command failed.
l NOT-SUPPORTED: This command is not supported.
l DISCARDED: The command is discarded.
l BUSY: The command is being executed. The result cannot be returned
yet.
l NOT-READY: The card is not prepared and the command cannot be
executed yet.
l OVERTIME: Command execution times out.
Example
l Command
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
A 1 RETP EVT APE
"FAC-1-12-3:UNEQ:WAVE=ADDWAVE,"
;
Related Commands
None
A.15.3 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)

This section lists the commands used to configure the ALC function.
A.15.3.1 ENT-ALC-NODE
Creates an ALC node.
Function
This command creates an ALC node on an NE.
Usage Note
None
Category
ALC
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ENT-ALC-NODE:[<TID>]:<CHAIN>:<CTAG>:::[REFER=<REFER>]
[,PREVNE=<PREVNE>][,NEXTNE=<NEXTNE>][,DETECTOR=<DETECTOR>]
[,VOA=<VOA>][,AUTOFLAG=<AUTOFLAG>][,TH=<THRESHOLD>]
[,DEGTH=<DEGTH>][,BIAS=<BIAS>];
Command Parameters
Default
<CHAIN> Indicates the chain identifier to which the node belongs. NA

The valid format is ALC-<N>. The value for N ranges from
1 to 255.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<REFER> Indicates the AID of the reference device on the node. NULL
<PORT ID>.
NULL indicates that the node does not have a reference
device.
Refer to A.32.2.1 ALC for the valid values of <REFER>
for specific units.
<PREVNE> Indicates the position of the upstream node. NULL

It is the NE identifier of the upstream node.
For the first ALC node, <PREVNE> must be NULL.
<NEXTNE> Indicates the position of the downstream node. NULL

It is the NE identifier of the downstream node.
For the last ALC node, <NEXTNE> must be NULL.
<DETECTO Indicates the AID of the detection device on the node. NULL
R> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-
<PORT ID>.
NULL indicates that the node does not have a detection
device.
Refer to A.32.2.1 ALC for the valid values of
<DETECTOR> for specific units.
<VOA> Indicates the AID of the VOA (variable optical attenuator) NULL
device on the node.
<PORT ID>.
NULL indicates that the node does not have a VOA device.
Refer to A.32.2.1 ALC for the valid values of <VOA> for
specific units.
<AUTOFLA Indicates whether automatic chain adjustment is enabled. N

G> The valid values are Y and N.
l Y: enables automatic chain adjustment when a fault
occurs.
l N: disables automatic chain adjustment when a fault
occurs.
It is only configured on the first node. If abnormal optical
power is detected on any node of the link, the node reports
it to the first node. If the <AUTOFLAG> is set to Y, the
first node starts the ALC adjustment process automatically.
It is recommended that users enable this function after the
entire link works normally.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<THRESHO The power is considered abnormal when the difference 2.0

LD> between the actual power and the reference power exceeds
this value.
Range: 0.5 to 3.0 (unit is 1.0 dB). The default value is 2.0.
<DEGTH> Indicates the threshold for reporting a line degradation 2.0

alarm. When the line degrades to a certain degree so that
the difference between the actual attenuation and the
reference attenuation exceeds the threshold, an alarm
indicating that the line degradation exceeds expectation is
reported.
Range: 0.5 to 15 (unit is 1.0 dB). The default value is 2.0.
<BIAS> Indicates the compensation for node adjustment. 0

Range: -10.0 to 10.0 (unit is 1.0 dB).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ENT-ALC-
NODE::ALC-1:C:::PREVNE=NE-01,NEXTNE=NE-03,DETECTOR=FAC-1-3-4,VOA=FAC-1-1-1,TH=1.5;
l Response Message
NE 05-01-01 00:00:00
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.3.4 RTRV-ALC-NODE
A.15.3.2 ED-ALC-NODE
A.15.3.3 DLT-ALC-NODE
Edits the parameters of an ALC node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command edits the parameters of an ALC node on an NE.
Usage Note
None
Category
ALC
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-ALC-NODE:[<TID>]:<CHAIN>:<CTAG>:::[AUTOFLAG=<AUTOFLAG>]
[,TH=<THRESHOLD>][,DEGTH=<DEGTH>][,BIAS=<BIAS>];
Command Parameters
Default

1 to 255.
<AUTOFLA Sets whether to enable automatic chain adjustment when an NA

G> abnormality is detected.
l Y: enables automatic chain adjustment when an
abnormality occurs.
l N: disables automatic chain adjustment when an
abnormality occurs.
Only the first ALC node can be configured.
<THRESHO Indicates the threshold at which the state of a node becomes NA

LD> abnormal.
Range: 0.5 to 3.0 (unit is 1.0 dB). The current configuration
is not changed by default.
NOTE
The power is considered abnormal when the difference between the
actual power and the reference power exceeds this value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Default
<DEGTH> Indicates the threshold for reporting a line degradation alarm. 2.0
When the line degrades to a certain degree so that the
difference between the actual attenuation and the reference
attenuation exceeds the threshold, an alarm indicating that
the line degradation exceeds expectation is reported.
<BIAS> Indicates the compensation for node adjustment. 0

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-ALC-NODE::ALC-1:C:::TH=1.0,BIAS=-5;
l Response Message
NE 2005-01-01 00:00:00
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Deletes an ALC node.
Function
This command deletes an ALC node on an NE.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
ALC
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
DLT-ALC-NODE:[<TID>]:<CHAIN>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default

The valid format is ALC-<N>. The value for N ranges from 1
to 255.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
DLT-ALC-NODE::ALC-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 05-01-01 00:00:00
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
Retrieves the information of an ALC node.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command retrieves the information of an ALC node on an NE.
Usage Note
None
Category
ALC
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ALC-NODE:[<TID>]:[<CHAIN>]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default
<CHAIN> Indicates the chain identifier which a node belongs to NA

1 to 255.
Defaults to retrieve all parameters of the ALC node on an
NE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf> ^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf> M^^<ctag>^COMPLD<cr><lf> (^^^"<CHAIN>:
[IDX=<NODE>],REFER=<REFER>,PREVNE=<PREVNE>,NEXTNE=<NEXTNE>,DETECTOR=<DETECTOR>,VOA
=<VOA>[,AUTOFLAG=<AUTOFLAG">],TH=<THRESHOLD>,DEGTH=<DEGTH>,BIAS=<BIAS>
[,LINEATTEN=<LINEATTEN>][,REFATTEN=<REFATTEN>][,GAIN=<GAIN>][,REFGAIN=<REFGAIN>]
[,NODEATTEN=<NODEATTEN>][,ACCBIAS=<ACCBIAS>],STATE=<STATE>"<cr><If>)+ ;
Response Parameters
<CHAIN> Indicates the chain identifier to which the node belongs.

The valid format is ALC-<N>. The value for N ranges from 1 to 255.
<IDX> Indicates the statistical result of the node index.

The valid format is NO-<N>. The value for N ranges from 1 to 255.
This parameter is not displayed if the chain node count fails or cannot be
counted.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<REFER> Indicates the AID of the reference device on the node.

NULL indicates that the reference device does not exist.
<PREVNE> Indicates the TID of the upstream node.

NULL indicates that the upstream node does not exist.
<NEXTNE> Indicates the TID of the downstream node.

NULL indicates that the downstream node does not exist.
<DETECTOR> Indicates the AID of the detection device on the node.

NULL indicates that the detection device does not exist.
<VOA> Indicates the AID of the VOA on the node.

NULL indicates that the VOA does not exist.
<AUTOFLAG> Sets whether automatic chain adjustment is enabled when an abnormality

is detected.
Displays only on the first node. The valid values are Y and N.
<THRESHOLD The power is considered abnormal when the difference between the actual
> power and the reference power exceeds this value.
Range: 0.5 to 3.0 (unit is 1.0 dB).
<DEGTH> Indicates the threshold for reporting a line degradation alarm. When the
line degrades to a certain degree so that the difference between the actual
attenuation and the reference attenuation exceeds the threshold, an alarm
indicating that the line degradation exceeds expectation is reported.
<BIAS> Indicates the compensation for node adjustment. (<BIAS> =

<LINEATTEN> - <GAIN>)
In actual applications, the system optical power budgeted for a link may
result in inequality between the optical amplifier gain of the local node and
the attenuation of the upstream line. Hence, after the ALC is created and
the adjustment of system optical power of each station based on the
planned parameters are complete, set <BIAS> node by node to adjust the
initial state of the ALC link to the normal state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LINEATTEN Indicates the attenuation introduced by the transmission line (Line

> attenuation = Output optical power of the upstream node - Input optical
power of the local node).
The valid format is unsigned float (unit is 1.0 dB).
The transmission line attenuation includes the VOA attenuation if a VOA
exists.
The parameter is not displayed if the <LINEATTEN> value is invalid.
<REFATTEN> Indicates the reference line attenuation in the transmission. This parameter
serves as a nominal attenuation value for monitoring the line degradation.
An alarm is reported when the difference between the actual attenuation
and the value of this parameter exceeds the value of <DEGTH>. The value
of this parameter can be changed by using the OPR-ALC-NODE
command. The attenuation does not include the attenuation of the
attenuators on the ALC link but the attenuation of other attenuators that
are not configured on the ALC link.
The parameter is not displayed is the <REFATTEN> value is invalid.
<GAIN> Indicates the gain of the local node <DETECTOR>. The valid format is
unsigned float (unit is 1.0 dB).
This parameter is not displayed is the <GAIN> value is invalid.
<REFGAIN> Indicates the reference gain for an amplifier in the ALC function. When
the ALC function is used for adjusting the optical power, the attenuation
or gain is adjusted with the presumption that there is minimal deviation of
the amplifier gain from <REFGAIN>.
This parameter is not displayed if the <REFGAIN> value is invalid.
<NODEATTE Indicates the current attenuation of the VOA unit of the local node. The
N> valid format is unsigned float (unit is 1.0 dB).
The parameter is not displayed if the <NODEATTEN> value is invalid.
<ACCBIAS> Indicates the accumulated optical power deviation of the local node. The
valid format is signed float (unit is 1.0 dB).
<ACCBIAS> of the reference node is 0.
This parameter is not displayed if the <ACCBIAS> value is invalid.
<STATE> Indicates the current state of the ALC node.

l IDLE: The node state is idle.
l INVALID: The node state is invalid.
l WAITING: The node is waiting for the adjustment process.
l ADJUSTING: The node is in the adjustment process.
l ABNR: The node state is abnormal.
l ALARM: The node device detects an alarm.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-ALC-NODE:::C;
l Response Message
NE 05-01-01 00:00:00 M C COMPLD
"ALC-1:IDX=NO-1,REFER=FAC-1-3-4,PERVID=NULL,NEXTNE=NE-02,DETECTOR=NULL,VOA=NULL,AU
TOFLAG=N,TH=2.5,DEGTH=2.0,BIAS=0.5,ACCBIAS=0,STATE=IDLE" ;
"ALC-2:IDX=NO-5,REFER=NULL,PREVNE=NE-04,NEXTNE=NE-06,DETECTOR=FAC-1-9-2,VOA=FAC-1-
1-1,TH=2.0,DEGTH=2.0,BIAS=1.5,LINEATTEN=19.2,REFATTEN=15.0,GAIN=23.0,REFGAIN=23.0,
NODEATTEN=3.2,ACCBIAS=0.3,STATE=IDLE"; ;
Related Commands
A.15.3.7 OPR-ALC-NODE
A.15.3.5 OPR-ALC-CHAIN
Operates an ALC chain.
Function
This command manually starts or stops the adjustment process on the chain.
This operation only be carried out on the first node of the ALC chain.
Usage Note
None
Category
ALC
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
OPR-ALC-CHAIN:[<TID>]:<CHAIN>:<CTAG>::<OPRT>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<CHAIN> Indicates the chain identifier to which the node NA

belongs.
The valid format is ALC-<N>. The value for N

l START: starts the adjustment process on the
chain.
l STOP: stops the adjustment process on the chain.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
OPR-ALC-CHAIN::ALC-1:C::START;
l Response Message
NE 05-01-01 00:00:00
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.3.6 RTRV-ALC-CHAIN
A.15.3.6 RTRV-ALC-CHAIN
Retrieves an ALC chain.
Function
This command retrieves the information of all ALC nodes on a chain.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
ALC
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ALC-CHAIN:[<TID>]:<CHAIN>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default

to 255.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
(^^^"
<CHAIN>:[IDX=<NODE>][,NENAME=<NENAME>][,LINEATTEN=<LINEATTEN>][,GAIN=<GAIN>]
[,NODEATTEN=<NODEATTE>][,ACCBIAS=<ACCBIAS>][,STATE=<NODESTATE>][,COMM=<COMM>]
[,CHAINSTATE=< CHAINSTATE>]
" <cr><If>)
;
Response Parameters

<IDX> Indicates the statistic result of node index. The valid format is NO-
<N>.
This parameter is not displayed if the node response is not received
or the node does not exist.
<NENAME> Indicates the node position. The valid format is TID.

This parameter is not displayed if the node response is not received.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LINEATTEN> Indicates the attenuation introduced by the transfer line (Line

attenuation = Output optical power of the upstream node - Input
optical power of the local node).
The valid format is unsigned float (unit is 1.0 dB). The first node is
displayed as zero.
The transfer line attenuation includes VOA attenuation if a VOA
exists.
<GAIN> Indicates the gain of the local node <DETECTOR>.

<NODEATTEN> Indicates the current attenuation of the VOA unit of the local node.
The valid format is unsigned float (unit is 1.0 dB). NODEATTEN
equals zero if the node does not have a VOA device.
<ACCBIAS> Indicates the accumulated optical power deviation of the local node.
The valid format is signed float (unit is 1.0 dB).
<STATE> Indicates the current state of the ALC node.

The valid values are IDLE, INVALID, WAITING, ADJUSTING,
ABNR, ALARM, and NOEXIST.
This parameter is not displayed if the node response is not received.
This parameter is displayed as NOEXIST if the node does not exist
on the target NE.
<COMM> Indicates the communication status of the node.

The valid values are SUCCESS and FAILURE.
FAILURE is displayed if the node response is not received.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<CHAINSTATE> Indicates the current state of a chain, which is displayed on only the
first node.
l IDLE: It indicates that the chain is idle, and it is not abnormally
occupied on any node.
l INVALID: It indicates that the chain is invalid.
l ADJUSTING: It indicates that the chain started the adjustment,
but the adjustment is not complete.
l ABNR: It indicates that some nodes have anomalies on the chain,
but the adjustment is not started.
l COMMFAIL: The communication is abnormally occupied, and
the chain state is unclear.
Example
l Command
RTRV-ALC-CHAIN::ALC-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 05-01-01 00:00:00
M C COMPLD
"
ALC-1:IDX=NO-1,NENAME=NE-01,LINEATTEN=0,GAIN=21.0,NODEATTEN=0,ACCBIAS=0.0,STATE=ID
LE,COMM=SUCCESS,CHAINSTATE=COMMFAIL;
ALC-1:IDX=NO-2,NENAME=NE-02,LINEATTEN=18.0,GAIN=20.2,NODEATTEN=2.0,ACCBIAS=0.1,STA
TE=IDLE,COMM= SUCCESS;
ALC-1:NENAME=NE-05,STATE=NOEXIST,COMM= SUCCESS; "
;
Related Commands
A.15.3.5 OPR-ALC-CHAIN
A.15.3.7 OPR-ALC-NODE
Samples the ALC reference value.
Function
This command collects the current attenuation of the optical power and gain of the amplifier on
the line as reference values REFATTEN and REFGAIN. The value REFATTEN is used for
determining whether an alarm is generated and REFGAIN is used as a reference value in priority
for ALC adjustment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
ALC
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
OPR-ALC-NODE:[<TID>]:<CHAIN>:<CTAG>::<OPRT>;
Command Parameters
<CHAIN> Indicates the chain identifier to which the node NA

belongs.
The valid format is ALC-<N>. The value for N

l SAMP: starts the adjustment process on the
chain.
Response Syntax
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
OPR-ALC-NODE::ALC-1:C::SAMP;
l Response Message
NE 05-01-01 00:00:00 M C COMPLD ;
Related Commands
A.15.3.8 INIT-ALC-LOG
Clears the records of an ALC event.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
This command clears the records of an ALC event.
Usage Note
None
Category
ALC
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
INIT-ALC-LOG:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INIT-ALC-LOG:::C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.15.3.9 RTRV-ALC-LOG
A.15.3.9 RTRV-ALC-LOG
Queries the records of an ALC event.
Function
This command queries the records of an ALC event.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
ALC
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ALC-LOG:[<TID>]:[CHAIN]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
Default

to 255.
When nothing is entered for this parameter, the records of all
ALC links are queried.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
(^^^"<CHAIN>,<EVENT>,<EVTINFO>:DATA=<DATE>,TIME=<TIME>""<cr><lf>)+
;
Response Parameters

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<EVENT> Indicates the event identifier. Possible events are listed as follows:
l ABSTRACT: The abstract that contains all the basic information
about the chain adjustment.
l NODE-ABNR: The node state is abnormal.
l NODE-RESU: The node state restored to normal.
l NODE-FAIL: The node adjustment failed.
l NODE-SUCC: The node adjustment succeeded.
l NODE-ACK: It indicates the node adjustment response event.
l CHAIN-START: The chain adjustment process started.
l CHAIN-STOP: The chain adjustment process stopped.
l CHAIN-FINISH: The chain adjustment process is complete.
l CHAIN-FAIL: The chain state is unknown.
l CHAIN-ABNR: The chain state is abnormal.
l CHAIN-RESU: The chain or node state was restored.
<EVTINFO> Indicates the event explanation information.
<DATE> Indicates the date when the event occurred.
<TIME> Indicates the time when the event occurred.
Example
l Command
RTRV-ALC-LOG:::C;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
"ALC-1,NODE-FAIL,CHAIN-TIME-OUT,OUTTIME=10: DATA=2006-02-27,TIME=16-47-45"
"ALC-1,CHAIN-FAIL,IDX=NO-1,NENAME=HEXING: DATA=2006-02-27,TIME=16-47-45"
;
Related Commands
A.15.3.8 INIT-ALC-LOG
A.15.3.10 REPTÊVTÂLC
Reports an ALC event.
Function
This autonomous message is generated by an NE to inform maintenance personnel of the ALC
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
ALC
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
A^^<atag>^REPTÊVTÂLC <cr> <lf>
^^^"< CHAIN>::EVENT=<EVTTYPE>,<EXTPARA>" <cr> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the chain identifier to which the node belongs.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<EVTTYPE> Indicates the ALC event type. Possible ALC events are as follows:
l ABSTRACT: The abstract that contains all the basic information
about the chain adjustment.
l NODE-ABNR: The state of the current node is abnormal.
l NODE-FAIL: The node adjustment failed.
l NODE-SUCC: The node adjustment succeeded.
l NODE-RESU: The node state restored to normal.
l NODE-ACK: It indicates the chain node adjustment response
event. Only the first chain node can report this event.
l CHAIN-START: The chain adjustment started.
l CHAIN-STOP: The chain adjustment stopped.
l CHAIN-FINISH: The chain adjustment is complete.
l CHAIN-FAIL: The communication is abnormal in the current
chain. The current chain state is unknown.
l CHAIN-ABNR: The current chain state is abnormal. Some node
states are abnormal.
l CHAIN-RESU: The current chain communication or state was
restored.
<EXTPARA> For details, see the following table.
Table A-2 List of ALC event parameters

EVTTYPE EXTPARA Description
ABSTRACT ABNRIDX Indicates the index of the first chain node if its state is
abnormal.
NENAME Indicates the NE name of the last chain node if its state
is abnormal. ABNRIDX and NENAME are not
displayed when the chain does not detect an abnormal
node.
TOTAL Indicates the total number of chain nodes.
NEEDTIME Indicates the estimated time that the chain adjustment

process requires.
NODE-ABNR IDX Indicates the index number of the current node. The
valid format is NO-<N>.
LINEATTEN Indicates the attenuation imported by the transfer line.

The valid format is unsigned float (unit is 1.0 dB). The
first node is not displayed.
The transfer line attenuation includes the VOA
attenuation.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
GAIN Indicates the standard gain of amplifier on the current

node.
ACCBIAS Indicates the cumulative value of the gain bias of all

the upstream-node amplifiers.
BIAS The adjustment compensation of the current node.

NODE-FAIL REASON Indicates the cause of event possibly. The causes are
listed as follow:
l NODE-STATE-ERR: There is an error in the state
of the current node.
l CARD-RSP-ERR: It indicates an error in the unit
command response.
l DEVICE-ALM-EXIST: A device alarm exists.
l CHAIN-NO-EXIST: The chain does not exist.
l CHAIN-CHAOS: It indicates the chaotic chain
configuration.
l NODE-TIME-OUT: The node adjustment process
timed out.
l NO-PERMIT-ERR: The current node is still
abnormal after the adjustment is complete.
DEVICE Indicates the ALC device identifier. The valid format

is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>.
Only CARD-RSP-ERR is valid.
CMD Indicates the command identifier returned from the

equipment.
Only CARD-RSP-ERR is valid.
The commands are listed as follows:
l IN-POWER-QUE: The power query command
response failed.
l GAIN-QUE: The gain query command response
failed.
l ATTEN-ADJUST: The attenuation command
adjustment response failed.
l GAIN-ADJUST: The gain adjustment command
response failed.
NODE-SUCC NULL Indicates there are not any extended parameters in this
event.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
NODE-RESU IDX Indicates the index number of the current node. The
LINEATTEN Indicates the attenuation imported by the transfer line.

The valid format is unsigned float (unit is 1.0 dB). The
first node is not displayed.
The transfer line attenuation includes the VOA
attenuation.
GAIN The standard gain of the amplifier at the current node.

ACCBIAS Indicate the cumulative value of the gain bias of all the
upstream-node amplifiers.
The valid format is signed float (unit is 1.0 dB). The
reference node is not displayed.
BIAS Indicates the adjustment compensation of the current

node.
NODE-ACK IDX Indicates the index ID of the node that sends

adjustment responses. The valid format is NO-<N>.
NENAME Indicates the NE name of the node that sends

adjustment responses.
RESULT Indicates the result of the node adjustment. The valid

values are SUCCESS and FAIL.
CHAIN- NULL Indicates there are not any extended parameters in this
START event.
CHAIN-STOP REASON Possible causes of the event are listed as follows:

l NODE-BREAK: The node detected an anomaly
and requested to interrupt the chain adjustment
process.
l CHAIN-TIME-OUT: The chain adjustment
process timed out.
l USER-COMMAND: A user command that
interrupted the chain adjustment.
IDX Indicates the index of the node that requested the chain
adjustment interruption. The valid format is NO-<N>.
NENAME Indicates the index of the node that requested the chain
adjustment interruption.
OUTTIME Indicates the chain adjustment overflow time, which is

displayed only when an interruption is caused by
CHAIN-TIME-OUT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
CHAIN- NULL Indicates there are not any extended parameters in this
FINISH event.
CHAIN-FAIL IDX Indicates the index of the node that detected the chain
communication was abnormal. The valid format is
NO-<N>.
NENAME Indicates the name of the abnormal communication

target NE.
CHAIN-ABNR IDX Indicates the index of the node in an abnormal state.

The valid format is NO-<N>.
NENAME Indicates the node NE-TID in an abnormal state.
CHAIN-RESU IDX Indicates the index of node in an abnormal state. The

NENAME Indicates the NE name of node in an abnormal state.

If IDX and NENAME are displayed, the event is the
restoration of chain state that is abnormal.
Example
l Command
None
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
A 1 REPT EVT ALC
"ALC-1::CHAIN START"
;
Related Commands
None
A.16 Configuring MCA

This section lists the commands used to configure the MCA function.
A.16.1 ED-MCACHN
Edits the channel monitor attributes of the MCA.
Function
This command edits the channel monitor attributes of the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit
(MCA), which helps to analyze the optical wavelength, optical power, and OSNR of a specific
channel.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
MCA
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-MCACHN:
[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>,MONFLAG=<MONFLAG>;
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the MCA channel access identifier. NA

The valid format is is FAC-<SHELF ID>-
<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<PATH ID>. When
<PATH ID> is ALL, it indicates the entire port.
Refer to A.32.2.15 MCA for the valid values of
<BANDTYPE> Indicates the band type of the wavelength. CBAND

The valid value is CBAND.
<MONFLAG> Indicates whether the wavelength monitoring is N

Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-MCACHN::FAC-1-1-1-1:C:::BANDTYPE=CBAND,MONFLAG=Y;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.16.2 RTRV-MCACHN

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.16.3 RTRV-MCADATA
A.16.2 RTRV-MCACHN
Retrieves the channel monitor attributes of the MCA.
Function
This command retrieves the channel monitor attributes of the MCA, which helps to analyze the
optical wavelength, optical power, and OSNR of a specific channel.
Usage Note
None
Category
MCA
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MCACHN:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
AID Indicates the MCA channel NA

access identifier. The valid
format is FAC-<SHELF
ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT
ID>-<PATH ID>. When the
<PATH ID> is "ALL", it
indicates the command
effects the entire path.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>::BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>,MONFLAG=<MONFLAG>"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
AID Indicates the MCA channel access identifier. The valid format is
FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>-<PORT ID>-<PATH ID>.
Refer to A.32.2.15 MCA for the valid values of <AID>
corresponding to specified units.
BANDTYPE Indicates the band type of the wavelength.

MONFLAG Indicates whether the wavelength monitoring is enabled. The valid

values are Y and N.
Example
l Command
RTRV-MCACHN::FAC-1-8-1-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2005-10-12 15:54:55
M C COMPLD
" FAC-1-8-1-1::BANDTYPE=CBAND,MONFLAG=Y"
;
Related Commands
A.16.1 ED-MCACHN
A.16.3 RTRV-MCADATA
Retrieves results from monitoring the MCA.
Function
This command retrieves results from monitoring the MCA, such as the optical power, central
wavelength, OSNR, and number of channels.
Usage Note
None
Category
MCA
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MCADATA:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
AID Indicates the MCA port access identifier. NA

The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-
Refer to A.32.2.15 MCA for the valid values
of <AID> for specific units.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>::BANDTYPE=<BANDTYPE>,WVTOTAL=<WVTOTAL>,WVNUM=<WVNUM>,WVCENTER=<WVCENTER>
,WVOFFSET=<WVOFFSET>,WVPOWER=<WVPOWER>,WVOSNR=<WVOSNR>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
Table A-3 RTRV-MCADATA output parameters

AID Indicates the MCA port access identifier. The valid format is FAC-
BANDTYPE Indicates the band type of the wavelength.

WVTOTAL Indicates the total number of wavelength channels in the current

band defined as BANDTYPE above.
WVNUM Indicates the wavelength channel number.
WVCENTER Indicates the central wavelength value in units of 1.00 nm.

For example, 1529.16 indicates that the central wavelength is
1529.16 nm.
WVOFFSET Indicates the wavelength offset in units of 1.00 nm.

For example, -0.01 indicates that the offset is -0.01 nm.
WVPOWER Indicates the optical power of the wavelength in units of 1.0 dBm.
For example, -27.3 indicates that the optical power is -27.3 dBm.
WVOSNR Indicates the OSNR of the wavelength in units of 1.0 dB.

For example, 25.6 indicates that the OSNR is 25.6 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-MCADATA::FAC-1-12-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 2005-10-12 15:54:55
M C COMPLD
"FAC-1-12-1::BANDTYPE=CBAND,WVTOTAL=0,WVNUM=1,WVCENTER=1529.16,WVOFFSET=0.00,WVPOW
ER=-60.0,WVOSNR=-60.0"
Related Commands
A.16.1 ED-MCACHN
A.16.2 RTRV-MCACHN
A.17 Configuring Tunable Dispersion Compensator

This section lists the commands used to configure the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC)
function.
A.17.1 ED-TDC
Edits the attributes of the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC).
Function
This command edits the TDC attributes.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-TDC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>:::[AUTOADJ=<AUTOADJ>],[TDCVAL=<TDCVAL>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
Paramete Default
r Description Value
<AID> Indicates the TDC access identifier. The valid value is provided NA
in A.32.2.27 TDC.
ID>.
<AUTOA Indicates whether the auto adjustment of the dispersion ENABLE

DJ> compensation is enabled. The valid values are ENABLE and
DISABLE.
<TDCVA Indicates the dispersion compensation value. The value range is NA

L> determined by the corresponding dispersion compensation
module.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
ED-TDC::FAC-1-16-1:C:::AUTOADJ=DISABLE;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.17.3 RTRV-TDC
A.17.2 OPR-TDC
A.17.2 OPR-TDC
Modifies the status of the TDC scan.
Function
This command modifies the status of the TDC scan.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Facility
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
OPR-TDC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<OPRT>;
Command Parameters
Default
<AID> Indicates the TDC access identifier. The valid value is NA

provided in A.32.2.27 TDC.
ID>.
<OPRT> Indicates the TDC scan status. The valid values are NA
STARTSCAN and STOPSCAN.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Example
l Command
OPR-TDC::FAC-1-1-1:C::STARTSCAN;
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.17.3 RTRV-TDC
A.17.1 ED-TDC
A.17.3 RTRV-TDC
Retrieves the attributes of the TDC.
Function
This command retrieves the attributes of the TDC.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-TDC:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters

Response Syntax
[TDCSTATE=<TDCSTATE>],[AUTOADJ=<AUTOADJ>],[TDCVAL=<TDCVAL>],[TDCMAX=<TDCMAX>],
[TDCMIN=<TDCMIN>],[TDCSTEP=<TDCSTEP>],[ACTDCVAL=<ACTDCVAL>]"<cr><lf> ;
Response Parameters
<TDCSTATE> Indicates the current state of dispersion adjustment. The valid values are
IDLE, SUCCESS, FAIL, and ADJUSTING.
<AUTOADJ> Indicates whether dispersion fine adjustment is enabled. The valid values
are ENABLE and DISABLE (default).
<TDCVAL> Indicates the current dispersion compensation.
<TDCMAX> Indicates the maximum dispersion compensation permitted by the

dispersion compensation module.
<TDCMIN> Indicates the minimum dispersion compensation permitted by the

dispersion compensation module.
<TDCSTEP> Indicates the adjustment step adopted by the dispersion compensation

modules. It is an integer. The unit is ps/nm.
<ACTDCVAL Indicates the actual dispersion of a board.

>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-TDC::FAC-1-1-1:C;
l Response Message
NE 1990-01-01 11:22:19 M C COMPLD "FAC-1-1-1::AUTOADJ=DISABLE,TDCVAL=-1" ;
Related Commands
A.17.2 OPR-TDC
A.17.1 ED-TDC
A.17.4 REPT-EVT-TDCSCAN
Reports an event that indicates the scan state of a TDC.
Function
This command reports an event that indicates the scan state of a TDC.
Usage Note
None
Category
Facility
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
A^^<atag>^REPT^ TDCSCAN <cr> <lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
^^^" <AID>:::STATE=<OPR_STATE> " <cr> <lf>

;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the TDC access identifier. The valid value is provided in
A.32.2.27 TDC.
<STATE> Indicates the scan state of the TDC. The valid values are as follows:
l START: indicates that the search has started.
l SUCCESS: indicates that the search is complete and objects were
found.
l FAIL: indicates that the search is complete but no objects were
found.
Example
l Command
None
l Response Message
NE 2004-01-01 11:37:18
A 1 REPT EVT TDCSCAN
"FAC-1-4-1:::STATE=START"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18 System Monitor

This section lists the commands used to monitor a system.
A.18.1 ED-DST-V2
Sets DST for the new DST standard.
Function
This command sets DST for the new DST starndard.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
MON
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-DST-V2:
[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<FLAG>,<BEGINADJMODE>,<ENDADJMODE
>,<ADJMINUTE>,<STARTMONTH>,<STARTDAY>,<STARTHOUR
>,<STARTMINUTE>,<STARTWEEK>,<STARTWEEKDAY>,<ENDMONTH>,<ENDDAY
>,<ENDHOUR>,<ENDMINUTE>,<ENDWEEK>,<ENDWEEKDAY>;
Command Parameters
Value
<BEGINADJMODE Indicates the mode of beginning adjustment, DATE NA

> or WEEK_FORWARD or WEEK_BACKWARD.
<ENDADJMODE> Indicates the mode of endding adjustment, DATE or

WEEK_FORWARD or WEEK_BACKWARD.

1 to 120.

dec).

<STARTHOUR> Indicates the start hour of adjustment. The range is NA

from 0 to 23.
<STARTMINUTE> Indicates the start minute of adjustment. The range NA

is from 0 to 59.
<STARTWEEK> Indicates the start week of adjustment. The range is

from 1 to 5

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value

sat).



from 0 to 23.

from 0 to 59.
<ENDWEEK> Indicates the end week of adjustment. The range is

from 1 to 5.

sat).
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-DST-V2:::1::enable,DATE,WEEK_FORWORD,60,apr,1,13,0,1,fri,oct,3,14,0,2,mon;
l Response Message
NE 2005-03-21 09:33:54
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.2.4 RTRV-DST
A.18.2 RTRV-DST-V2
Retrieves DST information setted by ED-DST-V2.
Function
This command retrieves DST information setted by ED-DST-V2.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-DST-V2:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<sid>^<yyyy-mm-
dd>^<"FLAG=<FLAG>,BEGINADJMODE=<BEGINADJMODE>,ENDADJMODE=<ENDADJMODE>,ADJ_MINUTE=<
ADJMINUTE>,START_MONTH=<STARTMONTH>,START_DAY=<STARTDAY>,START_HOUR=<STARTHOUR>,ST
ART_MINUTE=<STARTMINUTE>,START_WEEK=<STARTWEEK>,START_WEEKDAY=<STARTWEEKDAY>,END_M
ONTH=<ENDMONTH>,END_DAY=<ENDDAY>,END_HOUR=<ENDHOUR>,END_MINUTE=<ENDMINUTE>,END_WEE
K=<ENDWEEK>,END_WEEKDAY=<ENDWEEKDAY>,DST_STATUS=<DSTSTATUS>"> <cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters

Value
<BEGINADJMODE Indicates the mode of beginning adjustment, DATE NA

> or WEEK_FORWARD or WEEK_BACKWARD.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<ENDADJMODE> Indicates the mode of endding adjustment, DATE or

WEEK_FORWARD or WEEK_BACKWARD.

1 to 120.

dec).

<STARTHOUR> Indicates the start hour of adjustment. The range is NA

from 0 to 23.
<STARTMINUTE> Indicates the start minute of adjustment. The range NA

is from 0 to 59.
<STARTWEEK> Indicates the start week of adjustment. The range is

from 1 to 5

sat).



from 0 to 23.

from 0 to 59.
<ENDWEEK> Indicates the end week of adjustment. The range is

from 1 to 5.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value

sat).
Example
l Command
RTRV-DST-V2:::1;
l Response Message
DESMOINESPH-6800A-2 2012-05-15 22:23:14
M 1 COMPLD
"FLAG=ENABLE,BEGINADJMODE=DATE,ENDADJMODE=WEEK_FORWARD,ADJ_MINUTE=120,START_MONTH=
JAN,START_DAY=1,START_HOUR=0,START_MINUTE=0,START_WEEK=1,START_WEEKDAY=SUN,END_MON
TH=SEP,END_DAY=4,END_HOUR=14,END_MINUTE=0,END_WEEK=1,END_WEEKDAY=SAT,DST_STATUS=TR
UE"
;
Related Commands
A.2.4 RTRV-DST
A.18.3 RTRV-CHECK-PERIOD
Get the mon internal period of the CPU and VFS check.
Function
Get the mon internal period of the CPU and VFS check.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-CHECK-PERIOD:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
r
<MON_B Indicates the card ID. NA

OARD_I
D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"CPUCHECKPERIOD=<cpuperiod>,VFSCHECKPERIOD=<vfsperiod>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<cpuperiod> The period of CPU check.
<vfsperiod> The period of VFS check.
Example
l Command
RTRV-CHECK-PERIOD::SLOT-1-8:100;
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 15:08:11
M 100 COMPLD
"CPUCHECKPERIOD=60,VFSCHECKPERIOD=3600"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.4 RTRV-CPU-PEAKINFO
Query CPU occupancy peak value and current value
Function
Query CPU occupancy peak value and current value
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-CPU-PEAKINFO:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"TASKNAME=<CPUTH_TASKNAME>,TASK_CUR=<CPUTH_CUR>,TASK_PEAK=<CPUTH_PEAK>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<CPUTH_TASKNAME> The name of task to be monitored. It is a string with a

maximum of 1400 bytes
<CPUTH_CUR> The current rate of used cpu.
<CPUTH_PEAK> The peak rate of CPU.
Example
l Command
RTRV-CPU-PEAKINFO::SLOT-1-8:100;
l Response Message
NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38
M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=BOX,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=_TIL,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=_EXC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=VIDL,TASK_CUR=74,TASK_PEAK=74"
"TASKNAME=TICK,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tFtpServer,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=ECCPING,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"TASKNAME=tVos100ms,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tVos1s,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tVfsWorker,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tVfsSender,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tVfsSchemer,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tRackId,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tSrlmSend,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tBDMLow1S,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tDmmCCardSend,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tDmmCardRecv,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tDmmCtrlTimer,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=tDmmCtrlProc,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tCrmQue,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tBDMOnlineCheck,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=MainLoop,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=StateRec,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tMMI,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tHSC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tHBU,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TPE,TASK_CUR=8,TASK_PEAK=8"
"TASKNAME=00018tDbmsDBT,TASK_CUR=1,TASK_PEAK=1"
"TASKNAME=00018tDbmsREC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tDbmsDBR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tSMNGCMD,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tSMNGTRAN,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TKSM,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TKTR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TSMCOM,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=VfsDMMListener,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tVFSCheck,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TMDR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TMDT,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TMDE,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TQPD,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TQPE,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TPDA,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TPDD,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TPDC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tTL1CmdRsp,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tTL1AUTO,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=ERRPICK,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tMon,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tBmMain,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tBMR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tSnmpRsp,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tSnmpReq,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=TALM,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tBDAlm,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tFiP,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tMLoad,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tSftmData,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tSftmNedl,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tSftmFcopy,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tBDFL,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"TASKNAME=00018tLBDF,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TPTH,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TPTHPKG,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=PMTK,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TPM,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TBDPM18,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tHbuShell,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tHscShell,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tEthTest,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=Ecc_TTI_Recv,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=ECC_PRC2ND_EVEN,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TIPSMmlRecv,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=SOCK,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=Task_FIB,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=Task_Route,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TIPRTHSC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TTIPSPPPoE,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TTIPSHSC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TDcnDataSend,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TLANMML,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TTCPS,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TTCPR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TTCPQ,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TTCPC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TUDPR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TUDPS,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TUDPF,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=TIDR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TIDS,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TLANHSC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TLANNAR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TOSIHSC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=OSIMain,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TCALR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=ECR1,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=ecc_cnego_task,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TNEWNTPHSC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TNEWNTPMML,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tLog,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tDmmShell,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tDmmAnothrShell,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tLcs,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=SWDLMain,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tSwdu,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tSwdlCom,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TSWDLADPT,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=PSULOG,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tHdlcTest,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tRxHdlc,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=vbd485Task,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tGspTool,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"TASKNAME=tGspDebug,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tLimLibm,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tIpStack,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tTrans,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tFwd,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tFcl,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TSCFG,TASK_CUR=2,TASK_PEAK=2"
"TASKNAME=00018TPDTCFG,TASK_CUR=2,TASK_PEAK=2"
"TASKNAME=TSCCLED,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=TNGERRPICK,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TNECOMMUDPMSG,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TNECOMMTIMER,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TITFSCH,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TITFCIA,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TOPS,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TTIM,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TPSUCALC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TPSTAT,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TSDHTIME,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tSendControl,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TIPA,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TRMN,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TRAN,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TALC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TAPE,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TAPT,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TelDownCtrl,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=TelUpCtrl,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tEquipCmd,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tEquipMsg,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tXCVerify,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018TBDMcmd,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018TBDMcmdrst,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tIonDmmRcv,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00018tSccBdBDM,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tRpcAlmPer,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tOspRds,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=RADIUS_CORE,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tShRecv,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TECCPHYPM,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TSRLMHSC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tL2TSvA1b58,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tL2TSvR1b58,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tL2TSC1b58,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=tL2TPT1b58,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tLan2UDP1b58,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TECCPHYT,TASK_CUR=2,TASK_PEAK=2"
"TASKNAME=TECCPHYMAIN,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TECCT,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TECCMAIN,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TSRLMPS,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TSRLMR,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TSRLMS,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TSRLMM,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"TASKNAME=TOLSREC,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=00019VIRTUALCFG,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=00021tVtCfg,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:38

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=tJobTask,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tExcTask,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tLogTask,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"TASKNAME=tNbioLog,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tAioWait,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:39

M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=tAioIoTask1,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tAioIoTask0,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tErfTask,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tTffsPTask,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tNetTask,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tTelnetOut_6662,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tTelnetIn_6662b,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tTelnetd,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tWdbTask,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=VOS_Entry,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=OSPCLK,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tVosClearDog,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tConsoleCheck,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tFpga2DccRx,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=OS00,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=HM00,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=TT00,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
>
>
HUAWEI01-NE 2011-12-19 15:43:39

M 100 COMPLD
"TASKNAME=LD00,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=RT00,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=LL00,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=XTPT,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tCTU,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tIPTNL,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
"TASKNAME=tPdtClrDog,TASK_CUR=0,TASK_PEAK=0"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.5 RTRV-CPUUSAGE
Query the CPU information of all tasks
Function
Query the CPU information of all tasks
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Super

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-CPUUSAGE:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"TASKNAME=<TASKNAME>,SWITCHCNT=<SWITCHCNT>,MINTIME=<MINTIME>,MAXTIME=<MAXTIME>,
RECENTTIME=<RECENTTIME>,SECTIME=<SECTIME>,MSECTIME=<MSECTIME>,CPUUSAGE=<CPUUSAGE>"
<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<TASKNAME> The name of a task..
<SWITCHCNT> The switch count of a task.
<MINTIME> The minimum running time of a task.
<MAXTIME> The maximal running time of a task.
<RECENTTIME> The recent running time of a task.
<SECTIME> The running seconds of a task.
<MSECTIME> The running microseconds of a task.
<CPUUSAGE> The cpu usage of a task.
Example
l Command
RTRV-CPUUSAGE::SLOT-1-18:100;
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 14:37:02
M 100 RTRV
"TASKNAME=BOX,SWITCHCNT=1906346,MINTIME=2,MAXTIME=7750,RECENTTIME=11,SECTIME=0,MSE
CTIME=41711889,CPUUSAGE= 0.00%"
"TASKNAME=_TIL,SWITCHCNT=0,MINTIME=0,MAXTIME=0,RECENTTIME=0,SECTIME=0,MSECTIME=0,C
PUUSAGE= 0.00%"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
"TASKNAME=_EXC,SWITCHCNT=0,MINTIME=0,MAXTIME=0,RECENTTIME=0,SECTIME=0,MSECTIME=0,C
PUUSAGE= 0.00%"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.6 RTRV-LIST
This command displays the task or semaphore or timer or message queue information based on
the key.
Function
Displays the task or semaphore or timer or message queue information based on the key.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-LIST:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>::<resourcetype>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
<resourcet It specifies task or message queue or timer or semaphore NA

ype>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<MonListInfo>"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<MonListInfo> Displays all tasks or timer or semaphore or message queue

information based on the input parameter.
Example
l Command
RTRV-LIST::SLOT-1-18:100::sem;
l Response Message
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57
M 100 RTRV
" ******************************************************"
" Max Semaphore = 2000"
" Total binary Semaphore = 67"
" Total count Semaphore = 20"
" Total mutex Semaphore = 288"
" ------------------------------------------------------"
" Sema4Name Sema4ID OSSemID Count Mode Type"
" ------------------------------------------------------"
" cbr 1 113338224 1 FIFO Binary"
" cbn 2 113338352 1 FIFO Binary"
" sSTLPool 3 115140536 1 FIFO Binary"
" sVos100ms 4 115140720 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sVos1s 5 115140848 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sVFSFileStub 6 115142112 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sErrLogShare 7 115142240 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog01 8 115142368 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog02 9 115142496 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog03 10 115142624 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog04 11 115142752 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog05 12 115142880 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog06 13 115143008 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog07 14 115143136 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog08 15 115143264 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog09 16 115143392 1 FIFO Binary"
" sVFSHoldLK 17 110481064 1 PRIOR Binary"
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sVFSRESLK 18 110496584 1 PRIOR Mutex "
" sVFSCACHELK 19 110497016 1 PRIOR Binary"
" sVFSSWQUELK 20 115143728 1 FIFO Binary"
" sVFSWEQUELK 21 115143856 1 FIFO Binary"
" sVFSMSGS 22 115143984 -1 PRIOR Count "
" sVFSMSGR 23 115144112 -1 PRIOR Count "
" sPatSem 24 115251832 1 FIFO Mutex "
" RackSrlmS 25 115408408 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
INVERSION_SAFE Mutex "
" sMMKer 26 113961200 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sBDMmbdOpen 27 113961328 1 FIFO Binary"
" sMailBoxIdx 28 113962216 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sDMMCSNotify 29 113962344 -1 FIFO Count "
" CardMMSem 30 115466208 1 PRIOR | INVERSION_SAFE Mutex
"
" sDMMCardSC 31 115466336 4 FIFO Count "
" sCrmMSem 32 115523624 1 FIFO | DELETE_SAFE Mutex "
" sBDMData 33 115523752 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00018sBDMOp 34 115698632 1 FIFO Binary"
" 00018sBDMCls 35 115698760 0 FIFO Binary"
" CCapabList 36 116081768 1 FIFO Mutex "
" CTermMailId 37 116081896 1 FIFO Mutex "
" CSMMsgMId 38 116082024 1 FIFO Mutex "
" CmdPriSemNm 39 116082152 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" AccCtrlSem 40 116082280 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00018sMMIR 41 116082408 1 FIFO | DELETE_SAFE Mutex "
" MailFilterData42 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" HSCMSEM 43 116134488 1 FIFO Mutex "
" HSCSHMSEM 44 116134616 1 FIFO Mutex "
" HSCCBIMSEM 45 116134744 1 FIFO Mutex "
" HSCMSMSEM 46 116134872 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLog10 47 116136024 1 FIFO Binary"
" BFLG 48 116136152 1 FIFO Binary"
" BAKUPMAP 49 116174376 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SEMPEBAK 50 116174760 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" dbmspgslock 51 116213496 1 PRIOR | INVERSION_SAFE Mutex
"
" dbViewLock 52 116213624 1 FIFO Mutex "
" drdbresMlock 53 116213752 1 FIFO Mutex "
" drdbresSlock 54 116213880 1 FIFO Mutex "
" vserq_data 55 116214008 1 PRIOR | INVERSION_SAFE Mutex
"
" vserq_recycl 56 116214136 1 PRIOR | INVERSION_SAFE Mutex
"
" dbmslistfile 57 116214264 1 FIFO Mutex "
" dbmsmdblist 58 116214392 1 FIFO Mutex "
" dbstt0xc4548 59 116214520 1 FIFO Mutex "
" DEMAGLock 60 116214648 1 FIFO Mutex "
" dbUnMagLk 61 116214776 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" dbmsTxnRetra 62 116214904 1 FIFO Mutex "
" tdbmsbackloc 63 116215032 1 FIFO Mutex "
" dotmap 64 116296680 1 FIFO Mutex "
" dottxnmap 65 116296808 1 FIFO Mutex "
" DBMS_UPGRADE 66 115464856 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SDBW4502 67 115464984 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SDBR4502 68 115465112 16 FIFO Count "
" SDBW4504 69 115465240 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SDBR4504 70 115465368 16 FIFO Count "
" SDBW4506 71 115465496 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SDBR4506 72 115465624 16 FIFO Count "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
M 100 RTRV
" SDBW4508 73 115465752 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SDBR4508 74 115465880 16 FIFO Count "
" SDBW4509 75 115466008 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SDBR4509 76 116296936 16 FIFO Count "
" SDBW4510 77 116297064 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SDBR4510 78 116297192 16 FIFO Count "
" SDBW4512 79 116297320 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SDBR4512 80 116297448 16 FIFO Count "
" sSMNG 81 116297576 1 FIFO Mutex "
" PickSftmSem 82 116297704 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sSBKUP 83 116320632 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" OnlineUsrLck 84 116320760 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SmTrailSem 85 116320888 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SmUserListSem86 116321016 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SmsshSem 87 116321144 1 FIFO Mutex "
" semOpLog 88 116427480 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLog11 89 116427608 1 FIFO Binary"
" semSecuLog 90 116427736 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLog12 91 116427864 1 FIFO Binary"
" SemSmEvtIdx 92 116428248 1 FIFO Mutex "
" CbFunInfo 93 116322288 1 FIFO Mutex "
" MmlRegSem 94 116322416 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" MmlIdxSem 95 116322544 1 FIFO Mutex "
" MmlErrpick 96 116322672 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SEMPAD 97 116520952 1 FIFO Mutex "
" semCommAdap 99 116678920 1 FIFO Mutex "
" semTL1Reg 100 116758616 1 FIFO Mutex "
" semTL1TidGate101 116758744 1 FIFO Mutex "
" semTL1Cmd 102 116758872 1 FIFO Mutex "
" CErrPick 103 116759000 1 FIFO Mutex "
" CErrMsg 104 116759128 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SEMAOBUFrw 105 116799352 1 FIFO Binary"
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sLog13 106 116799480 1 FIFO Binary"
" IPPORT_SEM 107 116843800 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sSnmpTreeR 108 116680856 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sSnmpTreeW 109 116680984 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sSnpTrpinfo 110 116681112 1 FIFO Mutex "
" ALMDATA 111 116930528 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLog14 112 116930656 1 FIFO Binary"
" 00018sALMPos 113 116969096 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00018sBDAlm 114 116969224 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00018BALMR 115 116991064 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00018BALMQ 116 116991192 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" 00018sBDALMAdp117 4294967295 1 FIFO Binary"
" 00018sFiP 118 116991704 1 PRIOR | INVERSION_SAFE Mutex
"
" FileCopyData 119 116844952 1 FIFO Mutex "

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
" SftmMLoad 120 116845592 0 FIFO Binary"

" 00018sFLding 121 116846224 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00018updatePktS122 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLog15 123 117059008 1 FIFO Binary"
" 00018sBDFL 124 117102520 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLog16 125 117138392 1 FIFO Binary"
" sPerSdhMSem 126 117014312 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sPMObjEidSem 127 117230992 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" BDPM18 128 117269176 1 FIFO Mutex "
" BDPMTR18 129 117269304 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sNeCH 130 117492632 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sFIBCH 131 117492760 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sCPUCH 132 117492888 1 FIFO Binary"
" sMacList 133 117493016 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sMacArr 134 117493144 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" TIPSMGRS 135 117615968 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sTIPSDEVCTL 136 117638024 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sOSPFIFSTATE 137 117638152 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sOSPFDEVSTATE138 117638280 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sTIPSDEVHWECCCT139 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLog17 140 117639048 1 FIFO Binary"
" PTMS 141 117639176 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" GR 142 117661016 0 FIFO Count "
" g_pstSemForACL_143 4294967295 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" WLIST 147 117661656 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" rtab 148 117662040 1 FIFO Count "
" rm_isis 149 117662168 1 FIFO Count "
" rip_en 150 117662296 0 FIFO Count "
" o_en 151 117662424 0 FIFO Count "
" sTIPSDCNMNG 152 117862696 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SSL_FILE 153 117884600 1 FIFO Mutex "
" INTIPSEM 154 117884728 1 FIFO Mutex "
" semSSL 155 117182968 1 FIFO Mutex "
" IPSI_RW_QU_0000156 117183096 1 FIFO Mutex "
" IPSI_RW_RD_0001157 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" IPSI_RW_RW_0002158 4294967295 1 FIFO Binary"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

" STATICROUTE 160 117184216 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sDcnDTask 161 118353128 1 FIFO Binary"
" sDcnDFile 162 118353256 1 FIFO Binary"
" sNARNEMAP 163 118353384 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLog18 164 118400120 1 FIFO Binary"
" sLog19 165 118400248 1 FIFO Binary"
" OSI_START 167 118485528 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sECCCHANNELCTL168 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sDCNHISSTAT 169 118485784 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sECCCFGDB 170 118485912 1 FIFO Mutex "
" RT_SEM 171 118486040 1 FIFO Mutex "
" CAL_SSEM 172 117886816 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sOsiTransData173 113798616 1 FIFO Mutex "
" NeidSem 174 113812584 0 FIFO Binary"
" srlm_send 175 120228432 1 FIFO Mutex "
" smMSshCtrlSwitc176 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sCSWDLNoti 177 120395464 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sSwdlAdptMap 178 120574024 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sSendOls 179 120574152 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sdumpramlist 181 120433184 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sGspLogF0 182 120433312 1 PRIOR | INVERSION_SAFE Mutex
"
"
"
" sGspLogM 185 120433696 1 PRIOR | INVERSION_SAFE Mutex
"
" sLimCtrlTree 186 121108600 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLimDbgInfo 187 121108728 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sPool 188 121108856 1 FIFO Binary"
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sIFManager 189 121118832 1 PRIOR | INVERSION_SAFE Mutex
"
" sLibmLogData 190 121109240 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLibmDbgInfo 191 121109368 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLibmFibTblSem192 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sLog20 193 121110136 1 FIFO Binary"
" SDBW2 194 121230568 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SDBR2 195 121230696 16 FIFO Count "
" sTimer 196 121239608 1 FIFO Binary"
" SemAbEvtMng 197 121311368 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sRecv001 198 121311752 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sRead001 199 121311880 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sSend0000 232 121316104 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sLEDCtrl 240 121317128 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sINTRegRW 241 121317256 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" AlmMSmID 242 121317384 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" ALMINFORPT 243 121317512 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" ALMMOD2 244 121317640 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" semPDTBM 245 121317768 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" AlmMSmID 246 121190360 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" semPDTBM 247 121190488 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" LIC_MANAGER 248 121500616 1 FIFO Mutex "
" LIC_LM_SHUTDOWN249 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" LIC_CLIENTINIT250 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" LIC_CLIENTSHUTD251 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" LIC_REP_CMD 252 121501128 0 FIFO Mutex "
" sNgErrpick 253 121386736 1 FIFO Binary"
" TIDNEIDMAP 254 121386864 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sxc_computer 255 121387920 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sxc_bus_lock 256 121599888 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" XCALGO 257 121600016 1 FIFO Mutex "
" SMFORSDHXC 258 121600144 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" SWDLACTIVEGROUP259 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sBPSCURCHN 260 121664392 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sEquipCmdMutex261 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sEquipMsgMutex262 4294967295 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00018SBDcMx 263 122181368 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sIonNbsSch 264 122219160 0 FIFO Binary"
" sIonWrkSrc 265 122219288 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sIonNbsSem 266 122219416 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sIonPDFile 267 122219544 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sIonIPSFile 268 122219672 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sIonDbgInfo 269 122219800 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sSckAccess 270 122219928 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sIonWaitSck 271 122220056 1 FIFO Mutex "
" smRDCoreNewReq272 4294967295 1 FIFO | DELETE_SAFE Mutex "
" smRDCoreNewReq273 4294967295 1 FIFO | DELETE_SAFE Mutex "
" smRDCoreSrvGrp274 4294967295 1 FIFO | DELETE_SAFE Mutex "
" sSHBASEINFO 276 122376200 1 FIFO Mutex "
" sL2TSr1b58 277 121873320 4 FIFO Count "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sL2TSC1b58 278 121873448 -1 FIFO Count "
" sL2TRV1b58 279 121873576 0 FIFO Count "
" Mutex11875ba0280 122580184 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sSendToBs 281 122580312 1 FIFO Binary"
" Mutex1187064c282 122580440 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" Mutex11848e9c283 122580568 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" 00019sBDFL 292 118304632 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00019BALMR 295 123009704 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00019BALMQ 296 123009832 1 FIFO Mutex "
" BDPM19 298 123010088 1 FIFO Mutex "
" AuxSem19 301 123071560 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" 00021sBDFL 307 123130584 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00021BALMR 311 123210776 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00021BALMQ 312 123210904 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" 00022sBDFL 316 123234216 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00022BALMR 322 123336440 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00022BALMQ 323 123336568 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" 00023sBDFL 327 122479376 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00023BALMR 333 123462072 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00023BALMQ 334 123462200 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" 00024sBDFL 338 123485512 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00024BALMR 344 123587736 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00024BALMQ 345 123587864 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

" 00025sBDFL 351 123633208 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00025BALMR 355 123713400 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00025BALMQ 356 123713528 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" 00002sBDFL 362 123758872 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00002BALMR 365 123803320 1 FIFO Mutex "
" 00002BALMQ 366 123803448 1 FIFO Mutex "
" BDPM2 368 123803704 1 FIFO Mutex "
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 RTRV
" sMIIBusy002 370 123842632 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sMIIRead002 371 123842760 1 PRIOR | DELETE_SAFE |
" sL2BkM00009 375 115144872 1 PRIOR | INVERSION_SAFE Mutex
"
"
"
"
>
>
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 16:52:57

M 100 COMPLD
" sGspRpc0 380 113062192 0 FIFO Binary"
" ****************************************************** "
;
>
Related Commands
None
A.18.7 RTRV-SCCID
This command obtains the SCC board id.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
Obtains the SCC board id.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-SCCID:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
r
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"SccID=<SCCID>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<SCCID> SCC Board ID.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SCCID:::100;
l Response Message
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 15:20:26
M 100 COMPLD
"SCCID=18"
;
>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
None
A.18.8 RTRV-MEMPEAK-INFO
Get memory peak usage info
Function
Get memory peak usage info.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-MEMPEAK-INFO:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<MON_BO Indicates the card ID. NA

ARD_ID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"PTNumber=<MEM_PTNUM>,Peak=<MEM_PEAK>,Current=<MEM_CUR>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<MEM_PTNUM> The number of memory partitions.
<MEM_PEAK> The peak memory value of a partition.
<MEM_CUR> The current memory value of a partition.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-MEMPEAK-INFO::SLOT-1-18:100;
l Response Message
DESMOINESPH-6800A-2 2012-05-15 22:36:27
M 100 COMPLD
"PTNUMBER=PT1,PEAK=17284348,CURRENT=17283896"
"PTNUMBER=PT2,PEAK=99299188,CURRENT=95935292"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.9 RTRV-MEMUSAGE-INFO
Get memory usage info
Function
Get memory usage info.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MEMUSAGE-INFO:
[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>::<MON_MODULE_ID>;
Command Parameters
<MON_BO Indicates the card ID. NA

ARD_ID>
<MON_MO Indicates the moudule ID NA

DULE_ID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
^^^"PARTITIONID=<PRT_ID>,ALLOCSIZE=<ALLOC_SIZE>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<PRT_ID> the number of memory block.
<ALLOC_SIZE> The size of alloced memory..
Example
l Command
RTRV-MEMUSAGE-INFO::SLOT-1-8:100::9;
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 15:35:52
M 100 COMPLD
"PARTITIONID=0,ALLOCSIZE=0"
"PARTITIONID=1,ALLOCSIZE=21139307"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.10 RTRV-MEMUTIL-INFO
Get memory utilization of the system.
Function
Get memory utilization of the system in all the memory partitions.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MEMUTIL-INFO:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"PARTID=<PART_ID>,TOTALSIZE=<TOTAL_SIZE>,USEDSIZE=<USED_SIZE>,FREESIZE=<FREE_SI
ZE>,USERATIO=<USE_RATIO>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<PART_ID> the number of memory block.
<TOTAL_SIZE> The total size of memory block.
<USED_SIZE> The used memory size of memory block
<FREE_SIZE> The free memory size of memory block
<USE_RATIO> The ratio of memory block using.
Example
l Command
RTRV-MEMUTIL-INFO::SLOT-1-8:100;
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 15:27:35
M 100 COMPLD
"PARTID=0,TOTALSIZE=58717476,USEDSIZE=14014388,FREESIZE=44703088,USERATIO=23"
"PARTID=1,TOTALSIZE=278804488,USEDSIZE=103849020,FREESIZE=174955468,USERATIO=37"
Related Commands
None
A.18.11 RTRV-MODULE-DUMPINFO
Query dump information of a module.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
Query dump information of a module.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MODULE-DUMPINFO:
[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>::<MM_CLASSID>,<MM_FUNCID>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
<MM_CL Indicates the class ID. NA

ASSID>
<MM_FU Indicates the function ID. NA

NCID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"INFO=<MODULE_INFO>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<MODULE_INFO> dump information of a module. It is a string with a maximum

of 1400 bytes.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-MODULE-DUMPINFO::slot-1-8:100::\"HSC.IHSC.CHSCModule\",\"00018\";
l Response Message
NE118 2000-01-03 15:15:55
M 100 COMPLD
"INFO=CHSCModule"
"INFO= m_dwHscTimerID = 0x8d4cebc"
"INFO= m_wTwoLogicBoardIDSum = 35"
"INFO= m_wTwoPhyBoardIDSum = 35"
"INFO= m_dwManualCmdFlag = 40321"
"INFO= m_dwCount = 0"
"INFO= m_dwHandleMaker = 3"
"INFO= g_dwHscPrint = 0"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.12 RTRV-MODULE-LISTINFO
Query module information of the given module
Function
Query module information of the given module
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-MODULE-LISTINFO:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"CLASS_ID=<MM_CLASSID>,FUNC_ID=<MM_FUNCID>,PTR_ADDR=<MM_PTRADDR>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<MM_CLASSID> The string of the class ID. It is a string with a maximum of

1400 bytes.
<MM_FUNCID> The string of the function ID. It is a string with a maximum

of 1400 bytes.
<MM_PTRADDR> The pointer of module's address
Example
l Command
RTRV-MODULE-LISTINFO::SLOT-1-8:100;
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 15:21:38
M 100 RTRV
"CLASS_ID=DMM.IDMM.CDMM,FUNC_ID=DMM,PTR_ADDR=205613964"
"CLASS_ID=CRM.ICRM.CCRM,FUNC_ID=CRM,PTR_ADDR=205850008"
"CLASS_ID=BDM.IBDManager.CBDMManager,FUNC_ID=BDM,PTR_ADDR=205864132"
"CLASS_ID=Sm.ISmReg.CSmReg,FUNC_ID=00018,PTR_ADDR=205603528"
"CLASS_ID=MMI.IMMI.CMmiModule,FUNC_ID=00018,PTR_ADDR=205939548"
"CLASS_ID=HSC.IHSC.CHSCModule,FUNC_ID=00018,PTR_ADDR=205948916"
"CLASS_ID=HBU.IHBU.CHBUModule,FUNC_ID=00018,PTR_ADDR=205961136"
"CLASS_ID=PE.IPeManager.CPeManager,FUNC_ID=00018,PTR_ADDR=205988444"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.13 RTRV-QUELENALM-STATE
Get Queue length alarm flag
Function
Get Queue length alarm flag
Usage Note
None
Category
MON

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-QUELENALM-STATE:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<State>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<State> The Queue length alarm flag state.
Example
l Command
RTRV-QUELENALM-STATE::SLOT-1-8:100;
l Response Message
NEW-NE 1990-01-01 14:46:42
M 100 COMPLD
"STATUS=DISABLE"
;
>
Related Commands
None
A.18.14 RTRV-REBOOT-LOG
Get the reboot records of board
Function
Get the reboot records of board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-REBOOT-LOG:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<MonMemDmgInfo>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<MonMemDmgInfo> The records of reboot information.
Example
l Command
RTRV-REBOOT-LOG::SLOT-1-8:100;
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 15:40:28
M 100 RTRV
"
****************************************************************
System startup time : 2005.07.27 11:02:05.000
System startup cputick : 0x00000000 e39940e8
System reboot at file : Unknow, Line: 0
System reboot by task : tShell0, VID: -1, OsalID: 0x63fa430

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
System reboot type : 1, Reset by calling reboot(0)

System reboot CPUID : -2
System reboot time : 2000.01.03 11:47:06.040
System reboot cputick : 0x00000181 ad4500f4
System reboot callstack:
<-- 0x018a86e0(CSTK_GetCallStackEx) <-- 0x018fa6d0(RBT_RebootSaveInfo)
<-- 0x018fb128(RBT_RebootVxHook) <-- 0x01ab34a0(reboot)
<-- 0x01ad62a8(shellInternalFunctionCall) <-- 0x01ada978(shellInterpCInit)
<-- 0x01adaa5c(shellInterpCInit) <-- 0x01adad58(shellInterpCInit)
<-- 0x01ade894(shellInterpCparse) "
>
>
NE 2000-01-03 15:40:28
M 100 COMPLD
"<-- 0x01adedb8(shellInterpCparse)
<-- 0x01ae3888(shellExec) <-- 0x01ae3e44(shellTask)
<-- 0x01a0bde4(vxTaskEntry)
****************************************************************
"
Related Commands
None
A.18.15 RTRV-RESERVEMEM
Query configuration information of general reserved memory
Function
Query configuration information of general reserved memory
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-RESERVEMEM:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"BLOCK_NUM=<RESVMEM_BLKNUM>,BLOCK_NAME=<RESVMEM_BLKNAME>,BLOCK_SIZE=<RESVMEM_BL
KSIZE>"<cr><lf>
^^^"POSITION=<RESVMEM_BLKPOS>,ISCONFIG=<RESVMEM_CFGFLAG>,ISALLOC=<RESVMEM_ALLOCFLA
G>"<cr><lf>
^^^"FILE=<RESVMEM_FILE>",LINE=<RESVMEM_LINE><cr><lf>
Response Parameters
<RESVMEM_BLKNUM> The number of memory block.
<RESVMEM_BLKNAME> The name of memory block.
<RESVMEM_BLKSIZE> The size of memory block.
<RESVMEM_BLKPOS> The position of memory block.
<RESVMEM_CFGFLAG> Is the memory configured?
<RESVMEM_ALLOC- Is the memory alloced?

FLAG>
<RESVMEM_FILE> The file' name of mallocing memory.
<RESVMEM_LINE> The line of mallocing memory position in the file.
Example
l Command
RTRV-RESERVEMEM::SLOT-1-8:100;
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 14:43:43
M 100 COMPLD
"BLOCK_NUM=0,BLOCK_NAME=MDBG,BLOCK_SIZE=102400,POSITION=534776376,ISCONFIG=0,ISALL
OC=1,FILE=vos_callstack.cpp,LINE=1157"
"BLOCK_NUM=1,BLOCK_NAME=NUSE,BLOCK_SIZE=102400,POSITION=534878776,ISCONFIG=0,ISALL
OC=1,FILE=vos_callstack.cpp,LINE=1201"
"BLOCK_NUM=2,BLOCK_NAME=C_PK,BLOCK_SIZE=14408,POSITION=534981176,ISCONFIG=0,ISALLO

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
C=1,FILE=mon_thr.cpp,LINE=1181"
"BLOCK_NUM=3,BLOCK_NAME=F_PK,BLOCK_SIZE=12,POSITION=534995584,ISCONFIG=0,ISALLOC=1
,FILE=mon_thr.cpp,LINE=1225"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.16 RTRV-SWTTHRINFO
Retrieves status of memory usage threshold check, VFS usage threshold check cpu usage
threshold check and message over check.
Function
Retrieves status of memory usage threshold check, VFS usage threshold check cpu usage
threshold check and message over check.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-SWTTHRINFO:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"name=<MSGTH_FIELD>,value=<MSGTH_VALUE>"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<MSGTH_FIELD> The name of threshold check type.

l MsgOverThrVal: indicates message number threshold.
l MemOverThrVal: indicates memory usage threshold.
l VFSOverThrVal: indicates VFS memory usage
threshold.
l CPUOverThrVal: indicates CPU usage threshold.
<MSGTH_VALUE> The value of threshold check.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SWTTHRINFO::SLOT-1-8:100;
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 14:57:46
M 100 COMPLD
"NAME=MsgOverThrVal,VALUE=85"
"NAME=MsgOverThrSwt,VALUE=disable"
"NAME=MemOverThrVal,VALUE=85"
"NAME=MemOverThrSwt,VALUE=disable"
"NAME=VFSOverThrVal,VALUE=85"
"NAME=VFSOverThrSwt,VALUE=disable"
"NAME=CPUOverThrVal,VALUE=85"
"NAME=CPUOverThrSwt,VALUE=disable"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.17 RTRV-SYMADDR
Retrieves the current function's call stack of the specified task
Function
Retrieves the current function's call stack of the specified task
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-SYMADDR:
[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>::<MON_FILE_NAME_SIXTY>;
Command Parameters
Value
<MON_BOAR Indicates the card ID. NA

D_ID>
<MON_FILE_N The name of function NA

AME_SIXTY>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"SYMBOL_NAME=<MON_FILE_NAME_SIXTY>,SYMBOL_ADDRESS=<MON_SYMBOL_ADDR>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<MON_FILE_NAME_SIX- The name of function. It is a string with a maximum of 1400

TY> bytes.
<MON_SYMBOL_ADDR> The address of function.
Example
l Command
RTRV-SYMADDR::SLOT-1-18:100::\"VOS_Entry\";
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 14:16:14
M 100 COMPLD
"SYMBOL_NAME=VOS_Entry,SYMBOL_ADDRESS=19913448"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.18 RTRV-TASKSTACK
Retrieves the symbol address of the symbol name given

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Function
Retrieves the symbol address of the symbol name given
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-TASKSTACK:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>::<TaskName>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
<TaskNa The name of task NA

me>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"StackDepth=<StackDepth>,FuncAddr=<FuncAddr>,FuncName=<FuncName>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<StackDepth> the depth of task's stack.
<FuncAddr> The address of stack.
<FuncName> The description of function's name. It is a string with a

maximum of 1400 bytes.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Example
l Command
RTRV-TASKSTACK::SLOT-1-8:100::\"tTL1CmdRsp\";
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 14:04:46
M 100 COMPLD
"STACKDEPTH=0,FUNCADDR=26093876,FUNCNAME=OSAL_TaskDelay"
"STACKDEPTH=1,FUNCADDR=25975788,FUNCNAME=VOS_TaskDelay"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.19 RTRV-TASKONMSGQUE
Retrives the list of tasks on a message queue.
Function
This command retrives the list of tasks on a message queue.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-TASKONMSGQUE:
[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>::<MON_MSGQUE_NAME_FTN>;
Command Parameters
<MON_BOARD_ID> Indicates the Card ID.
<MON_MSGQUE_NAME_ Indicates the name of a NA

FTN> message queue.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
^^^"<MonTaskInfo>"
;
Response Parameters
<MonTaskInfo> Indicates the detail information a mesage queue.
Example
l Command
RTRV-TASKONMSGQUE::SLOT-1-18:100::"qTL1Auto";
l Response Message
DESMOINESPH-6800A-2 2012-05-15 22:52:38
M 100 RTRV
" *******************************************************"
" Queue ID = 31"
" Queue Name = qTL1Auto "
" Queue Mode = FIFO SYN"
" Total Length = 4096"
" Current Length = 0"
" Used Percent = 0%"
" Peak Length = 103"
" Peak Time = 2012.05.14 15:40:18"
" Max Msg Size = 16"
" Queue Msg Start Addr = 0x903cf80"
" Queue Msg Head Index = 200"
" Queue Msg Tail Index = 200"
" Total Write Count = 37064"
" Total Read Count = 57394"
" Total Overload Alarm Count = 0"
" Queue Overload Flag = 0"
" Total OverLoad Recover Count = 0"
>
Related Commands
None
A.18.20 RTRV-TASKONSEM
Retrives the list of tasks on a semaphore.
Function
This command retrives the list of tasks on a semaphore.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Security
Maintenance
Command Syntax
RTRV-TASKONSEM:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>::<MON_SEM_NAME>;
Command Parameters
<MON_BOARD_ID> Indicates the Card ID.
<MON_SEM_NAME> Indicates the name of a NA

semaphore.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"<MonTaskInfo>"
;
Response Parameters
<MonTaskInfo> Indicates the detail information a semaphore.
Example
l Command
RTRV-TASKONSEM::SLOT-1-18:100::"CSMMsgMId";
l Response Message
DESMOINESPH-6800A-2 2012-05-15 23:02:50
M 100 RTRV
" ******************************************************"
" Semaphore Name = CSMMsgMId"
" Semaphore ID = 38"
" Semaphore Count = 1"
" Semaphore Mode = FIFO"
" Semaphore Type = Mutex "
" Create Task ID = 6"
" Last P Task ID = 124"
" Last V Task ID = 124"
" P Block Task ID = 0"
" Total Syn P Number = 9"
" Total Asy P Number = 0"
" Total V Number = 9"
" Syn P Timeout Number = 0"
" Syn P Fail Number = 0"
" Asy P Fail Number = 0"
" V Fail Number = 0"
" Mutex Recur Lock Number = 0"

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
" Mutex Owner OSAL Task ID = 0xffffffff"

" Mutex Owner Task ID = 0xffffffff"
>
>
DESMOINESPH-6800A-2 2012-05-15 23:02:50

M 100 COMPLD
" Mutex Owner Task Name = Unkown"
" ****************************************************** "
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.21 RTRV-VFS-PEAKINFO
Query the available peak value of file system and current value
Function
Query the available peak value of file system and current value
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-VFS-PEAKINFO:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
r

OARD_I
D>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^"VFS_REGION=<VFS_REGION>,VFSTH_CURVAL=<VFSTH_CURVAL>,VFSTH_PEAKVAL=<VFSTH_PEAKV
AL>"<cr><lf>
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Parameters
<VFS_REGION> the region of file system. It is a string with a maximum of

1400 bytes.
<VFSTH_CURVAL> The value of current space.
<VFSTH_PEAKVAL> The value of peak space.
Example
l Command
RTRV-VFS-PEAKINFO::SLOT-1-8:100;
l Response Message
NE 2000-01-03 14:37:02
M 100 COMPLD
"VFS_REGION=mfs,VFSTH_CURVAL=2107392,VFSTH_PEAKVAL=2107392"
"VFS_REGION=ofs1,VFSTH_CURVAL=23363584,VFSTH_PEAKVAL=23363584"
"VFS_REGION=ofs2,VFSTH_CURVAL=4177920,VFSTH_PEAKVAL=4177920"
;
Related Commands
None
A.18.22 RTRV-BDINFO-EQPT
Retrieves ELabel.
Function
This command retrieves the hardware and software information about the equipment.
Usage Note
None
Category
System
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-BDINFO-EQPT:[<TID>]:<SFTM_SLOT>:<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
SFTM_SLOT Indicates the card ID. NA
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^"<contents>" <cr> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
RTRV-BDINFO-EQPT::SLOT-1-7:100
l Response Message
NE 1990-02-18 21:57:41
M 100 COMPLD
"\"/$[ArchivesInfo Version]
/$ArchivesInfoVersion=2.0
/$[Log]
/$Log1=26817,030376730,2006-02-23
[Board Properties]
BoardType=SSC6SCC01
BarCode=0376731062000342
BOM=BOM0303767301
\""
"\"/$Item=03037673
/cDescription=
/eDescription=OptiX Metro 6100,SSC6SCC01,System Control&Communication Board
/$PCBVersion=
Manufactured=2006-02-23
ManufactureCode=1
/$CLEICode=
\""
"\"
/$[Daughter Board Properties]
/$Daughter_BoardNum=0
/$[Software]
/$SoftwareNum=0
\""
;
Related Commands
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.18.23 SET-CPUTESTSTA
Sets the switch flag to monitor the running status of all tasks.
Function
This command sets the switch flag to monitor the running status of all tasks.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Super
Command Syntax
SET-CPUTESTSTA:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>::<CPUSTA>;
Command Parameters
<MON_BOAR Indicates the Board ID.

D_ID>
<CPUSTA> Indicates the switch flag. The valid values are NA

Enable and Disable.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
SET-CPUTESTSTA::SLOT-1-18:100::ENABLE;
l Response Message
NE 2005-08-02 17:52:45
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.29.3 RTRV-DBMS-AUTOBACKUP
A.18.24 WRT-BB
This command backs up the black box to flash.
Function
Backs up the black box to flash.
Usage Note
None
Category
MON
Security
Debug
Command Syntax
WRT-BB:[<TID>]:<MON_BOARD_ID>:<CTAG>;
Command Parameters
<MON_BOAR Indicates the board ID.

D_ID>
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
WRT-BB::SLOT-1-18:100
l Response Message
WEBSTERCITY-6800A-1 2012-06-06 15:29:56
M 100 COMPLD

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
;
>
Related Commands
A.29.3 RTRV-DBMS-AUTOBACKUP
A.19 Performance Management

This section lists commands which used to manage the system performance.
A.19.1 ED-PMALMCTRL-<MOD2>
Edits the parameters of the alarm table that affect the condition of reporting events.
Function
This command edits the parameters of the alarm table.
Usage Note
None
Category
Performance
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-PMALMCTRL-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>::[<MONTYPE>],[<LOCN>],
[<DIRN>],[<RPTMODE>],[<INTERVAL>],[<RTHR>],[<FTHR>],[<ENFLAG>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
<MOD2> Indicates the second modifier of the report NA

message, which identifies the type of the entity that
reports the fault. The valid values are:
l ALL|COM|OC3|OC12|OC48|OC192|OC768
l FETH|GETH|XGETH|VCG|OTU1|OTU2|
OTU5G|OTU3
l ODU1|ODU2|ODU3|ODU5G|EC|OC|OCH|
WDM|EQPT
l OMS|OTS|OSC|MCACHN|FC100|FC200|
FC400|FC1000|FC1200
l ODU0TCM1|ODU0TCM2|ODU0TCM3|
ODU0TCM4|ODU0TCM5|ODU0TCM6
l ODU5GTCM1|ODU5GTCM2|
ODU5GTCM3|ODU5GTCM4|
ODU5GTCM5|ODU5GTCM6
<AID> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ALL

ID>-<PORT ID>. This parameter is optional. The
default value is ALL, which indicates all ports in
the MOD2 on the NE. If <MOD2> is ALL, <AID>
is null.
<MONTYPE Indicates the PM parameters that are supported. ALL

> The default value is ALL.
<LOCN> Indicates the location, in reference to the entity NA

identified by the <AID>, being performance
monitored. The valid values are as follows:
l NEND (near end condition, alarm, or event
occurred at the near end of the system)
l FEND (far end condition, alarm, or event
occurred at the far end of the system)
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of monitoring relative to the BTH

entity identified by <AID>. The valid values are as
follows:
l BTH (both directions)
l TRMT (transmit direction only)
l RCV (receive direction only)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<RPTMODE Indicates the report mode. The valid value are as RPTALL
> follows:
l RPTUP: indicates that only rising events are
reported.
l RPTDOWN: indicates that only falling events
are reported.
l RPTALL: indicates that rising and falling
events are reported.
The null value indicates that the last setting of the
value does not change.
<INTERVAL Indicates the alarm sample interval. By default, the 10

> interval is 10 seconds. The valid value ranges from
5 to 600 seconds.
<RTHR> Indicates the rising threshold. The valid value NA

ranges from 1 to 4294967295 (0xFFFFFFFF). The
rising threshold must be higher than the falling
threshold.
<FTHR> Indicates the falling threshold. The valid value NA

ranges from 0 to 4294967294 (0xFFFFFFFE). The
falling threshold must be lower than the rising
threshold.
<ENFLAG> Indicates the state flag. The valid values are DISABLE
ENABLE and DISABLE. By default, <ENFLAG>
is DISABLE if <PRDTP> is 30s and prdvar. If
<PRDTP> is 30m, <ENFLAG> is ENABLE.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-PMALMCTRL-FETH::FAC-4-1:500::ETHDROP,,,,,ENABLE;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-12 20:16:29
M 500 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
A.19.2 RTRV-PMALMCTRL-<MOD2>
A.19.2 RTRV-PMALMCTRL-<MOD2>
Retrieves parameters of the alarm table.
Function
This command retrieves parameters of the alarm table.
Usage Note
None
Category
Performance
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PMALMCTRL-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>::[<MONTYPE>],[<LOCN>],
[<DIRN>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
r
<MOD2> Indicates the second modifier of the report message, NA

which identifies the type of the entity that reports the fault.
l ALL
l COM,OC3,OC12,OC48,OC192,OC768
l FETH,GETH,XGETH,VCG,OTU1,OTU2,OTU5G,
OTU3,ODU1,ODU2,ODU3,ODU5G
l EC,OC,OCH,WDM,EQPT,OMS,OTS,OSC,MCAC
HN,FC100,FC200,FC400,FC1000,FC1200
l ODU0TCM1,ODU0TCM2,ODU0TCM3,ODU0TC
M4,ODU0TCM5,ODU0TCM6
l ODU5GTCM1,ODU5GTCM2,ODU5GTCM3,ODU
5GTCM4,ODU5GTCM5,ODU5GTCM6
<AID> The valid format is FAC-<SHELF ID>-<SLOT ID>- ALL

<PORT ID>. This parameter is optional. The default
value is ALL, which indicates all ports in the MOD2 on
the NE. If <MOD2> is ALL, <AID> is null.
<MONTY Indicates the PM parameters that are supported. The ALL

PE> default value is ALL.
<LOCN> Indicates the location, in reference to the entity identified ALL

by the <AID> being performance monitored. The valid
l NEND (near end condition, alarm, or event occurred
at the near end of the system)
l FEND (far end condition, alarm, or event occurred at
the far end of the system)
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of monitoring relative to the entity ALL

identified by <AID>. The valid values are as follows:
l ALL (both directions)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<AID>,<AIDTYPE>:<MONTYPE>,[<LOCN>],
[<DIRN>],<RPTMODE>,<INTERVAL>,<RTHR>,<FTHR>,<ENFLAG>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AIDTYPE> Indicates the type of access identifier <MOD2>.
<MONTYPE> Indicates the PM parameters that are supported.
<LOCN> Indicates the location, in reference to the entity identified by the <AID>,
being performance monitored. The valid values are as follows:
l NEND (near end condition, alarm, or event occurred at the near end of
the system)
l FEND (far end condition, alarm, or event occurred at the far end of the
system)
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of monitoring relative to the entity identified by

<AID>. The valid values are as follows:
l ALL (both directions)
<RPTMODE> Indicates the report mode. The valid value are as follows:
l RPTUP: indicates that only rising events are reported.
l RPTDOWN: indicates that only falling events are reported.
l RPTALL: indicates that rising and falling events are reported.
<INTERVAL Indicates the alarm sample interval. By default, the interval is 10 seconds.
> The valid value ranges from 5 to 600 seconds.
<RTHR> Indicates the rising threshold. The valid value ranges from 1 to 4294967295
(0xFFFFFFFF). The rising threshold must be higher than the falling
threshold.
<FTHR> Indicates the falling threshold. The valid value ranges from 0 to 4294967294
(0xFFFFFFFE). The falling threshold must be lower than the rising
threshold.
<ENFLAG> Indicates the state flag. The valid values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
Example
l Command
RTRV-PMALMCTRL-FETH::FAC-4-1:400::ETHDROP;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-12 20:20:45
M 400 COMPLD
"FAC-4-1,FETH:ETHDROP,,,RPTALL,10,1,0,ENABLE"
;
Related Commands
A.19.1 ED-PMALMCTRL-<MOD2>
A.19.3 ED-PMHISTCTRL
Modifies all history control parameters.
Function
This command modifies all history control parameters.
Usage Note
None
Category
Performance
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
ED-PMHISTCTRL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<PRDTP>, [<RECNUM>],[<PRD>],[<ENFLAG>]
Command Parameters
Value
<PRDTP> Indicates the period type. The valid values are 30 seconds, 30 30m
minutes, prdvar, and prdvar2. <PRD> must be null unless the
parameter is prdvar.
<RECNUM Indicates the maximum number of records. The valid value NA

> ranges from 1 to 50. The default value varies according to the
period.
<PRD> Indicates the period. The valid value ranges from 300 seconds NA
to 43200 seconds, that is, 5 minutes to 12 hours. And the value
must be the multiple of 30.<PRDTP> must be prdvar unless
the parameter is null. If <PRDTP> is prdvar, this parameter
may be not null.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<ENFLAG Indicates the state flag. The valid values are enable and NA
> disable. By default, <ENFLAG> is disable, if <PRDTP> is 30
seconds or prdvar. If <PRDTP> is 30 minutes, <ENFLAG> is
enable.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
ED-PMHISTCTRL:::100::30S,,,ENABLE;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-12 19:41:28
M 100 COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.19.4 RTRV-PMHISTCTRL
A.19.4 RTRV-PMHISTCTRL
Retrieves parameters of the history control table.
Function
This command retrieves parameters of the history control table.
Usage Note
None
Category
Performance
Security
Retrieve

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
RTRV-PMHISTCTRL:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::[<PRDTP>];
Command Parameters
Value
<PRDTP> Indicates the period type. The valid values are 30s, 30m, PRDALL
prdvar, prdvar2, and PRDALL.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
^^^"<PRDTP>,<RECNUM>,<PRD>,<ENFLAG>"<cr><lf>
;
Response Parameters
<PRDTP> Indicates the period type. The valid values are 30s, 30m, prdvar, and
prdvar2.
<RECNUM> Indicates the maximum number of records. The valid value ranges
from 1 to 50.
<PRD> Indicates the period. The valid values are 300-43200 seconds, that is,
5 minutes to 12 hours.
<ENFLAG> Indicates the state flag. The valid values are ENABLE and
DISABLE. By default, <ENFLAG> is DISABLE if <PRDTP> is 30s
and prdvar. If <PRDTP> is 30m, <ENFLAG> is ENABLE.
Example
l Command
RTRV-PMHISTCTRL:::120::;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-12 20:05:41
M 120 COMPLD
"30S,16,30,DISABLE"
"30M,16,1800,ENABLE"
"PRDVAR,16,900,DISABLE"
"PRDVAR2,6,86400,DISABLE"
;
Related Commands
A.19.3 ED-PMHISTCTRL

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
A.19.5 INIT-REG-<MOD2>
Initializes storage registers.
Function
This command initializes one or more storage registers or event counters associated with an
equipment unit or facility on the NE to a specific value. In the most cases, these registers contain
the PM information accumulated in previous intervals.
Usage Note
When <MONDAT> and <MONTM> are both null, it indicates that the current PM data is
cleared. If one of them is not null, it indicates that the history PM data is cleared.
Category
Performance
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
INIT-REG-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>::<MONTYPE>,[<MONVAL>],[<LOCN>],
[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>],[<MONDAT>][,<MONTM>];
Command Parameters
r

l EC,OC,OCH,WDM,EQPT,OMS,OTS,OSC
l OC3,OC12,OC48,OC192,OC768
l FETH,GETH,XGETH,VCG
l OTU1,OTU2,OTU5G,OTU3
l ODU1,ODU2,ODU3,ODU5G
l FC100,FC200,FC400,FC1200
l ODU1TCM1,ODU1TCM2,ODU1TCM3,ODU1TCM4,
ODU1TCM5,ODU1TCM6
ODU2TCM5,ODU2TCM6
ODU3TCM5,ODU3TCM6
l ODU5GTCM1,ODU5GTCM2,ODU5GTCM3,ODU5G
TCM4,ODU5GTCM5,ODU5GTCM6

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

r
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that identifies the equipment ALL
unit, facility, subscriber line, trunk, link, packet link, or
signaling link on the NE. This parameter depends on the
command code modifier and what kind of performance
monitoring data is being retrieved.
<MONTY Indicates the type of monitored performance for which a ALL

PE> value is requested.
<MONVA Indicates the value at which the register identified by 0

L> <MONTYPE> is to be initialized. It is a decimal number.
<LOCN> Indicates the location, in reference to the entity identified by ALL

<AID>, being performance monitored. NEND (near end)
refers to PM values obtained at the identified entity. FEND
(far end) refers to PM values obtained at a distant entity that
is connected to the identified entity.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of monitoring relative to the entity BTH

identified by <AID>. <DIRN> defaults to BTH, which
indicates both directions. The valid values are TRMT
(transmit direction only) and RCV (receive direction only).
<TMPER> Indicates the accumulation time period for the PM 15-MIN

information. The valid values are 15-MIN and 1-DAY.
<MONDA Indicates the date that the requested PM period specified in Current date
T> <TMPER> began. The valid format is MM-DD.
<MONTM Indicates the time of the day that the requested PM period Current time
> specified in <TMPER> began. (HH-MM)
Response Syntax
<cr><lf> <lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
INIT-REG-OC3::FAC-1-3-1:100::ALL,10,,,15-MIN,7-1,0-0;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 15:57:49
M 100 COMPLD
;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Related Commands
None
A.19.6 RTRV-PM-<MOD2>
Retrieves the performance of <MOD2>.
Function
This command sends the current setting of PM data associated with one or more equipment units,
facilities, links, or signaling links within the NE.
Usage Note
None
Category
Performance
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PM-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>::[<MONTYPE>],[<MONLEV>],
[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>],[<MONDAT>][,<MONTM>];
Command Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier. ALL
<MONTY Indicates the type of monitored performance for which a ALL

PE> value is requested.
<MONLE Indicates the discriminating level for the requested 1-UP

V> monitored parameter.The valid values are 0-UP and 1-UP.

by <AID>, being performance monitored. The valid values
are NEND,FEND and ALL.NEND (near end) refers to PM
values obtained at the identified entity. FEND (far end)
refers to PM values obtained at a distant entity that is
connected to the identified entity. All values will be
retrieved if nothing is entered for this parameter.

identified by <AID>. The valid values are TRMT (transmit
direction only),RCV (receive direction only) and BTH
(both directions).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

<MONDA Indicates the date that the requested PM period specified in The current date
T> <TMPER> began. The valid format is MM-DD.
<MONTM Indicates the time of day that the requested PM period The current time
> specified in <TMPER> began. (HH-MM)
Response Syntax
The response format depends on whether any specified PM values exist.
If there are no values to report, the format is as follows:

<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^<rspdhr> <cr> <lf>
M^^<ctag>COMPLD <cr> <lf> ;
Otherwise, if there is at least one PM value to report, the format is as follows:

<cr> <lf> <lf>
<rspblk> + ;
where <rspblk> has the format:
^^^"<AID>[,<AIDTYPE>]:<MONTYPE>,<MONVAL>,[<VLDTY>],
[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>],[<MONDAT>] [,<MONTM>]" <cr> <lf>
NOTE
The normal response MUST contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. It is allowed to contain multiple
<rspblk>s if applicable.
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that identifies the equipment unit, facility,
subscriber line, trunk, link, packet link, or signaling link on the NE. This
parameter depends on the command code modifier and what kind of
performance monitoring data is being retrieved.
<AIDTYPE Indicates the type of AID.

>
<MONTYPE Indicates the type of monitored performance for which a value is requested.
>
<MONVAL Indicates the discriminating level for the requested monitored parameter.
>
<VLDTY> Indicates the validity indicator for the reported PM data. It indicates whether
the information for the specified time period is accumulated over the entire
time period or some portion of it.
The valid values are VALID and INVALID.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<LOCN> Indicates the location, in reference to the entity identified by <AID>, being
performance monitored. NEND (near end) refers to PM values obtained at
the identified entity. FEND (far end) refers to PM values obtained at a distant
entity that is connected to the identified entity.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of monitoring relative to the entity identified by

<AID>. <DIRN> defaults to BTH, which indicates both directions. The valid
values are TRMT (transmit direction only) and RCV (receive direction only).
<TMPER> Indicates the accumulation time period for the PM information.
<MONDAT Indicates the date that the requested PM period specified in <TMPER> began.
> The valid format is MM-DD.
<MONTM> Indicates the time of day that the requested PM period specified in <TMPER>
began.
Example
l Command
RTRV-PM-OC48::FAC-1-4-1:123::CV-S,0-UP,NEND,,15-MIN,04-09,17-00;
l Response Message
NE 2003-04-09 17:25:12
M 123 COMPLD
"FAC-1-4-1,OC48:CV-S,2,VALID,NEND,RCV,15-MIN,04-09,17-15"
Related Commands
None
A.19.7 REPT^PM^<MOD2>
Reports information about the performance monitoring.
Function
This event is generated by an NE to inform the OS or maintenance personnel about the PM.
Parameters are provided to report the PM data from multiple data collection intervals in a single
message for NEs that store a history of the PM information. The REPT PM parameter is an
automatic message that is generated by the NE. Performance monitoring data can also be
retrieved on demand by using a RTRV-PM-<MOD2> command. However,
REPT^PM^<MOD2> is not used to respond to a RTRV-PM-<MOD2> command.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Performance
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
None
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
A^^<atag>^REPT^PM^<MOD2>
<cr> <lf> <rspblk> + ;
^^^"[<AID>]:<MONTYPE>,<MONVAL>,[<VLDTY>],
[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>],[<MONDAT>]
[,<MONTM>]" <cr> <lf>
Response Parameters
<MOD2> The valid values are EQPT, rr, LINK, PLK, SLK, and COM.
<AID> Indicates the access identifier for a single equipment unit, facility, link, packet
link, or signaling link on the NE to which the retrieved monitored parameter
value pertains.
<MONTYP Indicates the type of the monitored parameter whose value is being reported.
E>
<MONVA Indicates the measured value of the monitored parameter.

L>
<VLDTY> Indicates the validity indicator for the reported PM data. It indicates whether
the information for the specified time period is accumulated over the entire
time period or some portion of it.
The valid values are VALID and INVALID.
<LOCN> Indicates the location, in reference to the entity identified by <AID>, from
which the PM value is being retrieved. NEND (near end) refers to PM values
obtained at the identified entity. FEND (far end) refers to PM values obtained
at a distant entity that is connected to the identified entity.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of PM relative to the entity identified by <AID>. The
valid values are TRMT (transmit direction only) and RCV (receive direction
only).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TMPER> Indicates the accumulation time period for the PM information. The valid
values are 15-MIN and 1-DAY.
<MONDA Indicates the date that he PM period specified in <TMPER> began.

T>
<MONTM Indicates the time that the PM period specified in <TMPER> began.
>
Example
l Command
None
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 16:14:01
A 335 REPT PM EQPT
"SLOT-1-3:BDTEMPMAX,312,INVALID,NEND,RCV,1-DAY,07-08,16-12"
;
Related Commands
A.24.12 ALW-PMREPT-ALL
A.24.13 INH-PMREPT-ALL
A.19.8 RTRV-PMDAY
Retrieves the start time for the daily collection of PM data.
Function
This command retrieves the start time of the daily PM data collection period of an NE. The
current start time of the daily data collection period can be set by using the SET-PMDAY
command.
Usage Note
None
Category
Performance
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-PMDAY:[<TID>]::<CTAG>;

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
None
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
^^^"<pm-day-start>" <cr> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
<PM-DAY- The valid format is HOD, (hour-of-day) and ranges from 0 to 23.
START>
Example
l Command
RTRV-PMDAY:::123456;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 16:10:19
M 123456 COMPLD
"7"
;
Related Commands
A.19.9 SET-PMDAY
A.19.9 SET-PMDAY
Sets time of day that the performance monitoring starts.
Function
This command allows the start time of the daily PM data collection period to begin at any hour
of the day.
Usage Note
None
Category
Performance
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
SET-PMDAY:[<TID>]::<CTAG>::<PM-DAY-START>;
Command Parameters
Value
<PM-DAY- The format for <PM-DAY-START> is HOD (hour of day) 0

START> and ranges from 0 to 23.
To effect resetting the NE clock to the default value of 00:00
hours, the <PM-DAY-START> parameter should contain
value 0.
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
M^^<ctag>^COMPLD <cr> <lf>;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
SET-PMDAY:::C::7;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 16:07:50
M C COMPLD
;
>
Related Commands
A.19.8 RTRV-PMDAY
A.19.10 RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
Retrieves a threshold.
Function
This command instructs an NE to send the current threshold level of one or more monitored
parameters that triggers an automatic message if the threshold is exceeded. These threshold
levels may apply to one or more equipment units, facilities, subscriber lines, trunks, links, packet
links, or signaling links on the NE.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Performance
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-TH-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>[::[<MONTYPE>],[<LOCN>]
[,<TMPER>]];
Command Parameters
Value
<MOD2> l OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, OC768 ALL

l FETH, GETH, XGETH, 100GETH
l OTU1, OTU2, OTU5G, OTU3, OTU4
l ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODU5G, ODU0,ODU4,ODU-
FLEX
l STM1,STM4,STM16,STM64,STM256,ODU0TCM1
,ODU0TCM2,ODU0TCM3,ODU0TCM4,ODU0TC
M5,ODU0TCM6,3GHDSDI,ANY,ALL,COM,DVB
ASI,EQPT,ESCON,FDDI,FICON,FICON4G,FICON
8G,FICONEXP,HDSDI,IBSDR,IBDDR,ISC1G,ISC2
G,MCACHN,OCH,PL,SDI,WDM
l EC, OC, OMS, OTS, OSC
l FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FC1200
l ODU1TCM1, ODU1TCM2, ODU1TCM3,
ODU1TCM4, ODU1TCM5, ODU1TCM6
l ODU5GTCM1, ODU5GTCM2, ODU5GTCM3,
ODU5GTCM4, ODU5GTCM5, ODU5GTCM6
<AID> Indicates the access identifier for a equipment unit, NA

facility, subscriber line, trunk, link, packet link, or
signaling link on the NE. This parameter depends on
<MOD2> and for which threshold levels are being
retrieved.
<MONTYPE> Indicates the type of monitored performance for which a ALL

value is requested. A.32.3.10 MONTYPE shows the valid
values of <MONTYPE>.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value

by <AID>, being performance monitored. NEND (near
end) refers to PM values obtained at the identified entity.
FEND (far end) refers to PM values obtained at a distant
entity that is connected to the identified entity. All values
will be retrieved if nothing is entered for this parameter.

The parameter defaults to 15-MIN if nothing is entered.
Response Syntax
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
<rspblk>+;
Where <rspblk> has the follow format:

^^^"<AID>[,<AIDTYPE>]:<MONTYPE>,
[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],<THLEV>[,<TMPER>]" <cr> <lf>
NOTE
The normal response must contain at least one occurrence of <rspblk>. It is allowed to contain multiple
<rspblk>s.
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that identifies the equipment unit, facility,
subscriber line, trunk, link, packet link, or signaling link on the NE. This
parameter depends on the command code modifier and what kind of
performance monitoring data is being retrieved.
<AIDTYPE Indicates the type of access identifier.

>
<MONTYP Indicates the type of monitored performance for which a value is requested.
E>
<LOCN> Indicates the location, in reference to the entity identified by <AID>, being
performance monitored. NEND (near end) refers to PM values obtained at the
identified entity. FEND (far end) refers to PM values obtained at a distant
entity that is connected to the identified entity.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of monitoring relative to the entity identified by <AID>.
<DIRN> defaults to BTH, which indicates both directions. The valid values
are TRMT (transmit direction only) and RCV (receive direction only).
<THLEV> Indicates the current threshold level for the monitored parameter.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<TMPER> Indicates the accumulation time period for the PM information.
Example
l Command
RTRV-TH-OC192::CLNT-1-1-1:C::ES-S,NEND,RCV,15-MIN;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 16:05:44
M C COMPLD
"CLNT-1-1-1,OC192:ES-S,NEND,RCV,65,15-MIN"
;
Related Commands
A.19.11 SET-TH-<MOD2>
A.19.11 SET-TH-<MOD2>
Sets the threshold.
Function
This command instructs an NE to set the threshold level for a monitored parameter that, when
exceeded, triggers an automatic message. The threshold level may apply to one or more
equipment units or facilities on the NE.
Usage Note
None
Category
Performance
Security
Provisioning
Command Syntax
SET-TH-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:<AID>:<CTAG>::<MONTYPE>,<THLEV>,[<LOCN>],
[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>];

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Parameters
r Value

l ALL
l EC, EQPT, MCA, OC, OCH, WDM, OMS, OSC, OTS
l FETH, GETH, XGETH, 100GETH
l OC12, OC192, OC3, OC48, OC768
l FC100, FC200, FC400, FC800, FC1200
l ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, ODU5G, ODU0,ODU4,ODUFLEX
l OTU1, OTU2, OTU3, OTU5G, OTU4
l ODU1TCM1, ODU1TCM2, ODU1TCM3, ODU1TCM4,
ODU1TCM5, ODU1TCM6
ODU2TCM5, ODU2TCM6
ODU3TCM5, ODU3TCM6
l ODU5GTCM1, ODU5GTCM2, ODU5GTCM3,
ODU5GTCM4, ODU5GTCM5, ODU5GTCM6
l STM1,STM4,STM16,STM64,STM256,ODU0TCM1,ODU
0TCM2,ODU0TCM3,ODU0TCM4,ODU0TCM5,ODU0T
CM6,3GHDSDI,ANY,ALL,COM,DVBASI,EQPT,ESCO
N,FDDI,FICON,FICON4G,FICON8G,FICONEXP,HDSD
I,IBSDR,IBDDR,ISC1G,ISC2G,MCACHN,OCH,PL,SDI,
WDM
<AID> Indicates the access identifier that identifies the equipment unit, ALL
facility, subscriber line, trunk, link, packet link, or signaling link
on the NE. This parameter depends on the command code
modifier and what kind of performance monitoring data is being
retrieved.
<MONTY Indicates the type of monitored performance for which a value ALL
PE> is requested. All values will be retrieved if nothing is entered for
this parameter.
<THLEV Indicates the desired threshold level to be set for <MONTYPE>. NA

> It should not be null. <THLEV> is the user-defined or system-
specified threshold level if <CONDTYPE> is a threshold
violation. This value should be provided if this alarm report has
resulted from a degradation that has exceeded the defined or
specified threshold level. The valid values are identical in format
to that of the <MONVAL> associated with this alarm report.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

r Value
<LOCN> Indicates the location, in reference to the entity identified by ALL

<AID>, being performance monitored. NEND (near end) refers
to PM values obtained at the identified entity. FEND (far end)
refers to PM values obtained at a distant entity that is connected
to the identified entity. All values will be retrieved if nothing is

identified by <AID>. <DIRN> defaults to BTH, which indicates
both directions. The valid values are TRMT (transmit direction
only) and RCV (receive direction only).
<TMPER Indicates the accumulation time period for the PM information. 15-MIN
> The parameter defaults to 15-MIN if nothing is entered.
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
None
Example
l Command
SET-TH-OCH::FAC-1-1-1:C::LBCMAX,0x100100,NEND,TRMT,15-MIN;
l Response Message
NE 2004-07-08 16:00:01
M C COMPLD
;
Related Commands
A.19.10 RTRV-TH-<MOD2>
A.19.12 RTRV-ATTRTCA-<MOD2>
Retrieve attributes of threshold-crossing alerts (TCA).
Function
This command queries the report mode of performance threshold violation and the alarm
severity.
Usage Note
None

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Category
Alarms and Conditions
Security
Retrieve
Command Syntax
RTRV-ATTRTCA-<MOD2>:[<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],
[<CONDTYPE>],[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>],[<SRVEFF>],[<CONDEFF>];
Command Parameters
Value
<MOD2> Indicates the type of the entity to be provisioned. ALL is NA

an invalid value.
<NTFCNCDE This parameter indicates the alarm severity and it is valid NA

> only when <CONDEFF> is SC. The valid values are CR
(Critical Alarm), MJ(Major Alarm), MN(Minor Alarm),
NA(Ignore) and NR(Not Report).
<CONDTYPE Indicates the notification code that specifies the type of NA

> notification to be generated by an NE upon the occurrence
of the event described in
The parameter is optional.
<LOCN> Indicates the single location for which an alarm condition NA

is being reported and refers to the entity identified by the
AID. NEND (near end) refers to PM values obtained at the
identified entity FEND (far end) refers to PM values
obtained at a distant entity that is connected to the
identified entity. Likewise, LINE[-x] refers to an
intermediate point. All values will be retrieved if nothing
is entered for this parameter.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of the alarm condition and is NA

relative to the entity identified by the AID. All values will
be retrieved if nothing is entered for this parameter.
<TMPER> Indicates the accumulation time period for the PM NA

information if the <CONDTYPE>is in a T-x forma for a
threshold violation. The parameter is optional.
It is reserved for future use and thus must be left blank.
Otherwise "PARAMETER ERROR" will be returned.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Value
<SRVEFF> Indicates whether the alarms impact services. The valid NA

l NSA: The condition does not affect the services.
l SA: The condition affects the services.
A null value is equivalent to ALL.
<CONDEFF> Indicates whether an alarm or event is reported during a NA

performance threshold violation. The valid values are as
follows:
l TC: Reports an event.
l SC: Reports an alarm.
Response Syntax
<cr> <lf> <lf>
<rspblk> + ;
^^^"<AID>[,<AIDTYPE>]:[<NTFCNCDE>],<CONDTYPE>,
[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>][,<SRVEFF>],<CONDEFF>" <cr> <lf>
;
Response Parameters
<AID> Indicates the access identifier.
<NTFCNCDE Indicates the notification code that specifies the type of notification to be
> generated by an NE upon the occurrence of the event described in
<CONDTYPE>.
<CONDTYPE Indicates the type of TCA for which the notification attributes
> (<NTFCNCDE>and <CONDEFF>) are being changed.
<LOCN> Indicates the single location for which an alarm condition is being reported
and refers to the entity identified by the AID. NEND (near end) refers to
PM values obtained at the identified entity. FEND (far end) refers to PM
values obtained at a remote entity that is connected to the identified entity.
Likewise, LINE[-x] refers to an intermediate point.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of the alarm condition and is relative to the entity
identified by the AID.
<TMPER> Indicates the accumulation time period for the PM information if the
<CONDTYPE> is in a T-x format for a threshold violation.
This parameter is invalid at present and is not displayed in the query result.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
<SRVEFF> Indicates whether the alarms impact services. The valid values are as
follows:
l NSA: The condition does not affect the services.
l SA: The condition affects the services.
All values will be retrieved if nothing is entered for this parameter.
<CONDEFF> Indicates whether an alarm or event is reported during a performance

threshold violation. The valid values are as follows:
l TC: Reports an event.
l SC: Reports an alarm.
Example
l Command
RTRV-ATTRTCA-OC48::CLNT-1-3-1-1:1::,T-CV-S,NEND,RCV,,NSA,SC;
l Response Message
NE 2004-11-09 06:27:05
M 1 COMPLD
"CLNT-1-3-1-1,OC48:1:MJ,T-CV-S,NEND,RCV,,NSA,SC"
;
Related Commands
A.19.13 SET-ATTRTCA-<MOD2>
A.19.13 SET-ATTRTCA-<MOD2>
Edits the attributes of threshold-crossing alert (TCA).
Function
This command sets the report mode of performance threshold violation to TC or SC and sets the
alarm severity.
Usage Note
When the report mode of performance threshold violation is set to SC, the alarm severity can
be set and the alarms are reported according to the preset alarm severity.
Category
Alarms and Conditions
Security
Provisioning

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A
Command Syntax
SET-ATTRTCA-<MOD2>: [<TID>]:[<AID>]:<CTAG>::[<NTFCNCDE>],
[<CONDTYPE>],[<LOCN>],[<DIRN>],[<TMPER>],[<SRVEFF>],[<CONDEFF>];
Command Parameters
Value
<MOD2> Indicates the type of the entity to be provisioned. When NA

<MOD2>= ALL, only following command is supported
e.g. SET-ATTRTCA-ALL:::c::SC; This command sets all
TCAs to report as alarms (SC), with severity set to NA.
<NTFCNCDE This parameter indicates the alarm severity and it is valid NA

> only when <CONDEFF> is SC. The valid values are CR
(Critical Alarm), MJ(Major Alarm), MN(Minor Alarm),
NA(Ignore) and NR(Not Report).
<CONDTYPE Indicates the notification code that specifies the type of NA

> notification to be generated by an NE upon the occurrence
of the event described in
The parameter is optional.
<LOCN> Indicates the single location for which an alarm condition NA

is being reported and refers to the entity identified by the
AID. NEND (near end) refers to PM values obtained at the
identified entity. FEND (far end) refers to PM values
obtained at a remote entity that is connected to the
identified entity. Likewise, LINE[-x] refers to an
intermediate point. The parameter is optional.
<DIRN> Indicates the direction of the alarm condition and is NA

relative to the entity identified by the AID. The parameter
is optional.
<TMPER> Indicates the accumulation time period for the PM

OSN 8800 6800A 3800A V100R006C03 Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 8800 6800A 3800A V100R006C03 Installing, Operating and Maintaining Your Network

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 8800/6800A/3800A

Installing, Operating and Maintaining

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C03

OptiX OSN 6800A V100R006C03

OptiX OSN 3800A V100R006C03

iManager U2000 V100R006C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R006C00

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Updates in Issue 03 (2013-6-30) Based on Product Version

Updates for TL1 commands:

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-10-30) Based on Product Version

9 Network l 9.1.2 Expanding NEs of Version V100R005 or Later When

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

8 Parts Replacement l Revised the navigation structure by moving 8 Parts

Whole manual Added information about the TN15LSXL board.

Updates for TL1 commands:

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-08-10) Based on Product Version

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

3 Quick View of l 3.1 Product Appearance and Highlights:

4 Node 4.5 PID: Added PID site configurations.

6 Performing Initial l Modified configuring operations on the Web LCT according to

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

9 Network l Added 9.1 Expanding NEs by Adding Shelves.

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

12 Technical l Added 12.3.5 LOA Specifications.

Updates for TL1 commands:

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

New ED-CFP New interfaces for New interfaces for

ED-40GETH New interfaces for New interfaces for

ED-<ODU4TCMN> New interfaces for New interfaces for

CONN- New interfaces for 100GETH and 40GETH

OPR-LPBK-CFP New interfaces for Client-side optical ports of

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

RTRV- Retrieves the alarm The input optical power

RTRV-PWR This command is used N/A

RTRV-FECER- This command is used N/A

ED-ALMTH-CFP Retrieves the alarm The alarm threshold set for

RMV-CFP The interfaces enable CFP and 40GETH objects

RTRV-FFP-CFP Client 1+1 protection Client 1+1 protection can

RMV-EC Electrical ports Electrical ports support

ED-<HDSDIRBR/ The HDSDIRBR, The HDSDIRBR,

Issue 03 (2013-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

RTRV- CBR10G services are CBR10G services are

Modifie ED-WDM New interfaces for New interfaces for

ED- New interfaces for New interfaces for